Dr, Robert T. Sutherland
Method Oaspey-Otto-Saner
for the Study of modern Languages.
For tbe use of Germans.
sslsche Konv.-Grammatik v. Prof. V. Fuchs. 2. FA
•liliissel z. VU8S. Konv.-Grammatik v. P. Fti< *
,anische Konv,-Grammatik v., C. M. Saner. 4. Ed. clot!
oliliissel z. span. Konv.-Grammatik v. Saner. (N. f. Le
Spanischcs [jesebach v. Saiier-RShricli. cloth. . .
Klt'ino spanische Sprachlehre v. Sauer-Ronge. clotli.
>s castellanos. Span. Gespr ache v. C. M. Saner.
-clio Rectiongliste v. Saner-Kordgien. boards.
iglische Handelskorrespondenz v. H. Arendt. clotl
urze Anleit. zu deutschen, franz., engl. und ItaHen. Lifsr i:atrpf>rie
Kaufleiitc w. Gewothetreibende v. Oberholzer n. Osmond, sc
For the use of Italiaos*
(iierniaii:
ni:urm,atica tedesca di Saner-Ferrari. 4. Ed. c1ol„.
latica tedesca elementare di Dr. E. Otto. 2. 1
, >^ tcdcsche di Dr. E. Otto. 2. Ed. boards. . .
English:
ammatica inglese ai €. M. Saner. ^. i>u. ciuoi
rammatica elementare della lingua inglese dlLuigi !'a\
French :
^ttim^tlca francese di Sanor-Motti.
' Saner-aiotti.
For the use of Spauiards.
: amitica sucinta de la lengua alemar
English:
am^tica «ucint
Gram<1t; franccsa i
For iiie use of Fortiignese and Braziliau es.
(reninanr
for the Study of modern Languages.
For the use ot EngHshmeii ami Au i ericans.
vdv by Dr. E. Otto, 24.^' ^
-a Coav.-Grami-nar by T
to the Germ. Granim. by .u,
Graminar by Dr. E. Otto.
■- by ]>r. E. Otto. 7,P>' '
. ]?art. hv Dr. E. Otto
' [I. part, by Dr. E, Otto. _
rr. 111. part, by Dr. E. Otto. 2. Ed.
nsl. Engl. i. Germ. I. by Dr. E. Ott
. Eiigl. i. Germ. II, by Dr. E, Otto. 2, Ed. ijoiy
r transl Engl. i. Germ, by Dr. E. Otto . 9. E'L boa
.nglibh. Conversations by Dr. E. Otto. 2.F
- of the German language hy Otlo-Wriaf
French:
.^nn' . ,^- .!-rvr,imar by Dr. E. Otto, i:., ,... . . .
i Jon vers. -Grain mp.!.- bv Dr. E. Otto. 5. Ed.
;. Engl. 1. Frenca by Dr. E. nttfK i. Ed.
lentary French Grammar by Dr. T. ''*
boards,
6. Ed.
■^i;
SJ>ftn?^^l^
•Grammar by CM. Saiior. 5, Ed. ci
lian CoD"- '^- ---•-—•"'•, ^' Sauci;* .-.
J by 0. Ji. SiiUCi*. 'LUd. '■■■■
.^.-Grammar by t\ M, Sauer.
For the use of Hxr.eimicii:
^ par Dr. E. Otto. 13. Ed. clot
de la Gram, allem. par Dr. E. Ot^
allnraaBde par Dr, E. Otto. 6.
es. I. x>artie. par Dr. E« Otto. ':?
■OS. II. ijartie. par Dr. E. Otto. 2.]v-:
.ies. TIT. par+ie.. p;-^r Dr. E. Otto„ 2, 1
aliemaiv.' Otto. 3.
par Dr, A, Mauron. 6. Ed. ciofch.
de la Gram. angl. par Dr. A. Ms iiroji . 2.E<^
anglaise par Dr. A. Maur< '
par Dr. A. Wa.TTTOt?, 2. Ed
ues tfte-n.'-
.JuLnjs Gnoi'
Extract
from (he literary Review (literarisclie
Rundschau) of J. B. Stamniinger
at Wurzburg.
Educational Works and Class-books
for tlie Study of modern Languages,
published by
Julius Oroos at Heidelberg.
Julius Groos, Publisher at Heidelberg, has
for the last thirty years been devoting his special atten-
tion to educational tvorhs on modern languages, and has
published a large number of class-boohs for the study
of those modern languages most generally spohen. In
this particular department he is in our opinion unsur-
passed by any other German publisher. The series con-
sists of 65 volumes of different sizes which are all arran-
ged on the same system, as is easily seen by a glance
at the grammars which so closely resemble one another,
that an acquaintance ivith one greatly facilitates the study
of another. — This is no small advantage in these exac-
ting times, when the knowledge of one language is hardly
deemed sufficient.
TJie system referred to is easily discoverable: 1st. In
the arrangement of the grammar — 2nd. In the endeavour
to enable the pupil to understand a regular text as soon
as possible, and above all to teach him to s^yeaU the
foreign language; this latter point tvas considered by the
authors so particularly characteristic of their works, that
they have styled them — to distinguish them from other
works of a similar kind — Conversational Gram-
mat's.
The grammars are all divided into two parts,
commencing with a systematic explanation of the rides
for pronunciation^ and are again subdivided into a number
of Lessons, Each Part treats of the Parts of Speech
in succession, the 1st. giving a rapid sketch of the
fundamental rules, which are explained more fully in
the 2nd. In the 1st. Part attention is given rather to
the JStymologj/; in the 2nd. Part more to the Syntax
of the language; without however entirely separating the
two, as is generally the case in Systematic Granifnars.
The rules appear to us to be clearly given, they are
explained by examples, & the exercises are amply suf-
ficient. — We must confess that for those persons who,
from a practical point of view, wish to learn a
foreign language sufficiently well to enable them to
write & speaU it tvith ease, the autlwrs have set
down the grammatical rules in such a way, that it is
equally easy to unterstand & to learn them. —
Moreover we cannot but commend the elegance ci;
neatness of the type & Mnuling of the books. It
is doubtless on this account that these volumes have been
received with so much favour & that several liave reached
such an extensive circidation.
Our admiration of this rich collection of works, of
the method displayed & the fertile genius of certain of
the authors, is increased when ive examine the different
series, especially those intended for the use of foreigners.
The first series comprises manuals for the use of
Englishfnen. It consists of 19 volumes, 15 of which
are adapted for the study of German and French:
Dr. E. Otto, German Conversation -Grammar, and Key
to it;
Dr. E. Otto, Supplementary exercises to the German
Grammar;
Dr. E. Otto, Elementary German Grammar;
Dr. E. Otto, First German Book;
Dr. E. Otto, German Reader, 3 vols.;
Dr. E. Otto, Materials for translating English into Ger-
man, 2 vols, and Keys;
Dr. E. Otto, German Conversations;
Dr. E. Otto, French Conversation -Grammar, and Key
to it;
Dr. E. Otto, Materials for transl. English into French;
C. M. Saner, Italian Conversation-Grammar, and Key;
C. M. Sauer, Spanish Grammar, and Key.
The series for the use of Frenchmen comprises
17 volumes, 7 of which adapted for the study of Ger-
man:
Dr. E. Otto, Grammaire allemande, and Key to it;
Dr. E. Otto, Petite Grammaire allemande;
Dr. E, Otto, Lectures allemandes, 3 vols.;
Dr. E. Otto, Conversations allemandes;
4 adapted for the study of English:
Mauron-Gaspey, Nouvelle Grammaire anglaise, and Key;
Dr. A. Mauron, Petite Grammaire anglaise;
Dr. A. Mauroii, Lectures anglaises;
tivo each adapted for the study of Italian^
SpanisJi , It iiss ian :
C. M. Sauer, Nouvelle Grammaire italienne, and Key;
C. M. Saner, Grammaire espagnole, and Key;
Paul Fuchs, Grammaire russe, and Key.
The series for Italians comprises 4 vols, (one
for the English 9 and 3 for .the German language):
C. M. Sauer, Grammatica inglese;
Sauer-Ferrari, Grammatica tedesca;
Dr. E. Otto, Piccola grammatica tedesca;
Dr. E. Otto, Letture tedesche.
There are three volumes for the use of Spaniards:
Dr. E. Otto, Gramdtica sucinta de la lengua alemana.
Dr. E. Otto, Gram^tica sucinta de la lengua francesa.
Dr. E. Otto, Gramdtica sucinta de la lengua inglesa.
The series for the use of Germans comprises tJie
French subdivision tvith the follotving books:
Dr. E. Otto, Franz. Konversat.-Grammatik;
Dr. E. Otto, Franz. Konversat.-Lesebuch, in 2 parts;
Dr. E. Otto, Franz. Konversat.-Lesebuch (for the spec,
use of Schools for young ladies, in 2 parts);
Dr. E. Otto, Kleine franzosische Sprachlehre;
Dr. E. Otto, Conversations fran^aises;
the BiHflish subdivision comprises:
Dr. Til. (iaspey, Englische Konversations-Grammatikj
Dr. Th. (laspey, Englisches Konversations-Lesebuch;
Dr. Th. Tiaspey, English Conversations, containing
subjects taken from daily life, & ex-
tracts from history and literature;
Dr. E. Otto, Kleine englische Sprachlehrej
Dr. E. Otto, Materialien zum tJbersetzen ins Eng-
lische for proficients (short pieces of con-
secutive prose, with conversational exer-
cises).
the Italian subdivision comprises:
C. M. Sauer, Italienische Konversations-Grammatik;
C. M. Sauer, Italienisches Konvers.-Lesebuch, which
chiefly aims at conversational language;
C. M. Sauer, Kleine italienische Sprachlehrej
C. M. Sauer, Dialoghi italiani, adapted not only for
schools, but also for persons who in-
tend to travel in Italy;
in the Spanish subdivision ive have:
C. M. Sauer, Spanische Konversations-Grammatik 5
G. M. Sauer, Dialogos castellanos;
in the Portiigeese subdivision:
G. C. Kordgien, Kleine Portugiesische Sprachlehre;
in the Dutch subdivision:
Dr. C. V. Reinhardstottner, HoUandische Konversations-
Grammatik;
in the Hussian subdivision:
Paul Fuchs, Russische Konversations-Grammatik.
The worJis of Dr. L, Supfle, edited by the same
publisher, do not follow the conversational method.
The y^Fran^osische Schnlgrammatik^^, for loiver
and middle Classes , a work answering both for scientific
and practical purposes, though perhaps somewhat too
bulky for the above-mentioned classes, contains very good
exercises, and may also be useful for reference. The
ffLesebuch^^ (^or French Reader), and especially the
ffClirestomathie^^f for upper Glasses, contain careful
selections, of pieces of prose and poetry, from the diffe-
rent periods of French literature.
(These three worJiS have been revised and enlarged
by Professor Dr. Mauron^ wJw joined to the last
a f, Resume (Compendium) de VHistoire de la
lAtterature fran^aise^^, and a f^JPetit Traite
de la Versification fran^aise^^, that enhance its
value.)
The „Engl, Chrestomathie^' of Br. L, Supfle
is a very good companion to the French one.
In these works the chief difficulty under which
several of the authors have labored, has been the neces-
sity of teaching a language in a foreign idiom; not to
mention the peculiar difficulties which the German idiom
offers in ivriting school-boohs for the study of that lan-
guage.
We willingly testify that the whole collection gives
proof of much care & industry, both with regard to the
aims it has in view & the way in ivhich these liave
been carried out, & moreover reflects great credit on the
editor, this collection being in reality quite an excep-
tional thing of its kind. —
Paderbom 1881. ..../.
The Publisher is unweariedly engaged in extending
the range of the educational worlcs issuing from his press;
a certain number of new hoohs are now in course of
preparation.
Printed by Julius Groos at Heidelberg.
GERMAN
CONVERSATION-GRAMMAR
NEW AND PRACTICAL METHOD OF LEARNING THE
GERMAN LANGUAGE
BY
D" EMIL OTTO,
PROFESSOR OF MODERN LANGUAGES AND LECTURER AT THE UNIVERSIT'V
OF HEIDELBERG, AUTHOR OF THE 'FRENCH CONVERSATION
GRAMMAR' AND SOME OTHER CLASS-BOOKS.
TWENTY-FOURTH EDITION.
LONDON,
DAVID NUTT, 270 Strand.
DULAU & Co., 37 Soho Square.
SAMPS. LOW & Co., St. Dunstan's House, Fetter Lane, Fleet Street.
AGENCIES FOR AMERICA:
NEW YORK. CHICAGO.
OTEIGER E. & Co.. MtJHLBAUER & BEHRLE,
25 Park Place. *^ ^* ^^^'^ ^'^^■
THE INTERNATIONAL BOSTON.
NEWS COMPANY. CHARLES SCHONHOF
29 and 31 Beekman Street- 144 Tremont Street.
HEIDELBERG.
JULIUS GROOS.
1888.
/)M t, Uir-
The method of Gaspey-Otto-Sauer is my own private property,
having been acquired by purchase from the authors. The text-books
made after this method are incessantly improved. All rights, espe-
cially the right of making new editions, and the right of translation
for all languages, are reserved. Imitations and fraudulent impres-
sions will be prosecuted according to law. I am thankful for com-
munications relating to these matters.
Heidelberg. Julius Cri'oos.
077
7 I^S
Preface to the first edition.
Within the last few years, the study of the German
language in England has become so universal, that the
appearance of another German grammar in addition to
the comparatively few that have hitherto been pubhshed,
will scarcely excite surprise, especially as the book mostly
in use with the English student, viz: 'Ollendorff's New
Method of learning German', is in reality no grammar,
but only a book of exercises, affording the pupil no system-
atic and connected view of the grammatical rules, neces-
sarily to be observed in German. The difficulties of the
language are not removed by Ollendorff's Exercises, they
are simply avoided. However a mere grammar, i. e. an
assemblage of grammatical rules, without practical appli-
cation, is equally unfitted to satisfy the pupil desirous
not only of comprehending and reading, but also of
writing and speaking the language. The present 'German
Grammar' will conduce to the attainment of all these
objects. It is based on the so-called Conversational Method,
first applied by the author of this book in his 'French
Conversation-Grammar', which work has met with great
success in Germany, and has distinctly shown that this
method is the easiest, quickest, and the best calculated to
assist the pupil in overcoming the difficulties of a language.
f^ #^«%wiur^rtt
rV Preface to the first edition.
This ^German ConverscUicm-Grammar combines the
grammatical and logical exposition of the German language
with the constant application of the different forms and
rules to writing and speaking.
The book is divided into Lessons, each complete in
itself, and containing in systematic arrangement a portion
of the grammar, followed by a German Reading exercise
in which the different forms are applied the whole sen-
tences. An Exercise for translation into German comes
next: the lesson being concluded by an easy and familiar
Conversation, re-embodying the matter introduced in the
previous exercises.
It is impossible to conceive a more practical me-
thod of acquiring the art of speaking German, than
for the pupil to be questioned in German by his teacher
on subjects already familiar to him by translation, and
then to endeavour to give a fitting reply. In a short
time the ear becomes so familiarized with the strange
accents, that the teacher is understood, the tongue at the
same time acquiring a fluency, to be attained by none of
the other methods. The author's practical experience in
teaching his mother-tongue to foreigners, warrants him
fully in making this assertion.
The advantage of conversational exercises is evident.
Whoever has occupied himself with the study of modern
languages, is aware that by far the most difficult thing
is, to comprehend the foreign idiom. Accustomed from
the very beginning to understand the easy questions the
teacher addresses to him in German, and to answer in
the same language on subjects already known to him
from the foregoing Reading exercise and translation, the
Preface to the first edition. V
learner exercises equally his ear and tongue, and will in
a short time be enabled to express his thoughts fluently
and correctly in the foreign idiom.
The book is divided into two Parts or Courses; the
First Part contains the complete Etymology, that is, the
ten parts of speech, considered in their nature and in-
flections, including the irregular verbs, with only the
plainest syntactical rules requisite for translating the
exercises.
The Second Part contains the complete Syntax and
the more difficult and idiomatical parts of the grammar.
This part, as the most essential, has been systematically
explained in clear and accurate rules, all of which are
illustrated by the necessary examples, and followed by
fitting Exercises and German Reading-lessons, both with
the requisite words. Free Exercises, Materials for conver-
sation and a few German dialogues conclude the Grammar.
Lastly, a few Specimens of German poetical literature,
some of which may be advantageously coramited to
memory, are introduced in the 'Appendix'.
In respect to the mode of employing this Grammar, the
author begs that he may be allowed to offer teachers and
pupils a few suggestions. The rules with their examples
and the 'Words' should be first learned by heart, and
the German 'Reading Exercise' read and translated into
EngHsh. This done, the ^Conversation' should be read,
then the Exercise for translation (^ufgabe) put into Ger-
man and, when corrected, written out fairly and gone
through again. Finally the 'Conversation' should be read
or committed to memory. The pupil may commence
VI Preface to the iBrst edition.
with the Reading lessons and with the easier poems in
the 'Appendix' as soon as the teacher considers him
sufficiently advanced even though he should not have
gone through the whole of the first Part.
Heidelberg, September 1856.
m- EMIL OTTO.
Preface to the eighteenth, nineteenth and
twentieth editions.
The method followed in this grammar*) and the im-
provements made in the preceding editions having been
so much approved by the public as to cause it to be
adopted by many schools and private families, as ^the best
German Grammar' and ^one of the most useful class-
books', the author as well as the publisher have spared
no trouble to make it as perfect as possible. They flatter
themselves that by this new edition, carefully revised and
more elegantly printed, it will be found more deserving
of the increasing patronage it has hitherto experienced,
and they trust that it will materially contribute towards
promoting the study of the German language in England
and America.
The author takes this accasion to inform those who
wish to learn German that he has written also a smaller
grammar, entitled: 'An elementary Grammar of the Ger-
man language, combined with Exercises, Readings and
Conversations (price only two marks) which retains exactly
the same method as this larger one, and is destined for
first beginners. Further also in connection with it an-
other little book which is much needed: viz. ^German-
*) Explained in the Preface to the first edition.
VIII Preface to the eighteenth, nineteenth and twentieth editions.
JEhiglish Conversation. A tiew methodical
guide for learning to speak German^.
He begs leave to mention also that he has recently-
published: Supplementary Exercises to the German
Grammar and further two little volumes: ^Materials for
translating English into German with grammatical
notes and a Vocabulary, firstf) and second Part, intended
for proficient learners. V^hen they have gone through the
grammar, the use of these little works will certainly prove
useful in giving them a greater facility not only in writing
but also in speaking German correctly.
A Key, containing the translations of the English
Exercises into German, the necessary notes and trans-
lations of the pieces of German literature contained in
the 'Appendix', and some specimens of German letter-
writing, has been publishedf f ) for the convenience of those
who are unable to procure an efficient teacher. The new
edition of it exactly agrees with this edition of the Grammar.
Further the author begs leave to say, that he has published
a 'First German Book'*) for the use of younger pupils
who are to acquire a slight practical knowledge of the
elements of the German language, before commencing a
regular grammatical course; likewise a German Reader
the first part of which contains: Easy Readings^ fables^
little stories etc., the second: Select Reading in Ger-
man literature; the third: German plays, each with
notes and a Vocabulary, all three in new editions.
Heidelberg, March 1878.
W' EMIL OTTO.
t) 5th edition 1882. — ft) 15th ed. 1882. — *) 7th ed. 1887.
Preface to the Twenty-second Edition.
Referring the student of this grammar to the con-
tents of the Prefaces to the First, Eighteenth, Nineteenth
and Twentieth editions, we may state that the present
Edition has been most carefully revised, corrected and
in every essential way amended by Herr Prof. Dr. S,
Muller of Heidelberg.
A careful observer, on comparing this edition with
the foregoing, will soon notice that not only the new
Orthography, adopted in the meanwhile by all the Ger-
man governments, has been introduced, but also that
many other useful and more or less important corrections
and additions have been made.
A resume of the Accidence will appear as an Appen-
dix, in the hope that it may prove useful to those who
wish to revise quickly the Accidence as given in Part I.
Heidelbegr, July 1886.
The Editor.
Corrections.
Page 32 near bottom of page for foil read fool.
» 52 omit note 2.
» 57 bottom of page omit "in which words the final e is only
added for euphony."
» 60 3rd line from bottom for wen read when.
» 120 5*i» line from bottom for feeble read weak.
Extract
from "Rochester Daily Union'
Heidelberg, Germany.
To the American Student coming to Germany.
One of the most difficult questions for the American
student to get properly answered, when he is about to
start for Europe for purposes of study is, where to find
the best place to set himself to work. Many waste a
good part of their time before they find they have not
been properly advised on this point. It makes a vast
difference where the student of German pursues his studies,
not only as to the purity of the language spoken, but
as to the ability of those who lecture on the topics he
may wish to hear ....
It is a singular fact, but an undeuiable one, that the
most difficult thing to find in Germany is a good teacher
of the German language. The want of a good system
of text books, and the fact of having been instructed
orally, and by lectures, renders the native German teacher
incapable of following a system of instruction that the
better disciplined mind of the American student demands.
It must not be supposed that German teachers are
deficient in knowledge. On the contrary their attainments
XII Extract.
are a matter of wonder. They speak several foreign
languages with as much ease and fluency as their own.
But they acquire languages much more readily than the
American student, and therefore fail to comprehend the
difficulties which a foreigner finds in their own. They
almost invariably use English and French methods in teach-
ing their own language, and these do not meet the neces-
sities of the case. I have often had occasion to remark
that, until some German linguist took the trouble to put
himself in the position of the English scholar, and to
comprehend the difficulties, which the German language
presents to the foreigner, well enough to perfect a system
of instruction adopted to the case, the correct comprehen-
sion of the spirit and letter of the German would be the
lot of a very small proportion of those who study it.
Woodbury's method, which is mostly used in America, is
found to be very faulty, when any one tries to use what
they have learned from it in intercourse with Germans.
The German is not pure, and many of the classifications
are wholly incorrect, therefore half the time spent in
learning it, is wasted. Ahn's method is better German,
but it is neither systematically nor progressively arranged.
Having been perplexed by the defects of the various sys-
tems and text books in use for the English pupils, and
the want of systematic and thorough teachers, it has been
a source of great satisfaction to have found here at the
University of Heidelberg, in the person of one of the
professors. Dr. Otto, a teacher who has comprehended and
solved satisfactorily the difficulties which his own language
presents to the foreigner. He has been a close student
of languages, and has not only made many interesting
discoveries in German, and originated a most useful sys-
tem of classification of words, but he has so clearly
Extract. XIII
comprehended the spirit of the English language as to be
able to adapt his discoveries and classifications successfully
to it.
As a result of his researches and studies he has pub-
lished a grammar*) for the English student, which, in
my opinion, is better than any heretofore published
in Europe or America; and I earnestly recommend it
to all who wish to learn German. Twelve months' trial
with other Teachers and systems, added to my own expe-
rience in teaching, may justify me in speaking on thi
point with more assurance than I otherwise would.
My conviction is that the student will do better to
spend his first four or six months in the beautiful town
of Heidelberg. No teacher whom I have found, can take
him on so understandingly and so fast as Dr. Otto. His
systematic application of the rules and principles of his
superior grammar^ and his extensive acquaintance with
German literature and German history render his instruc-
tions invaluable to the student of German
Prof. Peck.
*) The full title is: German Conversation-Grrammar. A new
and practical method of learning the German language by Dr. Emil
Otto, Prof, of modern languages and Lecturer at the University
of Heidelberg. 22nd Edition. Published by Julius Groos,
Heidelberg.
CONTENTS.
First Part. — Etymology.
On pronunciation. Letters of the Alphabet .
Pronunciation of the vowels
Pronunciation of the consonants
On the Accent ....
Reading Exercises
Parts of speech ....
1. Lesson. On the definite Article .
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
On the indefinite Article
Declension of substantives
First declension
Second declension .
Third declension .
Feminine substantives. Fourth declension
Neuter substantives. Fifth declension
Nouns with prepositions .
Irregularities in the formation of the plural
On the Genders of Substantives
Declension of Proper (Personal) Names
Proper names of countries, cities &c.
Determinative Adjectives
Auxiliary verbs. §aben. The construe
lion of a sentence in German .
Second auxiliary, ©ein
Third auxiliary. 2Berben
The Modal auxiliaries
On the Adjective
Degrees of comparison
Page
3
4
7
12
15
18
20
23
25
27
31
34
38
42
45
49
56
62
67
71
77
82
85
88
96
105
XVI
Contents.
20. Lesson. On the Numerals
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
82.
33.
34.
35.
The Verb ....
Eegular or modern verbs
Reading-lesson: Sfop
Passive Voice ....
On the Personal pronouns
Interrogative pronouns .
Demonstrative pronouns .
Possessive pronouns
Relative pronouns .
Correlative pronouns
Reading-lesson: @in teurer ^op^ unb ein
rao^Ifciler
Indefinite pronouns ....
Irregular Verbs (ancient form)
First Conjugation (Imperf. with a) .
Reading-lesson: ^er J^ungrigc 5lraber
Second Conjugation (Imperf. with i or ie)
Reading-lesson: ^o§jiu§fo§ ^ferb
Third Conjugation (Imperf. with o)
Reading-lesson : ®ic ©rfinbung bc§ ©lofc^
Fourth Conjugation (Imperf. with u)
An alphabetical list of all the Irregular
Verbs ....
Inseparable Verbs .
Separable Verbs
Compound separable particles .
Separable and inseparable Verbs
Reading-lesson: $Dcr @irof(o=2Binb
Neuter and Intransitive Verbs
Impersonal Verbs ...
Reading-lesson: ®ie 93icnc unb bic Xauht
Reflective Verbs
On the Adverbs
Reading-lesson: ^er banfbarc Sdme
Contents.
XVII
36. Lesson. On the Conjunctions ....
Subordinative Conjunctions
37. „ On the Prepositions . . . .
Reading-lesson: S)n§ jerbrod^cne §ufeifen
On the Interjections ....
Promiscuous Exercises for Translation and Conversa-
tion. I
Page
245
248
259
266
267
268
Second Part. — Syntax.
38. Lesson. Special use of the Article
Reading-lesson: %a^ boppelte SSerbred^cn
39. „ Remarks on the Genitive of Substantives
Reading-lesson: 5lIfon§ V.
40. „ On the Modal Auxiliaries
Reading-lesson: ^ic |ecf)§ SGBortlein
41. „ Remarks on the use of Pronouns .
Reading-lesson: ^piftet
42. „ Use of the Tenses of the Indicative Mood
Reading-lesson: ^,inige ^ixQt au§ bem Sebcn
§einric^§ IV. ...
43. „ On the Subjunctive Mood
Reading-lesson: ®ie gepriiftc %xcm
44. „ On the Infinitive ....
Reading-lesson: ®ie gepriif te Slreue (©d^Iu^
45. „ On the Participle Present
Reading-lesson: ^inblii^e fiiebe
46. „ On the Participle Past .
On the Future Participle
Reading-lesson: '2)er 3}ianntnit ber eiferncn
ma^u
47. „ Remarks on the Adjectives
Adjectives which govern the Accusative
Adjectives which govern the Dative
Adjectives which govern the Genitive
279
285
287
291
292
300
300
307
308
311
313
321
322
327
328
333
335
336
337
339
339
339
341
XVIII
Contents.
49
50
Adjectives with Prepositions .
Adjectives with a complement
Reading-lesson: ®cr Wann mit bcr ci)cr=
nen ma^k (ed;lu6) ....
48. „ On the Government of Verbs .
I. Verbs which in German govern the
Nominative .....
II. Verbs which in German govern the
Dative
III. Verbs which in German govern the
Genitive
IV. Verbs governing certain prepositions
Reading-lesson : ©bclmiitigc ^rcunbfd^aft bc§
beutWen ^aifcr§ ^arl§ V.
„ Remarks on the Prepositions .
Reading-lesson: 2u!a§ ^ranad^
„ On Construction ....
On the principal or simple sentence
Reading-lesson: ®cr ebic Offtjicr .
On the Inversion
Accessory sentences
Reading-lesson: ®er cble Ofpjicr (Sortf.)
51. „ On the compound sentence
Co-ordinate compound sentences
Compound sentences with subordinate
clauses
Reading lesson: ®er eble Offijicr {^//!..:,<^^^.
yyj
^/J. /
a^
/ -^
, — »y --— I'-T- ^
' ?y
/
'^g^ds^rs^:.
^2t^23S^ars:.:^£^^:g^iti/
/, A . J. / , -^ . 6-. 7, /. //. r.
Part I.
ETYMOLOGY
comprehending
the elements of the language.
OTTO, German Conv. -Grammar.
On Pronunciation.
Letters of the
Alpha
bet.
The German Alphabet consists of 26 letters, which
are represented
as follows:
Characters.
Name.
Dliavacters.
Name.
% a = a
ah*)(au).
91,
n = n
enn.
^, B = b
bey.
D,
=
6.
e, c = c
tsey.
^.
^ = P
pey.
T), D = d
dey.
o.
q = q
koo.***)
(5, e = e
ey.
9^,
r = r
airr.
g. f = f
eff.
@,
f, ^ = s
ess.
<^^ 9 = g
gay.
%,
t = t
tey.
§, ^ = h
hah.*)
u,
U = u
00.***)
ee.
33,
» = V
fow (fouj.f)
3^ i = j
yot.**)
s»,
iU =r W
vey.
t, ! = k
kah.*)
^,
^* -= X
iks.
8, t == 1
ell.
%
t? =--y
ypsilon.
5m, m = m
em.
3.
5 = Z
tset.
Of these,
a, c, t, 0,
U, t)
are simple
vowels , the
others are simp"
e consonar
its.
Besides these, there .
ire in German double vowels^
modi/led vowels,
diphthong^
? and
compound consonants:
Doubl
e vowels.
5la, aa
- ee
—
00.
Modifi<
3d vowels.
S, a, or 2le. D, o
, or
De. li, ii
, or Ue.
Dipl
ithongs.
5lt, at.
©,
et.
(5ii,
eu.
2lu, au.
(Si?,
ei).
tu,
', c^, ch. — c^« = X. ©p, fp, sp.
©c^>, fc^, sh. — (f = ck. — ff, 6, ss. ©t, ft, St.
ClU, qu, qu. — ng = ng. — ^ = tz. X^, t^ = t.
Several of these letters are very much alike; we
therefore recommend them to the attention of begin-
ners, as they may easily be confounded with each
other. To prevent such mistakes, we give them here:
S and !!8; a and ©; '01, 91 and ^; D and Cl.
h and f); f and f; t) and ^; t and j.
Pronunciation of the vowels.
1. Simple and double vowels.
% a.
5(, a has always the same sound, and is pronounced
like a in the English \vox{i%\ farthing , father, are; never
like a in ball^ or ?iame ox hat, Ex.: ab*j, l^at ^Oi*^t, 2lf»fe,
2Jiaim, i8ab, (a-ben.
5(a, ac is pronounced in the same manner, but longer :
SlaS, §aar, ©aal.
@, e.
@, C has three different sounds, the two first of
which may be either long or short.
1) The broad c is like a in the English word share:
fccr, votx, tuert, ©dj^ii^ert, 'OJhl}! ; — short as in the word
ahell: ^cl(, fceiui, loeuii, Gnb, (5nte, itelb.
2) The acute c sounds like the French e and the ey
in the words they, grey or in hate^ as: e6*cn, S'ie^, ge^t,
te^vt, (5*fc( (in the first syllable). This is also the sound
of the double cc, as: ijeer, 'iDher, ilaf^fce, ®ee.
When the c is followed by two consonants or a
double one, it is considered to be short ; this being the
case with all the vowels. — **)
3) c at the end of a word or in an unaccented
prefix or final syllable, is very short and has rather on
obtuse sound nearly like a short b: H'-il, ©ed(f, ^\Xl,
Gtell?, ftell^ii, UW, mxzm, b?sal?Uu :c.
*) The consonants used in connection with these vowels are
pronounced as in English.
*♦) The only exception is, when in conjugation, after a single
consonant, an e has been dropped before the t or ft of the termi-
nation, p. e, bu tebft, er Icbt, bu labfl, cr labt.
of the vowels. 5
%i
3, t has only one sound, the same as injleld, sister,
milk, never like i in zaise, as : in, im, tm^mer, mtr, St^^^e,
mt(b, %X]d), Slint) 2C. — This vowel appears in some w^ords
lengthened by e mute after it, as injleld: bte = dee,
l;ter (here), mx (four), Sie4e, Sten, X)teb, bie^er.
In some words however the letter t belongs to the
first syllable and e to the following; in this case t and c
are of course pronounced separately : (S^a^nten = @^a=
m^cii, !^t(te = !^i4^c (three syllables). — This does not
take place in the final syllable of foreign words, where
the accent falls on the last syllable : S^Telobt' e = me-
lodee; ^armont'e.
3, i is also made long by the insertion of ^ mute,
in the following personal and possessive pronouns with
their derivatives: pers. i^m, \i)X, iijn , ii}xm\, 3()ueu;
possess. tl;r, i^re, t^r, bcr, bte, ba§ ilinge, 3I)rtge.
Of 0.
Of when long, has the sound of the o in the Eng-
lish words sto7ie, alone: D^feu, §of, iBobeu, 9^o^r, $Rofe, (o^.
When followed by two consonants, it is short and sounds
nearly like the English o in of', loss: ®ott, tommeu, fell,
off en. — Double o (oo) is always long and has the first
sound 6 : ^Dtoo§ = mose, ^D^oor (Sum^^f laut) = more, ^oot.
Uf tt sounds in long syllables like the English u in
rule, soup, or the oo in food: Sbixit, §ut, uuu, 9^u^e, ru^feu;
a little shorter, when followed by two consonants, as in
full or good: 9M(, S3mib, iputb, ^UUD. — Double u does
not occur.
^, t) appears as a simple vowel only in foreign words,
where its sound does not differ from that of the i, as
(Sl)*^ern, Sl)=|ia^ 2C. — Preceded by c, it will be mentioned
with the diphtongs. The German ^ is never used as a
consonant.
2. Modified vowels.
The vowels a, b, ii are properly speaking simple ones
as well, as the foregoing ; but as a peculiar charactej- for
them is wanting , they are represented as modified a , o
5 Diphthongs.
and us, and printed with a small c above, as •. * ' or
(i, 0, ii. At the beginninj^ of words the capital letters,
are either modified with two dots or followed by the e,
as: 3i, or 5lc, D, Cc, U, Ue» — In writing, the c over the
small letters has long since been corrupted into two dots,
as df b, ii, which has now also obtained in printing.
^, a or 2tc.
The sound of this vowel, when long, is nearly the
same as in fair (the French^ , as: ^'ii^fe, grd^men, ^d^ter,
iDd^leu. — When short, the sound becomes rather slender,
as in fell, as: gd(4e, kaitz, iBdlte, §dnce, 3(pfe( or ilepfel.
£)f i) or Cc»
When sharp, this vowel approaches the English sound
in murderer ; it is very like the French eu in aeul or
Jeune, as: §ot(c, of=ter, (^ot^ter, fonneu. — When long, there
is no sound answering to it in the English language;
the nearest to it is perhaps />?7y/, heard etc.; it resembles
the French eu in feu, as: Dfen or Oefeu, £'o^4er, §c^lc,
ii, ii or Uc.
The English have nothing corresponding to this sound.
It is exactly the French u in russe, aur etc., as : iiber, fiir,
libel or Uebet, §ute, ful)^ren, fiilien.
3. Diphthongs.
Sit, at. Slit, au. silt, hx or Slcu.
Sli , which occurs only in a few substantives, is pro-
nounced almost like the Englisch i or y infire, sky, but a
little broader, the a predominating: i^ai-jer, 2Bai»fe, §atn,
at) is no longer used in German, except in a few-
proper names.
S(it, like the ou in house, soufid , as: ^cin^ , au^, auf,
SSaum, 'Jiaiim, v3lau4>cn, faiil.
Silt, riu resembles somcivhat the English oyinboy;
but whilst here the o predominates, in the German an
the a is more heard; again the second half is not so
open as t, but more like the il (French w), as: $du*{cr,
^du*me, ttdu^meu, ii3rdute (as if spelled ipdiijer, i^dmite).
Consonants. 7
@t, ei (e^),
(Si has always the sound of the English i in ?mnd,
as: metn, bein, ^etn, fletn, 9^ei=me, ^etlen, (ii, (Ster.*)
e^ was formerly used instead of ei at the end of words,
and in order to distinguish the two different words of
the same sound: fettl (his) and fet)n [to be). This practice
is now abolished, and all German words having the sound
of ci in any one of their syllables are now written with
ct, as: einer4et, (St, dkx, bet, bet4egen. —
(SUf cu»
^Uf CU has in fact the same sound now as aUf whilst
formerly the latter one was somewhat broader; it is not
quite so broad as the English oe, as: im\, Seute, ^^l\t^, tteu.
Pronunciation of the consonants.
1. Simple consonants.
SB , h and 2) , b , as in English ; but when they end a
word or even a syllable followed by another consonant,
they are somewhat harder and approach the sound of
p andt: iBall, iBtrue, breit, ab, ®rab, (5(=be, ab^egeu ; X)amm,
Der, milb, Zah'Ux, ^inb4etn, 5lbenb.
^f C. This letter by itself, appears only in foreign
words and is pronounced , before d^ t^ I and t) , like ts
fthe same as ^), as: ^d=fat, (Seber, (Sttrone, (5l)^ern; —
before the other vowels and consonants, hard like f^ as:
SattUna, (Sato, (Sorte.v (Staubiu^, (S(o(ta. In many words
formerly written with 6^ or c we are now writing ^ or f
and 5, as: ^ou^ert, ^o(n, ^ultur inst. of (Soncert, (Si3In,
€u(tur jc.
5, f; fi, I; m, nt; 91, n; $, ^; 2:, t and H, j are
quite the same as in English, as: fin^ben, auf, 5lffe, fret;
^tebe, tobeti, fallen, fiet, galfc; SJlann, tnir, tm, ^aittmer,
ntmmt; Slafet, Sraum, :33ett, betreffen; 3^ai)er, %it, (S^'empel.
t in words ending in ion , which are taken from the
Latin, sounds like 5 [ts)^ according to our pronunciation
of this language, as: Se!tton = Se!*5iou, "portion = $or5tou,
Station, (Emigration etc.
*) This diphthong ci is not to be confounded with ic (long t)
which is not a diphthong (see p. 4, i). Compare the two words :
bciitett and bteneit (= binen); 2Bctn [wine] andSBten [Vienna).
g Consonants.
Q^f g ought always to have the hard sound like the
English g in garden^ glad^ pig, as: ®ar4en, %tht\\, gcc^en,
®la^, ^"tageif, gtac^ge, Scrg, genug; except in words ending
in the unaccented final syllable ig, and their derivatives^
where it sounds like tc^ , as: ^enig (= ^oiii^), gtfttg
(= giftic^), giitig, iDcntg, fonigtid;, rehugeu.
It must however he mentioned, that in a part of
Germany the g after each vowel is pronounced soft, sound-
ing like 6) see that letter p. 8): (egeu = (eed;en, iiiage
= i^aa*d;e, geiutg = genud), §etbe(berg = §ette(*ber^.
Yet this is by no ways recommendable.
g with an n before it (itg) see p. 9.
^f ^f at the beginning of words , is aspirated as in
English or even more: ^aben, 5^c(fc, J^ort, I)oren, §ut,
^unDert. — Between two vowels the aspiration is so slight
as to be scarcely heard: §o^e , fel)en, @d)itf;e, blii^eii,
ixt^zw. — Before a consonant and at the end of words it
is mute , but it indicates in this position that the vowel
before it, is long: D^r , §)a^n, ro|, g(o^, @tro^, e^^rcn,
3f i (yo^) corresponds with y (consonant) in yow, as:
3a, 3a^v, jeber, iung, 3ube, \it'\a^xi.
^, f is like the English >?:, as: fa^I, Mt, ^euj, ^(ec,
53a(!en; it is never mute before n, as: ^nie, ^nabc.
^, X is pronounced shriller and with more emphasis
than in English. Its being placed at the beginning,
middle or end makes no difference: $Rab, 9^u^m, (Srtc,
bergen, S3urg,^^er, §aar, %i\\x, gii^rcr.
@, f , j§ has the hard sound (like the English s in son) :
1) at the beginning of words; 2) in the inner part of
words , when following the letters b, p, b, t, t^, f, Ulib tf ;
3) before a consonant ; as: fatt, fein; (^bfe, Sctfc, ttacfj^fvim,
biird)^fe(;cn, murffen, nutcffeii, .t^adffcl; bit t)aft, btft; 4) like-
wise at the end of words, and in the inner part of words,
when the syllable, which it ends, constitutes a roo<; in
which latter cases it is written ^ : e^, ^m^, 33c^I;eit, aui?*
ge(}C]i, .S>iiii^4t>iir, (.^Ha«*d;cit , ^ciu^^dbcii. — It sounds like
the English soft s in rose: in the interior of words bet-
ween two vowels, and before c after tt, tn, r: lt\t\\, 5Rc{e,
9^iefc, !i^infc, .S^irfc, (Memfe.
2?, D. The sound of this letter is in fact mostly about
the same as that of the German f , as: i>cn, 33ater, tocV'
Double consonants, 9
(oren, better, mi, gre»e(, (S!(aDe = fon, gater, fer^orcn,
getter , fie( , grefel , ® f (af e , although we must say this is
an abuse , and not only theoretically, hut as well practi-
cally the \) ought to he always pronounced perceptibly
softer than the f, and be therefore much more similar
to the English v, especially in words of foreign origin.
For «, a real semivoioel (u consonant) , which has more
and more crept into the German alphabets only in the
mediaeval times, has been introduced into them from
Latin and Greek for the very purpose to mark in writing
the softer sound of the labial spirans , and to distinguish
it from the harder one , for which f has been kept. —
Comp. : Jacob. Grimm, Germ. Diet, letter f , and J. Grimm,
Germ. Gram. (2nd ed., 1869) p. 48 and p.p. 110—113. —
25^ , tti answers to the English and French v . but is
somewhat more open, the lips being less contracted than
in pronouncing the English v. This sound requires par-
ticular attention : ')&z\\\==vine, tuer, u\inu, wo, m{X>, eiDtg.
U) is never silent nor used at the end of words.
3 , 5 is pronounced as ta in gets or ivits , as : lt\)\\,
l\\, ba^,it, imx, '^a{){, Bi^^^' an=:,tet)cu.
The sounds of the English j\ ic or wli and th do not
occur in German.
2. Double and compound consonants.
^\), c^» There is nothing, corresponding to this in
English. It has two different sounds :
1) When placed after a, o, u and au, its sound is
a guttural one and resembles the Scotch ch in Loch. It
is impossible to define it clearer. The pupil must there-
fore refer to his teacher for the correct pronunciation, as :
^Oi&j, (ad)eii, ^^cc^, !c(^en, iBitd), ^Hid;en, and;, 9^auc^.
2) The other sound which occurs after c, t, ei, (t,
ij, (itt, CU and ii, and after any consonant is a soft "/>«-
latic aspirate'^ as : tc^, ^td;t, rcid;, rec^t, ^^M)t, 2i3d)er, xaw--
d^eru, ^eu^d^etn, iBiid^er, iDc(d;e, ^anb^djeu.
At the beginning of words, ^\) is pronounced like ^^
as: (Shrift = £'ii|X (5I;vlfttan, (S^or, except before e and i, as
in(5^emte, c^emtfd), (S^tntrg, (Sf)ili, St^tua 2C., where it is
soft. In words taken from French like S^arlatau , (S^r=
lotte, (S^auffee it keeps its French pronunciation like sh
or German f^ = ®d;ar(atan, (Sd;avlotte, ®d;cffee.
10 Double consonants.
C^S. When r!^ is followed by £J or f , they are pro-
nounced together like ks or x, as: Sac^^ = Saf^ or S[^a^;
thus: Od?€(, Dd;jen, T^wd)^, '^M)\t, %&i\t[, vo is abridged from c^ , especially in the
Genitive case: u^ ^]X&f^, for i8uc^e« or ^ud;'§; te^ '^Dac^^
for ^ad)e« or Dadj)'^; cr )>rad()'«.
rf appears at the end or in the middle of a word
after a short vowel with the sound of a double f , as in
English, as: ©tod, '^o.d , ©tedeu, ®(ocfe, 91acfen, briideu;
— i is never allowed after a consonant. To write ftard,
SBercf, iSand 2C. would be incorrect; they must be spelt:
\iu(t).
Qu, qu; q is always joined with n; together they
have then the sound of fUJ as in the English word quire.
In German qii is found in few words only : Quaq , qucr,
Ouirl, Oiial, Duelle.
ff or g*); the former is used as double s in the
middle of a word after a short vowel: Uiffeii, beffer,
miiffen ; the latter in the middle of a word after a long
vowel , and as final double a- (not z) at the end of words
and syllables: — grii^eu, flicfecu , bag (= dass) , §a6/
(Sd;(o6, muj'te.
^^f !|)!) has the same sound as f^ and occurs mostly
in words of Greek origin : (Sp(;cu, *ip^ilefopl;ie, (^ecarai>bic.
*) This letter is not compounded, as it appears in print, of
f and J, but of f and ^ (final s, = fS; it sounds like ss (not sz).
**) In the new orthography: Adolf.
Double consonants. 1 1
^$f, p^. Here the two letters p and f are united in
one sound, uttered with compressed lips: ^]a^, 'iPfeil,
5lpfe(, $ferb.
B^f fd) like the English sh in 5/^^/>, as: (Sd;tff, fi^af-
feu, ^u{d), '^{d;e, iDifd^eu, ftnbtf(^.
S:^, f!|J, and St, ft as in English, with the only dif-
ference, that the sound of x, tun, Scaler. —
Wherever in the new orthography it is still admitted in
German words, it indicates the length of a following simple
vowel, like in %^^i, %^t)X 2C. Before diphthongs and in
the middle or at the end of words and syllables it is no
longer admitted, except in such words oi foreign origin the
foreign spelling of which is not yet altered by usage.
Therefore do no more write : i\)t\\zx, rat^eu, 3^iot^, Slrmut^,
2(t§em, Wx6:ii^\xmxc., but: teuer, rateu, 91ot, 3trmut, Sltem,
^^eid^tum K. ^l^eater, 2:i;raue, %^tt and other foreign
words keep their th.
^ =^ SS» When the sound of 5 is to be doubled,
which must be done after each vowel, except in com-
pound words, then t is prefixed to 5 = ^ ^ equivalent to
\ 2 Accent.
jj = (s, as: Zai^c, ©(i^, trc^^eii, SO^ii^-c. — ^ is never ad-
mitted after a consonant, as : ^enj, taiijeu , §cvj, fturjen ;
but not : ^eni^, tauten, ftiir^en 2C.
Remark.
To give here any orthograpldcal rules in addition
to the few preceding remarks about (S. and 9t, )^\) and f,
i\) and tf necessitated by our new orthography, woukl be
entirely useless for the beginner, as they depend mostly
on etymology and derivation, some previous knowledge
of the language being indispensable. The only rule, the
beginner wants, is, that all substantives and other words
employed substantively, are written with a capital letter.
Many exami)les have been given in the foregoing pages.
The same rule is applicable to proper names: SublDtc^,
5l(bert, ©d^itler, aJ^iiller, Steranb, Sicerc, 3uau6 Gdfar. Of
the pronouns , only ©ie and 3^t are written with capi-
tals, when they answer to the English you and your.
The personal pronoun id) requires always a small t, not
a capital, as in the English /.
The sig?is of punctuation, being the same as in Eng-
lish, need no further explanation.
The characters for German handwriting^ differing
greatly from the printed letters, have been annexed in
two tables and should be carefully copied and ])ractised.
The pupil is advised at once to begin writing his exer-
cises in the German character.
On the Accent.
As in other languages with words of more than one
syllable, in the German tongue the accent is indispensable
to the art of speaking. The verbal accent ])roduces the
rhythm ; without rhytlim the language would be too mono-
tonous, it would offend the ear and the innate feeling
of harmony. However as the accentuation of words was
not originally laid down according to fixed rules, but was
rather the consequence of an undefined feeling and tiict,
some irregularities are necessarily found, which do not
quite agree with the rules determined at a later period.
Accent. 13
All the beginner requires, to enable him to read
correctly, may be simply reduced to the following rules :
1) The pupil must distinguish simple words and com-
pound words.
2) Simple words, which are either monosyllabic roots,
ox deritmtive words, have (generally) one accent, as: gro^,
flein, geb=en, fd^^ten.
3) Compound ones have two or more, as: 5ln'fang'.
4) With monosyllables, no mistake can occur : aitf,
bet, nur, votxm, bod), ^JJiann, grau, £1nb, 5)fiug, !Dac^, Ueb.
5) When a simple word is not monosyllabic, it con-
sists of a root or principal syllable (@tammfi(be) and of
one or more accessory syllables (Dtebeufitbeu), and is called
a derimitive. The latter are partly prefixes, partly suf-
fixes, which are never used alone and appear only in con-
nection with roots. They are :
a] Such as are placed before the root, prefixes (SSot*
ft(ben): be, em^, eiit, er, ge, »er, ^er.
b) Such as are placed after, suffixes (9^ac^fi(ben) : t,
e(, en, enb, er, ern, e§, eft, et, tg, td^t, in, tfc^,
ttd^, ung, tgen.
These syllables under a) and b) are all unaccented.
G Hence the first chief-rule: All derivative
German words have the accent on their root
or chief- syllable , but never on either of the
accessory syllables.
Examples with prefixes.
iBe=ruf, Smp^fdug, ent^gfeng, erfu^^r, (Sebrand^, S3er*
niinft.
Examples with suffixes.
Sie*be, SJiitt^el, (oben, Xugenb, :^i(ber, ftemern, ®ute3,
tebeft, bittet, drtig, ^ofjic^t, Soictn, :^errlt^, finbifc^, ©diim=
d^en, S6:^nungeu, ^eiTigen.
Examples ivith both.
i8e=nif*en, Smpfanger, drfd^rnng, &fdl;rungen, ge=
brdud)(i(^, i3er(6reu, entiprecf)en, ^erlegung, 33muiinid)ungen.
Note. Nouns taken from foreign languages , having
been germanised, do not come under this rule. These
mostly receive the accent on the last syllable, as : (Stu*
bent, ^vop^et, ^Hittur, ^voin'na, 2)lordft, gigur, 9^e(igion,
1 4 Accent.
cl-d)c bie ®e-fa()r er-fann-te, in m\-6)tx \i)-xt 23ol)I=
which the danger recognised, in which her bene-
t()d-te-rin fid) be-fanb, flog f)in-su', unb fta^ ttw
factress herself found, flew near and stung the
3d -get in bie C\inb. 2)er €d;u§ ging ba-ne'-ben,
hunter in the hand. The shot went aside,
unb bie Jau-be n^ar ge-vet-tet.
and the dove was saved.
J)ie kci Jrreun-be. The three friends.
1) (£in 2}iann l^at-te brci g^cuu-be. ^wti i>on
A man had three friends. Two of
i!)-ncn lieb-te ev.fef)t; ber btit-te tuar it)m gleic^-pl-tig,
them loved he much; the third was to him indifferent,
ob-c^Icid) bie-fev fein be-j!ev greunb mar. (Sinft tiniv-be
though this one his best friend was. Once was
er inn* ben 91id)-tcr gc-fov-bevt, u>o ev, — ob-fd)LMi
he before the judge summoned where he, — though
un-fd)ul-biv3 — , bod; l)avt ber-flajt tDar. — ..3Bcr
innocent — , yet hard accused was. — „Who
un-tev eud)/' fag-tc ev ju fei-nen g-reun-ben, ,M\i mit
among you," said he to his friends, .,will with
Reading Exercise. 17
mir ^t-\)tn unb fiit mid) jeu-gen? 2)enn id) bin un*
me go and for me witness? for I am un-
ge-red>t t)er-flaat, unb bet ^o-nig jiirnt."
justly accused, and the king is angry." ''
2) J)er er-jle fei-ner ^reun-be ent-fd)ut'-bi9-te fid)
The first of his friends excused himself
fo-glci^ unb [ag-te, er fon-ne ni(^t mit i^m ge-I)en
immediately and said, he could not with him go
tt)e-gen an-be-rer ®e-[(^af-te. 2)er ^mx-k be-glei-te-tc
on account of other business. The second accompanied
t^n bi^ ju bet Jf)U-te bc^ Mid)t-^u-fc^; bann \Danb-te
him as far as the door of the tribunal; then turned
er fi(^ urn unb ging §u-tud, au^ gurd)t t)or bem
he (himself) and went back, for fear of the
jor-ni-gen 9lid)-tev. 2)er brit-te, auf it)el-d)en er am
angry judge. The third on whom he the
tDe'-nig-ften ge-baut I)at-te, ging !)in-ein, re'-be-te fiir
least relied had, went in, spoke for
t^n unb ^eug-te bon fei-ner Un-[d)ulb fc freu-big,
him and gave evidence of his innocence so eheerfuUy,
ba^ bet Oti^-ter i^n lo^-lie^ unb be-fd)enf-te.
that the judge him liberated and rewarded.
3) 2)rei greun-be !)at ber 9}len[c^ in bie-fer SBelt;
Three friends has man in this world;
n)ie be-tra-gen fte f\^ in ber ®tun-be be^ ^o-be^,
how behave they in the hour of death,
tt)enn ®ott i^n t)or fein @e-rid)t for-bert? — 2)a^
when God him before his tribunal summons? — The
®elb, fein er-fler ^^eunb, t)er-ldgt i^n ju-erfl unb
money, his first friend, leaves him first and
ge!)t nic^t mit i^m. 6ei-ne SSer-n^anb-ten unb
goes not with him. His relations and
greun-be be-glei-ten il)n bi^ p ber Jf)u-re be^
friends accompany him unto the door of the
@ra-be^, unb fef)-ren bann ju-riid in il)-re «?)au-fer,
grave, and return then back to their houses,
OTTO, German. Conv. -Grammar. 2
18 Etymology.
S)er bvit-te, ben er im 2t-ht\\ am of-te-ftcu tocr-jag.
The third, whom he in life the oftenest forgot,
finb [ei-ue gu-teu 2Ber-fe. Sie al-Iein be-g(ei-tcn
are his good works. They alone accompany
i^ Bi^ ju bem Z\)xon bc^ 9tid)-ter^; fie gel^eu
him as far as the throne of the judge; they go
t)or-an', fvre-(^cu fiir i^n, unb fin-ben Saxm-I^er-jig-feit
before, speak for him, and find mercy
unb @na-be.
and grace.
Etymology.
Preliminary notions. Parts of speech.
There are in the German language te7Z parts of speech:
1) The article, bev Slrtifet or ba« ®efd;(ec^t0n)ort.
2) The noun or substantive, ba6 ^au^tocrt.
3) The determinative adjective or adjective pronoun,
ba§ ^cfttinmuiu3§tt)ort.
(including the indefinite numeral adjectives and
the numbers, bad unbefttmmte unb beftimmte
3a^(iDort.)
4) The (qualifying) adjective, ba« Sigeufd^aftSluort.
5) The pronoun, ba§ giiwovt.
6) The verb, ba« Scttluort.
7) The adverb, ba§ Umftaubdli^ort.
8) The preposition, bad 33ortvovt.
9) The conjunction, bad ^inbetDort.
10) The interjection, bad 5ludrufdlUort.
The first six are variable, the four last invariable.
The change which the first five undergo by means
of terminations , is called declensiofi; it refers to gender y
number and case.
There are in German three genders: the masculine
(bad ntanulid;c), the feminine (bad U>eibttd;c) and the neuter
gender (^Ci^ fdc^ltd;e ^3e((^le(^t). The rules concerniup^ the
gender will be found in the 10th lesson.
Etymology. \ 9
There are also two numbers: Singular ((StnjQl)!) and
Plural (DJ^ei^rja^t), and four cases, expressing the different
relations of words to each other, namely : the nominatwe^
genitive^ dative and accusative.
The nominative case (SKerfaH) or the suhject ansAvers
the question: who? or what? Ex.: Who is learning?
The boy (Latin: puer).
The genitive or possessive case (SSeffenfafl) answers
the question: whose? or of tvhich? Ex.: Whose book?
The boy's book (pueri).
The dative (Semfall) answers the question to whom?
Ex.: To whom shall I give it? To the boy (puero).
The accusative or objective case (^^eiifall) marks the
object of an action and answers the question: lohom?
or what? Ex.: Whom or what do you see? I see the
boy (puerum), the house (domum).
Note. For the vocative case there is no particular form in
German; if required, the nominative serves for it in all the de-
clensions.
First Lesson.
(erlle Seftion.)
On the definite Article^
f2)er Beftimmte ^xtiUli
There are two articles in German as in Englisli.
the definite and the indefinite.
The definite article^ answering to the English the, is
used to indicate the gender of substantives, and has for
each gender in the singular a particular form, viz. :
masc. bcr, fern, bic, neut. baS, as:
ber ^D^aun the man.
bic gtau the woman.
ba§ ^tnb the child.
The plural for all three genders is bie, as:
bic ^naben the boys.
It is varied by four cases: the nominative ., genitive^ .
dative and accusative. It will be observed that the accu-
sative singular of the feminine and neuter gender, and
the accusative plural are always like the iiominative.
Declension of the definite article.
Singular.
Plural
masc.
fern.
neuter.
for all genders.
Nom.
ber
bte
'ta^ the
bte the
Gen.
bei$
ber
be)8 of the
ber of the
Bat.
bem
ber
bem to the
^tn to the
Ace.
belt
bte
brtS the.
bie the.
In the same manner, the following words are de-
clined, which are often substituted for the definite ar-
ticle, viz.:
Singular.
Plural
masc.
fern.
tieuter.
for all genders.
t)ief er
t^icfe
biefcS this, that
ticfe these
jener
jcne
icilC§ that
jene those
ii3eld)er
tDeld)e
irclcl)C)8 which?
iDeld)C which?
jet)er
jebc
ict)C)8 every.
— —
Definite
Article.
21
Declension.
Singular.
P/wra/
masc.
fern.
neuter.
/or all genders.
N. btefcr
biefc
btefe§ this (that)
t)ie[c these
G. t)lefc§
biefer
biefog of this
bie|cr of these
D. btefcm
bicjcr
biefcm to this
btefctt to these
A. biefcn
btefc
biefe^ this.
Examples.
biefc these.
liefer SJiann
this man.
3et)er 5D^ann every man.
2)iefe i^vau this woman.
iE>e(d)en©tocf (^cc) whichstick?
S^ene i^vau that woman.
3ebe§ f iitb
every child.
^cr ^ontg the king.
t)er 3Satev the father.
t)er ?D^auu the man, husband
ber ®ol)n the son.
ber ©arte It the garden.
bet SSetn the wine.
ber ©tod the stick.
bet §ltub the dog, hound.
bev ieUer the plate.
Words Potter).*)
bie STiuttet the mother.
bie ^rau the woman, wife.
bie Xoc^tet the daughter,
bie Sebet the pen, feather,
bie ^a^e the cat.
fern.
^tC ^i3ntgtn the queen.
unb and. 3fa yes.
■3cf> l^aBe I have
bu l^aft thou hast
et l^at he has
fie ^at she has
e8 l^at it has
neuter.
^a§ (Sd)Io6 the castle, palace,
ba^ 5!iub the child.
ba6 ipau§ the house,
bag Sud) the book.
ba§ ^affet the water.
S.
9Mn no. nid}t not.
§aBe ic^? have I?
l)aft bu? hast thou?
I) at et^ has he?
^at fie? has she?
^at e§? has it?
Reading Exercise (UBuug). 1.
!Det 33atet unb bet ®ol)u. ®ie SJhtttet unb baS tiitb. ®et
©atten unb ba^ §aug. -3feuet ©arten, jene^ §au§. -Sd) !)abe
ben ©tod.**) S)u ^aft baS SSaffet. ®et tijuig l;at ba§ ©d^log.
*) In this and the following lists of words the article precedes
each substantive , that it may be learnt at the same time. It may
also be observed here, once for all, that these words preceding the
Exercises, are to be well committed to memory, as their signification
is seldom repeated when appearing in subsequent Exercises.
**) The noun governed by the verb {>al^cn (to have), and by
all transitive verbs must be in the Accusative. — All German
monosyllabic substantives of whatever gender are alike in the
Accusative and Nominative,
22 Losson 1.
®er 25ater \^at fcen SSein. 2Beld>en 2Beiu Ijat cr? 2Beld)e^
2Baffer? 2)ie[er §unt). 3)iefe £a^e. 2)as5 ^iitt) biefer (of this)
i!rau. 2BeId)e3 tint)? 3fet)e3 S^int). 2Beld)e ^^rau? 2Beld)er
SD^ann ^at ten §uut)? SSelc^en ©tod ^at fcex aJiann? (5r ijat
biefeu ©tocf.
JlttfoaOc. 2.
Exercise for translation.
1. The king and the queen. The son and the daughter.
The father and the mother. The child has the book. The
daughter has the book. The man has the {Ace. ben) stick.
I have the wine. The man has the water. This father. This
woman. This house. The king has the castle. The queen
has the book. Which book? Which house? Which pen?
This book; that pen. Every man. I have the {Ace.) dog.
2.*) I have not the stick. The child has the stick.
That wine and this water. This man has not the book.
Which castle has the {Nam.) king? He has that castle.
That mother has the child. The woman has the house. The
castle of the queen.**) Has the man the book? Which plate?
This plate. The son of the queen. The daughter has the
pen. Every mother. Erery book.
Conversation (Spred^it6itng).
^aBe id) bie ?5eber? -Sa, bit i)aft bie i^eber.
|)aft bu bag 33u*? 9^ein, tc^ l}abe bag S3u^ ind)t.
|)at ber Skater ben 2Beln? (gr I)at ben Sein.
§at bte ^rau bie S!a^e? 3a, fte l)at bie ^aj^c.
^eld)e S^a^e l)at fie? (Sie I;at bie juncje (young) ^a^e.
§vxt bag £inb beu ©tod? 9^ein, bev 53atev ^at ben ©tocf.
2BeId)eg ©d)Io^ l}at bie^ijnigin? ©ie ^t bie[eg ©Alog.
$at biefe f^van bag Slinb''? 9^cin, {ene fevau ^t eg (it).
^oX ber 9Jlann ben §unb? 2)et 9}^vnm ^at ben §unb nid)t;
er \:i^i bie ^\d. 9Jfein ^inb 'i^at eine 53irne; e^ (it) I)at an&f eine dlo]t.
^1}X (Sc^n nnt) 3l)Te S^od^ter ^aben jenen 33aum gefetjen.i)
3)ie 5lai^e ift ein Xiev. ^ie 9tofe ift eine 33(unie. ©ebon Sie mir
t)iefe§ ^ud). ®eben ©ie mir and) eine ^LMnme. 3)iefe^ §au§
ift nid)t fd)cn. Unfve ©tabt ift fel;v alt.
1. I have a rose. She has a book. You have a 2) stick.
My brother has a pear. My sister has a apple. His child
has a knife. We have no bread. Give me a rose. The father
has no horse. A dog is an animal. Which pen has the child?
The son has a hat. Who has a flower? My daughter has
a flower. Where is your mother? That child has no 2) apple.
I have no [Ace. m.) spoon. That house is old. 3) Her house
is beautiful. My horse is young. Have you seen ') the castle?
2. Give (®eben 8ie) this stick to^) my brother. Give
this penknife to^) your sister. The apple is a fruit. The
1) In compound tenses the participle past comes last.
2) Accusative masc. chicn — fciiicu JC. (sec the foot-note ** p. 21).
3) Adjectives, when placed after their noun, remain unchanged.
4j The word 'to' indicating the dative, must not be translated.
Declension. 25
rose is no fruity the rose is a flower. You have no hat.
Where is your hat? Wo has 3 seen ^my 2 hat? Give me
a knife. Give me also a fork and a spoon. He has not his
coat. They have no horse. Where is my brother? Where
is the rose of my [Gen. f.) sister? Not every horse is fine;
this horse is young.
Conversation.
2Ba§ l^aben ©te? 3d) ^abe eine S3(ume.
§aben ffer l)at mein flint)? (g§ Ijat fein a)ieffet.
3ft t)ie 9icfe eine i^rnd)t? 9Mn, bie 9^ofe ift eine 53(ume.
2BeId)en ©tod ^aben ©ie? 3d) \:iOiht nieincn ©tod.
2Ser ^o.i mein S3ud)? !2)a^ tint? l)at 3()t ^ud).
§aben . bent ©arten to the garden
A. ben ®avten the garden.
btC ©artCtt the gardens
ber ©arten of the gardens
ben ©fivten to the gardens
bie ©iirten the gardens.
In the same manner are declined
3)er 35ater the father,
ber 5lpfel the apple.
ber (5d)ln[fel the key.
bet ^litgel the wing,
bet ^o[fe( the spoon. .
bet @nge( the angel,
bet §ininiet (the) heaven,
bet i'el)ret the teacher,
bet @d)iilet the pupil,
bet (Spiegel the looking-gL
bet ^^ej^en the rain,
bet ©tiefel the boot.
Flur. bte ^atcx, bte Wei,
bte SteUet, bie ^Mo^d,
bet Atetlet the plate,
bet ipannnet the hammer.
bet ^oget the bird,
bet (Sd)netbct the tailor.
bet ©d}tua9et the brother-in-law.
bet (Snglanbet the Englishman,
bet ^)Unnet the Roman.
*bet 5lblet*) the eagle.
*bet Xtopfen the drop.
*bet tud)en the cake.
*bet 5Diatet the painter.
*bet Slmetifanet the American.
bie (Sd)Ul[feI, bie (Sd)ii(et, bie <3tiefel,
bie (Sngliinbet, bie 5lmetifanet.
2) Examples of neuter nouns.
Sitigular.
N. bag ^enftet the window
G. be^ §en[tet§ of the window
D. bem ^enftet to the window
A. ba^S i^enftet the window.
Plural.
bie Scttftcr the windows
bet '^'cnftet of the windows
beu i^enftettt to the windows
bie ^euftet the windows.
*) Those marked -with do not modify their vowel in the
plural, as: the eajrles, bie 5lbter; bie j^fud^eu, bie iDialcr ic.
1st declension.
29
Declension of diminutives
Singular.
N. baS 33auni(l)eu the little tree
G. t)e§33ciumcf)en§ of the little tr.
D. bem^aumdjeu to the little tr.
A. t)a3 SSaumd)en the little tree.
Such neuter nouns are:
bag ^euer the fire,
bag aReffet the knife.
bag SBettet the weather.
*bag 2Baffet the water,
bag ©itber (the) silver.
Plural.
bic S^aumci^ett the little trees
ber ^Baumc^en of the little trees
ben 33aumd)en to the little trees
bie ^aumi^en the little trees.
*bag ^upfet (the) copper.
bag ^loftet the convent.
bag Wlttd the means.
bag S5etl(^en the violet,
bag 3D^abd)en the girl, maiden.
3) Declension with the indefinite article.
neuter.
masc.
N. ein ® tenet a man-servant
G. eineg !J)ienerg of a servant
D. ein em Wiener to a servant
A. ein en SDiener a servant.
mein 3^^^^^ ^y room
meineg 3^tttmerg of my room
metnem 3^^^^^^^^ ^^ ^y room
ntetn 3^itt^e"'^ ^y room.
Compound nouns of the 1st declension (see p. 27, § 10).
SDer @VDg't>ater the grandfather. Gen. beg ©rogv^aterg k.
bag ^eber'mefjer the penknife. Gen. beg gebevmefferg.
ber (S^rad) 'tester the master of languages.
ber §ang'fd)(ii[fel the house-key.
ber 3u3'^D3el the bird of passage. PI. bie ^VLO^QOO^d.
bag ©d)(af'5immer the bed-room. PL bie ©c^Iafjimmer.
Observations.
1) The following 10 words originally terminating in en,
now very often used without tt, belong also to the first de-
clension; in the plural they do not change their vowel.
ber ^rteben or^^nebe (the) peace.
ber 2Biaen or ^BiHe the will,
ber ^elfen or t^elg the rock.
ber ©amen or ©ame the seed.
ber ^uc^ftabe**) (Sud)ftaben) the
letter of the alphabet.
ber 3^amen or 91am e the name.
ber®(auben or®laube the faith,
ber ^unfen or i^un!e the spark,
ber §aufen or §aufe the heap.
ber ©ebanfen or ©ebanfe the
thought.
Declension.
iV. ber Seamen or 9^ame the name PL bic Xiamen the names
G. beg ^'lameng of the name ber 9^amen of the names
D. bem 5^amen to the name ben 9^amen to the names
A. ben 9^amen the name. bie 9^amen the names.
2) The following words are declined in the singular
according to this declension, but form their plural in n» See
the 9th lesson.
*) The form *S3u(^ftaben' has now become quite obsolete.
30 Lesson 3.
jDer 33aucr the peasant,
fcev 58al)er the Bavarian.
bev S3ctter the cousin,
ber •)iad)bar the neighbour.
t)er ©tac^el the sting,
ber '^pautoffel the slipper.
Gen. \)ti S3aucr^, be§ 53etteri§, be§ ^ad)bar!g, beS 3)o!'tDre'.
P/wr. bie 33auern, bte 55ettern, bie 9^acl)barit, bie ^ofto'reit.
ber ®Ct)atter the fellow -god-
father,
ber 5[JJuv>fe( the muscle.
ber •Prcieffov the professor,
ber ®of'tor the doctor.
Words.
®ott God. bag ®oIb (the) gold,
ber Suropa'er the European. bie ai>ot)l't^at the benefit,
ber ©panier the Spaniard. !ranf ill. ijut good,
ber ©dnger the singer. flein little, small. fel)r very.
ber ®d)0^fer the creator. ^ ijrc^ large, great, tall,
finb are. jlcet two. in in. ^ier here.
Reading Exercise. 5.
®er S3ruber be§ 53ater§. 2)er ©arten beS 33rubere>. ®a«
S3aiimd)en beg ©arteng. -Su*) [with the dative, in) b em ©arten.
3^n bent dimmer. 3n ben 3ittnnertt. 5)ie -(^eufter (jo/.) beg 3^"^*
merg. ®cr Wiener beg Wmerifanerg. ®ie !j;ropfcn beg ^Kegeng.
©eben ®ie biefe t^fel ben (2d)ii(ern. SDem ?et)rer. 9Kcin (Sd)n?a3er.
S)eine S3rnber. ®eine (Sd)lii[fel [pL). -3d) l?abe ben vgd^liiffd beg
3immerg. (Sr :^at bag 2)fe[fer feineg 33rnberg. 1)ie 51 bier finb
SSijgel. ®ie t^fel finb auf (on) bent Scacr. ®ag 9)?abd)en ift
in einem 5?Iofter. 2©o ift ber ©c^neiber? (Sr ift ntd^t l^ier.
^ttf()a6(*. 6.
1 . The garden of the father. The gardens of my brother.
I have two spoons. The Englishman has two servants. We
are in the room [Dat.]. My father is in the garden. Our teacher
is old. The man has two hammers. Is your brother-in-law
a doctor? These cakes are not good. Where are the birds?
They are in the garden. Give me your [Ace.) plate. A bird
has two wings. The wings of the birds. The angels of (the)**)
heaven. Have you seen 7) the rooms of the American?
2. The castle has [a]**) hundred (I)nnbevt) windows. The
book of the pupil. The plate of the girl. We are Americans.
You are Europeans. The violets are in the gardens. The
pupils are at school (in ber (^djule) . The rooms of my father.
I have no silver and no gold. Give me the key of my room.
*) Germ. „3n" with dative indicates rest, or repose = Kn*rl.
'in' "with accusative; motion or direction = Engl. 'into'. See p. 46, 3;.
**) Observe that a parenthesis (...) encloses a word to he trans-
lated or an annotation, whereas bracket* [...] signify »leave ouU^.
-hj See the foot-note 1) p. 24.
2nd declension. 31
The name of the painter. The benefit of (the) peace. The
house of my teacher. We have no fire. God is the creator
of the heaven and (of the) earth (uttb ber (Srbe).
Conversation.
3SeW)e§ (what) tft ber DZame ©ein 9Zame tft ©(^mtbt.
btefeg fetglauberg?
^abcn ©te t^ie iBi3ge( gefeljen? 3fa, id) ^ahe [te (them) gefe^en.
Q\t bav3 (that) Ql)x ©arten? @§tftl?er@ai1ennieiue§9^ad)Bav§.
2Bd ftnt) toie ©d}tu[fel meine§ §ier fint' [ie.
3immer3?
Ser (who) tft btefeS 2)^at)d)en? .
©inb ©ie ein 9}?aler? 9Zeiu, id) bin (I am) feiu 9)?a(ev;
id) Bill ein ©anger.
•3ft ei" ein (Suvopctet? -Sa, er ift ein ©panier.
SBev ift in bem ©arten? 3)ie 2;od)ter meine§ M)rer§.
§al)eid)t)a§33ud)3^re>3 55ater§? 3a, ©ie ^ahen eS (it).
§aben ©ie ben ©tod meine§ ^ein, id) ^abt ii}n (it) nid)t.
33vubev§'^
§aben ©ie ba§ §au^ beg ©pa* ^f^ein, id) ^al)e fein §ang nid}t
nierg gefel^en? ge[el)en.
2Ker ift Iran!? !Der Diener be§ g}lalev§ ift fran!.
3fft ber ©piegel !(ein? 9^ein, er (it) ift grog unb fd)i3n.
Fourth Lesson.
(Sierte Seftion.)
Second declension.
This declension contains another series of masculine
words, viz. :
1) all those ending in e» Its inflection is very simple.
All the cases, both of the singular and plural, are formed
by adding n, without altering the vowel in the plural:
Example.
Singula?'. Plural.
N. ber ^nabe the boy bic ^naBcn the boys
G. beS ^nat)Ctt of the boy ber f naben of the boys
D. bem l^nabctt to the boy ben Si!naben to the boys
A. ben ^naben the boy. bie ^naben the boys.
Thus are declined:
5Der 5lffe the monkey. ber Solue the lion,
ber D(^fe (O^g) the ox. ber g^atfe the falcon.
32
Lesson 4.
t)et 93ote the messenger.
bet Svbe the heir.
"Der 9Jcffe the nephew.
t)cr 9?ic[e the giant.
t)er ©flatoe the slave.
t)er 3Jut)e the Jew.
ber'iPate the godfather, godchild.
ber 5ivte (§ivt) the herdsman.
ber §eibe the Heathen.
bet §afe the hare.
t)er 9uibe the raven.
t)ev @attc the husband.
t)er 53et)iente the man-servant.
t>CT r^van^ofe the Frenchman,
ber Sad)fe the Saxon,
tier 9hiffe the Russian,
ber ^neujje the Prussian.
t)er 5^iirfe the Turc.
(See the 12th lesson. § 9.)
Plur. bie 5lffen, tie Dcf)fen, bte Sctren, fete ^akn, bic 9^effen,
bic §afen, bte ^^vaiijofen, bie 9Juf(en, bie ^reuf^en etc.
Note. Further all adjectives used substantively when preceded
by the definite article:
®cr ?tltc the old man. I ber ^lanfc the patient fsiek man).
ber 9ietfcnbe the traveller. | bcr (Sclelnte the learned man.
Gen.: be« Sllten, bee Jlratifen, be3 JReifenben; pi bic (Scte^rten.
2) The following words, though monosyllabic, are
also subject to this mode of inflexion, doubtless because
in course of time they have dropped the letter e.
Example.
Singular. Plural.
N. ber @rafi) the count, earl bic OJrnfcn the counts
G. be^ ©vafctt of the count ber ©vafeu of the counts
D. bem ©rafen to the count ben ®rafeu to the counts
A. ben ©rafeu the count. bie ©rafen the counts.
Thus:
!Der §eib2) the hero,
ber 5*uvft3) the prince
bcr^evri)}^^^";^^'^"''^^'-}
*^ '/gentleman. j
ber 9^avr \ ,, . ..
ber %i)ox 1 ^^" ^^^^-
ber ^iir the bear.
ber SJ^enfd) man, mankind.
Singular.
Gen. beg $elbeu k.
* be3 ^iivften 2C.
beg §errn k.
beg Dtavren k.
beg XI) or en 2C.
beg 33aren k.
beg SJJenfc^en.
Plural.
bie §elbcn ic.
bie SUrflen :c.
bie §erren k.
bie ^f^arren :c.
bie X^oren k.
bie ^arcn k.
bie 2)?cnfd)en ic.
3) All masculine nouns from other languages, not
ending in a(, M\f aft or r, ^] and having the accent on
the last syllable, are declined according to this mode of
inflexion :
1) Old German: bcr Oratoc — bcr ^^txxt.
2) Anglo-Saxon: haeleth (dissyllabic).
3) bcr i^ilrft is like the English root first = ber Srjlc.
4) Such as bcr ©cncrat', Olfijicr', k., which belong to the 3rd
declension; see p. 37, 4.
2nd declension.
33
Example.
Singular. Plural.
N. bev (Stut)ent' the student bic ©tubeu'tcu the students
G. fce^tStut en 'ten of the student bet ©tui?enten of the students
D. bem®tut)enten to the student ben ©tubeiiten to the students
A. ben Stubenten the student, bie (Btubenten the students.
Such are:
jDev3lbt>Dfat'the advocate (lawyer
bcr ^amcvab' the comrade.
ber ^anbibat' the candidate,
ber ^^ilcfopV the philosopher,
bev ®utat' the ducat,
bev ©olbat' the soldier.
ber ?0^onard)' the monarch.
ber hornet' the comet,
ber planet' the planet.
ber -Prdfibent' the president,
ber Xtjrann' the tyrant,
ber 3fe[nit' the Jesuit,
ber ^^e^ent' the regent,
ber (Slefanf the elephant,
ber ©iamant' the diamond.
ber 'ipoet' the poet,
ber ^'^rift the Christian,
ber "^rinj the prince.
Plur. bie 5lb»ofatctt, bie (Solbaten, bie (S^riftcn 20
®er ^aifer the emperor.
bie §erbe the herd, flock.
bie Sante the aunt.
ber £i3rper the body.
ber @ried)e the Greek.
ber ^cfaf the Cossack.
S. ^&i bin I am
bu bift thou art
er i[t he is
fie ift she is
PL iuir finb we are
(2ie finb \ you are
(il)r felb) j ye are
fie finb they are.
Words.
ber 33vief the letter.
ber ©fel (1st decl.) the ass.
fennen ®ie? do you know?
icb ^ebe I give.
\QOiX was; l^atte had.
33in id) am I?
bift bu art thou?
is he?
is she?
i|t er
ift fie
finb vo'vc
finb (3ie
(feib il)r)
finb fie
are you?
are they?
Beading Exercise. 7.
®a^ ?D?efjer be3 ^uaben.*) 3d) gebe bem ^noben ba§ 33rot.
tennen ®ie ben tnaben? ®at^ 33ud} eineg ©tubenten. !l)er
torper eine^ (Slefanten. S)ie ^liiqel ber 51bler nnb ber ^aUen.
^ie ©olbaten be^ ^aifer«. ®ie 9^aben finb 33pgel. S)ie frnaben
l)aben i\qq\ ^aben imb brei §afen. ®ie %Mt\\ ^aben ©tlacen.
^ie ^ofafen be3 ^aifer^ finb Siufjen. 3)a§ ©olb beS ©rafen.
^er 33rief be3 ^urften. !Die 9}tenfd)en finb fterblid) (mortal).
2)er Sruber be3 ^rinjen Gilbert.
Jlufgaae. 8.
1. The brothers of the boy. These boys are brothers.
The name of the student. The sister of the count. The aunt
*) Or „bcg ^itabcn 9JJcffer, eineS ©tubentcn 53iic^" etc. in the same
order as in the Saxon genitive in English.
OTTO, German Conv.-Grammar, 3
34 Lesson 5.
of the prince. The knife of the soldier. The letter of the
president. The emperors Caligula and Nero were (tuaren)
tyrants. Do you know the princes? The child has a raven.
The Americans have a president. I have seen the diamonds of
the prince. The old (alten) Greeks had (fatten) slaves. Give
the gold to*) the Jew.
2. We have seen a comet. Are you Saxons or Prussians?
The body of a giant is very large. These two boys are my
nephews. Those soldiers are Russians. The Turks are no
heathens. We are Christians. These boys are Jews. My
comrades are ill. We have no oxen, we have two asses.
Give this {Ace.) letter to*) the messenger {Dat.) of the count.
Conversation.
§aben ®ie ben ©(efanten ge* 2Bir ^aBen i^n (it) ^eute (to-day)
fet)eu? ge[et)en.
§aben bie ^nabeu ben Sotven, Unfre tnaben l^aBen ben Morten
beu %\o,tx unb ben 33aren ge* unb ben 33dten c^efel^en ; aber
fel)cn? (but) ntd)t ben Jiger.
Set ift biefer SJiann? (Stiftber53rnberbe«$rafiten'ten.
^ft btefev ©tubent ein ^reuge? ^ein, er ift ein ©adjfe.
SSer ift fein S5ater? ®ein SSater ift ein SlDOofat'.
Sleben ®ie (do you like) bie 9^ein, ic^ \xt\it bie Slffen nic^t.
5lffen?
^ennen ®le biefe ©olbaten ? ^6) fenne fie (know them) nlc^t.
§aben ©ie einen §afen? 3a, ic^ ^^iciht btci §afen.
3ft ber Sebiente be3 ©rafen ^ein, er ift ein (gnglanber.
ein t^ranjofe?
§abcn ©ie eincn 9^effen? 3^ ^be jtuei ^fJeffen.
(5inb biefe ^naben 3uben? ^ein, fie fmb (Sl^riften.
S33o ftnb O^re ^ameraben? ©ie finb nid)t ^icr (here), fie fmb
ju $)aufe (at home),
©aben bie i^alfen i^Iiigel? 3ta, aUe (all the) S3BgeI ^abcn
Sliigel.
S33ar bev $>elb ein 9^ufjc? 9'^ein, er njar ein ®ried)e,
Fifth Lesson.
(giinftc Scftion.)
Third declension.
Tins declension contains the greatest number of the
masculine substantives. In the Singular, the Genitive is
formed by adding c§ or § to the nominative ; in the da-
*) to is not to be translated, the dative is meant.
3rd declension.
35
tive, the word remains either unchanged or takes an c;
the accustive is like the nominative. All the Plural
cases take c, and the dative an it, besides the c. More-
over, most of them having a, d, u or ail in the root,
modify it into a, b, it or 'an. To this declension belong
1) all masculine monosyllabic nouns.
Examples.
Singular.
N. ber i^ifc^ the fish
G. t?e^ §if*C)g of the fish
D. bem fvifd)(e) to the fish
A. ben i^ifc^ the fish.
Plural.
bic Stfd^C the fishes
bet i^ifc^e of the fishes
ben ^ifd}ett to the fishes
bie ^'ifdje the fishes.
N. ber ©o^n the son
G. be§ ©otin (c) § of the son
D. bem (SD!^n(e) to the son
A. ben ©o^n the son.
bic 8o!^nc the sons
ber ©c^ne of the sons
ben ©c^neit to the sons,
bie uf the hoof.
ber $fat) the path.
ter (Stoff the stuff.
ber $unft the point.
P/wr. bie ^rme, bie ^age, bte §unbe, bie ©c^ul^e 2C.
2) When such masculine roots have a prefix before
them, they are declined in the same manner as if they
were simple; but it must be observed that, being no
longer monosyllabic, the euphonical c in the genitive and
dative singular is generally omitted. This is also the case
with compound nouns of this declension.
Ex
Singular.
N. bet 53c-tet)l' the order
G. beg 33efel)Iig of the order
D. bem ^efe^l to the order
A. ben 33efel;( the order.
Plural.
N. bie 33eiel)Ic the orders
G. bev 53cfel)te of the orders
I), ben 53e|el)len to the orders
A. bie 33etel)le the orders.
amples.
Singular.
bet 5lpfel=Saum the apple-tree
be3 ^(pfelbaumS of the apple-tree
bem SIpfelbaum to the apple-tree
ben 5(pfelbaum the apple-tree.
Plural.
bie 2(^f el b a u ni e *) the apple-trees
bet ^Ipt^Ibaume of the apple-tr.
ben 5lpfelbaumen to the apple-tr.
bie 3lpfelbdume the apple-tr.
Such are:
jDet ©efang the song, air.
bet ©ebvaucb custom, use.
bet ^Sovbang the curtain,
bet Uuf aU the accident,
bet 5lu^-gang the issue.
bet £)l}ttin3 the ear-ring.
bet ^anbfd^n"^ the glove.
bet ®ttobbnt the straw-hat.
bet Ubettocf the great-coat.
bet ^ei^^t^ig the holiday.
Gen. be« (Sefanj5§, be« ^Dtl)angi^ be« ^lui^gang^ k.
Plur. bie 33otl;angCr bie ®ebtdud)e, bie §anb[d)u^c ic.
3) This third declension comprehends further the
masculine derivatices ending in t(j, irf) at and liiiQ, as:
Singular.
N. bet ^eilic^ the king
G. be« ^h\\\^ of the king
D. bem ,Nlmug to the king
A. ben iionig the king.
Plural.
bic Sliittigc the kings
tet ^euii^e of the king?
ben Jilonicjen to the king
bie ^onige the kings.
*) not 3lvtclbdnntc.
3rd declension. 37
Such are:
jDer ,^afi0 the cage.
t)er 3:eppi(^ the carpet,
ber (Sffig the vinegar,
ber 5onig (the) honey
ber "iPfivficI) the peach.
Der 9JJo 'imt the month.
t)er bungling the youth,
bet §eiing the herring.
Plur. bie ^dfige, bie 9JJo'nate, t)ie Siingltnge, bie §evinge jc.
4) Further some nouns of foreign origin ending in
tiif an, aXf aft, tcr, or and oit, as:
Singular. Plural.
N. ber ^alaft' the palace bic $ala^fte the palaces
G. be§ $alaftc§ of the palace ber $aldfte of the palaces
D. bem ^>alaft to the palace ben ^alaften to the palaces
A. ben ^alaft the palace. bie ^aldfte the palaces.
Such are:
X)er (General' the general,
ber ^'arbinal' the cardinal,
ber SlbmiraC the admiral.
*ber ^^laV the vowel,
ber ^a^Iau' the chaplain.
ber SJforaft' the swamp.
ber 5l(tar' the altar,
ber £)f filter' the officer.
ber ©reuabter' the grenadier.
*ber -Poftilliou' the postillion.
Plur. bie ©enera'lc, bie 3So!ale, bie ^Itdre, bie Offijie're 2C.
Words.
'Der SSalb the forest, wood. bie 5^a!^rung the food,
ber (Sd)laf sleep, ber ^lob death, ber ©tord) the stork,
ber 33etter the cousin. ber 2Biuter winter,
ber ^rofc^ the frog. tt>ei6 white. laug long,
brei three, mer four, mit [dat.) with, aber but.
Reading Exercise. 9.
^ie (BiJI^ne be3 iBater^. 3)ie gifd)e be^ ^luffet^. 5luf (on)
bem XifA(e). 5Iuf ben 33dmnen. T^e S3dume be§ 2Balbe8. ®ic
^ogel fini? in bem 2BaIb. jJDie ^'^l)\\t be§ ^i3n3en. 9)tit bem
®tocf(e). 9J?it ben i^iigen. ^iefe ®tiil)le [inb alt. -Sd) ^tte einen
Xramn. "^xt ©olbaten finb auf ben 25?dtlen. 3)ie ^u§c ber §dl)ne
'^aBen ©poren (spurs)*), ^ie ^aldfte ber ^cnige finb gro^. 2Bir
I)aben bie 2:ev^id}e be^ tonig^ ge|et)en. §aben ©ie bie SSolfe
unb B'ud)fe nid)t gefel^en? 3)ie ^reunbe meinevi 33ater§ finb l)ier.
^ie §nnbe beine^ 55etteri^. 5)er ®d)Iof ift ba3 S3ilb (image) be§
3:obe^. §ier finb 3^re ®d)u^e. 2Bo finb meine §anbfcbnl)e?
^itfOaBe. 10.
1. The tables and the chairs of the room. The trees of
the wood. The ramparts of the enemies. The rings of the
girl. The letters of my friends. With the son [Dat.) of my
brother. With the sons of the count. Do you know my
*) The regular form „bie (g^ornen" has now more and more
become obsolete.
38 Lesson 6.
guests? The fishes are in the rivers. We have a table, but
no chairs. I give the dogs to the sons of the Englishman.
The days are long. The trees have branches. I have no stick.
We have no sticks. The curtains of my room are white.
The frogs are the food of (the) storks.
2. The storms of (the) winter are over (i>orftScr). On
the (auf bem) chair of the president. The gloves are on the
table. The fish(es) have no feet. The frogs have no teeth.
The birds are on the trees. My sons have seen two ravens
and four storks. Three months and two days. The banks CDic
Ufer) of the rivers. The name of the officer. The herrings
are fishes. Do you know those two generals? Yes, I know
them (id) feitne fie). The windows of the palace. In the pal-
ace of the king.
Conversation.
2Bo finb bie i^ifd}e? <3ic [iut) in ten i^liifjen.
2Bo fmt) meine bvei onunfcrn?^eunt)en.
whom do you speak?)
23ict>icle (how many) 9)Zonate? ®rci SDZonate.
2Biet)iele Xage? 3)vci cber tier Xa^c.
iele ^ii^c ^t ein §unb? (Sin §unb Ijat tier 5iiJ3e.
ffi3a§ I)aben ©ie gefe^en? 3d) ^abe biegiid)fe unb bie2Bolfc
gefel)en.
^abenbie©d)iilereineni5eierta3? (5ie ^aben j\vci ^eiertage.
2Bo ift ber ©eneral? (Er ift in bem "ipalaft be« ^onig«.
Sixth Lesson.
FEMININE SUBSTANTIVES.
Fourth declension.
The Uli declension comprises all the substantives of
the feminine gender.
In the singular, feminine words remain xmchanged in
all the cases. In the plural, they take either c, or n or CU.
4th Declension.
39
1 ) The true monosyllables take c in the plural, at the
same time softening their vowel.
Example.
Singular. Plural.
N. hfA. bie §ant) the hand bic ^tinbc the hands
Gen. ber |)ant) of the hand bet §anbe of the hands
Dat. ber §anb to the hand, ben |)dnben to the hands.
The other true monosyllables are the following 28:
2)ie %li the axe.
bie 5lngft fear, anxiety,
bie 33anf the bench,
bie Sraut the bride,
bie 53ru[t the breast,
bie i^auft the fist,
bie §rud)t the fruit,
bie ©aiaS the goose,
bie ®ruft the vault,
bie §aut the skin,
bie ^luft the cleft,
bie^raft the force^ strength,
bie Sl^u^ the cow.
bie .^unft the art.
bie Sau3 the louse.
bie Suft the air.
bie Sufi the pleasure, desire.
bie 2)ia9b the maid-servant.
bie WcL^i the power.
bie 9J?au^ the mouse.
bie 9Ja(^t the night.
bie 5Jot the distress.
bie 9^u6 the walnut.
bie @au the sow.
bie ©tabt the town, city.
bie ®rf)nur the string.
bie SSanb the wall.
bie 2Buvft the sausage.
Plur. bie 'Sixttf bie 33an!e, bie ?^riic^te, bie ©diife, bie f ii^e,
bie toifte, bie 3)laufe, bie 9^dci}te, bie 9Hffe, bie ©tdbte 2c.
Note. There are other monosyllabic words of the feminine
gender, which do not follow this mode of forming their plural,
because they were originally dissyllabic, and dropped their c; as:
S)ic i^rau, old German bie g^^aue; bic ^oft and bie germ from the
French: la poste, la forme Sfc. — They belong therefore to the
following class and take Ctt in the plural, as: bic grauctl 2C. A Ust
of them will be found in the 9th Lesson.
2) The dissyllabic and polysyllabic feminine nouns
take tt or en in the plural, without changing the vowel^ for
all the cases. Words ending in I or t have no C before tt.
Examples.
Singular.
N.ifA. bie 33lume the flower
G. ber 33lume of the flower
D. ber Slume to the flower.
Plural.
^' J bic S5lttmett the flowers
G. ber 33iuuieu of the flowers
D. ben 331umen to the flowers.
Singular.
bie ©c^tDefter the sister
ber (Sd)n)efter of the sister
ber ©c^iuefter to the sister.
Plural.
bic (BdjtVt^tcxn the sisters
ber (Sd)n)eftern of the sisters
ben ©d^lDeftern to the sisters.
40
Lesson 6.
Such are:
^ie ^)iofe the rose,
tie S3ieue the bee.
t)ie !&^unte the wound.
t)ie ®tunt)e the hour, lesson,
tie 33ruc!e the bridge,
tie .tircl)e the church,
tie f iTfd)e the cherry,
tie Xci^djc the pocket,
tie "ipflanje the plant,
tie (5d)U(e the school,
tie ^irne the pear,
tie <£tirue the forehead,
tie !irt)iive*) the door,
tie 2;ante the aunt,
tie Sippe the lip.
tie 9^?flfe the nose.
tie i^etev the pen, feather.
tie 3ii[e[ the island,
tie ^Qtel the needle,
tie SJJauer the wall.
tie 5l6fid)t the intention,
tie (2d)meid)elei' (the) flattery,
tie Sd)cnl)eit the beauty,
tie ^tan!l)eit the disease.
tie ?yvei!)eit liberty, freedom.
tie 3Bif)eufd)aft the science,
tie i^veuutfdjaft the friendship.
tie (Svfal)VUiU3 experience. *
tie .^Ocffuung (the) hope.
tie ^"^iivftill**) the princess,
tie ©vcifin the countess,
tie 9kd)baiin the neighbour/.
NB, Observe that all derivative substantives ending in
Ct, ^eit, fcit, fdjaft, Itng and in are of the feminine gender
(see less. 10, i?, 3, p. 58) ; likewise words from foreign lan-
guages ending in ic, if, ton' and idi, such as: tie iO?e(otie',
tie ^JTiufi!', tie ^J^ation' {pL ^f^atio'iien), tie Uiut>evfitat' :c.
Exceptions ('2(u^na§meii).
The following two words are excepted from the mode
of inflexion of this declension, but only in the plural, viz.:
tie 9)? utter and tie 2;Dd)ter.
Smr/ular.
N. tie 3)?Utter the mother
G. ter 9Jhitter of the mother
D. ter 9.T?utter to the mother
A. tie 9}hittcr the mother.
Plural.
N. tie SKuttcr the mothers
G. ter 9}(iittcr of the mothers
D. ten ?DtiUteru to the mothers
A. tie 9)^iitter the mothers.
Singulai-.
tie Xod)ter the daughter
ter XoAter of the daughter
ter 2;od)ter to the daughter
tie Xod}tcr the daughter.
Plural.
bic Xo^itV the daughters
ter 5Xcd)ter of the daughters
ten 'Jed)tern to the daughters
tie Xediter the daughters.
For the few feminine words ending in niS {pi. — ntjf*) see p. 50,
§ 6, and the foot-note**) p. 43.
!l)ie ©trage the street,
tie ^ame the lady,
tie §arbe the colour.
Words.
tie Siete (thel love.
tie ?ilie the lily.
ta^J 53eild)cn [Ist'decl.) the violet.
*) This word is sometimes used without C: bic'S^ilr; but this
is less good.
**) Nouns in in double their tt in the plur., as : bie {jfitrftinnem
4th declension. 41
ber finger the finger. "Die Sampe the lamp.
fcet 5D?viun the man, husband, id) fud)e I seek (for).
i)ie Wild} the milk. id) faitfe I buy. reif ripe.
t)ie Xanhe. the pigeon. id) ceifaiife I sell.
iDie ^ai^e the cat. htrj short, id) feune I know, ret red.
aS'. id) liebc*) I love or like PL \mx liebctt we love or like
till Uebft thou lovest, likest (il)r Iie6eti\ (ye) love or like
er liebt he loves, likes ©ie liebcnj you love, you like,
fie liebt she loves or likes. fie tiebctt they love or like.
Siebeu ©ie? do you love or like?
Reading Exercise. 11.
!iDie ^ante t?e§ ?D'tdt?d)eu§. 3)ie ®tragen t)iefer Sta'Dt. 2)ie
^etern ter ©ciiife. ^ie X^iiren ber ^ivd)e. ^ie ©taDte finfe gro^.
i)xe %axht fcer 9^o[e. S)ie i^'liigel t>er Sieue fiut) !(ein. 5)er
5?nabe ift in t)er (Sd)iile. ®ie ^ird)en fiiib grcj^. S)ie <)tofen iuit>
t^ie Silien finb fd)eiie (pretty) S3lunien. ^&i liebe tie 5Jirnen.**)
Sieben ®ie t?ie -J^iiffe? 5)ie 9J?atd)eu tieben tie ^(umeu. ®ie
^bgel ^aben ^ebern. ^ie ?^inger ber §dut)e finb tleiu. -Sn (in)
tern S3inter fiut) bie 92dd)te lang. -S^ liebe bie 9Jt'dufe nid)t;
a^^x (but) id^ tiebe bie S3ieuen imb bie ^^viuben.
Jtitfga6e. 12.
1. The hands of the ladies. I like the walnuts. The
churches of the town. The boys have no pens. The forehead
of the man is high (^od)) . I like the roses and violets. The
smell (ber ©erild)) of the roses and violets is sweet (angeiiel>m) .
Our hopes are vain (eitel). We know (fenuen) the love of the
mothers. The boys are in (the) school. The ladies are in
(the) church. In three hours. The soldiers have wounds.
Do you know these plants? The cherries are red. I know
the daughters of the countess.
2. You know my intentions. The boy has two flowers in
his hand. These pens are not good (gut). I love my sisters.
The cats catch (faugcu) mice. These pears are not ripe. My
neighbour sells lamps. The lips are red. We sell our cows
and our oxen. These two girls are sisters. My [female]
neighbour sells potatoes (.^avtcffeln) . The mothers love their
daughters. The girls have no needles. The pears are the
fruits of the pear-tree (33itnbaum§).
Conversation,
.^enuen ©ie ben 9^amcn biefer at jtrei §dntJe unb
5Jien)'d)? 5irci ?yiii3C.
53on n)e(d)er ^^avbe fint) t)ie ^ie Sip^en fint) rot.
Sivvcn '<
§at t»er vSoIt5at SBunten? 3fa, ev t;at tide 2Bunt)en.
Sieben (Sie t)ie £'a^en? 3d) liebe fie (them) nid)t.
2Bo fint) t)ic ^amen? 5ie fint> in t?ev fc^e.
2Beld)e tinmen lieben ®ie am ^fd) liebe t)ie9?ofen, t)ie2ilien unt)
meiften (best) ? t)ie 33eild)en am meiften.
SSietoiele ©tunt)en lebte ba^^int) ©8 lebtc bvei Stunt)en.
(did the child live)?
SSic fint) t)ie Straiten t)iefet(Stat)t? aS ®ofd)enf' the present bic©cfd)cufc the presents, gifts
G. tc3 ®efcl}enf^ of the present tev OH'ldunUc of the presents
D. t)em (^VM"d)ont(c) to the present ten (^V'fd)cnfen to the presents
^.\)a^ (^efd^enf the present. 'Die @efd)enfe the presents.
5th declension.
43
Such are:
3)a« ®e[el3 the law.
t)a§ @cfpvdd) the conversation.
t)a§ @eid)aft the business.
t)a^ ©elue^r the gun, musket.
ta§ ©eblrge*) the mountain.
t)a^ @emalt)e*) the picture.
t?a^ (§ebdut)e the building.
t)a§ 3^'"3i^i^**) the testimony.
l?a§ ©e^eimnt^ the secret.
t)a§ 33etenntni§ the confession.
t)a§ ©(ctc^uiS the parable.
ba^ .darnel the camel.
t)a§ Siiftrument' the instrument.
t)a§£ouiplinieut' the compliment.
t)vi§ papier' the paper.
Dag ^D^etaU' the metal.
bag fillet'***) the ticket.
bag ^toujert' the concert.
bag 'iportrdt' ***) the portrait.
bag Sineal, the ruler.
P/wr. S)ie ©efel3C, bie @efd}dftc, bie 3citgmf|c, bie SJJetatle k.
2) Examples of monosyllables.
Singular.
N. bag tiub the child.
6^. beg ^mb(c)§ of the child
n. bem ^Inble) to the child
A. bag ^hlb the child.
Plural.
N. bic ^inbcr the children
G. ber ^^Ulbev of the children
D. ben S^tnbetU to the children
A. bie ^LUber the children.
Such are:
"^d^ 5lmt the office,
bag 33latt the leaf.
bag 33ud} the book,
bag ^i the egg.
bag 33ilb the picrare
bag 9ieft the nest,
bag Ju^U the hen, fowl
bag tyelD the field.
bag %{)a{ the valley.
bag 2i5ort the word,
bag S!alb the calf.
Singular.
bag 3)orf the village
beg 3)orf(e)§ of the village
bem ^orf(e) to the village
bag ©orf the village.
Flural.
bic 2)orfcr the villages
ber 3)i3vfei: of the villages
ben ^ovfern to the villages
bie ^iivfer the villages.
palace.
portrait.
bag Sieb the song.
bag (Sd)tog the castle,
\)0i^ ©elb the money.
bag Samm the lamb.
bag §aug the house.
bag ^eib the wife, woman.
bag ^Ci6:i the roof.
bag ^(eib the dress.
bag Sanb the country, land.
bag ^aubl) the ribbon.
bag ©lag the glass.
Plur. bie Suiter, bie S3Iattcr, bie 33ud)cr, bie 9^efter, bie
(Sier, bie SBiJrter, bie S)dufev, bic §iil)nev, bie Sdnbev jc.
*) Neuter words which end in the Singular in e, do not add
a second c in the plur., as: pi. bie ©eBirge, bie ©emcilbc k.
**) All nouns ending in tti§ form their plural by adding e,
and doubling the f, even two feminine words, as : bie JifcnntniS, know-
ledge; pi. bie ^enntntffe. 2)ic iBejorgtiig, apprehension; p>i- ^i^ ^c-
forgniffe.
***; "With the two words '©iflet and ^ortrcit' the plural form
in s 'bic 33it(et3, bie ^^ortrcit^' is preferred now.
fj 2)er sBanb m. the volume, has its pi. bie 93aTtbe (3rd decl.).
44 Lesson 7.
Note 1. The same mode of inflexion is followed by all
compound words ending in twitt, two of which are masculine :
jDa^ 5laifertum the empire. toer 9teid)tum the riches.
ba'S T^iirftentum the principality, ber Orvtiim the error.
. Plur. tiie ^iirftentiimev, "Die 9?eid)tumcv, 'Die 3rrtiimer k.
Note 2. Some monosyllabic neuter words, especially
those ending in r do not take cr in the plural, but C only,
nor do they soften their vowel:
®a§ §aav the hair; pi. bie §aate.
t^a§ ■3vil)t the year; pi. "Die -3ia^re.
ba'S 5S)?eer the sea; pi. 1)16 9Jteere.
t3a§ Slier the animal; pi. tjie Xteve.
(For the complete list of them see p. 51, § 9.)
Note 3. The neuter word ta§ §ev5 (the heart) admits
of an irregularity in the singular and plural:
Sinff. Norn. ^ Ace. t)a§ g^CYj ; G. 'De'g §er5 e u ^ ; D. fcem §er5eu.
Plur , 1)16 Apt^^S^tt; .. ber §er§en; „ ben l^evjeiu
Words.
jDie ^lufgabe the exercise. i>cr(oren lost.
t)a§ §OTU the horn. leid)t easy, light.
ber ^lOUier the Roman. tltnb round, fleiu small.
Uegeu to lie (belaid). id}|c()clsee. c\\\\\\ green, ueu new.
fiubeit to find, gefuubeii found. fd)mu^Hg dirty. t)ed) high.
fiiigeu to sing. \inet>ier^ how much?
i(^ faiife I buy. gefauft bought, tjiele many.
fpved)en to speak. bie iiieiften most.
Reading Exercise. 13.
3)a^3 33i(b be^ ^iubet^. Die 33ilriv l;abeu bie .^leiber
gefauft. -3n ben _^JJeftevu bev ^Mc\olf
(nation) Uebt [bie] ^vei^eit. !ilV> (where) liegen bie Gicv bev
A^iil)uev? ©ie Ucgen in ben OJeftevn. Die Dd)fen l^viben .Npovnev.
Dev 'i^iivft I)at ein ©d)lD^ v^efauft. Dev STonig bat [eine Vdnbev,
feine ©tdbte unb feine Dcvfev i^evloven. 25}iv '^viben unfve i8Ud)ev
gefunben.
(^nfna6^. 14.
I. This village is small. Those villages are also (aud))
small. The laws of the llomans. The fields are large. The
flowers of the field. The dresses of the girls are red. I see
the roofs of the houses. A brave soldier fights, and, if ne-
cessary, dies willingly for the freedom of his country. The
children have afound la znest. The leaves of the trees are green.
Prepositions. 45
I seek my books. I find the paper in the book. We know the
castles of the princes. He is in his house {Dai.). Our houses are
old. The girl sings a song. Have you seen the presents of my
aunt? I buy two guns. The president has bought two pictures.
2. The books of the children are not new. These rib-
bons are red. The doors of the rooms are shut (gcfdjloffeu) .
Those buildings are very old. We speak of (t)Dn, DaL) the
presents of the king and of the queen. Our father has bought
a house and (a) garden. The girls have bought many eggs.
I find the words of my exercise very easy. These valleys
are beautiful (prad)ti3). The village lies in a valley. We
have bought two fowls. The boy has lost his money.
Conversation.
^ennen ®ie bte ^inber ber ^a, id) feime fie (them).
©rafin ?
2Bie (how) finben @ie fie? 3cb finite fie fel)t fd)on.
§aBen t^ie 5Si)gel 9^efter? 3Ja,'DiemeiftenS[3'i33ell)aben^eftev.
2Bag Uegt in t)em 9^efte? Q&) fej)e toier ©ev.
Sieben ®ie t)ie (Sier? 3a, t)ie Ster t)er ijiiljuer.
^n tuelc^er ®tat)t lebt 3f)r 5Bet^ (Sr Icbt in ^ranffurt.
ter (does your cousin live)?
SSietoiel ®elt) ^aSen (Sie? Qd) I)aBe btei Maxt (marcs)*).
§aBen ®ie 33utter unt) Siet 3d) ^abe t>iele (Sier gefauft; aber
gefauft? (but) !eine 33utter.
2Bie fint) t?ie 33Idtter ber 53aume? (Sie fint) gviin.
2Bo fint) nteine ^ii^er? ©ie fint) in -3^rem 3^i^^^J^^^-
2BeId)e^ §au^ ^at 3l;r 5Satev Sr ^t jtuei §dufer gefauft.
g eta uft?
§at ev auc^ einen ©arten? 9lein, er ^at feinen ©arten; abet
toieic i^elbet.
2Bet ^t biefe 33ilt)er gemalt (Sin t)entfd)er (German) 9}JaIer.
(painted) ?
(Sint) 3^ve 33dnt)er rot? 9^ein, fie fint) griin; abert)ie33dn*
bet mciner ®d)n)cfter fint) rot.
2Berf)att>agaIte®d)Iof3 ge!auft? ®er Sol^n beg ©rafen 9^.
2Beld)e Sdnber finb reid^? (Englant) unt) 5lmeri!a.
Eighth Lesson.
Nouns with prepositions.
Very often the cases of substantives are governed
by prepositions, wliich occur so frequently in most sen-
tences, that they should be learned early. Those govern-
*) One marc of the new German currency is nearly equal to
one shilling English c. —
46 Lesson 8.
ing the dative, the accusative, or both, are more used
than those which govern the genitive case. For the present,
we only give such as are most required. The prepositions
are fully treated, lesson 37.
1) Prepositions with the dative:
2(tt8 out of, from.
bet near, at, by, (with).
mtt with.
nod) after, to {wti/i the name
of a place).
Examples.
5lu§ bem ®arten [dai. masc.) from {out of) the garden.
5lu§ ber e [dat. fem.) after the lesson, &c.
r . 2) Prepositions requiring the accusative:
fcit since.
ijOlt of, from, by.
gtt to, at.
gegen-iiber opposite (to).
©U^f^) through, by
fuv for.
gegen against, towards.
ot)ne without.
urn round, about, at [time).
Examples.
!J)urd) ben 2Balt) (ace. masc.) through the forest (wood).
jDurd) b t e ©trajse [ace. fem.) through the street.
®urc^ bag 3i\i[jer [ace. neut.) through the water.
%\xx meiucii 33rubcv [ace. masc.) for my brother.
%ux nieine (2d}tuefter [ace. fem.) for my sister, etc.
3) The following nine take the dative in answer to
the question yywhcrefa indicating a state of rest, which
is mostly the case. They require however the acctisatice
after the question y^wJiitherfa with a verb denoting a
direction or motion from one place to another.
u6cr over, across.
Ulltcr [place] under.
UUtcv [number) among.
Jtoifdjen between.
2ltl (w. dat.) at. in'^) [dat.) in, at.
an (w. ace.) to. in (w. ace.) into.
duf upon, on. nebcn beside, near.
Winter behind. i}OX*) before, ago.
Examples with the dative (rest).
Od) ftcI)C an bem ^euftev [dat. neut.) I stand at the window.
5luf bem Xi\A) [dat. 7nasc.) on (upon) the table,
^n bem §Df(e) idat. masc.) in the (court-)yard.
3n ber <3tabt [dat. fetn.) in (the) town.
*] in and tloVf when denoting ^trne, always take the dative.
Prepositions. 47
35ov bem ^^enfter [dat. neut.) before the window.
S5or*) elner ©tunbe {dat. f em.) an hour ago.
Examples with the accusative (motion).
3d^ ge^e an bag ^enfter I go to the window.
-3d) ge^e iiBer ben %i)X% I go over the river.
3id) gel)e Winter bag §ang I go behind the house.
©teUen ©ie eg t>or bag ^enftev put it before the window.
4) Prepositions with the genitive case:
2Sal)renb during I ftatt or anftatt instead of.
tuegen on account of. |
Examples.
2BaI)renb beg 9?egeng during the rain.
ftatt 07' anftatt etneg 33nefe3 instead of a letter.
5) Several of the above prepositions may be contracted
with the definite article, in which form they are in ver^
general use. ^
5lm for an bent, as: am ^enfter (rest), at the window.
ang for an bag, as: ang ^enftev (motion), to the window,
aufg for anf bag, as: aufg Sanb (motion), into the country.
tttt for in bem, as: im 2Bintev in winter.
vx^ for in bag, as: ing 2Ba[fer (motion), into the water,
beim for bet bem, as: beim %i)^x (rest), near the gate.
burd)g for burd) bag, as: burd)g ^euev [ace], through the fire.
t>om for ton bem, as: torn ^tarft [dat.], from the market.
toorg for toor bag, as: ijorg ^enftet before the window.
i'lberg for iiber bag, as: iiberg WtQ.x across the sea.
5Um for jn bem, as: ^um 55atev (I go) to the father,
jur for ju ber, as: jur 9Jinttev to the mother.
Words.
^er §of the yard. bet SSinter (the) winter.
bag ^a.&f the roof. ber SJRantel the cloak.
ber ^rieg (the) war. 2Bi(betm William.
bet 9tabe (2. decl.) the raven. gefaUen fallen, leben to live.
bie ^anbe the pigeon. bie 92id)te the niece.
ber t^ieben peace. bie £alte the cold.
bag S3ett the bed. fpieten (to) play.
bag §Drn the horn. id) effe I eat. fliegen to fly.
bag ^vit^ftiid breakfast. !anfen to buy. n^ar was.
bag SD^ittageffen (the) dinner. ju §aufe at home.
Reading Exercise. 15.
3n bem §ofe (im §of). 5Iug bem ©artcn. 5luf bem !Dac^.
^ie jtaube fliegt anf bag (aufg) 5)ac^. -Gfm ^rieg unb im t^rieben.
*) See the foot-note *) p. 46.
48 Lesson 8.
!Die ^inbcr fviden t?or fccm ^aufe. ^or bev 9^ad)t. ^er 25oget
fi^t (sits) auf t)em 33auiu. 3)ie ^ifcl)e leben tm SSaffer. 2)?eiu
$ut i[t (has) in^ 2Ba[|cv gcfallen. i)a^ ^ebcrmcfjcr teS ^uoben
Uegt auf tern Xifd)(c). !li^cr §unt) liegt uuter t)em 33ctt. jDiefc
^ud)er [iuD fiiv meinen Sel^rer. ■3()te 2;Dd)ter ift bei (with) meincr
(5d)tveftcr. ®ie ®clt)aten fpredjen »oii Dcm iTvteg. !Dag (that)
rear iudt^reut) t)eg £vioget>. -^d) bleibe (stay) ju §aufc tregen beiS
9fegen§. 3)a§ 33ett [to^t (stands) iieben t)er Xt)uve. Urn tjier
U^r (at four o'clock) bill id) 311 §aufe.
jVwfGaOe. 16.
1. Out of the room. Near the castle, I eat with a spoon.
After the rain. The oxen butt (]tcJ30n) with their horns. We
see (fet)en) with our eyes (2Iugcn). The boys go (gel;en) through
the forest. The pupils speak of (\}on) the school. We speak
of (Coil) the weather. I was in the street during the rain.
|JN''illiam is on the tree. Go (get)eu <2ic) into the yard [Ace).
™'he boy has (ift) fallen into the water. The tree lies in the
water. My penknife is in my pocket. Against the door.
Put (ftedeu ©ie) your penknife into your pocket. My cloak
hangs (l;)angt) behind the door. I have seen many flowers
in the field.
2. The eggs lie in the nests of the [Gen.) birds. There
(Co) was a raven among the pigeons. Before (the) breakfast.
We play after (the) dinner. He was in his room. The table
stands near the window. Before (the) winter many birds fly
[put: fly many birds) across the sea. We stay (bleiben) at
home on account of the rain. The dog runs (lauft) round the
house. Those apples are for my niece, and these pears are
for my son. The count was at home at (uni) three o'clock.
zTwo sdays lago.
Conversation.
2Bo fit^t bet 5SogeI? (Sr fi^^t auf bcm-Ta* t?e^§aufc3.
2Bo ift 2Bill)clm'^ (Sv ift im ©aiteu otcv iut $)of.
SBo ift meiu iU'autel? (Sv l)angt l^intet t)cr ^l)iire.
SBcr l)a£nieiu (5*ct5ormcffev? (Sv^ licgt auf t)cm Xifd).
§aben ^ie luciueu §ut gcfc'^cn? ^a, ev ift untcvt^cuXifd^gefaUeu.
^cl^er' (whence) KMumcu ©ie? Od) feinnie \>oni iWarft (market).
aBaii l)abeu ©ic gctauft'^ 3fd) Ijabc ^rvf*-'^ 1^11^ '-^^'"H^ G^'f^"t^-
2Bol)iu' (where) gcljcn ©ic? 3d) gel)c auf (to) tcu 9)iavft.
2Bol)iu' fliegeu tiele il>cger^ (3ie flicgeu iibcr-3 i)ceer.
SBauu (when) fliegeu fie fort 55ov beni 2Btuter.
(fly off", leave)?
SBaruni (why) fliecieu fie fort? 93?egeu ber ^Talte fce3 iBiuterv^.
(Siut) (£ie uod) (still) im ibett? 3a, id) biu frauf.
SBo ^abcn Sic biefe ^^cild)en dd) ^abc fie iu tern t^elf ge«
ipl.) gefuuben? fuuben.
Irregular Plurals. ' 49
$aben ©ie feme (none) in Win, tc^ faun !etne (cannot —
3f^iem ©arten? any) finfcen.
t^ux iuen (whom) finb biefe ©ie finb fiir ba§ 5?inb meine^
tir[cl)en? 5^ad}bar«.
^on icem Ijaben ©ie t)ie[e ®e* SSon nteinem 5?ater unb con mei*
fc^eufe {pi.) er^tten (received)? net iD^uttev.
^on njag fpied^en tie (Solt>viten ? (Sie fpred^en com ^rieg (war) .
3fft 3^ve 2)iutter 3U §aufe? 3^ein, fie ift nid^t gu §aufe, fie
ift au§gegangen (gone out).
Mntli Lesson.*)
Irregularities in the formation of the plural.
Most of the exceptions, which in other grammars
are included amongst the declensions, are irregular only
in the plural. We therefore think it proper to range
them all under one head.
I. Irregular plurals of the first declension.
§ 1. The following substantives take n in the plural
without modifying the vowel:
SDer 23aier the Bavarian.
t)er 33auer the peasant,
ber S3etter the (male) cousin,
ber @et)atter the godfather.
ber ^^ZadjSar the neighbour,
ber ©tad)et the sting,
ber ^autoffel the slipper.
ber yjiu^fel the muscle.
Plur. S)ie 53aierii, bie Saucvn, bic ^ettevn, bie 9Zad)bavn 2c.
Note. The word bcT (S^arat'ter has in the pi. bic (S^arafte're.
§ 2. Words taken from the Latin in or with the ac-
cent on the last syllable but one, form their plural in oren:
3)er jDolt'tor the doctor; pi. bic ^ofto'ren.
ber ^rofef'fov the professor; pi. bie ^vofefjo'ren :c.
Kote. 2)er 2}iaior' the major; pi. bie 2J?ajo're (3rd decl. 4).
n. Irregular plurals of the third declension.
§ 3. Eight words take in the plural en instead of c:
S)er ©taat the state,
ber ©tra!^t the beam, ray.
ber ©porn the spur,
bev ^orn the thorn.
ber ©d)mcr5 the pain.
t)ev SUJaft the mast.
t»er ^fau the pea- cock.
ber (See**) the lake.
Plur. 3)ie ©taaten, bie ©tr allien, bie (Sd)mev5 e n , bie ©ceu 2c.
*) The 9th and 10th lessons may be reserved for some weeks later.
**) Notice: There is also a feminine word bic @ee the sea
(= bag 9Jieer) which has no plural.
OTTO, German Conv. -Grammar.
50
Lesson 9.
§ 4. The following masculine nouns take cr in the
plural, at the same time modifying the vowel:
!Der 9J?anu the man, hus-
band,
ber SBalt) the forest.
t)er ?eib the body,
ber ®eift the mind, ghost.
"Der 2Burm the worm.
ber dlan'd the edge.
ber ®Dtt the God.
ber Drt the place.
bev 35ormunt) the guardian.
bev 9?eid)tum the riches.
t)er -Gfrrtum the mistake, error.
Plur. ®ie 9J?dnncr, tie 2BaIt?er, t)ie 2ei6er, bie SBiirmer 2c.
III. Irregularities of. the fourth declension.
§ 5. Twenty-nine feminine monosyllables form their
plural in en, without modifying the vowel :
jDte %xt the kind, species.
tie 33at)n the road.
t)te 33aii! the bank.
t)ie ^ud)t the bay.
t)te S3urg the old castle,
strong hold,
bte i^a'^vt the passage.
t)te ?^(ut the field or fields.*)
t)ie l^lut the flood.
t)te §orm the form,
bie ^rau the woman,
bie ®(ut the blaze,
bic 3fac;b the chase,
bte 2aft the load, weight.
btc9J?ar! the boundary, mark,
bie ^]>flid)t the duty.
bte 'iPoft the post-office, post.
bie Oual the torment, pang.
bie (S(^ar the troop.
bie ®cl)lad)t the battle.
bie ®d)rift the writing.
bie ©d)ulb the debt.
bie ^^ur the trace, track.
bie Xi)at the deed.
bie 2^rad)t the costume.
bte U^r the watch, clock.
bie 2Ba^( the choice, election.
bie 2BeIt the world.
bie ^0.^ the number, figure.
bie i^eit the time.
Plur. ^te 33al)nen ((Sifenbal)nen railroads), bie S3anfen, bie
^rauen, bie ?a[ten, bie ^flid)tcn, bie ©d)Iad)ten, bie®d)ulbcn, bie
3^t>aten, bie Ut)ven, bie 3BeIteu, bie 3^l)Ien, bie 3^^ten.
§ 6. The termination c is assumed for the plural
by four polysyllabic feminine words ending in ttt§ and f al :
3)ie ^enutniS knowledge; pi. bie 5lenntni]fe.
bie 33efDvgm^ fear; pi. bie Seforjuiffe apprehensions,
bie 55;;riib[al sorrow; pi. bie 2;rub|ale.
bie jDvangfal vexation; pi. bie ^rvinc^fale miseries etc.
§ 7. The two words: bte SKuttct (the mother) and
bie 2;o(^ter (the daughter) form their plural:
bte aj^iltter. | bie 2:iJ(!^ter (see p. 40).
Words.
!l)ie ©onne/. the sun. Icben (or luotjneii) to live.
ba« (3d)laf simmer the bedroom, bet $eibc the heathen.
*) The German word ^tiir mostly means fields and meadows
together, the whole of the fields or grounds of a village, township etc.
Irregular Plurals, 51
t)ie (Stbe the earth. berul;mt celebrated,
tmmer always. ^ed or !(ar clear,
arm poor, reid) rich.
Reading Exercise. 17.
!l)te ©ta(^eln feet 33tene. ®te "ipatttoffetn ber ©rafin. ®le
S3auera fmt) ntc^t retd^. ^ie '^rofefforen biefer ©c^ute finb Be*
Tul)mt. 5)te ©trafjleu ber ©onne [inb tuarm. ®a§ £inb lelbet
(suffers) groge @d)met^^eu. 2Ber finb btefe 9JJauner? ®le 2Bimner
leben in ber @rbe. ®lefe U^ren finb fe^r !(etn. ■3f(^ femie meine
^ftic^ten. Xie ©ornen ber S^ofen finb fletn. S)iefe§ Saub ^at
tiele (SifeiiBal^nen.
<^ttfga6<». 18.
Where are my slippers? Your ilippers are in your
bedroom. The students praise (loBen) their professors, but
the professors praise not always their pupils. Those forests
are very large. Do you know these men? I have seen two
tall (groge) men. I know my duties. These women are very
poor. The peasants have cows and oxen. The beams of
the sun are very warm. The cocks have spurs. The water
of the lakes is clear. Do you know the. names of the gods
of the heathens? The roses have thorns. The united (i?er*
eintgten) States of (tjon) America are very rich.
IV. Irregularities of the fifth declension,
§ 8. Seven neuter words form their plural by taking Cti:
^a§ S3ett the bed; pi. bte 33ettCtt.
ba^ §emb the shirt; pi. bie §emben.
bag ^erj the heart; pi. bie |)erjeu.
ba§ £)^x the ear; pi. bie £)§ren.
bag 2luge the eye; pi. bte Slugen.
bag @nbe the end; pi. bie (gnben.
bag 3nfe!t the insect; pi. bie ^nfe!ten.
§ 9. A few monosyllabic neuter words do not follow
the general rule in forming their plural: they take C
instead of cr, and do not alter the vowel.
1) Those ending in r; they are eight:
bag ^aar the hair.
bag §eer the army
bag Sa'^r the year.
bag ?D^eer the sea.
bag ^aar the pair, couple.
bag S^o^r the reed.
bag Xier the animal, beast.
bag SI) or the gate.
Plur. ^ie §aare, bie 3fal)re, bie 2J?eere, bie 2:ier'e :c.
Note. A second r would render the sound too harsh.
4*
52 Lesson 9.
2) Those which would be confounded in the plural
with similar words ending in cr*); they are four:
jDa§ ®c^af the sheep. t5a« ©eil (Zan) the rope.
t)a^ ©cbiff the ship. t)a^ ici the play, game.
Plur. ®ie (Sc^afe, bic ©d^iffe, tie <3^)iele k.
3) Also the following take c**):
^a« S3ein the leg.
t)a§ S8eil the hatchet.
t>a^ 33rDt the bread.
bag 53oot the boat.
bvig SDing the thing,
bag l^eU the hide, skin.
bag -Pfunb the pound.
bag @ift the poison.
bag §eft the copy-book.
bag Sod) the yoke.
bag ^nit the knee.
bag ^og the lot, fate.
bag 9^et5 the net.
M^ "^Pfeib the horse.
bag 9ied)t the right.
bag ^el) the deer, roe.
bag dtcid) the empire, kingdom,
bag 9?oJ3 the horse, steed,
bag ©alj the salt,
bag (Sd)iDein the pig, swine.
bag ^Bert the work.
bag ©tiicf the piece.
bag Qcn^ (the) stuff.
bag >ild the aim, end, goal.
Few. ^ie S3elne, bie 53eile, bie "jpferbe, bie SBerfe k.
§ 10. The following neuter words of two syllables
take cr in the plural:
2)ag ©eniiit the temper.
bag @e[d)Icd)t the gender.
bag ©cmad) the apartment.
bag ©etranb the garment.
bag ^^egiiuent' the regiment.
bag ©vital' the hospital.
Plur. ®ie ©emitter, bie @efd)led)ter, bie ©etrdnber,
bie ^iegimentev, bie ©pitdler 2c.
§11. A few neuter words terminated in al and tttlll
derived from the Latin, take ten in the plural:
bag Capital' the capital, fund; pi. bie ilapita'Iien.
bag 2)Uncrar the mineral; pi. bie ^J^nera'Ueii.
bag Otubium the study; pi. bie ©tu'bien.
T. Additional remarks on tlie plural.
§ 12. Several nouns have a double form of the
plural, when their meaning is different:
*) For instance, the plural of @c^af rcgidarly formed should
be <^6)'d\tx. Now there is such a word : ;;/. bic @(^afer meaning the
shepherds. Thus: bet ^^ciler = the rope -maker; bcr ©c^iffcr the
boatman; bcr ©^icler the player, pi. bic iS^-nelcr the players.
**J Most of them have a double vowel which does not admit
of a modification. Where one has been dropped in the German
orthography, it appears still in the English words , as : ©rot from
bread, ''|>|unb from pound, ©c^af from sheep etc.
Irregular Plurals.
53
.. m^„. _ / the bench; pi. fcie 33anfe.
!3)a«S3anb^
or
the ribbon; pi. "Die 33dnt>er.
\ the bond, tie; pi. bie 33ant)e.
ft)ie CDinge.
t)a§ !!Dmg the thing ; pi. { bie 3)inger (contemptuously
' j okingly) .
w^, rxx^r'^. \ the face; pi. bie ®efid)ter.
tKl§ Boxt the word; pi. I ^1^ |^^^|f = separate words.
' -^ \ bie JlBorte == expressions.
t)a^ Sant? the country; pi. bie Sdnber and (poet.) t?te Sanbe.
§ 13. There are a great many German substantives
which, from their signification, cannot he used in the
plural, whilst others are wanting in the singular. To
the first kind (no plural) belong:
1) The names of metals:
©a^ ®olb gold. |ba§ (gifen iron.
ba§ ©ibet silver. | ba§ Slei lead, etc.
2) The names of substances and materials:
bag 9JJel)l meal, fiour.
®er §ontg honey.
bag 2Bad)g wax.
bag ^leifd) meat.
3) General and abstract
3)ie ^ebe love.
bag ®lucf hapiness.
bie ^dlte cold,
bte SBarme warmth.
bie ©etfte barley,
bev ®anb sand.
terms, such as:
bie -3ugenb youth,
ber ^^u^m glory, fame,
ber erfaufen biefe 33auern?
2Bo finb bie ^antoffeln meiner
aj^ntter?
2Sev tft ba (there)?
Sieben (Sie ^:^re 55ettern?
2©er finb biefe §erren?
2Bd finb bie 9)?anner?
2Bomit fted)en un« bie 9tofen?
SKomit idmpfen bie g)dl)ne?
2BieiDiele 2lugen unb D^ren 'i}at
ein 5D^enfd)?
3u n)etd)er iicrgattung gel^Bven
bie 33ienen?
einb Q^xe ^^ferbe alt?
SSer finb biefe Seute?
unb
Qd) !enne ■3'^re 9'Jac^barn
Q^xt 9^ad)barinnen.
©ie i3er!aufen ^artoffeln.
©ie finb in il;rem (her) (Sd)Iaf*
simmer.
®ie 3)D!toren finb ba.
-3(^ liebe alle meine SSettern.
(g^ (they) finb ^aufteute.
©ie finb im @arten.
5D^Ht il)ren ©omen.
Wit i^ren ©pornen.
(gin SJJenfd) tjat jn^ei ^lugen unb
jvcei Dbren.
©ie finb 3fnfe!ten.
^dn, fie finb jung.
©ie (or eg) finb ^merifaner.
_ *) or '21/2 ^ito Budcr unb lV2,tito taffee', one Kilogram or
*Kilo' of the new German weight being equal to two pounds f^^fuitb)
of the old, which in common "life is still very much used.
56 Lesson 10.
5?enncn ®ie bie 2Bet"fe blefe« 3^a, {eineSSJcrfefinbfe^rbetu^mt.
3)id)ter8?
(Bint) afle ?[Reere tlef? 9^eui, nici^t atle 2T?eere fmb tief.
Seben bie Slffeu in 2Bd(bem ober (Sie leben in 2Balbern.
in ber (gbene?
• Tenth Lesson.
On the Gender of Substantives.^)
(SSon bent ®c[d^tcd^t ber ^au^tiuorter.)
The gender of the German nouns substantive having
been established in course of time, not according to fixed
principles, but rather by custom and arbitrary use, gen-
eral and precise rules cannot be given. This circum-
stance renders the study of the German language some-
vs^hat more difficult than it otherwise would be.
The knowledge of the gender however being indis-
pensable, we recommend the pupil, when learning a Ger-
man substantive, carefully to acquire at the same time
the article denoting the gender. We shall therefore ac-
company each with its corresponding article.
The gender of a substantive may be known either
by its signification^ or by its termination.
A. Masculine (mannttd^) are:
1) All appellations of men and male animals:
!3)er 35ater the father,
ber f iJnig the king.
ber 2et)rer the teacher, master,
ber ®d)neiber the tailor.
bet 2CDlf the wolf.
ber 33ar the bear.
ber §a!)n the cock.
ber 2Ib(ev the eagle.
Except the diminutives in d)tn and tetu, which are all neuter,
as: bag ^citerc^en, baS ©o^nlein the little son; ba§ ^a^uc^eu chicken
(comp. No. 4).
Note : This rule explains why all those substantives of the 2nd
decl. ending in e (see p. 31 and 32 \ like ber ^natc the boy, ber
SIffe the monkey etc., are of the masculine gender. It is because they
denote male living beings. *
2) The names of the seasons, months and days:
bet SJ^ontag Monday.
jDet 2i3lntct winter.
bet ©onnnet summer.
bet 9}Jai May.
bet 3;ult July.
bet iVteitag Friday.
bet Diotj^en the mominp.
bet '^U^enb the evening.
*) See the footnote *) p. 49.
On the gender.
3) The names of stones:
jDer Clamant' the diamond. I ber Dtubxn' the ruby,
ber ^tefel the flint. |ber (Stein the stone.
4) Most words ending in ctt which are neither di-
minutives in 6)VX nor substantified ififinitives*) as:
ber 9?urfen the back.
ber 9^amen the name.
t)er ^afceii the thread.
jDer ©arten the garden.
t)er 9^egen the rain,
ber 33ot)en the floor, ground.
Except: 2) a 8 ^t[]en the cushion; baS S3e(fen the basin; baS
SBa:^)^en the coat of arms.
5) Five words ending in double c:
jDer (Srf)nee snow. Iber £affee coffee.
ber (See**) the lake. [ber X^ee tea. bet ^lee clover.
6) All derivatives ending in ig, x6)f tttg and Hng:
jDer ^ont9 the king,
ber 2^eppt% the carpet.
ber §ering***) the herring,
ber -Siingling the youth.
B. Of the feminine gender (meiBUd^) are:
1) All female names and appellations:
5)te i^rau the woman. Ibte ^onigtu the queen.
bte 2^od)ter the daughter. | bie Slmme the nurse.
Except the words: 3)a§ SSei6 the wife; bag graitettjunmer a
female person, a woman; baS SJicibci^eit the girl, and baS ^raukitt
Miss; the two latter because they are diminutives^ viz. of btc 2Ragb
(maid) and bic ^rau (woman).
2) All dissyllabic substantives ending in c (not ee), with
their compounds, denoting inanimate objects (S. p. 56, Note):
SDte 33(ume the flower,
bte (Sc^ute the school,
bte (Stunbe the hour,
bte (Strage the street,
bie @rbe earth,
bte Siebe love.
bte f irfdie the cherry.
bie ^ivne the pear.
bie (Sid}e the oak.
bie Si^ainie the fir.
bie (St)re the honour.
bie §ilfet) the help.
Note 1. Hence the sun is feminine in German; bic (Sonne;
but the moon is always masculine: ber SJionb.
Except the three words : bag 2Iuge the eye ; baS @nbe the end ;
bag @rBe the inheritance, in which words the final e is only added
for euphony, for ^ug, (gnb, (Srb.
*) These both are neuter, see C. 4 and 5, p. 59.
**) See the foot-note **) p. 49.
***) For more words of this kind see p. 37, § 3.
f) See also the 4th declension p. 40.
58 Lesson 10.
Note 2. Words like ber Sfiamc, ber @ame ic. (see p. 29, Obs. 1;
cannot be considered exceptions, as their true form ends in en:
ber Xiamen, ber @amcn jc.
3) All derivative nouns formed with the final syllables
ci*) (old c^), 1)t\if itxi, f^aft, ung and in; and all nouns
of foreign origin in ic, ton, if and iai (S. p. 40):
Die ®d)mel(i)ekl flattery.
t)ie ©flaceret slavery,
bte i^rci^eit liberty.
t)ie (Sd)i3n!^eit beauty.
t)ie i^reunt)fd)aft friendship,
bie jDan!6arfeit gratitude.
\)\t Ubetfe^ung the translation.
t)ie ^offuung hope.
t)ie ©c^cifevin the shepherdess.
bte ^oe[ie' poetry.
bie $erfDn' the person.
tie 2J^ajeftdt Majesty.
Except: ba§ ^etfdjaft the seal, and ber ^ornung, an old word
for gebruar February.
4) The few nouns ending in a^if nt^t, ttib and nnft:
bte ©ebult) patience,
bie ©d)ulb guilt, debt.
bie S3ernunft reason,
ble 5ln{'unft the anival etc.
3)le ®d)lad)t the battle,
bie 9^ac^t the night,
bte 58ud)t the bay, gulf,
bie §ulb the favour.
C. Of the neuter gender (jac^ttd^) are:
1) The letters of the alphabet: ba§ 59, ba« 50?, ba§ 3.
2) The names of metals, except: bet ©ta^(, the steel,
bie '$latina platina or platinum, also called 'white gold' ;
but bag "ipiatiu.
!J)a« ©otb gold. I ba§ (Sifcn iron,
bag (Silber silver. | bai3 Slei lead,
3) The names of countries and places (cities, villages,
provinces, islands etc.) : granfveid; France; 9iom Rome. —
The article bag however is only used, when an adjective
precedes: bag !at^o(ifd;e ©vauieu Catholic Spain; bag reid^e
i^onbou jc.**)
Except: bie @ci^t»cij Switzerland and all names of countries
ending in ci which are femvitne such as bie SUrtei Turkey, bie
9J?otigoIei Mongolia, bie €artarci Tartary, bie 53itd;arei Bokhora etc.
cfr. p. 58, B, 3) and p. 67, 1). Moreover some maficuline names of
provinces and countries as ber 83rei«gau, ber @uubgau, bet 3Sorart'
berg jc.
*) 3) as (Si the egg; ber ®d;rei or ba§ ©cfd^rci the cry, scream;
ber 53rei pap, are no derivatives, but roots.
**) But when the name of a country is masculine or feminine,
it takes the article, as: ber ii3rci>Jgau, bie ^^alj ic.
On the gender. 59
4) The infinitive mood, when used substantively:
®ag Sffen eating.
t)a§ S^riiiten drinking.
t)a§ Seben life.
ba§ ^au(^eit smoking.
t)a0 2e[en reading.
bag 3^er(5nitgen the pleasure.
5) All diminutives in rS^etl and kin, without exception:
!5)a§ aRat)d)en the girl. |ba§ Mnblein the baby.
bag §dugd}en the little house. | bag SiiiiiK^en the little flower.
6) Most collectives beginning with the prefix (^t and
which have for their root vowel one of the thin vowels
tf if ttf Of Uf as:
jDag ©ebirge the mountain,
bag ®emd(be the picture.
bag ®eii}i3If the clouds.
bag ©ebdube the building.
bag @e[d)dft the business,
bag @efc^en! the present.
Exception: bie ®efcf)id;te history.
NB. Collectives with @e having for their root vowel one of
the dark vowels a, o, u or au mostly are Masc. as: ber ®eban!e
the thought; ber ©ebraud^ the use; ber ®e[d;mad taste; bcr ®eruc^
the smell.
Exc: Fern, are: bie ©efatir the danger; bte ©eBiirt birth ; btc
©etcalt power; bte ©eftalt shape; bie ©ebulb patience, and a few
others.
7) Substantives ending in ni^ are partly neuter,
partly feminine; their number however is very small.
neuter. feminine.
^(i^ ^tViO^ai^ the evidence.
3)ag S3egrdbnig the funeral,
bag 33ebiirfnig the want,
bag @ebdd)tmg the memory, etc.
bie ^infteniig the darkness,
bie ^enntnig knowledge.
bie 33etrubntg affliction.
bte Sxiaubnig permission, etc.
D. Gender of compound substantives.
The gender of compound substantives is generally that
of the last component: bie §augt^ure the street-door
(from bag §aug and bte %^\\xt)\ bag S^tntenfa^ the ink-
stand; ber ^albgbraten roast veal; bte SSlutetjett winter.
Except: bie ©ro^mut generosity, bie €attftmut meekness, and bie
2)emut humbleness (from berSJZut disposition of mind, courage).
Note. S)te 2lnttt)ort the answer, is not a compound word.
E. Double Gender.
The following nouns have a double gender on account
of their different meaning:
60
Lesson 10.
moec.
!Der S3anb the volume,
ber 33auer the peasant,
ber S^ov the chorus.
t)er (Srbe the heir,
ber 5)cit)e the heathen,
ber §Ut the hat.
ber liefer the jaw.
ber ^mibe the customer.
ber Setter the conductor.
ber ®(l)ilb the shield.
ber ©ee the lake.
ber X\)ox the fool.
ber ^erbieuft the gain.
fern, or neuter.
®a^33anb the ribbon, tie, bond.
ba§ Sailer the bird-cage.
ba« (5t)or the choir.
ba'3 (Srbe the inheritance,
bie §eibe (or §aibe) the heath.
bie §Ut (the) heed, guard,
bie liefer the pine (a sort of fir) .
bie .^uube knowledge, news,
bie ?eiter the ladder.
bag (Sc^ilb the sign (of an inn) .
bie (See the sea.
ba§ !Ji)or the gate,
bag ^crbieuft merit.
F. Formation of female appellations.
Most appellations of male individuals allow a female
appellation to be formed, by adding the syllable in:
masc.
2)er ^onig the king,
ber T^iirft \ ,,
ber 2RaIer the painter.
ber 9fJad)bar the neighbour.
ber ^iinftler the artist.
ber Snglaubcr the Englishman.
1) When monosyllables
jDer ®raf the count,
ber ^od) the cook,
ber §unb the dog.
ber SBolf the wolf.
fern.
bie ^onigin*) the queen,
bie Aiirftin \ ,,
bie ^riu^effin I '^^ P""'^^'''
bie 9J?a(eviu the female painter,
bie 9lad)barin the « neighbour.
bie .^iinftlerin the female artist,
bie Suglcinberin the English lady.
they modify their vowel:
bie ©riifiu the countess,
bie 5lerf)in the female cook,
bie ^piiubin the bitch,
bie feolfin the she-wolf etc.
2) If the masculine ends in e, this letter is rejected:
jDer 9hlf(e the Russian,
ber i^vaiijofe the Frenchman,
ber Sotue the lion.
bie 9hiffiu the Russian lady.
bie f^vairjcfiu the French lady,
bie Si5lDin the lioness.
Exception: ber ©cittfd^e the German, fern, bie 2)eutf(!^e the
German lady. (See also the Note 1, p. 69. j
3) Wen the gender of persons or animals is denoted
by different words, the syllable in is not added:
In the plural all these nouns double their It; SJSitiflittttcn*
On the gender.
61
^^r QX 23vut)er the brother.
"Det £)l)eim, £)nfel the uncle.
^ei" 9ieffe nephew.
l?er 33etter the cousin.
feev ^naBe the boy.
t)er SitiigUng the youth.
"Der SunggefeE the bachelor.
t)ev 33rautigam the bridegroom.
^er 2CtttDer the widower.
^ie ^rau 1 the mistress, wife,
t)ie ®ame j the lady.
bie ^D^utter the mother.
t)ie Xo6.)tex the daughter.
bte ©cJ^lDeftev the sister.
bie Zaxiit the aunt.
t)te i)lid)te the niece.
tjie Safe (^oufine) the cousin.
bag 9)iat)(^en the girl.
bag ^vauletn (the) Miss.
bie 3ungfer (Sungfrau) the maid.
bie Sraut the bride.
bie S53ittoe the widow.
Words.
!Der ^^tget the tiger. ber ©attnet the gardener.
®er 5B3tnter (the) winter. ber ©d)aufpicler the actot.
bie Beit (the) time. bie ^iirje (the) shortness,
bie ©i^terin the poetess. ber . Suifen or t)er Suife
A. Sulfe or (bte) Suife.
Such are:
Smi'Ite Emily.
^Ima'Ue Amelia.
iSIi'fabet^ EHsabeth.
§en'Tiette Henrietta, Haniet.
9}iatte' Mary.
9J?ari'en§ orberSJJ.
9J?ari'en or ber 9J^.
QJ^arieorbie^IRarie.
(Slife Eliza.
(glifenS or ber ©life
(SUfen or ber ©life
(glife or ble (SUfe.
SJlar'garete Margaret.
Su'cie Lucy.
^a'roUne Caroline.
^oi)an'ite §aiind)en Jane.
Note 1. Feminine names in a take only ^ in the Genitive
and remain unchanged in the two other cases, as :
Smmag, ®ara§, 2(nna8, ^yJofaS, li?aura0, ^raitjtSfoS.
Note 2. When Ma7y is the name of a queen or other
historical person, it is 9J? aria, as: ^D^arta ©tuart, 3)Jaria
X^cxe'^ia (empress of Austria) etc. G. SD^arta^.
4) When foreign names end in a single ^, as: 5l(*
!iH'abeg, (S(t'a§, 2lugU'ftU§ JC, the article is required for
the genitive and sometimes for the two other cases.
iV. 2luguftu<3 Augustus. D. (bem) SluguftU'S to Aug.
G. ht§ ^luguftuS of Aug. A. (ben) Sluguftu^ Augustus.
Examples.
!Da§ Seben ^tS 5l(fibtabe§ the life of Alcibiades.
3)er Xot> beg 5lltguftug the death of Augustus.
Qdf betDunbre ©o'frate^ (or ben OB' !i!utfc, SRubeitS' (Semalbc, 3^^^^^' ©ebtd^te (Luisa by
Voss, the picture of Rubens, the poems of Zedlitz .
6) In the dative case, masculine names generally re-
main unchanged. We say: bei ^omer, t)ou (^d^tUer, ju
®5U;e, miter '4iiguftit§ :c., not: bei fcem joiner, t)on bem
(Sc^itter 2C. With Christian names , however, the article
is often employed; we may say:
®eben on) England, was the son of Henry the Fourth ; he
married (ijcira'tetc) Catherine, the daughter of Charles the
Sixth, king {Gen.) of France (ton ^ranh'eid)). Give it to my
uncle, the doctor [Dat.). The reign of the emperor Charles
the Fifth (§ 11). Where is Miss Louisa? She (fie) is with
(bei) her aunt, Mrs. Walther (§ 8).
Conversation.
2Sd tDar 5larl« 33atev geftevn? (Sv ti>av in 3^van!fntt (Frankfort) .
SQ5d ift Snifenv^ Stantc? ©ie ift in Hamburg.
T^iit \Mtn (whom) babcn (Sie bicfc ^ilr 5^avl nnb ^^tiebric^.
®d)n'^e gcfauft?
2Bie ^cif^t bie 5?i3ntgin t)ou ®ic l^eigt 53iftovia.
(Sngtanb ?
2Bev Wiccc i^r ®emat)( (consort)? ^>rin5 ^Ubcvt.
2Bev tDar (5ofvate«? (Sin beviil)niter (renowned) ^>^i«
lofovt}'.
Proper Names of countries. 67
2Ber toax bet ©iegev (conqueror) 3)er en3Ufc[)e ^Ibmiral 9^etfon.
2Ber tx>av ber Setter ^te^-anberg 2lrtftoteIeg, etn griedjifc^er 293elts
beg ©ro^eit ? lt)ei|ev (a Grecian philosopher) .
^'eunen on (Sngtaiib the products of England.
®ie ©tragen toon Sonton the streets of London.
4) When the proper names of countries, places and
months are put in apposition with the preceding common
name, the preposition of is not translated:
!3)a^ ^buigreid) "ilJveugen the kingdom of Prussia.
^ie @tat)t Soutjon the city of London.
®a§ ©ovf 9iol;rbac^ the village of Rohrbach.
jDev 5[Ronat ^lox the month of May.
5) The other cases remain unchanged :
WiX leben in (Suropa [dat.) we live in Europe.
3Jd) liebe ^ranlveid} [ace.) I like France,
^ennen (Sie ^ari^ (ace.)? do you know Paris?
6) To before names of countries and towns must be
translated na^, at or in in*), from Don or aud, as:
3(^ gcl)e nac^ fcerifa I go to America.
3(^ fd)ide 5?arl nad) 2Bien I send Charles to Vienna.
?D^ein ^ater lebt in ^arl§ my father lives at Paris.
3^d) !omme toon 33rtlfje( I come from Brussels.
7) We subjoin a list of the principal countries:
(Suro'^a Europe.
Slfien Asia,
^frifa Africa.
5Ime'ri!a America.
5UiftraUeu Australia.
Oubten India.
S^ina China.
(Sgt)V'ten Egypt,
©nglant) England,
f^vanh'cid) France.
5t)eutfd)lant) Germany,
feftervcic^ Austria.
^fta'Iten Italy.
(Spa'nicn Spain.
®ried)enlant? Greece,
^reujlen Prussia.
(Sad}ien Saxony.
33aievn Bavaria.
Dtuf^lanb Russia.
(Sd^roeben Sweden,
^ioni^ec^en Norway,
^cincmavf Denmark.
^oUaut) Holland.
Selcjien Belgium.
t)ie (Sd)ltoeij Switzerland.
bic jtiirfei' Turkey.
8) The (national) appellations formed of these names
of countries end either in Ct or c.
a) Appellations ending in ct:
SDer (5uto^a'ev the European. Iber ©V^a'niev the Spaniard,
ber Slmerifaner the American, ber 3italie'ner the Italian.
*) At before names of towns is sometimes also expressed with
3 11. Ex. at Frankfort ju granffurt, but in is the best.
Names of Countries. 69
bet £)ften'eid)er the Austrian,
bcr ®d)ti3eijer the Swiss.
bev ^i3mer the Roman, etc.
berSnglan'ber the Englishman,
bcr (Sd)ottIaiibcr the Scotchman,
ber -3rlanber the Irishman.
ber ^cHaitber the Dutchman.
These are declined according to the first declension.
h) The following appellations end in c:
2)er ®eutfd)e the German,
ber i^ran^ofe the Frenchman,
ber @rted)e the Greek.
ber "^preuBe the Prussian.
ber (Sd)tcebe the Swede.
ber ©ad)fe the Saxon.
ber %l\\\\t the Russian.
ber $ole the Pole,
ber iiirle the Turk.
ber 5)aite the Dane.
These follow the second declension (like ber ^itaBe).
9) The feminine of all these names is formed by the
addition of in, as: a) bie ^uglauberitt, bte ©d^tDet^ertn, b) ble
D^ufftn, bie graujoftn, bie ZMxn k. See p. 60, 1 & 2. —
The only exception is:
^ie 3)eutfd)C the German woman or lady.
Note 1. The adjectives of these names are formed by add-
ing the syllable \\i) instead of cr or c, as: fpantfd) Spanish;
englifd) English ; franjofifd) French, etc. all spelled with a small
letter. See the 18th lesson p. 103, Remark 5.
Note 2. The adjectives of names of cities and towns are
formed by the addition of cr^ and are invariable. They are
used also as nouns as: of Paris ^|5arifer subst. ber *$arifer, ber
Sonboner, ^)lc\V'^oxttx , Berliner, §eibciBerger 2C.
10) The names of rivers, lakes, mountains etc. have
always the article, as in English, and are declined as
common names according to their respective delensions:
®er 9tf)elu the Rhine. G. De^ dli}dn{t)^ D. bem 9Jf)eiii(e) k.
bie eibe the Elb. G. and D. ber @I6e. Ace bie (SIbe.
bie -Pt^rena'en [pi.) the Pyrenees. G. ber $l)renaen. D. beu ^. 2C.
11) In English , the names of months and days are
considered as proper names , and receive no article ; in
German both require the definite article, viz. :
ber 3u(i July.
^er 3fauuar January.
ber i^t'Bruar February,
ber Wixi March.
ber Slprir April,
ber 9)iat May.
ber -^uni June.
ber 5(uguft' August,
ber ©eptem'ber September.
ber Ofto'ber October,
ber 9^^ot>em'ber November,
ber ^ejenrber December.
in January etc. is translated im S^anuar.
ber ©Duntag Sunday. I ber !Dieu§tag Tuesday.
ber SJiontag Monday. |ber SD^ittttJod) Wednesday.
70 Lesson 12.
t)er 2)onner«ta3 Thursday. |t>er ©am^taa \ ^ , ,
ber i^eitag Friday. | or eonuabcnt) / ^at^i"^^)-
am ©ountag on Sunday.
Words.
2Bien Vienna. toln Cologne, ^axi^' Paris.
Vie Dl?er the Oder. t)ie ipauptftafct the capital,
bte 3)oiiau the Danube. ba^ ®ebirge the mountain,
bte 3nfel the island. l)a^ Ufev the bank, (alt cold.
?^vau!furt Frankfort. fominen to come, ge^en to go.
Beading Exercise. 25.
fint) fc^ijn. SKeld^e^ (what) finfc iie '$vot)ufte (Englant3? 3)ic
©traOcn 33erUn3 (or Joon S3.) fiiit) fd)ou. ^Zapolecu irar in (Sgi)^^
ten.,. Sr ftavb (died) auf ber 3nfel ®anft §elena. Q&f iuar nicl)t
in Dftevreid); ahtx 16} xoax in 'iprcujsen. 2BeId)e^ SanD ift tiefe«?
3)iefeg ift ®ried)enlant). ^ennen 8ie ^l^ilcibelvljia? 9iein, id^
fenne e^ nid}t, id) n)ar nid)t in 5lmevifa. S\i bte[er 9)?ann ein
^oEdnbet? 9ieln, er ift ein Sridnber; er get)t nad) 5lnievifa.
2. ^6^ fd)i(!e nieincn ®Dl)n nad) ^ari^'. @u'fia» 3l't)oIf
xoax ^ijnig »on (^c^iDeben. i^ennen @ie bie (3tat>t i^ranffuvt?
9^ein, aber id) t'eune t)ie ©tabt ^i3(n. 3)er 5D^onat 9)^^i ift ber
fd)i5nfte in ^eut]d)laub. 3)er 9t()ein ift ein grof^er ^In§. 9J?ein
^reunt) ift im ^nni angefonimen (arrived). 3(m ^^ontag oter
SDien^tag. *!pavi^ ift bie ^au^tftabt T^^vanfveid)^ (or tjon ^ranfveid)).
M^aBe. 26.
1. The four largest (gvbj^ten) rivers of Germany are: the
Rhine, the Elb , the Oder and the Danube. The mountains
of Spain are high (I)DC^). Napoleon was in Russia. The banks
(t)ie Ufer) of the Rhine are beautiful. London is the capital
of England. What (n)eld)e^) are the productions of Spain?
The streets of Frankfort are narrow (en^e). Where do you
come from (2BcI)er' fommen ®ie) ? I come from England, and
I go to France.
2. My brothers go to Paris. Mr. Banks lives (lebt) in
Germany. In which town? In the city [of] Mainz. (The)
December is cold; July and August are warm. The streets
of Berlin are wide (bveit). The houses of the city o/' London
mostly are not high. Vienna is the capital of Austria. My
nephew (is) arrived in September. The Danube is a very large
(ein fcl)r grogev) river. Come (fommcn (2ie) on Friday or Saturday.
Conversation.
2Bc tuaren ©ie gcftcrn? Od) wax in 9}^'innl)eim.
Unt) iuo wax 3l)v 53vut)er? (Sr war in ^^nanffnrt.
Determinative Adjectives.
71
SSetci^eS tft bte ©auptftabt Don
SSo liegt (lies) §am6urg?
2Bo fint) t)ie $t)renaeu?
SSie l^eigen (what is the name
of) btefe jtDei ?5Iitffe?
^int) biefe §erren (gentlemen)
SSo ftavB (died) g^apcreon?
2Be(d)e3 (what) Sanb tft biefeg?
SBaren ©ie in 5lften?
SBo^er' (whence) !ominen ©ie?
SBo^in' (where) c;ei)en ©te?
©e^en ©ie nad) $arig?
£ennen ^u^tanb.
■3a, nad) $ari§ unb nad) Sonbon.
3a, id) fenne ©riec^enlanb unb
bie 2^urfei.
(Sie finb breit unb fd)on.
(ix ift im ©eptemBer angelom*
men.
5Im 3)onner§tag.
SDer Stpril t)at breigig (30) Stage.
3)er ^ebrnar ^t nut (only) adp
unb^njanjig Stage.
Thirteenth Lesson.
Determinative Adjectives
or Adjective Pronouns.
(Seftimmung§n?orter.)
They are divided into demonstirttive , interrogative^
possessive and indefinite numeral adjectives, and are gen-
erally followed by a substantive.
I. The demonstrative adjectives are:
Singular.
Plural
masc.
fern. neuter.
for all genders.
bicfer
biefe biefe§ this, that.
biefe these.
jener
jene jene^ that.
jene those.
folder
foId)e folc^e^ such.
folcfte such.
berfetbe
biefetbe baSfelBe the same.
biefelben.
ber, bie,
ba^ ndmlid)e the same.
bie namlic^en.
ber, bie.
bag anbre the other.
bie anbven.
72 Lesson 13.
(For their declension see the first lesson p. 20. The two Utter
are delined like adjectives; for berfelbc see p. 72, 3,]
1) TVJaHs generally translated btefcr, btcfc, bicfc«,
unless it stands in opposition to this, in which case it
'means jeuer, jetie, \t\\z^. Ex.:
Who is that man? t»er ifl biefer ?!J^ann?
Note 1. This and that, in immediate connexion with the
auxiliary verb to be f ein , and followed by a noun, is translated
in the neuter form btefe^ or t>a§, both in the singular and
plural (see also the 24th lesson, Obs. 1 and 2). Ex.:
This is my stick btefeS (not biefcr) or bflS ift mcin @tO(f.
Are these your books fiitb bicfeS (or bag] 3^re iBilc^cr'^
Yes, these are my books ja, bie[e8 (or baS) fiitb mcine 58{i(!^er.
2) (Solc^ev, in the singular, is more used with the in-
definite article preceding than alone, and is sometimes
followed by it, as in English. Ex.:
(Sin fo((f)er SDZann (or fold)' ein 9JJaun) such a man.
(5o(d)e SD^dnuer [pi.) such men.
3) X)etfe(be is declined as follows:
Singular.
Plural
masc.
fern.
neuter.
for all genders
N.
bevfelbe
biefelbe
baefelbe.
biefetbeii.
G.
becfelBeu
berfclbeii
be^felben.
bevfelben.
D.
benifelben
berfelben
bemfelbeu.
benfelbeu.
A.
tenfelben
biefelbe
baSfelbe.
blefelbeu.
4) T)er namttd^e and fcer anbre or ein anbrer [another]
are declined like adjectives (see the 18th lesson). Ex.:
!Die udm(id)cu SBerter the same words.
■3fd) bra lid) e ein en anbern (StocC I want another stick.
II. The interrogative adjectives are:
1) SBcld^er? ive(d;e? meld^eS? which? what?
Singular. Plural
masc. fern. neuter,
N. xoddjcx tcdd)c iDe(d)e« which?
G. \-odd)c^ \-odd}cx w^ddjc^ of which?
D. k>eld)cm ireld)cv \i}cld)em to which?
A. t»eld)en n>eld)e iueld)e« which?
for all genders.
trclc()e which?
ttcld)eT of which?
tueld^en to which?
\vdd}c which?
Examples.
2Betd)er SBciu ift bcv bcfte? which wine is the beet?
2Beld)eu ^c^ get;eu 5ie? which way do gou go?
SCDelc^e i^eber ifl gut? which pen is good?
Possessive Adjectives,
73
Note 2. What? and which? immediately followed by the
auxiliary verb fetu to be, is translated: iDeld)eg? both in the
singular and plural (see the above Note 1). Ex.:
What is your name? ft)c[d;c3 ift 3"^^ 9iame?
What are your terms? n)eld;e3 finb ^\jxt ^ebhtguttgcn?
2) Sa§ flit etn, tr>a§ fiir etne, n^a^ fiir etu? tohat (kind of)?
Of this, the article ehi, eine, etn only is declined and
agrees with the following noun. Ex. :
SSag fiir etn 33ud} (w.) Ijaben (Sie? what book have you?
S05ag fiir eine ©tabt {/.) ift biefe^? what town is this?
For the plural cases it is only n)a6 fiir? and the sub-
stantive follows immediately:
2Ba^ fiir 33ii^er Braud^eu @te? what books do you need?
^a§ fiir SSaume finb biefeg? what kind of trees are these?
The same form, toa^ fiir? without the article is em-
ployed before names of materials:
2Ba§ fiir ^^leifd^ faufeii ®ie? what sort of meat do you buy?
2Ba§ fiir 2Cein trinfen @ie? what kind of wine do you drink?
III. The possessive adjectives are
masc.
mein
betn
fein
t^r
unfer
(euer
t^r
Singular,
fern.
melne
beine
fctne
t^re
unfre
3fl)re
cure
f^re
neuter.
mem my.
bein thy.
fein his (its).
il)r her (its).
unfer our.
euer) j ^^^^^
i§r their.
The declension of the first three is shown in the second
lesson. The last five are declined as follows:
Plural
for all genders,
meiue my.
betue thy.
fetne his (its).
t^re her (its).
unfre our.
?"« A your.
(euere, enre)| ^
tl)re their.
masc.
N. unfer
G. unfreg
D. unfrem
A. unfren
N. ^\,x
G. ^\)xt^
D. ■Of^rem
A. St^ren
Singular,
fern.
unfre
unfrer
unfrer
unfre
^\jXt
3f^rer
■S^rer
Ofjre
neuter.
unfer our.
unfre§ of our.
unfrem to our.
unfer our.
S'^r your.
3fl)re^ of your.
3il)rem to your.
3^r your.
Plural
for all genders.
unfre our.
unfrer of our.
unfren to our.
unfre our.
5f^re your.
5I)rer of your.
3I)reu to your.
3l)re your
74
Lesson 13.
Observe that all these possessive adjectives have no
termination added for the Nom. Sing, in the masc. and
neuter. Ex. :
Our friend unfer i^reunt) (not unfrer i^-eunb).
Your horse ^l)X ^fex'b (not 3^re« '$fert)). (See also p. 23).
IV. The indefinite numeral adjectives are:
masc. fern. neuter. Plural.
jelDer every, each jebe jeteS. [wanting).
aUer (afl) all aEe aHe^ (all). aHe all.
mand)er many a niaud}e mand)e^. manege (some),
fcin no feine fein. feine no.
tjtet much tiele t)iel. t>iele many,
tcenig little tcentge tDenig. tuenige few.
The following are used in the plural only :
beit)e, pi. both. I elntge, pi. some, a few.
me^rere, pi. several. | bie meiften, pi. most.
Declension.
masc. fern. neuter. Plural.
N. aUer (atl) aUe am (att).
G^. aftes aUer aUe^.
Z>. aUem aKer allem.
A. aUm alle atle^3 (all).
Remarks.
1) When in English the definite article follows the numeral
adjective all, it must not be translated, as:
All the boys a He ^InaBcn (not aUe t)ie ^naben).
2) 5111 before a possessive adjective in the singular, remains
in the masculine and neuter gender unchanged. Ex.:
All our money all unfev ©elb (not aUc^ unfer ©elb).
With all your money mit all 3^iem ®elt) [Dat.].
3) The article after both may either not be translated, or
it precedes both, as:
Both the sisters fceibe ©c^njePem or bie betben ©d^tuefleni.
4) Possessive adjectives, when joined with beibe, must pre-
cede, and beibe takes n. Ex.:
Both my sisters nieuic beibe u <5d)it)eftevn.
Both our sons iiiifve beibe n Geljiie.
5) The word some or any before a noun in the singular is
better not translated, as:
I have some bread id) Ijabe 33rot.
Have you any cheese? '\^Ci\ia\ 3ie ilafe?
No, but here is some butter neiu, abet l^lei* ifl 93utter.
aHe
einigc.
afler
einiger.
atten
einigen.
aUe
einige.
Numeral Adjectives. 75
6) Some before a noun in the plural should not be left out,
but expressed by etiilge, as:
Lend me some pens letl^eu ©te mtr eintge i^ebern.
7) When, in a reply, some is not followed by a substantive,
but refers to a preceding noun in the singular, it may be
expressed by it> eleven, e, g or bacon; when in the plural,
by etnige; frequently however it is not expressed at all.
(See the 25th lesson, II, Obs. 4). Ex.:
Have you some wine? Yes, I have some (tijeld^eu).
Words.
^a§ ©eBciube the building. bte ^flanje the plant.
tie (Sltern the parents. bag (Sc^iff {pi. — e) the ship.
tot dead, xdd) rich. "Der ©elbbeutel the purse.
ba§ ®elb (the) money. ber ^leifttft {pi. — e) the pencil.
ber ^aufmann the merchant. nii^Uc^ useful. {)d4 high.
bie 33a[e 1 -i • / /• \ iKilfam salutary, wholesome.
bte toufiner^^ ^''''^''' ^'^''^''' ^^^ SSerosnugen the pleasure.
bte ^egel {pi. — n) the rule. glfttg poisonous.
bet SBagen the carriage, get)oren belong, oft often.
ber %ei}kx the mistake, fault, terfaufen to sell, toertauft sold.
^ettJUnbern to admire. fc^led)t bad. ba there.
Reading Exercise. 27.
1. ©lefer 9)^amx tft reid). 3)tefe ^rau tft frau!. 'Diefe ^inber
^aBen fetne Silver. -SeiieS §auS tft fe'f)r alt. S)te ^rud)te jener
^aume finb Bitterer (more bitter), aU (than) bie i^riii^te biefer
Saume. Wldnt ©Item finb tot. Unfer £)^etm (Dn!el) ift nid^t
reid); aBer feine S3afe tft fel)r ret(^. 3)tefe ©tubenten ^aben i^r
@elb t>erIoren. 2Blr fennen aEe 9?egeln. -^c^ fenne feincn f eleven
IRamen. ^Ide 9Jfcnfd)en finb ^riiber. SD^and)er fanfinann ^at
fein ®e(b ijerloren. 9J?eine 2^ante l)at il)ren dliwo, gefunben.
2. ■3(^ l^abe bie '^pferbe Q^xe^ £)l)d\n^ unb ben SBagen unfreS
mc^Barg gelauft. -3eber 9J?enfd) liebt fein Seben (life). 9^id)t
jebe^ ?anb tft rei^. @ie I)aben fetnen ?^el)(er in 3f^rer 3luf gabe.
9Jleine beiben 33riiber finb ange!oinmen. Me §anfer biefer @tabt
finb l)od). SlUe biefe ^flanjen finb l^eilfam. !5)iefeg finb nid)t
meine ^^ebern. 2Bir !t)aben einige SSiJget gefangen (caught).
2Bag fiir einen ©tod ^aben ©ie ba? 9}lef)rere ©c^iffe finb
angefommen.
Jtttfgaee. 28.
1. I love my {Ace.) father and my mother. We love
our parents. You love your sisters. The boys have bought
some books. Those flowers are withered (bertoelft) . The pu-
pils speak often of (t)on) their teachers. All men (9)^enfd}en)
76
Lesson 13.
are like (g(eid)) before God. These (I, Note 1) are the pen-
cils of my brother. This man has sold all his houses and
gardens, and all his horses and carriages. We admire such
men. All [the] metals are useful. What [sort of) wine have
you? Which gloves have you lost? This lady has lost all
her children. Our friends (have) (fiub) v; arrived i yesterday.
2. We have seen several ships. I have found your
purse without your money. We have several friends in Paris.
Not all men (9)ieufd)eu) are rich. Each country has its (his)
pleasures. I have no letters from my son William. Our
king has several palaces. No rose without thorns (jDomen).
I will (3fd} tnill) buy some chairs. These dresses are for both
my sisters. Every bird has two wings. The boys have eaten
(gegefjen) all their apples and pears. Some plants are poison-
ous. I give (gebe) these fruits \to\ my children.
Conversation.
2Ber fjat meluen ®elb6eutel ge*
funfceu ?
©Int) aUe 9}?enfd)en gliidlid)?
3Ba§ fiir ein 53Dgel ift t)iefe§?
32Ber !^at i!^n gefc^offen (shot or
killed)?
2Ba§ fur eine Slume ^ben atten we had
\i)X !^attet or cSte 'fatten you had
fie l^atten they had.
Imperfect (Preterite) .
3d} ptte
I had
bu bStteft thou hadst
er (fie, e^) "^citte he (she, it) had
tuir batten we had
tbr bcittet or @te batten you had
fie batten they had.
Perfect.
-3(5^ ^^t . . ^ebabt I have had
'DU b^ft gebabt thou hast had
er bcit gebabt he has had
tuir b^iben gebabt we have had
tbt b^bt gebabt \ ye have had
CO
"5^
it)ir tuerbeu
il)r iioerbet
(3ie ti^erbeu
3 J
fie tuerbeu
^ 3d) t^erfce . . gel)abt ^aben
I shall have had.
t)U iuerbeft
er tDerbe
mir tDerbcu
it)r \uevbct
®te iijerbeu
fie tuerben
thou wilt
^ he will
_j_^ we shall
^ J you will
they will
First Conditional.
3d) IDiirbe . . I)aben or id) l)atte I should or would have
t5U tijiirbeft l)abcu or bu ptteft thou wouldst have
er \Diirt)e !^aben or er l)dtte he would have
xoxx tDiirbeu l)abcn or njir l)dtten we should have
it)r tuilvbet l)abeu or i()r l)dttet you would have
fie tviiiben l^abeit or fie l)dtten they would have.
Second Conditional (Cond. Perfect).
3d) iDiirbe . . gel)a'bt l)aben or id) I)atte ger)abt I should have had
t)U iDihteft gcl)abt I)aben or bu l)dtteft gcl)abt thou wouldst
er \mx\)c gcl^abt l)abcn or er l)dtte gel)abt he would
to'xx tDiirbcn gcl)abt t)abeu or luir l)dttcii goI)abt we should
i^r iinivbet gd)abt l)abeii or il)r l)dttet v3ol)abt you would
fie iDiirben 0cl)abt ^beii or fie l)dttcu gcl)abt they would
*; If I had had tvcmt id; . . . gcljabt pttc.
Aux. verb ^tjeit. 79
Imperative Mood.
§aBe have I)aben \Dtr \ ■, . ,
ex foil :^abett let him have laffet nm tja^eit I ^^^ ""^ ^'^""^
fie foUen ^beu let them have '^ahet or ^aben ©ie have.
Infinitive Mood.
Pres. ^dben or p !^aben to have.
Past. Qchaht l^aben or ge^Bt ^u ^aben to have had.
Participles.
Pres. ^aBenb having. | Past. QC^oht had.
2) The negative, interrogative and negative-interro-
gative form of verbs is in German exactly the same as
in English, and requires no further explanation.
Negative.
Pres. ^d) I)abe ni&it I have not.
fcu l^aft nid^t thou hast not.
ex hat mci)t he has not etc.
Fut. Qd} tcerbe . . md)t tjaben I shall not have.
Perfect. Qii) ^abe . . ntd)t geljabt I have not had.
t)lt Ijaft . . ntc^t gel)abt thou hast not had etc.
Interrogative.
§abe id)? have I? | §aben ©ic? have you?
§ahe ic^ . . geljabt? have I had? etc.
Negative-Interrogative.
§dbe td^ nic^t? have I not? I §atte id) ntc^t? had I not?
|)abe td^ ntd^t gel^abt? have I not had?
^ertoen tutr ntd)t I)aben? shall we not have? etc.
Remarks on the German construction.
As the chapter on the , Arrangement of words or con-
struction^ cannot be given until all the Parts of speech have
been treated, vfe may, for the present, remark :
1) That in sentences with compound tenses the German
Part. Past must always be at the end. In simple delaratory
clauses (principal propositions) the subject comes first ; secondly
the auxiliary, thirdly the object (Ace. or Dat.) ; in the fourth
place the indirect object, the adverb of place and finally the
Participle Past or the Infinitive. This may be called the
Normal Order. Ex.:
3fc^ ^Oihe ein 33itd) ge'Eiabt I have had a book.
SDer ^nahe I) at ein 33ud) auf ber ©trage gefitnben.
The boy has found a book in the street.
3)te 2JJutter tDttb einen Srief toon tt>rer %^d)ttx ^aben.
The mother will have a letter from her daughter.
80 Lesson 14.
2) Adverbs of time must precede the object:
!J)ev ^imbe Ijat geftent elu S3ud} gefunt^en.
The boy found a book yesterday.
3) But when any adverbial expression begins the sentence,
then the following verb precedes the subject, as:
©eftern i)aht xdj ein 33ud) in t>cx ©tvagc gcfunteu.
Yesterday I found a book in the street.
4) The negation „nic^t" follows the direct object {ace.) as:
-3d) ^abe ba^^ 33ud} ixid^t gelefen I have not read the book.
LiL: I have the book not read.
5) Dependent (or subordinate) clauses take the verb at the
Tery end of the clause. Ex.:
S^ ift tt)a(;v, t)a{5 fie tot tft. (It is true that she is dead.)
S)u fagft, t)a^ id) bag 33ud^ gefunteu ^abe. (that 1 found
the book.)
Od) beauftrage bid), ein SBud) ju !aufen (to buy a book) etc.
Words.
^ie lll)V the watch, clock. bag Ungtiicf misfortune.
Vie 33uttcv (the) butter. bie dUUl [pi. — n) the needle.
bev SHfe (the) cheese. bev 53aU the ball, fo so.
bag ^(eifd) the meat. fetne mel)r no more, eg it.
bie Sinte the ink. ber 3:ob death, ba^ that,
glanben to believe, think. njenn if. genug enough,
bie Sdt (the) time. angenel)ni agreeable, pleasant,
bie ®efetlfd)aft company, party, auf bent $?anbe in the country.
Heading Exercise. 29.
1. -3d) fjabc eincu '^icuub. §aft bu and) einen ^'cunb?
lv ^abcn feine ^-veunbc. 2Bir I)attcn
^veuube ; aber je^t (now)^I)aben unv feine mel)v. !^cihcn (Sic @e=
bnib (patience). §aben (ii^ie ad)t anf (take care of) 3l)ve 5?Ieiber.
Od) njerbe eine neue (new) Ul)r t)abcn. M) ^cihc cine lll^v geljabt;
abet id^ l)abc fie (it) Devlcren. ^aben Oie Diet ^^cvgniigen gobabt?
2. Wix fatten ^iele Sifd)c gcl)abt. (Bit ircvben \53efolIid)nft
gct)abt t)aben. ®ie 'i:;d)iiler l)atteu fein "ipavtcv. 29enn triv iBvot
fatten.*) iiBenn knv ^Icifd) Qet)abt I)atten.*) 3I)r tuiivbet fein
®clb l)aben. (Sr luiirbe tJiel &vgniigen anf bem Sanbe ge^abt
^aben. ©lanben 3ie, ta^ ex ®elb ^at'f ©lanben ®ie, bap njiv
SBein ge^abt ^aben? IM) , to*) have
a faithful friend**). They will have a house in the town.
I should have money enough, if I had not lost my purse.
3 To 4 have*) igood (gute) 2 children is agreeable. Do you
wish (2Bunf(^en (Ste) to*) have much money? If I had not
had so much misfortune. These young men (jungett 2eVitc)
have had too much (JU i?iel) pleasure.
Conversation.
^aben ©le meinen SBruber tttc^t -3a, t^ ^abe t'^n in einem Saben
gefet^en? (shop) gefefjen.
§at er ettcag (anything) ge* -^a, er !^at §ani)[d)u'^e gelauft.
!auft?
§aBen areufe^rt?ergnitgt (pleased);
t?em ?ant)e ge^bt? iutr fatten groge @e[eUfd}aft.
g)at tJte[e§ arme (poor) ^inb (S^t)atfeinen35atevt)ertoren; aber
!eine ©Item met)r? fetne^DZuttertebtno^ (still lives).
SKerben icir fd)one§ better 3fd) glaube nid^t.
l^aben?
2Bert)en ©le 3eit ^ben, t)iefe§ ^{^ tuerbe ^eute (to-day) !eine
33ud) 5U lefen? 3^^t bciben; abet morgen.
§at tarl met ©elb geljabt? (Sr ^at fe^t iuentg geljabt.
S5a« fiir elne ^eber ^tten ©te? M) t)atte elne (Sta^l (steel) febev.
SSerbe ic^ t)a§ 33ergnugen t)aben, ©ie ift ni(^t I)ler, fie ift in
^^xt ®d)tDcfter ju fel)en? ©tuttgart.
SBarum fint) ©ie fo traurig? 3fd) t)abe mein ®ett) terloren.
^er ^t mein i^ebevmeffer ge* Od) tueig ntc^t (I do not know) ,
l^aW xoex (who) e§ ge^abt ^at.
*) Allien the Infinitive is accompanied by to, translate it 311,
till further notice.
**) Translate: a faithful friend to have cinen trcuen ^reunb gu
l^aben. The object of the Infinitive precedes the latter in German.
OTTO, German Conv.- Grammar.
82
Fifteenth Lesson.
SECOND AUXILIARY,
©cin (mar, Qc^cfen) to be.
Indicative. | Subjunctive.
Present Tense.
3d) fel I [may] be
5(^ bin I am
bU blft thou art
er (fie, e«) ift he (she, it) is
Xo'vc finb we are
erbeft fein thou wilt be
er njerbe fein he will be
n?ir njerben fein we shall be
©ie njerben fein you will be
fie itjerbcn fein they will be.
Ex. If I was or were rich ttietttt \6) rcic^ Ware.
Aux. verb [ein.
83
Second Future (Fut. Perfect).
^^ ttjetbe . . getuefen fcitt
I shall have been.
bU tt)tl*ft
er tcitt)
xoxx tcerben
(x^x tterbet)
©le tijerben
fie toerben
cj:> thou wilt
§ he will
TT we shall
^ \ye will
~^. iyou will
3d) tuerbe . . getuefen fein
I shall have been.
t?u tDertjeft
er tuerbe
n)tr hjerben
(t'^r tcerfcet)
©ie icetben
fie trerben
thou wilt
he will
we shall
lye will
they will
First Conditional.
. fein (or id) mare) I should be
ou will
they will
^6^1 hjiirbe
bu tt)urbeft fein (or bu v»areft) thou wouldst be
er tDiirbe fein (or er tt)are) he would be
XQXX n^iirben fein (or mx t^aren) we should be
i^>r tciirbet (feie iciirben) fein (or i'^r tijaret) you would be
fie tciirben fein (or fie waren) they would be.
Second Conditional (Cond. Perfect).
■Sd^ Wiirbe gen^efen fein or x6) ttdre genjefen I should have been
bu tDiirbeft getcefen fein or bu n? are ft geiuefen thou wouldst \ p-
er tciirbe getuefen fein or er iuare gen^efen he would |
toir n^iirben gen^efen fein or vaxx ti^dren getcefen we should ) ^
(Sie tuurben gen)efen fein or ©ie JDciren getcefen you would |
fie vpiirben gewefen fein or fie tear en gen^efen they would j •
Imperative.
(Set be (thou). feten iuir \ , . ,
er foU fein let him be. laffet unS fein I ^^'
fie foKen fein let them be. feib or fcien @tc be (you).
Infinitive.
Pres. fein or ju fein to be.
Past, gettjefen fctn or getuefen ju fein to have been.
Participles.
Pres. fcienb being. | Past, geiijefen been.
Note 1. There is and there are answer to the German c8
giebt, e§ ift, e^ finb; there was and there were e§ gal^, eS
tt)ar or eg tuaren, as:
There are animals etc. eg gtcfit Xiere K. (See lesson 33.)
Note 2. The English / am to is translated x6) foU or mug:
Charles is to le^rn German ^arl foU ©eutfd) tern en.
*) If I had been ttCttn ic^ . . . getDcfen to ate.
84 Lesson 15.
Note 3. The English io be riff hi is translated in German
xedjt ^ahcn, and to be ivrong iuivcd)t ^aben. Ex.:
You are right ®ie ^Ben rcd}t.
I am wrong ic^ ^tt^C unred}t. I was wrong id^ \)aiit U.
Words.
jDer ?et)Yer the master, teacher, jufrieben contented.
bet @rDJ3t?ater the grandfather, uu^ufvieten discontented.
bag ©lag [pi. ©lafer) the glass, rul^ig quiet. be[fer better.
gliidltd) happy, laugle) long, giittg kind, toevloreu lost.
mtgliidlid) unhappy. trd^e idle. Ieid)t easy.
fd)bn handsome, pretty. tjetguiigt pleased.
arm poor, frauf ill, sick. fleiB^S industrious, diligent.
umcD^l unwell, ju' too. aufmerffani attentive.
I)i3fli(^ polite, immer always. ti3iiufd}en to wish.
ber 2BoIf {pi. 2Bi31fe) the wolf, gc^en to go. toarum why?
Reading Exercise. 31.
!3)u bift gliidtic^. -Sd) bin ungliidlic^. ©ie ift fc^on unb
tei^. W\x fint) arm unb han!. (Sr tuar ein guter 3Satev. 2Baven
(Ste gcftevn in ber ^lxd)e? 9iein! mr tDaren ju §aufe ; toir tcaven
unn)ot)t. ©ie njerben iiidjt !tan! felu. 3d) bin bcl (at) bem
©d)iieiber geluefen ; aber meiu 9?ocf tr>ar [nod)] nid)t fertig (ready) .
Oft ber ^nabc in ber (SAule geiDefen? 2Bir njaren geftevn im
St^eater. -Od) luiivbe gliidiic^ fein, tuenn tc^ reic^ ware, ^arl
toirb fel)t Dergniigt fein, njenn (when) cr ©ie fie^t (sees). Oei
fleigtg, mein ©ol;n. ©eien ®ie aufmerffam. -S^r ®io^»ater ift
fet)i* alt gcmefen. SfJfeine ©rogmutter ^at ted)t. -Sc^ l^abe un*
xt&iX. -Sung unb fc^on ju fein*) ift angenel^m.
JittfgaOe. 33.
1. I am young, you are old. She is very handsome.
Our cousin Frederick fias been in London, but he has not
been in Paris. Be quiet. Be contented with your situation
(®teUe, /.)• I should be contented, if I 3 were mot sill. I
should be rich, if I had been in America. My daughters have
been at the ball (auf bem 33all) ; they were very happy. It
will be better to go out (ang^uge^eii) . It would be easy.
The parents of these children have been too severe (JU ftveng).
You are right, I am wrong.
2. I should be contented, if you were not idle. Be polite
towards (gegen) your teachers. I wish, she were attentive.
There are no wolves in England. There were (ed tcaien) no
glasses on the table. Be so kind [as] to (jU) give me a glass.
*) See the foot-note ♦) p. 81. Yet the Infinitive here forming
the Subject of the phrase, the prepos. 511 may as well be omitted.
Aux. verb werben.
85
My pupils will not be idle. Miss Caroline was very [much]
pleased. The knives were not sharp (fd>avf). We have not
bought the butter ; it (fie) was not fresh (ftif d)) . I am to go
[Note 2) to Berlin. Are we to learn German? I was wrong,
my father was right.
Conversation.
©int) ®te gtiidlid)?
5ft 3^ve (2d}tDefter aud) gliiddd)?
2i3arum ift fie ung(iidlid)?
2Bo tcaren ©ie gefterit 5lBent)
(last night) ?
©int) Ste in (Stuttgart ge*
tcefen?
5ft t)a« ^int) tange frauf ge*
tuefen?
SSarum tear fcer Sel^rer uuju-
frieben'^
5ft er oft (often) unnjc|^n
5ft Da^ 9)JdDd)eu t^ergniigt?
©Int) ©te fertig (ready, or have
you done) ?
5ft fcer mtXi\6) fterblid^ (mortal) ?
2Ba« fagte (said) ber Sel^rer?
3Ber ^at red)t?
fatten ©ie aud^ red}t?
£) ja, tc^ bin fet}r glitddd).
D neiu, fie ift fe^r ungliidlid).
©ie f)at alle i!^re Winter terloren.
5d) trar im iX^eater.
9^ein, id) bin nid)t fca (there)
getrefen.
S^ ift ein 5a^r (for a year)
fran! geti?efen.
jDie ©chiller njaren trage.
5a, er ift tmmer fran!.
5a, fie ift feljr oergniigt.
2Bir tuertten gteici^ (directly) fertig
fein.
3)er £i)r^er ift (lerblid) ; aber t)ie
(Seek (soul) ift unfterbtic^.
(Sr fagte: ©eien ©ie rut^ig.
9)Jein iBatet ^at red)t.
9lein, ic^ fjatte unred)t.
Sixteenth Lesson.
THIRD AUXILIARY.
SBcrben to become, to get (to grow).
Indicative. Subjunctive.
Present Tense.
5c^ tcerbe I (may) become
t)U n^erbeft thou become
er tuerfce he become
n^ir hjertien we become
Sie h)erben or il)r tuertet y. bee.
fie ttjert?en they become.
5d) toerbe I become, I get
t)U toirft thou becomest
er luirb he becomes
njir tcerten we become
©ie toerben or i^r irertet y
fie toertjen they become.
86
Lesson 16.
Imperfect (Preterite).
3fA tottrbc (tc^ tDarb)*) I became
bu trurbeft (tDarbft) th. becamest
er Itjurbe (tuarb) he became
\CAX tDUrben we became
(3te tt)urben or i^r njuvbet y. b.
fie tDUrben they became.
3cf) tuiirbc (if) I became
t)U tuiirteft thou became
er iDiirbe he became
trit tuiirben we became
©ie n)uvt)en or i^r tDiirbety.bec.
fie iDiirben they became.
Perfect.
3>c() 6tn . . getDorben (or njorbcu)
I have become [or grown)
t)U bift getDorben thou hast bee.
er ifi gemorben he has bee.
t»ir ftttb getuorben k.
3;d) fel getucrben (or ttjorben) I
(may) have become {or been)
bu feift getDorben (or trorben)
er fei getuorben (or toorbeat)
IC. K.
Pluperfect.
^^ hjar . . getDorben (or tworben)
I had become [or been)
bu hjarft getuorben (or tijorben)
er (fie, e3) i»ar geirorben k.
3f(^ tt)are getDorben (or ttjorben)
(if) I had become {or been)
bu iDarcft geiuorbeu (or njorben)
K. :c.
First Future.
-3^ werbe . . h)crben
I shall become {or get)
"Du tt)irft . . iuerbeu
er tuirb . . tcerben
tt)ir tDcrben . . "1
©ie tuerbeu . . !■ \Derben.
fie toerben . . i
Second Future
^6) tterbe gettjorben (njorben) fein
I shall have become (been)
bu n)irft getDorben (njorben) fein
tuerbeu
2C.
K.
^6) iDerbe . . h)erben
I shall become
bu tuerbeft
er njerbe
mx ujerben
©ie iDerben tuerben.
fte iverben
(Fut. Perfect).
^6) njerbe genjorben (ttorben) fein
I shall have become (been)
bu tr)erbeft genjorben (worben) fein
2C.
K.
First Couditional.
3c^ njiirbe . . trerbeu I should or wotild bcconwr
bu toiirbefl iverben thou wouldst become
2C. JC.
Second Conditional.
Sd) ttJiirbe . . getDorben (or trorben) fein or i^ ttjare . . ge*
ttJOVben I should have become or been
:c. K.
3c^ toarb is the older form, and getting out of use.
Aux. verb tterbcn. 87
Imperative.
SKerbe become (thou) . ii?erben mx 1 , . v
et fon ttjerben he shall become, lagt un^ tuerbenj ^^^ ""^ t^ecome.
fie foUen iuerben let them be- tuerbet, t»ert>en @ie become,
come. tuerbcn ©ie ittc^t do not become.
Infinitive.
Pres. tuerben or ju Iterben to become.
Past, getcorben (or tDorben) fein or ju fein to have become.
Participles.
Pres. tcerbenb becoming.
Past. getDOVben (or tDorbex:) become [or been).
Note 1. The verb luerben is sometimes translated to get
or to grow, as:
@r totrb alt he grows old. | (gg h)irb f^cit it gets late.
Note 2. What has become of ...? is translated: 2Ba^ ift
au§ . . . gcttjorben?
Words.
oIUe or id) tDiirbe ti^oUen I should wish.
2nd Cond. 3d) t)atte gciDoHt or iDoUen (or id) iriivte geivoUt I)). 3)
77/. jt)res. SOSetleu. | Inf. past. gciiJoUt ]j>aben.
Part-iKist. geiuoUt.
Subjunctive.
3c^ ttJoUe I will
feuiDoUeft
er tiJoHe
tcir tDoUcn
|il)r tDoUet
\(Sie iDoUen
fie tiaoUen.
3d) njollte I should wish
t)u hjottteft 2C.
er ttJoUte 2C.
tuir tDoflten ic.
3c^ l)abe getcoUt
bu i)abeft getroflt :c.
3d) ^tte gehjotit (or njoUen) .
3d) tterbe Gotten
t)u toerbeft njollen k.
Pres.
Plur.
3. Soficn
3d) foil I am to*)
bU follft thou shalt
er foU he is to or shall
ivir fcUen*) we are to
i^r foUet \ ye shall
©ie foUen ] you shall
fie fottcn they ate to or shall.
SubJ. 3d) fcUe I shall
bu follefl
er fette
trir foUen
|it)r foUet
t3ie foUen
fie fcOen.
1) Observe that the plural of these auxiliaries is throughout
like the Infinitive mood.
2) You will is mostly Future and translated @ic tverbcn,
whereas the interrog. : Will you? is Swollen ®ic?
3) This compound form is not much used. See p. 94, Obs. 3.
*) I shall (1st pers.) is translated: i^ tDcrbc, and the inter-
Aux. verbs of Mood.
91
Imperf.
Perf.
Pluperf.
1st Put.
3c^ foUte I should, I was|3f(^ foUte*) I should.
2nd Put.
1st Cond.
2nd Cond.
Inf. pres.
to or I ought to.
^c^ ^Be gefoHt or tc^ l^aBe
bu ^aft gefoHt 2C.
M) i)atte gefoHt.
^&f ir>erbe foUen
t3u tuirft foEen k.
(3d) tuevbe gefoUt !^a1jen.)
S^db foIUe I should, I ought to.
^&l l}dtte — foUett I ought to have
folleu. I Part. past. gefoUt.
foaen|3d) ^aBe gefoKt
I t)U ^beft gefoUt jc.
3^ l^citte gefoUt or foUen.
3c^ tt)ert)e foden
bu tDertjeft foEeit jc.
4» 9Jlttffctt to be obliged, to have to.
Indicative .
Pres. 3f(^ mug I must
t)U mugt thou must
er mug he must
Xoxx miiffeu we must
i:^r mu[fet or niu6t\ you
©ie niiiffen \ must
jie miiffen they must.
Imperf. 3fd) mugte I had to, I was
to or I was obliged.
Perf. 3;c^ t)aBe . . gemuf3t or miiffen
I have been obliged
\)Vi l^aft gemuj^t 2C.
Pluperf. ^&) ^tte gemugt.
1st Put. 3fcb tDerbe miiffen
I shall be obliged
bu tr)irft miiffen 2C.
2nd Put. (id) tcerbe gemugt l^aben.1
is^ Cowc?. 3fd} miigte or triivbe .
^wc? Cond. -Sd; tjatte gemugt (or —
Inf. pres. miiffen to be obliged.
Part. past, gemugt.
Note. 'I must nof is rendered id) bfltf nid^t
Subjunctive.
^6) miiffe I must
bu miiffeft, ev miiffe
ttJit miiffen
\\^x miiffet
t@ie miiffen
fie miiffen.
3fd) miigte
I should be obliged.
3d) ^abe gemugt
bu f)abeft gemugt k.
3d) I>atte gemugt (miiffen).
3d) tuerbe miiffen
bu n^erbeft miiffen 2C.
miiffen I should be obliged.
miiffen) I should have been
[obliged*.
rogative Shall I: tr»erbc id)? But when ^shall P means am I to?
it is in German: fofi icf)'^ — In the same manner in the plural:
We shall is = tt)tt hjerben; but shall we (= are we to) fottett t»ir?
**) Observe that id) iooUte and ic^ foHte do not modify their
vowel in the Subj. Mood or Conditional. Ex. : tt)enn i(^ . . tOdUtt*
92 Lesson 17.
Words.
jDer 53aitcr {pi. -n) the peasant, ^eute to-day. nic^t§ nothing,
fcie ^oft the post-office. ab'rci[eu to depart, set out.
lefen to read. be5a{)len to pay. mid) me.
Bleiben to remain, to stay. ftvafen to punish, e^ it.
aug'^e^en to go out. glaubcn believe.
fd)vei6en to write. t>eiftet)eu to understand.
Reading Exercise. 33.
^d) fatiu Ic[cn. ®ie fomieii fominen. 3d) fonnte e«? ni(^t
c;(aubcn. -Sfd) imi§ i^n (him) fcl;en. 2Bir miifjeu aBreifen. ^oUeu
feie mid) be5a()lcu et)er md)t? ^^ tt?iivte ©ie be3al)(en, trenu
id) !onute. SSatum toiuieu ©ie ludt? 3;d) l)abe tein ®elt).
5IRau (one) fonnte eg nid)t lefen. 9Jian !i3nnte (might) t>ie[e3
glanben. -^d) mng auggel)en. ^avt mu[Ue l)eute in fcer (Sd)n(e
bleiben. 2!Bin)eIm njirb morgcn ju §au[c b(eiben miiffcn. 25er
(who) njoUte (fbnnte) e^ cjtauben? -^d) cjlaube e^ nid)t. 2i[>ir
ttjevben bleiben miiffen. SBit !i5nnen nid)t tmmer tl)nn (do), ira8
XQVC njoden. ®ie[e ®d)iiler foUten fleigig fein. ■3l)r jDicner fell
ben 33rief auf t)ic -poft tragen (take).
JtufgaBc. 33a.
Can you write? Yes, I can write. He cannot read.
We must go out. They must 2 pay 4 me (mid)). The master
should punish the boy.*) He would believe nothing. I will
buy it. The servant would not (did not wish to) go. Thou
shalt not steal (ftet)len) . (The) children should not lie (liicjen) .
Xi could not**) believe that news CDlcfe SR.). Some peasants
cannot read. I will write a letter. Will you take it (it)n . . .
ttagen) to the (auf t)ie) post-office? They will not come. She
should [or ought [to]) write to him (an it)n). Children must
go to school (in bie ®d)Ule). I could not**) understand this-
letter. My aunt could not read the book.
5. ^ogen.
Pres. -Sc^ mag I may (I like)
t)U mag ft thou mayest
er (fie, t^) mag he may
tDtr megen we may
(Sie niegcn you may
fie mogcn they may.
Imperf. ^&) nicd)tc I liked
5d) mec()te nid)t I did not
like or choose.
Per/. 3d) t)abe gemoAt, bu I)aft k.
Pluperf. 3d) t)atte gemed)t.
•) For the position of the Infinitive see the foot-note * p. 80.
**) The negation nid)t is to be placed after the object. Irans-
late: I could that news not believe (see p. 80; Obs. 4;.
Suhj. 3d) nioge I may
bu mogeft
er mege
n)iv mogen
3ie megen
fie megen.
3d) m e d) t e 1 may, might
or I should like.
3d) l)abe gemed)t. bul)abefl
3d) ^dtte gemod)t. [k.
Aux. verbs of Mood.
93
1st Fut. -3d) U)etl?e mogen I shall like I 3^c{) iDert)e mijgen
t)u tr>h*ft mi3gen 2C. | ®u tx>ert)eft miigeu k.
i*^ Cow6/. -3c^ mi3d}te (gern) I should like.
2ndCond. Od) ^atte — mi3gen I should have liked.
Inf. pres. SJlijgen. | Part. past. geuiDC^t.
Note 1. I may etc. is very often translated fijnnen, as:
He may go er !anu geijen. — i^_ mcdjte uic^t = I did not like.
Note 2. The interrogative form: may I? etc. is rendered:
barf iti^? may we? fciiffeu njir? k.
In the same manner is conjugated: ttermbgexi to be able, as:
3>c^ tocrniag e8 iti^t ju t^un (J?2/. with ju).
6. 2)utfett to be allowed, to dare.
Pres.
I
may , I dare,
[I am allowed.
3fd) t)arf
t)u barfft
er barf
n^ir biirfen we are allowed
i^r biirft or ©ie biirfeu
fie biirfen.
Imperf. ^6) buvfte I was allowed,
bu buvfteft [I dared.
er biufte he was allowed
iuir burften we were allowed
t^^r burftet or (Ste burften
fie burften.
Od) l^aBe geburft or . . biirfeu
I have been allowed.
Pluperf. -Sd) I^atte geburft.
1st Fut. -Sd) tDerbe biirfeu
I shall be allowed.
Perf,
Suhj. 3fd) biirfe I may
bu burfeft
er biirfe
tDtr bilrfen
i'^r biirfet
fie biirfeu.
Ofc^biirfte I might
bu biirfteft
er biirfte
ujir biirfteu
i^r biirftet
fie biirfteu.
■3d) l)abe geburft
bu l)vabeft 2C.
3f^ tjatte geburft.
■3(^ ix»erbe biirfeu
bu iDerbeft k.
2nd Fut. -Sd) Ujerbe geburft ^Oi^va.
1st Cond. -3d) biirfte or U^iirbe biirfeu I should be allowed.
2ndCond. ^6.) '^aiit geburft I should have been allowed.
Inf. pres. biirfeu. P. past, geburft. Inf. past, {geburft ^Beu).
Negative: ^^(^ barf ut(^t = I must not.
In the same manner: Bebiirfett to be in need ; 3c^ Bcbarf 2C.
Observations.
1) These six auxiliaries are mostly followed by an Infinitive
mood, but they do not admit of JU before the Infinitive.
I can (must, will) read id) !auu (mug, tt>i(l K.) lefeu.
He ought to come er foUte fommeu.
94 Lesson 17.
2) If such an auxiliary is accompanied by not, in German
the negation nid)t is placed before the following Infinitive:
I cannot read the letter Id) fann ben 33nef tiic^t lefen.
3) The Conditional seldom occurs in the form icf) triirbe with
the Infinitive: id) tDiirbe fomieu, id) tuiirbe foUeu ic; commonly
the Imperfect Subjunctive is used as Conditional: id) fount e,
ic^ foUte, id) mit^te, id) tcoUte, id) mo(^te, i^ t)iivfte.
4) The compound tenses sometimes appear regularly formed
by adding the auxiliary t(^ l)abe, ^atte IC. to the Participle
past, as long as they stand by themselves, as:
3fd) l^abe gefonnt, ic^ l^aBe gemugt k.
But when these compound tenses are connected with the
Infinitive of another verb, which is mostly the case, then they
take the form of the Infinitive instead of the Part, past:
§aben ©ie t)en 33rief lefen fiJuncn (instead of lefen ge!onnt) !
Have you been able to read the letter?
^arl ^lat au^'ge^en miiffen Charles was obliged to go ouL
■3d) l^abe e§ nel)men miiffen.
I was [or have been) obliged to take it.
(Sr t)at fageu njoUen (not geuJoUt).
He (has) wished to say.
5) When in English the auxiliary of mood is in the Im-
perfect tense and the following verb in the compound of the
Infinitive, the German way of rendering this, greatly differs
from the English, viz, the principal verb remains in German
in the Infinitive present, and the auxiliary is put in the
Pluperf. of the Subjunctive mood, as:
You mirfht or could (Imp.) have read the letter.
©ie Ijattctt t:cu 33rief lefen fonnen*
He might have gone tx ^citte gel^eu !bnnen.
I should have done it or I ought to have done it.
^6^ Ijrtttc e« tl)un fottcn.
You ought to have written your exercise.
©ie l^dtten 3t)ve ^lufgabe fd)relben follen.
Note. When the auxiliary of mood is in the Present tense,
the two languages perfectly correspond, as:
You must have seen it @ic miiffen c8 jncfebcn ^abcn.
He cannot have seen me er fann mi(^ nic^t gcfel^cn tjabcu.
Remark on the English anxiliary to do.
The frequent use of the verb to do in negative and inter-
rogative English sentences might easily induce the English
Lesson 17. 95
pupil to employ the same mode of expression also in German.
It must therefore be stated, that this is not admissible,
1) The negation ntd^t (not) is simply placed after the
verb itself and its object, as:
I do not see tc^ fef|e nxd}t (I see not).
We do not want it tt)ir brauc^en e§ nt(^t (we w. it not).
2) In the interrogative form, the subject, — be it
a personal pronoun or a noun — is simply put after the verb :
©el^en (Sle? do you go? are you going?
933 ann fpeifeit ©ie (ju SJlittag) ? when do you dine?
^auft ber ^ater ba^ $fer1)? does the father buy the horse?
(gr fauft e§ ntc^t he does not buy it.
©agen ®te ii^m md)t do not tell him.
Words.
Sadden to laugh. "DaS X^ta'ttx the theatre.
t)te 9^ad)ric^t the news. t)ie Ttaxt the marc,
fpielen to play. 1>a^ ^^teifd) the meat.
todifx true, fel^en to see. bev ^el^ger \ ., k^+^i,^^
fagen to say. t^un to do. bet ^telfc^er j ^^^ ^^^^cner.
Eeading Exercise. 34.
Sr mag lac^en. ^Der ^nabe barf nic^t f^telen. jDitrfen ©te
augget)en? 3(^ barf ^eute md)t au^ge^en; aBer morgen. -Sd)
^abc geftern mein ^ferb tjer!aufen tDoIIeu; aBer ic^ §abe nic^t
geJonnt. SDu magft ge'^en ober md)t. Qdj module ntc^t au^ge'^en.
Sr barf ntd^t in ben ©arten ge^en. 'Dtefe 9^a(^rtd)t mod)te toa^x
feln. 2Barum burfte ber £'naBe nid^t in bie (Sd)ule gel^en? ^r
tt)ar !ranf. 5D^ein 3Sater ^dtte geftern fein $ferb \?erfanfen !onnen;
aBer er t)at ntd)t genjoHt. SBarnm Bat er e§ ntc^t toer!anfen tooU
ten? (Sr Brauc^t (wants) e« nc6) (still). S)ie ^tnber ' B^iBen
fplelen luoUen; fie fatten tl)re SlufgaBe lernen foil en; fie mer*
ben Batb ju 93ette ge'^en mitffen.
ev* 9^ein, id) luiU fie iiic^t toevfaufen.
faufeu ?
SBarum fonnten ®ie nidbt toni* Qd} hjar untuobt unt) mugte ju
nteu? §aufe bleibeu.
SBarum ^at biefer 9)?ann ben (gr tann nidjt lefen.
^rief nid)t gclcfen?
^iixfen ©ie iuS Xt^eater ge^eu? ^tm, xd^ barf md)t.
jDatf id) 3^f)nen eiue B^S^^-'^'^ 3fd) banfe S^^nen (I thank you).
SBarum ge'^eu (Sie iii^t au§? 2Beit (because) e§ rennet,
^avf ic^ fel^en (see), ioag (Sie D ja, (Sie biirfen e8 fe^eu.
fd)reiben ?
S35irb er balb (soon) abreifen (Sr iDirb t»ieUci(^t (perhaps) l^ier
niiifjeii? bleiben fonnen.
^ahm ©ie bie 9^ed)tiung (bill) -3^ :^abe ^wd Tlaxt beja^len
beja^Ien miiffen? miiffeu.
Eighteenth Lesson.
On the Adjective.
1) The adjective, in German, is either used predica-
tively, to state how a thing or a person is. In this
case, its place is after the verb, and it requires no alte-
ration at all; it remains the same for the three genders
and for both numbers, as in English:
2)er Zi^d) ift ruitb the table is round.
3)a8 tieib ift alt the dress is old.
^ie Sipfel fiub gut the apples are good.
jDie tofd)en tvaveu fiig the cherries were sweet.
2) Or it is used attributively, to qualify a noun.
Then it always precedes the noun which it qualifies and
is varied for the gender, number or case of the substan-
tive, with which it must agree in all these particulars;
as : ber vunbc %\\^, pi. bie runbcn Stifd;c. The declension
of the adjective in its attributive use varies according to
its being preceded:
Adjectives.
97
I. by the definite article [or a substitute of it).
II. by the indefinite [or a substitute of it).
III. by neither of them.
First form.
1) With the definite article, ber, bie, "^^^f every ad-
jective takes the inflexions of the 2nd declension, viz.
in the nominative case e, in all the following cases sin-
gular and plural c«, except in the accusative singular of
the fern, and neuter gender, which are always the same
as the nominative. With this single deviation the ter-
mination of all the cases is the same for all three
genders.
Table of the inflexions of the first form.
masc.
Nom. — C
Geii. — Ctt
Dat. — Ctt
Ace. —Ctt
fern.
C
Ctt
Ctt
c
neuter.
—t
—Ctt
—Ctt
— c
Plural for all.
—Ctt
—Ctt
—Ctt
— Ctt,
Examples.
Singular. Masculine.
N. bcr ^UtC Skater the good father
G. 'DeS gutctt ^ater§ of the good father
D. bem gutctt S3ater to the good father
A. ben guteu Skater the good father.
Feminine.
N. bic fd)i)uc 33(ume the fine flower
G. t)er fdjeuctt S31uuie of the f. fl.
D. ber fd}ouen 33lume to the f. fl.
A. bie fd}i3ne 33lume the f. fl.
Neuter.
N. bO)§ Heine §au^ the little house
G. beg ftetnctt §au}eg of the 1. h.
D. bem fleinen §au[e to the 1. h.
A. ba^ Heiite §aug 2C.
Note 1. The article before the adjective denoting suffi-
ciently the gender and case of the following noun, these ter-
minations of the first form seem to be merely of a euphon-
ical nature.
Note 2. Observe that the terminations of the adjective are
not the same as those of the article or the noun.
OTTO, German Conv.- Grammar. 7
Plural.
bic gutctt 33ater
ber gut en S3ater
ben gut en 3Sateru
bie gut en ^'dtcx.
bic fd)onctt Slumen
ber fd)onen Shtmen
ben fd)i3nen 23lumen
bie fd)enen S3lumen.
bic tleinctt §aufev
ber fleinen ipciufer
ben fleinen §du[ern
bie 'fleinen §du[er.
98 Lesson 18.
2) The adjectives undergo the same inflexion after
these six determinative adjectives which liave three dif-
ferent forms for the three genders, viz.:
feiefev, feicfe, tjicfc^.
jener, jene, jene^.
jeber, Jete, jebeS (every).
manner, ntand)e, mancf^eS.
fcevfclbe, bicfetbe, ba^felbc.
tt)eld)ev, tt)eld)e, tuelc^e^?
Examples.
!Diefer attc ?D?vinn this old man; Gen. biefe^ a(tcn ?[Ranne8.
!Diefcr ^ol)c 33vium this high tree; pi. 'Diefe ^oI)cn 33dumc.
-3iene3 aime 9JJat)d)en that poor girl; pi. jene armcit 2)Jdtc^en.
■Sebeg fleifeige ^int) every diligent child.
55on n)cld)em bevii^mteu ^Jeanne fprcd)cn (Sie? of which cele-
brated man are you speaking?
3) When there are two or more adjectives, the in-
flexion remains the same for both:
Singular. Plural.
N. t)er gute, alte 33atcr. [t)ic fd)onen, fleinen §aufer.
G. beS guten, alten 5^ater8 k. |fcer fd)onen, fleinen |)dufer :c.
Second form.
1) With the indefinite article ciu, eiitc, Ctn, the de-
clension is nearly the same as with the definite article;
it diflers only in the nominative case, masculiiie and neuter,
and in the accusative neuter^ because in these cases the
article eiu has no particular termination to indicate the
gender. In these cases, the adjectice must take the ter-
mination of the respective gender, viz.:
Table of the inflexions.
masc. neuter. Plur.
Norn. — cr. I Nom. ^ Ace. — c§. I — en.
G. I). 8f Ac. —en. \ G. ^ D. —en. | —en.
Declension.
Masc. N. etn avmcr ?0?aun a poor man
G. einc3 armen -D^rtunc^ of a poor man
D. ciucm avmcn 'i)j?ann(e) to a poor man
A. einen armcn 2)Jann a poor man.
Fern. N. cinc armc*) ?^ran a poor woman
G. einer armcn J^van of a poor woman
D. eincv armen ^xan to a poor woman
A. eine armc i^rau a poor woman.
*) Observe tliat the feminine is the same for the Nom. Sr Ace.
in all three forms.
Adjectives. 99
Neut. N. citt atmc§ ^'inl5 a poor child
G. einev3 avmcn ^lube's of a poor child
D. einem atmeit ^inbe to a poor child
A. citt arrac§ ^int) a poor child.
2) This mode of inflexion is also used after all de-
terminative adjectives (which are alike in the masc. and
neuter), viz. metn, bein, fein, unfer, 3^r (euer), t^r
and !etn. Its plural is the same as that of the first
form, viz. Ctt in all the cases.
Examples with possessive adj.
Sing. Wdw flcincr §unb my little dog.
Ol)re {itht 2^DCl)ter your dear daughter.
Uufer uciicy §viuv our new house,
Plur. Wmxt f(elncw §uube my little dogs.
■3l)ve liebctt ^DCl)ter your dear daughters.
tliifre neuctt §aufer our new houses.
Declension with a possessive adj.
Singular.
N. 9JJeitt guter ^reunb my good friend
G. meiue^ gutCtt i^vcuubc^ of my good friend
D. me'uiem gutctt "(^reunb to my good friend
A. memCtt gutCtt ^veuub my good friend.
Plural.
N. 9J?eine gutctt ^rcunbe my good friends
G. meiuer guteu §rcunbe of my good friends
D. metneu gutcn §veuubeii to my good friends
A. meine guteu ^reuube my good friends.
3) If more than one adjective precede a substantive,
each adjective must be declined in this manner, as:
N. eiu armer, alter ^tanu a poor old man
G. eiueg armeu, alteu 50^inue§ of a poor old man
D. eiuem avmeu, alteu 9Jtauue to a poor old man
A. einen armeu , alteu , frauf eu 9Jtauu a p. old sick man.
Words.
jDer ®d)iiler the pupil. ba§ (Sifeu iron.
bev SJtalev the painter. ba« ®d)iff [pi. (Sd)iffe) the ship.
ber @e[d)macf the taste. lang long, tavfev iDrave.
ber ©efaug the song. Sitter bitter.
bev ©onimev summer. ftcl)eu to stand, fi^eu to sit.
ba§ Sebeu life, lieb dear. bie SBuube the wound.
ber 53erg the hill, mountain. t)od) high, ftarf strong.
ameri!auifd) American. tveu faithful. gefd)icft clever.
IQQ Lesson 18.
menfd)Ud} human. t)ie 'D^ufe {pi. 5^uffc) the walnut,
uurcif unripe. Pcifi^3 industrious, diligent.
\mxm warm. foftbar precious.
I^oren to hear.
Eeading Exercise, 35.
•Der Itebe 33vut)er. ^ie Uebe ©Aiijeftcr. '^a^ fleine 3D^atc^en.
(gin fd)Dner ©avten. (Sine fd}lnie Slume. (Sin )d)one«^ §au5.
!Der 33rut?er tft gnt. ®ie ®cl)n)e[tern finD gut. 3)ie fd}i)nen
(Garten, ^ie neuen §aufer. Q&i liebe t)ie roten 23lumen. ®ic
^o^eu 33aume beS grihien SSalDciS. 3d) l)abc einen treuen ^unt.
(gr Vt eine t'leine 3:ed)ter. 2Biv faufen t)ie unreifeu %>ici. Xiefe
S3irnen fint) nod^ ntd)t (not yet) reif. ^d) [tet)e auf einem t)D^en
SBerge. ®ie S5i3gel fitjeu in t?en griincn 33dumen. 3d) liebe
"Die furjen Xa^t t)e« fatten 2Sinter« nid^t. ^et tapfre (Soltjat
^at eine fc^tuere (severe) 2Bnnt)e. 3)ie englifc^en ©d^iffe fint)
Mr gut.
Jtufaa6(. 36.
1. The river is large. The large river. A large river.
The good man. The diligent pupil. The diligent pupils.
A faithful sister. A clever painter. I know a {Ace.) clever
painter. The little child has a new dress. Mr. A. is a*) very
strong man. (The) iron is a very useful metal. We hear
the beautiful song of the little birds. The American ships
are very large. The rich count has a beautiful palace.
2. Miss P^lizabeth is a diligent little girl {neui.]. My
good old father is ill. The little house stands (fte^t) on (auf
(iat.) a high mountain. We love the good children. We
admire (betvUUDCvn) the beautiful palace of the rich count. I
like the long days of the warm summer. We speak of (t)on
dai.) the short human life. The unripe walnuts are not
good. I have seen the beautiful large English ships. A good
advice (9iat, m.) is precious.
Third form.
Adjectives not preceded by amj article.
1) The third form is made use of, when the adjective
precedes tlie substantives without any article or substitute
(see p. 98, 2 and 1)9, 2). The gender not being indicated
by an article, it must be expressed by the ending of the
adjective itself. This form therefore is declined by three
genders in the singular; the plural has only one ter-
mination for the three genders, like the definite article.
Sjtir^ With the verb to be always use the nominative caso
Adjectives. 101
Examples.
Singular. Plural.
Masculine.
N. gutcr SBclu good wine
G. gittctt Seines of good w.
D. gutcm 2Betn(e)
A. gutcn 3[Bem.
giitc 3Seme good wines
gutcr SSeine
gutcn SSeinen
gute 2Belne.
Feminine.
nmrme ©uppen warm soups
tuarmctt ©uppen
n^arme (Suppen.
neiic 33uc^er new books
neucr 33ud)er
neucn 33ud)ern
neuc 33ud)er.
N. iuarme ©iippe warm soup
G. tuarmcr ®uppe
D. tcarmer ©uppe
A. n?arme ©uppe.
Neuter
iV^. frlfd)C0 SSafjer fresh water
(7. ftifd)cn 2Ba[jcr§
/>. fnfd}cm 2Ba[fer
A. fnfd)c§ 233a[fev.
iVo^e. The learner will easily see that these distinctive endings
of the 3rd form are the terminations of the missing article tier,
bic, ba§. The only case which difiers, is the Gen. sing., which
should accordingly be : giiteg. Here an tt has been substituted for
euphony's sake, to avoid the repetition of several s (§).
2) When two or more adjectives are placed before
the same substantive without an article, they are de-
clined in the same way, as:
N. guter, alter, loter SBein (some) good old red wine
G. guteu, alten, voten 2Seine^3 of good old red wine
D. gutem, altem, rotein SBein to good old red wine
A. guten, a(ten, roten 233ein (some) good old red wine.
iV. reid)e, giitige Seute rich kind people
G. xti6>QX, giitiger Seute of rich kind people
D. re'id)en, giitigen Seuteit to rich kind people
A. reic^e, giitige Seute rich kind people.
3) This third form is also used for the vocative case
without or with a personal pronoun:
firmer 9)Jann! armeS 9)tdbd)en! poor man! poor girl!
3fd) (t)U, ©ie) armer 9}Jaun! I (thou, you) poor man!
SieBe^ tint)! dear child! | Slebe ^int?er! dear children!
3funge Seute or tl)v junge Seute! (you) young people!
4) With cardinal numbers and the five numeral ad-
jectives: etuige, mel;reve, t)te(e, maitd^e and tvenige (not alle):
3e^n ftar!e SHcinner ten strong men.
^iele (ti?eiuge) tveue i^veunbe many (few) true friends.
(^iinf fd)Due ^fert)e five beautiful horses.
102 Lesson 18.
5) After a Gejiitive this third form is also used :
^^einrlc^^ gvo^tc^ ^evguiivjcu Henry's greatest pleasure.
X)ie 9J?uttev, beren fleine Sliut^er 2C.
The mother whose little children etc.
§evv 33i'II, mit t)cf|eu jiiugftem ®ot)ue ic^ teiftc.
Mr. Bell with whose youngest son I travelled.
Additional remarks.
1) Adjectives ending in cl ^ as: etcl noble, eitel vain,
1)1111! el dark, mostly lose, when declined, the C before I:
N. t)er et)le ®raf (not ete(e) bie eitle ^-rau
G. be^ et)Ien or cDelu*) ©vafcu tcv eitlen ?^vau
D. 1)6111 et)len - - ©lafeii tcv eitlcii grau
^. tjeii et)len -- -- ©rafeu. t)ie eitle i^rau.
2) Those ending in tX and cn do not, except sometimes
in poetry, require the omission of the c in the Nominative;
but in the other cases the former take only tl after X, the latter
mostly keep their c, as :
(Sin bitterer %xo.\\l a bitter potion,
G. dwfi bittern Xvanf^.
(Sine finftere ^ZaAt a dark night,
G. ^ D. einer [inftern yjadjt.
(Sin offene^ ?^en[ter,
G. eine^ offenen -j^cnftev^.
3) The adjective I) o d) remains unchanged when after its
noun, but when before, it changes in all the cases the d) into
a simple !^» We say: !3)er S3vUim ift l)6d); but:
N. t)er \f^\)^ 33anm, Ij^/. fcie l)o'^en ©iinme thehigh trees.
G. be^ l;ot)en 33anme^. |^/. i)oI)C 53annie high trees etc.
4) Many adjectives are roots and monosyllables as in Eng-
lish, such as: arm, reid), jnng, alt, fiif:; (sweet), rein 2C. But
the greater number are derivatives, and may be known by
the following syllables affixed to a substantive or verb :
^bar: fvud)tbar fertile; — toftbar precious.
fen: golt>en golden; — eid^en oaken; — feiben silken.
sexn: biJljevn wooden; — eifevn iron; — fteinevn of stone.
si) aft: tnijent)4)aft virtuous; — bov^ljaft wicked.
sicj: peij^ig diligent; — arti^ pretty; — V^vad)ttv3 magnificent.
sid)t: [teinid)t stony; — bcvgid)t mountainous, hilly.
= i[d): l^imnilifd) heavenly; — fint)i[d) childish.
slid): bevrlid) splendid; lieblid) lovely ; fcnic^lid^ royal, kingly.
»lo^; qvenjenloi? boundless; — el^rloi? infamous.
s[am: fuYd)t[am timid; — i]el;ov[am obedient; graufam cruel.
*) This other vray of declining; bc8 cbclii, citcln; f>l. bic
ebeln (for cbtcuj is also sometimes met with.
Adjectives.
103
Likewise with:
fXC\6:i: finntetc^ ingenious; ftfd}rei^ abounding with fish.
siJoU: geiftiJoU talented, witty: pra(^ttoolI magnificent.
stt)iirt)ig: Ueben^tDiivbtg amiable; el)rn)uvt)i3 venerable,
st^ert: loben^tuert praise-worthy; tT?unfd}engtt)ert desirable.
5) Adjectives denoting a nation are mostly formed by the
termination «= i f C^ , and written with a small letter, as :
anievifanifc^ American.
t>anifd) Danish.
t)eutf(^*) German.
englif(^ English,
fran^ofifc^ French,
italientfc^ Italian,
griec^ifc^ Greek.
^oUdnbifd^ Dutch.
oflerreld)ifd^ Austrian,
^ohitfd) Polish,
preu^tfc^ Prussian,
ruffifd) Russian.
fdd)fi[d) Saxon.
fd)tDebifd} Swedish,
fpanifd^ Spanish,
tiilfifd) Turkish.
6) Adjectives and participles may be used substantively. In
this case they take the article, and must be written with a
capital letter, but retain their inflexion as adjectives. Ex.:
Adj. fxemb, (strange) veifenb, beutfd), gefaugen.
Declen sion.
First form.
Second form.
N. bcr r^remt)C the stranger
G. ties t^remt)en of the stranger
D. bem i5vemt)en to the stranger
A. ben §vemt)en the stranger.
citt t^tembcr a stranger
einC'g i^rembeit of a stranger
einem ^remben to a stranger
eineu §remt)eu a stranger.
& II. form.
Plural.
III. form.
^rembc strangers
t^rembcr of strangers
i^x*emt)cn to strangers
^rembe strangers.
N. bic t^rembcn the strangers
G. ter^rembctt of the strangers
D. 'Deu ^rembcil to the strangers
A. t)ie §rembctt the strangers.
Such are :
2)er 9tcifent)C the traveller. — Cttt 9teifent)Cr a traveller,
ber ®elei;rtc the learned man. — ein ©ele^rtcr a. 1. man.
bev 33ei)ieutc the man-servant. — el It S3e'DientCt a man-servant,
fcer SDeutfd^c the German. — ein 'J)eut|d)cr a German,
bev ©efanbtc the ambassador. — etu ©efanbtct anambassador.
ber ©efangene the prisoner. — ein ©efangencr a prisoner.
7) Even neuter nouns are formed in this manner, as:
2)a« (Sd}bne the beautiful. | ®ute8 t^un to do good.
!Da8 9Zeue, t)a§ 5l(te that which is new (old). .
8) After ettuaS something or anything, ni^tS nothing,
toiet, tDCnig and mel)t the adjectives used substantively take
the third form ( — c§), as:
*) In bCtttft^ the i has been dropped before [^ (from bcut4[c^).
104 Lesson 18.
S3iet ®Ute8 much good. | yiidfti S'ieueS nothing new (no
(Sttuag (£cl}led)te§ something or anything bad. [news).
2Bir fpred)eu ton ettcaS 5^ii^licl)em {Dai.).
We are speaking of something useful.
Words.
!Der t^tii'^Uni; spring. eiu 5lrbeiter a workman.
t)a^ S^ettev the weather. tie ?lrbeit the work.
t)a8 ©tiicf the morsel, piece. 'Die ®efuut?t)eit (the) health.
ba^ 33ier beer, tie Wliid) milk, fd^tuad) feeble, weak.
frifd) fresh. an(;ene^m agreeable, pleasant.
n3D()uen to dwell, live. iiii^^lid) useful.
ti3ld}tig important, fiig sweet, bliut) blind.
t)ie %{\)en the Alps. t>(au blue, gran grey.
tie ^rantl)elt the disease. fd)ii.^aV3 black. treiJ3 white.
ber 33ed)er the cup, goblet. c^cfctl)x(id) dangerous.
t)ie 9teife the journey. J^oUlningeil to perform.
bie ©lite the kindness. tmnicv always.
Eeading Exercise. 37.
1. X)ie fug en Sl'irfd)en 'i^ahcn einen angene'^men ®ef(^macf
(taste). jDcv Ueb(id)e Sriil)ling tft gefonmien. Od) ^abe t)ie ^rad)*
tigen fbntglid)en ©djlbfjer gcte()en. 3d} faufe guten, alten, roten
sSein. ©cbcn (Sie miv frifd)e^ (new), ireige^ ^rot. §ter ift
fd)i3ne^ roteS ^\ivier. ^iefe O^vnn i^evfaujt gute, fvifd^e, fuf;e 9J?iI(^.
tQ^eine Ucbe, altc, gntc 5)hittcv ift fel)r tvanf. itleine (^amilien
iuol}ncn in fleinen §aufevn.
2. 33ei (in) fd)cnent iBetter gcl)en iinv fpa5ieven (take a walk),
bei fd)(ed)tcm (bad) blciben ^^H* ui .'panfe (stay at home) . ©eben
(3ic miv ein ®(a^ fiif5e, fri[d)e 3[Kild> unt? ein'^tiid gntex^, iuei§e§
^vot. -JJeue i^veunl^c fint) nid)t immev gute B'l't'unte. Od) l^abe
Sl)nen ettva^ 2Bid)tiget^ ^,u [agen. 2Bi[fen 3ie ettvav 'Jieuet\? 3d)
njeig (I know) ettva 3^ve Uebeii ttnber?
§abeii (Sie einen grof^en ©atteu ?
IHeben ©ie fceu voteu Seiu?
^abeii ®ie geBvatene^ i) ^(ei[d)
(roasted meat) ?
SSerlaufeii ®ie fiige 5DZi((^?
3Bd ift mein Itebev tol)ur?
^tebeu ©te bte t)eutfd)e 9)Zuf{f?
'3pred)en ®ie 3)eutf d) , mein §err ?
§aben ®te beut[d)e ©tuntsen
(lessons) ?
2Ber t)at tjiefeu gcit)eiieu 9^ing
tjerloren ?
§at ber 33ader (baker) gute§
a3vot'^
35on njeld)er ^arbe fiub tie ^e=
fcevn tjer 9?aben?
§aben ®ie einen fc^itiarjen ober
einen tveigen §ut?
9letn, er ift nld)t fel)r tief.
-3a, er ift ein fleigigev ^nabe.
Sin beviil)mter, bem'fdier 9Jia(er.
(gr l)ei6t SSinter^aiter.
(Sie finD in meinem nenen §anfe.
^)ld\\, er ift nid)t fet)v grog.
■3d) UebebenrotenuntobentDeigen.
2Bir f)aben gebratenct^ nnt) ge*
!od)tet^i) (boiled).
-3d) ^abe feine fiige ?D^i(d) ; aber
tttfd)e 33nttev.
(Sr ift in bcv (Sd)u{e.
£) ja; abev id)tiebet)teitattenifc^e
mei)r (better).
5d) flpred)e ein n:enig (a little).
3a, id) t)abe jebcn 2;ag eine
(Stunbe.
9)?elne (Sd)ti3cfter 5lnna \)ai \^n
t>ev!oren.
@v ccrfauft immer gute^ 33YDt.
3)ie ^ebevn ber 9taben finb fd)iv>ar3 .
■3d) I)abe ^njei^iite, einen fd)n)ar*
jen nnb einen iueigen.
Nineteenth Lesson.
Degrees of comparison.
1) The comparison, in German as in English, is ef-
fected by two degrees, the comparatwe and superlative.
1) Participles are declined like adjectives.
106 Lesson 19.
The comparative degree is formed by the addition of cr,
or when the adjective ends in e, only t; the superlative
by adding ft or fte, precisely as in the English language.
Further the vowels a, 0, U are changed in most mono-
syllables into df Of U in both degrees.
Superlative Ist form. 2nd form,
fcev, fcie, fca'g reid)ft=c or am veid)ftc«.
= fd)Lniftc ' nm fd)oiifteii.
'- irini^fte * ain Ian(;[teu.
'- altfcjfte ^ am altften.
'■ avnifte = am armften.
'- ftavfftc ' am ftavfftcn.
= frommfte = am fvcmmftcn.
2) In the comparative degree of adjectives in el (not
er or en) the c is dropped before I, as :
ebel noble, Comp. ebler, I Sup, 'Der etetfte.
bitter bitter, ,, bitterer (not bittrer), | „ t)er bittevfte.
3) In the superlative of adjectives ending in three
consonants or in a hissing sound (\, 6, ^, fcf)) an e is
often inserted before ft for euphony (efte), as:
Comp. Superlative degree.
Comp.
9teid) rich
teid)cr
fd)on handsome fd)oner
laug long
langev
alt old
otter
arm poor
armer
ftarf strong
ftfivfev
frcmm pious
fvSmmer
®d)Ied)t bad fd)led)ter
c\ered)t just c^evedjter
fuv5 short fiirjev
fii^ sweet fupcr
ber fd)Ied)tefte or am fdjlec^teften.
'- gcvcd)tefte ' am (^ered)teften.
' hiv^cfte -' am fiir^jefteu.
' fuBcfte '- am fiijseften.
Note 1. Adjectives ending in t with another consonant
before it, may also insert a euphonical C in the superlative
degree, as:
alt, Sup. bev attfte as well as ber alt efte;
fait, Sup. ber fdltefte or bcv fdltfte.
Note 2. Sometimes the word allcr is prefixed to the super-
lative, as: ber allerftartfte meaning the strongest of all.
4) The first form of the superlative bet (Die, ba^)
reid)fte, bcr (bie, ba§) ftdrffte k. is the attributive form of
the superlative, and is only used when followed by a
noun (which however may also be understood), as:
j£)ev veid)fte 5D'?anu the richest man.
SDer ftdv!fte 2Beiu the strongest wine.
5)ie ^?efe ift bic fd)onftc 5i3(ume the rose is the finest flower.
5) The second form, a in re i d; ft c n , Q nt ft d v ! ft c n :c.
is invariable, and used, when the adjective is found
after the auxiliary verb fetn {to he), the adj. being the
last word of the English sentence^ as:
Degrees of comparison.
107
2)ie[er 2Bein ift am fttirfftctt this wine is (the) strongest,
^iefe Stofe ift am fd)oufteu this rose is the most beautiful.
@^ ift am neueften (fd)cuften) k. it is the newest, finest etc.
Note 1. Another adverbial form of the superlative is : 5luf^
befte, auf^ fd^enfte 2C. in the best, finest etc. manner, and a
few superlatives of this kind take nothing but ft. Such are:
ciugcift extremely; ^cd)ft highly; fjofUdjft most politely;
ergebeuft most humbly ; freuut)Ud)ft 2C.
Note 2. The following monosyllabic adjectives change the
vowel neither in the comparative, nor in the superlative:
S3(a6 pale.
Bunt, speckled,
falfd; false.
frot; merry.
^ol)( hollow.
]j)olb kind.
faf)i bald,
farg scanty.
!(ar clear.
Note 3.
Inapp close, scarce.
tat)m lame,
matt languid,
niorfc^ rotten,
nacft naked,
^tatt flat.
pUnnp clumsy.
rol) rude,
runb round.
[anft soft.
fd)taff slack.
\d}{ant slender,
ftarr stiff,
ftotj proud.
ftum^f blunt,
totl mad.
tooU full,
ja^m tame.
In like manner the monosyllables ending in ait,
as: lait lukewarm; Blait blue etc., and all adjectives of two
or more syllables never admit of the modification; as: — bliltig
bloody, blutiger (not bliitigev) ; — fnid)tbav, fvud)tfcavev; artig,
artlgev; befaiuU, Befannter 2C.
6) Some adjectives and adverbs are irregular in the
degrees of comparison, viz.:
Comp.
§.od) high '^o^er higher
ual)e near uabev nearer
gro^ great, large grojser greater
gut good befjev better
"Old much mebv more
ijiele pi. many met)vcre several
ttjenigeve fewer
licbev (rather)
el)ev, fviil)er sooner
Note. A few comparative and superlative degrees, origin-
ally formed of adverbs or prepositions, have no positive ; these
iuenig little
tt)entger pi. few
gem willingly
bait) soon
Supei'l.
tiev !^bd}fte or am ^^oc^ften.
ber It a d) ft e , am n d d) ft e n.
t)er gvbgte, am gvo^ten.
t)ev befte, ambeften thebest.
bermeifte, am meiftenmost.
t)ie mcifteu most.
lamtDCuigften \ ,x,„ !„„.,
KammiuDeften) / ^^^ ^^^^^•
t)ie iveuigften the fewest,
am Uebfteit (I like best).
am el;eften the soonest.
are:
Comp.
2)cr auf3ere the exterior (outer)
ber innere the interior, inner ;
ber oberc the upper, superior;
bet untere the lower, inferior;
Superl.
ber ait^erfte the extremest, utmost,
ber imterfte the innermost.
ber oberfte the uppermost,
ber untcrfte the lowest, undermost.
108
Lesson 19.
Comp
ber mtttlevc the middle;
bcr l;iuterc the hinder, hind-;
bcr toorberc the front-, fore — ;
Superl.
bcr mittclftc the middlemost.
bcr I;intcrftc the hindermost.
bcr toorberftc the foremost.
7) The declenision of the comparative and superlative
degrees is subject to the same rules as the positive form,
and depends upon their being preceded by an article, or
not, as :
First form. Second form,
Comp. Singular (Masc).
N. ber l^o^er e S3aitni the higher tree
G. beg l)Dl)ev e it Samuel of the higher tree
D. bem ^i3l)er c n ^aum to the higher tree
A. ben l^b^ercn Saum the higher tree
Plural.
N. and ^. bie l^o^erctt Sdume the higher trees | l^c^erc 33dume
Comp. Singular (Fern.).
bie buntcrc 33funie the gayer flower
ber bunteien S3(ume of the gayer fl.
ber buntcrctt 33lume to the gayer fl.
bie bunterc 531ume the gayer fl.
ein (;c^crcr S^um.
eine'3 l?ol)eren33aunie§.
einem I)b[)eren ^auni.
einen l)o^eren 33aum.
eiiie bunterc 53(uine.
eiuer buuteven 53(umc.
eiucr bunterc n ^lume.
eiue bunterc illume.
Plural. ^
N. and^. bie buntercn33(umeu the gayer flowers) — bunterc ^lumen.
Comp. Si7igular (Neuter).
N. bag fd)cnerc §au« the finer house
G. bc§ fcbenercn ^^ciufe^s of the finer house
D. bent fd)oncrcn ipaufe to the finer house
A. bag fd;oncrc 5>aug the finer house
ein fd)bnerci8 ^aw^.
eine^3 fd}enerctt§aufeg.
einem fd}enercn g^viufe.
ein fd)cnerci8 ^Ck\x^.
Plural.
N. hfA. bie fd^onercn §aufer the finer houses | — fd}i5nerc §dufer.
When, instead of the indefinite article, one of the pos-
sessive or the indefinite numeral adjectives, or the word no
(fein) are preceding, the comparative and superlative forms of
adjectives take the termination of f,cn** in the plural, just as
those preceded by the definite article and its resp. substitutes
(comp. 1st and 2nd less., pages 20, 21 and 23).
Ex.: nieine, unfre, cure, 3l)re l)ifl)evctt i^dnme; but with-
out neither article nor substitute of it, the plural of
'ein I)cl)ever 23annr etc becomes the Third form
(see this!) and tlien is formed 'Ijij'^erc 33dnnie, bunterC
33lumen, fd^enevc t')du[cr' k.
Degrees of comparison. 109
Superlative.
N. ^' A. baS fduniftc §ait^ the finest house
G. fce^ fc()ou[tcn §viufe^> of the finest liouse
D. ticm fd}on[tcu ipau[e to the finest house.
Plural.
N. hf A. bie fd)LniftCtt §diifer the finest houses
G. t)er fd)oufteii §)au]ev of the finest houses
D. 1)611 fd)lni[ten §du[ern :c.
Third form. Sing.
Masc. Nam. Befjevcr ^affee, Ace. Befjevcn ^affee better cofi*ee.
Fern. N. if A \d)\vax^cxe X'mtt blacker ink.
JS^eui. N. ^ A. fd)onereg 2i>etter finer weather.
Third form. Plur.
Fltir. N. hf A. [d}cncrc S3(umen. G. fdjonerer 33(umen k.
Note. We must remark that^ when two adjectives are com-
pared with one another, which seldom occurs, this must be
done by the word mel)V (= ratherj. Ex.:
(Sr irar mc^r gliirflid; atS ta^fer.
He was more (rather, successful than brave.
8, In comparative sentences, as followed by an ad-
jective and as, is rendered in German by ebenjo — a(6
or nne, and not so — as^ by ntd;t ]o — a(^ or tDtC. Ex.:
(5r ift ebeiifo jung aU id) or icie id) he is as young as I.
S!arl tt)ar ntd)t fo gliidlid; al^ fern ^reunb 2SiI!^etm.
Charles was not so happy as his friend William.
9) As — again answers to the German u (^ e t lun a 1
fo or t)0^^e(t jo — . Ex.:
(Sr ift nod) einmat fo alt (or bop^elt fo att) al^ (or tote) icb.
He is as old again as I.
10) When a relation between two comparatives is
expressed, the English the — the before them is to be
translated j e — b e ft 0. Ex. :
3'c ^i3^er ber 53erg, befto tiefer ba§ Vc,cii.
The higher the hill, the deeper the valley,
3e rul)igev e'ln ScBen ift, befto gtud{id)er ift e§.
The quieter a life is, the happier it is.
(See the 36th Lesson on the Conjunctions, 3rd class.)
Words.
!5)et ©ee the lake. ein S3eil(^en a violet.
ba§ Wttx the sea. ber ^blex* the eagle.
wo Lesson 19.
t)er t^Iilgel the wing. t)a« 2}Iel (the) lead.
l)ie Sxaiit the claw. 'Dag ilupfer copper.
fcei" ^-Pla^ the square, place. t>it ^abe eiu fd)i3nereg. We'nu dlo\e ift fd}cii, bie ^ofe meiner
(Sd)tt)efter ift am fdjbnften. 5u ben ©tdtjtcu fiut) t>ie pvdri}tigften
§dufer. -Su Soubcu leben t)ie veid)fteu S^aitfleute (merchants).
4)ie reic^ften Seute fiut) uid)t immer t)ie fveigebij^fteu.
2. 2)ev 2lt)lev ift ter ftdrffte S3ogeI. (Sr ^at t)ic lauc^fteu
i^lugel uut) t)ie fd)dvffteu fratleu. -^m i^riiljliug fiut) t)ie Xage
fiiv^er alg im Sommer; aber im 2Bintev fiut) fie am fiivjefteu.
3)ag ©Uber ift fo)ibaver alg Da§ tupfer. 2)ag (^o(t) ift bag toft*
bavfte 2JietaU. SBeiu ift befjet alg ^icv. Die fpanifdjeu ^^eine
fiut) tie befteu (SBeiue). 3)iefev 9}?aler ift uid}t fo beriil)mt alg
feiu 5>ater; ahtx feiuc 33ilt)er fiut) ebeufo (as) fd)ou. Uufev Cufel
(Dl)eim) ift ebeufo reid) alg uufev 3>cttev; aber ev ift uid)t fo gliicf*
lid). i)ev befte ^affee fommt an^ 3lvabieu. -Se fviil^er (sooner),
befto befjer.
Jltifgaee. 40.
1. The street is wide; the square is wider, the field is
the widest. The apples are sweet ; the pears are sweeter,
the cherries are the sweetest. This mountain is high, it is
the highest in this country. The rich are not always the
happiest. (The) money is good; (the) labour is better; (the)
virtue is best. The stork has a longer {Ace. m.) neck than
the goose. (The) Ostriches have the longest necks. Mrs. Hunter
is a more industrious woman than my neighbour. She is the
most amiable lady. In spring «the adays lare*) longer than
in winter; in summer ithey lare longest. The morning was
warm, the evening was warmer. The old man is feeble ; the
sick woman is feebler; the little child is feeblest.
*) The figures before the words indicate the order in which
the words are to follow in German.
Lesson 19. Ill
2. Miss Lucy is the handsomest [and loveliest] girl in the
town. Napoleon L (i)er (Stfte) was the greatest general. (The)
lead is useful ; (the) copper is more useful ; (the) iron is
the most useful metal. I have a strict master; my cousin
has a stricter; the son of the count has the strictest. The
strength of the strongest man is far less (tDcit geriligev) than
that (t)ie') of an elephant. The general was more*) unfortu-
nate than unskilful. The (3>e, § 10) better (the) men are, the
happier 2 they lare, Augustus was more successful than brave.
The more, the better. It is best. We are richest, when
(tDCini) we 3 are 2 most i contented. Alexander was as ambitious
(eijv^cijig) as Caesar. I am as tall (gvo^) as you, but my bro-
ther is not so tall as you.
Conversation.
Seld)er ^-(ug ift breitev, ber 3)er Si'Eicin ift t)iel bvelter.
^JZecfar ot)er ber S^I^eiu?
3fft 2BU^elm ftarlcr alg taxi? 3d) t)en!e (think), tavl ift ftarfcr.
©litt) t)ie teid)ften Seute immer ®ag ift nld}t immer tev i^viU (the
am gliidddifteu? case).
2Seld)e^iftt)a^bftbarfte5)^etaU? 3)a§ (S^b ift t)a« foftbavfte.
%htx ti)eld)e^ ift am nit^Itd^ften? ®a§ @ifen ift am iuil^lid)fteii.
S©eid)eg finb t)ie befteu SBetne? ®ie fyauifdjen 2Beine.
ilBol^ev' !ommt t)er befte 5laffec? ^exbefteSt^affecfommtau^Slrabicn.
Seld)e§ ift t)ie fd)onfte S3lume? £)I)ne3tT)eiiel (no doubt) t)te9iofc.
3ft 5ilfret) alter al'8 ®ie? 9Jein, ev ift jiinger als id); er ift
Der iitiu3fte (So^^n.
^inb t)ie)e %p\d veif? ©ie finb iud)t ganj (quite) fo
reif al§ bie 33irnen.
2Bd(^e8 ift ba« ftarffte Xier? 3)ev (Stefaut ift bag ftailfte.
2Bel4e« ift ber gx'bgte ^^ifd;? "SDer 2Balftfd) (whale) ift ber
gvijgte toon atteu ?^i|d)en.
§aben cin.
3ft ^vautein ^ofa ein fd)cne§ ©ie ift fe^rfdjcn; fieiftbte[d)oufte
9}Jdbd)en? tocn ben brei ©d)\i>eftevn.
^enncn ©ie eine fd)onere 53(ume Wn\, id) !enne feine fd)i3ncre.
atg bie 3^ofe?
235e(d)e« ift ber faltefte SJJonat ®er9Jionat3annar iftber taltefte.
in ^eutfd)Ianb?
*) See p. 109, Note.
112
Twentieth Lesson.
ON THE NUMERALS.
The numerals are of two kinds, namely: Cardinal
and Ordinal numbers.
I. Cardinal numbers. ^runbjal^Icn.
(Sin, eiue, cin or eiuig one.
^Xdd two.
iDrei three.
toler four.
fiinf five.
fe(l)S six.
fiebeu seven.
ad)t eight.
JUnm nine.
3el)U ten.
elf eleven.
jtDolf twelve.
t)rei3el)n thirteen.
l)icv3et)U fourteen.
fuutjel^ii fifteen.
fcd)5el)U sixteen.
fiebjel)!! seventeen.
aci)t5ei)U eighteen.
licun3i'l)U nineteen.
3^1)011315 twenty.
eiuiiiiDatDanjig twenty-one.
3ti^eiiuil?3iuaii3ig twenty-two.
t)veiuilt)3lDvlli3ig twenty-three.
^jievuut^jiuan^ig twenty-four.
fiiufunDjtOviujig twenty-five.
fedjeiiut^jivanjic^ twenty-six.
ficbenuiiCjlDanjig twenty-seven .
ad)tuut)3^i>an3ig twenty-eight.
ncunuiiD^tDau^ig twenty-nine.
t)rei^iv3 thirty.
cimintDvei^ig thirty-one etc.
toieVjicj forty,
fiinfji'g fifty.
fed)5ig sixty,
[icbjig seventy.
ad)t3ic^ eighty,
ueuujicj ninety.
buut^m*) a hundred.
Ijuutcrt uut? eiu^ a hundred and
3a^cil)UUiMnt two hundred, [one.
tiveil}UUl?evt three hundred.
toievbuuDert four hundred.
fiinil;uutert five hundred etc.
taufeut)*) a thousand.
5ii>eitvUifeut) two thousand.
ji'I^ntaufeut? ten thousand.
fiinfjigtaiiient) fifty thousand.
i^uiiPeittviufent' a hundred
thousand,
eiue ^3J(ilIioir a million.
1800, eintaufeiit) ad^tbiuiDert — or aditjcbiilMnit^ert.
1S05, eiutaufeut) acbtbunteit(unt)) fiinf — or ad)t5el)n:^uut)evtfiiuf.
1852, eiutaufeut) ad^tl^uubevtjtvciuutjfiiufjig or ad)t5cl)ul)uut)ert--
jii^eiuut fiinf jig.
Observations.
1) The first number ciu, eiue, eiu (joined to a noun), but
ciucr, einc. eineS or c\\\S> (when without a noun), is declined
like the indefinite article, which is in fact the same word.
*) A hundred and a thousand are in German simply l> unbelt
and taufcub (not eiu buubcrt jc ) ; but the Kn^rlish one hundred,
one thousand is rendered by ciuljnubcrt and cin tan 'cub.
Cardinal Numbers. 113
When used as a numeral, more stress is employed. The
plural is only employed with the definite article: t)ie eiuen
the ones or some, in which case it is considered as an adjective.
2) We must here observe that the English practice of
putting one or ones after the adjective is not admissible in
German. When therefore it occurs in English, it cannot be
translated, as: a good one = eiu guter [masc], or if feminine,
eine gute, neuter = ein gute§.
Note. The two numbers ixot'i and brei have an inflexion for
the genitive and dative case, when used before a substantive with-
out the article:
2)ic ®Ietd;^eit jtueier 2)retecfc the equality of two triangles.
2)a8 S3iinbui8 breier ^ontgc the alliance of three kings.
3) All the numerals up to t)Unt)ert may take the inflexion
Ctt for the dative plural, when not immediately followed by
a substantive. It is however better, not to inflect them at all.
55on fcreien of or from three. I mit funfen with five.
Untor Jti^attjig among twenty.
4) §unt)evt and ^aufenb, when nouns, are declined, as:
iV. and^. fea^^uutert a hundred; bie^unberte the hundreds.
(t)ie) ^laufenbe (the) thousands.
5) The hours of the day or night are expressed as follows ;
What o'clock is it? SBietoiel U^r ift eg?
Two o'clock jtDei Uf|r.
A quarter past two ein 3Siertel na^ jtuet or ottf btet
Half past two JjalB brei. [(towards three).
A quarter to three bvei S5iertel auf btei or V4 i'JJJ^ ^^*st.
At three o'clock um bvet U^r.
Note 1. With minutes we reckon as in English. Ex.:
Ten minutes to five 5el)n ^Rinuten t?or (or bt§) 5 U^r.
Five minutes past two fiinf 9Jiinuten nac^ Jtt)et.
Note 2. In before a year must be translated im 3^al)r. Ex.:
In 1870 im Qa^x 1870.
6) A person's age is expressed as in English. Ex.:
How old are you? 2©ie alt finb ©ie?
I am twenty years old id) bin Jt^anjig ^a'^te alt.
7) The numeral adverbs are:
©inmal once; jttjeimal twice; breimal three times etc.
8) By adding txlci to the cardinals, the variative numerals
are formed; as: einerlet of one kind; jtioeierlet of two kinds;
breierlei; toieverlei; je^ncrlel; mand)erlei of several kinds ; tjielerlet
of many kinds; allevlei of all kinds. These words admit of
no inflexion and precede the noun.
OTTO, German Conv.- Grammar. 8
114 Lesson 20.
Beigen ©te mlr jtt^elertei STud), fclaueS unto fd^toarjeS.
Show me two kinds {or sorts) of cloth, blue and black.
9) The multiplicatives are formed by adding the syl-
lable fa(^ {or fdltig) to the cardinal numbers; as:
einfac^ simple, single. breifad) triple, threefold.
^njeifad) \ twofold. toterfad) quadruple,
tooppelt J double. Setjnfai^ tenfold etc.
10) Single, meaning separate, is translated elnjelu; but
in the sense of only, it is e in Jig. Ex.:
Single words etnjetne SKerter.
Not a single word fein eiujigeg 2Cort.
11) Only, when an adjective, is also rendered einjtg, as:
My only son ntein einjiger ©o^n.
Words.
^le ^veunbfc^aft friendship. "Der 33at(en the bale.
t)a§ ©d)af, pi. ©c^afe, the sheep. "Der ^eint) the enemy,
cine Sxto^t a goat. geboren bom.
X) @d)n)ein, pi. — e, the pig. "Der 3^^^^' the sugar,
tie ^ul), pi. &l)e, the cow. tote 9}Zeite the mile.
toer £)d}fc {2nd decl.) the ox. toie 9?etoolution' the revolution.
toer (SimDol;ncr the inhabitant, eine 3fnfel an island.
toie ®d)Iad)t the battle. 3fylanto Iceland.
toa8 3a^r the year. toie ^Baumti^oUe cotton,
tote 2Bod)e the week. toer ^eifentoe the traveller,
leben to live, tne'^r at§ more than, mal times.
Reading Exercise. 41.
1. -3^ ^aBe nur (only) etnen 53rntocr. ®ie l^aBen nut
eine ©c^njefter. ®ie i^reuntofd^aft toiefer torei 9)?dnner. 2J?etn
£)^eim ^atte neun Sllntoer. ©r ^at torei (Sc^ne unto oier Xbd)ter
cerloren. T^iinf "ipfertoe '^aben stijan^ig ^-iif^e ; tocnn (for) jetoe^ 'ipferto
!^at tier t^iif^e. Untcr (among) torei^ig %f'\t{\\ \oox ni^t ein gutct
(Obs. 2). Sine 2Bod)e l)at fietcn Zao^t. @in Xag \)cd merunto*
^njanjig ©tuntoen. i)ie[e« _ ^orf l)at ad)t5el)nl)untoert j^tjeiunto*
StDan^tg Sinnjol^ner, unto torei^untoert ac^tuntotoreif^ig §>au[er. ^t\f\\
unto fihifuntot)ier5i9 mad)en fiinfnntofitnfsig. 82 unto 67 madjen 149.
2. 35ier mal (times) 8 [into 32. — ©icbcn mal 9 Hnto 63. —
21 mal 32 [into 672. -3^ bin geboren (was bom) im 3al^r 1814
unto mein jitngfter Srutoer im 3al)r 1818. ?D^cl)ammeto lebte ton
571 bi« 632, er flol) toon 9)^cffa nad) 2)cetoina (^I)atreb) im 3a^r
622. ^m 3!al)r(e) 1492 l)at .^olumbm^ ^Imcrifa enttoccft (dis-
covered), ^ie ^Reformation in TcntfdUanto bcgann tm 3a^r 1517.
(3)ie (Statot) Sontoon l)atte am SAlufie toct^ ^atjre^^ 1882 \6)e\\
2770 albe
(SUe or t)vei (SUen unt) eine ^albe.
Words.
^er 33anb the volume. t)ietleid)t' perhaps.
t3ie ^lafc^e the bottle, flask. er ftarb he died.
ba^ -3fa'^rf)nn"Dert the century, bag filter the age. _
tie £la[fe the class. fcer S^ee tea. f^i^tig ready.
ticx $a^ft the pope. bie ^^egie'tung the reign,
ber §61*509 the duke. t>ert)el'ra'tet married.
t)ev §afe the hare. fleigig industrious, diligent.
S3riifjel Brussels.
Reading Exercise 43.
1. ®er evfte SD^^onat t>e^ Written 3fal)re8. 3)er jtteite Za^
ber t>ierten ^od)e. ®ag fed)gte ^enfter t)eg tjierten ©tocf§ (story) .
§err S^obinfon tear 32 2Bod)en !ranf; in t)er fereinnt)brei§ig[ten
ftarb ev (he died). Qatoh t?er 3^^'cite (James II.) ftatb in §ran!*
reid) ben (or am on the) totev5el)nten September 1701. ©eorg III.
(t)er 3)ritte) wmU (was) ben 22ften (September 1761 In ber feeft=
minfter*51btet (Abbey) gefrijnt (crowned). (Sr n^at bet feiner
2;^T;on-33efteigun3 (accession) 22 ^ai)xe a(t.
2. ^ubnjig XIV. (bcr 55ier5el)nte) ftarb im 3a^v 1715;
Subtuia XV. im ^al^re 1774; Subtuig XVI. im ^at^re 1783.
!Drei ^djtd finb bie §alfte bon brei ^iertef. 3)iefe8 tft mein
fiinfteg ®(a§. ®ie i^rau njar anbertf)atb 3al^re Iran!. §ier tft
ittjeierlei SBein, roter unb iceiBer. 2Biebie{ U^r (what o'clock)
tft e§? (S^ tft fiinf U^r ober t)ieUeid)t ein SSiertel anf fe(^§.
§einri(i^ ber Slc^te, ^onig bon ©nglanb, XQax fed}MaI bert^eiratet.
JtttfgrtBe. 44.
1. The first day. The third year. I have the fifth volume.
The second week of the seventh month. This is our sixth
bottle. The eighth year of the nineteenth century. The child
was a week and a half old. Charles is the twentieth in his
118
Lesson 20.
class. March is the third, June is the sixth, and December
the last month of the year. The duke of (t?Dn) Marlborough
won (geltjann) the battle of (bei) Hochstadt on the 12th [of]
August 1704. He died on the 16th of June 1722.
2. (The) Pope Gregory (®rcgor) [the] VII. was an enemy
of the emperor Henry IV. [Gen.). Edward III. took (naljm)
Calais on the 3rd of August 1347. I was five times at (in)
Paris and four times at Brussels. We set out (fiut) aBgeveift)
on the 26th [of] November 1850, and we arrived (fiat? an*
ge!ommen) on the 14th of April 1851. Peter [^titx] the Great
died at (in) St. Petersburgh on the Sth February 1725, in
the 53rd year of his age and in the 43rd of his reign. Tell
me (fagen ®ie mit) what o clock it is. It is four o'clock or
half past four. I shall go out at (um) a quarter to five.
Conversation.
2Bie biele Winter ^t §ei'r
S3rDn?n ?
2Bte alt ift jein alteftet ©o^n?
Wit alt ift feine jiingfte 3;;od)ter'^
^n n)eld}em 3al)rl;unt)ert leben
ttjtr?
2Btet)iel finb 30 unb 50?
memel ift 12 mal 12?
ilBaren ©ie geftern auf ber 3fagb
(out hunting) ?
S©a^ l^aben ©ie gcfc^offen (killed)?
2BeId}eu ^>la^ (place) ^t ®eorg
in tDer ®d)ule?
Unt) fein 33ruter SBalter?
ilBann tintvtie ilavl V. geboren?
SBann ftavb $cter ber ©ro^e?
2Bie alt n.>ar ev?
^aben ®ie mel 21>ein getvunfen?
^ieinel 2it)ec nMni[d)en ©ic?
2BeId)ei^ ift bie ipalfte ten Vs?
2Barcn iel Ul)v fpcifcn ®te?
Um iuieoiel Ul}v gcl)en feic ju 5Qett ?
@r l)at 6 ^inber ; 2 ©c^ne unb
4 !j;cd)ter.
er ift 18 3fabre alt.
©ie ift fiinf 3abre alt.
2i>iv leben im 19ten3fa^r!^unt)ert.
30 nnb 50 finb 80.
12 mal 12 finb 144.
3fa, geftern nut) l^eute (to-day).
Wa l^aben 13 §afen gefd)offen.
(Sr ift fel)v fleigig, er fat immer
(always) ten ei'ften ^\.iinfd)e bvei 33ievtel"ipfunb*).
3:)ic§alfte t?on Vs tft Vs ^bcr Vie-
4 3abve, 2 9)Jonate unb 23Xage.
(g^ ift 11 Ul)r Dbcv balb jivolf.
3d) l)abc !cine Ubv; aber c^ mag
^Ib jnjei Ul)r fcin.
©3 ift brei 3>icvtcl anf incv.
3d) fveife (dine) nm 12 U^r.
Um 10 U^v dter l)alb 11.
*) or brci Slc^tct ^Uo, see p. 55 *).
119
Twenty-first Lesson.
The Verb. 2)a^ Stitts^oxU
General E-emarks on Verbs.
§ 1. There are five kinds of verbs, viz.: 1) active
or transitive; 2) passive; 3) neuter ox intransitive ; 4) re-
flective^ and 5) impersonal verbs.
1) A verb is active or transitive^ when the action
requires an object or person acted upon :
■3fd) e[fe I eat [what?) elueu STpfel an apple.
■34 lic^c I love [whom?) meine ©i^tueftet my sister.
We see that effen and IieBen are active or transitive
verbs. The object is commonly in the Accusative^ some-
times in the Dative.
2) A verb is considered passive^ when the action con-
veyed by the verb, is suflfered by the subject itself:
9Jtelne @d)ttjefter tolrt) t)on mir cjelieBt.
My sister is loved by me.
®ie S^fet tDerben ge^effen the apples are eaten.
3) A verb is termed neuter or intransitive^ when it
implies a state or an action which does not pass over
to an object, but remains with the subject:
■3fd) fc^lafe I sleep (you cannot say : / sleep something) .
■3c^ gel^e I go (not : / go somebody or something) .
4) A verb is reflective or reflected, when the object
to which the action passes over, is the same person as
the subject :
3fd) unter^alte mi(^ I amuse myself.
(Sr rettete ftc^ Ae rescued himself.
5) Impersonal verbs are without any relation to a
person or thing doing the action expressed by the verb :
(£§ fc^neit it snows. (S^ vegnet it rains.
§ 2. With regard to their outer form, they are
either roots or derivative verbs.
All derivative verbs are regular.
Note. Prefixes, of course, do not make a verb derivative.
Of ergeben or angeBen, the radical is not ergeB* or angeb*,
but geb, er* and an* before geb* being j^re;?^:^* ; hence such
verbs are not to be termed derivative, but root -verbs with
a prefix or compounds.
120 Lesson 21.
§ 3. Verbs are inflected by person^ number^ tense
and mood. There are three persona and two numbers.
Verbs have six tenses ^ to denote the time of the action,
viz.: 1) The Present; 2) Imperfect {Preter imperfect);
3) Perfect^ 4) Pluperfect; 5) First Future; 6) Second
Future.
§ 4. Verbs have six moods to denote the diiferent
relations of the sentence to the speaker , viz. : 1 ) Lidi-
cative; 2) Subjunctive (or Conjunctive)^^ 3) Conditional;
4) Imperative; 5) Infinitive; 6) Participle.
§ 5. There are two different ways of conjugating
German verbs; the one is called the modern or regular
form, the other the ancient or irregular form. All the
verbs are accordingly divided into two great classes:
1) Regular or moder7i verbs.
2j Irregular or ancient verbs.*)
Regular or modern verbs.
A verb is called regular when the vowel or diph-
thong of the radical syllable remains the same through-
out, when the Imperf. ends in tc, and the Part, in t. Ex. :
The moder?i or regular conjugation comprises, besides
many other root-verbs:
1) all those verbs whose radical vowel is 0, tt
or en. Such are for example:
with o:**) \)^U\\ to fetch; (obeu to praise; I^offen to hope;
fto^feu to knock; tod;en to boil; loI)iien, cjeI)ord)en 2C.
with u:**) fudj^en to seek; fc|;u[Dcu to owe; murreu to
murmur; fummeu to hum etc.
with en: beiigcu to bend; jciigeii to Avitness; fd^eitcu to
shun etc.
2) those verbs whose radical vowel is modified, viz. :
(kf 0, VL and hXf as: — iDcirmcii to warm; I)orcn to hear;
fii^reu to lead; traumen to dream.
*) The conjugation of regular or modern verbs is also called
'feeble (f((>\va(^ci conjugation*, that of irreg. or anc. verbs 'strong
'[torfo conjugation'.
**) The only exceptions to these rules are: 1) with o: font men
to come (see the irregular verbs Nr. 42); flofjcn to push (109). —
2) with It: rufeu to call (110). iThese figures indicate the number
of the irregular verb in their respective lists, Less. 26th to 29th incl.).
The verb. 121
Note. The following verbs, being irregular, are the only
exceptions :
■with a: gefcareit to bring forth (Nr. 24); gal^ren to ferment (139).
with o: fd^tDoren to swear (148); erioicfjen to become extinct (135).
with ii: liigen to lie (142); fcetriigm (betriegeu; to cheat (113).
3) all verbs ending in 5 e n , (fen, c^ ten, guen, e(n,
txn , tgen and teren, as: tan^eu to dance; paden to
pack up; aci)ten to esteem; tegneu to rain; fd;metd)e(n
to flatter; Befferu to improve; fiinbtgen to sin; ftubieren
to study etc.
Except: fi^en to sit (13); Baden to bake (155 ; crfd;rerfett to be
frightened (22); fed^ten to fight (137), and fle^ten to twist (138).
Formation of the tenses.
The Present tense is formed by detaching the final tt
from the Infinitive; as: 3d; lobe I praise or I am prais-
ing (from (obeu to praise) ; \6.) fitd)e (from fud;en to seek).
In the Imperfect the syllable it (sometimes ete) is
added to the radical, as: lob-te from lob-en; ^i3V'te from
:^or*en; reb-ete from reb^en.
The Past participle is formed by prefixing the syl-
lable ge, and by the addition of t (sometimes e t) , as : gc=
(ob't, ge'I)i3r't, c^c^reD-et. All simple and compound verbs
(L. 31) take this ge.*j
The First future is formed by combining the auxiliary
td^ merbe with the Infinitive: ic^ tperbe (oben, id; tcerbe
l^cren, td^ toerbe reben.
The Perfect and Pluperfect^ by combining the aux-
iliary t(^ ^^\t, tc^ l;atte2C. with the Past Participle., as:
id^ l^abe getobt, tc^ ^abe ge^ort, ic^ ^abe gerebet; Pluperfect
\if ^atte getobt, id) ^atte ge^ort 2C. This is quite analogous
to the conjugation of the English regular verbs.
The terminations of the different persons of the Pre-
sent and Imperfect tenses are as follows :
Present. Imperfect.
Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural.
1. — it or tit — itn or CtCtt
2. — tcft or etcft —iti or ctct(tt)
3. —it or etc* —ten or ctCtt*
*) Not those compounded with inseparable particles , where
the prefix gc is dropped (see p. 126, 5).
1.
— c
—en
2.
-ft
or
eft
-t, ti
or Ctt
3.
— t
or
ti.
—en.
122
Lesson 21,
Conjugation of a regular or modern verb.
Sokn to praise.
Subj unctive.
Indicative.
Present Tense.
^d) Icbc *) I praise, I am praising
t)U lobft or lobcft thou praisest
er (fie, e^) (oBt he (she, it) praises
man lobt people praise
\X)\x loben we praise
t[)r lobt or tobet 1 ye praise
©ie (oben j you praise
fie loben they praise.
^6) lobe I [may] praise
tn lobeft thou mayst praise
er lobe he may praise
XOIX loben we may praise
t'f|t lobet \ ye may praise
©ie loben / you may praise
fie loben they may praise.
3^^ lobtC I praised
tu lobteft thou praisedst
er lobte he praised
\x>\x lobten we praised
f^r lobtet \ ye praised
(Sie lobten | you praised
fie lobten they praised.
Imperfect.
M) lobte**) (if) I praised
t)U lobteft thou praised
er lobte he praised
n)ir lobten we praised
it)r lobtet \ ye praised
©ie lobten j you praised
fie lobten they praised.
Perfect,
3c^ ^aBc . . getobt I have praised
bn J|aft gelobt thou hast pr.
er l^ttt gelobt he has praised
etc. etc.
Pluperfect.
3fd) '^Oiht gelobt I may have pr.
bn I)abeft gelobt thou mayst h. pr.
er ijdht gelobt he may have pr.
etc. etc.
3;cl) ^atte . . gelobt I had praised
1)n l^attejt gelobt thou hadst pr.
er I)atte gelobt he had praised.
3d) t)atte getobt (if) I had praised
bu l^dtteft gelobt ic.
er l^dtte gelobt k.
First Future.
3f(^ tDerbe . . loben I shall praise
bn tDirft loben thou wilt praise
er n)irb loben he will praise
unr njerben loben we shall pr.
il)r n^erbet loben \ ye will pr.
®ie njerben loben / you will pr.
fie njerben loben they will pr.
3d) \T3erbe loben I shall praise
bn n?crbeft loben thou wilt praise
er njerbe loben he will praise
Xo'xx trerben loben we shall praise
tt)r iverbet loben \ ye will pr.
^\t lucrben loben j you will pr.
fie tverben loben they will praise.
Second Future.
■Sd) tuerbe gelobt l)abcn I shall
have praised
bu n>irft gelobt l)aben k.
K. :c.
3d) n?erbc gelobt l^aben I shall
have praised
bu njerbeft gelobt ^ben :c.
2c. :c.
*) or lob^ in the familiar way. — **) or lobcte.
Regular verbs. 123
First Conditional.
Singular. Plural.
■3d)i»ur'De . . loBen I should praise tclr t^iir'Den loBen we should pr.
t)u tciirbeft lob en thou ivouUst p. i^r iDiirfeet loBen you would pr.
er tciirfce loBen he would pr. fie tiJiirben toBen they ivould pr.
In the same manner, conjugated with other auxiliaries of
mood :
Potential.
-Sc^ !ann (oBen I can praise,
id) mug loben I must praise,
id) t»iE IcBen I will praise.
3d) fonnte loBen I could praise,
tc^ fo Ute loBen I ought to praise,
id) iDoUte loben I would praise k.
Second Conditional.
■Sc^ tDiirbe gelobt l^aben or !^atte getobt I should have praised
t)U h)iirt)eft gelobt tjaben or ^tteft gelobt thou wouldst have pr. k.
Imperative.
Sobe or lob' praise (thou) . loben tutr or tagt unS Id* 1 let us
ev fott toben let him praise. tt>ir iDoUen loben [ben, /"praise,
fie foUen loben let them praise. lobet or loBctt ©ic praise (you).
Infinitive.
Pres. loben or JU toben to praise.
um . . . 5U loben (in order) to praise.
Past, gelobt l^aben or gelobt ju ^ben to have praised.
Participles.
Pres. (obenb praising. Past, gelobt (getobet) praised.
Note 1. The English mode of conjugating the verb to he
with the addition of a Part. pres. cannot be rendered literally
in German, but the corresponding tenses must be given, as:
Pres. I am learning i^ terne; he is learning et letntJC.
Im'pf. I was learning t(^ temte; he was learning er lemte.
Perf. I have been learning id) "^abe geternt 2C.
Note 2. Interrogative form: Do I praise? lobe id)? Does he
praise? lobt er? Did I praise? lobte id) or ^abe id) .. . gelobt?
Did you praise? lobten Ste or ^aben ®te gelobt?
Negative: I do not praise ic^ lobe . . . nid)t, he does not
praise er lobt nic^t. I did not praise tc^ lobte . . . ntc^t or ic^
|abe . . md)t gelobt. Do not praise loben ©ie md)t.
The inflexion of regular verbs [Principal parts)., is thus :
t(^ lielic — lielD-tc — ge-IicKit
Such are:
l^teben to love, like,
leben to live, to be alive,
l^olen to fetch, to go for.
fd)tden to send.
ban!en [dat) to thank,
faufen to buy.
legen to lay, to put.
fuc^en to seek, look for.
124
Lesson 21.
madjen to make.
Iac()eii to laugh.
iDeincn to cry, weep.
fvagen to ask (a question).
fagen {dat.) to say, to tell.
fpielen to play.
ietjreu to teach.
lyoxen to hear.
lexnen to learn.
ftvafen to punish.
»erteit)igen
ftcUen to place upright,
jeigen {dat.) to show,
leeren to empty,
fuaen to fill.
rut)en to rest.
ti3dl)(eu to choose.
t)ienen to serve,
flaaen to complain.
ti}Dl}uen to live, to dwell.
bvaitd)en to need, to require,
to defend.
Words.
jDer 2d)xcx the teacher, master, ntemanb nobody.
t)ie Slufgabe the exercise, lesson. t?er ^dvm the noise.
ber §at}n the cock. bag 51'alb, pi. ^'a(ber, the calf.
bag 5)ing, pi. — e, the thing, trdge lazy, bauen to build.
ber §anb[d}u^, pi. -e, the glove, fiuben to find. liegen to lie.
bte ftiid)e the kitchen. ixai)en to crow, tapfer brave.
bie 5^ad}tigQt( the nightingale, toerbieneu to deserve.
ber SO^ei^ger the butcher. biefen^JJorgena^/v, this morning.
Reading Exercise. 45.
1. 3d) Uebe metnen S3vubcr. ®u Uebft beine ©d^tuefter.
®ie ?^ifd)e leben im 2Sa[fet. ^a^ !aiifen ©ie? ®er ^ouig l)at
eiu (Sd)Io|^ gebaut. ®er ^nabe lerut. _ 1)er Secret '^at biefeii
(2d)iiler gelobt, tDcil (because) er fe'^r flei^ig i[l. 3)ev ^nabe ^at
feine ?Iufgabe ind)t gelernt. 3)er 33atcr [traft ben trdgen ^naben.
T)ie ?!}?utter fpielte mit bent ^inb. ®ie tapfevn ©olbaten tuerben
bie @tabt certetbigen. -^c^ fe^e (see) bag fpielenbe 5^inb. jDie
9J?uttei- tuitrbe ireinen, tuenn bag ^^'inb fvau! n^dre.
2. 2Biv lobeu ben fleigigeu (Sd)iiler. Sie fatten i^n aiic^
gctobt. 9Uemanb tuirb bie trdgen (Sd)iUer lobcn. @eftern 2t)orte
I id) fd)one 9Jhi[if. 3d) I)abe fie nid)t get)ert. §aben bie 5linber
geftern gef^nelt? ®ie n^erben niorgen fpiclen. §brft bu bie ^D?ad)«
tigaU fingen? §oren (Sie ben §al)n frdt^en? !Der ^al)n Ijat brel«
mal gefrdbt. 3c^ l)abe il)n nur einntal (only once) gel;crt. ?ie*
bet eure Sltern.
,^itfoa6e. 45a.
I seek my hat. He fetches water. I thank you (3^nen).
The child wept. We hear a great noise. We heard the
cock crow. At (um) what o'clock did it (er)crow? It crowed
at three o'clock this [Ace] morning. Children, hear my words.
Do you not hear what (tuag) your master says? Do you seek
your cloak? I seek my gloves. Seek and you will find.
The servant sought his knife. Has he sought in the kitchen?
It lies (liegt) in the kitchen. The cliildren will play in the
garden.
Regular verbs. 125
Peculiarities in the conjugation.
1) There are some verbs, in which the C after the
radical consonant is retained throughout every mood,
tense and person. Such are all regular verbs ending in
beu, ten, ftcn, gnen, ^nen, t^meu, as it would offend
the ear to let the termination immediately follow the b,
t, ttt or tl, of the radical. For example:
SReben to talk.
Present Tense.
S. ^6} rebe I talk Fl. tuir rebeit we talk
tu ret) eft thou talkest i^x rebet \ ye talk
er ret?et he talks ©te ret) en j you talk
man rebct people talk fie reben they talk.
Imperfect.
S. 3f(^ rebctc I talked PI. toix rebeten we talked
bu rebeteft thou talkedst i^r rebetet | ye talked
er rebetc he talked ®ie tebeten j you talked
fie rebetc she talked fie rebeten they talked.
Perfect. Pluperfect.
•3c^ ^aBe gerebct I have talked. | 3f^ ^^iit gerebet I had talked.
In the same manner are conjugated:
S3aben to bathe.
fd)aben to injure,
bilben to form,
lanben to land,
ac^ten to esteem, respect,
antnjorten to answer,
beten to pray,
warten to wait.
ertDarten to expect.
mteten to hire, to take.
fiird)ten to fear, to be afraid.
toten to kill.
fd)lac^ten to kill, slaughter.
retten to save, rescue.
off n en to open.
begegnen to meet.
jeid^uen to draw.
arbeiten to work etc.
Imperf. i(^ babctc, ac^tctc, antttjovtctc, toartete, fiird^tete, atBetteteic.
Part. past. gcBabct, gea(^tet, geafittDortet , get^artet, gefurd^tet,
getiitet, geoffnet, begegnet, gerettet, gearbeitet.
2) Verbs ending in fen, ^en, fd^en or 5 en retain
the C only in the second person of the singular present.
^6) reife I travel
bu reifeft thou travellest
er reift he travels etc.
■3d) tanje I dance
bu tanjcft thou dancest
er tan^t he dances etc.
Such are :
2Biinfd)en to wish. I fi^en to sit.
fe^en to put, to place. | l^affen to hate.
126
Lesson 21.
3) Verbs ending in clu, such as: i^anbedi to act,
drop the e before 1 in the firat person singular of tlie
Present tense ; verbs in cni should not omit the c before r.
Present Tense.
3f(i) l^anblc (not "^anbele) I act
t)u ^nbelft thou actest
er i)ant)elt he acts
iutr t)ant)e(n we act
i^r ^aut)elt \ ye act
®ie l^aubeln | you act
fie ^anbeln they act.
3cf) betvnmbcrc I admire
t)U bei)3uuterft thou admirest
er beti3unt)crt he admires
tuir bt'iLnuibern we admire
t^r betDiuiteit \ ye admire
©ie betDunbern j you admire
fie betijuubern they admire.
Imperfect.
■3(^ betDunbevte I admired etc.
I Past p. betiHUitert.
erft.ntern to reply,
flcttent to climb.
3d) ^tlbelte I acted etc.
Part. past, getjanbclt.
Such are:
5^abeln to blame.
fd}iitteln to shake.
4) Verbs of foreign origin ending in teren, are
regularly conjugated; only in the Participle past they
do not admit of the prefix ge:
(Stubie'ten to study. Imp. icb ftubierte. Per/. \6) ^abt ftubtert,
probieren to try. ic^ probievte. id) l^abe probicrt.
tegie'ren to govern. id) vegterte. id) l^abe vegiert.
imaifd)ie'ven to march. id) mavfd)ierte. id) bin mai[d)ievt.
5) Verbs having an unaccented prefix before them,
do not take the syllable ge in their Part. Past. Such
prefixes are: ic, em^j, cut, er, t)cr, jcr, gc, nn^f uoU,
iuibcr and ^inten Ex.:
^cIol)'nen to reward. Imp. id) 6clot)nte. Part, bcloljnt.^)
toerfaufcn to sell. id) Dcrfviufte. Dcrfauft.
jerftoren to destroy. id) jcrftcrte. jcrftlHt.
t)cruiieten to let. • id) ucrmietcte. tjcrmietct.
(Further particulars on this class of verbs are given in the Less. 30.)
6) The following verbs and those derived from them,
though quite regular in their terminations, change in the
Imperfect and Fart, past the root-vowel into a:
Infinitive. Present. Imp. Part. past.
S3renncn to burn id) bvcnne id) brauutc gcb vaunt.
£enueu to know 2) id) fenne * fnnute get a nut.
■JJcnneu to name, call id) ncnne -- uaunte genannt.
1) not gebclo^iut. 2) French connaitre.
Regular verbs.
127
Infinitive.
Present.
Imp.
Part. past.
9^ennen to run, race i(fe renne ic^rannte gerannt.
©enben to send
SBenben to turn
3!)enfen to think
S3rtngen to bring
2Biffen to know 3)
x6) fenfce
x&j tcent5e
\6) benfe
\6) Bring e
> fant)tei)
* ti3ant)te2)
= tcttgte
gefanbt.
gett)ant)t.
gebad^t
getDttgt.
Words.
®ie ©rammati! the grammar.
xt&ji right. unred)t wrong.
t)er 33rte[trager the postman,
bte @igenfd)aft the quality,
prac^ttg beautiful.
Die ©tunbe the hour.
t)a8 jDing, pi. — e, the thing.
t)er ^^egen the rain.
ber (S^rifl, jo/. -eii, the Christian.
Der S^ot) death.
t)te ^bc^tn the cook, /.
Die '^ikVi^ the mouse.
Der f^teifd)er the butcher.
gefiDtd^en to obey.
Die Seftion the lesson.
toettelDtgen to defend.
Reading Exercise. 46.
!J)er SJlann reDet ^umel. W\x reDeten iiber ben ^vteg (war).
©eftern '^abe t^ tm i^lnffe geBabet. 2Ba§ !^aben ©ie geantnjortet?
^6) antttjortete ni(^t^. 2)ie ©d)itfer arbeiteten ntd}t met. -^d)
^anble redjt. 'Du ^anbelft nnred}t. 'J)ie 3)ame iuoUte ni(^t aug=
ge'^en; fie fiird)tete ben S^egen. ^aben @ie (Snglifc^ ftubtett?
yMn, ic^ ^be bte beutfc^e ©rammatif ftubiert. ®a§ @d)(og tft
jerftbtt. 9)?ein 9fJad}bar :^at fein §au§ t>er!auft. 2Ba§ njitn=
f(^en ©ie? 3fc^ ifannte Den 9)Zann nic^t. 2Bir fennen Die gnten
(Sigenf(^aften ber fbntgin. -Sd) betunnbre bie fc^onen 33 lumen in
■3t)rem ©arten. 2Ber brac^te biefen Srief ? i)er 23rieftrdger ^t
i^n gebrac^t. -3d) wu^te nic^t, bag (that) ©ie i>ter finb.*)
^ttfgafie. 46a.
1. The boy works not much. I answered: Yes, but he
answered: No. We have waited an hour. We feared the
rain. The woman talks too much. Do you admire this
beautiful tree? I admire a fine picture. People (man) 2 al-
ways 1 admire [admires always) new things. You know the
good qualities of that lady. I fear the dog. I feared the cat.
A good Christian does not fear (the) death. I have not worked
1) In poetry Imp. as well fcnbete. Part. past, gefenbet.
2) SScnben (to turn) admits of both forms: Imp. td^ toenbetc
and t(^ toanbte; Part, getuenbet and getoanbt.
3) French savoir.
4) The Present tense of tt>t[fen is conjugated as follows: \^
tDci§, bu tozx^if er ttici^; Plur. mx tutfjen, ®tc tDtffen, fic trtffen.
*] The conjugation ba^ throws the verb last.
128
Lesson 21.
much. I have studied my lesson. Did*) you think (have you
thought) of me (an mid))? Fear nothing, I shall defend you.
2. Did you think*) of (an, ace.) your poor mother? I
shall always think of her (an fie). The president has not
esteemed his friends. He does not love them (fie). The but-
cher kills .ian 3 ox i to-day; yesterday 2 he 1 killed two calves.
I liked the little girl, but she did not like me (mic^) . Men
(t)ie 9)ienfd)en) should love one another (einanbev). What did*)
the cook (/.) buy? She bought butter and eggs. My nephew
has bought two horses. The children have killed a mouse.
He saved his life (Seben, neuter).
Conversation.
2Ber lernt in ber ©d)ule? ®ie (2d)ulei; unb ©d^iilerinnen.
2Bo leben bie t^ifc^e? (Bie leben im Staffer.
2Barum ac^ten (5ie biefe i^rau? 3d) adUe il^vc gnten (5 igenfc^af ten.
2Bag fiird)tet t)a3 9)tabd)en? Sie tiivd)tct ben ^'egen.
SBatnm ftraft ber 33ater feincn Sr ^at feine ^ilufgabe vx&ii gc*
(Sot)n? levnt.
2Ber ^at bie ©tabt toerteibigt? 3)ie tav^ern (brave) (Solbaten.
aSer Itegt ba? (Sin fd)lafenbeg .tlnb.
SSen (whom) tobt ber Set)ver'^ (gv lobt bie .ftei^lgen ©center,
^ann ev and) bie tvdgen loben? 2;vai3e(Sd)ii(ert)erbienen (deserve)
fetn Sob (praise).
2Ba8 cevbienen fie? ©ie toevbienen ©tvafe.
2Ben foil man lieben? ^flc guten ?D?enfd)en.
2Bem fotlen bie^inber gcl)ovd)en? 3^ven (Sltern nnb ?er)rern.
§at ber §a^n getral)t? ^a, tx ^at jtueimal getrci^t.
®cl)en ®ie tn§ ^onjevt'? ^lm\, id) gel)e in3 2^t)cater.
tBa^ l)at ba8 ?D^dbd)en ge!auft? iSie l)at 33rot nnb 5ldfe gefauft.
2Ba« toeifauft biefc ^vau? (Sie terlauft 33ivnen, ^Ipf^t,
^flaumen (plums) unb 9H]le.
2Ba« le^tt biefer Server? (Si* le^rt i^ran^ofifd) unb (Sngtifc^.
$at ber 9J?c^ger eiuen £)d)fen 9Jein. er ^at jtuei ^dlber gc*
gcfd)Iad)tet? fd)Iad)tet.
$aben ©ie bie 9^ad)tigaII gcl)lnt? 3a, fie fiugt^errlt^ (beautifully).
Beading-lesson,
^fo^. Aesop.
Sfo^ reifte einmat in cine Heine (Stabt. Unterti^cg^i be*
<;egncte cr cinem 9teifcnben. iDiefer griij3te2 i^n (him) unb
fragte: „2l>ie lang muj^ id) gel)en, bi^ (till or before) tc^ jenc
d) Bin . . gelobt toorben I have been praised or I was praised
bu bift gelobt tijor'Den thou hast been praised
er tft gelobt UJorten he has been praised
*) or I am being praised.
OTTO, German Conv. -Grammar. 9
130 Lesson 22.
toit fint) gelobt toort)en we have been praised
fie fiut) gelobt tuortJen they have been praised.
Pluper/eci.
3d^ toat . . gelobt taorben I had been praised
t)U tDarft getobt tuortjen thou hadst been praised
tx Xoax gelobt DJorben he had been praised
luir icareu gelobt toorbeu we had been praised etc.
First Future.
Od) ttJCrbc . . gelobt toerben I shall be praised
t)U tinvft gelobt tuerben thou wilt be praised
ev toirb gelobt iDerfceu he will be praised
tt)ir loerben gelobt iDerben we shall be praised
ibr loerfcet qelobt iDetbeu 1 •„ a, • j
fie toerfcen gelobt tDevben they will be praised.
Second Future.
^6) werbe gelobt tuovben fcin I shall have been praised
t)U \i3ivft gelobt ioort)eu fein thou wilt have been praised
K. 2C.
Subjunctive Mood.
Present Tense.
!!Do6 id) gelobt toerfee that I (may) be praised
„ t)U gelobt luevbeft thou (mayst) be praised
„ er gelobt \Deit)e he (may) be praised
„ t»ir gelobt luexben that we (may) be praised
2C. 2C.
Imperfect.
3^d) tuiirt^e gelobt (if) I were praised
tJU \vUibeft gelobt thou wert praised
ev tuilrbe gelobt he were praised
JC. 2C.
Perfect.
3ld) fei gelobt tDorben I may have been praised
t>u feieft gelobt tvovben thou mayst have been praised
ev fei gelobt toovfcen he may have been praised
2C. 2C.
Pluperfect.
UBeun id) gelobt tootben toarc if I had been praised
loenu t)U gelobt iDOvten ivaveft if thou hadst been praised
loenu ev gelobt lDOVt?eu Xo'ixt if he had been praised
2C. 2C.
Passive Voice. 131
First Conditional.
^^ toiirbe gelofct tcer^en I should be praised
t)U tuiirbeft getobt tuertjen thou wouldst be praised
er tcurt)e gelobt i»ert)en he would be praised
JC. 2C.
Second Conditional.
Sc^ tciixte gelobt id orb en fein \ . , ,, , , . ,
or id) ti) are gelobt luorben j ^ ^^'^''^'^ ^^""^ ^^^"^ P"^^'^^"^
fcu tDiivbeft gelcbt IDorben fein thou wouldst have been praised
er toiivbe gelobt toorben fein he would have been praised
2C. :c.
Imperative.
Sinff. iDerbe gelobt.*) Plur. iwerbet (jelobt be (ye) praised.
Infinitive.
Pres. gelobt n}ert)en or gelobt jn ttjerben to be praised
nm gelobt JU werben in order to be praised.
Fast gelobt tcorben fein or jn fein to have been praised.
Participle.
Fres. in lobenb to be praised.**)
Such are:
geftraft njerben to be punished, jerftort toerben to be destroyed,
getabelt tcerben to be blamed. gead)tet tcerben to be respected,
belo^nt tcerben to be rewarded, terborben tcerben to be spoiled.
Words.
®er 5lrbelter the workman. bte §i^e the heat,
ber ^einb the enemy. Sebermann everybody,
ber §of the court. betrDgen(P.jo.) cheated, deceived.
nad)ldffig negligent. toerbeffert corrected, improved,
arttg good, nnarttg naughty. gefpvo(^en [P. p.) spoken,
el^rlid) honest, ttjeil because, geriifen (P. p.) called.
Ijoflic^ polite. fd)(ed)t bad. li3ol){fei( or biUtg cheap,
gegeben given. gefto^Ien (P. p.) stolen,
beja^tcn to pay. toon by. icenn if.
bie ©^jrac^e the language. gefdjrieben written.
Reading Exercise. 47.
1. ^6:1 toerbe bon meinem Sel^rer gelobt. jDn n)irfl
ni(^t ton il)m gelobt, benn (for) bn bift ntd}t fleigtg. ®er nn*
*) This Imperative is hardly ever used. When a passive Im-
perative is required, it is commonly formed with \t\ pi. fcib. Ex.:
@ei gelobt or gepriefen, ®ottl be praised o God!
**) The Latin laudandus, a, um. This participle stands
before its noun as an adjective, and is declinable, as:
An action to be praised cine ju lob en be §anblung.
9*
132 Lesson 22.
attige ^noBe ttirb nid^t tjon feiuer SD^uttct gelobt njerben.
3)ie unartigen ^iiaben tDCttjen »on U)veu (Sltevu geftraft t»er»
t)en. 5tJ?arie n)iib immet tjon i^rem SD^ufiflel^rcr getat)ett,
tDeil fie nac^lafficj tft. Tlt'int ^oufine lutrt) »on jct)ermann ge*
liebt, tueil fie immcr artig unt) ^oftid) ift. Die Dienev, n>eld)e
ftei^ig fmt), luerben belo^nt tuert:eu, imt) tJtejeiugen, tijeld^e trage
fiut*, trerten getatelt tDertJen. Die ©tat^t njurfce toon ten ^ein*
ten jetftort. Die ^lufgabeu ivurten toon fcem Secret toer*
bcffert. Dev arme 9}Ja'nn tt)nvt)e toon bem i^-emten betvogen.
2. Staxl tft geftraft ttootben, ttoeit et unartig ttoar. Die
listen fonnten nid)t tocrfauft ttoetben, ttoeil fte ^u (too) fd}Ied)t
ttoaren. Die 5D^dt?d)en, ttoeld)e tl)re Slufgaben gemad}t (done) batten,
fint) beto^nt ttoortoen. Die 5lrbeiter fint) gut beja^lt ttoorben,
njeil fie toiel gearbeitet ^aben. S3on ttoem tft t)iefe 2lufgabe toer»
befjert njort)en? ©ie (it) ift nod) nic^t toerbcfjevt ttoorben, njeil
ber 2et)ter feine ^dt ^tte. ©elobt itoerben ift beffer aU ge*
tabelt ttoertjen. Diefer avme .^nabe mu^ belo^nt ttoerben, toeil
er fo e^Tctic^ ift. Diefe Sriefe miiffen abgefd)iieben (copied) tcer*
t)en, n^eil fie fo fd)led)t ge[(^viebcn (badly written) finb.
1. I am loved iy my brother. This father loves his
children, and he is loved by them (toon il)nen). Mr. Bell is
respected by all his pupils. The French language is spoken
in (an) all [the] courts of Europe. This ring was given me
by my good grand- father. By whom (33on itoem) was this
letter written? I was called out of my room. Frederick
has been punished by his teacher. Have the young plants
been spoiled by the great heat? The roads have been spoiled
by the heavy (ftavteu) rain.
2. This boy will be punished; he has not done (gemad)t)
his exercise. He was punished also yesterday. This house
could not be sold, were it [Xoaxc e^) not so cheap. I am
expected at five o'clock; my sisters are expected at seven
o'clock. A false (falfd)) man is feared by everybody. This
letter must be sent to the post-office (auf tie $oft) . My watch
has been stolen. To be loved is better than to be hated (gcl^agt).
Observations on the Passive Voice.
§ 1. The circumstance, that in English 'to be' is
used both for denoting the passive voice and the copula
with adjective -participles, renders the comprehension
and employment of the German passive voice difficult
for an Englishman; for nothing in his own language in-
forms him, when in a past participle construed with the
Passive Voice. 133
auxiliary to he, a treatment suffered hy the person repre-
sented by the subject of the sentence, is indicated. The
pupil therefore must always carefully distinguish, whether
the past participle consti^ued icith to he expresses either the
endurance of an action, or the existence in a state which
is the result of such an action.
In the first case to be must be translated with the
German auxiliary tcerbeu, in the second with the auxiliary
fein. For example:
This book is (being) much read t)tefe§ Sltc^ ttJtrb t)iel gelefen.
My friend is convinced mein l^reunb tft uBer^eugt.
A. When to be is translated ttictbctt.
§ 2.- Whenever an agent is mentioned, with ^ past
participle and the verb to be^ it is considered to be the
passive voice, and the verb to be is rendered tuetbctt. Ex. :
Present. 3cl) ttJcrbc tioit meinem ^ater geWt.
I am loved by my father. (I am being loved.)
Impf. ^ie[e§ ©d)lo(3 ttjurbc toon fcem ^erjoge erbaut.
This castle was built by the duke (became built).
Perf. ®te (Stabt tft toon ben ^elnbcn toertrannt toorbcn*
The town has been (was) burnt by the enemies.
§ 3. When the agent is not mentioned, but under-
stood, to be must again be rendered by tt>erben. Ex.:
Pres. T>ie ^ifd)e ioerben mit 9^e^en gefangen.
(The fish are caught with nets (viz. are in the habit
of being caught with nets).
Impf. ®iefe§ @d)lDg n^urbe tm 3a!)re 1540 evbant.
Perf. ®ie ©tabt tft niebevgebxannt it>ort)en.
Note 1* To ascertain this, the sentence need only be put
in the same tense of the active voice. If this can be done
without altering the sense, the use of itoetben is sure to be
right. Ex.:
1) People catch (Pres. act.) fish with nets.
9Jiait fiingt bie gifd;e mit 9'Je^en.
2) The duke built (Impf. act.) this castle in 1540.
S)er ^erjog baute biefeS (2d;Iof3 tm '^a^xt 1540.
3) The enemies have burnt (Perf. act.) down the town.
2)ie geinbe t^aben bie ®tabt ntcbergebrannt.
All these active sentences are quite synonymous with the
above passive sentences.
Note 2. In English, this passive sense is sometimes in-
dicated by the Part. pres. being, added to the Part, past, or
by the Part. pres. itself. It may be. aiso i'eiidsVred by lUUtt*
134 Lesson 22.
The house is being built or is building bag ^auS tottb geBaut
or man baut baS .^aiiS.
Breakfast is jyy-epariyig bag ^^nifjftiic! h}irb (eBcn = just) gcmad^t
or man mac^t cben ba3 grii^ftiicf.
Here the Ti-es. tense of the passive voice denotes an action
in progress or just taking place. It denotes also a habit, as
in the above sentence: SDie ^ifc^e tt)ert)eu mit 9^e^en gefangen
«= fish are (usually) caught with nets.
Examples of true passives with toecben*
Alcibiades was*) banished from Athens.
5l(cibiat)e3 toutbe au^ Sltljen' tjerBamtt.
This lesson must be learned.
®iefe Slufgabe mug gelevnt tcerben.
Carthage was destroyed by the Romans.
5?artt)ago wurbe »on ben ki3mcvn jerftort.
(The) young trees are planted in spring.
i)te jungen S3aume iuerben im g^riil^ling ^e^jTan^t or
tU^an pflanst bie jungen 33dume im ^rii^Ung.
B. When to he is translated fein.
§ 4. Sometimes the Participle past expresses a State
or conditioji which the subject has already attained, a
property, as it were, of the subject. It is then no
longer esteemed as a verb, but as an adjective, and the
auxiliary to be which is connected with it, must be
translated fctlt. For instance , when we say : The lady
is dressed, we do not mean to say: The lady is being
dressed, but rather: The lady is ready, the action of
dressing is over; dressed therefore has here the value of
an adjective, and the sentence must be translated:
3)te jDame ift angetteibet [a state).
Note. On the contrary, the English expression: The lady is
being dressed is rendered in German: 2)ic SDamc n)irb (cben)
angctleibct.
Second example. — The glass is broken : 1)0^ ®taS tft
jerBrod;en. To express this in the active voice, the tense
must be changed; it would then be : Somebody has broken
the glass. Thus is broken has here the meaning of:
hds been broken, but not of is breaking or is being broken.
When therefore is or are is equal to has been or have
been, they must be rendered ift or finb, and not tt)irb
or loerben, because they indicate a state.
*) In^ French: Ale. fut banni d'Athenes (= became banished).
Passive Voice. 135
Third example. — The gates of the town are shut,
means, they have been shut, and are now found closed
(in Latin : clausce sunt) , and must be translated :
S)ie Jtljore ber ©tabt ftnb ge[c^(offen. — Whereas
'The gates are shut every day at eight o'clock'
must, according to § 3, be translated: SDie J^^ove ttjevbeit
jeben !Xag urn 8 Uf>v gefdjloffen (claudimtur) . They are in
the habit of being shut every day at 8 o'clock or matt fd)Ue6t
t)ie %^iixt jeben !U^ag urn 8 U§v.
§ 5. In a similar manner, the Imperfect teas must
be translated tr)ar instead of tDUrbe, when it has the
meaning of had been. Ex.:
The glass was broken before I came into the room.
S)a§ ®Ia§ ttjar jerbroc^en, ef)e ic^ tn§ 3^^^"^^^" ^^i^-
(In French: Le verre etait casse.)
The gates were shut (= I found them shut).
S)te S^ore tocrcn gef^Ioffen.
Examples of adjective-participles.
I am inclined or disposed t(^ bin geneigt.
I am convinced it is true tc^ bin iiberjeugt, bag e§ taci^x tft.
We were astonished tovc tuaten evftaitnt.
The bottles were emptied t)te ^(af d)en tuaren geleert (= leer) .
The castle is destroyed baiS ©c^Io§ tft jerftort.
The copy-book is soiled t)a§ §eft tft Befc^mu^t (= fdjmitl^tg).
§ 6. In the compound Preterite (Perfect and Pluper-
fect) the English auxiliary : / have been etc. and a Part,
past is always translated: 3(^ bin . . . tuorbeu. Ex.:
I have been invited i(!^ Bin etngelaben ttiotbctt»
The book has been found baS Sucb tft gefunben tuorben.
You have been seen ©te ftnb ge[e^en tijorben.
If they had been rewarded teenu fie belofjttt iuorben toaretl.
§ 7. Active verbs, which govern the dative ^ can
only be employed in the third person singular with C)§,
in the form of passive impersonal verbs ; but not in the
other persons as in English. Ex.:
T n a\^^ 'vQix\) mir ertaubt (not Id) iuerbe eriaubt)
«^ aiiowea | ^^ ^^^ erIaubt «itr.
He is allowed e3 tDivb tt)m ertaubt or ntan ertaubt l^m.
I was allowed e3 tt)urbe lutv ertaubt (man eriaubte mtr).
We were allowed e^ iDUvbe un§ ertaubt or man evtaubtc un^.
136 Lesson 22.
My brother was advised c5 iDurbe meinem 33 ruber ge*
raten or man ^at meinem ^ruber geraten.
Words.
!Der (Sdjmeic^Iev the flatterer. Dertvninben to wound.
bte 53erfd)nADVung the conspi- betDUubevn to admire.
ber ©turm the storm. [racy, gcgeben given. I)cffen to hope.
bie Xijat the deed, action. cingelaben {P. p.) invited.
bie ^rene the fidelity. i^eracfttet (P. p.] despised.
bie 33erfammlung the assembly, entbccfen to discover, detect.
convention, bc(ot)nen to reward,
e^emal^ (or friil^er) formerly, jevfteren to destroy.
gcfd)icft clever, njieber again, evmorben to murder,
^cftig violent, juerft at first. t>teUeic{}t perhaps, aud^ also.
fVajieren gct)en or einen ©pajiergang madden to take a walk.
Reading Exercise. 49.
1. Wdw ©o'^n i^riebrid) njirb tjon feinem ^el^rer geliebt.
2)iefe 5D^dbd)en tDerben geloBt unb geliebt, weil fie fleigig unb
gut fiub, 2)er ©otbat ift m ber (2d)lad)t »ern3uubet iijorben.*)
©ie ttjerben morgen »on meinem £)l)cim jum SJiittageffen eln*
gelaben n^erben. ■3l)r 33ettcr ^>au( ift and) eingctaben ujorbeu;
aber er mirb ju §aufe bleiben, ©uftatj 5(bolf, fonig t?on
©d)tt)cben, ift in ber (Sd)Iad)t bei Silken gctotet luorben. SSanu
ift biefc^ S^CLW^ gcbaut luorben? S^ ift mux (ago) je^n ^a^ren
gebaut wcrben. ^Jieine ^leiber finb jcxTifien (torn).
2. X'ie UI;r tmrb nid)t uerfauft n^evben, i)er i\n-(orne 9ting
ift njieber gefunbcn (found) n}Drben, 2)iefer 9)Zann ift je^t aU=
gemein (generally) geaAtet. (Sr ujar friitjer nic^t gead)tet. !Die
(Sd)meid)ler t^erblenen con jebermann \)cvvid}tet m iijerben. !Diefe
5(rbeit ift fel)r (much) benjunbert iuovben. ^ie 2(rbeiten ber
i^raulein Stcfa \i^erben and) bciintnbcrt ujerben. 5)ie ^^crfdjmBrung
be3 ^atalina nvire toierieid^t uidjt entbedt tuorben, ujeun diccro
nid)t itcuful getuefen iDcire.
,^ufga0e. 50.
1. 1 am praised by my teacher. We are loved by our
father. You are esteemed by your neighbour. This house
has been sold. The garden will also be sold. The enemy was
[or has been) beaten (gefd)lagen . .). A new plant teas much (fe^r)
admired by everybody. The picture of Mr. T, will be ad-
mired. The brave soldiers were praised by the general. Have
many soldiers been killed? Charles and I are invited to (ju)
a ball. Your sister arid your cousin would also be invited,
if they were**) here. Such a deed must be rewarded. That
*) or tvurbe (was) toerivutnbct. —
^*; IJ^se the foot-note p. S2.
Lesson 22. 137
man was formerly not esteemed. The flatterers ought to be
despised. Carthage (^artl^ago) was destroyed by Scipio Afri-
canus. The house is burnt down (abgebvamit) .
2. The child could not be saved. The castle wa& built
in the year 1622, The stranger has been killed in the forest.
Many soldiers have been wounded in the last battle. Clever
men are always sought [for], Rome was at first governed by
kings. Henry IV. was loved by his people. His name is.
still esteemed. The industrious will be rewarded. Caesar
was murdered by Brutus. Why am I not invited? This is
an action to be praised.*) I wish, James (3a!ob) may (mcdjte)
be rewarded for his fidelity (Syrette, f.). The most diligent
pupils will be the most (am meifteu) praised. At [^w) the
battle of (bei) Narva 2 the ahorse of Charles XII. iwas killed
under him.
Conversation.
SBon teem tDtrb 3^^r ©ol^n ge* Sr tDitfc toon feinen ^el^reru ge*
X\^W. liebt, luett er ftetfiig ift.
■3ft ev aucfe Belol^nt toorben? @rl)ateinen$reUBe!ommen(got).
2[Celd)e ©oll?aten iuerben geloBt ? 3)ie tapfeven.
2Bann \mx\)t t)te ed)laci)t bet %m 18. -^unt 1815.
2Bater(oD geliefevt (fought)?
2Bev tDUVi)e befiegt (defeated) ? !Die ^^ranjofen luurben beftegt.
2Bann iuirb t)iefe^ §aug toevfauft (S§ tDurbe fd)on geftern toevlauft
tueiben? (or ift . . . tDortjeu).
2Btet>ie( teurbe bafiir be^a^It? 34"*^^.f^"^ tter^uufeevt 9)'?ar!.
SBirt) ber ©arten baju (with it) Siein, 'Diefer (it) tvirt) BefouberS
gegeBen tuevben? (separately) ijev!auft mevbeiu
SBoHeu ©ie biefeu 9^ad)mittag -Sd) tuiivbemitS^J^nengel^en, iDcun
eiuen ©pa^lergang mit uu§ tc^nid)t3iutPlRittagefjen (dinner)
mad)en? Bet §eiTu ^. eingelaben t»dve.
SSon tuem ift ^arff^ago jevftovt SSon bem romifd)en ^ouful ©cipio
iucvben? 5lfricanu§.
SSarum ift biefer 9Jfann geftraft @r l)at eine golbne U^v geftol^Ieri
tDorben ? (stolen) .
S5du tDem ift ^cifar ermorbet SSon ^vutu§ unb ($affiu§, unb
tDorben? einigen aubevu.
^cn ti^em ift bie iBevfd)ti}i3rung SSonbemromif(i^en^onful(Sicevo.
^atalinag entbedt iijorbeu?
3fft biefe« §au§ fd)on alt? (S§ itjurbe im 3al)ve 1741 erbaut.
2Car §eiuriA IV. toon i^ranf* -Sa, er ttoar ber befte ^onig unb
veid) eln giitev £onig? ttourbe toon feinen Untertl^aneu
(subjects) itoie ein33atcrgeUebt.
SSie ftavb ev? (SvttoUvbetoonStatoaiEacermovbet.
*j See the foot-note **) p. 131.
138
Twenty-third Lesson.
ON THE PRONOUNS.
German pronouns are divided into six classes, viz.
1) personalj 2) interrogative^ 3) demonstrative^ 4) posses-
sive, 5) relative and correlative, 6) indefinite pronouns.
1. Personal pronouns.
(^crfonlic^c ^urtt>orter.)
§ 1. These are: tc^ I; bu thou; cr he; fie she; e^
it; tt)tr we; t^r ((Ste) you; fie they.
They are declined as follows:
1st personal: td^ I.
Sing. iV^. ic^ I Plur. tDir we
G. metner*) of me unfrer (unfev) of us
D. mlt to me, me lut^ to us, us
A. mic^ me. itn« us.
2nd personal: bu thou.
Sing. N. bu thou PL \\)X (ye) or (StC you
G. betuer*) of thee eurev (or) 3^rer of you
D. bir to thee, thee eud) or J^Ijucit to you, you
A. bic^ thee. eud} or Sic you.
3rd personal: cr, fic, C§.
masc.
N. er he
G. feiuet*) of him
D. \\)\\\ to him, him
A. il}n him, it.
neuter.
e§**) it
(feiuet) of it
(it;m) to it
e^ it.
D.
Ac.
fid)
fern.
fie she
il)rer of her
it;r to her, her
fie her, it.
Plural for all three genders.
N. fie they
G. il)ver of them
D. il)ueu (fid)) to them, them
A. fie them.
4) reflective form: ftd^.
f himself, herself, itself.
\ yourself, yourselves, themselves. \Sing. and Plur.
\For all genders.
*) These genitives : meincr, bcincr, fctitcr JC. are borrowed from
mein, bcin, fcin and, in poetry, abridged into niciu, bchi k., as:
llcmember mo gcbcnie mciit.
**) fS is sometimes contracted with the preceding word, as:
&oj^ bu'S, gicb mir 8, id) \ia'\i'^ JC. ^For the gen. and dat. see § 5 & 7.)
On the Pronouns. 139
Examples.
1) With the dative.
Sr gteBt mtr, — bir, — i^m, — i^r.
He gives me, — thee, — him, — her.
®r t>crjet^t uit§, — -Gf^nen, — t^neti.
He pardons us, — you, — them.
2) "With the accusative,
©te fennen nti(^, — \>i6), — t^n, — fie.
They know me, — thee, — him, — her.
dx Ixebt un«, — ®le, — fie.
He loves us, — you, — them.
3) With the reflective form.
dx Ketbet ftc^ he dresses (himself).
(Ste (fie) befleigtgen fic^ they apply themselves.
§ 2. The Englisli form of addressing a person in
conversation is you^ your ; in German however there are
two modes of address, bu and (Ste. The first implying
a certain degree of familiarity, founded upon affection
and friendship, is used by relations and intimate friends.
Teachers also address their young pupils, and employers
their young servants with bit. In quarrels and oppro-
brious language, bU is also heard. On the contrary
the polite or ceremonial mode of address is © t e , which
is, properly speaking, the third person plural, but is
distinguished from the same by a capital initial, as:
SSenn (Sie luoHen (instead of tuenn ^x tuoUt) if you like.
§aBen ©ie gefe^en? (for ^aU t^r gefefjen) have you seen?
In conversational style of the polite or ceremonial
form of address, the Imperative is always the Infinitive
of the verb followed by the pronoun ir e^?
is it he ift er e§? | is it you ftub ©ic C5?
Words.
ISDer ^lei^ industry. fra^jen to ask (a question).
t)te 9^ad)vid)t news. braud)eu to want,
tjerjei'^en [Dai.) *) to pardon. ad)ten to esteem,
fcenfen (an) to think (of). Ieil)eu [Dat.]*) to lend,
felteu seldom. fd)iden [Dat.) to send,
id) fd)vei6e I write.
Heading Exercise. 51.
S6) liebe Vi^ uub bu (iebft mid), ©ie (fie) Ueben itnS uitb
twit Ueben fie. 3d) fenne fie ind)t. -Sd) ter5eil)e 3l)neii. -^d) tjer*
jei^e il)m nid)t. (Sr lobte uu§. ©ie bbten tl)u tDeaen (on ac-
count of) feineS i^hngeS. Qdj ti^evbe moreen cinen Srief an i^n
fd)rciben. Q&i tienfe an (of) bid), — an Sie, — an fie. (Sie
benfen immev an un§. 2Btr fpred)cn fel^r felten t?on i'^nen. ^d)
iDerbe fie ■Sl)nen ntd)t ^eben. (Sr njirb e§ un§ fac^en. & evinnert
fid) meiner (he remembers me), ©eben ©ie t^m biefe^ ©uc^.
^ufQa^e. 51a.
I ask you. I see him. We know her. She knows me.
He esteems us. They want it. You know them. They esteem
her. Will you give me {Dai.) the letter? Answer me {Dat.).
She will not pardon*) him {Dat.). Does he love them? I
write a letter to (an, ace.) her. Pray (bitte), lend me your
penknife. He will lend it [to] you. She does not send it to
him. Tell her {Dat.) that news. You must buy me {Dat.)
another stick. He remembers (erinnert fid)) me {Gen.). Our
friends do not think of (an) us. Who is there? It (e3) is
my father. Is it you? Yes, it is I. It is he. It was she.
Tell him and her that (t?aJ3) I -Jove ithem, I will go with
you. He goes with us, but not with them.
§ 4. In German, inanimate objects and abstract
ideas being either masculine, or feminine, or neuter, the
*) For verbs which govern the person in the dative, see the
48th lesson, II. About the ])osttion of the pronouns in the clause
see Syntax, L. 50, No. 6 ik 7.
Personal Pronouns. 141
personal pronouns of the tliird person in the singular,
er, jte, e§, must be used accordingly, whereas in Eng-
lish it serves for all inanimate objects. For example in
the following sentence: Where is my hat? It is iji your
room^ it cannot be translated with e 6 , but with e r , be-
cause the subject it refers to, viz. : ber §Ut, is a masculine
noun, as:
1) Nominative case: it*) = cr, fic, C§,
Where is my hat? — It*) is in your room.
2Bd tft mein §ut (m.)? @r ift in i\)xtm 3tmmer.
Where is my pen? — It lies on the table.
2Bd ift meine i^ebev? ®te Uegt auf bem %\\6:f.
Where is my book? — It is there.
3©D ift metn ^\x6) [n.) ? @§ ift ba.
2) Accusative case: it**) = i^tt, ftC, CS,
Have you my hat? — Yes, I have it,**)
§aben ®te metnen §ut? ^a, id; Ijabe i^tt [viz. ben §ut).
Do you see that flower? I do not see it.
©el;en ©te biefe ^lume? ^6) fel)e ftc nid}t.
Will you buy the house? Yes, I will buy it.
2BolIen(Steba§§au§faufen? 3a, tc^ njiE eS fanfen.
In the plural it does not change, as there is only
one form for all three genders, viz. ace. fie; dat. t^nen:
I will see them id) tuill fie feljen.
I give them bread id) geie i^nen 33vot.
§ 5. The pronoun e§, when it expresses a thing ^ is
only used in the nominative and accusative cases. In the
genitive it is replaced by beffeu or be6fe(6eu (see § 8).
(S§ tft ganj neu it is quite new.
5d) l)abe e^ [Ace] gelaitft I have bought it.
Sd) n)eiJ5 e^ {Ace) I know it.
(Sr bebarf beffcn or beSfelOen he requires it.
§ 6. It is refering to b, person, is always ei§ tft* Ex.:
It is my brother c^ tft metn S3rubev.
They are , when followed by a noun taken in a
definite sense, is translated: e§ finb. For example in answer
to the question: Who are they XOtX fiub fie? we say:
They are my brothers (sisters) etc.
(S3 finb meine ^viibev (®d)tDeftern) k.
*) When it stands before the verb, it is Nominative.
**) When it stands after the verb, it is Accusative (masc. = tl)it .
142
Lesson 23.
§ 7. The pronoun of the third person t^ etc., either
singular or plural, is hardly ever used with a preposition
preceding, when it represents an inanimate object or an
idea. Commonly the adverb ba, which coalesces with
the preposition, is used instead, both for the dative and
accusative, corresponding with the English words thei'e-
with^ thereof, therein, thereupon etc., as:
5)amit with it or with them.
t>aiin in it or in them,
fcabutd) through it or them.
t)at>on of or from it or them,
tiarauf upon it or them.
tarauS from it or them.
ba^U to it or to them,
babel 1 . •- - xi
iavan ) ** '' <"• ^* t''^"'
baritber about or over it, them,
bavunter among them,
bafiiv for it or them.
Examples.
SSir finb bamtt [Bat:) jufrieben we are contented with it.
SBiemete finb bar in (Dat.) how many are in it (therein)?
2Bir tcevben bariiber f^red^en we will talk about it.
Note. A similar contraction takes place with the adverb
1^1 er with prepositions, as: l)termit herewith or with this;
pterin inthis; ^ierocn, of this; fjierauf, l)ierau», ^ierbet,
l^ieriiber :c.
§ 8. The pronoun of the third person, er, fie, t&,
in all its cases, is sometimes replaced by berfetbe, bic»
felbe, baSfelbc (lit. the same). This is chiefly the case
when a misunderstanding might happen, or to avoid em-
ploying together two words of similar sound, as : i()m i(;u
or \i}n i^ueu. Ex.:
3(t) l^abe biefelben nic^t ev^lten.
I have not received them.
(Sod idf il)m ben ©tod geben? am I to give him the stick?
^a, geben ©ie i^m benfelben (instead of i^n).
Yes, give it to him.
§ 9. The English words myself himself, yourself etc.
are termed reflective personal pronouns^ when they re-
present the same person as the subject or the nominative.
They can only be in the accusative and sometimes in the
dative. In the accusative they are rendered by mid^,
bid^, fid^ jc; in the dative by mir, bir, fidj^ ;c. Ex.:
/ wash myself id) tt)afd)e mtc^.
He distinguishes himself er jeidjnct fid) au§.
(For further particulars see the 34th lesson on the Reflective verbs.)
Personal Pronouns. 143
§ 10. If the accusative or dative denotes any other
person than the subject, it has no longer a reflective
character, and is translated i^n fetbft, mtr fctBft tc:
I have seen him (himself) [Ace.) 16^ ^Be i!^n felbft gefel^en.
He gave it to me (myself) [Dat.) er gab e^ mtr fetbft.
§ 11. The indefinite pronouns myself, himself, your-
self etc. preceded by a substantive or another personal
pronoun in the Nominative case, are rendered only by
the word felbft*) without a second pronoun (see the
25th lesson), and must not be confounded with the re-
flective personal pronouns. Ex.:
I come myself x6:j fomme felbft (French moi-meme).
The man himself t)er SD^ann felbft.
You say so yourself ©ie fagen e§ felbft.
We have seen it ourselves mx l^abeu e§ felbft gefel^en.
Note. Sometimes both forms occour together, as:
3c^ toBc mic^ (§ 9) fetBjl I praise myself.
2ie6e beitien 9'^a(|ften tt)ie btc^ fetbft love thy neighbour as thyself.
Words.
S)ie ©rammati! the grammar, ber %^tt tea. genommen taken.
t)er 9^egenf(^irui the umbrella. DaS ©ebot the command,
getoafd^en washed. enipfet)len to recommend.
Heading Exercise. 52.
2Bo ift mein 33teiftift? §tev ift er. §aben irb t^n
fc^reifcen.
^ann ic^ e§ fetBfl t^itn (do) ? 9^ein, ©ie fonneit e8 ntd^t fefbfl
ti)un, id) muj3 3l)nen I^elfeu (help) .
*Denfft bu oft an (of) xaxi)'^. 3d) ben!e immer an bic^.
S^Oihtw ®ie meinen 3ite3enfd)trm ^ein, ic^ ^abe il)n nic^t gefel^en.
^efe'^en?
IDJ'it njem ^ef)en(Ste tnSX^eater? 3d) n^erbe mit 3^nen ae^en.
®el)t fon)t jemawb (anybody DJJeine^id^ten (nieces) (Sinmaunb
else) mit 3t)nen? 2ui[e cjcl)en and) mit mir.
^oHen (Sie fo gut (kind) feln, (S3 tl)ut mir leib (I am sorry),
mit biefe^ 33ud) ju Ieil)eu? \6) fann e§ 3^ueu nid)t Ieit)en.
SCarum !onnen ©ie e-g miv nic^t 2Bei( id) e§ bev ^rdnlein ®viin
Icit^en? t)eifVH*Dd)en (promised) ):}Ciht.
tlBer n)irb un§ Begteiten (ac- Unfev i^veuub 21. tuirb un§ be=
company)? gleiteu.
:^ennen ®ie jenen i^remben mit 3d) fenne il^n nid)t; id) ^be it)n
bem grauen §ut? nie (never) gefoi^en.
Twenty-fourtli Lesson.
2. Interrogative pronouns.
(i^rageubc gihnvovtcr.)
These are: 1) SSer who? 2Sa« what?
Declension.
N. iuer who?
G. njcfjen whose?
D. tvem to whom?
A. l»en whom?
njaS what?
iiH'fjen of what?
tDa« to what?
ti^a« what?
SBev"? applies to persons without distinction of sex ;
ID ad? to inanimate objects. Ex.:
2Scv ift ^o.'{ who is there?
2Ber l)at bicfeS get^an? who has done this?
Interrogative pronouns.
145
SSeffen §Ut tfl "Da«? whose hat is this?
SSem geben(5te t)ie[en Sting? to whom do you give this ring?
^eu ^at er geftagt? whom has he asked?
lBa§ fcraud)en ®te? what do you want (need)?
2Bag fud)t et? what is he looking for?
S5on trya§ ^aben ®te gef).^rDc^en ? of what have you spoken?
Note. When such direct questions are placed in dependence
on a preceding verb, they become »in direct questionsa. Then
the verb comes last, as:
SBt[fen ®te, toer bicfeS ^efagt !^ot^ do you know who said this?
©agen @ie mtr, hJaS ©u gefel>en IjaBcn tell me what you saw.
fetgen @ic mir, toaS ®ic gclcfen l^abeit.
how me what you have read.
2) Selc^et? tDelc^e? tcerd^e^ (\iow)'l which (o/)? and
SBa« fitt etnet, e, «? t^/^«^ sor^^
The latter is used without a substantive:
2BeI(^er »on -Sl^ren ©ofjnen? which of your sons?
SBelc^eg tjon fciefen 33iid}etn l^aben ©ie gelefen?
Which of these books have you read?
§ier fint) stuet Rafter 'meffer; tueld^eg tDoKen . bent
ter
tern to that
benen
to those
A. fcen
t)ie
l)a« that.
ble
those.
Examples.
5D?cln 'Btod unb berjentge (or ber) melne^ 53ruber3.
My stick and that of my brother {or and my brother's).
(5r ^at fein @elb unb bagjeuige (or ba§) feineS ^reunbe^ tjerloren.
He has lost his (own) money and that of his friend {or
his and his friend's money).
Observations.
1) When the demonstrative pronoun this or that is not
immediately followed by its subject, but is separated from it
by the verb to be , as for instance : Mhis is my hatu , it takes
in German the neuter form of the singular btefeS, with
no regard to the gender or number of the noun. This little
sentence must therefore be translated: biefeS ifl meill §Ut,
although §Ut is of the masculine gender (see also p. 72,
Note 1)*). It is the same in the interrogative form: 3ffl bief e^
^^X §Ut? — Instead of btefeS we often abbreviate, and say
bieS or boig or e§. Ex.:
This {or that) is my dog biefeS (not biefer) ifl nteln §unb.
This is my daughter biefeS or ba§ ift meine !Jod)ter.
Are these your brothers? finb bie^ (ba§) ^'^xt Sriiber?
These are his gloves ba^ (bieS) finb feine 5>anbfd)u^e.
2) The same rule applies to the interrogative which or what?
JDeld)e§? before fein, to be, both in singular and plural, as:
Which is your pen? tDcldjcS ifl O^re ^eber?
Which are your pens? tt)eld)e« finb 3f^re i^ebetn?
What is your name? tt)eld}e^ ift 3f^r ^ame?
4. Possessive pronouns.
(33e[i|j'an5eigcnbe ^Urtvcrtcr.)
1) These are formed of the possessive adjectives^ metn,
betn, fein, uufer, euer, 3I)i% t^r, by adding the termination
tgc. With this form, the definite article always precedes.
They are:
*) To distinguish this demonstrative pronoun from the definite
article^ more stress must be laid upon it.
**) Sometimes also berctt. Ex.: 3(^ ^abc bcrcn jwci (two of them).
***) But when this means this one, it agrees. Ex. bicf et ifl Slrjt.
Possessive pronouns.
147
masc.
t)er melnige
t)er beinige
ber feinige
ber i^ttge
fern.
t)te meintge
bie beinige
bie feinige
bie %ige
ba§ meiiiige mine.
ba§ beinige thine.
bag feliuge his.
ba§ i^rige hers.
PI. bie meinigctt; bie beinigen; bie feinigen; bie il^rigen.
ber, bie, ba§ unfrige; pi. bie uufrigen ours,
ber, bie, bag S^^rige or eurige; pi. bie 3^!^rigctt yours,
ber, bie, bag i^tige; pi. bie i^rigen theirs.
They are declined like adjectives with the definite article
[N. ber nteinige, G. beg meinigen, D. bem meinigen, Ac. ben
meinigen. Pi. bie meinigen k.).
They appear sometimes in the abridged form : ber nteine,
ber beine, ber feine, ber i'^re, ber unfre, ber eure or ber S^xe,
ber il^re, which however is not to be recommended.
2) There is another form unaccompanied by the
article, viz.:
Singular
Plural
masc.
fern.
neuter. for all genders.
meincr
meinc
meinct
memc mme.
bciner
beine
beineg
beine thine.
feiner
feine
feineg
feine his.
i^rer
il^re
il^reg
i^re hers.
unfrer
unfre
unfreg
unfre ours.
mxex
eurer
Q\)xe
3^rc§
fu^^'h—
eure
eureg
it)rer
i^re
i^reg.
i:^re theirs.
This latter form is
commonly used in conversation
and declined like biefer
, biefe, biefeg; viz.:
Declension.
Singular
Plural.
masc.
fern.
neuter.
N. meinct
mcinc
meinct
1 metnc
G. meineg
meiner meineg
1 meiner
B. nieinem meiner meinem
meinen
A. meincn
meine
meinct.
meine.
Examples.
3ft bag 3ft;r ©tod? 9^ein, eg ift nic^t ber meinige (or meiner),
eg ift ber S^^rige (or eg ift ^f^rer).
Is that your stick? No, it is not mine, it is yours.
2Seffen $ferb ift bag? (Sg ift bag meinige or meineg.
Whose horse is that? It is mine.
2Beff en Slicker finb bag? Sg ftnb bie unfrigen or eg finb unfre.
Whose books are these? They are ours.
10*
148 Leason 24.
Words.
jDic ®e[unt)^eit the health. t)er 33ud)^aut)Ier the bookseller.
t)er Slovper the body. ba^ Xud) the cloth.
t)er ®eift the mind. tie Xiute the ink.
t)ie 33nefta[c^e the pocket-book, artjciteu to work, rec^t right.
tateln to blame. c^efdjTiebeu written.
ftopfeu to knock. fintjeu to find.
tag ^acfdjen the parcel. ue^men to take.
Eeading Exercise. 53.
223 er gc^t ba? S« ift ein engUfdjer DffisieT'. SSeffen
U^r ift biefe^? (5« ift bie meine« grcunbe^ te^ur. iDlit to em
h)iinfd)en ©ie ju Jpreien ? Od) tuiiufd)e mit 3i^rem 53ater ju fpre*
c^en. 235eld)e« ift 3f^r §ut, biefer ot5er jener? liefer ift e^.
SSon t»eld)em ©aufe fpred;en ©ie? 2©ii' fpted)en »on bent (bem*
jenigen) be^ ^ertn @all. jDiefer ©arteu uub ber meine^ Sf^ac^barS
finb 5u toer!aufeu. ^Jicin §aug ift ueu, bag ^fvljige ift alt. Suifen8
tieib ift blau, -^l^veg (bag ^ft^rige) ift griin. 2Bev l)at biefeg 23uc^
gebrad)!? -Sc^ fd)reibe an meinen ^ater, bu fd)veibft an beinen
(ben beinigen), Robert fd^reibt an feinen. 3)ie ©efunb^eit beg ^or=
perg ^at grogen (Sinpug (influence) auf bie beg ©eifteg. 2Bag
foU id) fagen? 2BeId)eg Don biefen 2)Jeffern tootlen ©ie faufen?
SSon t»ag (toobon) fpred^en ®ie?
JittfgaSe. 54.
1. Who comes there? It is my friend Charles. Whose
son is he? He is the son of Mr. R. To whom do you send
this parcel? I send it [to] the bookseller. Who knocks at
the door? To (an, ace.) whom have you written a letter?
Of (bon) whom have you bought this black cloth? Whom
do you blame? I blame my servant. To (mit) whom do you
speak? Who is that young man? He is my nephew. What
have you found in the garden? Which (^n. sin^.) of (bon) these
three sticks is the longest? This one is longer than that. Here
is your pocket-book and that [of] your brother. That is right.
2. I have lost my [own] book and t/iat of my sister. This
is not my pen; this is my brother's [t/iat of my hr.). Are these
your shoes (*Sd}ut)ej ? No, they (eg) are my cousin's [those of
my c). Your coat is old, mine is new. His house is small,
yours is very large. My son does not work so much as yours.
His ink is not good, ours is much better. Which is the
highest mountain of America? Is that your garden? Yes, it
is mine; it (m.) is not so large as yours. Whose umbrella is this?
Is it (eg) yours? No, Sir, it is not mine, it is Henry's [that
of H.). If you do anot 4find lyour istick, take mine [Ace).
Relative pronouns. 149
6. Relative pronouns.
(Sejilgtic^e ^iirtDorter.)
These are: 1) tuetd^er, xi^tld:}t, tcetc^eS [who, which,
that) (without a note of interrogation), and 2) bet, bte, ba6.
1) Declension of tt)e((^er, tott^t, ttie^eS.
Singular. Plural
masc. fern. neuter. for all genders.
N. tcelcl)er t»etcl)e tDeId)e§ who, which itjelc^e
G. beffen beren beffen whose, of which beren
D. tt3eld)em t»eld}ev ti3eld)em to whom or which tueld^en
A. tcel^en tcelc^e toeld^e^ whom, which. toetc^e.
2) Declension of the relative bet, bie^ \>a2*
^. bet ble ba§ who, which, that ble
G. beffen beren beffen whose, of which beren
D. bem ber bem to whom, to which ben en
A. ben bte ba^ whom, which, that. ble.
They must agree in gender and number*) with the
noun they refer to. Ex.:
®er SD^ann, welc^cr or bcr. . ., | bte ^ran, xoMt or btc. . .,
3)a§ Snc^, xodd}C§ or bag..., | bte 33uc^er, ttietd^c or btc. . .
It is peculiar to them to place the verb at the end
of the sentence (or clause). Ex.:
!©a§ ®elb, toelc^e^ \^ in ber ©trage gefunben ^a6e.
Obs ervations.
1) In English the relative pronouns whom., which, that, though
understood, are sometimes left out after the noun ; in German
they must always be added, as:
The boy I saw with you yesterday (instead of whom I saw) .
•Der ^nabe, ben or njetc^en id) geftern Set 3ft)uen fa!^.
Here are the books you have ordered.
§ler finb bie 33u(^er, tcelc^e or bie ^Sie beftettt ^aBen.
2) The genitive beffen, beren, beffen, always precedes
the word by which it is governed, like whose in English:
A tree the branches ^o/ which are cut off, etc.
@ln S3anm, beffen Stftc abge^anan finb.
3) In the employment either of tt)eld)er, n3eld)e, tcelc^eS or
ber, ble, ba^, no difference is made between persons, animals
or things. The only difference lies in euphony ; the former
has the advantage of emphasis, as it consists of two syllables ;
the latter that of brevity, and is to be regarded as an occa-
sional substitute only. Ex.:
*) not in case.
150 Lesson 24.
§ler ifl ber 233eln, bes (or tcelc^en) ©ic beftetlt ^ben.
Here is the wine you have ordered.
3)et Tlann, toel^er (or t>er) mir t)a§ S3uc^ bradjte, t)a«
(or toelc^eS) er gefunben ^atte.
The man who brought me the book (that) he had found.
Noie. T)ex, bte, ba§ is always used after the personal pro-
nouns, especially when these pronouns, for the sake of em-
phasis, are repeated after the relative, as:
^d), bet (not tt)cl(^er) fo tttet jilr i^n t^at.
I who did so much for him.
SBir, btc toir jcljt iimg finb we who are now young.
4) The German relative pronoun tDel^er or ber connected
with nid)t answers to the English conjunction but after a
negative sentence, as:
(S3 giebt feinen Wten^m, bet nic^t feine ^e^cx ^at.
There is no man but has his faults.
5) When the relative pronouns are preceded by preposi-
tions, they are often contracted with the latter, so that the
pronoun takes the form of toO» or toor* (before a vowel) and
the preposition follows it, answering to the English ivAereof,
whereby, where/ore etc. The verb goes last. Such are:
SBd^U to which or to what.
tDObUTC^ by which or what.
IDoniit with which or what,
tijobet at which or what.
IDofiir for which or what.
n)Ot)on of which or what.
tDOtau^ from which or what.
tDorin in which or what,
tuoriiber at (over) which or what,
tuorauf upon which or what,
ttjoran at (to) which or what.
tDoninter among which.
Examples.
§iev ift ber ©djiitflel, toomiti \6) bie Z\)ViXt geoffnet ^abe.
Here is the key with which I have opened the door.
3)ie ©lafer, tt)orau«2 tuir getvuuteu l)aben, fiub jevbvod^en.
The glasses, out of which we drank, are broken.
3)a§ 3i""nei^r tDorin^ id) fd)Iafe, tft fe^v fait.
The room, in which I sleep, is very cold.
NB. As we see in the foregoing examples, the relative
pronoun, even in its contracted form, requires the verb always
at the end of the clause or sentence.
6) These contractions may also be used interrogatively, as:
2Boniit (or mit xocii) l^aben ®ie bie %{)\\xt geoffnct?
With what have you opened the door?
2Bot)on fpvcc^en ©ie? of what are you speaking?
1) or mit toei^cm. 2) or au8 trctc^cm. 3 or in trclc^cm.
Kelative pronouns. 151
Note 1. The real signification of these contracted words depends
on the meaning of the preposition governed by a verb, as : What
do you think of, must be translated: troratt benfeit @ie? because
the German verb benfen requires the preposition an.
Note 2. Persons cannot be alluded to in this manner, as: Of
whom are you speaking, must be rendered : 33 on tt)cm f^rec^en @ic?
not iffiotoon f^red^en @ie?
Words.
jDie ©ramntatl! the grammar. »erbef(ern [reg. v.) to correct,
bag ®et)id)t [pi. — e) the poem, gelie^en lent [Part. past).
ber ©c^ul)mad)er the shoemaker. t)ie Stufgabe the exercise,
niemanb nobody. genommen taken,
jelgen [reg. v.) to show. le^te^ ^oi^X last year.
Reading Exercise. 55.
©ier ifl ber ^abe, xotU)tx fein 33uc^ berloren ^at. ®a tft
bag Su(^, tueld^eg (or ba§) er tjevloren ^ er tcugte. §ier finb eintge f^ebern, melc^e
ttjoUen ©ie t>aben? ■3f(^ ttjifl bie ne^men, t»e(d)e om ^artften ifr.
®er ^ijuig, beffen §e€r gefc^lagen tourbe (defeated), ift gefto'^eu
(fled). SDie (gitern, ber en ^inber geftraft tourben, finb nadjlaffig.
SSoriiber beflagen ©ie fic^ (complain)?
154
Lesson 24.
Jittfgaae. 56a«
He who 8 will mot zlearn will remain ignorant. What is
true to-day, must also be true to-morrow! They who do not
speak the truth, deserve no confidence. I will give this book
to him who is the most industrious. The little girl with whom
Mary played yesterday, died (ftart) this morning. The boy
who found (faut)) the gold watch, is honest. The man whose
name was written in my pocket-book, is arrived. Here is
the glass out of which the king has drunk (getvunfen) . Who
is the happiest man? He who is the most contented. The
bread on which (tDOtoou) we live, is baked of (au3) wheat
and rye.
Conversation.
2Ber l^at immer genug? 3)ev jufrtebene 9JJenf(^.
2Ben l^aben ©ie getat)elt? SJieine trdge (Sd)iiIeTin.
2Ba« tDiinfdjt ber ^JQZenfd; am ®a«, n)a§ er l^offt (hopes).
meiften?
2Ber flo^ft (knocks) an t)ie (S^tftber(Scbneit)er, tt)eld}er3^ren
X^iire"^ neuen 9tocf bringt.
2Ba^ tuerben ®ie t^un? -Sd) njeig nid}t, iua§ ic^ t^un foil.
2Bcf(en ®d)rei6bud) tft t)te[e^? ^i ift t:a^ 3l)ve^ ©d)iiler§.
2ln tDeii fd)veiben ©ie bief en 3fd) fd}reibe i^n an meinen Scorer.
33vief?
Oft 3l)r @o^n alter alg meiner? 9Jein. "Dcr meinige ift jiinger.
2Bie alt ift er? (Sr ift 11 3at;re alt.
§ier ift ein §ut, tfl e§ t)er 9iein, bat^ ift nid^t ter meinige ;
O^rige (or Oliver)? meiner ift gan^ neu.
®int) t)a8 Ol)re §ant)fd)ut)e? 3a, ba^ fint) nieine.
^on (on) iuaS leben t)ie ©^afe? ^on ®va^ unt §eu (hay).
3JUt tDa8 (iDomit) l^aft t)U ten 3d} l}abe il)n mit meinem (Stocfc
S^naben gefd^tagen (beaten) ? gefc^lagen.
3ft t)iefer ©arten ju ceifaufen liefer nid)t, aber bet meinc^
(to be sold)? 9^ad)bavt^.
2Ba§ fagtc 3t)nen ber Sebicnte? (Sr fagte mir, tuaS er ^e^ort ^attc.
2Beld)e 3)?enfd)en fint> bie un- ^iejenigen, ii^eldje nut aUem un=
gliicflid)ften
^nfrieben finb.
SQ3o ift ba« @la« , au« njeldjem 3d) l;vibe ev^ in ben (Sd^ran! (cup-
(njorauS) id) getrunfen \)(x\it\ board) geftctit (put).
SQSar e« nid)t meined? Dccin, e^njar bat^be«$)ernt®riln.
Beading -lesson.
®tn tcurcr ^o^f ""^ c"^ iPO^Ifcilcr,
(A dear head and a cheap one.)
Unter bcr 9iegie'vnngi bed lc(3ten Sli)nigd t^on -^^olcn brad)2
cine (Smpovung^ gegen U)n au3 2. (Siner i>on ben Smpi^rern*,
1) the reign. 2) broke out, from auebrcc^en ; trr. v. (Nr. 19,.
3) an insurrection, revolt. 4) rebel.
Indefinite pronouns. 155
ein pDlm[d)er ®raf, fet^te einen ^ret§ »on ungefa^r 40,000 5D^ar!*)
auf fcen fo^f fceS ^iinigg, unt) ^atte fogar (even) ble f5red)^etti,
e^ t)em ^onig felbft ju fdjteiben, um2 i^n ju erfd)reden. Slber
ter ^cnla fd)i-teb» i^m gan^ faltbliitig'' bie felgenbe ^Inttuort:
„3^ten 8nef Ifahe id} vtStig^ ert>alten6 unt) getefen. (5§
l)at mir met SSergniigen gemad}t (given), ju fe^en, t)a6 mein 2opf
3f^nen fo t)iel icert^ ift; ic^ ijerfic^ere s ©ie, fiir ben 3f^rigen
tuiirbe ic^ feinen ^eHer^ geben."
1) impudence. 2j in order to frighten him. 3) wrote, from
fd^reiben irr. v. (82). 4) quite coolly. 5) duly. 6) received. 7) worth.
8) assure. 9) farthing.
Twenty-fifth Lesson.
6. Indefinite pronouns.**)
(Unbeftimmtc g-ilrtrijrter.)
I. They are:
5[Ran one (French: on), they, people.
Sinanber each other, one another,
^febermann everybody, every one.
3femanb somebody, some one, anybody.
9^iemaub nobody (not — anybody),
©elbft ([elber) . . . self (myself etc.).
(SttDaig something, anything.
3^id)t^ nothing (not — anything).
®ax m6}t^ nothing at all, nothing whatever.
Observations.
1) ?[Ran, which is expressed in English by one, they, people
or by the passive voice, occurs only in the nominative case,
and governs the verb in the singular. Ex.:
5D^an fagt***) people say, they say.
SBenn man !vanf ift when one [or a man) is ill.
9J?an !^at t!^n gelobt he has been praised.
9J?an ift gliidlid), toenn man jufrieben ift.
One is happy, when one is contented.
*) b. 1^. ttt jcl^iger beutfd^er W\^%\s>VciX\xtx% (viz. in the German
Currency of our days].
**) All indefinite pronouns, as well as all indejinite numeralSf
are noAV, as a rule, written with small letters as initials, when they
do not begin a sentence or clause; even when they are the gram-
matical subjects of phrases, and therefore seem to be used sub-
stantively.
***) Observe that with man the verb is in the singular.
156 Lesson 25.
Note 1. When another case is required, it is borrowed
from ciner, e, §. Ex.:
SBcnn man einen ^reunb »erltert,^ fo t^ut eS einem leib.
When one loses a friend, one is sorry for it.
Note 2. Oties before a substantive, is translated in German
with fein {/its). Ex.:
It is better to lose one's (his) life than one's honour,
(gg ift beffer, fein ?eben al8 feinc (S^rc ju tterlieren.
Note 3. Ones self is translated fi^ felbft or only fic^,
not felbft without fid). Ex.:
One must not praise one's self man mu§ ftd^ nic^t (fclb^) lobcit.
2) (Sinant)er is invariable and both dative and accusative:
^axl unt) 2Bil^elm ttauen etnant)er [dat.).
Charles and William trust one another.
-Diefe i^rauen lieben einauber (ace).
These ladies love each other.
3) ©elbft or felber is indeclinable, and stands either
immediately after a substantive or a personal pronoun, as:
t)er SSater felbft, ic^ felbft, ttjir felbft or felber, or nearer the
end of the sentence (see the 23rd lesson, § 11). Ex.:
3)er 3Sater hxad^tc feinen ®ol}n felbft.
The father brought his son himself.
3fd) ^abt e§ felbft (or felber) gefel^en (not mid^ felbfl).
I have seen it myself.
mx glauben eS je^t felbft (not unferfelbft) . *)
We believe it now ourselves.
Note. The adverb felbft means even, as:
@clbft feine SBrilber even his brothers.
4) ^febermanii everybody, takes § in the genitive; in the
other cases it remains unchanged, as:
®ute§ tl^un ift ietoevmaun^ "ipflic^t.
To do good is every one's duty.
®eben ©ic jetermanu {Dat.) tuaS (Sie i^m fc^ultJig finb.
Give everybody what you owe him.
5) 3 em a lit) and niemant) take e8 or § in the genitive;
in the dative they may take en or remain unaltered; the
accusative is like the nominative, as:
!Da« ift nicmaut)e« (iiiemanbS) ®cfd)macf.
That is nobody's taste.
as
*) The personal pronoun with self is not repeated in German,
We ourselves »ir [clbft.
Indefinite pronouns. 157
SDhin 9Za#at Ietl)t ntemattb (en) (not inemanbem) ©elb.
My neighbour lends money to nobody.
3(^ ffobe jemant) ( — nlematib) angetroffen.
I have met somebody ( — nobody).
6) Not — anybody and not — anything are translated nte*
manb and nic^t§. Ex.:
I have not seen anything t^ i)abe mc^tS gefe'^en.
n. The indefinite numeral adjectives are also used as
indefinite pronouns^ v^^hen the substantives are dropped.
We repeat them here:
■3et)er, e, § or ein jeber*) each, every one.
©ner, eitte, etne^ one, some one.
jDer anbre, bte anbre, ba^ anbre the other.
®er eine — , ber anbre the one — , the other;
plur. bie einen — , bie anberu some — , the others,
©imge some or a few.
(Stntge — , anbre some — , others.
Woi\\6)tx many a man; plur. manege some.
S3elbe both, both of them.
iBiel much ; plur. l}iele many.
SSli\jXtXt several. — 3}?ef)r more (is indeclinable).
!J)te meiften most (of them).
SSenig little; plur. tuenige few. (a little elu tvenlg.)
Silled everything; plur. aHe all.
jDer namlic^e {neut. ba^ namUcl)e) the same.
Reiner, feme, !eine§ none, no one.
5rgenb einer, e, « any one.
Observations.
1) 3eber, mand^er and !etner, t, §, are declined like blefer,
btefe, btefeS; viz.:
G. Sebe^, manc^e'3, !etneg. D. jebem, manc^em, !elnem.
Ac. -Seben, manc^en, !einen.
2) The English pronoun one, plur. ones, after an adjective
is not expressed in German, the termination of the adjective
being a substitute for it. Ex.:
I have a grey hat and a black one.
•3(5^ l^aBe einen grauen §ut unb einen fc^marjen.
Two old lions and two young ones.
3tcei alte Sixteen unb jt^ei junge.
*) Sebiucber and ein jegUd^er (each) are antiquated.
158 Lesson 25.
3) Silled, h3«« (or aHeS t)a«, iDa«) is the English a// /^/ or
only all. Ex.:
2)a§ ift adeg, h)a« i^ ^be that is all I have.
Note. SlKeg, icag is declined as follows:
G. atlcS bcffen, traS . . . of all that . . .
D. 5lUcm (bcm), toaS ... to all that . . .
A. Slttcg, teas or aEc8 bag, teaS . . . all (that) . . .
4) The indefinite pronoun some, when referring to a pre-
ceding substantive, may be translated in different ways.
When it replaces a singular, we may say in German accord-
ing to the gender: tceld^en, tDeId)e or tr>eld}C^; in the plural:
toelc^e, etnige or tJaCon. Frequently however it is not ex-
pressed at all. Ex.:
Will you have some beer? Yes, give me some.
2BoUen ©ie Ster ^aben? ^a, geben ©ie mir »e(c^e«, or
only: geben on biefen 3^gatren?
Yes, I have some still {or a few more).
^a, i(^ Ifahc nod) tuelc^e (eintge bacon), or even: tc^ ^abe noc^.
5) Anj/, in an interrogative sentence, is generally not trans-
lated. When equivalent to every, it is rendered by iet)er:
You will find it in any shop.
©ie njerben e§ in jet) em Saten finben.
Words.
®er (S^rip the Christian. bet "^Jla^ the place.
t)er Sel^ter the fault, mistake. gelel)rt learned, adj.
ba^ ©eiDiffen the conscience. gefpvoc^en spoken.
bie ©timme the voice. er^alten [part.) received.
t)ie Srfal^rung experience. bie SSelt the world.
bet 33Dte the messenger. beneiben to envy.
ber ^tei§ the prize. tbten to kill, nte never.
id) bin fd)ulbig I owe. ©erleumben to calumniate.
tov'ftc^tig cautious. annjeuben to employ.
fteUen to put (upright) . gefd)lagen beaten. l;)oflid) polite.
Beading Exercise. 57.
Tlan ifl gliicflid), toenn man sufxieben tft. 2)?an glaubt t9
nic^t, ttjenn man ci^ nid)t fiel)t (sees). i2old)e 3Mnge [ieljt man
nic^t jeben Xao,. 2)ie jtuei l^nabeii I)abcn einanbev ^e[d)lagen.
S3ejal)Ien ©ie jebevmann, ti\i^ ©ic it)m fd)ulbig finb. 9^icmanb ijt
fo gelet)rt, baft er aUeS tcd^ (knows). 3)ev tua^re ei)np beneibet
Indefinite pronouns. 159
t)a8 ®Iucf titemanbeg ; er t3er{eumt)et nienmnt). ^lopft jemanb?
3c^ '^ore jemanbeS aben ©ie? S6) l^aSe jtoel: einen alten unt)
einen neuen.
©int) 3^re §ute fd)n3ar5 ober Odj^abe einen fd)njarjenunt> einen
gran (grey)? ^ ^ _ grauen.
SSon njcm ^aben @ie btefen 53rtef 5Scn jemant), ben©le nid^tfennen.
evl)alten ?
Twenty-sixth Lesson.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
(Unregelma^tgc 3«ttt)orter.)
(Ancient or strong conjugation.)
Those verbs are commonly called irregular (nnrc^el*
majtg) which deviate from the formation and conjugation
of the modern or regular verbs. They are indeed suffi-
ciently regular after their own fashion of conjugation.
However as the term irregular has hitherto been adopted
we cannot help using it too. They amount to 163. The
deviation from the modern form takes place only in the
Imperfect and the Participle Past; all the other tenses
are formed in the same manner.
1) The terminations of the Prese7it tense of the ir-
regular verbs are the same as of the regular verbs, but
several change, besides, in the second and third persons
singular and in the Imperative mood, their radical vowel
a into a, and c into i or ic, as:
3f(3^ fd)lage, bu fc^Icgft; — id) gebe, er gicbt (gibt). — ®ieb.
2) The peculiar character of the Imperfect Indicative
of the irregular verbs consists in their adding 7io termina-
tion at all to the root, but in changing its votcel, as from
gcben. Imp. id) %db. The diiference of the vowel causes
them to be divided into four conjugations, according to
the prevailing four vowels a, i, and «.
1) Those ancient verbs with the vowel a in the Im-
perfect, compose the ^rst conjugation (o^tbcn — \6f gab) ;
2) those with i or tc, the seco7id (fdu'eibeii — ic^ fd)ricb);
3) tliose which take e, the third (fd;ie6eu — \6) fc^og) and
4) those which take n, the fourth (f^Iagcn — id^ fd^lug).
The 3rd pers. sing, of the Imperf. is always like the first.
Irregular Verbs. 161
3) The Imperfect of the Suhjunctive mood is formed
by adding e to the Imperfect Indicative, and modifying
the vowel, when it is a, or u, as :
3f'd) gfiSc, ^u gaBeft, er gcibe :c. (trenn tc^ gabe).
4) The Participle past of all verbs of the ancient
form ends in en instead oft, as: gegeben given; gefc^rte*
ben written etc.; but as the vowel does not always
remain the same in the Participle past, the two first
conjugations have three subdivisions or classes, accord-
ing to the prevailing vowel of the Participle past.
Remarks.
Strictly speaking, only verbs having 0, C, Ct and i for
their root -vowel can be ancient or irregular verbs. By ano-
maly or bad orthography, however, a few verbs with a, 0^
^f aXL and \X have also crept in.
To facilitate somewhat the study of these verbs, we
think it useful to give the following general hints, before we
enter upon the particulars.
1) Ancient verbs having c in their root, retain this vowel
in the Part. past. The Imperfect takes either ic or it, as:
blafen to blow. Imp. blic?. Part, geblafen.
tvagen to carry. Imp. hug. Part, getragen.
2) Those having C for their root- vowel, take in the Im-
perfect either a or 0. In the Participle past the 13 first verbs
(p. 163, 164 and 165) take C, Nr. 14 and 15 a, all the others o, as :
gcben to give; a,ab — gegcbeu.
fcdbten to fight; foc^t — gefoc^ten.
3) Ancient verbs having Ct in their root, change it into
t or ic, both in the Imperfect and Part, past, as:
bcipen to bite; big — gebtffen.
bteiben to remain; blicb — gebllcben.
4) Ancient verbs having it in their root, change it into
V, both in the Imperfect and Part, past,*) as:
fc^Ucjsen to lock; f^log — gefcbtoffen.
5) Ancient verbs the root of which is iltb, ttig or illf
have in the Imperfect a and in the Part, past tl, as:
fittben to find; fanb — gefjtntjen.
fingen to sing; fang — gefungen.
With the exception only of licgeit to lie (see Nr. 12, p. 165).
OTTO, German Conv.-Gramraar. 1 1
162
Lesson 26,
Conjugation of an irregular verb. (1st Conj.)*)
Imperfect with a.
©ebeti to give.
Indicative Mood. Subjunctive Mood.
Present Tense.
Sd) gebe I give
fcu giebft thou givest
er giebt he gives
Xoxx geben we give
(il)r gebt) ( ye give
©le geben 1 you give
[ie geben they give.
3f(^ gab I gave
t)U gabft thou gavest
er gab he gave
to it gab en we gave
il^r gabt \ ye gave
©ie gab en j you gave
fie gab en they gave.
3c^ gebe I (may) give
fcn gebeft thou mayst give
ev gebe he may give
xovc geben we may give
ii Sri } >- -^ «i-
fie geben they may give.
Imperfect (Preterite) .
3cl) gabc**) I might give, I gave
t)u gab eft thou mightst give
er gabe he might give
toir gdben we might give
(it)r gabet)\
®ie gaten | y°" "'sht give
fie gdben they might give.
Compound Tenses.
Perfect. Pluperfect.
Sc^^abe.. gcgebcn I have given ^6) ^tte gegeben I had given
t)U ^aft gegeben thou hast given t)ut)atteft gegeben thouhadst given
cr I)at gegeben he has given 2c. :c.
2C. 2C.
First Future.
^6) toert)e . . geben I shall give
bu njtrft geben thou wilt give
er tuirt) geben he will give
tDir iuert'en geben we shall give
x> toerl^et geben j ^^^j^ ^^^
©le toeri^en geben ) •' ^
fie mertjen geben they will give.
Second Future.
3(1) tt>ert)e . . gegeben l)aben I shall have given
t)U iDivft gegeben l)aben thou wilt have given
:c. K.
*) Called also bic A-5loniugation.
**) Used especially after Wcnn if. (tocnii i(^ e8 t^m 9a6(
Irregular verbs. 1st Conj. 1st class.
163
First Conditional.
Sd) ttjiirbe . . geben I should or would give
t)u tt3urt)eft QcBen thou wouldst give
er njiirbe geben he would give
iDir toiirtJeu geben we should or would give
2C. - K,
Second Conditional.
-3fd) toiirbe . . gegeben l)aben I should have given
bu toitrbeft gegeben l^aben thou wouldst have given
K. :c.
Imperative Mood.
®teb give (thou).
(er foU geben let him give.)
geben Xoxx or lagt un§ geben let us give,
gebet or gcBen (Sie give (you),
fie foflen geben let them give.
Infinitive Mood.
Pres. geben or jn geben to give.
Past, gegeben l^aben or gegeben ju ^aben to have given.
Participles.
Pres. gebenb giving. Past. gege!6en given.
We subjoin now the irregular verbs according to
their respective conjugations and classes, numbered in
succession from 1 to 163, and followed by an alphabet-
ical list.
First Conjugation.
Imperfect with a.
First class: Past Part, with c.
Indicative Present.
Imperative.
Imperfect
a
Past Part.
e
Od) gebe,^ bu gtcbft, er
picbt orgibt^tDir geben, i)
t^r gebet ((Sie geben),
fie geben
1. @c6ctt to give.
gcgcBen
given.
gteborgib, id) gcB, bu
gebet or I gcibft, er gab,
geben ©le! tDir ^aben k.
give. |>S'w^*.td)gabe.
Conjugate in the same manner: auS'geben^) (sep.v.) to spend
(money); toetgcben (insep. v.) to forgive, Part. p. toergcben
(not tergegebenj ; 5ttrU(f'ge(en to return, to give hack etc.
1) The plural is always like the Infinitive.
2) The compomids of these verbs are either separable or inse-
parable. Separable verbs take the augment ge between the prepo-
sition and the verb in the past Part, as: auSgcgeben (see the 31st
lesson); the inseparable have no ge in the ^o*^ Part, (see p. 121
and 126, 5).
11*
164
Lesson 26.
Indicative Present.
Imperative.
Imperfect
a
Past Part.
e
2. @ffcn to eat.
tB. — effet,
cffen Sie.
id) a 6 I ate.
PL mx apen.
Suhj. ^ age.
gegeffen
eaten.
Q6) efje, bu iffefl, er
t^t, tDueffen, %- effet,
fie (®ie) effen.
3- SreffCtt to eat (of animals), to devour.
^d) freffe, t)u frifjeft, erlfrip, lid) frag. i gefrcffen
frigt, luir fveffen K. I freffet. | /S'M^*.id)fta6e. I eaten.
4. SJleffctt to measure.
36 meffe, fcu miffeft, erlmig, meffet, I id) mag. l gemcffen
migt, tDir nieffen :c. Imeffen (5ie. I *S'w^'. id) mage. | measured.
Thus is conjugated: ab'meffeit to measure, to survey.
5. Scfen to read.
Sd)lefe,tultefeft, erUc^tJ lieg, lefet, jic^IaS. Igelefen
voxx lefen 2C. Ilefen ©ie. \Subj. i^ lafe.l read.
Thus: toor'Iefcit to read to some one.
6. ©C^Ctt to see, to look.
3^d)fel^e,buftel)ft, evficf)tJ fie^, fe^et, li^ fa^. igefe^en
luir fe^en 2c. | f e!^en (Sie. I Subj. id} fa'^e. | seen.
Thus: an'fe^cn to look at; auS'fe^en to look (like or — well).
7. 2;rctett to kick (also to step, tread).
5fc^ trete, "Du trittft, erltvitt, tretet, lic^ trat. igetreten.
tritt, tuir treten k. Itveten ©ie. I /S'm^'. ic^ trate. |
Thus: ab'ticten to resign, yield; fctntrcten to step in, enter.
8. f GJcttcfctt*) to recover from illness.
3td) genefe, bu geucfeft, ev kenefe, lic^ genag. Igenefen
genefet, tDir genefen ic. Igenefet. I^Sw^'.ic^genage. I recovered.
9. T^cft^e^Ctt*) to happen.
(53gef^tc^t,(fie)gefd)el)cn.i — | e8 gefc^a^. | gefcbef)en.
10. SSergcffctt to forget.
3d) toergeffe, bu toergiffcft, I »ergig, l id) » e r g a g. I o e r g e f f e n
ercergigt, iDircergeffen. I tjcrgeffet. | S. id) tcrgdge.l forgotten.
11. 25ittett to beg, ask or request.
3(?^Mtte,t)ufcitteft,erbittet,| bitte, bittet, I id) bat. i gebeten
mx bitten, i^r bittet k.| bitten ®le. I StibJ. td^ bSte. | begged.
*) wDjT* Verbs marked with j- are neuter and form their
compound tenses with the auxilinrv f citt (to be), as : l6) tin gcitcfen
I have recovered; e8 tft gcfd)cl)en it has happened etc. All others
are construed with l^abett*
Irregular verbs. 1st Conj, 1st class.
165
Indicative Present.
Imperative.
Imperfect.
a
Past Part.
C
12. iSicgcn to lie.*)
3^d)Uef^e,"Duliegft, erUegt, i liege, Iteget, I id) la^ I lay. I gelegeu
XQVt liegen, i^r Ueget k. I liegeii ©ie. I Suhj. ic^ lage. | lain.
Thus: fuittci-'Itcgen to succumb. Part. p. unterle'geti.
13. iSt^Ctt to sit.*)
3(^fil?e, bufi^eft, erft^t, I fi^e, fi^et, jid) fa(3 I sat. I gefeffen
toxx fi^en, i^r fillet 2c. I [i^en ©ie. \ Subj. id) fage. I sat.
Thus : Bcfi^ctt to possess. Imp. id; Bcfa^ ; Perf. tc^ l^abc Bcfcffen.
To this class may be added the following three more irre-
gular verbs:
14. fStCtfCtt to stick.*)
3fd)ftecfe.t)uftedft,etftedt,|ftede, ftedet, I ic^ fta!. I geftedt
tcir fteden, tl)r ftedet 2C. I fteden ©ie. | S. id) ftcife. I stuck.
NB. The active verb fteden (to put) is regular.
15. iStC^Ctt to stand.*)
^c^fte^e,t)ufte^eftorfte^ftJfter)e, ftedet J id) ftanb**). i ocftanbctt
er ftel)t, tuir fteden k. Iftel)en S't<^".id)ftant)e.| stood.
Thus: fbeftelien to consist; fauf'ftel^en to get up, to rise; Uer*
fteden to understand. P. p. tierftanben understood.
16. %\)XL^ to do, to make,
^f^f^ue, fcut:f)itft, ertfjut, I tt)ue, ti)uet, lid) i\)td I did. I gct^tt
tcirt^un, i!^rti)Ut, f{etl)un. I t^un ®ie. \Subj.\&jX^Ut.\ done.
Words.
(Sin 2^^a(et m. a German
dollar. ***)
ein ©chitting m. a shilling,
ber 9}Jenfd) [2nddecl.) mankind,
bie 3Sernunft reason, sense.
§eu n. hay. §afer w. oats,
glauben to think, believe.
t)ie i)^aupe the caterpillar.
ber £itd)en the cake.
ber @tord) the stork.
ber ^^omau' the novel.
bet hornet' [2nd deal.) the comet.
bie ©efa^r the danger.
bie SDkr! the marc.
ba^ U[er the shore, bank.
f(^tDac^ weak, feeble.
* In Middle- and North-Germany with l^al^ett^ only in South-
Germany with fcilt.
**} Old form tc^ ftiinb; Suhj. ic^ ftitnbc.
***) A German dollar or rather 'thaler' has 3 marcs, an Ame-
rican dollar has 4 marcs.
166 Lesson 2(i.
ble 9)2au^ the mouse. nod) !eute not yet any.
t)et ^mxX) the enemy. t)er 9JcmcT the Roman,
leife low. halt) soon. t>ie 2^ugent) virtue,
nod) nid)t (nie') not yet (never).
Eeading Exercise. 59.
1. ©efcen ©ie miv eine gute i^eber. 9J?ein ^reunt) gab
mir eintge Zhaiex. §abcu <3ie itjui fclefelbeu xuviicfgegeben'^
S3lo6} md}t. 2Ba^ i^t ieuer ^nabe ba? (St tgt tirf^eu. -3d)
l)abe nod) !eine gegeffen. ®et ?[}?ann ag ju (too) t)iel. ^er
Dd)fe frigt ®va^ uut) §cu. ^ie ^ferte ^aben aflen §afex-
gefreffen. 2Sarum meffen ©ie fcte[e3 3:ud)? Qdj m\i e^
»evfau}en. SBarum lie^t t)er (2d)u(er fo leife? (Sr ^at eine
fd}it)ad)e (Sttmme (voice). 53orige^ (last) -3al)r la 3 et lauter.
®er biinbe 9}2ann fie^t md)t^. ©ie^, ^ier fint) i)etne 58iid)er.
§aben ©te ten ©tord) gefe^en? SKir fat) en t^n nid)t. -Sc^
]j)abe nod) nte einen (Slefanten gefe^en.
2. -Semanb tft anf meinen -(^ng getreten. 2)er fran!e ift
genefen (8). 35iele§ ge)d)iel)t (9) in ber 2BeIt (world), xiw^ man
nid)t t)erftet)en !ann. §aben ©ie geglanbt, fca^ t)ie§ ge[d)e'^en
n>iivt)e? 3fd) »evga§, ■3l)nen jn fagen. ba^ id) Ol)ren ^reunt) ilavl
gefe^en ^be. 5d) l)atte bat^ 2Bort t?ergejjen. ^cv Sebiente ftant)
an t)er jt^iire; jn^et anbve 9JMnner ftanben bet il)m. 2)er arme
2)iann bat mid), il)m jn ^clfen (help); er l)at and) anbve ?oute
gebeten. ®ev 9Me fa^ anf einem l)D^en 33anm, i^ tijei^ nid)t,
n)ie (ange er bort (there) fa^. 2Bd lag ber Sl^fel? Gr lag im ®ra5.
Jiuffiafie. 60.
1. Give me two marcs. When (tuann) will you 3 return
sthem [to] ime? In a few days [Dat.], The countess gave
the poor man [Dat.) a shilling. God (©ott) has « given ^zthe^
3 reason to i mankind. I eat bread and cheese. Thou eatest
bread and butter. The children ate cherries. I saw you
seat 1 grapes (ilrauben) ; were they ripe? Eat of (ten) this
cake, zV*) is for you. The oxen eat (3) grass and hay. The
caterpillars ate (3) all [the] leaves of (toon) that tree. The
cat has eaten the (3) mouse. I gave her [Dnt.) a flower.
What does Miss Eliza read? She reads a novel by (toon) Sir
Walter Scott. Have you read Lord Byron's poems i@ctid)te) ?
I have not yet read them, but I shall read them soon.
2. Have you ever (je) seen a comet? Yes, I saw a
beautiful comet. The young man does not see the danger in
which he is [placed]. Young lady, read only good books.
Beneath (unter) the sun [Dat.) anothing ihappens without the
''j See p. 141, 1.
Irregular verbs. 1st Conj. 2nd class. 167
will [WxUen, m.) of God. What has (ift) happened? An old
man stood on the (am) shore and cried (tceitlte). Close to
him (nebeil U)!!!"! sat two little children, and a dog lay (12)
beside (neben, Dai.) them. The poor man begged me, to (ju)
give him a lew marcs. Fabricius possessed (13) such (fo)
great virtues, that (bag) even (felbft) the enemies of the
Komans ^respected ihim.
Second class: Participle with o.
Indicative Present.
Imperative,
Imperfect.
a
Past part.
17. SBefcl^Icn [Dat.)*) to command, to order.
3fcl) Befe^^Ie, bu befic^Ift, l befie^l, I tc^ Befabl. I befof)(en
erbefic^It, h)irbefel?len. I befe^let. I ^S. Id^ befaf)(e. I ordered.
Thus: cm^fcVfcn to recommend; Itnp. cm^fttl^t; P.p. tm^\o^'Un.
18. S5ergcn or tjerbcrgcn to hide, to conceal.
3d^t)erber3e,'Dui5erblv9ftJ Derbirg, I 16} ijerbatg. I ijerborgen
ev t>evbirgt,tr)irt>erbergen.l toerbergct. | /S.ic^toerbdrge.l hidden.
The root bergcit (to hide) is only used in poetry.
19. t23erftcn to burst.
^d) bevfte, bu berfteft, er 1 berfte, 1 ic^ barft. 1 geborften
bctftet, tt)ir berften k. | berftet. | S. id) barfte. | burst.
20. S5rC(i^Ctt to break.
3d) breeze, t)u bvid)ft, ev 1 brid), I id) bra c^. 1 gebvo(^en
brt(^t, tDirbred}eu K.| brec^et. | /S'. ic^ brddje. | broken.
Thus: ab'bred^ext to break off; aiiS'brec^en to break out; unter=
bre'c^en to interrupt (P. p. unterbro'c^eit) ; ^txhxctijtn to break
to pieces, Pai't. p. 5cr6ro't^cn.
21. 2)rcfd^Ctt to thrash.
3fd)t)re[c^e,'Dui3rifc^eft, et I brifd), lid) brafc^. I gebtof(^en
brlfc^t, tDiv brefc^en :c. I brej^et. I S. id) t)rd)d)e. | thrashed.
22. i @rf d)rC(f Ctt 1) [neuter] to be frightened.
erfd)rcrfeii
frightened.
■3d) evfc^vede (I am frigh- 1 erfc^ricf,
tened), bu erfd)tidft, ev* evfd)vedet
evfc^vidt, ti3ivev[d)ved'en. I
NP. When erfc^redenM is an active verb, meaning to fright
some one, it is regular, like the simple verb [d;reden.2;
ic^ ev[d)vaf
I was Iright-
ened.
*) [Dat.) means: The verb governs the person in the Dative;
to order something means beftettcii, reg. v.
1) Pronounce erf(^rd(fen.
2 Pronounce crfc^redeu, fc^redeu.
168
Lesson 26.
Indicative Present.
Imperative.
Imperfect.
a
Past Part
gegoltcu.-
gcboren
born.
23. (ScItCIt to be ^vorth or estimated
^&} gelte, bu giltft, cr l — l id) gait,
gilt, toxx gelten jc. | — | S. x&i galte. ]
Thus: k)erge(ten to return, to render. P. p. tergoltcn.
24. G^ebdrcn to bring forth.
3fd)gebdre, bugebieift, fiel — I id) gebar.
gebiett, tt)ir gebdreu 2C. | — | S. id) gebare.
25. ^clfctt [Dat.) to help, assist.
^6) :^elfe, bu l)ilfft, er i t)ilf. tjelfet, i id) I) a If. I ge^clfen
^ilft, tcir ^elfeu 2C. | ^elfeii ®ie. | -S'. id) ^cilfe. | helped.
26. 9Jc^men to take.
^6) ne'^me, bu nimmft, I nimm, ^ | id) na^m. i gcnommen
erniinmt, tDirnel)men.| net)nien(Sic.| aS. id) ndt)me.| taken.
Thus: aB'ne'^mcii to take off; ati'nel^nieu to accept; auS'ne^mcn
to except; t)erau8'ue^mett to take out; iititernc^mett to under-
take (P.p. miternom'meit); tDeg'jtel^men to take away; juriid''
nc^mcn to take back.
27. arb. P. p. ertcorbeit.
34. SScrfctt to throw, fling, cast.
■3c^ n?erfe, bu trirfft, er i icirf, | id) luarf.
tcirft, trir h?evfcu 2C. | iuerfet. | S. id) tcdvfe.
Thus: tneg'tDerfcn to throw away; Imp. tt)arf«,n)eg; um'tverfeii
to upset; tocrtoer'fen to reject; tooriDerjen to reproach.
getuorfen
thrown.
35. ^tcffcit to hit.
^d) tveffe, fcu ttiffft, er I triff, i id) traf. I getroffen
trifft, tDir treffen 2C. I treffet. | S. id) trdfe. I hit.
Thus: -J- etn'treff en to arrive; ilbertrcf'fen to excel, surpass.
Imp. iibertraf; P.p. iibertrof'fen ; an'treffcu iAcc.) and fju*
fani'mentreffcn (mit) to meet, to have a meeting.
36. 95cgittttett to begin.
•3fc^beginne, bubegtnnft, | beginne, i id) beg an n. I begonncn
erbeginnt,n3.beginnen2c. I beginnet. | iS'.tci^begdnue. I begun.
37. ©CtotttttCtt to win, to gain.
3c6getriune,likebegtnnen.| geminue. | tc^ genjann. | getDonnen.
38. 9litnttCtt to leak, to flow.
3d) rtnne, bu rinnft 2C. | riune. | i^ rann. | geronnen.
39. <3innen to mediate, think.
3fc^ finne, bu finnft 2C. | finne. | ic^ fann. | gefonnen.
Thus : [ic^ befinnen to reflect, to recollect.
40. ©^innctt to spin.
3c^ fpinue, bu fpinnft 2C. | f^inne. I id) fpann. | gefpcnnen.
41. iSdqtotmmctt to swim.
3cb fc^njimme 2C. | fd)\i3imme. \\^ fc^tt3amm.|gefd)iDommen
*) See p. 168.
170
Lesson 26.
Indicative Present. Imperative
Imperfect.
a
Past Part.
e
42. f ^OimitCtt to come.
3cl) tomme, t)U fommft, | !cmme, |id)famlcame.| ge!ommen
ev fommt k. IfonimenSie.l aS. id) !ame. I come.
Thus: f att'Iomtnen to arrive. 35efominen to get.
Words.
^tX f^eint) the enemy.
t)er ^ieb the thief.
tiaS 9iol)r the reed, cane.
t)a§ ©is ice. ter ©teiii stone.
fcev 9}iatrofe the sailor.
t)ie 2;a[ie the cup. bleic^ pale.
bev §auptmami the captain.
t)a§ @clDel)r ( jt>/. — e) the musket.
ber (Sd)a^ the treasure.
bet SJt'aim the husband.
tie (Slbe the earth.
bet 9J?Drber the murderer.
bet ^old) the dagger.
ber ©piecjcl the looking-glass.
ber ®tad)el the sting.
ba§ 3u|eft' {Gen. — ^) the insect.
bie ^iene the bee.
bie SSuube the wound.
bad ^\t{ the mark, target, goal.
ber ^lacbiS the flax, tot dead.
labeu [irr. V.) to load.
gc^crc^en to obey.
Reading Exercise. 61.
1. SSer Befiet^tt ben ©olbaten? 2)ie Cffijiere befallen
beu (Sotbaten, ben ^yeinb an'jugveifen (to attack). !Der ^onia
^at befoblen, ^a^ ein neuev $alaft gebaut n)crbe. ®er !Dieb
l)atte fid) l)iutev einer ?D?auer toevborgen. Wdw (3el)n, trarum
terbivgft bu bein @efid)t (face)? '©ad ©id ift gebovften.
3)ad 9tol)r biegt fid) (bends); ahitx t^ brid)t nid)t. ©cr 33cbiente
l)at bie !J;affe jevbvoAen. -Sm iUHnter bvifd)t man bad (^e=
traibe (corn), ©ie ^vau crfd)vaf (22), aid*) (when) fie ibven
SQJaun f o bleid) f a I) . 3ebevmaun iimr baviibcr e v f d) v o cf e n . "ii^o,^
^abeu ®ie in ber !i?etterie geiuonnen? 3d) \):k\it I)unbert 9)?ar!
gewonnen.
2. 3Benn bn beinem 9^id)bar l)ilfft, n.nvb er bir and) nneber
I)elfen. !I)er @raf I)at t)ielen ^Jlvnien gebelfen. X>ad Slinb ^at
bao ''Dicffer geuemnieu. 2Barnm nal)nien '3ie ed nid)t weg (away)?
3d) bev^aim gerabe (just) nieine :)(vbeit, aid*) ber '^rembe eintrat
(came in). X^ie ^Jiatvcfeu fd)n\imnien iibev ben ^Inf^ iDie alte
§rau bvtt ?^lad)d gefponnen. iH>n tvad t)aben bie SitwU gefpvcd)enl^
Sic fagen, bag ber ilbnig geftorben ift. 9Ji\nn ^-reunb ift lUMn
*) IVhen = as Mith an Imperfect or Pluperfect following is
translated tttS, with other tenses ivciin; in botn cases the verb
stands last.
Irreg. verbs. 1st Conj. 3rd class. 171
^fevt)e gefatlen (fallen) uut) ^at ben (his) 'Hxm gebrod^en. 2Ser
l)Qt t)ie[cn (Btein getijorfen? Sin ^naie n)arf iljn in baS genfter
unt) jerbrad) bic ©^eibe (pane).
ilufgaee. 62.
1. The general commands; the soldiers must obey. Who
has ordered you [Dai.], zto (ju) ado ithis? The captain ordered
me 3 to load ithe 2 musket. Many treasures are hidden in the
earth. The murderer hid his dagger under his coat. Who
has broken my looking-glass? The servant broke ti [see
p. 141 , 2) this morning. We must always return (Nr. 23)
good for good (®ute:3 mit ©nteni) . The duke was born in the
year 1775. Mary was {has been*) stung by a bee. The sting
of the insect stuck (14) in the wound. Frederick II., king of
Prussia, died on the 17th [of] August 1786.
2. »The child is not dead,« said Jesus to (ju) its father, ))it
sleeps (ld)taft) .« The boy spoils (32) his books ; he has also spoiled
his clothes (i^(eit)ev). Of whom have you spoken? We spoke
of (don) Columbus. The soldier threw (34) 3 away (tceg) ihis
2 gun. Who has thrown the stone into the window? I do
not know who (tuer) **) 3 has 2 thrown lit. Have you hit (35)
the mark? Yes, I have hit it. Can you swim? I swam
2 over sthe 4river lyesterday. Who has spun the flax? My
wife (i^ran) has spun it last winter. She began the [Ace]
day after Christmas (2Bei^nacf)t) . The unhappy men threw
themselves (fid)) at the feet (ju ten Sii^^n) of the king.
Third class: Past Participle with u.
The verbs belonging to the third class of the first
Conjugation, having the Past participle with u, are easily
recognised. All have their root in in followed by b, (J or i
(tub, ing,***] ittf). They are not irregular in the Present
tense, nor in the Imperative mood, and consist of the
following eighteen (43 — 60) , with their different compounds.
Indicative Preseiit.
Imperative,
Imperfect.
a
:^ast Part.
U
43. S5ittbCtt to bind, to die.
5d) blnt»e, t?n blnbeft, erl binbe, 1 id) bant) I tied. I gebunt^en
binfcet, tuir bintoen 2c. I binbet, I aS'. id) banbe. I bound.
Thus: an'binben^) to attach; tJCrBinbcn to oblige, to join, to
dress (a wound) (P. p. berbimbeit).
*) Passive voice; see the foot-note 2, p. 174.
**) See p. 145, Note.
***) 53rtngen is the only one of these verbs that does not
belong to this class. Its conjugation occurs p. J 2(5, § 6 and p 127.
172
Lesson 26.
Indicative Present.
Imperative.
Imperfect.
a
Past Part.
XL
44. ginbCtt to find.
3^d) finbe, bu finbeft, ev I fiube. ltd) fanb. i gefunbeii
finbet, n)ir finbeu k. I I S. id^fanbe. | found.
Thus: ctfin^bcn, erfanb, crfunbcn to invent; cm^finbcn to feel.
45. -[-(St^ttJinbctt to disappear, to vanish.
3d) fd)»iube. | [d)mnbe. | id) fd)tr)anb, jgefc^tpunbcn.
Thus. fttctfcl^ttJin^bcn to disappear. Part. p. tterfc^wuubcn.
46. SSinbCtt to wind.
3fd) tDinbe. | tmnbe. | id> tuanb. | getijunben.
Thus: ilBertDittbctt to overcome, conquer. P. p. iiBertinin'ben.
47. t^tilltJCtt to force one's way.
3f(^ briuge. | bringe. | i^ brang. | gebrungen.
Thus: fburd^brtngcn to penetrate; f cm'bringen to enter by force.
48. i^cHligcn [impers. with dat.) to succeed.
e8 ift mir
gelungcn I
have succ.
ge!Iungcu.
©8 geliitgt m i r I succeed, — e^ g e I a n g mir
ti geliugt if)m he sue- I succeeded.
ceeds 2C. aS*. c^ gelange.
Thus: -|-mi^Ung'en to fail, P. p. mt{jlung'eit.
49. ^Iitt()en to tinkle, to sound.
S;d) !(tuge. | flinge. | Id) !Iang. |
50. 9littgen to struggle, strive for, wring.
^&) ringe. | tinge. | tci^ rang. I gerungcn.
Thus: eningen to obtain, conquer.
NB. Umring'en to surround, from the noun bcr 9ltng, is regular.
51. ©d^Utigcn to sling, to twine.
3d) fd)Unge. | fd)linv3e. | id) fd)Iang. jgefc^Iungen.
Thus: tocrfd^Itng'en to devour; umfc^Ung'cn to embrace.
52. Sd)U3tngcn to swing, wave, brandish, wield.
3d) fd)t\)inge. | fd)tinnge. | id) fd)n?ang. |ge|d)n)ungen
53. Siugcn to sing.
3c^ finge. 1 finge. I id) fang. | gcfungcn.
54. -|-@^rilt(JCtt to spring, to jump, to crack.
3d) fpringe. I fVi^i"ilc. | td^ f prang. | gcfvrnngen.
Thus: -j-ldcrauS'lVTingcn to jump out; -|-jci|>iing'cn to burst.
55. i^itt^Ctt to sink.
3d) finfe. I finfe. |id)[anf I sank.| gefunfen.
Thus: \jiX(ih or l)inal>'[iufcn to sink doAv-n; -j-tterfinfcn to sink.
Irreg. verbs. 1st Conj. 3rd class.
173
Indicative Present.
Imperative.
Imperfect.
a
Past Part.
U
56. SrittfCtt to drink.
3Jd^ trin!e. | trinfe. | id) tranf. | getrunfen.
Thus: -J-er'trinfen to be drowned; [id; betrint'en to get drunk.
57. Stt'ittgCtt to force, compel.
3;(!^ jtuinge. U^inge. |id)5it)ang. | gejtDungen.
Thus: be^njiligeii to conquer; erjtwhtgen to obtain by force.
Note. The three following defective verbs belong also to
this class, but are seldom used:
58. S)ingeii to hire a servant. P. p. gebutigeit.
It has also the regular forms: Itnp. bingte; P. gebiitgt.
59. @c^ in be It to flay. P. p. gefc^unoen.
60. ©ttnfen to stink, — ftanf. P. p. gcftuitfen.
Words.
ber §ag, ber 3^wi^ ^^^ hedge.
t)te &uft the chest, breast.
t)ie ^vil)ne the flag, standard.
t)er S^affee the coffee.
baS (Sleut? (the) misery.
bie ^ud)t)iuder!unft the art of
ba^S S3oot the boat, [printing.
ex'fUngen to resound.
unteTl)aUen to amuse, enjoy.
fvcttDiEig voluntarily,
i^iibfd) pretty, nice, fine.
»orfid}tig cautious.
!J)er Partner the gardener.
t)le ^uget the ball, bullet.
ba^ (Sd)iegpult>er gunpowder.
t)er 33lumentiau3 the garland.
eine <£tednat)el a pin.
t)er 33ud)binber the bookbinder.
t)er ©trie! the cord, string.
t)a3 Sieb the song.
fd}nmden to decorate, to adorn.
tet 3ager the hunter.
bie ©dngeviu the songstress.
bag ^e^ the deer, roe.
Reading Exercise. 63.
1. ®er ©drtner l)at bag S3dum(^en an einen ©tod ge«
bun ben. 9J?an tjevbaub bie SBuube beg ©olbatcn. Qd) fanb
bag 5l'lnb fd}(afeub unter einem 33aum. Sertijolb ©c^^icavj, ein
S)eutfd)er, erfanb bag (Sdue^pult^er im 3fal)ve 1380. Unter ber
9^egie'iung^ (reign) ^arlg VII. (beg ©iebenten) bran gen bie
(Sngldnber in ^van!reld) ein, unb fanben nur einen fd)n3ad}en
SBiberftanb (resistance). 2)te fugel ifl bnrd) bie S3vuft beg
Ofiijierg gebrungen. 2)ag ^fevb f prang iiber einen breiten
@raben (ditch).
2. i)ie Xrompeten erHangen, bie^al)nen tuurben gefAtcungen,
alg ber ^aif er nal}te (approached) . ©ofrateg tran! ben ®iftbed}er
(hemlock-bowl), unb ftarb ben Xo'D beg @ered)ten (just). §at er
i^n freihjiUig getrnnfen'^ ^an ^at i^n gesn^ungen, biefeg ^u tbun.
jDag ^duff ift gefunfen. 2Bie fjaben @ie fid) geftevn 2lbenb unter*
l^alten? 2Btr ^aben gefpielt, gefungen unb getvunlen. SDie S)?dbc^en
^abenSSlumenfrdn^egetDunben, umbie^duferjufd^mitden (decorate) .
174 Lesson 26.
<|titfoa6e. 64.
1. I do not find my stick. I found these violets in your
garden a'!ad tied them [together] in a {Ace.) bunch ((Straiin, m.).
Where did^) Louisa find that pin? She (has) found it in the
street. They found a purse of (mit) gold. Which bookbinder
has bound your pretty book? It was Mr. Long, who 4 lives
I in 2(the) s King-Street. I succeeded (48) in catching (JU faugeu)
the thief. He was^^) immediately (fcgleid)) bound with cords.
Miss Emma sang an fine song. The songstress has sung ad-
mirably (ti?uut)ev[c()en) . Would you like 3) to drink a glass [of]
wine? I thank you, I have already drunk two cups [oi] cofiee.
The ladies drank tea and ate cake.
2. The cat sprang over the table. A German, called
(9^vimen§) Gutenberg , invented the art of printing. The deer
had (tuat) sprung over the hedge, when (at'?) the hunter came.
The boat sank before our eyes. She (e^) would not have (fcin)
sunk, if the captain kad been more cautious. Lord Byron
swam across the (liber t)en) Hellespont. The poor woman
wrung her hands in despair (in ^evjtDciflunc^) . »(The) misery
forced (57) me to steak, said the thief. Misery should force
nobody (,) to do wrong (Unred)t) . My friends have forced
me (,) to become [a] soldier.
Heading -lesson.
®cr l^ungrigc Slraftcr. The linngry Arab.
Sin 5Ivabcr ^atte fid) in ber 25?iifte (desert) t^evirrt^; er ^atte
felt (for) mdn'cvcn XaQcn mdjt^ c^egeffen uub fiird)tcte tor
(of) §unger ^u fterben. (Sut)Ud)2 fant er an eincn t?cn (to
one of) jenen S3rnnnen3, n?o bie ^avanM'nen itjre lilviniele Iran*
fen 4, nnt) fa I) eincn letoernen ©acf^ anf bcm Sanbe liec^cn(t)).
(Sr l)ob (or naljni) il)n auf^ nnt befiiljUe^ il)n. „@ott fei'X'ant!"
riefs er au§, „t)a?'.' fiut) 3)atteIn>o cbcr ^afehiiifje."
3'n biefer fiif^en §offnnni]ii be-eilte er fid) (he hastened),
ben Sad ;^n i3ffnen^'-^; aber er fanb fid) in feiner Srirartung ^^
getdnfd^t (disappointed). 2)er 2>ad xoax mit -perlen^^ gefiiUt.
1) wandered, lost his way. 2) at last. 3) well, fountain.
4) to water. 5 a leathern sack or bag. 6) auf'l^cben il41) to pick
up, take up. 7) to touch, to feel. 8) auS'nifcu ^110) to exclaim.
9j see p. 14G, Obs. 1. lu) dates. 11) sweet hope. 12, to open.
l.'i) expectation. 14) pearls.
1) Translate Jias . . found.
2) Here and in the following 10 Exercises the Passive Voice
(p. 129) is indicated by printing the verb to be in Italics.
3) See p. 93, 1st Cond. 3)ied)tcu Sic . . gern^
Irreg. verbs. 2nd Conj 1st class.
175
3)ann triirbe er traungi^ uub fanf (fell) auf feme Me unt?
bat @ctt, fca^ er i^n ton feiiier -IZetie retten (save) m\t> tfjni
§Ufei" fc^icfen mccbte (would). (Seiu (^ebef i^ icurte erbort. ^^iad)
einet Stunbe !am t)ev 9)^aun jutiicf,!-^ ii?e(d)ev ten ®ad tjer*
I or en (lost, 125) (jatte, auf einem fame! rettent) (riding), uni2o
il)n 5U fud)en. (5r n:)ar fel)r ^liidlic^, il)n n)tet)er2o ^n fin ten,
^atte 9J?itleit2i niit tern armen 5lra6er, erqmcfte22 tl)n niit (Speife2-J
unt) Xran!, fe^te i!^n 511 fi(^24 (xuj fein 5?amel' unt) t'e'^rte25 ju
ter £ara\i3ane juriit!.
15} sad, sorrowful. 16) distress 17; help. 18; prayer. 19) back.
— 20' again. 21) compassion. 22) refreshed, supplied. 23) food.
24) with himself. 25) guriicf'fefjren to return.
Twenty-seventh Lesson.
Second Conjugation.*)
Imperfect with i or ic»
The second Conjugation is characterized by the sound
t in the Imperfect, which is either a short i, or a long
t spelt ic. The Past Part, takes the same vowel t or tc
as the Imperfect; only in the 3rd class, the vowel of the
Infinitive is retained. Most verbs of this Conjugation are
recognised by the radical diphthong ei.
First class: Imperfect and Past Part, with t.
Indicative Present.
Imperative.
Imperfect.
i
Past Part.
i
61. S5ci§Ctt to bite.
3c^ beige, bu beigeft, er | beige, | tcb big I bit. I gebtffen
beigt, tDir beigeu k. I beiget. I Subj. ic^ biffe.l bitten.
62. S5cf(ctgcn (fid)) to apply one's self.
^6) befteige mid), t?u be=
fteigeft t)id), er befleigt
ficb, tuirbefleigenun§2c.
befteige bic^, td)befUg mid)
befleigen I applied my-
(Sie fid). self.
The other form of this verb: fid^ beflei'^igen is regular
63. T^rBIct'c^cn to turn pale.
^(^erb(eid)e, buerbleic^ft,! erbleid)e, ltd) erbUd)'.
ererblei^t,tt3irerb(ei(^en.l erbleid)et. I ^S. id) erb(id)e.
Thus: -j-tocibleid^cn to fade. P. p. toerHic^en.
The simple verb bleic^en (to bleach) is regular.
*) Called also bte I-^onjugattoit.
befltffen
applied.
erblid)en.
176 Lesson 27.
Indicative Present.
Imperative.
Imperfect.
i
Fast Part.
i
64. ©rcifcn to grasp, gripe.
■3d) gveife, bu gveifft, er | greife, 1 id) ^r iff. I gevjriffen
gveift, tuir gvcifeii jc. | greifet. I S. t^ gviffe. I grasped.
Thus: begrei'fcn to understand, to comprehend; ergret'fen to seize
(P. p. ergiiffeu ; tttt'flreifcii to attak (P. p. an'gcgtiffeit .
65. ®Ici(^Ctt {Dai.} to resemble, to be like.
•Sc^ ^lcid)e, bu g(eld))"t, cv I gleid)e, I id) glid). |geglid)en.
gleic^t, \xi\x gleld)eii 2C. I gleid)et. I S. id) glic^e. I
Thus: t>crgtciM)eu to compare. Jm;j.id;t»cr8(it^. P.^^.ttcrglic^en.
66. iOJIcitcn or ^yx^^txitXi to glide, slide, slip.
5fd) gleite, bu gleiteft, er I gleite, i id) glitt. I geglitten
gleitet, tuir gieiteu 2C. I glcitet. | S. ic^ glitte. I slipped.
This verb sometimes occurs as regular: Imp. gleitcte etc.
NB. begteitcu to accompany) is regular: Imp. ic^ beglcitetc,
last y. begleitet, and takes l)aben.
67. ^ncifctt to pinch.
3fc^ tneife, bu hieifft, er | hieife, i id) fuiff. i gefniffeu
fneift, ujir tucifen k. | fneifet. | | pinched.
NB. Another form: fttei))en (to pinch) is regular.
68. Scibcil to suffer.
-3d) leibe, bu leibcft, er I leibe, i ic!^ litt. i gelitten
Icibet, iDir leiben 2C. | leibet. | S. id) Utte. | suffered.
Thus : crlctbcn to sustain. Imp. crtitt, Bart. p. crlitten.
69. ^feifcit to whistle.
3fc^ pfcife, bu pfelfft, er i vjeife, I id) ^f iff- I ge^HUf en
V^feift, tt)ir pfeifen 2C. | jjfoifet. I S. id^ V'Pff^- I whistled.
70. 9lcifectt to rend, tear.
-Sd) rcige, bu reigcft, er i reif^e, I ic^ ri^ I tore. I ge riff en
reigt, ttjir reij^eu 2C. | rei^et. I S. \^ riffe. I torn.
Thus: sctrci'^cn to tear to pieces. Imp. jcrri^, P. serriffeit;
cntreifj'cii to snatch away from.
71. fSlcitCtt*) to ride, go on horseback.
-Sc^ reite, bu rcitcfl, er I reitc, lid^ritt. i gcritten.
reitet, tuir reiteu 2C. | reitet. I S. id) ritte. |
Thus: ftiorki'reitcu to ride by; ffvajieveu reiten to take a ride.
NB. fcereitcn to prepare (from bcreit ready), and t)or'6creitcn
to prepare (before hand;, are regular.
*; 9leitcn in an active sense is only used in: cin ^fcrb rcitcn,
then it takes ^aten: 3c^ ^ak btefeS ^l^ferS gcritten.
Irreg. verbs. 2nd Conj. 1st class.
177
Indicative Present.
Imperative.
Iniperfect.
i
Past Part.
i
gefcf^Uffen.
72. Sc^lcifcn to sharpen, to grind.
Sfd)fd)leife, bu f d)teifft, ev I fdjietfe, I ic^ f cI)Uff.
fd)leift, xo\x fd)Ieifen 2C. I fd)teifet. I |
NB. The verb fd^teif ctl to demolish, to drag along, is regular.
73. i©^Ictd^Ctt to sneak or steal into.
3(^ f(^Ield)e, bu fd)leid)ft, I fd)Ieid)e, i ic^ fc^^Uc^. I gefdjUc^en.
exfcfeleid^t,mvfd)Iei(^eu.| fc^Ieic^et. I I
74. Stret(^Ctt to strike, rub (see Nr. 81).
3rf)ftteic^e, buftveld)ft, er I ftreid}e. 1 id) ftrici^. I geftrtd)en.
Thus: aug'ftrcidjen to cross out; an'ftreid^eit to paint; unter»
ftreic^en (P. p. unterftrl'd^en) to underline.
75. 8d)mcigctt to fling, to turn out.
^^ fd)met6e,'Du fd)meigcft. | fd)mei6e. | i(^ fc^ m t g.
76. St^ttclbett to cut.
^d) f d)neit)e, bu fc^neibeftJ fdjnetbe. | td^ f c^nttt.
a f d)neibet, id it f d)neit)en. I I
Thus : aB'fc^neiben to cut off. P. p. a'6'ge[c^ttttten.
77. i^l^tCttCtt to stride, to step.
S^d) f c^veite, bufd)Telteft2C.| fd)teite. I tc^ fc^rttt.
78. ©trcitCtt to quarrel, dispute, fight.
-3(^ flreite. bu ftreiteft k.\ ftteite. I i(^ fttttt. | geftritten.
Thus: beftrei'teit to contest, to dispute,
79. jSScirflCtt to yield, give way.
3fd) lueic^e, bu t»eid)ft 2C. I tDeld^e. | id) tDid). j geh)td)en.
Thus: fans'* or ab'trttd)en to deviate; -rentiDei'd^ett to escape.
NB. tDci(!^cti (to soak) is a regular verb.
I 3efd)nuffen.
gefd)nitteii.
gefd)ritten.
Words.
^aS S3ein the leg, limb.
ba^ Sager the camp.
ber §viuptmann the captain.
"Der ^([t the branch.
t)ev SDritdfe^^lcv the misprint.
ber ^elD the hero.
bie ^lamme the flame.
ber Slampf the combat.
begreifen (64) to comprehend.
bai> Signar the signal.
bag cn to drive (away). Imjj. id) trteB. Part, getrteben.
Thus: toertuei'bcn to expel; iibertrei'Ben to exaggerate.
84. SRclbctt to shun, avoid. Imp. id) mieb. Pari, gemieben.
Thus: tjcrmci'bctt to avoid; P.p. toermiebeit.
85. S^ciben to separate. I?7ip. i6^ fd)ieb. Pari. gefd)ieben.
Thus: entfc^et'ben to decide; mtterfd}d'ben to distinguish.
86. J (BcMfjtn to thrive. Imp. ic^ gebte'E). Part. gebtel)cn.
87. ScU)cn to lend. Imp. id) Ue'^. Part, geltefjen lent.
88. (sd)rctcn to cry, scream. Imp. id) fd)rte. Part, gefc^rieen.
Note. An old verb for f^reicn is freifc^en; frtfd); P. getrifc^eit.
89. S^eictt to spit. Imp. id) fpte. Part. ge[pieen.
90. 25er§ei'^ctt (c?ai!.) to pardon, /m^. id) Det^iel). P.J3. terjtel^en.
91. ^rcifcn to praise, extol. Imp. i&f prieg. Part, gepviefen.
92. SScifcu to show. Imp. id) mte§. Part, gettjiefen.
Thus: BctDei'feii to prove; erttjeifen to show, to do.
93. (St^CtttCttl)toshine; 2) toseem. /mf?. ic^ [d)ien. P. gcfd)ienen.
Thus: -|-erf(^ci'neii to appear.
94. (Sd)UJetgctt to be silent, er fd)tT}eic5t he is silent. Imp. i^
fd)\i:ieg I was silent. — Per/, ic^ ))abc gefc^toiegen
I have been silent.
Thus: toerfc^hjei'gen to conceal, to keep secret.
95. iStcigctt to mount. Imp. id) ft i eg. P. geftiegen mounted.
Thus: Yab'ftcigen to dismount, alight; -j-'^itTab'ftetgeti or l^erab*
fteigen to descend, to get down; -j-l^inauf'ftetgen to mount, to
ascend; erftetgen to mount, to climb up.
96. |)Ciftett 1) to bid; 2) to be called. Imp. t(^ ^leg I was
called. Part, ge^^et^en.
Thus: toer^eijicn to promise. P. p. berl^ei^en.
Words.
®er 55crfaffer the author. ber %[a(^§^ the flax.
bte ®timme the voice. ber @ipfe( the top.
bie 8oune the sun. (aut loud.
bte tiifte the coast. ^cU brightly.
bie (2eite the page, side. beleibtgen [reff. v.) to offend.
bie @efd)id)te history, story. an'geben to mention.
ba§ SiUet' or 5Sviefd)en a note, rotten to rescue, to save.
ein (£d)dter a shepherd. ^^[tig violent, heavy.
berii^mt famous, nur only. jornig or bbfe angry.
ber 53etter the cousin.
12*
180 Lesson 27.
Reading Exercise. 67.
1. 2Bo BlteBen ®ie fo lange? ^6:1 felteB jwei (Stunben
in bem taffee^ait^. 2Bie lange ift 3i)r ^veunb geblieben?
(Sr ift iiur cine ©tunbe geblieben. 2Ber fjat jenc^ 33ud) ge*
fc^ticbcn? 3d) !enne ben S3erfaf|er nidjt; feiu 9iaiue ift auf tern
S3uc^e nid)t atigegebcn. SBarum l^aben ©ie ben Umgving (inter-
course) mit bicfem SJ^aune nid}t gemieben? ©d)reien (5ie md)t
fo laut. Oc^ :^abe md)t laut gefd)rieen. 2Bie l^eigen ©ie?
3^^ ^eigc ^vtebrid). ^ie ^ieB 3I;re 9}tutter'^ ©ie ^ieg Sliia--
betf). 2Bemi ©ie gefd)miegen fatten, [fo] n^m-bcn ©ie niemanb
beteibigt f)aben.
2. SDer gerettete SD^ann prieS ®ott mit (auter ©timme. 3)er
S^eifenbe tuav auf ben 33erg geftlegcn; al^ (when) id; i^n ba fa^,
ftieg i(^ aud) l^inauf. ^Die ©onne fd)ien fel;r iDarm, al^ luir ben
Serg ^inabfttegen. _ 2Ber {)at 3I)nen biefeS C^elb geliel^en? 9)?ein
5Rad)bar lie!^ e^ mir untev ber Sebingung (condition), bag id) eS
i^m in ad)t 2;agen (in a week) n)iebcv juriidgebe. Sin ^eftiger
©turm trieb uufer ©d)iff an bie ^iifte. 2Bie lange finb ©ie auf
bent S3aH geblieben? 2Bir blieben bi^ 9}iitternac^t (till midnight).
^ufQafie. 68.
1. Remain here till (biiS) to-morrow. How long did your
cousin stay? He stayed an hour. I write a long letter;
yesterday z I i wrote three pages ; to - day 2 1 1 shall write two
more (nod) Jtuei). That English history is written by a fa-
mous author. I wrote a note to him. The shepherd drove
the sheep into the fold (in ben "ipfcvd)). This year sthe 3 flax
ihas (ift) not thriven. Why did the boy cry so loud? The
son said: »Dear father, pardon me {Dat.) this fault ;« and the
father pardoned him. The three men (9J^Hnnei) in the furnace
(l^euevofen, m.) praised God with a loud voice.
2. I lent my book [to] some one, but I cannot remember
(id) fann mid) nid)t erinnern) who it was. You have perhaps
lent it to {Dat.) Mr. S. That may (fanu) be. The sun shone
brightly. All animals and plants seem to be created (gefd)a[fcn
5U fein) for (the) man (mankind). The king seemed to be
angry. If he had been silent (gefd)n)icgeu) -he 1 would not
have offended him. Speaking [Ii^f.) is silver; silence (©d)n)ei*
geu) is gold. How high did the traveller mount? He as-
cended (mounted) to (bi^ auf) the top of the mountain.
Third class: Verbs having a, 0, avi or u for their radical
vowel. They take in the Imperfect ic, hut retain in
the Past Part, the vowel or diphthong of their In-
jinitivc. In the 'iiid and 3rd person of the singular
of Pres. Ind. they soften their vowel.
Irreg. verbs. 2nd Conj. 3rd. class.
181
Indicative Present.
Imperative.
Imperfect.
tc
Past Part.
a
97.
3(^ Mafe, bu Blaft, er
fclaft, voir Blafen, i^x
blafet, fie blafen.
98.
3(^ brate, bu 6rat^ er
brat (or bratet), icir
braten, i'E^r bratet :c.
99.
^{afcn to blow.
blafe,
bkfet.
Sratctt
brate,
bratet.
id) Uie§.
S. id) bliefe.
to roast,
id) briet.
S. ic^ briete.
gcBlafcn*)
blown.
gebraten
roasted.
fgaffCtt to fall.
fafie, |td)fierifell. UefaHen
faUet. I S. id) fiete. | fallen.
Thus: fi^erob 'fatten to fall down, P. jp. I)erab'geiatteit; gcfallctt to
please; feiitf alien to occur to the mind ; mi^fatten to displease ;
jerfatten to decay.
3d) faUe, bu fciUft, er
fdllt, ti3ir fallen 2C.
Sang en to catch.
fauge,
fanget.
bepcin,
I id) fieng or
I fing.
Past Part, an'gefangen; dtt"
gefangen
cauo^ht.
100.
3c^ fange, bu fdngft, er I
fdngt, tcir fangeu 2c. I
Thus: an'fattoeu to
))fan'gctt to receive.
101. .§ alien**) to hold, to consider.
3fc^ ^alte, bu ^dltft, er i I)alte. | ic^ ^iett I gel^alten
I)dlt, tDir !^alten K. | I I held, took. I held.
Thus: ab 'fatten to prevent; onf'l;aIten to detain; ein'i^alten to
stop; bel^alten to keep; er^lten to receive (P. p. er^altenj.
102. f§angen to hang, to be suspended.
•3(^ liauge. bu ^dngft, er I ^ange. | tc^ ^teng I gel)angen
!£>dngt, tiDir ^angen k. I I I hung. | hung.
Thus: ab'^ngen or ab'^angen (toon) to depend upon.
NB. §dngen to hang up, is regular. P. p. gc^dngt^
*) Observe that all the irregular verbs which have a or tt in
their root or infinitive, and most of those which have tttt or 0,
retain their root vowels in the Participle past. So they do in the
Siihj. mood of Pres. tense: 3c^ bla[c, bu btafcft, er bla[e; ic^ l^alte,
tiU {)alteft, er l)aite; t^ fto^c, bu ftoBcft, er ftoJ3c :c. The following
verbs only make an exception for their Participle past: er)'(^atten,
P.p. crfc^otten; faugen, gefogen; [aufen, gefoffen; [d)nauben, gefc^nuben.
**) .'patten with the preposition fiir answers to the English
to consider as, to think, to take for. Ex.: 3^ ^attc ii)n fiir etneix
e^rlictien 2JJann I consider (think) him (to be) an honest man.
182 Lesson 27.
Indicative Present.
Imperative. I ^'^U^^/'ct. . Past Part.
^ tC tt
103. Saffctt to let,*) to leave.
3c^ (affe, bu lafjeft ((a6t),|lQffe or laJ3,|id) Iieg I let. 1 gelaffen let,
er Ia|3t, mx laffen 2C.Uaffen ®ie. I/S. id) Itc^e. I left.
Thus: tJcrlaffctt to leave (a place), forsake, quit; P.p. ijcrlaffett;
gulaffeu to admit; aiiS'Iaffcu to leave out; 3uriid'laifen to leave
behind; l;iitter(ai'fett [inseparahle) to leave behind in death).
NB. ^eran'Iaffcn (to causey is regular. Imp. tc^ bcraulaCtc.
104. 9lalcn [Dat.]**) to advise.
3(^ rate, "Du ratft, er I rate. I id) rtet I geraten
rdt, iDir raten 2C. | I I advised. | advised.
Thus: erra'tm to guess ; aB'taten to dissuade ; ijerratcn to betray.
105. Srfjlofctt to sleep.
3d) fcf}(afe, bu fd)lQfft, er|fd)Iafe, l tci^ fd^Iief I gcfd;Iafen
f d)Idft, xcix fd)la|en k. |fd)Iafen ©ie. | I slept. | slept.
Thus: f ein'[d)tafeti to fall asleep. Per/, x^ tnn dnge[d)(aten.
106. f SaufCtt to run.
Sd) laitfe, t)u laufft, er I laufe. I id) lief I gelaufen
Iduft, tt)ir laufcu 2C. I I I run. I run.
Thus: f cnt(au'f en to run away.
107. ^antn to hew, cut down.
5d) l)auc, bu ^aucft, er 1 l^aue. i id) l)ieb I gel^aucn
l;aut, tDir !^aucn 2C. I | I cut. | hewn.
Thus: afc'l)auc:i to cut off; 5ert)au'cn to cut to pieces.
108. fGJc^Ctt to go.
3d)gel)e, buge^ft, erge^tJ gc^e, lid) gicng (orf, gcgongcn
iinr gct)en 2c. | gel)eu 3ie. I ginjj^ I went. I gone.
Thus: Tttitg'Qc'^Ctt to go out; ft^lncin'gcl^cu to go in, to enter;
ffort'gcljCtt to go away, to leave; ft'etgc^cn to vanish, to pass;
•l-toorki'gel;cn to pass by; fjurild'gebeu to go back; fvajicrcn
Qd)m to take a walk.
109. Stofjcn to push, thrust.
3^d) ftoge, bu ftcfst, er I ftofee. I ic^ ftieg. I gcfto[Kn.
ftoJ3t, tinx ftcf^cn 2C. I | |
Thus: on'fto^cu to hurt; »crflc§cn to reject, cast out, expel.
*) To let a house means t>c rmtctcn.
**) See the 22nd lesson, § 7.
f ) The spelling 'gicug', which etymologically is the only right
one , has now been given up in favour of *gtwg' for convenience*
sake.
Irreg. verbs. 2nd Conj. 3rd class.
183
Indicative Present. Imperative
Imperfect.
ie
Past Part.
110. 9lttfett to call.
Sf^rufe, bitrufft, ervufticl rufe. | id) rtef. | gerufen.
Thus: au§'ru|en to exclaim; jurud'mfctt to call back.
Words.
i)ie SJ^agigung temperance.
t)ie 5Inge( the fishing-rod.
t)a§ 91elj [pi. — e) the net.
tod)eu [reg. v.) to boil.
nuiAtig mighty. Bait) soon.
l)a§ '%\tx [pi. — e) the beast.
iDiIt) wild. fd)tt)ad) feeble.
jal)men to tame,
befreien to deliver, to release,
tjevbannt banished, exiled.
3)er SStnt) the wind,
fcer ©d)tDager the brother -in-
ter ^lOii the advice. [law.
t)a§ @d)tt)evt the sword.
t)aS H'o^^fti^e!^ the head-ache,
fcer i^^iitjver the leader,
fcev ipirfc^ the stag.
t)er "hoi^.) the brook,
tie 2Bei§!)ett wisdom,
bte @ered)tLgfeit justice.
t)ie 2^ugenb virtue.
Keading Exercise. 69.
1. ®er SBinb blaft nid)t ftav!; geftern bUeg er ftcivfer.
®er ^o(^ ^at i?a^ iVleifc^ ntd)t gut (well) gebratcu. S)ev ^ogel
ft el tot ijon t)em 33aum. TOt ©pec! (bacon) fdngt man 9J?dufe.
©in l^ottje ti^urbe in etnem ^Id^t gefangen, t)ann fam eine 9Jiau^
unb befreite x^n. %vix teen l^dlift (take) bu mid)? ^d} erl)ieU
einen S3nef »on meinem ©imager. (Sin ©d^iDcvt ^ i n g iiber bent
^opf be^ 3)amofle§. 3Ba^ rat en ©ie ntir; foH ic^ bleiben ober
geljen? Wan riet il)m, l)ier ju bleiben. ®iefe§ tear ein fd)ted^ter
^at; e§ teitrbe beffer fitr i!^n geteefen fein, fDrt5ugel)en.
2. S)er §err rief feinem Wiener. 2)ie[er fragte feinen §errn
(master) : „§aben ©te mic^ gerufen?" ®a§ ^inb fd}ldft. S)er Sote
(93?ann) lag ba, aU teeun (as if) er fd)Uefe. §aben @ie bie
lel^te 9^ad}t gut gcfd)lafen? -Sc^ l)abe nur teenig gefd}lafen , njeit
ic^ ^'opftDel) (a head-ache) I)atte. 2J?an lieJ3 ii)^^ ^i^)t fortgeljen,
teeil er ju fd)tea(S^ tear. SSenn ber ^nabe noc^ einmal (again) an
ben 2;ifd) fto^t, [fo] teirb er beftraft teerben. SSarum laufen bie
Seiite (people) fo jufammen (together) ? ^ 2J?an l^at einen ®ieb ge-
fangen. ©inb ©ie auc^ gelaufen? 3(^ lief mit ber iOlenge (crowd) .
Jlttfgaee. 70.
1. The wind blows hard (ftar!) ; yesterday sit iblew not
so hard. Is this meat boiled or roasted? It is roasted. The
gardener fell from the tree. Had (iedre) he not 2fallen idown,
2he 1 would have caught the bird. Fifty soldiers with their
leader were'^) caught. The stag came out of the forest and
1) See the foot-note 2, p. 174.
184 Lesson 28.
went to the (an ben) brook. The hunter catches the wild
beasts, but he cannot tame them. The Romans considered (101)
wisdom 2j, justice and temperance as (fiir) the greatest virtues.
2. The fish are^) caught with nets and fishing-rods. I
advised him {Dai.) to go to America. How long did you
sleep [Per/.] ? I slept seven hours. The girl ran to (ju) her
mother and told her (il)r) what ihad"^) i happened (9). The
old man was'^) pushed out of the house. Cicero left 4) Rome
(Stem), when (al^3) he saw, that ("Da^) his enemies 2 were 1 might-
ier (,) than his friends. Alcibiades was banished from Athens
(au» %i^t\\'), but he was soon 2 called iback.
1) See the foot-note 2, p. 174. — 2) Put the definite article,
see 38th lesson, § 1. — ^ Ho have^ printed in Italics is to be
translated with fcin. — 4) to leave a place = toerkfjcn (not lojjcu].
Heading- lesson.
l?o§5ingfD§ ^fcrb. Koscinsco's Iiorse.
foSstugfo, ber etie -j^^ole, tuoUte (wished) einft 1 einem ®cift*
lichen 2 in Solctl)urn (Soleure) einige iS-(a[d}en guten 2Beinc^^
fd)icfen. Sr tt3al)(te3 baju einen jungen 9}Zann, 9?amen» B^^t^ti^V
unt) Ue!^' if)m fiir t)te 9teife fein eigene^^ (own) 9ieitpfert). —
%{^ ,3c^ti^er ^milcf'fam, fagtc er: „9)icin ^etbljerr^, id) trerfce 3br
"^fcvt) nid}t n^ieber^ teiten, tuenn^ ©ie mir nid)t6 jugleic^'^ 3t)ve
^cr[e (purse) Ieil)en." — „5Sie meinen ©ie baS" (what do you
mean by that)? fragte ^o^^iu^^fo.
3eltner anttDortete : „®obaIb' at§ (as soon as) ein firmer
auf fcer Sanbftiajjes f einen §nt ob'naljm^, nnt) nm ein Hlniofen^o
bat, ftant) bau "^fert) augeublidlid) 11 ftitl, uni) gingi^ nid;t
l)on ber ©telle 12, bi§ (till or before) t)er ^Betttev^^ ettx^a^ em*
^fangen (100) ^atte; unt) al3 id) aU mein ®elD auSgegeben
(spent) l)atte, fonnte id) ba^ ^^fevb nur snfrietien ftelleui-* unt>
ftortinirt^ bringen^^, inbcui id) mid) fteUte (by pretending), qI-5
ob id) fcem 5^ettler ettwa^ gdbe. (In English = tern iBettler
etnjaS 5U geben.)
1) one day. 2) a clergyman. 3) he chose for this purpose.
4) general. 5) again. 6) ivenn . . . nid)t conj. unless. 1) at the
same time. 8) road, highway. 9) abnel^meu to take off. 10) for
charity, alms. 11) immediately. 12) tton bet igtcttc gcl^cn to stir
from the spot. 13) beggar. 14 j to satisfy, content. 15j get him on.
Twenty-eighth Lesson.
Third Conjugation.*)
Imperfect with 0.
The third conjugation has both in the Impei'fect and
Past participle as characterising vowel.
*) Called also bic 0-J^onjugotion.
Irreg. verbs. 3rd Conj. 1st class.
185
First class: Such verbs as have te for their radical vowel:
Indicative Present.
Imperative.
Imperfect.
Fast Part.
gcBogctt
bent.
geBoten
offered.
111. S5tcgCtt to bend.
^6) blege, t)U Btegft, er I biege. I id) Bog
btegt, XQvc biegeu 2c. I I I bent.
112. S5teten [dat.) to oflfer.
5^d) Btete, bu 6tetej% er I biete. I id) Bot
bietet, xoxx bieten 2c. I I I offered.
Thus: an'fiictcn to offer, p. ^. angcBotctt; ^er&ie'ten to forbid.
113. S5ctriitjcn (25ctricgcn) to cheat, deceive.
5f(^betrii3e,bubetriig[t, erl betriige I id) betrog. I betrogen
betviigt, iDir betnigeiuc. I (betriege). I I deceived.
NB. The simple verb trttgen, trog, getrogen is more used in
poetry than in prose, except in proverbial expressions, like
bei* @d)ein trilgt (appearance deceives).
114. fgUcgctt to fly.
5fc^ ftiege, bit fliegft, er i jTiege. i id) flog i gejTogen
fliegt, icir fliegeu 2C. | | I flew. | flown.
Thus: ffort'fdcgen to fly off; f ttjeg'ftiegen to fly away.
115. iglte^Ctt to flee.
5fc^ flie!)e, bit f(iel)ft, erl flie^e. I id) flol) i geflo^eit
fltei^t, xoxx flic'^en k. | I I fled. | fled.
Thus: fcntfCtc^cn to run away, to escape. P. p. entflo^cit.
116. iglicgCtt to flow.
Sc^flieBe, bu flicBeft, eri fliege. I — flog
fliegt, tuir fliegen k. | I flowed.
117. ^rlcrctt to be cold, to freeze.
3c^^ friere, bu fvierft, erl — I id) fror
friert, xoxx frier en :c. | I I was cold.
Thus: f gejrie'rctt to freeze; f erfric'rett to freeze to death.
118. ©Ctticfictt to enjoy, to eat.
Sc^ geniege, bugeniegeft, I geniege. I id) genog
ergeniegt, mrgeniegenzc. I I I enjoyed.
119. ©tcftctt to pour (to cast).
3fcb giege, bu giej^eft, erl giej^e. I id) gog
giegt, xoxx giejsen k. | I I poured.
geftoffen
flowed.
gefroren
frozen.
genof[en
enjoyed.
gegoffen
poured.
Thus: auS'giegen to pour out; Bcgte^en to water; fic^ ergic^en
to empty one's self; toergie'^ett to shed.
186
Lesson 28.
Indicative Present.
Imperative.
Imperfect.
Past Part.
geh'cd)en
crept.
geroAen
smelled.
gefc^offen
shot.
. liiUj.
120. jSlrictS^Ctt to creep, to crawl.
3(^^ fried)e, bu !ried)ft, er I fried)e. I tc^ fro(^
friec^t, xoxx fvied)en k. I | I crept.
121. IRicd^cn to smell.
3^ riedje, bu ned}ft, er i ried)e. I id) rod^
ried^t, Xoxx rie(^en 2C. | I I smelled.
122. 8d)icgcn to shoot, to fire, to kill
3d)fd)ieJ3e, bufc^ie^eft, er! fdnejse. id) fd}o§ I
fd)ie6t, tt)ir fd)icJ3eu :c.| ' I shot. |
Thus: 6e[d;ie'0eii to bombard; erid;teJ3en to shoot (t
123. atlt).
NB. The simple verb fc^allcn f'^o sowwrZ; is regular ; in poetry
however the Imp. fc^oH is met with.
137. gcd^tCtt to fence, to fight.
3d) fed)te, bu fed^teft, ev i ted)te. I id) fod)t I gefoc^ten
fid)t (or fec^tet) 2C. | 11 fought. | fought.
138. %U^itn to twist, to plait.
3d) fled)te, l)u fled)teft, ev I fled)te. 1 id) {lod)t. I ijeflodjten.
flid)t, ivir fled)teii :c. I I I
139. i^drCtt to ferment.
3d) gcire, bu gcirft, er I gave. I id) gov (also I gegoven.
gdvt, mx gaven 2C. | I reg. gavte). I
140. ©ItmmCtt to burn faintly, to glimmer.
3c!^ glimme, bu glimmft, 1 gtimme. I — glomm. |geg(ommen.
ev gtimmt, fie glimuieu. ! I I
140a. iStlimnicn to climb; Imp. !Iomm; Part, geflcmmen.
141. ^cBcn to lift, to raise.
3d)t)ebc, but)ebft, evl^ebtJ ^ebe. I id) t)ob I lif- | gel)cben
tciv ^eben K. I I ted, raised. I raised.
Thus: fluf'ljebctt to lift up, hold up, to pick up; er^cbcn to
raise, to elevate.
Irreg. verbs. 8rd Conj. 2nd class.
189
Indicative Present.
Imperative.
Imperfect.
Past Part.
142. Sitgen to lie, to tell a lie.
•3d) luge, tu liigft, er
liigt, xoxx liigen 2C.
(iige. i^ log I told
a lie.
gelogeu
liec.
143
Snellen to milk.
Sc^ melfe, bu tttedft, er
uielft, XQVC nielfen 2C.
melfe. id) mo If and
melfte.
gemolfen
milked.
144.
Saugctt*) to suck.
•3(^ f^uge, bu faugft, er
faugt, ft>ir faugen 2C.
fauge.
id) fog (or
id) faugte).
gefogen (or
gefaugt).
NB. ©augen to suckle, is regular.
145. ©J^CrCtt to shear.
5i^ fc^ere, "Du fc^erft, er fd)ere. 1 id) fd)Dr. I gefc^oreu.
fd)ert, toir fc^eren 2C. I I
146. Srf)mcl5Ctt to smelt, to melt.
Sc^fd)mel5e, 'Dufd)mel5eftJ fd)mel5e i id) fd^molj. i gefi^motjen.
erfd)nul5t, n)irfd)mel5en.! or fd)mi(5. | ' |
NB. The neuter verb ffdimctjeu (to melt) is conjugated in the
same manner, but with the auxiliary [eiix.
147. t ©d^ilJcKcit to swell.
^^ f^iretle, "Du fd)yeillft,| fd)tuelle. I id) fc^trjoH. I gefcbt^oUen.
er fd)ti3iUt, hjirfd)tt)enen.| I I
148. ©rJ^tUorCtt to swear an oath.
Sd) fd)ii3ore, bu fd)ii>I)rft, I f^iDore. lid) fd)tt>Dr (or I gefc^tijoren.
er fc^mort, ti}irfd)tr)i3ren. I I id) fd)tijur). I
Thus: Bcfc^too'ren 1) to confirm by an oath, 2) to conjure,
entreat.
149. SSciCtt to weave.
^6) ti^ebe, bu ti^eBft, er I tceBe. I i^ tcoB. i geiuoben.
ii3eBt, it>ir t^eben 2C. I I |
The following verbs of this conjugation seldom occur:
150. ©rlitrcn (erfiefen) to elect, choose. Imp. ic^ erf or. Paj-t.
erf or en.
151. $f(egett to treat (with).**) 7mj9. id) vflog. Par^f. gcpflogen.
Ex.: Untcr^itbtnngen ^flegen, to negotiate (with).
NB. ^flegen is regular, when it signifies to nurse., and also
in the meaning of gett)ol)nt fein to he accustomed.
*) ©aitgeit (to suck) is sometimes used as a regular verb.
**) also to foster, entertain (ex.: friendship, ber greimbi'd)aft
^^flegeit (gen.)), to indulge in (ex.: in a habit, eitier ©etDobn^eit :ppe=
gen, in sleep, be§ ©c^lafcS :ppege:x jc).
190 Lesson 28.
152. Clttcttctt to spring forth. Imp. qitoK. Part, gcquoflen.
153. Saufen*) to drink, lap like brutes. Imp. id) foff. Part.
gefoffen.
154. @d)ttaubcn to snort. Imp. \6) fd)nob. Part, gefdjnoben.
Words.
!J)er ^otb the basket. fcer ^onig honey.
t>et ©tein the stone. taS ^aterlaiitj the country.
ber %^^ the death. fca^ Sid)t the light, candle.
t)a^ ^euer fire, fveubig joyfully. fcaS 23ein the leg, limb.
t)te ^D^agt) the maid- servant. fd)tt3er heavy.
ba^ §eer or bie 3lrmee the army, nie never.
t)ie Sfd)e (sm^-) the ashes. tjevbicuen to deserve.
t>a§ %\x6) the cloth. tapfer bravely.
Reading Exercise. 72.
2Ba3 BetDog ben ?0kler, "Die ©tabt ju cerlaffen? 5(^_ toeig
md)t, tua§ t^n (tjaju) Betijogen l)at. !Da§ i^euer ift CYlcfd)en.
i)ie ^If^euer (the Athenians) l^aben in ber Sd}lad}t bei 9Jtaratl)on
tavfev gefodUen. 3)ie[er ^orS ift [c^Iedjt gefloc^ten. ft'cuneu
©te biefeu ©teiii ^eben? 3;c^ '\^ahz \\)\\ fd^cu aufgel^obeu.
3fd) finbe it)n Tud)t fo fd)tt3er. i)er ^imbe l^at gelogen. 25>ann
tuerben 3t)ve (£d)afe gefd)Dren ti^crteii? ^\\\ iiad)ften (next) SJicnat.
®ev ®d)nee ift auf ben S3ergcn gefd)mcl5eii. S^crigc^ (last)
^ai)x fd)mol5 er im W^mmt 3u(i. ^ie imigen Seute jcgen
(marched) fvcubig in bie (Sc^(ad)t; fte fd}\Doren, ju fiegeu (to
conquer) obev ju fterben.
Jtufgaee. 72a.
The death of my father induced me to leave my country.
The light of the sun will never become extinct (135). My
candle was extinct. Is the fire out (extinct) ? Our sheep
have been shorn twice this year. Has the maid-servant milked
the cow? The French army fought {sine/.) very bravely; not
one soldier fled. The fire glimmered long under the ashes.
The little bee sucked the honey from (au^) the flowers. He
who shas lonce (cinmal) slied, does not deserve to be trusted
(bag man il)m glaubc). My leg is swollen. Tliat cloth is very
well woven.
Reading-lesson,
^ic ©rftnbung bcS ®(afc8. DiscoTory of glass.
(Shuge pt)LMU5ifAei <3d)iffci' lanbctcn clnft an bcr ^^cvbfiifle^
3lfvifa^, tt}o ba^ i^(ii6d)cn 33ehK^ fid) in ba« 2.>t'eev ergiegta.
1) Phenician sailors. 2) the north coast. 3) throws or empties itself.
*) (Baujcn is applied only to animals.
Irreg. verbs. 4th Conj.
191
(Sine todte (Sanbpd)c4 Uig (12) toor tl)ren ?Iugen. ©ie fud^teii
©teine, itm il)re feffel^ mi t) ^^f aim en iiber beufelben auf^ufteUen ;
obex fie f ant) en !eine. ©ie tDaren baljer^ genctigt', aug i!^rem
©c^iffe einige ©alpe'tcvfteines, bie fie aU 2at)ung (cargo) mit fid)
brad)ten, jn ^olen^. ©ie mad)ten ein i^euer [an], !od)ten t^re
©peifeni<> unb gen off en (118) bann x^x einfac^e§ Wa^U^. 5l6ev
c SBunber! %U fie t'^ve (Salpeterfteine hjicber ^n tf;rem (Sd)iffe
juviidtvagen tooUteni^, f ant) en fie, bag biefelBen Don ber ©etr^alti^
beg tyeuerg gefd^moljen tuaren unb fid) mit ber 2lfd)e unb bent
gtitfjenben (glowing) @anb toermifd}t i-* !^atten. 5tt§ bie fliiffigei*
SJc'affe fait geti^orben voax, lag auf bem S^oben (ground) eine fjeUe,
burd)fid)ttgei6 gj^affe: — ba§ tear @tag.
urben bie ^^^ontjter bie (Srfinberi' biefe^ tDertboUenis
®egenftanbe§i'J, ber un^ bie groj^ten i)ienfte leiftet (renders).
4) a vast plain of sand. 5) kettles and pans. 6) therefore.
7) obliged. 8) saltpeter-stones. 9) to fetch. 10) food, provisions.
11) plain meal, dinner. 12) were going. 13) power, heat. 14] mixed
themselves. 15) liquid. 16] transparent matter. 17] discoverers.
18) valuable. 19) material, object, article.
Twenty-ninth Lesson,
Fourth Conjngatio n.^)
Imperfect with it.
This conjugation consists only of nine verbs having
a for their radical vowel. Here the distinguishing vowel
in the Imperfect is it; the Fast participle retains the
radical vowel a of the Infinitive. In the second and third
person of the Indicative Present most of them change
their a into a.
Indicative Present.
Imperative.
Imperfect.
u
Past Part.
a
155
25a(fcn to bake.
5fc^Bacfe,buBa#(bac!ft),
Bade.
i(^ Btt!
gebrtden
erbodt (Bacft) , njirBaden,
or reg.
baked.
tl)r Bacfet, fie baden.
t(^ Badte.
156. fga^rcn to drive or to go in a carriage or boat.
3fc^ fatjre, bnfd^rft, eri fat)re. I id) fnt)r I I gefaBten
fd^rt, h)ir fa^ren 2C. I I drove, went. I driven.
NB. This verb has also an active meaning : to lead the horses ;
it then takes ^aBen in the comp. tenses.
Thus: -^a^6'fa^ren or ff^pajteren \a[)xt\x to take a drive; +aB'»
fal^reit to start, to set out; erfa^ren to learn. P. p. crfa^rcn.
*) Called also bie U-^ottiugation.
192 Lesson 29.
Indicative Present.
Imiierative.
Imperfect. I Past Part.
u a
157. G)ral6cn to dig.
3^ ^vaBe, t)u gvabfl, er I grabe. I 3c^ gtub i gegrabcn
grdbt, U)iv gvaben 2C. I I I dug. | dug.
Thus : Bcgra'bcu to bury. Imp. \^ BcgruB. P.^. BegroBcn buried.
158. SabCtt to load (a gun).
Iat)e.
id) lut)
I loaded.
gelaben*)
loaded.
3fd)Iabe,t)uIabeft(Iat)ft),
er tatiet (Iat)t), tuir la*
ben K.
Thus: Beta'ben to load; ein'tabctt to invite (P.;?. citt'gclo'ben).
159. ©(^affctt and crfr^offctt to create, make.
5c^ fd)affe, t)u [d)aftft, eii fdjaffe. i id) fd)uf (or |gef*a[fen(or
fd)afft, iDir fd)Qffeu 2c. I j evfdjuf). I eifcibaffen).
NB. ©d^afirn to work, which is only used in South-Germany,
and its compounds are regular, as: an'fc^affen and bcfcliaffcil
to get; toeri'd;affen to procure; ab'fc^affeu to abrogate.
160. @rf)(rtgcn to beat, to strike.
3;d) fd)Iage, bu fAIcigft, erl fdjloge. I id) fc^ lug I ge[d)iagen
fd)ldgt, ti3ivfd)lagcn 2C.| | I struck. I beaten.
Thus: ob'lc^la^en 1) to knock off, 2) to refuse; crft^Ia'gctt to
slay, Imp. erfrf|tug; auS'fcblagen to decline; geifc^la'aen to
knock to pieces.
161. ^ragen to carry, to wear, to take.
3f(^ tragc, bu tvagft, ev I tvage. I id) ttug I I getragen
tragt, tOXX trageu K. \ | wore, carried. I carried.
Thus: ertta'gen to endure, to bear; fid^i bctra'gcn to behave ; feci'*
tragcn to contribute ; ab'tragen to clear the table, to wear out;
cintragen to note, give a certain rent.
162. iSSo^fen to grow, wax.
3d) n)ad)fe, bu ttjaAft, erl loac^fe. i x6) ^rud)5 I geti^ad)fen
iDad^ft, tijir tuad)fen 2C. I | I grew. | grown.
163. SBafdjen to wash.
3fdbrt)afd)e, but\3afd)[t, erl toafd^e. I i^ tuufd) I geirafd)en
ttjafd)t, unr tuafdjeu 2C. | | I washed. | washed.
Thus: au6'tDa[c{;cn to wash out
*) Oclobcn means laden as well as loaded.
Lesson 29. 193
Words.
®er S3ac!cr the baker. 'Da§2;afd)entUd^ the handkerchief.
"Da§ ®ampf6oDt the steamboat, tier 9Jc'u[ifIe'£)rcr the music-master.
"Die (Sifenba!£)n the railroad. ^Da^ 9}?ittagefjen dinner.
ter ^itd)§ the fox. ter £rleg§mtnifter the minister
eine §cl)Ie a den, cave. of war.
t)er !J^eteugtaber the gravedigger, baS ©efic^t the face.
sexton. fca? ©prid^tDort the proverb.
iDaS ®rab the grave. tjie (Sic^e the oak. lief deep.
t)er ^utfd)er the coachman. t)ie ^ano'iie the gun, cannon.
ter DmniBuS the omnibus. pvcic^ttg elegant,
ter 2Bagen the carriage, coach, unartig naughty.
t)er barren the cart. fd^mul^ig dirty.
ta^ 2dA} the hole. langfam slow, slowly.
t)te 2Bunt)e the wound. lin|(^ult)lg guiltless, innocent.
jet)en Xa^ adv. every day. pflanjen to plant.
Reading-Exercise. 73.
1. §eute IiaBen tuir tudjen geBaden. SBavum Bad t (Barft)
3f)r 9^ad)bar fein 33rot raeljr? 2BetI er fein Tle^ i)at. ®te iiad)fte
^cdjs. iDivt) er imeber Baden. ®er f oiiig fd^Tt mtt fed}§ -Pfer*
t)en. 2Scf)tn' fa^^ren ©le? 3^ fatjxe nad) ^oln. ©eftern f u^t
meiu ^-reunb t)al^tn (there). -Sft er mtt (by) tiem ©aiiipfBcot
gefaljren (gone)? S^ein, mit (by) ter @ifenBal)n. SDer guc^S
grdbt fid) cine §i3^Ie. i)er ^JiotengrdBer :^at ein ®rab gegra*
Ben. (gin (Sfel tcurfee mit melen ©dden Be lab en; aBer ba (as)
er bie Saft (load) ntd)t tragen !onnte, iDurbe fie auf einen 2Bagen
gelegt (put).
2. S;ragen ©ie biefe ^(eiber noc^? S^ein, fie finb aBgetragen.
Barum fd)tagt bie Tlnttex ba§ finb? 2BetI e3 fo unartig tft;
e§ I)at fid) ni(^t gett)afd)en. $tlatu§ tcnfd) fetne §dnbe unb fprad^ :
,.3d) Bin unfd)ulbig an bem 33(ute biefeS @ered)ten (just man)".
SDie jl^eepflanje n3dd)ft in (51)ina. ^^rii^er (formerly) iimcBS ber
StaBa! nid)t in ®eutfd)Ianb ; aBer je^t icirb mel ^aBaf ^epflanjt.
5Diefer Siingting^ft \ci)x gen3ad)fen, feit (since) icB il)n nid)t me^r
(last) gefe^en :^aBe. -Sm Slnfang fd)nf ©ott §immel unb (grbe.
i)ie aBelt ift Don ®ott au§ nl(^tg gefd)affen iijorben.
1. The baker has baked no bread to-day; he does not
bake every day. The coachman drives too fast (ju f(^nell). We
went (drove) (156) in an omnibus. The prince drove in an
elegant carriage with four horses. The fox digs a hole in the
ground (33oben, m.). The savages (SBilben) dug a deep hole.
A poor child was buried in the snow. Are you loading the
gun? It is already loaded. The cart is too heavily laden.
The minister of war has invited all [the] officers to (jum)
dinner. In the beginning 2 God 1 created heaven and earth.
OTTO, German Conv>Grammar. 13
194
Lesson 29.
2. Why do you beat the child? I beat it, because it
•J was 1 naughty. (The) dogs are often beaten. Cain (^aln)
slew (160) his brother Abel. Our music-master 2 always 1 wears
a grey hat. Two soldiers canied the officer out of the battle
and washed his wound. »One hand washes the othercf, says a
German proverb. Henry, wash your face, you are dirty. Are
my handkerchiefs washed? No, Sir, not yet, they will be
washed to-morrow. The oak grows very slowly. These vio-
lets have grown in my garden.
Converaation.
[Comprising the four Conjugations.)
^a^ effen ®ie t)a?
2Ber I)at e§ 3I)neu gegeBen?
©abeu (£ie nicinem Sebienten
tie Sl'leiDerbiirfte (brush) ?
§aben ®ie I)cute fd)on tie ^^u
tuiig (news-paper) gelefeu?
©iebt e§ (is there) cttcag 9^eue^? M) IjaBe nit^tS 9^eue3 barin ge
fuuteu.
M) ef|e f^(eifd) itnt 33vot; e« Ift
mein ^vii'^ftiicf.
■3d} l^abe e3 (niiv) ge!auft.
-3a, id) Q^Qih fie i^m cor ( — ago)
einer (^tunte.
3a, i(^ ]^a6c [ie gelefcn.
2Ber ift 311m ^aUe eiutjetabeu?
^enneu &ie einicje t>on i^neu?
■3ft 3t)r 53ater t?Du feinev lancjcu
^rauH)eit iienefen (8) '
3>tele jun^e §erreit unb ^amen.
3a, td)feiuietiemci[lent)oni^neiu
©Dtt f ei 3)anf ! er ift ganj (quite)
genefeu.
23o ift ter 2Birt (landlord) ? id) (Sr ift aui^cjegancjen ; aber ev tuirt>
mu6 it)ni et^ua^ f^tgeu,
ba(b tuieter ^uriicffommen.
3Bag ift gefd)et}en, baf^ ba§ 35ol! Sin 3)iaurer (bricklayer) ift com
fo jufammeu (together) Iduft? ^Oii:it gefallen.
§at cv fid) cerle^5t (hurt)? 3a, a ^t ein 33ein i3e6rc(^en.
^^er l)at 3l}ueu befcl)leu, lueine 9^iemanb bcfaljl e^mir; ic^ truj
©ticfel 511m 8d)ul)mad)cr ju fie baljin, iveilfieseivifjeufmb.
tragcii?
§at man 3^vcn SUnij n)iet)er (Sv lag aufbcmScben, Winter bem
gefunben? 2Bo lag er?
23er fanb il^n?
§a6cn ©ie 3I;Te Ut)v ntd)t me'^r?
^i^DCon fvvid)t bicfer 9}?ann?
§at ber ^rteg fd)Dn begonnen?
Sift bit cencnnbet? 'ipat je*
manb bit etlcaS (any harm)
get()an ?
©tecft bev <2ta(^e( (the sting)
nod) bavin?
2Ba« tl)ut biefcr 3J?ann ^ier?
§at er fd)on einige gefangen?
(Sdn-anfe (press) toerborgen(l8) ,
®ie 9J^agb fanb it)n, al^ fie ba^
3immer pu^^te (cleaned),
^ein, fie ift miv geftc^Ienirovben.
Sr fpvid}t com Jtiioge.
^DJein, abev ev toivb balb beginnen.
(Sine33iene ^at mid) in bie:ii3aniie
(cheek) geftod)en unb je^t ifl
bicfe gefd)\i>oUeu.
9'?ein, man t)at i^n glcic^ iim-
mediately) l)evau^gejogcn ( 1 27) ,
(Sr fangt 35ogcl.
3d) glaube, ev t)at evfl (only)
icenigc gefangen.
Irregular verbs. 195
Q\i t)er 3)ieb ergriffen (caught) Qa. man evgrtff i^n, aU ex aihi
iTjoxben? t)em §aufe f(i)Ud).
SSer ^at t)tefe ^eber gefAmtteu? -^d) felbft ^abe fie oefc^nltten.
3n wag ftnb (Ste gefa^ren? 3d) Tut)v in einem SSagen.
2Sann fjat ©ott t)ie SSelt ev= 3)ie^i6ct fagt: „3fm2lutangfc^uf
fdjaffen? @ott §tntmel uut) Srbe."
Savum finb bie Sliiffe unt) 33dd)e Sell i^er ^c^nee auf ben ^Sergen
(brooks) [o angefc^tDollen? gefd)mDl5en (146) Ift.
2Ber §at ten 33i-ief auf bie 3)er ^ebiente trug i^n i^or einer
$oft getragen*^ l^alben (Stunbe ba^tn (there).
2Ba§ tf)at ber £nabe am 33run= (5r tuufd) feine §anbe unb Iran!
nen (spring)? 2Baffer.
2Bo ^abcn ©ie biefe fc^one^llie ©te ift in meinem @arten ge*
gefunben? tt?ad)fen.
253arum '^aBcn @ie bag 2Kaf(er S§ voax nid)t rein (clean). 3c^
auggegoffen (119)? begog -Of^re SUimen baniit.
§atten '©ie fc^bneg SSetter ju 3)ie'®onnefc^ien I)en-li(^, a(g trit
(for) O^rem ©^^a^iergang auf anfingen (began) , ben 33erg ju
ben „llonigftuf)l"? erfteigen; aber balb iain ein
©emitter (a thunder-storm),
unbttjirtijarengejtuungen, me-*
ber t>erab (down) ^u ge^en.
Additional Eeniarks to the irregular verbs.
As the learner has already observed, some of the irre-
gular verbs also change their radical consonants either in the
Present, Imperfect or Participle. We subjoin here those little
irregularities :
1) In !the present iense:
3c^ ne^me, bu nimmft, er tiimmt (double m).
ic^ fc^elte, er [c^ilt j
ic^ l;alte, er t;alt [. instead of fc^eltet, f)altct, xatct :c.
ic^ rate, er rat | (lose the termination t).
idj geltc, er gilt '
2) There is further an old form of the third person sin-
gular of some verbs, with the diphthong CU, which still occurs
in poetry, viz.:
(Sr jleugt, freu^t, bcut, fleujjt, geu^t for fltegt (flies),
h'ted;t (crawls), bietet (offers), fltegt (flows), gie^t (pours).
3) In the Imperfect tense:
3c^ bteb, geljauen from b^uen (takes a final b).*)
U; traf getroffett from treffen 1 ^ ^ .^ ^^^ j^^^^
td) jcbuf, gefd;affen from fd;affen J ' ^ ^
icb if am, gebmmen from fommen (loses one m in the Imp.).
*) This fi is hardened out of c = u becoming a consonant.
13*
196
Lesson 29.
4) In the Imperfect and Farticiple :
3c^ I)at, gebeten from bitten (loses one t).
ic^ faf^ gefejfen from fi^en (changes t3 into ff).
id; ftoub g eft on ben from fte^en (changes 1^ into nb;.
id; litt, gelitten from leiben \ (change b into
ic^ fd;nttt, gefc^nitten from fd^neiben | double t,.
ic^ )^\\\\, gepfiifen from ^feifen ]
id; fd;Ut|, gejc^litien from fc^leifen \ (double their f).
ic^ griff, gegriffen from greifcn J
''^^ l^^> QCilogen from jie^en (changes ^ into g).
ic^fott, gcfotten from ficben (changes b into double t.
5) There exist some older forms of the Subjunctive mood
of the Imperfect, which still occur now and then, viz.:
3;c^ befij^ie instead of befa^te; toerbiirge for berbargc.
id; ftiinbe for ic^ ftanbe; tc^ ftiirbe for ic^ ftarbe.
ic^ berbiirbe for berbarbe, ic^ gctDonne for getocinnc.
6) The regular verb frag en, to ask , has for the Imperfect
tense, besides the regular form id) fragte, an old form id;
frug; Subj. id; friige; thus also: — f^allen resound: fd;oH
and fd;uauben snort: fd;nob.
7) Some regular verbs have a second participle of the ancient
form which is commonly used as an adjective. Such are:
33ertt)orren confused, from tcitDirren (reg. v.) to confuse.
gef^mlten split, - jv^iten (reg. v.) to split.
gefaijen salt, salted - fotjcn (reg. v.) to salt.
gemal;ten ground - ma^len (reg. v.) to grind.
beriDogen dared - fi(f> bertregen to dare (comp. irr. v. 133).
gcroc^en avenged - rac^en (reg. v.) to revenge.
An alphabetical list of all the irregular verbs.
NB. Simple verbs which are not found in this list, are to be
considered regular. Compound verbs must be sought for
under their primitives.
Injinitive.
JBaden to bake
* bebiirjen -) to need, like biirfen
Fres. id; bebarf
bcfe^ten to order, to command
bcfleifjen, fi(^, to apply one's self beflifj
be(jinncn to begin
beijjen to bite
betlemmen to press
bcrgcn to hide, to conceal
Imperfect.
Fart Fast.
Nr.
InX (bacfte)
gebocfeu
155»)
bcburjtc
bcburft
—
befabl
bcfo^Icn
17
kfliij
bcfltffcn
62
bcqann
begonncn
gcbiffcn
36
61
bellomm
beflomnicn
134
barg
geborgen
18
1) These figures indicate the number of each of the irregular
verbs from p. 163 to 192.
2) The verbs marked * are partly irregular (see p. 126, § 6),
verbs marked with f are neuter and take fein as auxiliary (see
p. 104 *).
Irregular verbs.
197
Inji7iitive.
Imperfect.
Part. Past.
Nr.
•i-6erften to burst, to crack
barft
geborften
19
befiniten, [i(^, to meditate
be[ann
befcnnen
39
be[i1,>en to possess
be[at3
be]e[fen
13
fcetriigeit to cheat, to deceive
betrcg
betrogcn
113
beft)egcn to induce
betDcg
betuogen
133
biegeu to bend
bog
gebcgen
111
Bieten to offer
bot
geboten
112
binbeit to bind, to tie
banb
gebunbcn
43
bitten to beg, to request
bat
gebeten
11
blafen to blow
blte3
geblafen
97
f bleifcen to stay, to remain
IViih
geblieben
80
braten to roast
brict
gebraten
98
bred) en to break
brac^
gebroc^en
20
♦brennen^) to bum
brannte
gebrannt
—
*bringen to bring
brac^tc
gebrac^t
—
*2)enfen to think
bac^te
gebac^t
—
bingen to hire (a servant)
(bingte)
gebungen
58
brefc^cn to thrash
braid;
gebrcf^en
21
•J-bringen to press forward, to urge
brang
gebrungen
47
©mvfangen to receive
em^fing
cmpfal?!
em^fangen
100
cmpfet)len to recommend
emi)to(;len
16
cmpfinben to feel
cmi^fanb
emijunben
44
•j-cntrinnen to escape
entrann
enttonnen
38
ierbleic^en to turn pale
ctbltc^
erblic^en
63
crfiiien to choose
erfor
erforen
150
ierli)]d;en to become extinct
erIo[(^
erlofc^en
135
*crfc^alten to resound
crfd)Dtl (erfc^attte
) er[d;ot[cn
136
ferfc^rerfen to become frightened
er]d;raf
erfd^rocfen
22
crtvagen to consider
erttjog
ermogen
126
cffen to eat
a&
gegeffen
2
4-?5aI)ren to drive
fu^r
gefa^ren
156
itatten to fall
ftel
gefaEen
99
fangen to catch
fieng
gefangcn
100
fec^tcn to fight
foc^t
gefoc^ten
137
finben to find
tanb
gefunben
44
fled^ten to twist
Poc^t
geftoc^tcn
138
•{•ftiegcn to fly
ftog
geflogen
114
•j-flie^en to flee
m
gefto^en
115
-i-fltej3cn to flow
m
gefloffcn
116
freffcn to eat = to devour
fraB
gefreffen
3
frteren to freeze
fror
gefroren
117
©ciren to ferment
got (gartc)
gcgoren
139
gebaren to bring forth
gcbar
geboren
24
gcben to give
gob
gegeben
I
gcbietcn to order, to command
gcbot
geboten
113
•fgebei^en to thrive
gcbie^
gebiet)en
86
gcfallen to please
gefiel
gefatten
99
tge^en to go
gieng
gcgangen
108
fgelingen to succeed
gelang
gclungcn
48
gclten to be worth
gait
gegolten
23
1) See the foot-note 2) p. 196.
198
Irregular verbs.
Infinitive. Imperfect.
fgcncfen to recover gciiafe
geutefKtt to enjoy geno§
f gcrateu to fall or get into geriet
•i-gefd;ef)en to happen gcfci^al^
gclinnncti to win, to gain gctronu
giejjcn to pour go^
gleid^en to resemble g(ic^
fgteiten to glide, slide, slip glitt
•rglimmeii to burn faintly glomm
graBen to dig grub
greifen to gripe, to grasp griff
^alten to hold ^tclt
fl^aiigen to hang M^ng
l^aucn to hew ^leB
l^ebcn to lift l^o6
l^eifjcn to be called, to bid Bicfi
l^clfen to help l^alf
*^ennen to know tannic
fflimmcn to climb ftomm
Htngen to tingle, to sound tlang
fneifen to pinch fniff
!reiic^cn to scream trlic^
•J-fommen to come fain
•j-frtec^en to crawl, to creep !rocl^
fiaben to load lub
taffcn to let, to leave Uc§
flanfcn to run Uef
leiben to suffer litt
Ici^cn to lend Ite^
Icfcn to read lad
f ticgcn to lie lag
liigcn to tell a lie log
SKeiben to shun, to avoid mieb
mctfen to milk molf (mctftc)
titcffen to measure ma§
mtjjfattcn to displease nugfiei
9'Jc^mcn to take nabm
*nenncn to call nannte
^feifcn to whistle ^fiff
^ftegcn to entertain, treat (with) i^flog
iprcifcn to praise, to extol inic3
0uetlcn to spring forth quott
tRotctt to advise rict
rcibcn to rub ticb
rcifjen to rend, to tear ri§
fvcttcn to ride (on horseback) ritt
*rcnncn to run, to race tannic
ticd^cn to smell rod^i
tingcn to wrestle, to wring rang
rinnen to leak, to flow rann
rufcn to call rUf
Part. Past.
Nr.
gcncfcn
8
gcnoifcn
118
g era ten
104
gcfc^cbcn
9
gett»onnen
37
gegoffen
119
fleglic^en
65
geglitten
66
geglommcn
140
gcgrabcn
157
gcgriffen
04
gcbaltcn
101
gc^angcn
102
ge^anen
107
gcbobcn
141
gebciBcn
96
gctjolfcn
25
gcfannt
—
gctlommen
140a
gcflun^^cn
49
gcfuiffen
67
gcfriid^cn
88
gcfcmmen
42
gctroc^cn
120
gctaben
158
getafjcn
103
gclaufcn
106
gelillcn
r.8
gelicben
87
gclcfen
5
gclcgcn
12
gclogcn
142
gemiobcn
84
gem cl fen
143
genieffcn
4
miijfattcit
99
genommen
26
gcnonnl
—
gepfiffen
69
gcpflogeu
151
gcvricfcn
91
gequollen
152
geraten
104
gcricbcn
81
gcriffen
70
gcr.ltcn
71
gcronnt
—
gcrodjcn
121
gcrungcH
50
goronnen
38
gcrujcn
110
Irresiular verbs.
199
Infinitive. Imperfect. Part. Past. Nr.
©aufen to drink (of animals) fo^ gcfoffeu 153
faugen to suck (also regular; fog gcfogen 144
fd^affen to create fdjuf gefd^affeit J 59
jc^eiben to separate fd;ieb gefd^iebeti 85
jc^etiten to seem, to shine fd;teu gefdjtenen 93
f^dten to scold, to chide [cjialt gejc^olten 27
jcfieren to shear fc^or gejd;oreu 145
fd;icBen to shove, to push gently \&io'h gejc^ofcen 128
jdjic^en to shoot [d;oJ3 gefc^offen 122
fdjinben to flay — (I'c^anb: gefd^uiTben 59
fc^tafen to sleep fc^ltef gcid)tafen 105
jc^Iagen to beat, to strike [d)i"g gc[d;!ageiT 160
•r[d;lcic()en to sneak, to steal into ]6.)\\6:) gejd^lid^cn 73
|d}ieifen to sharpen, to grind jdiliff geid)Uffeit 72
fd}tic^en to lock, to close jd)(o§ gefdjleffeu 123
jd;tmgen to wind, to twist fd)lang gefd;Iungcn 51
fc^mctlKit to fling, smite t^;nui3 gef^mi[fett 75
fd;nietjcit to melt, to smelt fcftmolj gefc^motsett 146
fc()iTau6cn to breathe, to snort fd;nob gefd)!!©^^: 154
fd)neiben to cut [d;nitt gcjc^nittcn 76
fc^retScn to write fc^rtefe gef^rtebcn 82
fd)reien to scream, to cry \&ixit gcfd^rieen 88
•]-fd;reiten to stride, to step id;rttt gcfd^rittett 77
|c()iT3eigen to be silent fc^tt^teg gc[d?n)iegen 94
jc^tcetim to swell [c^tt)ott ge)(f)tt)ctten 147
fl'ditoimmen to swim id;JDamm gcfd;tt>ommcii 41
-rfc^n^inbeit to vanish |d}li?anb ge|c^tt>itnbcti 45
fc()txnngen to swing, to brandish jd;tt)attg gcfd^wungeit 52
{c^ttti5ren to swear fd;ft>or gefdjrooren 148
fel^eu to see fa^ gefc^en 6
*[enben to send [onbtc gefanbt —
fieben to boil fott ge[otten 129
fiitgen to sing fang gefungen 53
Tfinfeit to sink fanf gefunfen 55
finnen to meditate jattn gefontten 39
-hftjjen to sit fop gefcfjen 13
fpetett to spit fpie gefipteeit 89
fi)tnnen to spin fi?anii gefijotinett 40
fj)red)cn to speak fptad^ gef^rod^en 28
fprieficn to sprout fjprofi gcjiproffcn 130
if^ringett to spring fptaitg gcflprungott 54
ftec^en to sting ftad; gcftod;en 29
*ftccfeit to stick ftaf geftcdt 14
•hftcl^en to stand ftattb gcftanbcn 15
fte^Icn to steal [ta^I gcftot)lcit 30
iftctgcn to mount ftieg gefttcgcn 95
Tfterbcn to die ftarb gcftorbcti 31
ifttefeeit to fly off ftoB geftoBett 131
ftinfen to stink ftan! gcftunfen 60
fio§cn to push hard ftic§ geftoBen 109
ftreidjen to rub ftiii geftrtc^eit 74
ftreiteit to quarrel ftritt geftrittcn 78
200 Lesson 30.
Infinitive.
Imperfect.
Part Past.
Nr.
%\)\\xi to do
t^at
gctljan
16
tragen to carry, to wear
trug
getragcn
IGl
treffen to hit, to meet
hat
getroffcu
35
treiben to drive
tric6
getrictcu
83
ftreteu to tread
trat
gctretcii
7
triefen to drop, drip
troff
gctricft
132
trin!en to drink
tranf
gctrunfen
5ti
triigcn to deceive
(ttog)
(getrogen)
113
JBrtbergcit to hide, conceal
tocrtarg
toerborgcu
17
tcrticteu to forbid
t>er6ot
toerboteii
112
tocrberben to spoil, to ruin
to er barb
toerbort^cii
32
terbrieBeit to vex
tocrbroO
toerbroficu
124
toergeffeit to forget
tocrgoB
tocrgcffcu
10
toerlieren to lose
toevlov
toerlorcn
125
*tocrmogen {Fres. ic^ tcrmag)
ic^ tocvmod^tc
tocrmo(^t
to be able
ftoerf^tciltbcit to disappear
tocr[(^tvanb
toerf(i^n)iinbcn
45
terjei^en to pardon
toerjie^
tocFjic^cn
yo
9Bad?fen to grow
h)u^3
gctcac^icn
162
tDcigen to weigh
toog
gclrogeii
12G
tuajd^eu to wash
»ufc^
gcitoaidjeit
163
t»eten to weave
ttoob
gca^oten
149
f tueic^cn to yield
ttotC^
gett)id;eu
70
tt?ei[en to show
tt)ie8
getricfen
92
*n)enben to turn
ttjanbtc
gewanbt
—
n)cr6en to sue
tuarb
geivorbcn
33
*njerbcn [aux. verb) to become
(tDarb) tDurbe
getrovbeu
—
ttjerfcn to throw
tcarf
gcnjorjcu
34
ttiegeii to weigh
toog
genjcgcu
126
tt)iuben to wind
»anb
gcnjimteu
46
*n)i[fen to know {Pres. td^ trci§)
tDU^tC
gettou^t
—
3ei^en to accuse
M
gcjtc^cn
90
jie^ett to draw, to pull
JL-g
gcjcgcn
127
Jtuingcn to force, to compel
jttoang
gcituungcn
57
TMrtietli Lesson.
INSEPARABLE VERBS.
(Untrennbare 3cittDorter.)
Most Gernican verbs allow of certain prefixes or pre-
positions to be placed before them. Unaccented particles
or prefixes assimilate themselves with the simple verb so
as to form one inseparable combination, such as:
beja^leu to pay; id^ fcejQ^Ie I pay; ic^ bqal^Ue I paid.
Inseparable verbs. 201
Verbs of this kind are called inseparable verbs. Their
particular character is as follows:
1) The prefixes remain attached to the verb through
its whole conjugation.
2) The prefixes are always unaccented.
3) They do not admit of the syllable ge in the Past
Participle, as: Beja^^tt' paid (not gebe^a^tt).
4) The sign of the infinitive, 5U, is put before the
combination, as in English: ju Beja^leu to pay.
Their conjugation depends on their being regular or
irregular. — There are eleven inseparable prefixes:
cnt, tjer, jer, |tntcr and itJiber.*)
1. Conjugation of a regular inseparable verb.
23cbc(fctt to cover.
Pi-esent.
■Sc^ Bebecfe I cover
t)U betiecfft thou coverest
er Betedt he covers
toix Bet>ecfen we cover
©te Beoeden you cover
fie Bet)ecfeu they cover.
Imperfect.
3id) bcbedte I covered
t)u Bcbecfteft 2c.
et 6et)e(!te 2c.
\xi\x Bebecften ic.
©te bebecften 2c.
fie bet?e(ften 2c.
Perfect.
3cf> '^Oi^^ Bcbcrft I have covered; t)U Ijaft bebedt 2C.
Fu tare . Conditional.
M) twerbe betiecfen I shall cover. | Sfd) tDihte bebecfeit.
Imperative. Part. past. P. pres.
S3ebe(fen ®ie cover. | (ebedft covered. | be'oecfent).
Infinitive: bebeden or 511 bebeden to cover.
*) When the four last prefixes serve to compound a noun or
an adjective, they are accented, as: ber 9JJi§'mut ill-humour;
miB'gunftig envious; tie 3>ottmac^t authority; tooafommcn perfect;
ber SSJi'bcrf^ruc^ contradiction; bie §in'terUft cunning, artifice.
202
Lesson 30.
Conjugation of an irregular inseparable.
Infinitive: SScrlaffcn to leave (a place).
Present.
Q&l toevtaffe I leave
DU terlaffeft thou leavest
er tjerlcijit he leaves
mx toerlafjeu we leave
<3ie tcrloffen you leave
fie toevlaffen they leave.
Imperfect.
3fd) ftcvHcB I left
t)U Cerlieileft thou leftest
cr t)evlicf5 he left
\Q\x toerde^eu we left
©ie cevliegen you left
fie ijerliegen they left.
Perfect.
3c^ ^abe uevlaffen I have left; bu l^afl cerlafjen 2C.
Future.
^6) iuevbe toevlaffen I shall leave; bu \xixx\i ijcvlaffeu :c.
Imperative.
iBcvIaffen ©ie leave etc. |
Such are:
Infinitive. Present.
be: bcIoVnen reg. to reward i6) bclol^nc
bel^aitcu ir. to keep = te^altc
cm^: cm^^fiuben ir. to feel = cinvfinbe
cmi^taugctt ir. to receive * cnii^jangc
cr: crbaiten ir. to receive = crl)attc
erfal;reit ir. to learn ^ cx\al}rt
cnt: -j-eittge^en ir. to escape -- futge^c
entfcrnen reg. remove - cittferuc
tjcr: toergcffen tV. to forget = tcrgcffc
toerUcrcn ir. to lose * teviicic
jcr: §er[toreit reg. to destroy = jerftijre
jcrrciilen ir. to tear up * scrrei^c
gc : gcI)orcl;cn (Dat.) reg. to obey -- gcl^or^c
gcjatteu (Dat.) ir. to please ■- gcjattc
tttt§: iniBfatlcu ir. to displease = iniBfaflc
nuOtrauc^en reg. to misuse = miilbvaud^c
t»0K: i)oll6ringcn to accomplish - tooflbringc
tooll^ieljcn ir. to execute = woll^icbe
^intcr: I;intcrIa[fe:T to leave behind » I>hitcila|'fc
I^iutcrgeb'eu tV. to deceive » bintcrgc'jc
toibcr: tr»tbcr[te^'cn ir. to resist -- tviberftc^c
linbcvfpicc^e
Part. past.
tjcrlaffcn left.
Per/, tense.
id^ l^abe belo^nt.
bel^altcn.
cmpfunbcit.
cmipfangcn.
evl)altcn.
cifa^ren.
ic^ bin cntgangeit.
ic^ l^abc cntfeiitt.
\>crge[fcn.
tcrloren.
jcrftijrt.
gcrrifjcn.
gcborc^t.
« gcfaUen.
iiiipfaflcn.
luifUn-aiK^t.
\jonbradjt.
tcll'jogcn.
bintcviaffcn.
bintcrgangen.
jvibcrftanbcn.
tvibeij^roc^cn.
as a repetition,
tribcviVncc^en to contradict
NB. We advise every learner always to form,
also the Imperf. tense of these verbs
NB. The force of these particles can only be clearly defined
for a few of them, tvs.:
Cltt denotes removal or separation;
JCr means apart, asunder or to pieces ;
Ulift is the English tnis- or dis- ;
Inseparable verbs. 203
tiofl indicates accomplishment;
tOtbet means against^ with (in withstand).
Note. For the prefixes burc^, ^ber, unter and um, which are
sometimes separable and sometimes inseparable, see p. 213 — 216.
3. Derivative inseparables.
Some of the above particles are prefixed to nouns, to
form a verb of them, or to verbs already compounded with
other prefixes. The accent is then on the second syllable,
and such verbs are treated as inseparbles : i)
Injinitive. Pres. Fart. past.
fccab': beaB'fic^tigen reg. to intend \^ BcaBftd^ttgc BeaBfic^tlgt.
Bean': Bean'tragcn reg. to propose ic^ beantragc Beaittragt.
Bcatit': Beant'lwortcn reg. to ansAver tc^ Beanhuorte Bcatitmortet.
Beii ad;': Benac^'iid^tigenVe^. to inform id; Benad)rtd;ttgc Bctxad;ri(^ttgt.
Bc»un': Beun'nil;igeiT re/7. to disturb id; Beunrul;igc Beitnrul;igt.
Be = UT': Beur'teilcn to criticise, judge id; Beurtcite Beurteitt.
teraB': toerab'fc^eueii reg. to detest ic^ ijeraBfd;eue tocraBfc^eitt.
to ern ad;': i)ertTad;'Ia[[igeitre5r.to neglect ic^ toeriTac^taf[ige tocmad;Iaf[igt.
utilizer: nuB'toer[tet;en misunderstand id; mtf3toer[tel;e-j uuBtoerftanbeti.
toerun': toerun'reinigen reg. to soil id; toerunreinigc toeritnreiitigt.
toerur': toerur'iad;ett reg. to cause id; toerurfa^^c tocrur[ad;t.
„ „ toerur'teiien reg. to condemn id; toerurteile toerurteilt.
4. Some other inseparables.
The following verbs compounded with an adjective or
substantive are also inseparable, but having both the syllables
accented, they must take the prefix gc in the Participle past:
Infinitive.
grii'^'ftiidcn reg. to breakfast
ant'ttJOrtcTi r. to answer
ur'teilen r. to judge, criticise
Further:
Tresent.
1
\rfect tense.
id; frli^ftiide
id; l^aBi
z getrii^'ftadt.
'- atittuorte
»
geattt'mortet.
* urteile
«
geur'teilt.
. lieBfofc
= luftmanbte
■' argwi)t)ue
'- red;tfertigc
s miitmaJ3e
•- tretteifeic
- l;anb^aBe
s
gelieB'togt.
geUifttranbett.
geargiriitint.
gered;tfertigt.
gemutniaf?t.
getoetteifert.
gcI;anb^aBt.
S?ieB'!D[en to caress
luftwanbeln reg. to walk
arg'tDi5l;nen to suspect
red;t'fertigen to justify
ntut'ma[3en to presume, guess
tuett'cifern to emulate
l^anb't)aBcit to handle, maintain
lt)et'terleu(^ten to sheet-lighten e§ iretterteud;tct eg "^at gctretterlcu(!^tct.
tueif'fagen to prophesy ic^ n)ci)fage ic^ t;aBe gen^eiifagt.
1) SSetocr'fte^eit is separable: id; ftet)e Betoor, because Bctoov is a
word used by itself and therefore separable (see p. 209).
2 Here mi§ is followed by a second unaccented prefix; it
takes therefore the accent; mig'toerftel^cti, miB'toevftatiben, whilst all
the other inseparable prefixes do not, even in the same case.
204 Lesson 30.
Note. The two verbs triUfaV^e" (to cotnply with) q.t\A froI)»
lo'cfeu (to exult, to shout), may either take or omit Jhe prefix ge
in the participle, which may be irillfat^rt' or getiMtt'fa^rt; frol^Io'dt
or gefrol^'Iocft. The former is best, tttU and fro^ being unaccented.
Words.
^a8 $anb the land. i}er[pTed)en (ir. 28) to promise.
t)a8 ©liicf fortune. eutfav^eit rey, to abdicate^ resign.
t)va§ ?aftcr vice. 9uu[tia favorable, adv. — ly.
bie ©tiiDien pi. the studies. begihifttgeu reg. to favour.
t)er 5luf|et)cr the overseer. beraubeii reg. to rob, to deprive.
t?er 2Beg the road, way. Beh^otjnen to inhabit.
ter S3auev [pi. — n) the peasant, fcefotgen reg. to follow.
bebaueu to cultivate. befjeiu reg. to amend.
t)a§ ©e^cid' the luggage. befd)mu^eu reg. to soil.
ber ©eDanfe the thought. ^etftTeueur^y. to disperse, scatter.
ba^ Sietragen the behaviour. \)\t ilette the chain.
erraten [ir. v. 104) to guess. ble (£d)eibe the pane of glass.
ba'S 33ertrauen (the) confidence, ber 9iaiiber the robber.
erobern reg. to conquer, take, ganj, gcinjlid) entirely, quite.
be^alteu («>. 101) to keep. nad)l)er adv. afterwards.
Reading Exercise. 75.
1. ^ev ©d)nce bebedt bie (Site im SBlntcr. jDie flei^iy^en
@d)utev tt>erbeii b e I o I) u t. !Die[e 33iid}ci' (^ ef a H e n mir nid)t. ^ic
i^einbe eroberteu bie (Stabt. ^d) evfaunte Sie nid)t gteid)
(at once), tDcil eS bunfet tuar. 53el)a(ten ®ie, tra^ ©ie '^vibeu.
§abeu ®ie nud) t) e t ft a n b e n ? 3a, id) i^ e v f p v e d) e 3^nen. ^\)U\\
Sat ju befolgen. 2Biberfpred)en ®ie mir, fo lange al"? Sie*
trofleu (like) ; am (Sube tuerben ou ber ©vcifin i^. beiuo^nt. Xa (Partner
l)at i^ergeffeii, meine iuugeit ^ftanjen ju be^iegen.
2. 3}er ^oui(^ !^at ^u guuften (in favour of) feine^ (Sct)nc5
bcm !I()rone eutfagt. "Der ®ol)u be^ ?orb ^. t)at feine (2tubieu
ganj t3eruad)Iaf[igt. §erv il>alfer ^at mein 33itd) fel)r giinftig
eurteilt. jDie guteii 3[l^eufd)en t}evab|d)eiicu ba^ ?aper. i)ie
9iad}Tid)t Dcii bcm Siege (victory) ber ?^einbe l)at ciueu grojJien
(Sd)vedeu (panic) i^erurfad^t. jDev 5(iiffet)er ^atte fein ®efd)aft
(business) gauj t3eniad)Ia[figt. ^\tx junge ^D^iuit rcd}tfertigtc bai8
53crti"auen, baS xq'vc in il)u fc^ten.
JtufgaOe. 76.
I. Water covered the land. You lose your friends. I
had not received your letter. Good children obey their [J)at.)
parents. This young man ivas much (fe'^v) favoured by ^the)
fortune. The peasants cultivate their land. The road is planted
Lesson 30. 205
(bepflanst) with walnut- (D^ug*) trees. A robber has robbed me
{Ace.) of my luggage [Gen.]. You have guessed (104) my
thoughts. The boy promised me [Dat.) to amend his behaviour.
We have lost our money. The child has soiled its dress. I
will keep this book. Have you executed the orders (^efei;Ie)
of the king?
2. I was*) deceived (113) by my neighbour; he deceives
everybody. Carthage (Sl'artI)ago) was destroyed by the Romans.
I have received several letters from America. Do not con-
tradict your teacher [Dat.). Have you breakfasted.^ I break-
fast every morning at nine o'clock. The dog broke (tore, 70)
his chain and ran off (fcrt). Your boots are torn, shall I
take (tracjcn) them to (ju) the shoemaker? A bird flew (114)
against the window and broke a pane of glass. Afterwards
1! nobody iknew (,) who shad 2 broken lit. I was*) not (or
have not been) informed of (toon) the death of Mr. Graham.
The robber was condemned 2 to sbe 1 hanged [Pass, voice).
Conversation.
2Ba§ t^aten bie ?^eint)e? ©ie eroBerten bie <3tat)t.
SBer betDDt)ut jeue^ (Sdjlog? 3)et 6fterreid)ifd)e ©rcif %.
Q\i er reii? ' 93iau fagt, bag er fe^r groge
9?eid)tumcr befij^t.
SBarum t)at ber ©civtner bie (Sv l}atte idm ^cit; er tDtrt) fie
^lumeu md)t bcgofjen? biefen Slbeub begte[^en.
tBag toerfprad) bet ^nabe? (£r toevf^rad), fid) §u beffern.
2Ber toon -S^nen 'i^at mir itoiber* 9Ziemanb toon un^ l^at -S^^nen
f^rcd)en? tr)iberfpvod)en.
§at biefer Tlawn fein (Sef^aft 5^ein, ev l}at e^ ganjUc^ toerna(^*
befovgt (attended to) ? ^ciffigt.
§abcn @ie einen 33rtef toon 3(^ erl;alte oft S3nefe toon il^m.
O^rent ^veunbe erl^atten?
§aben ®te toiele ^rennbe? ^Der STob !^at mid) aHer metner
^rennbe beraubt.
2Ba§ t^nn bte Sanern? ©ie bebauen ble gelbev.
^bnnen ©te meine ©ebanlen Qdj ^aht fie oft erraten, aber
erraten? nld)t tmmer.
§at ber i^einb bte ©tabt jerftort? 5f^ein, er l)at fie ntc^t ^erftort.
§at ber £bntg bem 2;^rone Qa, ju gunften feine§ ©o^ne^.
entfagt?
Stiffen (Bit, iuer btefeg ®Ia§ 3^ein, mein^errJc^toeigeSntc^t;
jerbro(^en l)at? id) ^be c§ ntd)t ^erbroc^en.
*) was = hjurbe or bin. . t:) orb en; see the foot-note 2) p. 174.
206
Thirty-first Lesson.
SEPARABLE VERBS.
(Jlrennbare 3fittDortcr.)
Separable verbs are such as consist of a verb and
of a separable prefix which may be detached from it.
The prefixes employed with the separable verbs are also
employed as independent ^.arts of speech, mostly prepo-
sitions or adverbs, as: anss-gc^eu to go out; tDCg-ge^cn
to go away; ati-faitgen to begin.
When conjugated in the Present and Imperfect of
the Indicative, and in the Imperative, these prepositions
are detached from the verb, and placed at the end of
the clause, as:
Present: ic^ gcl^c btefcii ?l6eiit) att§;
Imperfect: id) gtitg i3eftevu nirfjt dM^ ;
Imperf.: dJci^ctt (Sie nut miv oiiS, StJi^g^tt Sie \c%i on.
The prefix remains with the verb in the Infinitite, in
those tenses formed with the Infinitive (1st Future and
1st Conditional)^ and in both Participles. Ex.: aufangeii to
begin; Fut. x&f xozxtt anfangen; Part. pres. anfaugcub.
In the Past participle the syllable gc is placed between
the particle and the verb, as: an^gc^fangeii, au^cjcgangeii.
The same rule applies to the word „i\\", when this is
required in the Infinitive, as: au-ju-faucjcn, au^=^iigel)cu 2C.
The accent of the separable verbs is double, one on the
separable particle, the other on the verb, as: airfairgeil,
but the principal stress or accent of the two is on the
separable particle. You can therefore simply retain as
a rule : Whenever the prefix of a compound verb is
accentuated, then the compound verb is separable, when
not, the verb is inseparable. The only exception makes
tttifj, in case that a second prefix be following, compare
p. 203, note 2. —
Conjugation of a separable verb.
2tbf(^rcibctt (i(^ fc^ricb . . ab, — obflcfrfjricbcii) to copy.
Present.
3cl) fd)reibe . . ab I copy tvnr fd)vcibcii . . ab we copy
t)U fd)veibft . . ab thou copiest (it)V fd)veibt . . cih) ye copy
er fd)reibt . . ab he copies ®ie fd)vciben . . Ci\i you copy
ftc |d}icibt . . ab she copies. fie fd)rcibeu . . ^^h they copy.
. ab
we
copied
. ah)
2C.
. ah
2C.
ah
K.
Separable verbs. 207
Imperfect.
3fcl) fd^rteb . . . aB I copied tutr fc^rtebeit
fcu fd)Vtebft . . . ah k. (i^v fd)rieBet ,
er f(^neb . . . ab jc. ®ie fd)rieben
fie [irieb . . . ab k. [ie [cbrieben .
Perfect. -3d) ^abe . . abgcfd)viebeu I have copied etc.
Pluperfect. 3fc^ ^atte . . abgei'd)rtebeii I had copied etc.
1st Fut. 3d) tx)erbe . . ab[d)relben I shall copy etc.
2nd Fut. -^d) trerfee abgefd)vieben ^abeu I shall have copied..
1st Cond. -Sd) ti3urt)e . . abfd}reiben I should copy etc.
2nd Cond. -3d) tDiirbe abgefd)rieben l^aben I should have copied.
Imperative.
©d)reibe . . . ab | fd)reiben tt)it . . . ab 1 let us
fc^reiben ®ie . . . ah] ^^P^* ti>ir tDoUen abfd)reiben J copy.
Infinitive.
5lbfc^reiben and ab^ufc^reiben to copy.
Participles.
Pres. 5lbfd)reibenb copying. | Past. abgefd)vteben copied.
1. Simple separable particles.*)
1) aB: fab'reifen reg. to set out; Pres. id) telfe . . ab; Imp. \6)
relfte . . ah\ Perf. id) bin abgerelft. Thus: ab'ne^men to
take off; ab'fd)lagen to refuse; fab'ti^eic^eu to deviate.
2) ait: -rau'fommeu to arrive; Pres. id) fomme an; Imp. id>
!am . . an; Perf. id) bin angefommen. Thus: an'fangcn
to begin; an'ne^men to accept; an'jie^en to put on;
an'fleit>en reg. to dress. P. p. angef(eit)et.
3) auf: iauf'fte^en to get up; Pres. id) fte^e . . auf; Imp. id)
[tant) . .auf ; Perf. id) bin aufvjeftanben. Thus: aut'l)aUen
to detain; auf'^oren reg. to cease; auf'mad)en to open.
4) att§: i^it^'a^'^ett to go out; Pres. id) ge^e . . au§; Imp. id)
ging .. au§; Per/". id) bin au^gegangen. Thus: au^'laffen
to leave out; auS'geben to spend (money); auS'f^red^en
to pronounce.
5) bci: ibei'ftct)eu [Dat.) to assist; bettragcn to contribute,
6) bar: bar'ftcUen reg. to represent; bavbungen to offer; t)ar*
t^un to evince, to state.
7) citi: ein'fii^ven reg. (with the prep, bei or in) to introduce;
ein'Iatien to invite. P. p. eingcla"Den.
*) We advise the student, as a very useful repetition, alwaya
to form of all these verbs, even where the book does not give
them, the Pres., Imperf. and Perf. tenses, just as from 1, to 4^
the above list has given them.
208 Lesson 31.
8) fort: fDrt'fa"^tcn to go on, to proceed; fort'tragen to carry
off; fertfcauern reg. to last; fortfe^^en reg. to continue;
fort'beglelten to see off.
9) fier: l^eT'bvuic^cn to bring here (hither).
10) ijettn: f^einrfomnien reg. to come or return home.
11) Ijin: l)in'[tefleu reg. to put down; f'^ingel)en to go there.
12) U^X Io3'Ia[Kn to let loose; loSreigen to tear off.
13) mit: mit'teileu reg. to communicate, to impart, to tell;
niittDirfeu to co-operate; mitncl)nien to take with (you).
14) n(l6)l nad)'(afjcn to subside, to abate; jiiad^folgen reg. to
follow (after) ; inad)Iaufen to run after.
15) nicbcr: nicfcev'Iegeu reg. to lay down.
16) tJOr: toor'ftellcn reg. [Dat.) to introduce, to present; toorlefen
to read to somebody ; -j-tDrfomnieu to occur, to appear.
17) tocg: ti3eg'uet)men to take away; itcegbleiben to stay away.
18) toicber: tinctcv'lcfen to read again (see p. 216, Note 1).
19) gu: 5U'mad)cn to shut; 5U'fd)Uegcn to close, to lock; ju'*
(affen to admit; su'bringeu to spend (time). Per/. \6!f
l)abe . . 5u'gebrad)t (spent).
20) For t)urd), uni, iibev' and untcr see p. 214. Cb as
prefix is obsolete and occurs only in ob'Itegen and ob'ficgen.
Words.
jDaS 5lnetbteten the offer. fcer 5I6enb the evening.
t?a3 ^'Dii^evt' the concert. ab 'bvennen to burn down.
t)te 5iot the distress, need. iauf'gcl)en [of the sim) to rise,
bie 3cic{)nmig the drawing. fd)Icd}t badly. fd)on already,
bte (Sonne the sun. nicrgcn^ adv. in the morning.
Reading Exercise. 77.
3fd) f(^retbe fcie ^lufgabe ab. 2Ber fd)rteb biefen Srief
ab? ^avl l)at it)n abgefdmeben. SBann fin gen ®ie on, i^n
vtbjnfdjreiben'^ 3fd) Ijabe geftern 9lbent) angefangen nnt)
fa'^re t?iefen ?[^?crgen fcrt. Silt famen um Ijviib fe6^ Ul)v l)icr
an. jDa^ 3[)?dt)Acn fd)lc^ He ^I)iive ;^u. -Sd) nel^me 3ft)V gii*
tigc^ (kind) Slnevbieten mit SSergniigen an. (S telnet anf, ilinter,
c§ i[t ^t\i. ®ie .^inbev fin to (have) t^em (Sfcl nad>gclauf en.
DaS ganjc ^cvf ift ab g cb van nt. Sd) ging nid)t ani^, njeil
tc^ fran! njav. §aben feie Olsten ^reunb fovtbegleitet (seen
. . home)? l^iivAtcn ©le nid}t«, id) ftclje Ol^ncn'bet!
JHufgaOf. 78.
I copy all my letters. Are you going (go you) out? Yes,
I am going out. My brother has set out (1) for (nad)) London this
morning. The concert begins (2) at 7 o'clock. Assist (5) your
neighbour in his distress. Pray (5Bitte), introduce (16) me to
your friend. In summer ?the ssun irises at three o'clock in
the morning. The sun has (ifi) risen beautifully. Leave
Separable verbs. 209
out (4) this page (®eite). Have you copied the letter? It is
already copied. Take your drawing away. Our friends went
away from (t>on) here at six o'clock. Do you not take me with
[you]? I accept (2) your offer with great pleasure. The
young man has spent (19) his time very badly. The doctor
imparted (13) this news [to] me [Dat.). Do not detain (3)
him [any] longer. Put on (2) your shoes. How have you
spent your evening yesterday? I was (gone) out. He was
not yet dressed (2).
2. Compound separable particles.^)
1. 33et)or': fbetoor'ftel^en to impend. Pres. t(^ fte'^e . . 6et)ov.
2. babei': baBei'fte'^en to stand close by. Pres id) ftel^e babet.
3. 'Da[)er': ft^al^ev'fommen to come along. Pr. \6:) !oiume ba'^'er.
4. ba^^in': fi^a^in'eilen to hasten away. Pres. id) elle bal^in.
5. barnieber': bavmeber'Iiegen to lie down. Pr. id) liege b.
6. bavauf' : barauf' beftel)en to insist on. Pr. i^ Befteije barauf.
7. bat)on': bat?ontaitfen to run off. Pres. id) (aufe baDon.
8. batoov': batjorftellen to put before. Pres. i(^ ftetle . . bailor.
9. ba^u'^ or i)tn3U': ba5u'tl)un to add. Pres. id) tl)ue . . baju.
10. ba5mtfd)en': bQ5tt)if(^enlegen to put or lay between.
11. em pot': empor'l^alten to hold up; empor^ebon to lift up.
12. entge'gen (towards): eutgegeuge^eu to go to meet.
13. entjnjei': ent5trei'fd)lagen to strike asunder (in two).
14. !^erab': I)erab'fteigen \ to get down. Pres. ic^ fteige ^erab.
15. l^inab': l^inab'ftcigeu j to descend. - ^ * l^inab.
16. l^erauf': f^erauffteigen \ to ascend. = i(^ ftetge fjerauf .
17. ^inauf : t)iuautfteigen / to mount (up). * id) (teige ^Inauf.
18. l^eraug': ) ^^eraumifen to call out. = icfe rufe l^erauS.
19. l^inau§': | l)inau^' or ^eraugtrageu to carry out.
20. 'herein': herein 'fcmmen to come in. Pre«. id) fomme ^erein.
21. l^tnetn': l^inetn'gcl)en to go in. Pres. id) ge!^e l^tnein.
22. l^erii'ber: \ t)eruber'tommen to come over.
23. l^iiiii'ber: / ^eriiber'* or ^iniiber'njerfen to throw over.
24. herun'ter: ^erimter'fUefien 1 . ^ ,
25. ^ttiun'ter: I)inunter 'ftiefeen T'' ^''''''•
26. :^erau': fjeron'fonimen to approach. P^e*. i^ fomme l^eran.
27. l^erbei': ^erbet'nifen \ to call * ic^ rufe i)erbet.
28. ^erju': fjerju'rufen j (towards you). ^ id) rufe ^erju.
29. l^ei'um': l^erum'tragen to carry about. * id) trage !^erum.
30. '^ert)ot': ^ert)or*bvtngen to jjroduce (to bring forth).
31. l^intDeg': t)imDegne^men to take away.
32. l)in3U': ilnn^u'etleu to hasten thither,
33. iibereiu': Tubereiu'tommen to agree. Pre*. ic^fpmmeUberein.
*) NJB. When learning these verbs, always form, as a repeti-
tion, also their Lnperf. and their Perf. tenses.
OTTO, German Conv.-Grammar. 14
210 Lesson 31.
34. uml^er': um^et'* or ^erum'ft^n?eifen to ramble about.
35. coran': t^oran'ge'^cn to precede. Pres. \6) ^e^e tocrau.
36. t?orau§' :\ tjoraue's or toovl^er'fagen to foretell.
37. t>er^ei' : j 1^0Tl)cr'tT)i[fen to foreknow ; t3or!^er'fel)en to foresee.
38. tovBet': |t»ovtJei= or \?oruberget)en to pass by; ocrbeifa^reu
39. t) orii ' bev : I to drive by ; tjcruber^ie^en to pass or march by.
40. juriirf': junicf'fomnieu to come back; juriicf'fefjren re^. to
return; juvuc!'fd)ic!en reg. to send back, to return.
41. jufarn'men: T^ufam'menfommen or ijufam'mentreffen mit
to meet with; sufammeiibvingen to collect; jufammens
fe^en reg. to compose.
Note 1. Most of these compound particles serve to attach to
the verbs the idea of peculiar locality , whereas the simple ones
give the verbs a more geiural meaning. For instance:
Slnfommen means to arrive; but ^eranfommcit to draw near you.
auflegen to impose, to injiict; but barauf=, ^crauf* or ^iuauf =
Icgen means to lay on (upon or in) certain place.
au6gel^cu to go out ifor a walk); — l^crauS* or ^inau8gc|)en to
go out (of a room, a house where you are etc.).
au^rufen means to exclaim, to proclaim; but l^crausrafcn to call
out (of a certain place),
untcrlaffcn to omit; but l^eruntcrtaffen to let down.
torjiel^cn to prefer; but l^er^er jiet>eit to draio or puU forth etc.
Note 2. Some of these particles, simple or compound, may also
be prefixed to inseparable verbs, as: an'ttertraucn to intrust; an'»
befe$fen to recommend; auS'terfaufen to sell off; tJOrauS'bcjal^lcn to
pay in advance. — In this case the separable particles are transposed
m the above mentioned tenses, the inseparable ones remain. In
the infinitive the 5U goes between the two prefixes.
Such inseparable verbs, when compounded with a separable
prefix, are thus conjugated:
Fres. 3^ t>crtraue . . an. Part, an'i^crtraut. Inf. au'jutocrtraiicn.
» 3d) befeljtc . . an. Put. id) it>crbc anbefcl^kn. P. i6f ^obc an'bcfot>tcn.
• 3^ bcja^Ic . . toorauS. P. ftorausbcja^lt. Inf. ttorauSjubejablcn.
Note 3. The following verbs which were formerly written
as two separate Avords, mu»t be treated as separables :
Infinitive. Pre*. Part. past.
f j^.fl^t'fd^lagen *) fail, miscarry id) fci^tagc . . fc(?I fe^tgcfj^Ugrn.
frci'f^ro^cn to acquit id) j^jrcc!^ . . fm frcigcf^Jtoc^en.
fgtctd^'fommcn to equal l^ fomme . . ^Uid) ^U'ld) Qttommtn^
fcft'fc^cn to fix, appoint tc^ fc^c . . fcft tcftgcfe^t.
lieb'^atcn to love id) ^abc . . llcb licbgc^abt.
flitt'jc^tveigcn to be silent id) jd)tDctgc . . fttll flittgc|(^wicgcu.
ftatt'flnbcn to take place id? ftnbe . . jlott flattg cfunbm.
nja^v'nc^mcn to perceive idf nci^ne . . wa^r n?a^gcncmnic«.
*) When spelled separately, the three first verbs have a dif-
ferent meaning, viz.: fc^l fd^Iagcn to strike fahe, to miss one* s hloxc ;
frci j^rcd^cn to speak frankly ; glcici^ tomnun to come dir»cUy.
Separable verbs. 211
Observations.
1. The separation of the preposition from the verb can
only take place in principal sentences , as : 3d) fd^reibe etnen
33rtef ab :c. In sentences, beginning with a relative pronoun
or a siibordinative conjunction,*) requiring the verb to be
at the end, the prefix remains before. Ex.:
!J)er 33ricf, iceldjen t^ jel^t abfd^rctBc,
The letter which I am copying now.
^6) xo\i\\\d)t, bag ®te I)eute ni^t au^gc^cn*
I wish you would not go out to-day.
51 1 § id) in ^ari« atilom k.
When I arrived in Paris etc.
2Benn ®te jutoiet ©elb au^gcBcn.
If you spend too much money.
2. Particles compounded with ^er (such as l^eraB, l^erein,
'^etunter K.) denote motion towards the person who is speaking;
while those compounded with ^in (I)inab, t)inein, l)inunter k.)
denote the contrary motion or direction away from the speak-
er. Ex. :
^ommeu Sie !^eretn come in (here, lit. here in).
(Come towards me who am in the room.)
®el)eu ®le t)inetu walk in (there).
fl^he speaker is outside.)
®d}cn ®ie ^tnauf go up stairs.
(The speaker is beloiv ; motion away from him.)
^ommen ®ie ^evauf come up (here).
(The speaker is up stairs — motion towards him.)
Words.
fUm'fommeit ir. v. to perish, ^tx 33ifd)Df the bishop.
t>ie ^ugel the ball. an'ftreic^en ir. to paint.
•rl)inab 'roUen reg. to roll down, frifd) freshly, newly.
ber ©ugel the hill. ab'trageu ir. to carry off.
t)er 2^^urm the tower. tricber ^er'fteUen reg. to restore.
t)er SlVjt the physician, doctor, erfennen to recognise.
t)ie 33erdnt)ei'ung the change. Cortreff'Ucfe excellent.
bie ©efunbi^eit health. im'jutrieben discontented.
ber 33ud)t)dubter the bookseller, gdiijlid) completely.
bie ©rammatlf the grammar. ab'fd}lagen to refuse.
bet $Iau the plan. oermutli^ probably.
*) Such as: ttJClttt if; Wctl because; at§ when; bit as; ba^
that 2C. (See the 36th lesson p. 248.)
14*
212 Lesson 31.
Beading Exercise. 79.
Sefen ®ie m'lt t)ie[e« fdjone ®e^ld)t »or. ®eben ®ie adn
(take care) , t)ie Xt)uve ift f rif ct) a u g c ft r i d) e n . ©inb ble S^eif eu
(dishes) fc^ou ab getiageii? 3)er ^Befciente triigt fie eben
(just now) ab. (Bint) bie ^inber augefleibet? 2)a'S tlnt)^*
mat)d)en (nurse) fleibet fie eben an. 2Betd)e nie t?cn t)ev
2Sat)rl)eit ah. ^er (Stuvm t)at nad>gclaffen (or aufge^ott).
i)a« ©d)iff ift gefunfen; jtDansig ■perfcncn fmt) (have) umge^
fommen. ^er Dteb ift t) at) en 'g elan fen. ®er ^aufmann
reifte im gan^en (whole) Sanbe nm^er' (or Ijcvum'). 3)a§ ^abc
id) 5l;nen Doraui^gefagt. 5)er Shjt ift chen tovbeigegangen.
jittfga0e. 79a.
The ball rolled adown ithe shill [ace). The luggage was
carried out. We have (fint); ascended (on auf, ace.) the tower.
Much rain produces weeds (Unhaut, sif7ff.). The hunter rambles
about (in) the forest. Captain R. has (ift) just ridden past.
I had no time to carry the child about. The messenger brought
the letter back. Great changes have taken place (Note 3j
in the administration (®taat§-^em)attung). Mr. Murray is an
excellent physician; he has entirely restored my health. I
agreed (33) with the bookseller for (n)egen) a new grammar.
We met (41) with some friends in Paris. The plan which we had
made, has completely miscarried. I have just (eben) sent back
the books you had lent me. If you refuse*) him such a
trifle (^leinigfeit) , zhe iwill be very discontented. If I in-
troduce (I, 16) you [to] the count [Dat.), zyou i will probably be
invited to (^Um) dinner. When**) Mr. Grove was introduced
to the Bishop, zhe i recognised an old friend in him.
Conversation.
§aben ©ie 3t)ve Uberfe^ung 3d) fd)reibe fie eben ab. 3c^n)ertc
f d}on abgefd)iieben ? and) b i e toon geftevn abfd)veiben.
Urn iDietoiei Ul)r gef)en at e« au«ge!leitet.
©oil id) mid) anHeiticn? 3a, fleit)en ®ie fid) an.
2Ber l)at nicine <3tirferci (em- 9iiemant) nimmt ^)iev etn)a8 n)eg.
broidery) n)eggenommen?
SQSann ge^t bie (Sonne auf? 3m (Scunner ge^t fie urn 3 U'^r
Te^ 3DioYgen8 auf.
♦) See p. 211. Observations, 1).
*♦) 511)8, see the foot-note *) p. 170, and p. 211, 3rd Ex.
Sep. and insep. verbs. 213
SBtvb t)er Dffisier ^ente ^ier ^ermutUc^, benn (for) er veitet
tjorBei'tetten'^ iefcen,.2;ag ^ier Dovbel'.
3fft fcer Sebiente fc^on juriicf* 92ein, er bleibt immev fo (aitge
gefommen? aug.
2Ber l^at 3i)nen biefe 9^ac^nc^t SD^ein 9^effe Subtutg teitte fie mlr
mitgeteiU? mit.
2Bann fangt ba^ 2;i}eatev an? @§ fangttm2Binteritmfec^§U^r,
tm ©ommer um fieben U^x an.
§at_bev (Sd)nelfcer metneu dlod (Sr l^at i^n mttgeiiommen ; aber
mttgeiiommen? ni(^t jitriidgebvacbt.
2Bie fommt Diefer §unt) ^ierl^ev? (gr ift miv nad)gelaufen.
SSer ge^t bem £)l)eim entgcgen? ^axi unD id) ge^en it)m entgegen.
§at t)a§ ^onjevt' gefteru ftatt^ 9^ein, e§ finbet erft (only) ^eute
gefunbeii (taken place) ? ftatt.
foinite man biefe^ t?ov^er'[e^en? ®eit)i6,e§n)aiieid)ti^or^er5nfe^en.
2BoUen @ic ein tDenig ^eranf= -Sd) ^be jei^t !eine 3eit, ^inauf*
fommen? jugel^en.
fijnnen @ie morgen fjeviiber* ^a.^ ii n^erbe einen 5IugenbUd
fommen? f)tniiber!ommen.
■^ft e§ eriaubt, I) in ein jn get;en? Qa, niein §err, !ommen ©ie nur
!^erein.
Sringt man meinen Coffer (port- (gv ift fd)on oben (up stairs). -3c^
manteau) ^eranf? f)ab e i^n felbft l)inaufgetragen.
3. Separable and inseparable verbs.
In consequence of a different meaning, some verbs
compounded with b n r c^ , it b e r , n n t e r and u m , must
be treated as separable, others as inseparable verbs.*)
A. When butt^, u6cr, Ulltcr and ttJlt are separable:
When such verbs have a double accent, one on the
prefix — which is the principal and decisive one,
comp. p. 206. — the other on the verb, they are sepa-
rable, and treated like all separable verbs. Ex. :
®nv(^ 'rei'fen re^. to travel through, like ab'rei'fcn.
Pres. id) reife . . bnrc^. Per/, id) bin r)urd)'gereift.
In this case, the prepositions buvd;, liber, unter,
um, are taken in their full and natural sense; so that
their meaning prevails over that of the verb. Most of
such verbs are intransitive and take tlie auxiliary
fcttt. Ex.:
*) In English a few examples of such verbs are still found,
as : I look over and I overlook ; 1 set up and I upset ; I undergo
and I go under etc.
214 Lesson 31.
Oct) bill ^iev iitJet'gcfetjt / have crossed here.
jDa« 33oot I ft untt^rgcgatigen the boat ?ias sunk or gone
down.
Such separable verbs are:
a] Compounded with bnrii^.
fcurd)'fhci(^'en to strike out, cross.
7l)urd)'fa^'ren to pass through.
!Durcb'fd)nel'ben to cut through.
fcurd)'5ie{)'en to pull through.
buvd)'fefe'eil to attain, obtain.
Part. p. burc^'gefd;nitten, burd^'gcjogcn, burc^'geftrid)cn.
b) Compounded with flier.
fU'berge'^'eil to pass over. |7U'tcrfa"^ren \ to ferry or carry
-l-ii'berlaufeti to run over. iii'berfe^en j to cross, [over,
ii'bergtejen to pour upon. lii'beriDerfen to throw over.
Part. p. iitergegangen, iibcrgelaiifen, ii b e r gefabren 2C.
Note 1. These six verbs are the only separahles with liBcr.
Note 2. iifcerfa'^reti and iiBcr[et3en with the same meaning to
cross are also used as inseparable and active verbs.
c) Compounded with Utttcr.
-Vlln'terge^en to go down, to
set, sink.
mi 'tevbviiicjcn to shelter.
TUn'ter[tel}eu to go under shelter.
d) Compounded with um.
iUnr!eI)ven re^. to turn round,
ium'f alien to fall (over), upset,
um'lvevfen to upset, overturn,
iim'fleibeii to dress anew.
iinr brill gen to kill.
Tuni'fiuten to sink down, to fall
um"DveI)eil to turn. [over.
7iim'gel)en to have intercourse.
ium'fcmmen to perish,
unrftopen to overthrow etc.
Examples.
3)iefer Tlann fe^t alleS bitrd) (attains everything).
Wix l;abcu uufor 3?Dvl)abeu t)urd) 'gcfe^t.
We have succeeded in our design.
!l)ie 9JJi((^ ift iiber'gelaufeii the milk has run over.
jDa§ Scot gel;t Ulitev the boat is sinking.
§evhilamim uiit) "jpcniveji [iub untcr'gegangen.
Herculanum and Pompeji have perished (sunk).
9fvic^ eiiiev ©tuube fe^vte id) um (I returned).
3)er ^nabe ^at t>eii Gtul^l umgeirorfen.
The boy has uspet the chair.
B. When btird), ilicr, mttcr and nm are Inseparable:
When these i)refixes, burd;, iibcr, untcr and um,
are taken in a figurative sense, and when therefore they
do not lessen the actual meaninp; of the verb itself, they
are used as inseparables. The diftcrence, for instance,
Sep. and insep. verbs.
215
between butc^'tel'fen {sep.) and bur(^ret'[en, (insep.) is this:
The first, being doubly accented, means to travel right
through , to pass through , with the purpose of reaching
another destination; whereas burc^veif'en, whose prefix
burc^ is unaccented [comp. p. 206.], means to travel
over or abotct a country, not straight through , so as to
leave to the verb r e t f e U its full meaning, viz. : travelling.
Most transitive verbs compounded with iiBct and
utttcr are inseparable, have therefore no (je in the Part,
past and take l^al^ett.
Such inseparable verbs (with :^aBen) are:
a) Inseparables compounded with but(i|»
!Dur(^ret'fen r. to travel over.
bui'd}bre'd)en to break through.
buvc^t)rin9'en to penetrate,
buvd^bo^'ren reg. to pierce.
burc^bldt'tevn to peruse, to turn
over the leaves.
bur(^fu'd)en reg. to search.
buvd)fte'c^en to dig through etc.
Part, burd^rctft', burd^kod^cn, burd^brungett, burd;bo^rt jc.
h) Inseparables compounded with ttbcr.
Uberge'ben ir. to hand.
ilBerfe^'en reg. to translate.
iibergeVen to miss, omit, skip.
uberl)du'fen r, to heap, overload.
iibertveff enrey. to excel, surpass.
liBevbring'en to deliver, to bear,
iibeniel^'nien ir. to undertake,
ubevjeu'gen reg. to convince etc.
Part, iibcrgc'bcit, iiberfe^t', iibergangen, iibertroffen, iiberjeugt.
c) Inseparables compounded with ntttev.
llnterfu'd)en reg. to examine,
unternel^'men ir. to undertake,
uuterfc^rei'beu ir. \ to sign, to
uuter^ei^nen reg. \ subscribe.
untevicd)'en reg. to subjugate,
unterbvii'den to subdue, oppress,
untev^l'teu to entertain, amuse.
untemd)'teu r.to instruct, teach.
Part, unterfud^t', unternommen, «nterfd;iiebcn, imter'^atten jc.
d) Inseparables compounded with MVX*
Umar'men reg. to embrace,
umrln'gen reg. \ to surround,
umge'beu ir. ] to encircle.
itmc^el)'en ir. to avoid.
iimfd)lf'fen to circumnavigate.
unUdHfen reg. to cloud (over).
Examples.
3>(^ bUTd^rei'fe gan^ 3)eutfd)iant) I am travelling all over
3fcb )c)OLht ganj SDeutjdjtanb burc^reift'. [Germany.
^6) iiberfe^'e ©d)illct^ m\^t\m %t\i.
I translate Schiller's William Tell.
3fd) '^en Sftcneid) ^at bie ^a\\]c '^-'^oinnj
buvd}teift. !I)ie ^emev l)abeu mele SBlUfer miter jod)t.
2. 3)cr ^olijeibieuer l)at bav^ ^cin^c §auv^ burd)fud)t. Wldw
(Scl;u Ijat bie i^cituug beo 0»3cfd)aftei^ iibcruommen. -^t^'e Si^crte
{>aben mid) t^ou ber 2l>at)rl)eit ber 2:ad}c iiberjeugt. 3n biefer
®d)ule luerbeu bie ihiabeu bi« (till) ju il^rem Uteii 3al)re uutcr^
rid)tet. iline fennteu (Sie [n^] uuterne^men, bie^ ju tl)un?
*) Obs. Uu'tcrfle'^cu, ic^ ftanb untcr, ic^ bin untcraeflanbcn
is only used in South-Germany, in the northern parts they say
either fid) uu'tcrftC Ucn or un'tertrc'tcn.
Sep. and insep. verbs. 217
(B&jiUtx iiBeTtrifft aHe beutfc^en ®id)ter (poets) an Siefe be^
©efii^lg, Seb^aftigfeit ber (ginbilt)ung§!vaft mit) (2d)arfe t)e« bia^^
(eftifd)en 3)en!en§; abet er xcixX) toon ®i5tl}e an ©enamgfeit ber
^Seobaditung (exactness of observation), an angcBovnem 9Jetd)tmn
poetifd)ev 2In[d)anun3 (inborn richness of poetical intuition) unb
an praftifd)em iBerftanbe uBertroffen. "^pio^Iid) fatten mx un3
toon Dem ^^einbe umrtngt. -Sd) Bttte eld)e§ ndljer bet ?Ifri!a Uegt; aber er bauert^ met)rere
S03od)en unb la^t SD^utlofigfeit^ unb 9aebergefd)lagen^eit6 ^uriid.
3n 5^eapet itje'^t er im 3u(t fo \}d^, ba^ bie 9)ienfd)en gan^
erfd)(afft'7 nut) entnertots t^erben. 3lUe 3:^ttg!eit9 in bent Wlcxi'
fd)en erftlrbtio, unb bie gefa^rUd)ftenii i^olgeni^ n)iirben baraU'S
entftetjen (arise) , tuenn er in ©icilien Idnger al§ 30 bi'g 40
(Stunben tue'^te, unb nid)t ein 9^orbtr>inb il)m folgte (translate
toon einem 9lorbttoinb gefolgt^s njdre), ttoeld)er bie SJJenfc^en itoieber
ftdrlt.
1) plague. 2) especially. 3) to blow. 4) bauertt to last. —
5) despondency. 6) dejection. 7) relaxed. 8) enervated. 9) energy.
10) erfterben to die away, cease. 11) dangerous. 12j consequence.
13) followed.
218 Le3gon 32.
©obalb (As soon as) fcer ©irotfo ju n^c^cn anfdngt, jtc^t^^
ft(^ jctermann in bie §dufet ;^uvurf, niaci)t Xi^iiveu unt ij^euftcv
ju, oCev bcl)dngti^ in (Svujangeluug^^ »ou ?^cuftevfcl)eiben (panes),
^ie Scufter uut) aiibvc Offuungeu i" niit luiffcu Xucl)evu unt)
iDiatteni'*. 3n fcen ©tvaf^en [iel)t man tehien iDicnfdjen. %nd)
in t)eu ^elt)ern t^ut t?cr ©ivotto oft gregeii ©d^ateiU'^; ex ter=
fen9t2o Da§ ®va§ uut) bie ^^flaujeu fo, ta\] man [ie 5U "ipultjei'
i^en;eibeu2i tauu. aU tueuu fie au^ eiuem l^eigcu Cfen fdmen.
©liicflid^ertDcife'-^^ ^ijcljt er uic^t gau^ waljc am Sctjcu^a. !J)ie
I'eute, wddje iu bem ^yelire fiut>, ^Detfeu-^ fid) te^nregcu auf ten
S3ot)en niet)er24, uut) fo t^ut er i^ueu feiueu ®d)at?en (harm).
14) f\6) juriidjiefjen to retire. 15) to hang, cover with. 16) in
the absence. 17) openings. 18) mats. 19) much damage. 20) to
singe, scorch. 21) to grind, rub to powder. 22) fortunately.
23) ground. 24) to prostrate one's self.
Thirty-second Lesson.
Neuter and intransitive verbs.
(SfJcutrale B^ittDiJttcr.)
Neuter verbs are those which ascribe to the subject
a state or condition, which is neither active nor passive ;
and intransitive verbs are those which express an action
that does not pass over to an ohject. Of the first kind
are: idj) ftel}e I stand; id^ fi^e I sit; \&f Itec^e I lie etc.
Of the second description are: tc^ c\e^C I walk; ic^ fomme
I come; id; fal^re I drive or ride in a carriage.
Their conjugation does not differ from that of the
active verb, except in the compound tenses where they
are mostly*) conjugated with the auxiliary fein (to he).
*) The following intransitive verbs, some of Avhich are occas-
ionally used as active with an accusative, are conjugated with ^abett:
antVDorten to answer,
avbciteu to work,
atineu to breathe.
tc((cu to bark.
l^Iiil^cn to bloom,
llutcu to bleed,
bancrii to last.
f;d;teu to figlit.
}llan3cn to iditter.
Vcrdjcu to listen.
laiui>fi'U to fight,
trabcu to crow,
loc^eu to laugh.
IcI^eu to live.
rtju^cu to wrestle.
Vfcifcu to whistle.
riil)eu to re^^t.
fd)cincu to shine, seem.
jd^wciijcn to be silent.
fd^lafeu to sleep.
fcl)rcicn to cry out.
fici|cn to conquer.
jpcien to spit.
ivcincn to weep, cry.
SOj^cru to hesitate.
luobucu to reside, to dwell.
Neuter verbs.
219
We subjoin here an example of a regular and an ir-
regular intransitive verb.
1. Oicifcn to travel.
Present.
Imperf,
Perfect.
Pluperf,
Indicative.
■3c^ leife I travel.
3d) veifte I travelled.
3^ Bin geveift I have tra-
t)U bift gcreift [veiled
er ift geieift
tDtr fint) geveift
ft^v felt? gereift
t^Sie fint) gereift
fie fint) geveift.
3c^ ttjar geveift
tu iijavft geveift
ev tuav geveift
tDir traven geveift
®te iDaven geveift
fie \i3aven geveift.
Ist Fut.
2nd Fut.
1st Cond.
2nd Cone?.
Injinitive.
Present.
Imperf.
Perfect.
3d) tuevbe veifeu.
3c^ tuevDe geveift feiu
\>i\ tt)ivft geveift feiii 2C.
3d) tDiivbe veifen I should travel.
3d) iDUvbe geveift fetn or id) ii^dve geveift k.
©eveift fein or ju fein to have travelled.
Subjunctive.
3d) veife.
3d) veifte.
3d) fei geveift
fcu feift geveift
ev fei geveift
iDiv feien geveift
fi^v feiet geveift
X^'xt feien geveift
fie feien geveift.
3c^ tudve geveift
bu n?dveft geveift
ev tDave geveift
tuiv tcdven geveift
©ie ivdven geveift
fie iDciven geveift.
3d) iuevbe veifen.
3c^ tcevbe geveift fein
t)n tuevbeft geveift fein jc.
2. (S^cl^cn to
3d) ge^e I go.
3c^ gitt0 I went
bn gingft, ev ging 2C.
3d) bin gegangen I have
t)U bift gegangen [gone
ev tft gegangen
tDiv fint) gegangen
©ie fint) gegangen
fie fint) gegangen.
go.
3d) ge^e.
3c^ gmge.
3c^ fei gegangen
\)Vi feift gegangen
ev fei gegangen
\mx feien gegangen
@ie feien gegangen
fie feien gegangen.
Perf. 3c^ ^aBc geavBeitet, tc^ ^afee geBIutet, td^ t)a6c gcteBt, i(^
l^abe gefd^lafen, id^ l^abe gelac^t, ic^ l^abc gctT3o{)nt ic.
NB. Some verbs have a double auxiliary l^aBen and [ein, as:
attreten act. to yield up; — -|-abtretett neut. to go away;
Beftel^eii act. to stand the test; — •rBeftef)eit neut. to consist of.
fortfa^reti to continue; Ex.: @r bat fortgefal^ren ;^u arbeiteit.
rf ortf af)ren to go away in a carriage. Ex. : 2)ie 2)ainc i ft f .
220
Lesson 32.
^6) tcdve gegaugen.
3c^ ttjeite ge^en.
3c() tuerbe gegangcn fcin.
Pluperf. 3cl) ttjar cjegangcu.
1st i^w^. 3(1) ti^ertre gd)eii.
1st Co«onIaufen to run away,
entlaufcn to abscond,
ueilen to hasten,
einferingen to penetrate,
einfc^lafen to fall asleep,
entfomnien to escape.
entfliel)en to run away.
erbleid)en to turn pale.
erfd)einen to appear.
erfd)reden to be frightened,
ettvinfen to be drowned,
fa'^ven to drive.
faUen to fall.
Rfaulen to rot.
Rflattevn to flutter,
fliegen to fly.
Siel)eii to flee,
ic^en to flow.
get)eit)en to prosper, to thrive.
ge()en to go.
^ ,^ > to succeed,
geratcn /
genefen to recover.
geraten (in or unter etn^a'S) to
get into, to fall among.
gefd)C^en to happen.
l)inaufgel)cn or =fteigen to go up.
I)innuteigcl)cn \ to get down,
I)inab[tcigen j to descend.
-... \ to climb,
rlimnien j
font men to come.
Rlvinten to land, go on shore.
laufen to run.
Rniavfd)ieien to march.
reiten to ride, to go on horse-
Rvelfen to travel. [back.
Rvennen to run.
RVoUen to roll.
Rvcften to rust.
Rfd^eitevn to be wrecked, to
founder.
fd)Ieid)en to sneak, slink.
fd)nieljen to melt.
fd)tinnunen to swim.
finfen to sink.
*) Those preceded by R are regular, all others irregular.
'*) ©cgcgncn takes also ^abcn with the aec.
Neuter verbs.
221
fpajieven ge^en to walk,
fjjvingen to leap, to burst,
fte^^en to stand,
fterben to die.
Bftiirjen to fall, to rush,
iiterein'f'ommeii to agree,
um'fomnien \ to perish,
unter'geljen j to set (of the sun)
RiDerborren \ to dry,
Ei^eriuelfen / to wither.
toerf^eiben to expire,
fteigen to mount.
t)erfd)n)int)en to disappear.
i)orBei:=, toorii'Ser'ge^en to pass by.
\Dad)fen to grow.
EtDaufeern to wander.
ti3eid)eu to yield,
tuertjen to become, to get. T
Rjiiriid'fel^ven 1 to return,
juviidfommeu / to come back.
Besides these, most of the above verbs when compounded
with other prefixes, but not preceded by Be.*)
4. By a change of tlie vowel, or a consonant, tran-
sitive verbs with a causative signification have been formed
of the following mtransitives. Whereas these latter are
mostly irregular and take fetn, the former are all regular
and conjugated with l^aBen,
Intransitive (with feiu).
i(Sinfc^Iafen to fall asleep:
jertnulen to be drowned:
ifa^reu to drive:
if alien to fall:
ifliegen to flow:
•i-i)angen to hang (suspended):
lauten to sound:
iliegen to lie:**)
ifc^tDtmrnen to swim:
ifinfen to sink:
ifil^en to sit:**)
Ifprtngen 1) to leap, to jump,
2) to burst, to crack:
iftel)en to stand:**)
-ffteigen to mount:
|t)erfc^tDlnben to vanish, dis-
trtnfen to drink 1 [appear :
iDiegeu to weigh, <- (take^aben):
to be of weight J
Transitive ^ regular (with ^aBett).
etnfd)Iafern to put or lull asleep,
evtraufeu to drown,
fill) veil to guide, to lead,
fallen to fell, to cut down,
floj^en to float.
i)dnc5en to hang up.
lanten to ring the bell,
legen to lay, to put.
fd)tDeminen to (make) bathe, to
water (horses).
fen!en to (make) sink,
fe^en to place, to set.
f^rengen or auffprengen to break
open, to blow up.
fteUen to put upright, to stand,
fteigern to raise, to enhance.
t»erfd)n)eitt)en to waste,
tvanfen to water.
tDagen to weigh = to ascertain
weight [Part, genjogen).
*) The prefix 6c gives an active sense to the verb, as: fici*
gen intr. to mount; beftetgett act. to ascend; befotgen to follow;
befommen to get etc. All verbs with 6c take jabett, except
begegnen, when construed with the dative.
**) See *) p. 165.
222 Lesson 32.
Words.
Die (Sd)i(btt3ac^c the sentinel, t)er ?eud)ter \ ., ^ „„^Ji^„f:^i
t)a« Xl^or the gate. [sentry, lex 2ici)tftocf } ^^^ candlestick,
bev ^'uaU the report, crack. "Dcr 33oteu the ground, floor.
ba§ Uutetnct)nien the under- t)ie ©efatjr the danger.
taking, enterprise. tet Sflatje the slave.
bie ^djtung esteem. ter ^'offev the trunk.
t)er 9}iitbihgcr fellow-citizen. ^u 33ett ge^cu to go to bed.
t>er §ol5t)auev the wood-cutter. |iird)terUd) dreadful,
fcie £ii[te the coast, shore. l^iev^or hither, miibe tired.
t)ie Sabuug the cargo, load. »orfid)tig cautious.
Cer ®xahe\\ the ditch. l^eUducifd) Dutch,
fete gamilie the family. ^ gewotjnlic^ generally.
Reading-Exercise. 82.
1. !l)ag S3ud) Uegt auf bent 2ifd)(e). -3d) fd^lief unter eltiem
S3aum. Die ®d)ilbmad)c tft am XI)qxc geftantcu. Die 9)Zdbd)en
ftnt) in ben ©arten gegangen. 25?ir finb cjcftern bcm $anbe
juriicfgefe^rt, iro nnv brei ^oc^en geblieben n)aren. ?D?ein r^Teunb
ift (was) in @ng(anb geboten. 2luf (upon) bie 9iad)rid)t t?cn bet
franf^eit feine« (Sot)nev^ ift ber Skater l)ier^er geveift. Der £ricg
jti3ifd)en biefen j^uei 33oIfern (nations) l)at_nDd) ntc^t fcegonnen.
ilBir [inb aUe iibcv (at) biefen fiird)tevlid)en Sl'naU evfd)voden. 25a^
ift i^m gefd)el)en? Da« groge Untevnet^men be^ §evrn jTurncv
ift nid)t gelungcn.
2. Diefev -Olann ift in ber 5Id)tung feiner Syiitbiirget fel^r
gefnnfen. Der Sclbat ift an (of) feinen fenuben geftorben. Der
fed)nee ift gcfd>uiel5en. Da§ t^Ieifd) ift nid}t genng gebraten
(roasted) . Dev ipoljl^auev ^at bie (£id}e g ef a 1 1 1. Sin 3iaben=9Zejt
ift Ijeruntetgefatten. ^Hele 2lrtcn (kinds) t>on Xieren finb ton
ber (Srbe tjcrfd^irnnben, njcld^e in fvii'^even (former) 3citen barauf
gelebt ^ben. (Sin fjcUdnbifd)e« ®d)iff ift an ber iliifte ^f^ifavJ
ge[d)eitert ; bie ganje ^abung ift untergegangen. Der ^rcfUc Xeil
bev 9)?annfd)aft (crew) ift (have) unigefemmen ; nur cmige Wla^
trofen, ^cidjc an§ 2anb gefc^ttjommen finb, ^abcn fid} gercttrt.
JlttfgaBe. 83.
1. I travelled in Spain. Our uncle (is) arrived yesterday.
The child J^as fallen into a deep ditch. We sat round (um)
the table. The candlestick stands on (auf, dat.) the table.
The little boy sits on the chair; his mother placed (fc^te^ him
on it (barauf) . Many English families live ^) in Germany and
Italy. The books lie on the table; I laid them on it. How
did you (^abcn Sie) sleep last night? I slept pretty (jiemlit!^)
1) To live (in a country) means itftttl, to live in a house etc.,
is translated loo^ncn.
Lesson 32. 223
well; I was tired when (al§) I went to (p) bed; I had worked
very hard (ftav!) . At what o'clock did you (fiiib ®ie) fall
asleep? I fell asleep at half past eleven. The slave has
hardly (!aum) escaped.
2. The purse has fallen to (auf) the ground. The regi-
ment has marched 1) nine hours a (t)eit) day. The peasants
have gone" to (in t)le) town. The servant has jumped out of
the window of the third story ((Stoc!, m.). Nothing important
(2Bid)tige^) has happened. These plants have not thriven in
our garden. The glass has burst (cracked). They (man)
have broken open (p. 221) the door. The dog has swum over
the river. Did you water the horses? How many pounds
does the trunk weigh? We have not yet weighed it; I think
it weighs sixty pounds. Weigh it, if you please (^efdUt^ft).
A man was (ift) drowned.
Conversation.
2Ba8 tft gefd}e'^en? (g^ ift et\i3a« 2Bi(f»ttge§ gefcf^e^cn.
Urn met?ie( Ul)r finb ©ie toon 2Bir fint> nm ^Ib fed?« abgevelft.
i^tantfurt abgereift ?
2Bann finb ®ie l)ler ange* ®egen je^n U^r.
!ommen?
2Bann fte^en (Ste t)e« ilJZovgeng ©eti^o^nlid) urn eUl^r; aber^eute
auf (get up) ? bin id) um 7 Ul)v aufi^eftaut^eu.
Sarum finb ©ie fo erfd)roden? 2Biv ^aben einen fiird}tevUd)en
£naU ge^oTt,
©inb (Sie atlein nac^ S3riiffel 9^ein, mein 33vuber ifl mitge*
gereift? g^ngen.
SBoUen ©te ein hjenig mlt un« 2Bivt)anfen3^nen, tDitfinbbiefen
f^ajleren gc^en? ^D^lorgen fd}Dn gegangen.
SBann ift S^r i^reunb juriicf* S3or bret 2Bod)en (—ago) : ci^zx
gete^rt? et ift nid)t l)ier geblieben, ev
ift ttjieber abgeveift.
2Bie !ommt e§, bag biefer 93auui 2)er ^oljl^aua- ^at i^n g^f^il^t.
itmgef alien ift?
SSarum ift (has) biefei^amitte fo SBeit ber S3atet ntdjt arbeiten
arm getuorbeu? iTjoUtc.
2Bo !>aben ©ie biefe ^arte ge* @ie ift auf bem33oben (floor) ge*
funben? tegen (or fte tag auf bem 33.).
5Bev ^at pe ba^iu getijorfen? 3d^ fann e§ nid)t fagen; toieUeidjt
(perhaps) ift fief)inuntergefaUen.
^^i man bie ^ferbe getrcinlt ^en it will have snowed.
2nd Cond. zl iDitrte qefd)neit \)0^t\\ 1 ., , , , ,
or c« I,;?tlc V'fd^iicit I " '™''''* ^'^''^ "'°™^^-
Subjunctive Mood.
Present. bvig e3 fd)neie.
Imperfect, taj^ t^ fdniei(e)te.
Perfect. "Da§ t^ gc[d)ncit l>vi6e.
Pluperf. ba^ ei? qc[d)ncit l^atte.
Ist Put. t)a| ei8 fc^ueieu vntxtt. -
Impersonal verbs. 225
2. (B^ gteBt (or giBt) there is, there are.
Present. e§ gtebt there is, there are.
Imperfect. e§ gab there was, there were.
Perfect. e§ ^at gegeBen there has (have) been.
Pluperf. eg l^atte gegeBen there had been.
1st Fut. eg t»irb geben there Avill be.
1st Cond. eg iDiirbe geben (eg gabe) there would be.
2nd Fut. eg tDltb gegeben i)aben there will have been.
2nd Cond. eg luitrbe gegeben !^aben there would have been.
{Potential, eg mag or !ann gebeu there may (can) be.)
Observations.
1) There is, there are, must be translated C0 gtcBt^ when
they express indefinite existence without mentioning a distinct
(small) place. It always remains in the singular, and takes
its object in the accusative. Ex.:
@g gt ebt gute unt) fcbtec^te S3iid)er.
There are good books and bad ones.
©g gtebt Seute, tueld^e t)te ®d)i3nf)eit bet 2^ugent) toorjieben.
There are people who prefer beauty to virtue.
©g giebt ^ogelnefter, *) tDeId)e egbar finb.
There are nests of birds which are eatable.
2Bag gtebt c§ 9Zeueg? what (is the) news?
©g gtebt md)tg 9^eueg there is no news.
NB. With eg giebt, the c8 is never dropped.
2) There is has also the meaning C0 tft^ there are C0 fttti^J
there tvas t§ loar, pi. there were C§ toaren^ This is always
the case, when a definite existence, in a distinct small place
or space, is expressed. With this, the noun is in the nomi-
native case. Ex.:
(5g ift ein S^ogel in bent ^aftg.
There is a bird in the cage.
@g tear fein Staffer in bem ©lag.
There was no water in the glass.
©g ftnb jtDei 3Si3geI in bem fafig.
There are two birds in the cage.
®g tft !etn "iptalj mel^r auf btefer 53an!.
There is no more room on this bench.
NB. When there is etc., in the sense of eg tft, are used in
the interrogative or inverted form, the eg is dropped. Ex. :
*) It would be the same to say : @8 g t c b t SSogcItteft'cr in 2tme=
tifa or in 3nbten or in biefcm Sanb, because America [or India etc.j
is not a small [narrowly circumscribed) place.
OTTO, German Conv. -Grammar. 15
226
Lesson 33.
3ft 2Bem in jener giafc^e?
Is there any wine in that bottle?
SSie loiele 3Si3gel fint) in tern ^dfig?
How many birds are [there) in the cage?
3) To indicate weather or time, impersonal sentences are
formed with e§ ift, as in English:
eg ift Mi it is cold,
eg ift tDarm it is warm,
eg ift t)unfel it is dark,
eg ift feuc^t it is damp.
eg ift fpdt it is late.
eg ift Sibent) it is evening,
eg ift t)alb fecf)g U^r it is half
past five etc.
Other Terbs used impersonally.
4) Further, there are some other verbs which are occasion-
ally used as impersonal verbs, both in the singular and plural :
(Sg fd^eint it seems, appears,
eg betrifft it concerns,
eg folc^t it follows,
eg fef>lt (it) is wanting,
eg gefc^iel^t it happens,
eg geniigt it suffices,
eg fc^Iagt je^^n U^r it strikes ten
o'clock.
eg Idutet the bell rings.
eg fdngt an it begins.
eg ^ort auf it ceases.
eg et^eUt it is evident.
eg nuljt nic^tg it is of no use.
eg bet)aTf it requires.
eg fommt barauf an it depends.
eg ift f ein3^^eitel thereis no doubt.
Reflected impersonals.
5) Others occur impersonally used with a personal pronoun;
a) In the accusative.
Sg frent mid)*) I am glad,
eg rent mic^ I repent,
eg fd^merjt mic^ I grieve,
eg friert mid)*) I am cold,
eg fc^aubert mic^*) I shudder.
eg jammert mic^ I pity,
eg e!e(t mic^ it disgusts (me).
eg drgert mid)*) I am vexed,
eg i)ei't)ne6t mid) it vexes me.
eg njuntert mic!^*) I wonder.
eg ^unaert mid)**) I am hungry,
eg biirftet mic^**) I am thirsty,
eg langnjeilt mic^ it wearies
(me).
eg fc^icft fid) it is proper,
eg t?erftel)t fid) of course, it is
a matter of course,
eg fragt fid) it is (a) question.
b) In the dative.
(Sg tfl mit leib 1 y ^^ eg gefaUt mir \ I am pleased,
eg t^ut mir leib / ^ ^^ ^^""^^ eg belicSt mit j I like.
*) These five marked*) are used also personally, viz.: 3(i^ freue
m\6i, id^ frtcTc, ic^ trmtbrc mic^, tc^ f4)aubrc, ic^ drgrc mid) jc.
**) ©8 ^iingert mic^ and e8 biirftct mic^ are used especially in
poetry as well as ic^ ^iingcrc, i^ burfte; the common prose expression
IS: t(^ (in ^ungtig; xi) hxn burftig; or ic^ ^abe hunger, ic^ ^^oiht
2)urft.
Impersonal verbs.
227
eg nii^t mlt md)tS it is of no
use to me. [me.
eg al)nt mir my heart misgives
eg fd)ti3int)elt mir I am giddy.
eg biinft mir methinks.
feg gelingt mir I succeed.
eg fcegegnet mir it happens to me.
eg Itegt mir t)iel baran it is very
important for me.
eg fommt mir tor 1 it seems to
eg fd^eint mir / me.
eg faUt mir ein it occurs to me.
eg ift mir Xoo^ I feel well,
eg ift mir tcarm*) I am warm.
U)ag fel)lt 3^uen? what is the
matter with you?
VOK gel)t eg -31)11 en? how are you?
eg ge^t mir gut I am well.
6) By a transposition of the subject after the verb, the
latter takes sometimes an impersonal form both in the singular
and plural, the (first) place of the subject being filled up by
t§ (in English there) . This however is rather poetical, as :
(Sg tarn ein 2Banbrer t?ie ©trage entlang.
There came a wanderer along the road.
@g gingen brei 3fager auf bie 3fagt).
Three sportsmen went shooting.
(Sg fielen §agelfi3rner fo gvoJ3 me Xaubcxi'^im.
There fell hailstones as large as pigeons' eggs.
7) The impersonal form appears also in the Passive Voice of
active and neuter verbs**) in the 3rd person as:
(Sg toirt) in ^eutfdjlanb mel ge[ungen unb getanjt.
Tlan fingt unb tan^t t)iel in S)euttd}Ianb.
They sing and dance much in Germany.
There is much singing in Germany.
(gg tijurbe t)iel gegefjen, aBer mel^r getrunfen.
Much was eaten, but more drunk.
Sg tcirb mel t>on bem ^ieg gerebet (or gefprod)en).
There is much talking about war.
or:
Words.
2)ag §Dl5 the wood.
ber Setriiger the cheat.
bie Se!^arrlic^!eit perseverance.
bie ©d)n)iertg!eit the difficulty.
eine 33rille a pair of spectacles.
bag 2;intenfa6 the inkstand.
ber ^!^ilofopl)' the philosopher.
bie ^teiber pL clothes.
bie ®efeEf(^aft the company.
bag ®d^auf^)iel play, spectacle,
ilberloin'ben to overcome.
IjeE clear, offen open.
bauern to last, noc^ still,
bie 2BeIt the world, bod) yet.
etutg eternal, everlasting,
glauben to believe, to think,
^eftig violent, l^anbeln to act.
folglid) consequently.
*) We cannot say: t(^ bin tcarm; we may say also : ic^ l^abc
t»arm ; the best way is : eg ift mir toarm. Likewise do not say : i c{| b in
talt; but: ic^ l^aht tdt or id; friere, or eg friert mtc^.
**) Like the Latin itur, venitur, ventum est (see the Note p. 220).
15*
228 Lesson 33.
Eeading Exercise. 84.
1. ©c^neit e^? 9^eiti, e^ fdjneit nicl}t; e§ tepet. (S^ tuirb
bait) l^ageln. (S3 toaxt ^ut, tDenn eg fd)nette. (S3 tDiirfce fd^neien,
tcenn eS nic^t fo !alt tudre. Sben (just now) fjat e« getonnert.
(S3 tDirb itod^ meljr fconnern. ^ie ^dlte ift Corbet (over), e3 taut.
Sd} glaube, bafe e3 morgen tauen \mrt). (g^ reut mid^, t)a§ ic^
geftevu nid)t na^ SJ^ami^eim gegangeu bin. (S3 njirb (Sie reuen,
tcenn ©ie l)a3 *i|3fert) nid)t faufen. 2Bie gefdUt e3 3l;nen in $ari3?
@3 gefdttt mir [et)r ttjo^l. (S3 n)unt)evt mid), t>a^ (Sie no^ ^ier
finb. (S3 t}ert)ne§t mic^, bag tc^ iiidjt bagemefen bin. (Sd>eint
e3 3f^nen nid)t, al3 ob (as if) einige3 »on biefem ^olje gefto^len
tr)orben njdre? (S3 fdngt an, !^ell ju n^erben.
2. (S3 niil^t 3fi)nen nid)t3, fo t?iele 33iic^er ju faufen, toenn
®te fie nic^t lefen. S3 folgt au3 3l)ver (Sr^dt^lung (from your
report), bag ber ^aufmann ein 33etriiger i|t. (S3 fel)lt ^oute
ein ®d)uter. (S3 reut mx&t, meine Ut)r toerfauft ju l^aben. (S3
giebt etn en:ige3 Seben. SBenn e3 !ein ett>ige3 Seben gdbe, fo
iDdren bie Tkn\d}cn ung(iidlid)er al3 bie Xiere. 2)Ht (by) 33es
barrlid)!eit gelingt e3 un3, aUe '3d)tt)ierigfeiten ju iibernjinben.
(S3 geftel mir fe^r tuo^l in ber (53efellfd}aft jener jungen Seute.
(S3 giebt Written fiir atte Slugen, folglid) iinrb e3 and} eine (some)
fiir bie S^rigen geben. (S3 ftanb ein SBagen cor bem §aufe.
JittfgaBc. 85.
1. It rains; yesterday 2it » snowed. Last (Se^ten) winter
zit 1 snowed much. It will soon rain. It has rained all night
(bie gan3e9^ad}t), and this morning [ace.) ait ifreezes. It thunders;
do you hear it? How many times (mal) has it thundered?
It has just (eben) lightened. I did not think that it would
lighten. Is [there any] ink (^^inte) in your inkstand? There
will be a great many (fe^r t)icle) walnuts this year. There are
streets in London which are two miles long. There are
people who believe nothing. There have been philosophers
at (ju) all times. Is [there a] fire in my room? No, Sir, there
is no fire .in your room; but I will make [one] directly (gleic^).
2. The boy is hungry and thirsty. It is very important
to me to know what they do. I shudder when (roenu) I think
how many [of the] poor 4have mo 2 warm s clothes, although
(obfd)on) it 3 freezes iso shard (ftar!). We wonder that he is
silent (fc^tDetgt). It does not seem to me that you W// succeed.
Mr. Dean had company last night (geftem 5lbcnb) ; they played
and danced much. It occurs to me that I have left my door
open. It appears that he has not attended (fi^ . . . abgegeben
l)at) to (mit) that business. It is proper to act so. There
were already a great many people in the ball-room (im 33afl'=
faal) when I arrived. There was no play yesterday. I do
not think , that there can be a more beautiful old castle in
the world than that of Heidelberg. Is there any news (any-
thing new) ? There is no news (nothing new) to-day.
Lesson 33.
229
jDonitert e^
Conversation.
3a, eg ^at fel)t [tarl gebli^t.
©lauben @ie, bag eS ^eute Slac^t 3fc^ gtauBe ntc^t, baf^ eg gefrieren
gefrieren tcirb?
2Bte gefciHt eS 3ft)neit in Sonbon ?
§at eg 3^rem ^ruber in 2lme*
ri!a gef alien?
5ft eg fatt?
i^e^U etoag an biefem ®elbe?
©lauBen ©ie, bafe bag ^Better
fic^ dnbem (change) tcirb?
njtrb; aber eg tcirb fdjneien.
©g gefatlt mir \el}X iuo^I.
Sg f(^eint, bag eg it)m fe^r gut
gefaUen ^at.
9^ein, eg ift nidjt nte^r !alt.
3a, eg fe^Ien brei 9Jfarl.
(Sg fc^eintmirfo ; tcenigftengfangt
eg an, to arm ju hjerben.
2BiTb eg biefeg 3al)r gut en SSein ^ie ^tebteute*) (vine -growers)
gefcen'
©enitgt eg, meinen 9^amen
untetfc^reiben ?
2Bag fet)(t i^m?
3Bag terbriegt (Sie?
2Bag ift 3f)nen gefc^e^en?
SBarum finb ©te fo traurig?
3ft nD(^ ^la^ fiir mic^ au
fer 53an! (bench)?
®iebt eg ettuag 9^eueg?
fagen, ^a^ eg fe^v ml SKein
geben tt)ixb.
ju 9^ein, ©ie niiiffen auc^ bag^atum
Beifiigen (add the date),
eg fei)len i^m ^leiber unb ®elb.
@g toerbxiegt mi(i), bag id^ ^u
§aufe bleiben mug.
(gg fc^tiDinbelt mir.
(gg fc^merjt mic^, bag id} meinen
treuen 4)iener tjerloren "^abe.
bie* 2Bir njerben 3^nen (for you)
$(a^ mad)en.
3d) n^eig ni^tg, atg (except) bag
§err ^. geftern geftcrben ift.
Eeading-lesson.
2)ic S3ienc unb btc Xanhe, The bee and the doTe.
(Sin 33ien^en fiet in einen 33ac^i.
3)ieg fal^ toon oben^ eine Xaube;
(Sie brac^ ein 33ldtt(ben t)on ber Saube^
Hub iuarf'g i^r ju. 'SDag 33iend)en fd^tcamm barnac^*
Unb !^atf fid) gliidUc^ aug bem SSad^. —
9^a(^ fur^er ^eit biefelbe Xaube
(Sag luieber frieblid)^ auf ber Saube.
®a6 fc^Iic^ ein 3dger leig^ ^eran
Unb (egte feine i^Iinte an^.
(S^on ^atte er ben §a'^n9 gefpannt:
!iDag 33ien(^en !am unb ftad^ ibm in bie §anb;
^uff! ging ber ©c^ug baneben (aside);
i)ie Saube flog batjon. — SSem banfte^o fie i^r Seben?
1) brook. 2) from above. 3) arbour. 4) after or to it. 5) quietly.
6) then. 7) softly. 8) btc gititte antcgen to aim, or to take aim at. 9) ben
§al)n f^annen to cock the gun. lOj banfen (instead of toerbanf en) to owe.
*) or bte SBtnjer.
230
Thirty-fourth Lesson.
REFLECTIVE VERBS.
(3itTucf6e3iigIic^e 3"tWortcr.)
1) When the action of a verb returns upon the sub-
ject from which it proceeds, the verb is called rpflective
or reflected. Such verbs are therefore conjugated with
two pronouns, one the subject and the other the object.
The latter stands commonly in the Accusative, with a
few verbs in the Dative, as:
3»d^ betrage mtd^ I behave [myself).
^r jelcfcnete ftcf) clVl^ he distinguished himself.
All such verbs are conjugated with the auxiliary
This reflective form is very extensively employed in
German, whilst in English most of these verbs are used
in the neuter sense, i. e. without an objective personal
pronoun, as: I rejoice td^ freue mid).
Conjugation of a reflective regular verb.
©t(t| frcuctt to rejoice, to be glad.
Indicative Mood.
Present.
3fd^ freue mtrf) I rejoice
bu freueft V\&) thou rejoicest
er freut fic^ he rejoices
fie fieut fid) she rejoices
man freut fid) people rejoice
toir fveuen uu§ we rejoice
ij)t freuet euc^ 1 ye rejoice
®ie fveuen fid) j you rejoice
fie freuen ftc^ they rejoice.
Perfect.
3d) l)abe mid) gefveut
bu l)aft bic^ gefreut
er !^at fi(^ gefreut k.
First Future.
^6) iuetbe mid) freuen I shall
t)U njirfl t>id) fveuen [rejoice
er njitt) fid) fveuen k.
Imperfect.
3(^ fveute mid) I rejoiced
t)u fieuteft t>i(^ thou rejoicedst
er fveute fid) he rejoiced
fie fveute fid> she rejoiced
man fveute fid) people rejoiced
iriv fveuten un8 we rejoiced
tl)r fvcutct end) 1 ye rejoiced
©ie fveuten fid) j you rejoiced
fie fveuten fid) they rejoiced.
Pluperfect.
3c^ '\)aiit mid) gefveut
t>u I)atteft bid) gcfveut
ev t)attc fic^ gefveut 2C.
Conditional.
3d) tDUvbe mid) fveuen I should
bu trihbeft bid) fi'euen [rejoice
ev nmvbe fid) fceueu k.
*) The only exception is fi(i^ bctru^t fein to be conscious of,
which has in the Present tense. \6^ bin mir bctDU^t, and in the
compound tense: id^ Bin mir kunif?t getrcfcn :c.
Reflective verbs. 231
Second Conditional.
3c^ ttjiirbe mid) gejteut l^abeit
t)U iDitvbeft bi(^ gefreut l^aben :c.
Subjunctive.
Present. Imperfect.
jDag t(^ mt(^ freue 3)ag td^ mt(^ freuete
bag bu bi(^ freueft k. bag bu bt(^ fteueteft k.
Perfect. Pluperfect.
%c^ erinnerc mid) uiit 35er»
gnilgcn on jenen Xag (or ieneS Xai^cS).
f) I am mistaken icb irrc mid). Perf. xi^ ^abe mid^ gcirrt.
if) fid) ifummer mad)cn um to grieve for.
iif) ^erkffn, without fid), means to leave.
Reflective verbs. 233
fic^ toerfc^affen to procure.
{x&j cornermen to take the re-
solution, makeup one's mind
f{^ toorfteflen to imagine.
[tc^ tce!^e tl)UU to hurt one's self.
[id) jujte'^eit to incur.
*fid) fd)meic^eln to flatter one's self.
Examples.
S. M) f(i)meid)(e mir Fl. roix fd)meid)eln un§
t)U fd)metd)etft t)tr ©ie fd)metd)eln fid)
er fd)meid)elt fid). fie f(^meid)e(n fic^.
3fc^ bilbe mir ein I imagine.
5) Some phrases with reflective verbs:
2Bie Befinfcen ©ie fic^? how do you do?
^emiil^en @le fid) nid)t do not take the trouble.
@ebeu ®ie fid) 9}iiit)e take pains.
@r er^olt fic^ tangfam he recovers slowly.
-3(^ erinnre mid) feiue^ ^fiameitiS I recollect his name.
®ie iiren fid), meiu §exr you are mistaken, Sir.
(Sr J)at fid) ganj t>etanDevt he is quite altered.
3)a§ SBetter dnt)ert fid) the weather changes.
3d) BegeBe mid) nad) ^ranffurt I go to Frankfort.
(gr berilft fid) auf mid) he appeals or refers to me.
3(^ ent^alte mic^ t)eg SBeinei^ I abstain from wine.
(S§ ereignete fid) it happened.
2Bir fixi)len un§ gliidlid) we feel happy.
S)ie i^iire i3ffnete fid) the door opened,
^J^efimen ©ie fid) in ad)t take care, be careful.
©e^eu ©ie fid) sit down, take a seat.
®ie ^adjc t)erlE)d(t fid) fo the matter is so.
©ie jerftreuten fid) they dispersed.
SKentjen ®ie fid) an ben ^onig.
Apply (address yourself) to the king.
®ie tdd)ten fic^ an i^rcn ^^einben.
They revenged themselves on their enemies.
Words.
!Der Tint the courage. bie ^?e(^nung the account, bill.
fi^ aug^ei^nen to excel. ber ^Sorgefe^te the superior.
auf'ftef)en to get up. bag S3etragen the behaviour.
Betoeifen to prove. ^^ufiS frequently.
uBetjeugen to convince. unfd)ult>ig innocent.
t)a§ Uvteit the sentence. t)e"i:tl)eit)igen to defend.
ta§ 53oi-^aBen the design. auf'geBen to give up.
bie 9?ul)e rest. ^ urteiten to judge.
bie 3iii^iebent)eit satisfaction. Betreffen, ange^en to concern.
toertijunben to wound. termeiben to avoid.
bie 9^ation', pi. — en, nation. t>exle^en to hurt.
234 Lesson 34
«
Reading Exercise. 86.
1. (Sie ivren fid), ntein ^etr; id) bin nid)t ber (the one),
fcen iSie fud)en. ^exidijen (Sie, ic^ l)ahe mid) tuirflid) (really)
geint. ?!J^iltiat)e8 ;^cid)nete fid) in ter ©d)Iad)t bei 9J?arat^on
au^. ®eti>oI)neii ®ie fid), friil) aufjufte^en. ®er 2BoIf nd^erte
fidb mir auf (within) ^eljn (2d)Titte (paces). ?D^it^rit>ate8 t>er;
tcitigte fid) mit groJ3em 9J?ute gegcn bie Stonier, ^enn ®ie
fid) iiber (at) ba^ ©liid anbrer freuen, fo bemeift biefe^, bag
(Sie ein gute^ ^erj ^aben.
2. 2Bir l^aben un^ bemiibt, it)n toon' feinem UnreAt (of his
being wrong) ju itber^engen; aber cr fonnte fid) nid)t entfc^Iie^cn,
fein iBorl^aben auf^ngeben. 3)er Slonig njeicjevte fic^, t)a^ Urteil
in unterfd)i*eiben. (5ie njiirben fic^ beffer befmben, n?enn (Sie fid)
gen3i3l)nten, ^ufiger in fcer frifd)en 2uft fpajieren ^n ge'^en. -36
fe^ne mid) nad) dln^e. -Sc^ ircrbe mic^ bemii^en, afle^ ^n 31)rer
3ufrict)cn^eit p tooUbtingen. -Sd) t^iirte mid) fd)dmcn, fo etwa§
(such a thing) ju t^nn. T)cx junge 9)?ann ^at ftc^ imntev gut
betragcn.
JlufgaDc. 87.
1. We rejoice greatly (fei^t) to see you. I am mistaken.
You have also been mistaken. I wash myself every [ace.) day
with cold water. Charles has w^ounded himself with his pen-
knife. All nations long for (nad)) liberty. The enemies have
surrendered (themselves) i) . If they had not surrendered (them-
selves), 2 they I would have all been killed 2). Dear Sir, have
mercy on me (meiner). Nobody must imagine himself to be
without faults. That man was a bad father; he did not care
for (um) his children. I recollect to have seen that lady, but I
cannot remember her name {Gen.). As (toie) I see, »you i enjoy
(a) good health {Gen.).
2. The bill of my tailor amounted to a hundred and
fifty marcs. I hastened to pay it, as soon as (fobalt) aU) I sgot
(befam) i money. Young people must not take the liberty (,)
to judge of (ilber, Ace.) things which do nat concern them.
A good Christian does not revenge himself on his enemy.
We were mistaken in (in) the name of the street. Do not feign
[to be] 1) so innocent; be ashamed of 3) your behaviour and
resolve to avoid xsuch la 3 fault 4 for the future (fiinftig). He
who is conscious (fid) benjuf^t ift) of having (to have) done his
duty, (^flid)t,/.) may quietly await (entgegenfe^en) the judgment
(feem Urteil) of his superiors.
1) Remember that words enclosed in a parenthesis (...) we
to be translated, and words in brackets [. . .1 are to be Uft out.
2) Second Conditional, see p. 131.
3) fi6) [d)amen fto be ashamed) governs cither the genitive eate
or the preposition iibcr with the Accusative.
Lesson 34.
235
Conversation.
■3d) freue mi(^, ©te ju fe'^en,
mein §err; tcte fceftnben
me befint)et ftd) ^^r 33ruber,
t)er (§exT) fapitan?
§aben ®ie fid) entfc^Ioffen , "Die
Steife 3U madjen (or ju unter*
ne'fimen) ?
5luf iDen toerlaffen (rely) ©ie
SKertjen ©ie 3^i' §au§ ber^
f auf en ?
©lauben ©ie, ba§ id) mi(^ t)et*
f^aten (be late) t^eri^e?
iBor luem fiivd}ten ©ie fic^?
SBilben (Sie fid) ein, aUein tueife
3U fein*^
©d^amt fid) biefer ^iingliug ni&it
liber fein Setragen?
§aben (Sie Suft (a mind), mit
mir tn§ !5^^eater jit gel)en?
§aben ©ie fic^ terle^t (or ixse'^e
getfjau) (hurt)?
SKte ^o(^ belief fic^ bte ^ed)nun3
3ft)reg aSirteg^ (landlord)?
SBomit befc^dftigen (occupy) *)
(3ie ftc^ je^t?
2Birt) 5!)re iOJutter ^alb ^ier^er
!ommen ?
2Bai'um finb ©ie nic^t frii^er
getommen?
SBerben ©ie fic^ urn eine (SteHe
(appointment) betuetbeit (to
apply) ?
©oU bet Sf)nft fi(^ an feinem
„ ^einbe rad)en?
Uber toag (hjoriiber) beflagt fic^
3f^re i^utter?
•3(^ banfe 5'£)nen, ic^ beftnbe
mid), ®Dtt fei ®an!! fe^v
n?o^l.
(5r befinbet fid) nt(^t too^^l,
er l)at fic^ erfciltet.
3d) ^abe mid) nod) nic^t ent*
fd)Ioffen; aber id) njerbe mi^
balb entfcbliegen.
-3d) cerlafje mid) auf bie Oiite
beg iS'iivften.
©ie uren fic^, tc^ n^erbe e3 nicbt
i3er!aufen.
SBenn ©ie fc^neU ge'^en, iuerben
©ie fic^ nid)t toevfpdten.
3fc^ fitrd)te mid) toorbiefem^unb.
9?ein, aber id) gtaube, bie ®a(^e
beffer §u cerfte'^en, aU anbre.
3)Dd) ! e§ f(^eint, ba^ er fid) f d)dmt;
er fommt nid)t met)r ju nn'3.
O \a, tDenn ®ie tijarten tuoHen,
big tc^ wid) angeKeibet ^aht.
■3a, meine §anb blutet; ic^ "^abe
mid) an einem ^f^agel »erlejjt.
©ie belief fid) auf breiunbad^tjig
marl
M) le[e ®d)iCterg „Sieb t)on ber
@(ode" (song of the bell).
3d) ujeig nid)t, hjann fie fommt,
aber ic^ fe^ne mic^, fte^ufe^en.
SKir ^ben ung tm SBalbe Derirrt.
3d) ^ahe mic^ fc^on um me^rere
benjorben; aber big je^t (as
yet) ^abe i(^ !eine erbalten.
9^ein, Sl)riftug ^at geleljrt, bag
man feine i^einbe lieben fott.
©ie be!(agt fid) iiber bag S3e*
tragen it)reg 35etterg.
*j ober: What do you busy yourself about now!
236
Thirty-fifth Lesson.
ON THE ADVERBS.
I'SScn ben UmftanbStDiirtern.;
1) Adverbs are words destined to modify verbs, ad-
jectives or other adverbs. They therefore denote manner^
place, time, order, motion^ relation, comparison, number,
quantity, quality, affirmation^ doubt, negation, interrogation.
Adverbs are not variable, except that those of manner,
quality and time, are subject to the degrees of comparison.
Almost all adjectives are used as qualifying adverbs without
.changing their form; not only in the positive but also
in the comparative and superlative degrees. Ex. :
3)ev !Diener iDurbe retc^ belofint.
The servant was richly rewarded.
liefer 58rief ift fc^ijn gefc^rieben.
This letter is beautifully written.
3Rein 33net ift fd)oner gefc^rieben olU ^\)\tx.
My letter is better written than yours.
Note 1. In the Superlative however they cannot take the
article as in English, but are preceded by am or auf^, as:
am ^od}ften or aufg I)cd}fte; am fd)onften, auf§ fd)i5nftc; am
ftdrfften, auf^ ftarffte 2C.
Note 2. A few words take also the termination en^ , as:
^i3d}fteng, beftemS fd)cnfteng, fpdteftett^ ic.
2) Adverbs of manner or of time are sometimes placed
in English before the verb; in German they must always
follow it. Ex. :
My friend gladly accepted the offer.
Wldii i^reuub na[)m t^a^ 5(nerbieteu gcrn an.
I never go out tc^ gel^e nie au^.
The adverbs of quality, being adjectives, cannot
therefore be enumerated. Those of place, time, quantity,
comparison, affirmation and negation are the following:
1. Adverbs of place.
2Bo where?
7tDDl)iu*) where, whither.
-l-ti3Dl)er where .. from, whence?
l)ier here.
•l-t)ievI)CV here, hither, this way.
l)ierauvJ hence.
*) Those marked f are used with verbs of motion or direction;
those with W both for rest and motion; the others not marked,
are used only with verbs denoting rest.
Adverbs.
237
down.
t)a, bott \ there,
bafelbft I yonder,
fba^iu \ there, thither,
ft)Ort^tn I that way.
barin therein, within,
augen 1 outside,
braugen j out of doors.
»on augen from outside.
au^'tDenbtg outside.
Sen } ---^^
Don inneu from within.
tn'tuenbtg inside.
oBeit \ up stairs,
broBen | (there) above.
il)inau|*) I g^^.^^_
unten \ down stairs,
brunten ( below.
i^erunter*)
T^eraB
tjorn before, in the front
I)inten behind,
-raufmart^ upwards.
•j-aBtt>dvt§ downwards.
-j-toortudrtS forwards.
2
2Bann? when?
eben just.
eben je^t just now.
je^t or nun now.
(^egennjdrti^ at present.
jemalS or je ever (before)
nientviIS or nie never,
meiften^ mostly,
fonft, e'^ebem \
fl'ii'^er, t^tx sooner, earlier
iernad^' \ afterwards,
nad)'^er j after [adv.).
fpdter later.
irutf'UngS i ^^^^^^^^^-
au^tr»drtS abroad, outward.
-i-fred)tg right, to the right.
\\lmU left, to the left.
ilbte^feitS on this side.
ff jenfeitS on that side.
baneBen close by, near by.
gegenii'Ber opposite.
anbergtiJD | elsewhere,
-|-anber§n)o'^tn / somewhere else.
irgenbtuo \ somewhere,
ftrgenbttjo'^in j anywhere,
nirgenbg nowhere.
ii'Berallf^in) ) everywhere,
attent^alBen / anywhere.
ring^Uin all around.
f-^-fUub !^erum round about.
+3Ufan.'men \ ^^^^_
beifamnten j ^
-J-f au§einanber asunder, apart.
iltDeit ) far, far off.
fern j off, at a distance.
untern?ego' on the way.
fnac^ §aufe (or l^eim) home,
ju §aufe (batjeim) at home.
Adverbs of time.
einft, einftmal^ once,
einmal once, one day.
neuUc^ the other day.
formerly.
lately, of late.
a little while ago,
not long ago.
fiirsUc^ 1
iiingft /
unldngft \
toot tur^em /
'"'?« i before.**)
tiinftig, in^ulunft for the future.
mand)mal 1
5UtDetIen / sometimes.
BiSiDeikn J
bann unb icann now and then.
*) The adverbs ^inauf, ^Imm, Ijeretti, l^erauS 2C. are to be con-
sidered as separable prejixes, and are frequently preceded by a sub-
stantive with the prep, gu, as: (Sr fam jur (ju ber) 2:pre l^erein.
S)er a3ogeI ftog ;^um ^enfter l^tnaua throup^h the window etc. Con-
cerning the difference between I)er= and ^tu=. See p. 211, Obs. 2.
**) The English before is adverb when found after its noun.
Ex.: An hour before eine ©tunbc toorl^er or jutoor. When it
238
Lesson 35.
oft, oftmalg often,
^dufig frequently,
[elten seldom.
toon nun an from this time forth,
con je^t an henceforth,
feitbem gince then,
^leid) \ directly,
^ogteic^ / immediately.
balD soon.
balb — bait) sometimes — some-
times,
anfang^. jnerji at first,
julc^t at last,
ibi^l^er hitherto, till now.
bi§ jefet as yet, till now.
tDie1)er again,
evft only, not — till.
ent>lid) at last, at length.
Samate } *''^°' ^' ^hat time,
tmmev, aUejeit always.
OUT or fiir immer for ever.
[d)on, bereitg already, ever.
nod) still, yet.
nod) einmal once again, once
more.
nod) nid)t not yet.
nod) nie never before, never yet.
^eute to-day.
geftcrn yesterday.
toorgeftern the day before yester-
moigen to-morrow. [a^ ndd)fte Wlal the next time.
5um letjtenmal for the last time,
urn 1 (cin) Ul)r at one o'clock.
im 5Infang in the beginning,
am Snt>e at the end.
am 5el)nten 9)iai |^ on the 10th
am lOten ^)lai I of May.
t)ie[en**) 2}Jovgen this morning.
eine§ 3;age^*) one day.
eincS '2lbent5§ one evening.
l)eut ju 2^age now-a-days.
precedes the noun, it is preposition and means t)or. Ex.: .Before
an hour to or etner @tuubc. When before begins a sentence, it is
conjunction and translated: bctoor or cl^c. (See p. 248, a.)
*) The Genitive of nouns is used for adverbs of time, when
the time is indejinite.
**) The Accusative of nouns is used for adverbial expressions
of time, "when the time is distinctly expressed.
Adverbs.
239
nac^fter STage one of these days,
um Dftern about Easter,
gegen U U^r about 11 o'clock,
em tuenig »ot 10 Uf)r 1 by ten
Bi^ jet^u U^r J o'clock.
6et feonnenaufgang at sunrise,
bet Sage^anbrud) at day-break.
t)or 8 iagen a week ago.
»or 14 Sagen a fortnight ago.
^ur ^sit in the time.
ii^ je^t nod) ntd^t not as yet.
erft morgen not till to-morrow.
Dret 2;:age (ang for three days,
feit brei Xagen these three days.
^tDetmat tjeg Xao^t^ twice a day.
einen XaQ um ben 1 every
anl^ern, aEe 2 2;agej other day.
tjen ganjen 3^ag all day.
!£)eute iiber 8!Jage this day week,
■^eute iiBer 14 S^age this day fort-
%aa, fiir2^ag day by day. [night,
auf einige ^dt for a while,
eine jeitTang for a time.
i)ou 3^it 311 3^^t f^°^ ^i°^® *o time.
»or jetten in old times,
an einem fd)onen SJ^orgen on a
fine morning. [night,
in einet falten 3^a(^t on a cold
Words.
®er l!auf mann the merchant.
t)er Soffel the spoon.
Die Slrjnei the medicine.
Der B^-'^S^ the witness.
t)ie §ant)lnng the action.
I5a^3 Sager the camp.
Die (Scfe the corner.
t)er ^f arret the clergyman.
t)er SSettler the beggar.
fuc^en to search.
^offen to hope.
t)er !l)tenft the service,
iibel gelaunt ill humored, cross,
grogniiitig magnanimous, gen-
erous,
alletn alone.
iDtdfommen welcome.
gefdUtgft if you please.
ein'tDiUtgen to consent,
beldftigen to annoy, to trouble,
unauf^orllc^ incessantly,
alfo, folglid) consequently.
Keading Exercise. 88.
1. 2Bo^er fommen ©ie? 3(^ fomnte tjon 2Bten. JDer 5D^ann,
tcelc^en ©te fuc^en, tx^c^nt nid)t ^ier; er tcoljnt tuett oon I;ier.
®er ^nabe fiel riidtDcirtg in t)en i^dtg. -Sc^ fag au^tDenbig bet
(with) t)em ^utfc^er; bie !J)amen fafeen inhjenbig im Omnibus.
9^inggum tcaren ^einbe. Wan fie^t btefe ^tuet jungen^evren tmmer
beifammen. Wldxi §au« ftel)t red)tg, bag 3^rige Unf§._ ®er §err tft
ntd)t ju §aufe ; fud)en ®ie i^n anber^tDO. ®a§ ®orf liegt feiticdrt^.
3ft 3f)re 9)Zutter unten? 9^ein, fie ift oben. ©ell id) l)iuaufget|en
unb eg ibr fagen ? ^enn ©ie fo gut fein tuollen. -3^ begegnete
bem ^aufmann untertcegS.
2. 3)er tranfe mu^ ftiinbltd^ einen Soffel tooE Slrjnet nel^men.
'3[nfangg tDoUte er nic^t, aber julc^t ttjiUigte er ein. ^on je^t
an tuerbe id) fleij^tger fein; bigl)er i)ahe ic^ ntd)t mel gearbeitet.
9Uematg tcerbe id) jene ©tunbe fiergcfjen. SD^ein S)iener er^alt
See the foot-note p. 238.
240 Lesson 35.
monatIl(!^ je^n Tlaxl, alfo jdl^tUc^ jufammen ^lunbertunbjtuatijlg
Mart. ^euii6) voax td^ 3^uge emer gro^miitigen ^anfclung.
^ormittagg arbeite id), nad)nuttagg gelje id) fpa^ieren. Unfer ^Irjt
ift maud)mal iibel gelauiit. ®ie miifjeu g(eid) iiad^^er tie Statt
tteviaffen. 3)er Df'fisier titt f^ornftreic^S ing Sager Der e^einbe.
Jlitffltt0(f. 89.
1. Where is my stick? You will find ti there in the
corner. I beg your pardon {[6} bitte um ilSevjei^ung), it is not
there; it must be elsewhere. You are welcome everywhere.
Where (whence) does the letter come from? It comes from
America. Come down, if you please. I could find him no-
where. Where is my dog? It is out of doors. The house
of the clergyman is very far off. I was not at home. You
may go home, I have heard it somewhere. Have you searched
everywhere? The one came hither, the other went thither.
I could open the door neither (tijefcer) from within nor (UD(^)
from without. Do as if [aU tDenn) you 3 were {Suh;'.) lat zhome.
2. Did you know him formerly? Yes, I have known
him long. I shall be 2 at (ju) your service 1 directly. *) He
was not often happy, because (meil) he 2 was lidle. He is
more frequently at (in) the coffee-house, than at home. She
has arrived sooner than I. She is zbetter 1 to-day*) than
she was yesterday. Go 2 away 1 instantly. My uncle will al-
ways be satisfied. Could you not come earlier? The next
time 2I ishall**) be 2here ibetimes.*) I am seldom alone.
Have you seen our friend lately? Yes, I saw him the other
day\ and I hope I shall see him 3 again ivery 2 soon. At
present 2 we lare incessantly annoyed by beggars. I am in
the habit (id) pftege) of 'seeing him (to see him) now and then.
4. Adverbs of quantity and comparison.
1B3ie? how? lunnal^e, faft almost, nearly.
tDteuiel, \cAt fe^r? how much? imr, bfo§', aUcin only.
tjtel much. meifkn^ mostly.
met)t more. l)od)[ten§ at the highest, at most.
nod) i some more, luenicjften^ at least.
nod) me^t I any more. fpatclteu^ at the latest.
nod) jtDei two more. anter^ otherwise.
am meiften most. fonft etttjaS anything else.
*) Adverbs of time precede all other adverbs or adverbial
expressions. Time before place.
**) Observe that when an adverb or adverbial expression (see
p. 238) begins the sentence, the verb precedes the subject (see
p. 80, 3).
Adverbs.
241
fe'^r, teAt very or much.
,gu, IVL fe^r too or too much,
gu "Old too much,
ntc^tg nothing,
gar nic^t§ nothing at all.
fein — me^r no more — .
ett»a§ something,
eln ttjenig a little,
^inlangli^ sufficiently,
genug enough,
faum scarcely.
eintgetmaBen \ ^^^^^^^^
getDtffetmat3en j °"^^^^"'*''-
jtcmlic^ tolerably, pretty,
ungefai^r, tfma about,
urn t)iel 1 by far,
bet tDeitem j by a great deal,
um bie §afte by one half.
:noci^ einmal fo \ twice as.
jtueimal fo | as . . . again.
geratje precisely, exactly, just,
fonft ntd)tg nothing else.
fo, eBenfo so, as, thus,
ebenfofe^^r as much,
ebenfonjenig — aU no more —
than.
ebenfaUg, gleic^faE^ likewise.
g(eid)fam as it were,
um fo me^r the more,
um fo iDeniger the less,
fogar', felbft even, gait^ quite.
ganjUd) wholly, entirely.
toofleu'Dg completely, quite,
ganj unt) gar thoroughly,
teilnjeife, teil^ partly,
fcefonberg \ especially,
tn§befont)ere j particularly.
l)au^tfa(^Uc^ chiefly,
uberl^aupt at all, generally,
im allgemeinen in general.
5. Adverbs of affirmation, doubt and negation.
3a, ja tod), boc^ yes
ja tuo^l o yes, certainly.
aHerbing^ by all means,
jebenfafe at all events.
getulB surely, certainly.
fid)erlic^ \ to be sure,
freilid) j of course.
|urtt)a!^r', toa'^rU(^ truly,
loirllid) 1 really,
in ber 2;^at j indeed,
geru or gerue*) willingly,
ungern unwillingly,
itetn no.
ntc^t not.
gar nld)t not at all.
feine^tDegg \ ,
t)ur(^au§ nid^t j ^
no means.
U)al)vl)aftig truly.
pfaHig by chance.
\3ielleid)t, ttxoa perhaps,
fd^tuerlid) hardly, scarcely,
o^ne 3ii5eif el without or no doubt.
t3ergeben§, umfonft \ . .
uergeblic^ I ^"^
burc^au^' absolutely, quite.
au(^ nic^t nor — either, nor.
md)t einmal not even,
uiematg or nie never.
nid)t mel)r no more,
nimmevme^r never more,
im ©egenteil on the contrary.
toielmebr rather.
6. Adverbs of interrogation,
SGBann (toenn) when? tDieDtel . . nod^ how much more?
iDarum why? iDtetJiele noc^ how many more?
xm^aih' \ ^v.„f„_„9 tDie lang(e) how long?
itjeSn^e'gen j ^^^erelore.^ ^^^ where?
Xo'xe how? njo'^in' whither, where?
iDiefo how so? njol^er' whence?
ttjiet)iel(e) how much (many) ? tt3Dt)urcb by what means? etc.
*) See the foot-note **) p. 242 and Conversation, p. 244.
OTTO, German Conv.-Grammar. 16
242
Lesson 35.
tjiernml four times. [more.
noc^ einmal once again, once
liod) jttjeimal twice again,
juerft' at first,
julel^t at last.
einerlei of one kind, the same,
jnjeierlei of two kinds.
aUer(ei of all kinds.
7. Adverbs of order.
(Srften^, fiirS erjte first (ly), t)reimal three times.
jtceiten^ secondly.
tritteng thirdly.
t)ierten8 fourthly etc.
ferner further.
]^en!a(^ hereafter, afterwards.
bann, fobann then.
einmal once.
jt»eimal twice.
Note. In German there is also another way of forming
adverbs; namely by adding the word „tDeife" to various sub-
stantives and adjectives, as:
KcUmetfe partly.*) ^crbeuttjeifc in flocks.
ftUdtDeifc piece-meal. tropjentDeije by drops etc.
l^aufctttDcifc by heaps, in crowds, mogltci^ertocife possibly.
maffentDeife in masses. gtildlid^ertDeil'e fortunately.
ftromtDcife by streams. ungludltd^ertDeije unfortunately.
8. Degrees of comparison.
Besides the adjectives used as adverbs, which admit
of a comparison, the following true adverbs are also
subject to the degrees of comparison:
Comp. Super I.
Befjer better. am beften or aufS befle the best.
2Bo^I well,
bait) soon.
Ifviiljcii sooner,
\el)ei* j ere.
gem**) (I like) lieber (I like
willingly,
oft often.
fe^r very,
libel, atg evil.
totel much,
toentg little.
better)
ofter oftener.
arger
(ublev)
worse.
mcl)r more.
ftDcnigev \,
l(minber) 1 ^^^^•
f am e^eften (am friit>eften) the
\ soonest.
' balbtgft very soon.
am liebfteu (I like best).
am l^dufigften (am ofteflen) the
oftenest.
I)i3d)ft, dufjerft extremely,
am dvgften (am iibelften) the
worst,
am meiften most,
(am ttjeuigften 1 , ,
I (am minDeften) }^^^ ^''^^^-
*} The Latin partim, frustatim, gregatiin etc.
**) ®crn, ticbcr, am licbjlcu correspond with the English
/ like, I like better, I like best, and are mostly connected with a
verb, as:
^6) \p\tU gcrn I like to play or playing.
3c^ tanjc Hcbcr I like better to dance or dancing.
34 ge^c am Itcbflcn f^ajtcren I like best walking.
Lesson 35. 243
Words.
jDa§ (Spric^njort the proverb. gefc^tcft skilful, fcften to cost.
ber 9^ebel the mist, fog. toon neuem anew.
ba^ 3wi'^n^i"^ntre[fen meeting, angreifen to attack.
t)a§ ®efid)t the face, counte- ftiUen to appease, to quiet.
flug wise, prudent. [nance. t»erpfltd)ten to engage.
bag 35erfpYec^en the promise. ge^ord)en to obey.
t?ag SDfurren the murmurs. 'Die 5D^ei(e the mile.
t)er 33Drfc^la9 the proposal. treilUd} faithfully.
toerfcerben to spoil. entfommeii to escape.
erftaunt surprised, astonished, toericerfen to reject.
tt)ond)t I , . , . ,. , Xid)ti3 correctly.
bumm I ^^^Pi^' *°o^i^^- au^.fe^>en to look.
unt)0i:fid}ti3 improvident, heedless.
Reading Exercise. 90.
1. 2Bie '^abeit er fonimen ®ie , mein 3f(^ !omme »on ^6(n (Cologne) .
§aben ©te biefe ^elfe ju (on) ^ein, ju (by) 2Baf(er; ic^ veife
gu^ ober 5U SBagen ^entad)t? lieber ju SSaffev al^ 5U Sant).
3tft ^^re (Sd)tijefter ju ipaufe? ^'^ein, fie ift auijcjegangen.
2Bo ift 3f^v ^rutev? (Sr ift ^eute n?a^rfd)einlic^ in un*
ferni ©aiten.
SSann !ommt er nad) §aufe? (5r luirt) ge^en ad)t U^r fommen.
5fd) l^abe (Ste latige ni6t gefe^en ; 3c^ tuar meiften^ ju §aufe ; ic^
tt)o tijaren ©te? tuar nid)t ganj tuo!^!.
2Bie mele SBorter fcU ic^ lernen? SS^enigftenS jiuei ©eiten (pages).
2Bie finben (like) (Sie bag §aug (£5 ift intuenbig fe^r fd)6u ; abet
beg §en;u ^. ? augiuenbig fie^t e§ alt aug.
SBoHen Dn SDienfc^en tuaren ^^w^*-*" (witnessed) biefe«
(2>c^aufpielg (scene).
1) square.
Conjunctions. 245
2)er 2me fprang (jtimmt92 an] ben avmen SO^cnfc^en log ; obex
pli5^U^ BIteb er ftct^eu, njebelte^ mit bent (3d)n3eife, ppfte^ t)ott
t^reube um i^n ^erum unb lecfte t!^m frennblicfo bie §dnbe. -Seber*
mann tern^unbevte fid)^ unb fragte, me ba§ !omme6.
S)er ©flabe erja^tte folgenbe^:^ „5lt§ id) nieinem §errn
entlaufen n^av, toevBaro; id) mid) in einer §ef)Ie7 mitten in einer
SBiiftes. ^ ®a hm anf einmal biefevScice l)erein, mnfelte^ unb
^eigte mir feine Xal^e i^ in tDeId)ev ein gvoJ3ev S)orn fta!. ^dj 505
i^mii ben ®orn l)evau3, unb ton ber 3cit an (forth) t^erf orcjte 12
mi(^ ber Scnje mit SSilbpret ^'^, unb toir leBten in ber §oI)Ie frieb*
lic^ beifammen. S3ei ber lei^ten Saa^i) tuurben twit gefangen unb
ton einanber getrennti^. 9Jun freut fid^ ba^ gute Xier, mic^
tt}iebet gefunben ju l^aben.
Sitter 53ol! iuar iiber (at) bie !Dan!6arfeit biefe3 n^ilben XkxtQ
ent^iidtis unb hat (aut um ®nabei6 fiir ben ©flatjen unb ben
Sbnjen. 3)er ©flape t»urbe freigelaffen i? unb reid)Iic^ befi^enft^s.
®er SBtue fotgte i'^m tuie ein treuer §unb unb blieb immer Bet
il^m, oltjne jemanb ein Seib (harm) ju t^uni^.
2) fiercely, furiously. 3) to wag (with) his tail. 4) to jump.
5) to 136 astonished. 6) to come to pass. 7) cavern, cave. 8) desert.
9) to whine. 10) paw. 11) for him. 12) to supply. 13) game.
14) separated. 15) delighted, enraptured. 16) pardon. 17) set
free. 18) rewarded. 19) see the 24th lesson.
Thirty-sixth Lesson.
On the Conjunctions.
(S$on ben Stnbettjortern.)
Conjunctions are particles which serve to connect
words with words, and sentences with sentences, in
order to hring them into a certain relation with one
another. This relation can he very different; it may
express either a mere connection, or an opposition, a
condition, comparison, cause, consecution of time, just
as in English.
They have a great influence upon the position of the
verb ; we therefore divide them into three classes accord-
ing to their governing the construction.
1. Class: Co-ordinatiYe Conjunctions.
The following seven conjunctions do not alter the
construction,
imb and.
ofeer or.
benn for, since.
obex or aUein but.
fonbern but (after the neg. not).
fotuo^l — aU both — and.
246 Lesson 36.
Examples.
3fc^ muj3 ju §aufe 6(ci6en, benn id) bin !ranf.
I must stay at home, for I am ill.
®ev (Strang I)at ^^Uigel, ah ex er fann tiid}t fliegeii.
The ostrich has wings, but he cannot fly.
Note. 5lbev is sometimes placed after the subject or even
after the verb, without altering the sense. Ex.:
jDer 35ater aBer \pra6) but the father said.
jDer @trau§ ^at ^^luQzl, cr fann aber ntc^t fliegcn.
Observations.
1) ©onbern contradicts one of the members of the pre-
vious negative clause; it can only be used, if the antecedent
clause contains the negation not, and in a clause which has
not its own subject and verb, completing only the first. Ex.;
^i6)t id^ bin fran!, font) em niein S3ater.
I am not ill, but my father.
Q^ ^alte i^n nid)t fiir bou^l^aft, fonbern fiir ndvrifc^.
I do not think him malicious, but foolish.
Qti^ Ilebe nid}t feine 2;Dd)ter, font>ern feine 9^id^te.
I do not love his daughter, but his niece.
2) But when the second clause has its own subject and verb,
Clbet must be used, even after a negation. Ex.:
3fd) )^ahe i()n nid)t felbft gcfel)en, abet ic^ l^ahc i^m ^e--
fd)rteben.
I did not see him myself, but I wrote to him.
Sr tft nod) nid)t angefommen , abcv njtr evmarten i^n
jeben ^lugenbtid.
He has not yet arrived, but we expect him every moment.
3) If the antecedent contains no negation, but must always
be translated aber or allein, both of which are indifferently
used. Ex.:
Sr iDoUte anfftel)en, ahcx (or aUein) er fonnte nid)t.
2. Class: Adverbial Conjunctions.
Like all other adverbial expressions^ the following
adverbial conjunctions require the inversiofi, that is
an exchange of place between the subject and the verb^
when they begin the sentence or clause.
5I(fc so, thus, therefore.
and) also, too (and) nid)t nor)
an^erticm besides, moreover.
balt> — baft) now — now
sometimes — sometimes.
tann, t>a then.
t^acvc'gcn \ on the contrary.
Ijiiu^egcn I on the other hand.
talker', t?e^nH\]Cu\ therefore, on
ta'rnm, be^f^alb I that account.
Conjunctions.
247
bemna(^ accordingly.
t)ennod) and yet, still,
beffen-un'gea^tet neverthe-
be^gletdjen likewise. [less.
befto 1 the — [with afollow-
Um fo J ing comparative).
t)od), jebod^, \ yet, still,
gIeid)t»o'^l i however,
enttoeber — (ober) either — (or) .
ferner further,
folgltc^ \ consequently,
nttt^iu 1 accordingly,
tnbeffen, unterbeffen mean-
faura scarcely. [while.
litd)t nur 1 fnot only
md)tatIein[-fonbertt aud}^ — but
md)t blogi I also.
ntd)tS*befto*tDentger nevertheless,
noc^ nor. au(^ — nid)t nor.
je^t, nun now, then,
fo so, thus.
fonft else, or else, otherwise,
teilg — tell^ partly — partly.
iiberbie§ besides, moreover.
iibrtgenS as for the rest, how-
toielme^r rather. [ever,
tueber — noi^ neither
IXOdX indeed, it is true.
Examples.
SD^etne ©c^tcefter ift han!, alfo (or be^^alb', be^'tDegen,
ba'rum, ba'I)er, mit'fiin, folglid)) fann fie nid^tabreifen.
^anm Jiatte er biefeg ^ovt gef)3rod)en . .
jDod^ (iebod^, inbeffen) tuav eg fc^on fpat getDox'ben.
fener l^atte e§ met geregnet.
3tDar fonnten iuir ntc^t fcf)en, t»ev e§ iuar; aber (atlein)
xo'ix evfannten feme ©timme (voice).
Words.
3)te (Sc^n?agevin the sister-in- toetteibigen to defend, protect,
fc^aben to injure, hurt. [law.
bie 9^al^rung the food.
ber ©ipfel the top, summit.
ba§ 9?D^r the reed, cane,
fid) btegen to bend.
ru!)ig quietly, nag wet.
erma^nen [Ace.) to speak to.
ernjarten to await.
ijerfd)tDenben to waste.
berSJtitfc^itterthe school-fellow,
bie Dteget the rule,
fort 'fasten intr. to continue.
ba§ gemeine 35Dlf the populace,
begegnen to meet.
Eeading Exercise. 92.
3fd) ^be ben 23rief gef^rieben, unb mein 33ruber \)C»l' as (in the moment when) ; the subject remaining the
same. *)
■3nbem' denotes a short simultaneous action and is often
translated with the English Participle present. Ex.:
■3fut)em icfc in t)ag ^ii"!"^^' trat.
As I entered the room or On (my) entering the room.
3nt)em er niir bic §anb briicfte, fagte cr juniir:
Shaking hands with me, he said to me etc.
3nt)eiu ev feincn 5Ivm auSftred'te stretching out his arm . . .
Oh^\u6)f f>h\^t>nf o()tioI)( though, althongrh.
1) These conjunctions should not be divided. A separation
however sometimes takes place, when two or more mono-
syllables follow, as:
Dbfd)OU id) i^n ai^jXt though I esteem him.
DSgleld) id) arm Bin or ob id) gleid) arm bin.
Although I be poor.
Dbcjieid) er mid) nidjt !ennt though he does not know me.
2) The first of the above three is most used; all however
have the same meaning. When a sentence begins with one
of them, the second member corresponds to it by means oi
t)od) or tennod) (yet) in the 3rd place.
£)b[d)on er nod) jung ift, ^at er (t)od)) fd)on graue §aare.
Although he is still young, he has already grey hair.
So so, if, as.
1) The conjunction fo is not to be confounded with the
adverb fo which modifies the adjectives following it (fo grog,
*) When the subj. changes, „tt>d!^rcnb" must be used.
Conjunctions. 251
fo fd)cn K.) or signifies »in this manner. « — Drau^?gefe^t,bag\supposing,
•j-treim — nur j provided (that).
Itveun -- aud^ noc^ fo though
or if ever so . .
urn . . JU {with the Inf.) inorderto.
Note. Besides these, notice the expressions: ba'Con bag,
baburd) bag, bamit bag, barin bag :c. which have no equivalent
in good English. See less. 45, § 7.
Observations.
1) Lest in the sense: for fear of after a negative clause, is
sometimes translated an^ i\urd)t (bag):
1) See the foot-note 1) p. 253.
2) The French san^ que.
3) Unless means also : c« fci bcnn bag, but this is rather antiouated ;
it occurs often in the Lutheran translation of the holy Bible.
Compound Conjunctions. 255
I did not go there, lest I should disturb him.
Lest after the verb to fear (fiircbten) is rendered simply by baj*.
I feared lest he should die i(^ fiirc^tete, bag er fterben mci^te.
2) Those of the above conjunctions marked f require the
second component to be placed after the subject, and if there
are personal pronouns, also after these, as:
®e^en @ie fd)net(, bamit @te ttir^t iiberrafc^t tuerben.
Go quick, lest you be surprised.
2Benn er mic^ nic^t be^al^lt k. unless he pay me etc.
SBenix er auc& no(^ fo mele 33uc^er ^atte jc.
Though he had ever so many books etc.
3) %\?> bag is used after a negative clause with the word
anber§, when it answers to the English but or but that, be-
fore which otherwise is understood. Ex.:
I don't know but [that] he is alive still.
3(^ toeig nic^t anbev^, al§ bag er nod) leBt.
51 1 § bag is further used to render the English Infinitive
after too . . . for . . A) Ex.:
This news is too good, for me to believe it.
S)iefe 3^ad}rid)t ift ju gut, aU bag id) fie glauben fonnte.
4) The dashes after je — indicate that the whole first
clause is to follow before befto. Ex.:
^t me^r ®te lernen, befto me^r toiffen te is equivalent to g(el(^tt)ie, as:
©otme bte ©onne i!)re ©tra't)ten auf bte Srbe fenbet.
As the sun darts his beams to the earth etc.
3)er 9^eib, fotDie jebe anbre Seibenfc^aft 2C.
Envy as well as every other passion etc.
6) Dfjue bag corresponds with the English but after an
excluding negation, as:
Not an hour passes but I see him.
(S§ t)ergei)t feme ©tunbe, o^ne bag2) id) ll)n fe^e.
7) 2Bie . . . aud), fo . . . aud), take the adjective and the
pronoun between them, as:
2Bie retd) auc^ [or fo reic^ aud)) 3i^r iBater feln mag.
However rich your father may be.
©0 fc^on eg aud) fein mag, fo fann e« mlr boc^ nid)t§ nutjen.
However handsome it may be, it cannot be of any use
to me.
1) The French pour que. — 2) The French sans que.
256 Lesson 36.
8) The dash between fc [e^V — auc^ indicates the place
for the personal pronouns. With this no adjective is used.
(So fe^r x&i i^n aud) gebeteu ^be.
Much as I have begged him.
If the subject is a noun, fo fefjr auc^ need not be separated.
©0 fe^r aud) mein 35ater t^n gebeten ^at.
Much as my father has begged him.
c) Relative Conjunctions.
All adverbs of interrogation have in indirect questio7is
(see p. 145, Note] the value oi relative conjunctions ; there-
fore they require the verb at the end of the clause, as :
2Bann when,
ttjarum why.
XQXt how.
toletjiel how much.
irie lange how long, njorin wherein.
iUD where. JDOVan whereat.
tDD^er whence. hjobei wherewith.
trol)in whereto. tDOt^cn whereof.
iDDt)Urc^ whereby. ttJOiauf whereon,
njcmit with which, tcorunter where-
auf n)eld}e 2l>eife in what manner etc. [under.
Examples.
3fd) l^abe i^n gefvagt, toann i^ t^n ju §aufe fintjen tocrbc.*)
3fd) \ot\^ nid)t, njavum er nieinen 33net iud)t ei^lten \)aU
jDarf ic^ f^agen, \mt lange ®ie t)a geblieben fint)?
(Sie fonnen biciben, too ©ie fint).
2Bi[fen ©ie, tuo^er er !ommt?
!I)iefe3 ift baS ipau8, tuotjon ®ie geflern gefprod)en ^abcn.
Note. Observe that the whole verb of the first clause
must precede the relative conjunction. It would be wrong
to say: !Darf t(^, tt)iemel ©ie bejatjlt ^abcn, fragen? Ex.:
I have not been told where he has gone.
SQian ^at mir nic^t gcfagt, njo^in cr gcgangen ifl.
not: aJian ^at mir wic^t, two^in cr gegangen ift, gcfogt.
Words.
jDte S3eleit)igung the insult. bie ?uft the air.
t)ie Unru^e uneasiness. ge^orc^cn to obey,
lafter^aft vicious. evlancnen to obtain,
itngefc^idt awkward. t)a5 Sefegelt) the ransom,
tro^eu to threaten. ter $)?u^ni fame, renown.
Reading Exercise. 97.
1. (S« fd^eint mir, aU tceun (or aU ob) id) biefen $)aTn
fc^on gefe^en l^atte. Diefe 23elcit>igung ift ju grofe, aU bafe id)
*) The rftVt'c^ questions are : 5©ann wcrbc \6) ibu ju^oufe ftnbcn?
— SSSoium \iat cr niciucii ©licf uic^t cr^altcn'^ etc.
Lesson 36. 257
f(^tt>elgen JBnnte. Qd) tteig n^t ait'Dev§, aU bag [em ®efd}aft
gut ge^t. SRein ^^eiui ^t mid) ju fe^r belebtgt, aU t>o§ ic^ il)m
i?er5ei^en tomite. £arl fpielt, anftatt bag ev feine Wufgabe lernt.
2Barten ©ie, bt§ (bag) ic^ fertig bin. ^^^e^men ©ie einen ^egeit*
fc^irm, bam it (Ste nic^t nag tuerben. -Sfc^ njerbe t^m bie (Srlaub^
ni^ md)t geben, toenn er aud) nod) fo fc!)r btttet. Se laftev-
l^aftev bie SJJeufc^en finb, befto mel)i' Unvitl^e I)aben fie.
2. -Qfe falter bie Suft ift, befto me^r megt fie; je tcavmev
fie ift, beftc Ieid)ter ip fie. fete tuerben befo'^nt tDerben, je nac^*
bem ©ie fteigig finb. liefer junge ?Q?enfd) ift fe^r uugefd)ic!t ; er
nimmt itie etiija^ in bie §anb, o^ne bag er eg jerbrid^t. 2Bir
fonnen biefe 3lufgabe nid)t ma^en, itjenn @i£ ung ntd^t I^elfen.
Qe me^r ©ie mir brol^en, befto icenicjer tr>erbe id^ 3f^nen ge^Drd)en.
®er ©efangene loirb feine i^rei^eit n'lc^t eriangen, toenn er nid^t
ein ^ol>eg Sofegelb beja^lt. 26ie grog aud) ber ^u^m biefeS
?^iirften fein mag, ber feine^ ^ater§ toar no^ gtoger.
Words.
To marry l^eiraten. to practise iiben.
the assistance ber S3eiftanb. to hurt fd)abett, toe^e f^un.
careful borfic^tig. to disappear »erf(^ti3inben.
the price ber ^reig. low nieber. to perish -i-um'fommen.
frequently l^aufig. somewhere irgenbtoo.
^ufgaae. 98.
It seems to me as «/" I had seen you somewhere. Give
me your letter tkai (in order that) I [may] send it to the
(auf bie) post-office. He says he will not marry until he has
a profession (einen S3eruf) . In case you want (need) my assis-
tance , call me. Read it twice , lest you forget it. The lady
must be careful lest she fall {Pres. Subj.). The merchant will
sell much or little, according as the price is high or low.
The more frequently you practise what you had in your music-
lesson, the better 2 you iwill play it. He cannot play but
{transl. without that) he hurts himself (fic^). Go in without
his seeing you {transl. without that he 2 sees lyou). The ple-
beians (bie ^(ebejer) intended to leave Rome, in case the pa-
tricians (bie ^atrijier) did not keep (f)ielten) their word. We
shall not go, unless she invites us. Romulus disappeared with-
out any one's knowing [knew] how he had perished.
Words.
To consent eintoiHigen. security bie (Sid)erl^eit.
to retire [rejl, v.) fi(^ juriidjte'^en. admirable BetDunbemgnjitrbig.
learned adj. gelel)rt. the act bie !X^at.
vain eitel, ftolj. to liberate befreien.
to trust trauen, toertrauen. doubtful, dubious jiDeifel^aft.
OTTO, German Conv.-Grammar. 17
258 Lesson 36.
dominant ()errfd)enb. the advice ber dial.
the pasBion tie i*eibenfd)aft. victory ber ©ieg.
to approve (of) bifligen. to attribute ju[^rei(?en.
Jlufga0^ 99.
1 . Whe shall not go into the (auf ta§) country, unless he
consents to come with us. The night came, so that I was
obliged to retire. Though he is very learned, nevertheless
he is not vain. Nobody can trust you [Dat.), unless you
bring good security. My friend said he would lend me a
hundred pounds, provided I would give them back to him
within (in) three months. However admirable the act of
William Tell may (mag) have been (,) by (t)urc^) which he
liberated his country from a cruel tyrant, — its morality
(t!^r fittUd)ev 2Bert) is dubious. I cannot do it, unless you
help me. Provided you know the dominant passion of some
one, you are sure to please him.
2. Unless the Lord build the house, they labour (fo ar*
beiten 'Diejenigen) in vain, who build it. Though you [should]
have the best teacher in England, if you do not learn your
grammar well, syou iwill never speak good German. Tell
me, if you please (gcfciUigft), where I may (fanil) find your um-
brella. I do not know why he has not yet written to me.
Ask him when he will come. Although Antiochus approved
[of] Hannibal's advice, zyet .she i would not act according to
it (baruad)) , lest (au§ i^urd)t) the victory should (moc^te) be
attributed to Hannibal, and not to him.
Conversation.
^onnen @ie btefe ^Ixbeit tl)uu? 9^id)t o^ne t>a^ ®ie nut ^elfen.
SSivt) bet ^xbeiter bclo^nt 3a, tuenu er fleigig ifl.
tuerben ?
.^ennen ©te micb? 9^eiiT, abet c« fd)cint mir, ali? ob
id) ©ie fd)on gefe^eu l)atte.
2Burbc bet ©efangene freige* 3fa, nad)bem er eiu ^o^eS Sofc
laffen? gelb bcja^It I^atte.
S©er \)on 3d) gtaube, bap cr eiu red)tfd)affe«
§en-n SBeijj? ner SJiaim ift.
3ft e« gcfuub (wholesome) knge 9^ein, je Idnger man fdjiaft, beflo
\\x f^lafen? trager luirb man.
SQSirb ber l^el^rer il^m cerjei^en? 9Ud}t e^er, al« bi« cr fic^ befjert.
Prepositions. 259
Qahtn ©te tnld> l^ter ertvartet? felne^trseq^; befto nie^r fteue id)
mid), (§te ^ter ^u ftnben.
2Birb ber ^^iirft f)ter Bletben? ^fd^jtueifte, oBer^terbleibenmrb.
@dK id) 5t)nen 3§r Sud) ju* -^e el)er (Sie e^ t^un, befto an^^
ritdfd)tcfen? gene^mer tcivt) e^ mtr fein.
3fft ber ^ran!e aufgeftanben ? 3a, obgleic^ ber Slrjt eS i^m t>er*
boten ^at.
Stiffen (Ste, iuarum er md)t 9Mn, er :^at eg itttrn^t gefagt.
f ommt ?
Thirty- seventh Lesson.
ON THE PREPOSITIONS.
(SB on ben ^ortt)I3rtern.)
Prepositions are particles, which serve to show the
relation which exists between a verb and a noun. This
relation being of different kinds, the prepositions destined
to indicate it, govern different cases, namely the Accu-
sative, Dative or Genitive case.
1. Prepositions with the Accusative case.
!iDurc^ through, by.
fitr for.
gegen*) towards, against, to.
ol^ne without, but for.
uni about, round, at.
tciber against.
Further four compounds which follow their substantives :
^inauf up.**) |l)int)iirdb through.
I)iuab, l^inunter down. | enttang along. um..:^erum round.
Examples.
3)UV(^ ba§ Xi)OX through the gate.
Durd) tretd)e 9}Uttel? by what means?
Siir •bt)re^ 'Sd)tt>eftev for your sister.
Oegen mid) against me.
@egen bag ©ebirge towards the mountain.
£)^\\e einen pfennig without a penny.
Urn bie ©tabt C^erum) about the down.
Um ben 2;i[d^ round the table.
SStbet feinen 2BitIen against his will.
®ie ie (Sid)e the oak-tree,
ru^en to rest. roUen to roll, bie 53vurfe the bridge,
tier 3wgt)ogeI the bird of pas- ber 53eutel the purse.
sage, bcr SBote messenger, ber ©trom the stream,
ber §riit)ling spring. fpajieren gel^en to walk,
ber "iPfau the peacock. ber §iigcl the hill.
*J Sfiadji is sometimes placed after the noun, when no time
is denoted and it means according or by, Latin secundum. Ex.:
555em 9Jamen nad) by the name.
3)cm Slltcr via6) according to age.
**) jufotgc is generally employed with the Genitive ease, but
when placed after the substantive, it governs the Dative. Ex.:
Prepositions. 26 1
Reading Exercise. 100.
@in ^anarienbogel flog burd) bag ^eiifter unb fe^te fid^ auf
etnen 33aum. ®er ^nabe ^t geaen ben ^aum gefd)offen. ©et
l^oflic^ 9 eg en jebetmann. ®er |)unb lief me J) ret em at urn
ba§ §aug (Return) unb fuc^te feinen §ervn. ®er §trf^ ru^ete
tm ©c^atten einer @t(^e. ®te B^gboget bertaffen un^ tm §erbft
(autumn) unb !e^ren tm ^rii^Ung ^u un^ juritrf. 3fo|"epl) ttjar
iDci^renb einiger ^eit ®!Iabe Bei ^ottp^r. ^te ^amtlie be^
Sorb 33. tDol^nt auf bem Sanbe. ®er *$fau ift ber fdjonfte unter
ben 35Dge(n.
itttfg«6e. 100a.
1. I went through the forest. This book is for your
brother. Go round the garden. I got this packet (^dd(^en)
by a messenger, it is for you. Let us walk through the
town. Nobody can swim a long time against the stream. The
ball roUed sdown ithe jhill.
2. Somebody has taken my purse out of my pocket.
Lord E. wishes to go to France. He will depart within the
next week. I shall go out after (the) dinner. Where does
that gentleman live? He lives near the bridge, opposite the
church. Contrary to the order of the queen 2 the 3 lady ileft
the palace.
3. Prepositions with the Genitive case.
um — tDtHen for the sake of.
unb e[d) abet without prejudice.
ungead)tet notwithstanding,
untceit (unfern) not far from,
bermoge by means of.
bermittelft (mittelft) by means of.
n3dl)renb*) during.
iuegen**) on account of.
jufolge according to.
^nftatt or ftatt instead of.
au^erl)alb without, outside,
tnner^alb within [place).
obet^alb above [higher up).
unteri)atb below [lower down).
btewfeitg on this side of.
jenfeitS on the other side of,
Idngg*) along. [beyond.
tro^*j in spite of.
Examples.
Slnftatt eineS 33riefeg instead of a letter.
5(u^erl)alb ber ©tabt without (outside) the town.
®ie^feit§ bc^ ^^tuffe^ on this side of the river.
Sfenfeitg be^ 9}?eereg beyond the sea.
3fnner^alb ber SiJfauer within the wall.
Dberl^alb ber 33riide above the bridge.
Unterfjalb be^ ^orfeS below the village etc.
*) laitg§, tro^ and tt)dl^rettb are sometimes used with the
dative, the latter especially with words (for inst. numerals 1 that
admit of no Genitive form, as: tro^ meincm 33efel^I in spite of my
order, n)df>rcnb fed^jig 3cil;reit.
**) megeix may be placed after its noun, as: ioegcn mehier (g^rc
or meitter @l;rc tt)egen on account of my honour.
262 Lesson 37.
Besides these, there are some antiquated prepositions, viz. :
l^alber or l^albeit on account of, for the sake of; haft by power
of; laitt according to. Ex.:
3^ter (SI;re ^atkr or ^al6en for the sake of your honour.
iaut beS fontglic^en Scfel^lS according to the king's command.
4. Prepositions with the Dative and Accnsatiye.
There are nine prepositions, which govern sometimes
the dative^ sometimes the accusative. The dative is re-
quired, when the ruling verb signifies a state of repose;
— the accusative, when it denotes a motion from one
place to another, or direction towards a place. This dis-
tinction may be rendered more evident by applying the
questions where? or in lohat place? and whither or tO
what place ? Take for instance the sentence : The book
lies on the table. You ask : Where or in what place does
it lie? The answer is in the dative: ^a§ ®itd^ (tecjt auf
bent ^tfd;; auf governs the dative here, because the
verb to lie indicates repose or rest.
But: I*ut the book upon the tahle is translated: Segen
©te ba^:59ud; auf ben 2::tfd;. The question is here: whereto
(whither] or to what place? — The answer is: auf ben
%x\6:f, with the accusative, because the verb (eg en (to lay
or to put) implies a motion from some other place to the
table; the book is to be moved to the table.
These nine prepositions are as follows:
2ltt at, on, close to.
auf upon, on.
I|ittter behind.
ttt in, into, to.
neben by the side of, near.
ilBcr over, above, across,
mttcr under, among.
ijor before, ago, outside.
5tt)if(^cn between.
Examples.
Wix ftel^en an bem i^ufe {Dat.) be« 53evge«.
We stand at the foot of the mountain.
SBir ft ell ten mu^ an ba^ [Ace] ZX^ax.
We placed ourselves at the gate.
(Si- l)atte eincu §ut auf bem ^o^f [Dat.).
He had a hat on his head.
©c^eu ^Sie fid) auf biefcn (Stut)l [Ace).
Sit down (place yourself) on tliis chair.
jDic ?^-ifd)c Icbcn in bem (int) 2Baffcv.
The fish live in the water.
Prepositions. 263
SDag tint) tft in t)ag (ing) Staffer gefaUen.
The child has fallen into the water.
Xcx §of ift neBen bem §aufe.
The yard is near {or by) the house.
-3d) legte baS 33uc^ neben mid^.
I laid the book beside me.
2Bir fe^ten iiber ben i^Iug we crossed the river.
3)er §unb liegt (fpielt)*) untev bem Sifd^.
The dog lies (plays) under the table.
3)ie ^a^e !ro(^ untet bag 33ett.
The cat crept under the bed.
Q6) ftanb to or bem Slufcjang**) ber ©onne auf.
I got up before sunrise.
Die S^vuppen viidten t)or bie ©tabt.
The troops marched to the town.
3ii)if^en bem ^uo^el unb bem S3a(^ fte^t ein §au5.
Between the hill and the brook stands a house.
§dngen ®ie bag ^ilb 3tDifd)en bie jtijei ^enftev.
Hang the picture between the two windows.
2fote. To fix a distance, the prepositions: nad), JU, an, auf, bin^
ter, in, toor may be preceded by btS, answering to the English as
far as or to, as: biS nad) 9?om as far as Eome; big an bie or big jur
©rcnjc to the frontier; big auf ben S3erg to the top of the mountain.
Observations.
The chapter on the prepositions is no doubt one of the
most difficult of the German Grammar, and the proper use
of them requires an intimate acquaintance with the character
of the German language. The peculiar nature of every ex-
pression , particularly of the verb , is to be considered , and
the prepositions therefore cannot always be rendered literally.
Reserving further »Remarks« for the Second Part, we give here
some hints which may direct the pupil, how to translate pro-
perly the English prepositions most in use.
at before a Proper name is rendered by in when the
place is on the same level with the speaker, and by auf, if
it is higher up, as: at Paris in $ari§; he arrived at the village
er !am in bem Dorfe an; at the hotel im ©aft^aufe; at the
castle auf bem (S^Iog.
*) There is no motion meant from one place to another or
towards a certain place, but a motion remaining in the same place;
therefore dative case. So, as well: @r reitet auf bem $ferb, but:
(Sr reitet baS ^ferb. (He rides on the horse, he rides the horse.)
**) 35 or, in and an used for time, always take the dative.
264 Lesson 37.
Observe the following locutions with at and to:
With to be (dat^ With to go [ace.)
at the market auf t)eni SD^arft. to the market auf bctt 9J?arft.
at the ball auf bem ^aU. to the ball auf ben 33aU.
at the post-office au{ ber ^oft. to the post-office auf bie*!|5ojt.
at the chase auf ber ^lagb. to go hunting auf bie3agbi3e^eu.
Denoting the hour of the day or night , at is U m , as :
at three o'clock um bvei U^r. — at the beginning is: im %\\=>
fang; at the end am (Snbe; at the age of sixty years im fil-
ter uon 60 ■Sa'^ven; at home ju §aufe.
by with the Passive voice is translated t)on, as; I am
loved by my father id) iDcrbe t>on melnem ^ater geliebt. —
by with 2i place is bet or neb en: by the bridge neben or bet
ber Sriide. — Denoting a means, ^\i is burd), as: by force
burd) ©etualt; by practice burd) Ubung. — i?y land or water
is translated: ju Sanb ober ju 2Bof|er.
in answers to the German in with the dative, denoting
rest: I found it in my pocket tn mciner ^^afdie; I was in
Heidelberg id) njar in §eibelberg. Further: in German auf
CDeutfd) or im 3)eutfd)en (not in 3)eutfd)).
m the country is auf bem Sanbe, whereas 'to go into
the country' signifies auf ba§ Sanb ge^cn.
into is the German in with the accusative denoting motion:
Put it in or into your pocket fieden ^Sie e6 in 3i)re 2^afd)e.
on meaning upon, is the German auf, as: on the table
auf bem 2;ifd), or when motion is understood: auf ben ^^ifd).
Meaning close to, it is an, as : Frankfort on the Main ^ranf «
furt am 5Diain. Denoting time, it is also rendered by an: on
what day an tDeId)em !Jage? on Tuesday am jDien^^tag. Other
expressions are: on my arrival bet meiner 5(ufunft; on this
occasion bet bicfer ®elegenl)eit ; o?* horseback ju^^ferb; o» that
condition unter biefcr 33ebingung.
to, denoting a direction to a place bearing a Proper name
is n a d) : I go ^o Paris, to America etc. ic^ gel)e nad) '^axi^, na(^
:}(mevifa 2C. To go to a person or a person's house is ju: I
go to him or to his house id) gel)e 311 il)m; to my aunt's ju
meiner Xante. To, denoting a direction to a place higher up
than the speaker, means auf, as: to the castle auf bo's
v5d)(of3. Denoting a direction to a place (common name) to
is translated a n with the accusative, as : to the railway a n bie
CEifenba'^n; to the bridge an bie 53vUde. When synonymous
with into (inside), to is translated in with the accusative: I
go to church id) ge()e in bie ^rd^c; let us go to the hotel xoix
woUen in ben ®a[tI)o[ gct)en.
with is commonly m i t , when used with verbs of motion
as: I go with my friend id) gel^e mit meinem l^reunbe. But
Lesson 37. 265
when it means at somebody's house, shop, country etc., it is
Bet: he lives with me er lcol)nt bet mir; with us (in our
country) bet miiS; does he dine with you? [peift er bet 3f^neu?
(Further examples on the use of the Prepositions are found
in the II. Part. Less. 49.)
Words.
!5)te ii3et§e 9tube the turnip. tote Srlaubnl^ permission.
ber 33ete^( the order, command. CoUfommen perfect.
t)er (Sd)rtft[teUei- the writer. bte ^eftung the fortress.
bte 5Sorftetlung remonstrance. ble S^Q^eUe the chapel.
fett \Dann how long? ber ^erlitft the loss.
ba§ Saiibgut the estate. ba^S (Scpb^i the sofa.
ber S^Dpf pot. Kettern to cUmb. bev ^ut^pfab the foot-path.
auSlaufen to set sail. betrad)ten to look at.
ber (Sinflu^ the influence. erfal)ren to learn, to hear.
fid) toevfammeln to assemble. fdjarentDeife by troops.
Reading Exercise. 101. .
3)le ^ijc^in I)at gelbe D^iiben (can-ots) gefoc^t anftatt tcetger
^ilbeu. !Die 2)ameu [iitb IdngS beu ^iuffe^ fpajlereu geqaugeu.
5Sor fec^g U^r iuerbe id) md)t imc^ §aufe ge^eu ; njarten @ie bt^
morgen. SBegen be^ tDibrigen (oontrary) 2Btnbe3 fonnte ba§ @d)iff
ntd)t au§(aufeu. ®eit toaiui (how long) n3oI)uen ©ie in biefem
§aufe? (Seit jtuei S^fouaten. ^ct ^^ageyanbrud) gingen ^olumbui^
uub feine ©efdtjrteu an§ Sanb itub nal^men 33ef{i^ (possession)
t)on bet 3fn[el im Xiamen be§ vtlniig^ tjon (Spauieu. 3Bd^renb
biefer ^^^^i^^oiue tjeriammelten fid) bie -Snbiauer fd)aventDeife uui
bie ©panier uub betrad)teteu balb bie frembeu tcetgeu ^JJJanuer,
balb bie fd)immmeubeu §dufer, auf ujeldjeu fie iiber ba3 SD^eer
gefomuien tDareu.
iVttfgrtOe. 102.
1. I shall take my umbrella instead of my stick. May
I send my daughter instead of my wife? Why did you go to
Baden? I went there on account of my health. There are a
great many foreigners (fel)r totele ^rembe) at Baden during the
summer. During winter there are fewer. The Royal garden
is outside the town. Mr. R. lives on the other side of the
river. According to an order of the Emperor Napoleon, s se-
veral French writers iwere 2 obliged (iuuf:;teu) to leave France,
notwithstanding their remonstrances. We obtained the per-
mission by means of the influence of our aunt. Richmond
lies 12 miles above, and Greenwich 5 miles belew London
bridge (ber Soubouer 33rii(fe). Nothing is perfect on this side
the grave. Not far from the hill stands the chapel. He takes
a walk notwithstanding the bad weather. The garden is situ-
ated (liegt) outside the town.
266 Lesson 37.
2. He is a rich man in spite of his great loss. Who
knocks at the door? Put the flower-pot before my window.
To (an) whom [Ace) did you write a letter? I wrote to (an
ace] the Duke of Wellington. I found this ring before the
sofa. Who laid this book on my table? The servant stood
at (an) the door of the house and looked (fat)) after the birds.
This old man is above (iiber) ninety years old. The enemy
lay six months before the fortress which was built on the
mountain. Men do much for the sake of CDeS) money. The
prisoner looked up to Heaven. According to the king's com-
mand the troops must march. The castle of the duke is on
the other side of the river. Along the river [side] there is
a foot-path (^ugvfvtt)).
Conversation.
2Bo h)ol)nen. (live) ©te? -Sd) luo^ne bei t)em ©^lofie.
ill'el(!^eg tft bev fd)onfte nnter 2)ev '^fau gilt (is considered) fiir
ben SScgeIn? ben fd^eiiften uutevfcenS3ogeln.
2Bd leben bie 5lffen? 3fn ^eij^en Saubern.
SSo^in ftog ber ^anarientogel? (Sr flog auf einen ©aum.
2Bo fag er nad}tier? (Sr faf^ anf bem 'J^adj.
2Bann toeilaffen bie 3"9^ogel ^m ^evbft (autumn), t^or bem
(SuvDpa? 5lnfau_g be^ SBinter^.
SBo^in fliegen fie? Qn fiiblidje (southern) Sdnber,
nieiftenS nac^ 5lfri!a.
2Ba8 \)at bie ^odjin geloc^t? ®elbe mhcn ftatt tavtoffeln.
§aben , ev ift cbcn urn ba^ §au«
gefetjen? gclaufeit.
23d finb t anf ben ^J^arft.
2Bct)in reift ber ®vaf? (Sr veift auf ba3 ?anb.
2Bo Icbt 3I?re !Itante? ©ie lebt im (Scmmcr anf bem
Sanbe, imSBinter inber@tabt.
Beading -lesson.
2)o§ serBroi^ene ^ufcifcit. The broken horse-shoe.
(Sin 53auer ging mit feiiiem (Sol^n, bem tieinen ^l;ema8, in
bie n(id}fte (Stabt. „^idf", fagte cr unteniH'g'? jn il^m, „ba liegt
ein ©tiicf toon einem §ufeifen anf ber ©rbe^ l)ebe2 e3 anf niib
flede eS in beine ^afdje." — „?U)!" toerfe^Uc^ J^omav^ „c^ ift
nid}t ber Tlidjc i\)ert», bag man fid) bafiir biirft^\" T)er S>ater
1) ground. 2) auf^ebcn to pick up. 3j replied. 4) worth the
trouble. 5j to stoop.
On the Interjections. 267
emberte3 nlcbt'g, wa^xn bag (gi[en unb ftecfte eg in fetne Xaf^e.
5m ndd}ften 3)oi-fe toerfaufte er eg bem ©d^miefe 6 fiir brei pfennig
(farthings)*) uut) faufte fcf(^en bafiir.
§ierauf fel^teu^ fie f^ren 2Beg fort. !Die §i^e8 voax fe^r grog.
9)Zan fal) tDeit unb brelt^ lueber §aug, no(^ 28att>, noc^ DueUeio.
3^^oniag ftarb beuia^eii t-or 3)urft^2 ^m^ fonnte felnem ^ater
!aum folgen.
jDamx Ite§ ber lej^tere, tok burd) 3"!^^^^' eine &fd}e faUen.
S^^omag l)Db2 fie ^ierigi-^ auf unb ftecfte fie in ben 9)Zunb.
(Sinige (Sd)vittei5 iDeiter liej^ ber 3Sater eine ^tueite &fd)e faEen,
\t3eld)e Xl)Dmag mit berfelben ©ierigteit i6 ergriff. 2)ieg banerte
fort 17, bis er fie aUe aufge'^obeu l)atte.
Sllg er bie (el^te gegeffen ^tte, iDanbte ber 55ater fic^ ju i'^m
l)in unb fagte : „(Bie^', luenn bu bid) ein ein^igeg is gjjat I^atteft i^
biiden moUen (wished), um bag^ufeifen auf^u^eben, tciirbeft bu nid)t
notig2o ge^abt Ijaben, bic^ f)nnbertmal fiir bie ^irfc^en ju bitrfen."
6) the smith. 7) continue. 8) the heat. 9j far and wide.
lOj spring:. 11) was near dying, 12) thirst. 13) by chance.
14) greedily, eagerly. 15) steps. 16; greediness. 17) continued,
lasted, 18) single. 19) see p. 94, 5. — 20) needed.
On the Interjections.
The interjections are mostly original sounds, which
serve to express a sudden emotion of the soul, and are
produced by the impulse of the moment. Other words
however are employed also as interjections, and uttered
as such. Interjections admit of no change.
211) ! ad) ! ei ! ah ! oh ! ^>o^ tauf enb ! what the deuce I
ad)! ah! alas! o dear! ft! ftitt! hush! hist!
!^e! t)e ba! oh! I say! leiber! alas! unhappily!
an! oh! !^u! ugh! l)eifa! huzzah! hurrah!
D^! ^d\ oh! ho! iltf^^t^! hurrah!
tDetje! o dear! alas! l)m! humph! hum!
patfd)! pat! fo! indeed! Ujol^lan ! well then !
^iff! ^aff! bang! auf! auf benn! on! forwards!
:pfui! fie! psh! 5ld)tung! take care! attention!
^alt! halt! stop! o^SBunber! o dear!
^oUa! holla! hollo! .holloa! ^iel) ba! look! behold!
fad)te! gently! [halloo! §)eil! hail!
iDeg ba! out of the way! ^e^e! woe!
fort! be gone! be off! ^ener! fire!
*) A farthing, properly speaking, is the fourth part of an
English penny (= about 8 German ^fennige), therefore = to_ 2
German ^43feinxtgc, but as smallest English coin it corresponds with
our *^:pfenuig' of now a days, or with our fetter (= V2 W^T^^S'
of former times.
268 Lesson 37.
@ott(eb! God be praised! »omatt§! forwards!
xcdjt fo! 'tis well! all right! m §ilfe! help!
gut! good! ^er ta! who's there!
Promiscuous Exercises for Translation and
Conversation. '*)
1.
Have you a pair [of] gloves? Yes, Sir, I have two
pairs, — What has the merchant? He has different (or many)
kinds 1 [of] wares (2Baren) . — Have you [any] friends? I
have some friends. — How many friends have you? I have
six faithful 2 friends. — Have your friends [any] wine or beer?
They have [some] wine. — Has the 'shoemaker good shoes?
He has always good shoes and good boots. — What have
the Englishmen? They have fine horses. — Has the captain 3
any good sailors 4? He has some good and some bad [ones] 5.
Have you much bread and cheese? I have a good deal (tiel).
Have you enough? I have quite 6 enough. — What day of
the month is it"? It is the twelfth. — Is it not the thir-
teenth? No, Sir, it is the eleventh or twelfth. — Which
horses have you? We have our own 8 horses.
1) toielertei. 2) treue, see p. 101. 3) ^a\)itan. 4) 2«attofc, m.,
2nd deel. 5) see p. 113, Obs. 2. 6) ganj. 7) see p. 116, Obs. 3.
8) eigen i pi. — en .
2.
Had you much salt? I had only (nur) a little, but I
had enough. — Has the woman much silk (©eibe) ? She has
not much, she has not enough. — Have you any more^ wine?
I have some more^ wine. — Have you ani/ more money? I
have no more money (feiu ©clb me^r). — Which volume 2 of
my works have you? I have the second. — Have you as
much^ gold as silver? I have neither & gold nor silver. —
Have you as many 4 stockings « as shoes? I have more stock-
ings than (at§) shoes. — Has this soldier as much courage 7
as I [/^ave]? He has quite as much. — Has the foreigner s
[a] mind 9 to buy this house? He has [a] mind to buy it. —
Have you [a] mind to make (ju fdnieiten) my pen? I have a
mind to make it, but I have no time. Has your cousin [a]
mind to sell his horse? No, he has no mind to sell it, he
will keep lo it.
1) any more = noc^, see p. 306, 13. 2) ace. S3anb, m. 3) SBcrf,
n. — 4' cfcenfo\5ieI. 5) neither ... nor ircbcr . . . ncc^. 6) ©triimvjc.
•- 7) mux, m. 8) bcr grembe. 9) 2ufl, f. 10) bc^altcn.
*) These Exercises may be translated either orallv or by
writing between the other Exercises, as soon as the pupil lias gone
through the 25th lesson or even sooner.
Promiscuous Exercises. 269
3.
Am I (^aBe id)) right to takei a walk? You are quite
right. — Is he wrong to spend 2 his money? He is wrong
to spend too much money. — To (ju) whom do you wish
to go ? I wish to go to my uncle'*. — Is your brother at
home? He is not yet at home, but he will soon come home.
Do you wish to speak to (mtt) some one? Yes, I wish to
speak to some one. — To whom do you wish to speak? I
wish to speak to your aunt. — Do you wish to drink (some)
red wine? I shall drink white wine. — What does the
little girl wish to drink? She wishes to drink some milk. —
Are you going "^ home*? Not yet, but in an hour. — Do your
boys go to (in tie) school? No, they have private lessons
(^ritoat'ftunben). — Who wishes to write a letter? My daughter
wishes to write several letters. — To (an) whom [Aec.) will
she write? She will write to her [female] friends. — Who
shall takes these letters to the post-office (auf t)ie $oft) ? The
servant must take them there 6.
1) etnen ©ipajicr'gang ju mac^eit or [^a^icrcn ju ge^cti. 2) au3'3U«
gebett. 3) ©el^en @ic? 4) nad^ §au8. 5) trogen. 6) ba^in'.
4.
What have you to do (f^un)? I have to write a French
exercise!. — What has your brother to do? He has to do 2 his
German exercise for to-morrow. — What did the English-
man answer you {Dat.) ? He answered nothing. — Did {^af(^en. 6) verb last, see p. 248, 3. 7) @d^in!en. 8) burftig.
9.
Is your servant a good one? He is a good one. — Is
he as good as mine? I think he is better than yours. —
Are you satisfied with him? I am quite satisfied. — Do you
likei fish? Yes, I like fish, but I like fowl 2 better. — Does
your aunt like mutton 3? She likes roast mutton and roast
veal 4. — Do the pupils like^ to learn by hearts? They do
not like learning' by heart, they like 6 writing better 6. —
To (atl, Ace.) whom do you address 7 your letters? I address
them to a friend. — Do you admire this works? I do ad-
mire it. — How do you amuse the ladies? I play [on the]
piano (^(atoter) . — Have you helped your sister [Dat.) ? I
could not help her. — Have you asked^ [for] wine? No, I
have ordered 10 tea. — Have you bought this mapH? I have
borrowed 12 {t. — Have you satisfied your relations ^3? They
1) effen @ie gern. . . 2) cffc UeBcr ©ePget. 3) pammc(f(eifd;.
4) ^aibflcifd^. 5) Sctncn . . gcru auStoenbtg? 6) fie fd;reiben Uekr —
7] abrcffieren. 8) Strfeclt, f. 9) to ask for = toertangen, reg. v. [Jcc). —
10) bcfteEen, re^r. t;. 11) Satibfartc, f. 12) entle^iteit, r. v. 13) SScrtuanbten.
272 Lesson 37.
ask 9 nothing. — Has the boy fedi^ his birds? He feeds
them every morning. — Did you guess (l)aBeu ®ie . . evraten)
the riddle 15? I could not guess it. — Have you sold your
field if>? I do not intend to sell it.
14) to feed fUttcrtt, reg. v. 15) ba« 9?at|cl. 16) ba9 gelb.
10.
Have you lost (the) hopei? I 2 never ilose hope. —
Has the gardener planted some trees? He has planted many
trees. — Has the soldier cleaned2 his gun 3? He /« just (eben)
cleaning'^ it. — Why has the tailor not cleaned the coat?
Because I have not sent it [to] him. — Has the cook roasted
the hare? He will roast it to-morrow. — Has the maid washed
her gloves? She has washed them. — Where are my boots?
They are at (6ei) the shoemaker's. — Why does Mary open the
window? She likes fresh air 4. — Why does she shut the
door? She will (tDitl) not 5 have a draught 6. — Has (ift)
the man got up early? He has got up late, because he
is ill. — Will he not put out? the fire? No, he wants it
still (no(^). — What does he boil? He boils potatoes and
carrots. — Did you empty 8 the bottles? All [the] bottles
are emptied. — Are they clean? They are very clean; you
may put in^ what you like (tDoHen).
1) bie §offnimg. 2) rciiiigcn. 3) ©eiue'^r, n. 4) = he cleans.
6^ Suft, f. 6) not a = Idwm 3«g » m. 7) auS'Ibrtctt. 8) Iccrcn.
rcq. V. 1») l^tneiitt^mt.
11.
Is the little boy dressed? He is dressed. — Has he
dressed himself (fid) fel6[t) ? Yes, he dressed himself. — Were
his shoes cleaned? The servant has cleaned them. — Did
he wash his hands? He has washed his face and his hands.
When did (ift) the ship seti sail? The ship [has] set sail
the day before yesterday. — Do your friends travel by (ju)
land or by sea?« They travel by land. — For (auf) whom
[Ace.) do you wait? I wait ybr my coachman. — Have you
spoken about the matter 2? We had no time to speak about
it 3. — Have you learnt reading of (t>Dn) him? I learnt it
of his brother. — Do you know your lesson? I think I
know it; I have taken'* pains. — Does the pupil read well
(gut)? He reads pretty (jiemlid)) well. — How many pages 5
does he write every day? He writes only one page, and
that is enough. — Have the boys done^ their exercises?
They are doing them still'. — Which verbs have they learnt?
They have learnt an irregular^ verb. — Have they written
it? No, they must not write it.
1) to set sail = fab'fcgcln, reg. v. 2) llBer bie ®a^e. 3) about
it, see p. 142, § 7. 4) I take pains 16^ gete nur SOiilbc. 5) @ettc, f.
0) gcma(^t. 7) nod^. 8) bas Beitmort. 9) iinregclmaijig.
Promiscuous Exercises. 273
12.
Whiclil is the best place? The first place is the best. —
At what o'clock do we dine? We dine at one o'clock. —
What kind of meat is that? This is mutton. — How much
do you charge 2 for (the) dinner 3? One shilling. — Is dinner
ready? Yes. — Where is my dog? It is before the door, —
To whom [dat.) does that house belong? It belongs to
Mr. Lion. — Is that true? That is quite true. — Did you
understand me? Yes, Sir [I did]. — Is the carriage come?
The carriage is not yet come, but the horses are come —
What (tt)ie) do you calH this country? It is Bavaria ■''. —
Will you come with me? I have no time. — Have you been
at (auf, dat.) the post-office? I shall go zthere i directly
(gteid)). — Are there [any] letters for me? Not to-day. —
What do you think of (tJOll) this letter? I cannot understand
it. — When shall we set 05*6 •? In a few days. — Will you
take a walk'^ in the garden? With great pleasure, if you
will go with me.
1) See p. 146, 2. — 2) forbeni, ijertangeit. 3) ba3 9}Jittas5e[fen.
4) nenttett. 5) S3a\^ent. 6) aBretfett. 7) ehien ©^ajter'gang madden.
13.
Didi you tell him to come (bag er foittmen foU) ? Yes,
Sir [I did]. — Did (ift) she get up early? She got up very
late. — Why has this boy no handkerchief? He has lost it. —
What is the price of that cloth 2? This cloth is very cheap
(tDol)(feiI) ; it costs four marcs. — Can you not take less?
I cannot give it cheaper 3. — Have you no better 4? I have
[some] better, but it is dearer. — How is the weather to-day?
It is very fine. — Shall we have fine weather to-morrow?
I am afraid it will rain. — Is (the) dinner served 5? The servant
is serving it. — Shall I give you some soup? Yes, Madam,
if you please. — Do you like fruits? I like it very [much]. —
Will you have some potatoes? I shall take some. — Do
you breakfast, before '^ you take a walk? No, I take a walk
before I breakfast. — How long were you ill? I was ill [for]
a fortnight (14 S^age) . — Have you been at (auf) the market?
I have not been there. — Has your aunt been in (auf) the
country? She has not yet been there, but she will go soon.
Has she been anywhere? She has been with (bei) her cousin s.
1) Transl.: have you told. 2) Suc^, n. 3) tt)ol;tjeiIer. 4) fciit te[fere§.
5) to serve = aitf'tragcit, tr. v. 6) bag DBft. 7) Conjunction d)t
or ktoor'. 8) Soujutc.
14.
Who has burnt ^ my letters? The servant has burnt
them. — Has Charles torn his coat? His brother has torn
1) ijerbrennen, see p. 126.
OTTO, German Conv.-Grammar. 18
274 Lesson 37.
it. — Has the boy broken a chair? He has broken a table
and a chair. — Is your neighbour as poor as he says? He
is not so poor. — Does your tailor make good coats? He
makes good and bad [ones]. — Have you consulted^ your
friends? They were not at home, when (al^) I called 3 on
them. — Have you paid [for] the wine? I ^have paid [for]
the dinner, but not [for] the wine. — Did (§at) the servant
lights the (bem) professor down stairs? Yes, [he did]. — Where
were (finb) you born? I was born in Italy. — In which
of (ton) these streets does he live? He lives in (the) Frederick-
Street. — How will you spends this evening? I 2 hardly
iknow it myself. — Will you go to 6 the play with me? I thank
you; I shall be ready at seven o'clock. — Is tea ready? It
will be ready in a moment. — When may I send you this
letter? Whenever 7 you please. — Where shall (foU) I send
it ^o? I will give you my direction 8.
2) Bcfragett, reg. 3) I call on or upon them id^ fce[ud^c fie.
4) l^inunter leiic^tctt, reg. 5) ju'kingen. 6) ing X^cater. 7) »onn
e8 S^nen gefatlt (or tvann @ie njoUen). 8) bic Slbrefjc.
15.
When will you set out for (nad)) Paris? The day after
to-morrow. — May I trouble 1 you with a letter? I shall
take 2 it with gi-eat pleasure. — Will you sup 3 with me? I
thank you, I am engaged ^, it is impossible for me. — When
shall I see you again ? I will call upon you this evening after
(the) supper. — Will you play [at] cards? 5 I play very in-
differently 6. — Do you like"' to play [at] whist? s Yes, I like
it. — How high do you play? As high as you please. —
How many points *J have you? I have only seven points. —
Any news (dttua^ 9ieuei8) of (toon) your brother? I have not
heard from him [for a] long time. — Were many spectators ^^
there? There were a great many [there]. — Will you soon
go into (auf, ace.) the country? I intend setting outi^ in a week.
1) tclaftigen, bemu^cn. 2) nutnc^men. 3) ju 5lfccnb cfjen. 4) aB»
gc^altcn. 5) kartcn, pi 6) glcic^cjiltig, mittclmatiig. 7] I like to play
tc^ f^nck gcru. 8) SSl^ifl. 9j bcv ^.)3untt, (Stic^. 10) Bujt^aucr.
11) abjurcifeu.
16.
Will you help me [to] work? I am sorry, I har\'e no
time. — Will you have the goodness to pass^ that plate to
me? With much pleasure. — When shall we go [to] bathe?
This evening, if you like. — How is your grand-mother?
She is not quite well, she has caught 2 a cold. — How does
Mr. Gray look ^ ? He looks very well ; he is in very good
1) rcid;cn. 2) to catch a cold « ^6^ crfSltm or ben ©(^nnpfen
bclcmmcu. 3) augfc^cn.
Promiscuous Exercises. 275
bealth. — Why did he send for the physician? His daughter
is ill. — Of (an) what illness did (ift) your neighbour die?
He died of apoplexy 4, — Why does this little girl cry? What
has happened [to] her? She cries because her mother died
yesterday. — Why do you laugh at (itber, ace.) this man?
I do not laugh at him, I laugh at his dress 5. — Do you
know this professor? Yes, I know him very well. — Is
this bread sufficient for you? It is quite sufficient for me;
but not for the children.
4) am ©d^tagftuB. 5) tletbitng, f.
17.
Will you ask your nephew whether he is satisfied with
the cloth I have sent him? When I see him, 2I iwill ask
him. — May I ask you fori a little water to wash 2 niy
hands? I will go for it directly. — Have they (man) served
up 3 the soup? It was served up some minutes ago. — Do
the windows look 4 into the street? No, they look on the
yard. — Which is the shortest way to the library 5? Go down
this street, and when you come to the bottom (an§ (Snte),
turn to the right, and you will see it in (auf) the great square.
— Did you forget your books, when (at§) you went to school?
We never forget anything. — How many times have you
been at Paris? Only three times. — How many birds has
the hunter shot? He has killed about 6 thirty. — Does this
merchant sell on credit '7? He does not sell on credit. —
Have you seen the fine rifle ^ (which) I have won? I should
like to see it. — Has the prince bought the beautiful carriage
of which I spoke to (mlt) you? No, Sir, the man asked •> a
great deal (iJiet) too much. — Whom have you seen at the
ball? A great many young ladies and gentlemen.
1) to ask for = um cttuaS bitten. 2) see Less. 44, p. 325, § 10.
3) aufgctragen. 4) ©e'^en . . auf bte @tr. 5) bic SiBItotbef. 6) un=
gefal^r. 7) auf trebit'. 8) bte ^Buc^fe. 9) to ask toerlangen.
18*
Part 11.
SYNTAX.
Thirty-eighth Lesson.
Special use of the Article.
The use of the German article offers a great many
deviations from the English practice. In general, the
article is more frequently employed than in English, and
as a perfect knowledge of these peculiarities is of great
importance, the pupil must be careful to observe the
following rules.
I. The definite article is used in all its cases:
1) Before abstract nouns, when taken in their whole
extent, as:
®ev ^^(ei^ industry. bie ©iite goodness, kindness,
ble 2^ragt)eit idleness. bte ?3efc^dftiguug employment.
t)ie ^llbung learning. bie ©eDulb patience,
bie Stebe love. bte Ungebulb impatience,
bet §ag hatred. bie 3ufi.'tebenl)eit contentment,
bie §reunbfd)aft friendship. bie tod^ijutjeit beauty,
bie |5einbfd)aft enmity. bie Sugcnb youth,
bie Unbanftavfeit ingratitude. ba§ Sitter old age.
Gen. of industry beg ^(eige§, of youth ber Sugeub :c.
Examples.
®te 2^ugenb ift ba§ !^Dd}fte ®ut virtue h the highest good.
jDa'8 menfd)lid^e Seben ift turj human life is short.
Note. Of course, this is not only the case in the nominative,
but in all the other cases, thus: Gen. of virtue ber Siitgeub; Dat.
to virtue ber 2;ugenb; of human life bcS menfdjtic^en SebenS K.
2) Before collective names of corporations, bodies,
governments, sciences or religious creeds, as:
S)er 5lbel nobility. bie @efd}id}te history,
bie Dtegierung government. bag Sl^vifteutum Christianity,,
bie SJionar^ie monarchy. bag ^ubentum Judaism,
ancient history bie atte ®ef(^id)tc.
3) Before concrete ideas which represent a whole genus
or species, as:
"Der 9Jienfd).ift ftevblic^ man [viz. every one) is mortal.
®ie ©timmeri ber Xiere finb fe^v cerfc^ieben the voices of
animals are very different.
4) Before names of streets and mountains:
2Sir tool^nen in bet i^viebric^flrage (Frederick-street).
2gO Lesson 38.
5) Before common names immediately followed by a
proper name. Ex.:
King Henry the Eighth t) er 5lciug §einrid) bet 5(d)te.
Queen Victoria bte ilbitigin 33iftDiia.
Admiral Nelson t)er 5ltmUal ^JJelfon.
Except in the Gen. of masc. names, when in an inversion. Ex..
2tbmirat 9idfon8 @ieg (see p. 64).
6) When an adjective precedes the proper name, as:
Poor Frederick l?ev avme t^riet)vi(^.
Saint Paul t)er t)eilige "ipaulu^.
7) Before the names of metals, seasons, months,
days and parts of the day. Ex.:
Gold is dearer than silver.
2)a« ®ott) ift teuerer aU t)a8 ©ilber.
Iron is the most useful metal.
5)a§ (Sifen ift bag nii§Ud)fte mti^"^.
Summer is lovely and M'arm.
%tx (Sommer ift lieblid) unt) ti\irm.
April was wet and cold bev 5(^ri( tuav na^ unb fait.
8) Before the following and a few similar substantives
^er 9J^cufd) man, mankind. baS ©lite! fortune, happiness.
bie 9JJeii[cI)cn men. tag Ungliid adversity, misfor-
bie Scute people. bag (Edjidfal fate. [tune,
bag iyvul)fti:d breakfast. bie '^t\i time.
bag 9}iittageffeii dinner. bag ©cfe^ law.
bag 3lbenbefjeii supper. bie DJatur nature.
bet %X)tt tea. bev §imme( heaven.
ber 3)urft thirst. bag l^eben life,
ber §unger hunger. ber !J^ob death,
bie ©Itte custom. ber ^Irieg war.
Hence: after dinner na(^ bcm iD^ittage[feu.
9) In the following phrases:
^ie mcifteu 9}ieufd)en most men.
. (Sr tt)ol)Ut in ber (Stabt he lives in town.
X^ag i^iub ifl in ber ©duite the child is at school.
jDcv i^nabe gebt in bie (Sd)ule the boy goes to school.
3n ber i?ird)e at church. \ 3n bie i^ivdje to church.
10) In German the definite article replaces the English
indefinite article when the price of wares is indicated:
®rei ®d)iUiu(^e bag ilKo three shillings a Kilo.
©ed^g (engl.) i>fcnnige*) ber ^Jeter sixpence a meter or metre.
*) In German currency = 50 ^ (sixpence = Vj a shilling cr
about V2 a German mare,.'
Use of the article. 28 1
11) The definite article is also employed instead of the
possessive adjective in sentences like the following:
^ar( !f)at t)a§ 33ein gebvcd)cn Charles has broken his leg.
3fd) l^abe mtr (mid)) in ben finger ge[d}nitten.
I have cut my finger.
■3c^ !fiatte mein (Sd)n)ert in bev §ant).
I had my sword in my hand (see Less. 41, II.).
Repetition of the article.
12) The definite as well as the indefinite article must
be repeated before each substantive in the singular, when
several of them follow in succession ; if they are in the
plural, one article may serve for all. Ex.:
®a§ aJJeffer unb bie ®abe(, bev Si)ffel unb ber SeUev.
The knife and fork, the spoon and plate.
(gin ©c^u'fjmac^er, ein ©djneiber unb ein §utmad)er fagen in
einem 2Birt^t)aufe.
A shoemaker, tailor and hatter sat in a tavern.
S)ie 33rubev unb ©c^tDeftevn the brothers and sisters.
2)le 255'iefen unb (bie) i^etber the meadows and fields.
Position of the article.
13) The article always precedes not only the sub-
stantives, but also the adjectives and adverbs before
them. The exceptional position in English after both^
half, double^ quite^ too^ so, as and how,, is not admitted
in German. We say:
Both the pupils bie beiben ©djiilcr.
Half an hour elne ^albe ©tunbe.
Double the sum bie boppelte (Summc.
So good a father ein fo gutet ^atcr.
Quite an old hat ein ganj alter §ut.
Beading Exercise. 103.
1. 3)ie Zxaof:)dt ift eine Be[e (gigenWafti. ®te ©diontjeit
unb bie ®anttmut2 [inb nid)t immer toereinigt^. Wax^ xoax bet
ben ^tomern ber ®ott be§ Mege§. ®er ®vaf 1)evbi) ift berretft^.
!5)ie giivften finb 9JJenfd)en unb lonnen nid)t immer t^elfen. Qn
S^tatien ift bev SSintev nid)t fait; bagegen ift bev ©onimev fe^v
t)ei^. 3)ag 3lbenbeffen unb ber ^f)ee fmb beveits. ®ie (Svbe unb
bev §)immet finb ba6 2Bev! ©ottet^. SDie ^^Zatuv ift ein cffcne«
33ud). tommen @ie nad) bem ^fviibftii^ ju miv, obev tDenn ®ie
liebevs n)otlen, nad^ bem 2JJittagefjen.
1) quality. 2) meekness or gentleness. 3) united. 4) from
home. 5) ready. 6j like better.
282 Lesson 38.
1. 25$iemel foftet t)ie i5lafd)e? 3)ie glafd^e !oflet etnc
I)albe 3)^arf. 2Biet)ieI !o[tet ber WUtex toon biefem 2;ud)e? 3(1^
cerfaufe eiJ ^u (fiir) fiebeu 9}?avf ten SJi'eter. iiefer ^nabe ^at
ten 2(rm gebroAen; feine (Sd)tceftcv ^at ficb au§ Unai^tfamfeit?
in bie $ant) c^efdmitten. -Sd) ^abe einen ©tccf, eincn ^^egen*
fd)ivm unt ein Dlafievniefjev^ gefan[t. 3)er ®d)uler ^at eine l^albe
(Seite'» an§tDent)ig (by heart) gelernt. ^eT . . . terttanbelt.
12) bag (glcnb. 13) ^trsnet, /. 14) grcnjcnIo3.
II. The article is omitted:
1 ) Before names of materials when taken in an in-
definite sense, no particular kind, measure or quality
being meant This form is called in French ))se?is par-
titifv, the substantive not being taken in its whole extent.
When we say: 3d) I^abe (S^clt mib (5t(ber I have (some)
gold and silver; cr ^^i Sfcifrf; unb ©vet he has (some)
meat and bread, we do not mean all the gold and silver,
all the meat and bread, but so77ie of it. This relation
is often expressed in English by the word some (or any]
preceding; in which case the substantive is used witli-
«ut the article in German, .as:
933c in wine or some wine, 'i^apier (some) paper.
Staffer some water. iinte some ink.
53rot unt SButter (some) bread and butter.
Omission of the article. 283
2) After the word all alle (in tlie plural), and some-
times after both bette. Ex.:
All the boys atle .tnaben.
Both the sisters beibe (Sd)tDeftern.
Note. When the article is expressed with Bel 1)6, it must
precede, and beibe takes tt, as:
Both the sisters bie Beiben @(^h)e[tern.
3) The indefinite article is omitted in the expressions
ma7iy a (mand;er, e, ^) and no less a [ttxw gertngerer).
Examples :
Many a flower mandje 33(ume.
He was no less a man than the bishop.
(Sv tear !etn geringerer 9)knn aU fcer ^tfd)Df.
4) In the plural all kinds of substantives may be used
without the article, as in English, when understood in
an indistinct and general sense. Ex. :
^etiern, pL, pens. | (Ster eggs.
2)^duuev unt) T^raiten (or SBelber) men and women.
^naben uiife 5D^at)d)eu boys and girls.
®(^afe, ^ii^e, £)d)ien sheep, cows, oxen.
Note. Some before a noun in the plural is generally translated
einige, as: Some friends einige ^^i-'^unbc; some papers cintgc 3«*
tungen k.
5) The article is sometimes omitted before the names
of the cardinal points of the compass: 9Iorben (WWiitX'
imd^t) the north; ©iiten (DJItttvig) the south; Often (D}lorgen)
the east; SBefteu (5IBenb) the west, when these words are
preceded by the preposition g e g e u or n a c^ , as :
9?uJ3lant) Uegt gegeu Dften Russia lies towards the east.
Without the preposition gegeu, the article is used:
®te (Sonne gel)t im SBeften unter the sun sets in the west.
6) As in English , it is usually omitted in proverbs :
Slrmut ift felne ©c^anbe poverty is no disgrace.
3utTiet)en^eit ge^t iiber 9ieid)tum.
Contentment is better than wealth.
7) In such questions as : Is the river a deep one ? the
article a as well as one is omitted. We simply say:
3ft ber %in tief?
81 In the inversion of the Saxon Genitive, when it
precedes the substantive by which it is governed:
284 Lesson 38
(gtuarbg 2)?utter uub ^ax\^ Xante.
Edward's mother and Charles's aunt.
-3n meineg D^cimg (or Dufel^) ^au^ in my uncle's house.
S^reS 9^ad)bar'3 ©avten your neighbour's garden
Note. This Saxon Genitive can only be used when the word in
the Genitive expresses a person; ana it should not be made use
of after a preposition that governs the genitive case, nor after
another Genitive. Ex.: By means of my uncle's influence — cannot
be translated: toermtttelft meineg D^eimS (Stnftu[feS, but: tocrmittelft
beS (Sinf(u[i'e§ meincS Dl^ciniS.
9) After the Genitive of the relative pronoun in the
singular and plural. Ex.:
^er ^uaBe, beffen ^ater haul iie^t.
The boy whose father lies ill.
2)ie 33lume, beren (Bd) on^eit [o fe'^r BetDunbert toirb.
The flower, the beauty of which is so much admired.
10) No article in the following expressions:
3u Sanb by land. in £)()nniad}t faUen to faint,
gu 2Ba[jer by water. swoon,
jii *!Pferb on horseback. ©d}recfeu eiiijagen to teiTify.
ju §ii§ on foot. Xdi nel)uien (an) to take part,
ju S3a^eu in a carriage. 2lbfd}ieb ne()men to take leave.
JU (£d}l[f on board ship. ®efal)V lailfeu to run a risk.
t)ov §uuacr of (with) hunger. ad)tt)al)en or geben ] to take
»Dr J)urft of thirst. fid) in ad)t ne^men | care,
bet Xaa, by day. ®ebu(b l)aben to have patience,
bet 9^ad)t by night. ^:!l?itleib l^aben to have com-
mit 33ergnii3en with pleasure. passion.
auS ^eiDruB from vexation. um 5Ser5eil)ung bitten to beg ones
ail^ §a6 from hatred. pardon.
ted)t t)aben to be right. ©lauben fd)enfcn or beimef(en to
unred)t ^aben to be wrong. give credit,
^unqer l)aben*) to be hungry, ^ilfe leiftcn to render assistance,
©uxft l)aben*) to be thirsty. ®efetlfd)aftteiften keep company,
ju 9)Jittav3 effcn (fpeifen) to dine, ju §ilfe lommen to come to one's
JU Xdi tueibcn [dat.) to fall to assistance or help.
one's lot. ui ^ett cje^en to go to bed.
ju ^jiad)t (5lbenb) effen to sup. Xxoi^ bieten to bid defiance.
(fein) SSort l;alten to keep ones ju ©vunbe geljen to perish.
word. juftaube fonimen to succeed.
Suft Ijftben to have a mind. jnftvinbe bvinv'^en to accomplish.
9ted)enfd)aft gebcn or ablecjen to fevii>«l)nnng tl)nn to mention.
render account, account for. um 9iat fvagcn to ask for advice.
*) or ^ungrig fciu; burfttg fciu.
Lesson 38. 285
Beading Exercise. 105.
1. 3c^ "^aBe ^leifd) uut) ^vot gegefjen. ©e'^en ®ie aiif
ben Waxit mit? faufen ©ie Gutter unD (Sier. Seil)eu ®ie miv
eimge ^ebern; id) ntiit^ eluige 33nefe fd)reiben. 3lmerifa Itegt
gegeii iffieften. (Snb'e gut, aUe§ gut. ©etualt^ get)t »or 9?e^t.
Sn meiueS ©rogt^ater^ ©arten fte^t eln alter ^Zufebaum, beffen
@tamm (trunk) a,an^ I)dI)12 tft. §ier ift t)a§ 33ud), beffen SSer=
f offer ©ie fo fel)r beiDUubern. SBoUen ©ie fc^on 2lbfd)leb ne'^men?
S^eifen ©te ju ^ferb cber ju 2Bagen? 3d) reife ^u %n^.
2. (Ste miiffen ©ebulb l)aBen. §a6en btefe §erren 2Bem
ober S3ier getrmifen? ©ie tjabeu fed)§ glafc^en SBehi unb eimge
©Icifer 33ier getrunten. ^teifen ®te ju 3Baffer cber ju Sanb?
3d) relfe ju Saub. 3" 2Bafjer tauft man ©efa!^r, ju ertrtnfens.
©te '^aBeu red)t. §aben (Sie fd)ou »on -3^ren ^^reunben Slbfd^ieb
geuommen? ^lodj uid)t; aber Id) it)erbe e^3 morgeu tijuu. ^rau^
leiu (Slifabet^ tft in £)^nniad)t gef alien. -Sebermann Ijatte WxU
leib(en) mit il)r.
1) power. 2) hollow. 3) to be drowned.
JtttfgaOc. 106,
1. We had some cheese, bread and butter. Do you want
anything? YeS;, I want some sugar and coffee. America
lies towards the west. Contentment goes before (iiber) wealth.
Henry's cousin is very ill. The boy whose books were^ found
under the table, has been^ punished for his carelessness 2.
Charles has gone to bed. I have read all the letters which
your brother wrote (has written) to (an) my sister. My uncle
{has) travelled a great deal (\3iel) by water and by land. A7ii
I right to take a walk? Yes, you are quite right.
2. Zs he wrong to spend 3 his money? He is wrong to
spend too much money. At what o'clock to you dine? We
dine at five. Dinner is ready. Are you hungry? I am hungry
and thirsty. I do not like to go out by night. This gentle-
man has German lessons 4, but I believe 5, only twice a (in ber)
week. I beg your pardon, he has a lesson every other day 6.
I must take leave of (t)on) you. What^ a mistake 8! What
beautiful peaches 9! How much do they cost a piece (costs
the piece)? She is 2 so 3 kind la 4 lady. Macbeth was not
willing 10 to commit 11 so great a crime 12.
1) Passive voice. 2) 9Za(^taf[ig!eit, Una^tfamleit. 3) ouSgebcn.
4) ©tuttben. 5) gtauben. 6) see p. 239. 7j h?a3 fiir etn. 8) %d)ln, m.
9) ^firfic^, m. 10] to be willing = tcotlen. 11) begetjen. 12) 3Ser=
b redden, m.
Reading-lesson.
2)o§ bo^^jcttc 25erbrc^cn, The double crime.
®rei @inn)oi)ner bon 33alf reiften miteinanber; fie fanbcn
etnen ^djai^^ unb teiften il)n. @ie fet^ten bann iljren SSeg fort,
286 Lesson 38.
iut?em2 fie fid) iiSer ten @ebrau(^ (use) unterfjielten 2, tDcld^en fie
t>on i^ven 9?cid)tumeru madjemDoUlen. X^ie Sebeu^mittel^, treldje
fie mit fid) gencmmeii ^vittcn, tDaven autgejel)^^ fie famen iibei*
ein5, ^a^ eiuer »du il)nen in t)ie ®tat)t gel)en f elite, urn ti>eld)e
(some) ju faufen, unb ba^ t)er jiingfte biefcn 3luftragc iiber*
ne^men'7 foUte; er ging fovt.
Untemeg^ fagte er ju fi^ [elbft: „9lun bin ic^ reic^; ahex
id) tuiivbe t>iel x-eid)cr fein, trenn id) allein genjefen tudre, al^ ber
(Sd)a|3 gefunben ir>urt)e . . . 3)ie[e jii^ei ?0^^en)d)en ()abcn mir meinc
^eid)tiimev entrifjcn. ^bnnte id) fie nid)t njietev bcfcmmen (get) ?
>Da§ ttjiirbe mir Ieid)t fein : id) biirfte (need) nur tie i^ebenymittel
ttergiften*^, tie id) faufen foU; bei (upon) meiner 9iiidfe^r iviirre
id) fageu, bag id) in ber ©tabt (^u SDIittag) gefpeift i)abe; nieine
®efdl)rten9 tuiirben o^ne 9}?igtrauen bacon effen, unb fie triivcen
fterben. Qdf Ijabe je^t nur ben britten Xeil beo Si^a^je^, unb
bann tt)iirbe id) atle^ be!onimen" (get).
3nbeffenio fagten bie beiben anbern 9?eifenben 3U einanber:
„2Bir braud)eii bie ®efellfd)aft biefe^ jungen 9)ienfd)en nid)t; xn'ix
I)aben ben ^d)ai^ mit ii)m tetteu miifjen; fctn 3^ei( njiirbe bie
unfrigen »ermel)vtii f^aben, unb ujir iciivbcn fel)r vetd) fein. (Srtcirb
balb mieber fcmmen, toir ijaben gute ^Dld)e, \mx tvoUen i^n ti>ten.''
jDer junge 5Dienfd) fam mit i?cvgifteteu Seben^mitteln jmud;
feine ©efd^rten^ ermorbeten if)n; fie agen, fie ftavben, unb ber
©c^a^ ge^brtei2 niemanb.
(So fanben ade bret tl)ren toerbientcn 2oI)ni3.
1) treasure. 2) conversing (see p. 248, the conj. inbem).
3) provisions. 4) to consume, eat up. 5) to agree. 6] commission
or task. 7] undertake. 8) to poison. 9) companions. 10) mean-
while. 11) to increase. 12) belong. 13) reward.
Conversation.
SOSer reifte mit einanber? 3)rei Siniro^ner ber Stabt 33al!.
2Ba^ fanben fie auf bem 2Bcgc? (Sinen '3d)al^.
SBa'S t^aten fie mit bemfelben? (Sie teiltcu i^n untcr fid).
2Bot)on fprad)en fie untertveg^? (Sie unter'^ielten fid) iiber ben
©cbraud), ben fie \:on bem
®elbe mad)en trcUtcn.
51I« i^re ?eben§niittcl aufgeje'^rt ©ie famcu iibevein, baj^ cinert?on
iDaren , njaS befd}(offeu (de- il)nen in bie ^tabt gel)cn foUte,
termine) fie, ju tl)un? n)eld)e ^u faufen.
2Ber mugte gel)cn? !j)er jiinglte ton il)nen.
335elc6en $lan fagte (made) @r befdUefj, bie Sebeu^mittcl .yi
biefer untern)egci ©tmibeit (Ace.) gefd^tajeu.
She has slept (for) two hours.
4) But the English preposition of does not always
denote a real genitive. When the names of countries^
towns ^ villages and places, also of months are connected
with their generic names, they stand in the nominative,
being considered as apposition to them. Ex.:
®ie etd^c8 iSte cm^fe^Icn ^aten.
Note 2. When preceded by an adjective, the Genitive must bo
used, as: Sine §lo)d)e guten ihietncS.
Genitive of nouns. 289
Beading Exercise. 107.
®eS ^ai[er« SSlde mug gefd)et)en (be done). ®e3 tnaBen
i^leig ift belo^nt ttjotben. Siv evtuarten jefcen Xag einen 33nef
con §errn "ip. 3)er ^Ir^t riet mir, be>3 9J?orgeng uiit) t)e^ 5I6ent)g
einen Soffel i)oIl tjon tjiefer 5Ir5neii ju nel;men. 2Jieine§ 2Bi[fen3
ift Sontjon fcie gtcgte ©tatt in (Suvopa. Sangfamen ©^ritte^
fu^t ber SBogen beS tcnigUd)en "ipnnsen fcurd) ben '^axt. i)iefeu
Slbenb l^aBe ic^ ntd)t ^dt, melne fetunbe (lesson) ju ne'^men.
SDie UniiJeif tat §eibeI6erg ift beriif)mt2. ®en stuolften ^Ipril 1852
befuc^te ic^ baS ©(^lad)tfelb ton 2Batev(oo.
1) medicine. 2) renowned.
Jlttf^aOe. 107a.
This is my {Gen.) father's house. The city of Rome is
very old. The city of St. Petersburgh was built by Peter
the Great [Dai.]. When do you wish to have your lessons,
tn the evening or in the morning? I am engaged (6eid)aftigt
or i)er'^inbert) in the morning; it would be most convenient i
for me, to take them in the afternoon between two and four.
The kingdom of Saxony (©ad)feu) has an extent 2 of only 280
German square miles •^. Bring me a glass of beer 4. The
streets of (I30n) Paris are more beautiful than those 5 of London.
The month of July was very hot.
1) am Bequemften or am V'affenbften. 2) elne SluSbe'^nung i)on.
3) Ouabrat'meitcn. 4) S3ier. 5) See p. 145, 3.
6) The sign of the genitive, of, must be translated
tJOn, in the following cases:
a) With substantives expressing ra7ik or title:
jDie ^onigin con <2panien the queen of Spain.
2)er ^etjog toon 2BeEington the duke ©/"Wellington.
b) Before cardinal numbers:
(Sin 2)?ann toon bveigig 3fal)ren a man of thirty years.
■3fn einer Sntfernung toon fe(^8 ^JJeilen.
At a distance of six miles.
(Sr ftarb im Sllter toon fieB^ig ^a^ren.
He died at the age of seventy years.
c) Before the names of metals and other materials, if
the adjective be not preferred:
©in ®d)iff toon (Si[en*) a ship of iron.
(Sin S3ed)er toon ®oIb a cup (goblet) of gold.
Sine Silbfaule (or ein ©tanbbilb) toon 2JJarnior a statue of
marble.
*) Or: eiti eiferneS ©c^iff, cin golbner S3cc^er, eine marmorne
©ilbfaulc.
OTTO, German Conv. -Grammar. 19
290 Lesson 39.
d) IJefore nouns in the partitive sense not expressing
measure :
jDev 33evfauf toon 23iic^ern the sale o/ books.
jDte 9^dl)e »on ©tat^teu the vicinity o/ towns.
(Sine ©ad)c toon geringem 2Bert a matter o/" little value.
e) After the demonstrative, relative and indefinite pro-
nouns, after the cardinal and ordinal numerals, and the
superlative degree, of is mostly rendered by toon, though
the Genitive may also be used.*] Ex.:
!I)cvientge toon 3^ren ©duUevn, ttoeld)er 2C. (that o/your p.).
2BeId)er toon biefen SJidnnetn? which of these men?
(Sinige toon mcinen ^reunfeen*) some of my friends,
^cr 5el)nte toon bveigig ©d)ii(ern of 30 scholars the tenth.
!I)ie fd)on[te aUer S^ctuen or \ the handsomest of all
jDie fd)i3nfte toon alien i^vauen / women (ladies).
7] The English genitive of the participle present,
replacing a substantive , when governed by another , is
expressed in German by the Infinitive with ju:
jDle £unft 5U tan^en the art of dancing.
jDa^ @et)eimni^ veid} jn \toevt)en the secret of becoming rich.
8) Of preceded by a substantive formed from a verb
requiring a preposition, is translated in different ways
according to the meaning of that preposition ; no certain
rule can be given for such case:
!Dev @et)anfe an ®ott the thought of God (benfcn an).
jDie ^uvd}t toot tern Xot)e the fear o/ death (fic^ fiirc^tcn to or).
®ie Siebe 5 urn Ceben the love o/* life (Siebe l^aben ju).
Slu^DJJangel an ©elb from %vanto/ money (^^angel ^abcn an).
Reading Exercise. 108.
!Die Slonigin toon (Sngtanb ift fiol^ auf ir)ve 2J?avine (navy).
^JJJan bant jc^t ganje ©duffe toon Sifen. 3ft t?iefcv 9hng toon
@olt) otjcr toon ©ilber? (Sr ift toon ®oIt). 2BeId)er toon tiefen
5?naben l)at fcen cvften ^veii^ cvl^alten? S« \toav 3uUu3; er v»ar
ber (Srfte toon fiinfjig ©duUcvn. !SDie ^unft \\\ rin^en* ift fel^r
alt; fie bUit)te2 am ineiftcn bci (with) t'en alten ©vicc^en. i)a8
35cvtangcn (desire) nad> 9Ccic^tum toevanlafU (induces^ biefcu
9Jiann, fo gvof^artigc^ Untcvne^mungcn ju madden. jDie Slebe
1) to wrestle. 2) flourished. 3) grand, great.
*) This is a matter of euphony. We mav say as well: Sinige
mctner grcunbc, bie meiftcu 3^rer @^iUfr; but it would be less
harsh to say btc nictften tten 3^rcn cv 3^tcr ©c^tttct
would be intolerably harsh.
Lesson 39. 291
jum SeBen ift alien 9?? enf 6 en an^eBoren^, bagegen bie ^urd^t t)ov
bem S^obe ift f^nen anerjogen^.
4) innate. 5) imbibed by education.
Jtufga6^. 108a.
1. Two of (t>Dn) my brother's children have died. The
queen of England has married i Prince Albert. We saw a
large fire at (in) a distance of about (ungefci^v) seven miles.
Grateful nations 2 erect 3 statues of bronze ((^rj) or stone [to]
their great men. Emily was the handsomest of all the young
ladies [present] at the ball. No one"* of my friends has written
to me. On the tenth of July, 2 1 1 shall make a journey of
fifty miles, to see (um . . . JU be[ud)en) a friend. This gentle-
man is of high rank (9?ang). This Frenchman is the father
of nine children.
2. Most of the pupils were not prepared 5 for the lesson.
Which of the (man-) servants is 6 to go? Some of the finest
houses of the town are burnt down 7. My friend has discov-
ered 8 a new way-^ of catching fish^o. The habit 11 of taking
snuff (5U fdjnupfen) is very common in many countries. The
traveller was obliged to return for (an§) want of money. When
nothing but (a(§) the fear of (the) punishment 12 2 prevents 13 ms,
from acting wrong (unred)t jn tl)Un), awe lare guilty 14 in the
eye 15 of God.
1) gcl;eiratet. 2) bie 9?ation. 3) errid^ten. 4) feincr, sing. 5) toor=»
fcercttet. 6] is to foU. 7) aBgeBratint. 8) entbcdt. 9) SDlet^obc, f.
10) gifc^e, pi. 11) bte ©emoWeit- — 12) @trafe, f. 13) ym% tier^im
bert. 14) [^ulbtg. 15) ttt ben 5Iugen ©otteS.
Reading- lesson.
%\)^^xsxi^ bet giittftc*
^2Up^on§ v., ^ontg ijon toagonien, genannt ber ©tog*
miittgei, ttar t>er §elb (hero) feine§ 3a^rl)unbevt§. (Sr bac^te
nur [baran], anbre gliicfUd) jn mad)en (of making). ®tefer
i^iivft gtng gern^ o'^ue ©efotge (suite) nnb 5U ^n^ bnrd) bte
©tvagen feiner §au^tftabt. 211^ man tl)m einft ^orfteHnngen^
nivtc^te itbet4 bie ©efa^r, toeldjer [Dat.) er feine $erfon au^fe^te^,
antmortete er: „(Sin 55ater, njeld^er mitten unter feinen ^inbevn
mn^er'ge^te, ^at nic6t§ jn fiirc^ten.
SD^an fennt folgenben 3^3'^ ^"^i^ feiner ^^reigeljigfeit s : 5((§
einer toon feinen 6d)a^meiftern 9 il^m eine ©umme toon taufenb
3)u!aten bra^te, fagte ein Dffi^ier, tuelc^er eBen ^ugegenio ttjar,
ganj teifeii jn iemanb: „2i3enn ic^ nur biefe @umme 'S^iiXt.
njiirbe ic^ gliicflic^ fein." — „®u fcEft e§ (so) fein!" fprac^ ber
^onig, \i3etd)er e3 geprt l^atte, nub Ue§ i^n biefe taufenb jDu!aten
mit fic^ nel^men.
1) generous. 2; liked. 3) to remonstrate. 4) concerning the
danger. 5) to expose. 0) walks about. 7) trait, instance. 8) muni-
ficence. 9) treasurer. 10) present. 11) low.
19*
292 Lesson 40.
2lud) bcr fotgeut)e ^\\o^ 5eUi^ti2 ^on fcmem eblen (S^arafter:
(Sine mit ?D?atro[en uiit) ©olfcaten belafcene ®alcerei3 ging unter;
er befall, i^nen $ilfe 5U bvingen; man jogertei-*. ^a [prang
5(Ipl)ou6 felbft in ein 33oot, intern i^ er ^u l)enen, ttjclc^e fid^ cor
fcer ®cfat)r fUvd)teten, fagte : „3cl) mid Iteber i^r ©efd^rte^G, al^
t)cr 3ufcf)^weT^' t^^'e^ ict?e3 fein."
12) proves, gives witness. 13) galley. 14) to hesitate. —
15) saying. 16) companion. 17) the spectator.
Conversation.
2Ber \-oax 5l(p^on§ V.? ©r iuar ^i3nig »on 5lrragcnicn.
2Sie vunrtje er genannt? (Sr i^icg „"Dcr ©rogmiitige".
?ln n)a§ t)ad}te er immer? 5Int)re gliicflic^ 5U madden.
2Bie ginger gem t>urc^t)ieStabt? D^ne ®efo(ge unt ju ?^uf3.
2BeId)e S^orftetlung mad)te man 2)a^ er feine ^erfon einer ©efa'^r
it)m beS^lb? au§fe|^e.
SSa« antttjortete er t)arauf ? „Sin 53ater l^at untcr fcinen ^in*
t)ern nid)t§ ju fiirdjten."
2Ba8 brad}te i^m eineS 2;age5 (Sine ©umme t)on taufent) ®u»
fein ®d)at5meifter? !aten.
2Ber n>ar geratje (just) jugegcn? (Sin Dffijier.
2Ba3 fagte t)iefer Dffijier Icife „^d} tviiri^e gliidlid) fein, tuenn i(^
in feiner ©egemuart? t)iefe§ ©elb ^dtte."
2Ba8 fagte barauf t)er ^ijnig? „2Benn biefe ©nmnic ®ie gliidli*
mad}t, fo foflen 3ie fie t}aben."
2Bie betDaf^rte (showed) er ein 51 1§ eine mit So It? at en belatene
ant)re§ 9J?al feine 9^dc^ften* (^aleere unterfanf, befal^I er fo*
liebe (humanity)"^ gleid}, i^nen ju§ilfe jufommen.
Unt) al« niemant) ^etfen icoUte, (5r fprang felbft in ein Soot unti
tt?a8 t^at er? rnterte (rowed) i^nen ^u^ilfe.
2Beld)e et)ten SBorte fprac^ er (Sr fagte: „3fd) n>ill liebcr Der
Bei biefer ©elegen^eit? ®eid]^rteal^t>er3ufc^auer
i^rei^ jtoteg fein."
Fortieth Lesson.
Remarks on the Auxiliaries of mood.
(See the 17th lesson p. 88.)
From the great deficiency of forms possessed by the
English auxiliaries of mood, their translation into German
requires much attention. Observe the following remarks :
I. On the auxiliary tiiuucn*
1) ^bnnen denotes in the first place physical possi-
bility, the being able to do something, and is in this
sense sometimes replaced by imftanbe fein.
(Sin ?at)mer !ann nid)t gcl)en (ift nirfu imftanbc, ju ge^ien).
A lame man cannot walk.
Auxiliary: fomien. 293
2)iefe Seute !onneu un§ nid)t fd)abeu.
These people are not able to injure ns.
2) ^onnett answers to the English may^ when it
means a possibility granted hy the speaJcer:
(Ste fi3uneu l^erem fonnnen you may come in.
@r !ann eln Setriigcr fein he may be a cheat.
3) If could refers to a past tense, it is the Imperfect
Indicative (= was able) and is translated fcnute:
-3d^ tDar in feinem §aufe, aber tc^ !onute tl)n md}t fcl)en.
I was in his house, but I could not see him.
4) When the English could is conditional, meaning:
would he ahle^ then it is translated fonute:
(Sr !i3niite, h)enn er tijotlte.
He could [he would be able] if he would (liked).
5) If could depends on a preceding verb of affirma-
tion fac^te etc.^ i. e. in the ^^ohlique narratio7i^\ it is
rendered by !i3nne or !i3nnte (see lesson 43, III). Ex.:
@r fagte, er !oune (or Buute) nid}t fommcn.
He said he could not come.
6) In speaking of languages, !onneu signifies to know
or to he able to speak:
^ijnnen (Sie i^ransofifd) ?
Do you know [or speak) French?
S^lein, tc^ fann nic^t i^ranjofifc^ ; aBer tc^ !ann (Sngllfc^.
No, I cannot speak French but English.
Note. I cannot help or forbear means ic^ fanit nidjt unil)m. Ex.:
I could not forbear laughing.
3c^ fonnte nid;t itnil)tn', iw Iad;eTt;
or: 3c^ fotttite mic^ beS 2ad;en3 nic^t etttl^alten.
II. On miigeii, tuoBen, tm Segriff fein,
1) SJlogeu expresses that the 5;;ea^er has no objection
to another person's doing anything:
Sr mag ten ®tod be^Iten he may keep the stick.
(Sie mbgen ben 33rief lefen you may read the letter.
Note. In this sense the Germans often use !i)nncn:
SDii fanttft ben ©tod Betiattett.
erson both mean : 3cnianb bc[ud;cn.
295
III. Saffen.
The verb (affen is often used as auxiliary verb,
when joined to another verb, and requires the following
Infinitive without JU.
1) It signifies, to let, to suffer, to permit.
3c^ Ia[|e i^n*) fd^Iafen I let him sleep.
Safjeu ©te mid) ge^en let me go.
3f(^ ^o!iit it;n ge^^en taffeu I have suffered him to go.
2) It signifies to leave:
Sa[|en ©ie t)a§ 61611)611 leavd that alone.
3) It signifies to make, to get:
(Sv lieg mic^ elne ganje ©tunfce tuarten.
He made me wait a whole hour.
(£r Itej3 i"^n feinen 3^^!^ f listen.
He made him feel his anger.
4) When in English the verbs to have or to get have
an accusative after them, followed by a past participle,
= 'to have (or get) a thing done', they are rendered by
Caff en with the following verb in the Infinitive:
5fd) idIU meiu §0(5 fcigen laffeu.
I will have my wood sawn (or sawed).
2Bo laffen ©te -Of^re 33u(^er 6 tub en (or ein6int)en)?
Where do you get your books bound?
SyJan lle§ t!^n !^ereinrufen they had him called in.
^6) ^aBe ein $aar ®d)uf>e maiden (affen.
I have got [had) a pah* of shoes made.
5) It corresponds with the verb to cause, to order; but
in German the following Infinitive must always be in
the active. Examples:
Wa liejseu fetuen i^veunb !ommen.
We caused his friend to come.
®er S^ic^ter lieg ben ®teB ter^ften (or arretieren).
The judge caused the thief to be arrested.
6) It signifies to hid (:§el6en), to tell:
Saffen ©ie ble SDame l^ereintreten bid the lady Avalk in.
®r Ue^ (or ^leg) ben Soten branpen tuarten.
He told the messenger to wait without.
7) As an auxiliary to the Imperative mood, taffen is
used only for the first person plural of that mood :
*) The object of ta[fcn is mostly in the ace. When there are
two objects, the person is in the dative, the thing in the ace.
Ex.: ^a[fcn ®ie mir [dat.) baS 33u(^.
296 Lesson 40.
Saffen ©ie un« eine Xa^e 5laffee trinfcn.
Let us take (drink) a cup of coflfee,
2a^t unS fingen unt tan^eu let us sing and dance.
8) With the reflective pronoun \x^, it involves the
idea of: it can be or may be:
(S« Vd^t fic^ nidjt bc^reifeii it cannot be understood.
2)ariiber lagt fid} »iele3 f^GCn of that, much might be said .
Beading Exercise. 110.
933ir liegen bie Winter bi§ ad}t UI)r fd)(afen. ^^ xotxtc e«
»on bem ®d}reineri mad)en laffen. SScv I)rtt biefe^ §au§ fcauen
laffen? Mdn ^JJad)bar ^at eS fiir feinen 8ol)n baiteu lafjen. Sag
ben 5l'ut[d)er2 aufvannen^. ®cv 9iid)ter Itcj3 bte ©efangeueu toor
fid) fommcn. 9J?ein §err; ©ie l)ahc\\ unS laiige ivarten laffen.
Saffen 3ie niiv ben ®d)uelbev lufcn-*. S33er fid) betviigen^ Idf^t,
ttevbtent bcttoc^en ju trerben. 3)er Se'^rer ^at feiue (2d)ii(er eine
engdfd^e iiberfe^una ntad}en laffen. Saffen ©ie un« einen ©pa=
iterganc^ umdjen. Set $5ater Iteg bag ^inb taufenfi unb tl)m ben
yZani en' ''Dearie geben. Saffet bie ^Inber l)evelnfDmmen. !Da« lagt
fid} (§ 8) nid}t ^offen. ^a lagt fid) nid)t3 ttjnn.
1) the joiner. 2) coachman. 3) to put to. 4) to send for.
5) to deceive (here to be deceived). 6) to be christened.
iiuf^ade. 111.
Let me do it. I let him work six hours every day. Let
me go. Let us take a walk. Let the old man sit [down].
Her father allowed her to marry. The governor i caused the
murderer to be arrested (§ 5). The admiral caused the crew 2
to disembark (au^fc^iffen) . You must /lave a new house built
(§ 4). The mother made her child pray 3 every morning and
evening. Where do you /lave [get) your books bound? I get
them bound by Mr. Long. lUd the gentleman come in. Who
shall (foil) pluck 4 the chemes? I will have them plucked by
John. Have you had the general invited? Yes, I have sent
him an invitation 5, This cannot be proved** (§ 8). That
(jDa) cannot be helped.
1) S)cr ®tftttt;attcr. 2) btc 2«annfd)aft. 3) bctcu 4) ^)p(fcn.
5) ciuc ©inlabimg. 6) beivcifcu.
IV. On foncit (miiffcn).
The employment of this verb differs also in many
respects from the English:
1) It sip^iiifies a moral necessity, equivalent to the Eng-
lish shall in the 2nd and 3rd person, or to I am to id^ fott:
2)U foUfl uid)t ftc^Ien thou shalt not steal.
Auxiliary: [otlen. 297
5)u foil ft betnen 9Za^flen lieBen, vo'k bic^ felOft.
Thou shalt love thy neighbour as thyself.
SSer foH e§ f^un, et ober id)? who is to do it, he or I?
Tlein ©o^n foil (or mug) i^ranjofifd^ unb 3)eutfc^ leruen.
My son is to learn French and German.
Q^ follte urn bier tll)r aBretfen; obex e§ \mx md)t moglid).
I i<;as to leave at four o'clock, but it was not possible.
2) In the Imperfect and Pluperfect it denotes a duty
= / ought to:
(Sr fotttc feme (Sc^utben hqai^icn.
He ought to pay his debts,
(gr f^atic feine (Sdjulben Beja^Ien foffcn*
He ought to have paid his debts (see p. 94, § 5).
(Sie fatten ^l)xe 2dtion (em en foUen.
You ought to have learnt your lesson,
5(6 ^attc ge^ien fotlen I should (ought to) have gone.
3) The Imperfect fo((te is used after IDeuu, to express
a chance or an event which is not quite certain:
SSenn er fomitten fodte, fo fagen ©te il^m t)iefe§.
If he should (were to) come, tell him this.
SSenn eg regnen foUte (or ©oEte eg regncn), fo ix>evbeu
tDXt ^u §aufe bleiben.
Should it rain, we shall stay at home.
2Benn id) il^n fe'^en f ollte , fo tuerbe id) i^m bie2Ba^vt)eit fagcn.
If I should see him, I shall tell him the truth.
4) (SoU, pi. foKen, means sometimes is or are said*),
supposed or reported, but only in the Present tense. The
other verb may be in the Past. Ex. :
jiDa§ Slepament foil fdfd) fein the will is said to be false.
(Sr foU in 5tmeri!a geftorBeu fein.
He is said to have died in America.
5) @onen is sometimes used elliptically, an Infinitive
being understood:
§ier ift ^axl, xoa^ foil er (i. e. f^un) ?
Here is Charles, what is he to do?
2Ba§ follen biefe SBorte (i. e. Ijeij^en or Bebeutcu)?
What is the meaning of these words?
2Ba§ follen biefe ^lagen (i. e, ^elfen, niiljen)?
Of what use are these complaints?
*) in Latin dicitur traditur etc.
298 Lesson 40.
Reading Exercise. 112.
SKir fotlcn @ott fuvd)ten unt) lieben. ^u foUft iud}t« 33ofe«
t)on tTeinem 9^dd)fteu reten. (Sie fDlIten ®ott tjaufeu, ta^ ©ic
au^ biefer ®efai)v geretteti tuorfcen fiut). 2Biv forien t)urc!^ 2(ubrer
^cl)Ier lerneu, unfve eipen ju toerbefjevn. 3Du l)dtte[t t)ie[em
5D^aune nid)t tvaueu2 foUeu. Cialic^ula befal}!, tag tie stonier i]^in
f^ottlid)e Sl)re cmeifeu^ foOten. ifcie 5J^cii[d)cn foUten fid) nid^t
liber t>ie 35eT[eI)un34 bet'lagen, njcnn fie buvd) i^re eigiien i^eljler
leifeeu. 3)er ^vanfe l^dtte^ nod) (more) toicl ^Irjuel nel^men niiiffeu,
it)eun or nid}t geftorben tuare. i)er ©raf foil auf ter ^agb fein.
dx foil fid) in tie ©uuftc be^ alten ^Ibnigg einge)"d)Uc^en " ^aben.
SL^iorgen foil (§ 4) ter t'ijiug in tie ©tatt fcmmen. 2Ba^ foU
tiefe evnftljaftes'SD^iene? 2Ba§ follen biefe ^omplimentes?
1) to rescue. 2) to trust. 3) render. 4) Providence. 5) See
p. 94, 5. — {)) favour. 7] to insinuate. 8) serious. 9) ceremonies.
Jtttfga0e. 113.
We are to be there at ten o'clock. Thou shalt not telll
lies. You shall not do what you like (iDiinfi^en), but what
you ought. Which of your servants is to go, John or James
(3cifob) ? James is to go. You should have invited'^ also the
old judge. She ought to be silent 3. Should the weather be
fine to-morrow, you may expect me at eight o'clock. If the
merchant should ask^ [for] money, tell him that I have none.
You ought to rise earlier. The boy ought to have written his
exercise. He is said to have gone to America. Mr. Taylor
is said to have taken poison 5. These ladies are supposed to
be very rich. You ought to have learnt the whole page by
heart (aU'^lluni'Dig). If tve were to (should we) call on you,
should you be at home? I see you are crying; what is the
meaning (§ 5) of these tears 6? What shall we do with this
robber ' ?
1) to tell lies tiigcn. 2) ciitlabcn. 3) to be silent = fc^wcigeu.
4) to ask for toerlangen (Ace). 5; ®ift. 0) 2:^>raiteu. ') JRauber.
V. On biirfcn*
1) The usual meaning of tiirfcii is to be allowed or
may ; when negative : must not ; it denotes permission
conceded by the law or by some person. Ex. :
.t^einrid) tavf t)iefe3 53ud) nid)t bel)alten.
Henry is not allowed to keep this book.
^ic Winter tiivfen biefeu 9hc^mittvig fpa'jieveu ge^cn.
The children are allowed to take a walk this afternoon.
®ie tiivfeu iinfjcu, ii.\i5 ev niiv gefagt l)at.
You may know what he told me.
Auxiliary: biirjen. 299
2) It signifies sometimes to dare^ to venture:
SSRcin t)arf nic^t ciEeg fagen, luaS man t)en!t.
People dare not say all they think.
3) It answers to the English 7ieed (= Brauc^en) :
©ie biirfen md)t baruber flagen (or bvauc^en md)t . . . ju !lagen) .
You need not complain of it.
2Bir tjutften*) fiir ntd)t^ forgen; aGe§ ti^ar Bere'it.
We had no need to care for anything: all was ready.
4) The conditional biirf te can be used to denote what
the speaker thinks probable or possible :
3)icfe lavage biirfte tt)ol}( iiberfliiffig fetn.
This question may [or might) (possibly) be superfluous.
Reading Exercise. 114.
^ran!e "iPerfDnen tiiirfen btefe (Speifei md)t effeit. Sd) fcatf
feinen SBetn triufen. ©te fciirfen biefen Svief lefen, tuenn ©ie
itjoHen (like) . S)er ©efangene burfte fein 2Beib unt) feiite ^inber
ntd)t me'^r fe^en, Bei^cr er auf t)a§ ©d)iff geBra^t tuurbe. iDarf
id) @te morgen BefiK^cu'; S)iefe 9}^ai:d)en iTjevbeu l)tvXt nic^t «uf
ben ^aU gel;en biirfen, ti^enn ti)re 9J?uttev nid)t Beffer tuirb. 9)ian
barf t^m2 nur in8 ®e[id;t fef)en, fo extent man ben !DleB. ®arf
man in ben !Lhuglid)en ©arten l^ineinge^en? -Sebermann barf
^ineinge^^en. ®arf man fragen, an tr>a^ ©le benten? Sr bnrfte
btefe§ njolf)! nici^t iuagen (dare). !Der £ran!e i)at feine ^Ir^nel
nel)men tDoUen, aBer er I)at gemugt. ©ie biirfen nic^t in biefe^
3immer ge^en. Dliemanb barf ^jineinge^en.
1) food, dish. 2) See p. 301, 2.
Jtttf0(i6e. 115.
Charles may play. We dare not invite him. May I see,
what you are writing? The pupils have not been allowed to
go out. May I ask, why not? He dares not look i in my
face 2. How could he undertake 3 this, without 4 mentioning
it to his father? We shall probably ^ not be allowed to buy
these books. You need not pay the waiter^. The children
are not allowed to play in this room. He might (biirfte) have
been mistaken (fi(^ geirrt I)aBen). Have you been allowed to
read the letter of your aunt? Yes, I have been allowed to
read it.
1) \t^tn. 2) ©eftc^t, n. 3) utiterne^mcn. 4) o^ne eS . . . ju fagen.
5) h)a^r[(!^einU(^. 6) ^cllner.
*) It would be better to say: SBtr Br a it c^ ten filt m(^t« ju
[orgcit or xo\x l^atten fiir nic^tg ju forgen.
300 Lesson 41.
Beading -lesson,
^ic fc(^!§ SSortleitt.
©cc^S SBiJrttein ne^men mid) in '3[u[pvud)i jeben Xac^:
3d) foil, id) muJ3, id) fann, id) njill, id) tjavf, id) macj.
3d) foil, ift t)a« ©efel^, tjon @ott in^ §ev5 3e[d)riet>en,
"S^aS 3^<^i^r nad)3 n)cld)em id) bin tjon mir felbft getvicbcn.
Qdj mu^, t)a§ ift tie (BdjxanV*, in^ tDeId)er luic^ tie 2Be(t
25on eiuer — , tie 9^atut t?on antrer — (Seite ^cilt.
3c^ tann, ta§ ift ta§ 9)2a^ ber mir i?erliel)'nen ^ .^aft,
3)cr Xf)at, bev i^evtigf eit ', ter 5lunft uut ai5ifien[d)aft.
3d) tuiU, tie ^i3d)fte trou' ift tiefct^ tie mid) fd)mudt^
®a§ ift ter ^rei{)eit ©iegel, tem ©eifte aufgetriicfts.
3d) tarf. ta« ift jugleid) tie 3nfd)rifti(' bei^ tem Siegel,
SeimJ2 aufget^anen Vc)ox ter 0^reit)cit and) ein S^iec^en^.
3d) mac^, ta§ entlid) ift, tua^ 5ti3ifd)en alien fd)tt3immt.
eiu uubeftimmtegi4^ t)a§ ter Stugenblid bcftimmt.
3d) foil, id) mug, id) tann, id) mill, ic^ tarf, tc^ mag,
jDic fed)fe nct)meu mid) in 5lufprud) jeten Sag.
SRnx toeiin 1)ui5 fdbft mid) lel)rft, iijeijs id), traS jeten Xag
3d) foil, id) mug, id) fann, ic^ n^ill, ic^ tarf, id) mag.
1) claim me. 2) the goal, aim. 3) towards. 4) the bounds,
limits, constraint. 5) within. 6) granted. 7) dexterity. 8) adorns.
9) impressed, stamped. 10) inscription. H round or upon. —
12) on the open door. 13) bolt. 14) something vague, undefined.
15) thou, o Grod.
Forty-first Lesson.
Remarks on the use of the Pronouns.
(See the 23rd, 24th and 25th lessons.)
I. On the Personal pronouns.
1) After a personal pronoun of the Tst or 2nd person
singular as well as plural, the same pronoun is repeated
after the relative tev, bic, ba« (seep. 150, Note). Ex.:
3d), ter id) i^n fenne I who know him.
jDu, ter tu il)n nid)t fennft you who do not know him.
2Bir, tie tvir jnng fint we who are young.
2) The jTcnitive case of the personal pronouns occurs
mostly after verbs governing the genitive, and in con-
nection with numerals:
dx fpottete meincr he mocked me.
3d) cvinneve mid) feiner I remember him.
Unfrcr 5cl)n ten of us. | il)rer jtvansi^ twenty of them.
Possessive pronouns. 301
Note. This genitive is likewise joined with the prepositions
n^egen , J^alBeu and ixntten, in which case the r is changed into t,
as: metnettDegen on my account; S^fettoegcn on your account. E: :
3c^ tl)at eS lint fctnctwitten (i^retiritten).
I did it for his (her) sake etc.
3) The dative and accusative plural of the reflective
pronoun (fid;) may take a mutual signification, meaning
one another. Ex.:
S)le jtDei ©d)lDeftern gtelc^en fid) (or einanl^er).
The two sisters resemble one another.
®iefe Seute Befd)im^fen fic^ (or eiuauber).
These people abuse one another.
II. On the Possessive pronouns.
1) The possessive adjectives mein, betn, fein 2C. are not
so often used in German as in English; they are com-
monly replaced by the article, when there is no doubt of
the person meant by the speaker, especially when parts
of the body are spoken of. Ex. :
I have broken my leg.
■3fc^ ^abe bag (not mein) Sein gebrod)en.
The king held the sceptre in his hand.
SDev Sli3nig "fjiett bag ©center in ber §aub.
She put he7' handkerchief before her eyes.
©ie I^ielt il;r Xafd)entU(^ t?or bie (or i^re) ^lugen.
2) When not only possession is implied, but when a
strong reference to the subject is expressed, the possessive
adjective is replaced by the personal or reflective pronoun
and by the definite article before the substantive. Ex.:
Od) l^abe mi(^ in ben finger gefd^nitten. [Lit. I have cut
myself into the finger.)
I have cut my finger.
^er ^na'be mug \\6) bie §anbe n^afc^en.
The boy must wash his hands.
(Sie l^at eg i:^m in bie §anb gegeben.
She has given it into his hand.
3) The four possessive pronouns, mine, thine., his and
ours, when predicate, are treated as adjectives and
translated mein, bein, fetn and unfer, instead of meiuer
or ber meinige etc. This takes place when they are joined
to the preceding noun by the auxiliary to he:
302 Lesson 41.
jDiefer ©atteu ift met it*) this garden is mine.
3fenc i^eber ift [eiu that pen is his.
4) Observe the following expressions:
A horse of ours cine^ Con uu|eru -pfevteu or unfter ^fevfce.
A friend of mine einev Don meinen ^reunfcen or eiu ^reunt)
ton mir.
A relation of ours — of yours einer Don unfern (3f^ren) 35er*
ti>ant)ten or ein SSertt)ant)tev con un§ — tjou -i^nen.
Reading-Exercise. 116.
M), ter id) atle^ ntit meinen elgenen Slugen gefet)en ^abc,
!ann bag befte 3<^ii3"^^^ gcben. ©ii^er ^xieU, t)er Du toom
§ininiel fommft, evjiitle niein ^evj. (Srbavmen (3ie fic^ nieinev.
3d) bin urn feinetiDiUen geftraft tDorfcen. ^ie jungen Seute »er*
^ei^cn fid) Ieid)t il)rc 5:f)ovI)citen (follies). 3ft e^ n?at)r, "oa^
i^avl t^en Slim gebrodjen f)at? 3a, er I)at nid)t nur ben Sinn,
font)ern an&f t>a^ 33ein gebrod)en. ^Dag 9)?at)d)en ficl anf tie £niee
unt) betete. Sincv meiuer 53ettern ift geftern geftovben. 3)iefer
©tod ift mein. 3d) ftant) an i5cm i^enfter unt) l^atte ein 33ud) in
tev §anb. 3f)r ?^inger blutet2; ^aben Sie fid) gefd)nitten? 3d)
babe mid) (or.. mir) mit einev D^abel^ in ben ginger geftod)en ^^
Sennen ©ie biefen iungen Tlann ? 3a, er ift ein ^Setter »on mir.
1) evidence. 2) to bleed. 3) needle. 4) to sting, prick.
iiuUaBe. 117.
We who are old, cannot enjoy i these pleasures. He who
wished to injure me {dat.) , has served me {dat.). They
laughed ((ad)tcn) at us.**) We left England i'or her sake.
Don't these two girls love one another tenderly 2? The boy
had a cap^ on his head. He has lost /lis senses (^Jerj^ant),
sing.). The queen had a crown-* on her head and a sceptre 5
in her hand. My heart beats with (t)or) joy. The prisoner
has cutf) his throat (§ali?) . I am wounded in (an) my shoulder 6.
In firing (^eim 2o§fd)ie6en) the gun {Gen.), 2 1 ihave wounded
my hand. This hat is not mine, it belongs to my brother.
This lead-pencil is mine, the other is his. A relation of ours
has gone to America. A cousin of yours came yesterday to see
us. The naughty boy threw a snow-ball 7 at (an) the man's
head [transl. threw to the man [Dat.) a snow-ball at the head).
1) genic^cu. 2) jcirtlic^. 3) cine ^a^^^c or miW^t. 4) ^one, f.
5) ©center or ^i)^Ux, n. 6) ©coulter, f. 7] (Sii)nccbatt, m.
*) mein is used here as an adjective.
**) at us may be translated either with the Genitive unfrcr or
better with the preposition fiber with the Accusative.
+) See II, 2, first Ex.
303
III. On the Relative pronouns.
1) The relative pronoun n)e(d)er or ber must take the
first place in the accessory sentence, and can only he
preceded hy prepositions; therefore, when in English a
noun precedes the genitive of the relative pronoun, the
former takes its place in German after the pronoun,
losing at the same time the article :
I have some rings the price of which*) I do not know.
3fd) :^abe eluige ^Unge, Deren ^ret§ ic^ uid^t fenne.
We went to a house, from the windows of which from
tvhose windows) we saw it.
2Bir gingen in ein §au§, aug bef fen ?^cnfi em mv e^ fa^en.
A machine by means of which one can fly.
(Sine 2J?a[d;tne, t?ermittelft toeren man fliegen !ann.
2) The genitive of the relative pronoun preceded hy
all is translated in the nominative :
He had five children all of whom died in their infancy.
Sr l^atte fiinf ^inber, "Die a He in il^rer ^inbl^eit ftarBen.
3) This is also the case when all precedes a personal
pronoun :
All of us h)lr aOe.
all of you ©ie aUe. | all of them fie aUe.
4) The correlatives such as, when equivalent to those
who are rendered in German by btejeuigen (or bte) tueld^e:
Such as are poor bte, n)eld)e arm finb.
Note. The form fo, in the place of tocldjt [plur.) is obsolete, as:
SSoit aflen [o (= biej ba famen among all that came.
5) When such is followed hy a noun, it is considered
as an adjective and translated fold;; hut then the fol-
lowing as to must be rendered by the conjunction ba§:
1 placed myself in such a posture as to have a view over all.
3!^ ijerfe^te mid) in eine fDld)e (Stettnng, bag id) atle liBer*
fe^en !onnte.
Reading Exercise. 118.
!iDer ©ngtanber, beffen body 'J, by the brightness lo of which
our eyes are dazzled ii, the sun. Such as are good and in-
dustrious, may go home with me. I found myself in such a
position 12 as to observe all that went on (t>orging) around me.
1) ba8 3iel. 2) ftreben. 3j befdjnitten or geftu^t. 4) gort[d)ritt, m.
5) anti^cnbett. 0) ^cilmittel, n. 7] bie 53arm:^er5igfeit. 8) ^uSiibung, f.
9) ^immclS terser, m. 10] ©lauj, m. 11) geblenbet. 12) ©tellung, f.
IV. On the Indefinite pronouns.
1 ) The German a ( ( , when in the singular of the masc.
and neuter gender, and followed by a possessive adjective,
is not declined:
W mein ®elt) all my money.
^atj bin all meinc§ ®etl}e8 [Gen.) beraubt iDoiten.
I have been robbed of all my money.
2)ilt aU meinem ®ett) [dat.) with all my money.
But in the femi?i{?ie gender and in the plural, it agrees
with its noun:
(Sr I)at aiic fcine ©uppe t)erfd)iittet.
He has spilt all his soup.
21 He biefe 33dume all these trees. | [Gen. afler t)iefer SB.) •
2) The English all in the singular, when it denotes the
whole of a thing or period must be translated ganj:
All the world bic gaiije 2Belt.
All the year t5a§ gailje Oal^V.
All day t)eu ganjen Xag. | All night t)ie gaiije 9^ac^t.
3) In this signification, when placed before 9iames of
countries and towns gailj (all) remains unchanged in all
the cases:
All England would rise ganj^ (Suglant \inirt)e auffle'^cn.
In all France iu gvius ^vaufvcid).
All Paris gau^ l^axi^.
Indefinite pronouns. 305
4) 5ltte§ means commonly ev ery tiling ; but it is some-
times applied to persons in an entirely general sense :
%{k^ freut fic^ everybody rejoices.
%^t?> fliel}et everybody flees.
5) 51 Ue^ iDa0 is in English all that or only that:
2llte§, n)a§ tc^ gefel}en l)viBe all I have seen.
6) 3eber (every] ^ when denoting time, may be as
well rendered by the plural a((e:
Every day jeteu S^ag or aHe S^age.
Every year jebe^ -Saijr or aHe ^afjre.
Every twenty-four hours aVit toteruubjiuanjig ©tunt>en.
7) 33tel and tDettig in the singular ought not to be
declined, (except sometimes in the feminine) but it should
always be done so before nouns in the plural:
@t t)at tot el ©elb he has niuch money.
■3d) :^abe icenlg ^txi I have little time.
§viben ©ie toiele ^remibe? have you many friends?
3d) fjabe nur tueutge i^Teuube I have but few friends.
2Benige (or tt)entge Scute) hjifjen ba^ few people know that.
8) (Sin tceutg [a little) is indeclinable as in English:
©eben @ie mir eiit tueitig (Salj give me a little salt.
9) iBetbe (^o^A) is sometimes used without a substan-
tive, as : ^etbe finb tot both are dead. — It never admits
of a genitive after it. Ex.:
2Bir beibe both of us.
(Sie Beibe (or t>ie Beibcn) both of them.
9JJit un§ beiben with both of us.
3fn biefen beiben §dufern in both of these houses.
Note. The English hoth — and is a co-ordinative conjunction
and is rendered by [otDO'^t — at§ (see p. 245, 1). Ex.:
Both silver and gold fotDol^t ©ilber al8 ®olb.
10) Either (etner Don betbcn) and neither (fetner
\)onbeiben). It must be observed, that in German „betbe"
is mostly dropped, and that either of must be translated
„etner fton'', when two people are spoken of. Ex.:
Either of them einev (or /em. euie) »on t'Ejnen.
Neither of my sons leiner toon metnen (2) (Sij^nen.
On neither side auf !etner ©eite.
11) The indefinite pronoun either*] preceded by 7iot
is always !etner toon betben; not any is !etn; not anybody
ntemanb; not anything ntc^t^. Ex.:
*) The negative adverb not (nor) — either is translated aud^
iiic^t. Ex.: I have not seen him either tc^ tjabe tt;it au6) ntc^t gefe^cn.
OTTO, German Conv.-Graminar. 20-
306 Lesson 41.
I do not know either of them id) feime feinen tjon belben.
We have not had anij mx ^ahtw fettien (or e, 5)^ ge^abt.
Have you not heard oi anybody*) ^abcn Ste tjon niemant)
I did not buy anything iof ^aUe nic^t§ gefauft. [gc^ort?
12) Other is commonly translated fcer anbrc; an-
other eiu an brer. But when it signifies a second or a
third thing of the same kind, it is translated noc^ etn:
Take another glass of wine.
9^ef>men ®ie noc^ etn @(a3 SSein.
Will you have another cup of tea?
SoKen (Sie noc^ eine %CL\\t X^ee?
13) Something similar takes place with more'^ before
a noun, not followed by than, it is translated nod;:
Have you any more horses? tjaben (3te nod) ^ferfce?
He has tivo more children ev I)at noc^ 5ti?ei 5iint)er.
Take some more cherries nel)men ®ie noc^ einigc 5iixf(^en.
Give me a little [or some) more sugar,
©eben ®ie mit nod) ein toenig 3urft^'>^-
14) When used negatively, more (or also longer] is
rendered by ntel^t , but the German mt^xfolloics the noun:
He has no more money er I)at fcin ®clt) me^V.
We have no more horses \oix t)aben lelne ^ferte me^r.
The boy has no longer a father.
jDer ^nabe ^at feinen SSater me^r.
Heading Exercise 119.
D^el^men ©ie ba§ gan^e ©tiicf ? 9lein, id) bvauc^e nuv njeuige
QJieter. (SJan^ *i|3an§ n?ar erlcud)teti. 5)iefe ^flanjcn finbct man
in gan^ j5)eut(d)(ant). 2Sir nui^ten ben ganjen Xag arbeiten. Od)
fann Ot)nen ntd)t atle^ eY5at)len2, n:a§ id) eriebt (experienced)
l^abe. SSir finb aflc reidbUd) be|'d)enft3 njovten. 2Bir atle tvaren
l^ungvig nnb burftig. (Sine ^ran ^tte eine §enne, toelc^e afle
2^age ein (SI legte. §evr 9)iiUcr ift niit nn'8 bciben nac^ ^axx^
gcrei[t. ©inev »on end) nuij^ ftevben, fagte bev 9idnbcv jn nniS.
feoUcn (Sie nod) eincn 5lvfel l)aben? D^cin, ic^ banfe, id) ejfe
feinen ntcl)v. 2Bie mcle ®d)ii(ev l)aben 8ie nod)? 3(^ ^labcnoc^
je^n. §err 51. ^at feinen 33ebienten niel)v.
1) illuminated. 2) relate. 3) rewarded.
Jlltfartfic. 119a.
The travellers have been robbed i of all their luggage 2
[Gen.). We worked all day and all night, but we could not
*) Except in questions like: .^abcn @tc ni^t ctwaS or jcmanb
^%\t^in'{ ^aben ^tc nid^t eincn t^rcuub in i!onbLMr?
Lesson 41. 307
finish our work. In all Europe such a man is not to be found
(^U fmbeil). I will tell you all I know. All of you have been
warned (gelt>arnt) by the police-man 3. I did not see anything.
They were every day entertained ^ with songs, the subject
(@egenftanb) of which [pi.) was the happy valley. Take an-
other cup of tea. Have you amj more brothers ^ and sisters?
I have no 2 more 1 brothers, but two sisters. My father has
no more horses; he has sold them all.
1) fecrauBett. 2) bag ©e^acf. 3) ber ^oUjci'biener. 4) unter^atten.
5) brothers and sisters = ®e]'(^lt)ifter.
Reading-lesson,
e^tftct'. Epictetns.
Xer $l)i(cfop^ (S^iftcf tuar ein ©fla»e beg Spa^'^robi'tu^,
uut) ^^iWt xkd ijon f einem §errn 1 ju erbult)en2; abev er ^atte eine
groge unt) ftarfe ©eete. %\^ einft Spapl)ioi)ttu§ il}ni einen f)eftigeu
fec^lag3 auf bag 33ein4 gegeben ^atte, tDavnte (S^'iftet i^n fait
(coolly) , ba^ er eg t^m iitd)t Bred)en foUte. ®er §evr t>erbo^peIte
fehie ®treid)e3, fo bag er t^m ben .tnodjeit^ itx\^\yx%' . %tx
SBeife antit?ottete i^m, o^ne fid) ju entritften^: „@agte \^ e§ btv
iiic^t, bag bu mir eg jerfc^lagen itjiitbeft!"
(S^nftet tr>ar immer toergniigt, felbft (even) in ber (S!(at>erei.
„3fc6 bin," fagte er, „an ber (StcEe-, tDO bte 33orf etjung ^ miG, bag
i(^ fein foH; mid) baritber beflagen, {)iege fie beleibtgen." 3)ie
5tt)et ©runble^ren 8 feiner 9JJoral njaren: „2Biffe ju bulb en
unb bi^ ^u entJialten^." (gr fanb in fid) felbft bte nbtigen
§i(fgmittel 10^ urn ben erften biefer ©rnnbfa^^es in 5lngubungii ju
bringen.
„2[Bir ^aben fe^r unrec^^t," fagte er btgn^eilen, „bte SIrmut
anjuHagen 12, t?ag fie ung ungliidlid) inad)e; eg. ift ber (Sf)rgei5i3^
eg finb unfre unerfdttlid)en i4 S3egierben, n^etd^e ung nja^r^aft
clenb mad)en. 2Bdren n)ir §erre« ber ganjen 2BeIt, fo Bnnte nng
t'^r 53efi^ nic^t tjon %yxx^i unb Summer (grief) fret mad)en; bie
iBernunftis altein ^at biefe ©etualt."
(Spi!tet ftarb in einem fe^^r l^cr^en 5I(ter unter ber 9tegterung
beg ^aiferg 9)?ar!ug 3luretiug. !3)te irbeneis Sampe, tijomtt er feine
p^llofop^tfc^en 9^ad)tn3ad)en i? erleud)tete is, njuit)e einige ^t\i nac^
f einem 2:obe fiir 3000 3)rad)men (2700 granfen) terfauft.
1) master. 2) endure. 3) blow. 4) leg. 5) the bone. 6) to
grow angry. 7) Proridence. 8) principal doctrines. 9) to for-
bear, to abstain. 10) resource. 11) to practise, to carry out. —
12) to accuse. 13) ambition. 14) insatiable desires. 15) reason.
16; earthen. 17) night-watch. 18) enlighten.
Conversation.
2Ser tt)ar Spiftet? (gin ^^fiilofop^ unb ein ©flaDe
beg (Spapiirobitug.
20*
308 Lesson 42.
2Bat f cin §err giltig gcgen t^n ? 9Mu, er ti^ar ^art^crjig unt)
graufam.
?([« biefer t^m einft ^eftig aiif Gr tuarnte i^n, ba^ er t^m t)a«
fca3 53ein fcl)lug, \m^ fagte er'^ ^ein ind)t 3erbreci)en feUte.
2Ba8 tljfat aber (Sv^ap^votituS? (Sv i^erCD^velte feine ®treid)e uub
jerfdilug il)m njirflid) ta§ Sein.
2Buvbe (Spiftet bariiber entriiftet? 9Zeln, er anttDortete ganj rii^ig,
tjafj^ er e^ il)m i^orau'^gefagt babe.
SBeftagte er fid^ bariiber, bag er 9^ein, er miteni^arf (submitted)
ein (SflaDe iuar? fic^ ru^ig feinem (Sd)id)'al.
233a« fagte er ? Sr fagte : „^d) bin an ber (Stefle,
n>Dbin bie S3orfe!^ung mid) ge*
fe^t f)at."
2BeI(^e« toaren feine jtoei ©runb^ „2Biffe ju bulben unb bid) ^u
le^ren? ent^lten."
Oft e3 bie 5lrmut, bie un^ un* 9^id)t bie 2lrmnt, fonbern unfre
gtiidlid) mad)t? 53cgicrben.
3Bann ftarb ©pif'tet? Unter 9)Zar!u3 5lureUu«, in etnem
je!^r l)Dl)en 5l(ter.
SBie tener tuurbe feine irbene %ux 3000 2)rad)men.
2a\npt certanft?
Forty-second Lesson.
Use of the Tenses of the Indicative Mood.
The use of the German tenses differs very little from
that of the English. It presents therefore few difficulties.
I, Present Tense.
1) For the Present tense we have only one form, viz.:
3d) lefe I read, I do read, I am reading.
3d) fd)reibe I (do) write, I am writing.
3d) effe nid)t I do not eat etc.
The English form / am readi7ig^ writing, eating etc.
must always be translated in the same manner : id) I e ) C ,
id) fd)tcibe xc. Sometimes when the continuance of the
action is desired to he stated, the adverbs ebeil or gc*
rabe or je^U (just, now) are added. Ex.:
3d) {rUl)ftiide eben I am breakfasting.
©r fd)laft (jeljt) he is sleeping.
2) The same is to be observed through all the tenses:
Imp. 3d) fviit)ftiidtc (gcrabe ob. ebon) I was breakfasting.
Per/. 3d) l)abe ben ganjen !Itag gclcfen.
I have been reading all day.
Use of the tenses. 309
3) The Present tetise is sometimes employed for the
Future, if near at hand, and the time indicated hy an-
other adverbial expression :
■3^ retfe fciefen 3Ibeut) aB I shall depart this evening.
■3n brei Xagen !cmme td> tt>teber ^uvitcf.
In three days I shall be back.
4] The Present tense is used in German in connection
with the word fd;on or jett, for the English P^r/(9c^ or
Compound tense, when the latter expresses that the action
or state still continues, especially in the question how
long and the answer to it:
2Bie lange ftub ©ie \^^\x I)ler?
How long have you heen here?
2Bie lange (ernen ©ie fd^on ®eiitfd)?
How long have you heen learning German?
^^ terne e§ fett vid)t 9}?Dnateu.
I have heen learning it these eight months.
§aBen ©ie biefen Sebienten fd)on tange? (not geljaBt.)
Have you had this servant long?
^^ l^aBe i!)n fc^on ^tuei 3al)re (or felt 5tt?et ^fci^ren).
I have had him ^Aese two years.
II. Imperfect Tense.
This is the narrafive tense, and its use does not
differ at all from the English. Ex.:
-3e[u8 f^rad) 511 feiuen ^iingern k.
Jesus spoke to his disciples etc.
It is always used after the conjunction a(§ [ivhen,
as). Ex. :
2lt§ id) tf)n fommen fa'^ when I saw him come (coming).
Wvc gtngen fpa^ieren, luat^reub itnfrc ^reitube Garten fpielten.
We took a walk, whilst our friends were playing at cards.
III. Perfect Tense.
1) The Perfect tense or Compound of the Present tense
is used to express an action or event perfectly ended,
without any reference to another event happening at
the same time. It often corresponds with the English
Imperfect :
3fd} ^aBe O^ren 33rtef ric^tig empfangen.
I have duly received your letter.
®er SlrBetter ift reld)ltd) Be(oI)nt tDorben.
The workman has been [was) amply rewarded.
310 Lesson 42.
^te lange fiub 3ie in ®eutfd)laub gcwefcti?*)
How long were you in Germany?
2) It is further employed for the English Imperfect in
those cases where the time of the action is recent, and
sometimes in accessory sentences:
M) bin gefteiu aitf t)em 58atle gciDcfen (or id) tt?av...).
I was at the ball yesterday.
3fd) ^abe ®ie lange nid)t me^r gefet)en.
It is long since I saw you.
3) In most short questions and answers :
§abeii ®ie fd)cu (ju ^Diitta^l gefpeift (dined)?
5d) ^abe urn 4 Ul)f ge^^eift (I dined etc.).
SBann fiut) (Sie aiigefommeii? (when did you arrive?)
3d^ bin urn 10 Ul^r angefommeu (I an-ived at 10 .
IV. The Pluperfect Tense
is employed as in English:
%\\^ (9Zad}t)em) id) tie Si-'itung gelefen ^atte, giiu3 id) au^.
When (or after) I had read the newspaper, I went out.
(St l^atte njci^vent) te^ ®en?itter^ 9efd)(ateu.
He had slept during the thunderstorm.
Note. In subordinate sentences, the auxiliary r)atte or irctr
is sometimes left out, particularly in poetry. Ex.:
Unb at§ er faiim baS SBort gefprod)en (i. e. I)atte).
Scarcely had he spoken the Avord.
Hub c^' tl)m iioc^ baS Sort cntfattcn (i._ e. xvxnx). (S*iUcr)
And before the word had escaped his lips).
Beading Exercise. 120.
1. ^ie ©tabt S^om liegt auf fiebeu ^iii^ehi. ^Ci6.) t^em
SKintcr fomnit fcer Sviil)lin(^. ^er iinabe fd)neitct (makes) feine
?5et)ern fclbft. 3)ie 5hmuti irel)ut eft iieben t?em Ubevf(ufie2.
aHovgen abent> reife id) imd) 8tvofJibuvg; iuctlen (Sie mid) be*
^leiten? 5)icgeneiS trcl)nte in ciuem %vl\0. 3d) !enne (I, 4)
il)u feit feiner 5liut'l)eit. 3)uvd) ti?eu iuuvte 5lbcl i3etetet? :Die
Outen \vDl)nten jitevft im ^aut^e ©oicn; l)eviiad) je^cu-* fie in tad
2aut) Slaiman. 5Bov fcrei 5li?od)eu ^at t)er3acjer cineu§irfd)5 3efd)offeu.
1) Poverty. 2) abundance. 3) tub. 4) went, moved. 5) stag.
*) Or Warctt Sic. Your stay in Germany is perfectly ended:
you nre no more in (icniiony, when the question is asked, just
as in French. Avez-vou8 et6' or ^tiez-YOUS? — Sic knge finb ^£ic
ba iictucfen answers to the English: Hotc long were you there?
(see III, 2;.
Lesson 42. 311
2. 2Biv tDerben t>a§ ?D^et)I i?on ehiem anbern S3ac!er faufen.
§aBen ©ie 3^xe 5lvBeit geenbigt? 2Bir ^ben fie no6} nidjt ge*
eniJigt. SQkn I)at aUe Dfftjtere Beftraft, xoeldje bte i^al^nen ijer*
laffen !^aBen. 4)ie Sti)riev l^atten buvc^ i^ven ©tolj^ fcen ^onig
(SefoftviS gegen fid^ aufgebrad^t', ber in Sgt^pten ^errfd^te unb
fo Diele ^Jeic^es etobevt t)atte. -Sd) ^tte metne ©efdjafte^ fd)on
beenbigt, al^ id) 3;I)ven ^rief ev^ielt. 5118 er mir t>ie ©efc^id^te
crjciijlt f)atte, fd)lief er etn. (S^ l)at t>ie[e§ 3fa^r nic^t toiele ^^rauben
gegeben. ©obalb id) niein ©elb er^Iten l^abe, werbe ic^ biefe
©tabt toerlaffen.
6) pride. 7) irritated. 8) kingdoms. 9) business.
.^Mfgcxae. 121.
1. What are you doing? I am reading a very amusing i
book ; you must read it also ; to-morrow I shall send it [to]
you. Napoleon the First died in the year 1821. My friend has
published 2 a new English grammar. The servant has killed
his master 3. Were you ever in France? No, Sir, I intend 4
to go there next year. After I have read the book , you
shall have it. We waited [a] long time for you (auf dre tm
(^d)(ad)t3ctuuinicl^ umijcfommen. SllS er ttnefcer jum ^Sorfc^ein^
fam, uiit tern 33(ute ber ?^elube Seticcft, fo tt.nuteu feme SeltJateu
5)clt)eu. 3)ie 53erbuut)eteni« tvurteu in (Bixidc gel)auen. Xcx 2)^ar*
fd)aU toon 23iron fommaiitievte t^a-S 9te[ert3e!orpc^ nut) l^atte, o^ue
eben in t)cr §i^c t)e^ ©cfedjtcS yi [eiu, eiueit gvoBeu Sluteiin am
(^iege. (Sr iDunfd)tei2 tern 5lonig mit tiefen ilBorteu @lu(fi2:
„®ive, 6ie l)abeu t^eute i3etl)an, tva^ ^iron tt^un foUte, unt> 53iron,
tca^ ber .^buig ttjuu f elite."
Die 9JJilt?e beS ©ieger^ erl^ofjle^^ ten 9tut)m t)e^ Xriump^^.
„9tettet t)ie ^van;jofen," fd)rie er, inbem er bie B^ludjtlinige ^^ t^er^
folate. 5I[le t)iefe 3"3S nmlenis ben ^rogen SQiann, tDcldjer t)le
^iinft befag, tie §^'^5^" 5« getutnnen.
Miwx inuj3 befonberS bie ©enugtbitungi^ betvntnbeni, 1-Deld}e
er bem §errn t>on ®d}Dmber3 ^ah. liefer ®eneral ber beutfdjen
§ilf^truppeu tjerlangte etnige Xac^e. »or ber ®d)tad)t bte Se^uungi^
feiner S^ruppen. 5)a^ ®clb mangelteis; etne Setcevgung be-3 Un-
it)ilIen§^'J reiilt ben 5?bnig l)m: ,Mie," antnjcrtete er, „ifat ein
5Dlann t)on 9)?ut am 3^age »or eiuer (2d)(ad)t ®clb t>crlangt."
S3dII 9?eue2o liber biefe trdnfenbe^i i^eb^aftigfeit ergriff er, um
fie n)ieber gut ju mad)en22, ben ^tugenblicf, t\3e23 man !am^fen
n?ollte2-i. „pexx t). ®d)omberg," fagte er, „id) ^be (Sie tjor einigen
2;agen beleibigt. Diefer Zaci, ift me(teid)t ber le^te meine« ?eben^;
id) \Ditl nid)t bie Sl^re einc^ ©belmanneS mit mir ne^men; ic^
fenne 3f)r ^erbienft25 unb 3t;ren SJhit; ic^ bitte Sie um ^^er-
jeil^ung; umarmen ®ie mid)."
iel®efducnidjfeital«3??ut
unb 2^a):fcvfcit.
2Beld)e SSerte fprad) er i>or ber SBJenn fie il)re i^a()nen toerlicren,
®d)lad)t ju feinen (Solbaten? foflten fie fid) um feiueu njeifeen
i^eberbufd) fd)aren (collect).
Subjunctive after conjunctions.
313
2Ba« fiiv etn ^ii^rer (guide)
tuurbe fciefer i^uen fein?
2Ber fommant?ierte ba§ 9^eferi^e=
2JJtt xod^en SSovteit ti.ntufd}te
btefer tern ^ouig ©liic! ju
feiuem (Siege?
Wie njar er a(§ ©iegev?
2Sle ^etgte er t)ie[eio?
SKie bena'^m (behaved) er fid)
gegen ben ©eneral i?. ®d)om*
berg?
§atte er i§n belei1}lgt?
33ei h)eld)em 51nlag (occasion) ?
SBann fud}te er fein Uured)t
tDieber gut ^u madden?
2Ba^ fagte er ju i^m?
2Bar toon (Sc^omberg fcaburd)
befrtebigt?
2Ba§ fur ein @d?tdfai (fate)
{)atte er t)ann?
2Bar t). ©(Romberg ein ^ran^ofe?
2)er Sitbrer 5U Otu'^m unb (Sbre.
S)ev 90?arfd)aII 33tron.
„®ire," fprad) er, „(Sie !)abeii
Ijmte getl)an, U3a0 Sirou ^tte
ti)un foil en."
(Sr U)ar fe!^r milbe.
(Sr rief ben ©olbaten ju, ba^ fie
bie ^raujcfen retten foEten.
(Sr gab ibm eine gtdn^eube ®e*
uugtt)uung.
^a, ber £ontg 'i^attt t!)m eineu
uut)erbieuteu 55Drivurf gema^t.
511^ ber ©eneral eintge iage toor
ber ©d)Iad)t bie fel;nung fiir
feine !I^ruppen toerlangte.
S-m Slugeublicf cor bem ^eginu
ber <^d)lad)t.
„3d) tDiU bie (St)re etne^ (Sbelniann^
ntd)t mit mir iu^ ©rabne^men;
tjcrjeifjen @ie mir, ©eneral."
©etDi^; er fagte, biefe ^luyjeid)^
uung (distinction) StiJtnge x\)n,
fiir feinen ^?i3uig ju fterben.
(gr tDurbe an ber ©eite be^ ^0*
nig§ geti3tet,
^ein, er iuar ein ®eutfd)er.
Forty-third Lesson,
On the Subjunctive Mood.
The subjunctive mood is employed when the speaker
wishes to express uncer taint t/ or doubt of the reality of
an action or a statement. It is used in German:
1) after some of the conjunctions;
2) after certain verbs;
3) in the oblique narration,
L Subjuuctive after conjunctions.
§ 1 . Only a few of the conj'unctioiis require the verb
in the subjunctive; viz.:
314 Lesson 43.
a] bamtt' {thai, in order that) and bamtt'... n\d)t [lest):
(Sagen ©ie e3 i!^m, 'Damit ev c8 n^iffe.
Tell him, that he mat/ know it.
25erftecfen ©ie fic^, fcamtt man ©ie iud)t ^ier fin be.
Hide yourself, lest they find you here.
b] ID e n n [if] , and oh if oi whether, but only when used
with an Imperfect or Pluperfect:
2Benn er mel;r ©elb ^dttc if he had more money.
2Benn er ni(^t !ran! t»are if he were not ill.
2Benn td^ il;n gefe^en ^atte, fo tDiiibe iA e« i^m gefagt ^aben.
If I had seen him, I should have told him.
3d) fvagte itjn, ob er jufriebeu iijdre.
I asked him if he was contented.
c] a t § ti) e n n , n) t e tD e n n or a U o b (a* t^) :
(Sr fiel)t aug, al§ tuenn (or \xAt luenn) er franf it? are.
He looks as if he were sick.
(S^ f)at ben 5ln[d}cin, al8 ob e^ fait iuerben toiirbe.
It seems as though it would become cold.
§ 2. If tbe conjunctio7i tt)enn is understood, the verb
remains in the Subjunctive, but is placed at the beginning
of the sentence, as in English. Ex. :
§dtte t^ (Selb, fo tDiirbc ic^ ein "ipferb faufen.
Had I money, I should buy a horse.
SBare id) md)t h'an!, fo tviirbe id) mit O^nen ge^en.
Were I not ill, I should go with you.
SSiigte er, baJ3 id)' l)ier bin, . .
If he knew, that I were here etc.
3hifftcl)en \oiirbe (SuglanbS (janje Ougenb,
©al)c ber 33ritte fcine ^onigin. (Sdjiiur* imam emart.)
All England's youth would rise,
If the Briton saw his queen.
Reading Exercise. 122.
(5d)icfe ber armcu i^van ben i^-lad)'8, bam it fie ibn glei^
fptnne. 2Benn er friU)cr !ame, iinirbe er mid) ^n §aufe fmben.
!iBenn man Otc l^ier fdnbc, fo tudren ©ie i^erloren. 2Benn er
fleif^ig njdre, fo tinirbe id) it)n loben. 3d) tviirte e^ tl)nn, tuenn
id) etioaiS babel geiDdnne. Senn (Edfar nid)t ermorbct worbcn
njdre, fo l)dtte er, cbeiifo\vol)I al^ 5lngnftu«, bie 9iomer an fcinc
.^^cvrfd)aft geivi31^nt. 2)er alte 2)iann gel)t, al3 ob er la^m ii^dre.
^er ihiabe Ucgt ba, aK^ ivenn er fd)Ucfe. Gr fvnad). njie n)enn
er hjabnfinnig (mad) ivdre. $dtte id) gctinijjt, baf:; $r. 9)iifler
I)ier ift, fo tuiirbe id) il)n bcfnd)t (called upon) l^aben.
Subjunctive after verbs. 315
Jlttfgttee. 122a.
I take medicine that I \may\ recover l. He speaks aloud
(m order] that every one may hear him. Send him away lest
he [should] be found here. I should be happy if I had as
many books as you [have]. If he were rich, he would buy
a carriage and horses. The hypocrite 2 speaks as if he were
religious 3. I should go to Paris myself if I had time. He
spoke as if he were commanding it. Many a man would live
happier, if he were contented. Your pupils would have made
more progress (^ortfc^ritte gemad}t ^^ZX^^ if you had adopted -^
another method 5.
1) genefen. 2) ber ^euc^kr. 3) fromm. 4) ait'ite'^men. 5) 2Jietl^obc, f.
II. Subjunctive after certain verbs.
§ 3. After verbs of advising^ begging, commanding^
permitting ^ hoping, fearirig etc.^ the verb in the
dependent sentence beginning with b a ^ , stands or ought
to stand in the Suhjmictive. Ex. :
S3 it ten ©ie -Sl^ren ^attx, 'Da^ er ■3'^nen ®elb gebe.
Beg your father to give you some money.
■3c^ erlaube (or rate) luc^t, ba^ er nad) ^arlg gel^e.
■Sd) evIauBe ll^m md)t, ii{^6:j ^art§ ju geljen.
I do not permit (allow, advise) that he should go to P.
SBunfc^en ©ie, bag ic^ nac^ bent Slt^te fd)t(!e?
Do you wish me to send for the physician?
§ 4. After befe"^Ien (to command or to order) and
f a g e n (to tell) the auxiliary f o (( (if the verb is in the
present tense), or foUte (after the Impf.) often replaces
the Subjunctive. -•
^^ "befall, bag bie (Sc^uler tm 3^"^'^^^^ MeiBen [oHten.
I ordered the pupils to remain in the room.
®er ^ontg befa.'^t, bag man eine 33rn(fe banen foUte.
The king commanded a bridge to be built.
After the verb to tell (fag en), the Infinitive or should
is also translated foil or fcUte. Ex. :
©agen ©te x^m, bag er fommen foU.
Tell him to come.
§ 5. After the verbs: filr^ten to fear, Bitten to
beg, and sometimes njiinfc^en to wish, when in a past
tense^ the Subjunctive is often replaced by the auxiliary
mi3c^te. The conjunction bag may be left out, when the
preceding verb is not in the negative. Ex.:
316 Lesson 43.
^ir fiird)tcten*), baf^ er un3 tatedi mb(f)te (or cvmod)teu.t.).
We feared lest**) he should blame us.
(gr bat mi6, tag id) i^u befud^en mi3d)te.
He requested that I should call on him.
3d) tmuif(^te (tDotlte), bag er Ijiev 6(cibcii moc^te (or blicbe).
I wish that he may remain here.
Note. After tDiinfd)te or trcUte the verb may also stand in
the Imperf. Subj. with or without t)ag. Ex.:
^il tDodte (muufd)te), bag er balb fcimc (or er !dme balb).
I wish he would come soon.
§6. Such verbs, as: glauben, metnen, jtDcifetn,
fa gen, ^offen 2C., when used in t\iQ Preseiit or Future
tense, especially interrogatweh) ^ are sometimes followed
by the Subjimctive , sometimes by the Indicatwe. The
latter takes place when the object leaves no doubt in the
'person who asks the qtiestion , however doubtful it may-
appear to others. Ex.:
3^d) glaube nid)t, bag er fommt.
The Subjunctive should be used, when the speaker is
in doubt about its truth or reality. For instance the
sentence : y^Do you think, he will come?i( may be translated:
©lauben ®ie, bag er tommeu iuirb or toerbe?
The meaning of the first sentence is: */ (myself)
think that he will come; do you think so too?lrb (or »crbe).
Reading Exercise. 124.
33ittcn (Sie 3l)re ©d)t\)e[ter, bag fie balb ^ierl)er fcmme. (S«
iudre ju \Diiufd)en (desirable), bag jeuer l)cl)e ^aum Ijier ftdube.
Oebevmann ti>iinfd)t, bag ber (.^knieral bie ©d)Iad)t cjetuinueii mbd)te
(gen.nuue). (S^ tudre ju \Diiu[d)en, bag ber ©cueral bie 0d)lad)t
geiDdnne. SSir fiird)teii. bag ba« (gi« berflen m5d)te. Oc^ toilnfc^e.
*) When filrd)tcn stands in the Present tense, the following
verb may also stand in the Future of the Subjunctive:
50tait jilrc^tet, baO cr nic()t tommcn itjcrbc.
It is to be feared he won't come.
**) After the verb to fear lest is translated ba^ or left out.
Subjunctive. — Oblique narration. 317
t)a6 ex halt) genefe. -Sc^ n}iin[d)te, bag meine 2^od)tev Balb tame.
Sc^ befe'^le, 'Dag er ba^ 3^mmer t)ex1a[fe. ©lauBen ©te, bag eS
inorgen ve^neu i»erbe (tcirD)?
JlttfaaO^ 125.
Do you think he will come? I am afraid he will come.
I will order him to retire i (that he retire). I ordered that
he should retire. I fear the ice 2 may break. We fear [lest] he
[should] come. I wish the work 3 were done. I wished that
he might win the prize"*. I fear [lest] he should die of (an)
his wounds. I feared he would dislocate ^ his arm, if he t^erc
^6 lift that heavy weight '7. wTurnS this wicked fellow away,«
said the duke, »lest he [should] pervert 9 these honest people. «
It would be [a] pity (<3d)at^e), if that beautiful fruitio were to
spoil (t>ert)arbe or i^evbevBen iDiivbe).
1) refl. V. fi^ guriidsiel^eit. 2) ba§ @tg. 3) bie %xMt 4) ben
^rctS. 5) toerrettfen. 6) were to lift = aufpbe. 7) ©etuic^t, n. 8j to
turn away foitiagen. 9) toerberBeit. 10) Dbft, n.
III. Subjunctive in the oblique narration.
§ 7. When a person relates in the Imperfect tense
what the himself or another person said or thought^ and
does not mention the exact loords used ^ but states the
substance of them in a subordinate clause, the narration
is said to be oblique. This particularly takes place after
the verbs: fagen, ertlarcii to declare; anttDorteu to
answer; Bel^au^tejt to maintain, state; gtaubett or benfen
to think; ioexmuten to suppose; erja^Ien to relate or
tell etc., when used in the Imperfect. In such quoted
assertions or quotations^ the verb in the dependent clause
is in the Imperfect or Present Siibjunctivef whilst in
English the Imperfect Indicative is used. Ex.:
(Sr fagte mlr, bag feiue SJ^uttet: franf Inare (or f ei) (—bag
fie ^o^fiDC^ Ijattc or fjabc).
He told me, (that) his mother was ill — had a headache.
^6) gtaubte, bag fein ^ater %tyxi\^ fprdc^e (or fprec^e).
I thought that his father spoke German.
(5r erilarte, bag er eg nic^t mac^en fonute (or fi3nne).
He declared that he could not do it.
■3c^ ijermutete, bag er arm tr>dre (or fei).
I supposed him to be poor.
§ 8. This is also the case when an indirect question
is asked in the Imperfect tense:
(gr fragte, iuarum tutr nicf)t gclommen iDciren or feten.
He asked why we had {did) not come.
318 Lesson 43.
3c^ tourbc ^efragt, ob ic^ fie fenne (or fcinntc).
I was asked whether I knew her.
Note 1. When such assertions have not the nature of
quotations, but are statements in the Present, Perfect or Future,
the Indicative must be used. Ex.:
(Sr gtaubt (er fagt 2C.), bafi er imred^t l:\at (that he is wrong).
(5r ^at fcI6ft gefagt, baB er gejcl>(t l^at.
He has said himself that he has been in fault.
^^ frage btc^ jum le^tenmat, ofe bu ge^cn tuilljl ober nic^t.
1 ask you for the last time, whether you "will go or not
(Sr mtU (or tDtrb) nic^t glaubcn, ba^ [ein 33ruber gejlorben ift.
He will not believe that his brother is dead.
Note 2. Observe that with verbs of knowing, seeing, showing,
being convinced etc., the subordinate clause of the sentence
with ba^ is usually in the Indicative. Ex.:
3c^ njct^, ba§ er fommt.
3c^ tou^tc, ba§ er SSort Ijalten toirb.
3d; tuar iiberjeugt (convinced], ba^ cr e8 getfjan l^atte.
§ 9. As in English, the conjunction fca^ (that) can
be omitted ; but then the order of the words is the same
as in English; the verb does not go last:
3c^ gtauBte, er tuare (or fet) abgeveift (for bag er — toave).
I thought he had set out (or leit).
®er ^aufmann bel)auptete, ba^ ®ett) fel (or xo'ixc) falfd).
The merchant stated that the money was false.
§ 10. As has been shewn in the above examples,
the Present and Imperfect of the Subjunctive are indiffer-
ently used. We may say, it is a matter of euphony.
With regular verbs however, where the Imperfect tense of
the Indicative does not diifer from the Imperfect of the
Subjunctive, the Present tense is preferred for the third
person sing., the Imperfect for the other persons. Ex.:
Gr fagte, bag cv mid^ fud)e (or fud)te).
He said that he was looking for me.
■3d) fragte ben 5laufmanii, tviemet ba§ ^ilo !oftc.
I asked the merchant how much a kilo cost.
3id) gtautjtc, ®le \i3oUten (not tcoUen) mid) betrii^oii.
I thought you would cheat me.
Sr fvagtc mid), ivaxitm id) nic^t nad^ bem 2(vjte fd^idte
(not fd)icfc).
He asked me why I did not send for the physician.
§ 11. The Subjunctive is sometimes used to express
a command or wish, and replaces in some cases the third
person of the Imperative:
Imperative Mood. 319
3et)er tl^ue feitte ^fltd)t let everybody do his duty.
Sang lebe fcer Slonig long live the king!
@ott fegne ©ie God bless you!
3)te Stebe fel oljite t^alf^.
Let love be v^^ithout dissimulation.
£) bag meht i^veunb fame!
Oh that my friend would come!
D toaxe tc^ bo(^ tei(^ or bag id) bod) reid) toare!
Oh, if I were rich ! were I but rich !
§atte i^ i'^n boc^ nie gefe^en! (®ag tc^ il)n bod) me g.i)atte!)
Would I had never seen him!
Note. The English let with the third person {/lim, her, them)
is rendered either by the third person of the Fres. Subjunctive,
as in the above sentences, or by foUen. We may say as well:
Let him do his duty er foU fetite ^flic^t t()Uit.
Let love be Avithout dissimulation bie 2. [oU ol^ttc ^atfd^ feiit.
Let them be free ftc [cicn frei or fie foUeit fret fetn.
Let him be flogged er foil gcpeitf(i>t n?erbcn.
Let him (her) take his (her) share.
(Sr (fie) folt feiiten (i'^ren) Slnteil ite'^men.
§ 12. As in English, the Imperfect Subjunctive is often
used instead of the Conditional (see p. 78 and 83). Ex.:
(g^ tudre fc^impflic^ ju ftte^eu.
It were or would be shameful to flee.
The Imperative Mood.
^is. mood presents no difficulty; observe only that
in the second person plural, @ie must be added to the
verb on addressing a person politely, as: (S^ebeu @te mir,
{agen (Sie mtv 2C. Ex. :
3ol)aun, mac^en (Bie tnir i^euer (an) John, make my fire.
9^e^men ©ie ^^xt §anbfd)ut)e tueg.
Take your gloves away.
The simple form geBet, faget, except in familiar
talk, occurs mostly in the poetical or didactic style. Ex.:
3Setge(tet ntd)t 33i3fe§ mtt 33ofem.
Do not render evil for evil.
The English form of the Imperative [let us] in the
first person plural is translated either with (affen @te Utt6
(ta[fet uu^), or with xoxt tt)otten, or with the verb and xo'n
after it:
Saffen ®ie img (taffet ung) atbelten, 1 r . „^^ ^^ cr^^ ic.
Wvt ttcaeii arBeiten or arBeiteu mi ] ^"^ ^^"^e e8 ^ag ift.
Let us work as long as it is day
320 Lesson 43.
Beading Exercise. 126.
1. Wlein (So^u fvigte mir, ba^ er ^opfwe!^ ^dttc (or f)abe).
^au fdnicb mir uculid), bag §erT (£. fvauf tv>'dxt, unt) bafe fein
Srubev ncid) Slmerifa c^egangeu id cite. 5D^an fagte, ber^onig ^dtte
(I) a be) bem @eneval eiuc gvoge Uii3eved}tigteit i jugefiigt (done).
^tan fagte, ber ©vaf fei (or id are) geftorben; abev id) babe feit*
t)em ertal;ren2, fcafe biefe ■)kd)rid)t falfd) ift. 3d} fragte iijn, tuarum
er feine 5lufgabe iud)t gefdnicbeu ^atte. (5r authjortcte, er l)ahe
(^^citte) feine ^dt gel^abt. SJfentor erjaljlte mir oft, ^uetd^en 9tul)m3
llll)ffe§ unter ben @vied)en erlangt^ I^ab e. ^Der (General be^auptete,
t)a^ ber t^nebe gefd)lo[jen5 fei (or ber ^riebe njdrc gefcbloffen) .
2. SD^an ^at mid) oft »erfi(^ert6, bag bie @liirf f eli^feiten ?
t)tefer 2BeIt nur »on hirjcr SDauer finb. ^iirft, man trirb bir
fa^en, bu fei eft aUmdd}tig; man n^irb bir fagcn, bu fei eft t)on
beinem 33clfe angebetet^. §altet immev," n?a^ i^r cerfprod^en "^abt;
aber terfpred)ct nid)t^ unbcbac^tfamy, ©olbaten, la^ un'3 tor*
tt)drt5 marfd)ieren; laj^t unv fiegen ober fterben. SSir tocUen ein
tDcnig f^ajieren gel^en. (Sr ift ber §err^o^ er t^ue^^ toa^ il;m
gefdllt. ®Dtt fprad): „(S^^ n)erbe ?id)t". unb e§ »arb ?id)t. £)
bad) ten bod) alle iine in unb id)! 3Sdre er bod) (O that)
aufrid)tig 12 1 £) t,a(j tic tiniigin nod) lebte!
1) injustice. 2j learnt. 3) fame. 4) obtained. 5) made. —
6) assured. 7) enjoyments. 8) to adore. 9) inconsiderately. —
10) the Lord. 11) he may do. 12) sincere.
Jiufgoee. 127.
1. My brother told me that he Aad lost his purse. He
pretended! to be right (that he was right). What did your
friend tell you? He told me that you should (§ 4) come to
see him 2 some day (einmal). The advocate declared that he
could not do it. I thought that he was mistaken. She told
me that the tree was in blossom 3. They (3)?an) said we could
not rely 4 upon him. People said that the king would come
to-morrow to (in) this town. Did you believe that I /lad
advised him {dat.) to do so (ba§)? I knew (§ 8, Note 2) that
he was ill. "We thought he was a clever physician. We all
hoped that our father might recover 5, but in vain 6.
2. Were but (bod)) all men as honest as they ought to be!
I did not pretend 1 that your brother wa^ {had been) at the
play' yesterday. He said that his brother had (a) great in-
fluence^ with (bci) the duke. Were you not afraid *J, that he
might steal your money? The duke ordered that they should
(§ 4) help the poor man. May God preser^^ei^ us from (Dor)
war! Formal your mind and (your) heart, while you are
1) bc^au^tcn. 2) to come to see = bc[iid)cn. 3) 93Iiltc. 4) rely
line . . \^crIaffen aiif [Ace). 5) gcncfen. 6) umfoiift. 7) im 2^^catcr.
8) Siuflufj, m. 9) to be afraid = furd)tcn. lU; bcwal^vcn. 11) bilbcn.
Lesson 43. 321
young. Mary told her maids, that she would have left' 2
them this dress rather (lieber) than the plain garb^^ which
she wore [Perf. Subj.)^^ the day before, but that it was ne-
cessary for her to appear at the ensuing solemnity (bei t)er
I)et)DvfteI;cut)en ^eierltdjfeit) in a decent habitus.
12) I;interta[fcti. 13) baS cinfac^e ©eivanb. 14) getragen ^atte. —
15) anftanbigc ^leibuitg.
Eeading-lesson.
%\t gc^riiftc Zttnt, Fidelity tried.
^ev talife 9J^utei\)efuI ^atte einen au^Iant)ifcf>eni Sltjt, 9^a*
iTten^ ©ona'in, h?e(d)en er tuegen Jeiner grogcu ®elef)rfamfeit2
fc^v e^vte. (Sinige §of(eute nuad)ten t^m biefen 9J?ann t?erfcdd)ti33
imti fagten, er fount e fic^ auf feme jlreue iiid}t iuo'^l toerlaffen
(rely), iueil ev eiit 5lu§Idnt)er4 fct. 2)er ^allfe irurbe uuruljigs
unb tDoUte t^n ptiifene, inn)ietern biefer Slrgtuo^n' begvuuttet
tDcire. (Sv Ucg it)n ju fid) fcmmen itnt) fagte: „§ouain, id) ^be
ituter meineii dmirn^ eineu gefdl)rUd)en §eiut), gcgen iDcld)en id)
\t)egen feiue'3 ftailen 5lul)ange^*J feinc ®etr)a(tio gebraud^eu fann!
®a^er befel)le id) bit, bag bu ein fcineS ®i|t bereiteft, ba§
an bem jEoten fehte ®puvii t?Dn fic^ juriidlafjeu i^irb. -Od) iuifl
i'^n morgen ju cinem ©aftma'^l (banquet, dinner) einlaben, unb
mid) feluer auf (in) blefe SBeife entlebigeui2."
§Duaiu auttuovtete mutig: „9J2ciue SBiffenfc^aft erftvcdti3 ftc^
iTuv auf ^Irjneieu, bte ba§ S^thtxi eii)alteni4, anbre faun ic^ md)t
bcvciten. -Sd) l)abe mid) (x\\^) nie bemitl)t, e3 ^u lerneu, loeil i(^
glaubte, bag ber S3el)aTfd)ev ber iral)reu ©(dubigeui^ feiue foId)en
ilVuutmffe toon mir fovbern (require) ttoiirbe. SBenn ic^ l^iettn
unred)t getl)an ^Oi^t, fo eviaube niiv, beinen §of ju toerlaffen."
5D^utewcM er\t)tberte, ba§ f et nur eine leere (gntfd)ulbiguugi6;
xctx bie :^eilfamen TOttel fenne, ber fenne and) bie fd)abltd)cn.
^r bat, er bro'^te, er »erfpra^ @efd)en!e. Umfouft ; §onain blieb
bci feiner ^uttt>ort. (Snblid) fteUte fic^i^ fcer 5lalife erjiirnt, rief
bie 3Bad)e unb befa!)l, biefcn iDiberfpdnftigeni^ 9J?aun iu§ ®t'
fdngui^ ju fii^ren. ^aig gefd)a^; aud) tourbe ein £uubfd)afteri9
uuter bem (Sd)clne2o elueS ©efangeneu ju i'^m gefet^t, ber i^n auS*
fDrfd)en unb bem ^alifen toon aUeni, ttoaS §onain fagen ttoiirbe,
i)'Jad)ric^t geben2i foUte. 2lber §onain toerrtet22 ntit feinem SSorte
feinem9nitgefangenen23, toarum ber^alife auf i^n 5itrne24. MeS,
loa'g er fagte, tuar, bag er unfc^utbig25 njdre. [To be continued).
1) foreign. 2) skill, learning. 3) made him suspicious. —
4) foreigner. 5) uneasy. 6) try. 7) suspicion. 8) governors. —
0) party. 10) use no force. ll)'trace. 12) get rid of him. 13) to
extend. 14) preserve. 15) commander of the faithful. 16) ex-
cuse. 17) to feign. 18) obstinate. 19) a spy. 20) appearance.
21) to inform. 22) to reveal, betray. 23) fellow-prisoner. 24) to
be angry. 25) innocent.
OTTO, German Conv.-Grammar. 21
322 Lesson 44.
Conversation.
^^a^ fiir ctnen ^x]t ^atte ter (Sv I)atte einen fremten '$ix]t 9?a*
5t'alife 2Jiuteitjetul an feinem mens ^^onain.
2Bev ma(!^te t^n toerbad^tig? ©ni^e neibifc^e (envious) §of*
leute.
3luv^ \De(d)em ©runbe? 233eil ev ein 5lu§Idnber tear.
293a^ be[d)(o6 be^tjalb fcev ^alife (Sr be[d)(og, i^n ju priifcu (or i^n
ju t^un? auf bie "^xobc ju ftetten).
2Ba3 tjcvlangte er t>on §onain? @r foUe ein feincS ®ift Seieiten,
urn einen Smir ju toergiften.
2Bann foUte bic SBergiftung 5lm ndd)ftenXa3e 6ei einem®aft*
[tattfinbcn? ma^le.
SBa'S antttjortete §onain? ^ag ev biefe^ nidH toerfte^e, unb
ba^ C'g ein fd)(ed)ter ©ebvaud^
feiner SSiilenfc^aft fein njiirbe.
SSar ber .^alife mit biefer 3Int* 9^cin, er bcftanb (insisted) auf
xooxt 5ufriebcn ? feinem ^efel^Ie ; er bat, er bre^te
unb terfprad) i^m ®e|d)enfe.
&ah §onain jutc^t nad)? (Did 3^ein, er blieb ftanbl)aft (firmly)
H. yield?) bei feiner '^lntn)ovt.
2Ba§ t^at jule^t 93hitcn3eM? (Sr licg ibn in« @efangni8 fe3 an JU Iad)eu he began laughing.
•3d) furd)tete, ju fpat ju !ommen (to be too late).
SBann tuertjen ©ie aufl)oreu ju fdjreiben?
When will you cease writing?
3)er Sflatje bemiil)te fid), t>ie ©uiift feineS §ervn ju ertangen.
The slave endeavoured to obtain the favour of his master.
^er ^apitan iiberrebete beu ^i^remben, mit it)m ju gel)en.
The captain persuaded the stranger to go with him.
§ 8. When the auxiliaries i^abeil and fctn are fol-
lowed by an Infinitive, it takes jit:
3td) I)abe md)ti8 ju t!^un.
§abeu ©ie mir ettua'S ju fagen?
&a§ ift ba ju t^un, — ju glauben, — ju annDotteu?
(S8 ift ju bet)viuevn, tag t)te[er 9)^ann geftciben ift.
It is to be regretted that this man has died.
Note. The Infinitive after the verb to he, is in English
commonly taken in the passive voice; in German it must be
in the active voice. Ex.:
It was not to he avoided c8 irar ntc^t Jii tocrmeibcu.
His death is to he feared fciu Xob ift Jit bcjiirdjtcit.
That book is not to be had jcnc^ S3iic^ tft nid)t 311 ^abcn.
A change is much to he wished for.
(Sine iBcranberung ift fc^r 311 uniufd^cn.
Reading Exercise. 128.
S)a8 8d)nupfeiii ift clue fd)lcd)te ®tnrcl)nljeit. 3" ^^^^ (*oo
much) fd)Iafen ift cbcu fo itngc)iint), ak^ 511 inol cffen. 3d) I)abe
t?ai3 53ud) ucd) iud)t Icfen fcnnen. 5^abcn (5ie Icfen ivclleu? 9^ein,
id) l)abc fd)vcibeii ti^cKou. ^elfcii 3ie miv nieiue Ubcvfc^mug
inad)cn. i^cx l)at bid) gd)eu l)cii3cn? Gv l)at mid) tauten gelel)vt.
3d) l)abe il)m avbeiteu l)elfen. ©iut) ®ic gcftevn fvajieren gegaugen?
1) taking snuff.
On the Infinitive. 325
9Zein, id) Bin fpajieren geritten. ®er £cnig ^at niir bie (Svkubnl^
gegeben, einen3)e3en2 ju tragen. ^euuen ®ie eiu ficl)ere§ ^ gjJtt*
tel, t)te ^D^taufe ju cevtUgen^? !Da3 ftd)erfte ?0^ittel, unfer Sebeit ^u
berlangevn, tft, jeDen ^lugeuBUcfs beS Sage^ gut an5mi}en1)eu 6. 3c^
^abe feine §offnung me^r, meineii tjerlornen ©o^n tijietjer 5U fintjeit.
2j a sword. 3) safe. 4) to destroy. 5) moment. 6) employ.
ilttfoaee. 129. •
Eating and drinking make one ((Siuen) sleepy. To speak
too much is dangerous. The laughing of these people is very
unpleasant 1. I bade him do it. I sav^ him take it. They
could not make me laugh. Learn io do good (®Ute§). Have
you seen the young girl dance? No, but I have heard her
sing. When our friends help us (o work , we ought to be
grateful 2 to them. Let us take a walk. Shall we have the
pleasure of seeing you to-morrow? I have no mind to make
the bargain (t)en §ant)el ein^uget^eu), for (au^) fear of losing it.
The slaves had no desire (Suft, /.) to run off (fort), knowing
[as (t)a) t/iey knew) what 3 the consequence-* would be. I am
eager 5 to learn music. He was near (na!)e taran) dying. The
pupil was tired 6 of reading German {to read G.). What have
you to do? I have a letter to write. A pardon '^ is not to be
hoped [for].
1) unongettel^m. 2) battfbar. 3) todc^cS, see p. 145, Note. —
4) bie golgc. 5) cifrtg. 6) miibe. 7) S3cgnabigung, f.
The Infinitive with JU after prepositions.
§ 9. The Infinitive with JU is further required after
the prepositions auftatt [ifistead) and oI)ue (without):
5lnftatt ju ladjm, ttjeinte er.
©r ging au'?, o^ne mic^ 511 frag en (without asking me).
2)^and)e ?eute tuerbeu gel^agt (hated), ol)ne e3 ^u i:ert)ienen.
IV. The Infinitive with urn — p.
§ 10. It is required after substantives and verbs
when a design or purpose is expressed, answering to the
English ybr or m order to (the French />owr). Ex.:
§aben ©ie ©elb er^atten, um ein $fevb ju faufeu?
4d) brauc^e papier, um einen Srief ju f(^reiben.
3fd) reife, um tie 2Celt ju fel)eu.
§ 11. x\fter adjectives preceded by ;^U (too), or fol-
lowed by geuug:
©ie ift ju iung, um tiefe 5lrbeit ju terridjteu (to do).
§err %. ift nic^t relc^ geuug, um biefe^ SauDgut (estate)
ju faufeu.
326 Lesson 41.
V, The English Accusative and Infinitive.
§ 12. The Infinitive used in English with an Ac-
cusatice after the verbs to know , io desire , to wish , to
mean etc. must be changed in German into a subordinate
clause with fc a fe , in which the Accusative governed by
such a verb appears as the Nominative. For instance
»the following sentence : TVe know him to be a bad general,
is translated in German, as if it were: We know that
he is a bad general iinr m\\t\\, bag e r etii jd;led;tex @e*
Iierat ift (Indie. Pres.). Ex.:
I knew the captain to be a good rider.
Oc^ iDugte, baj3 t?er §auv^tmaun ein guter belter tDar.
I wish her to do the work.
^6) iinin[d)e, t)a6 fie bie 5lrbeit tl)ue (or t^un mijc^te).
We desired our friends to come in.
^iv ivuu[d)teu, bag unfrc i^reuube !^evein!ommen mijc^ten.
YI. The elliptical Infinitive.
§ 13. The Infinitive after the words how, what,
where, must be completed in German with a subject and
an auxiliary: foUcil, miiffen or fcunen. Ex.:
I do not know where to go.
3d} treig nid}t, ii)cl;iii id; gel^eu foil.
Show him how to do it.
^eigen ©ie il;m, n)ie er e3 madden foU.
Eeading Exercise. 130.
^Inftatt ju avtHnteit, 91113 er fpa^lcveu. (5^ \i^\ auf3el)crt ju
regneu. 3fd) fvcue midj, ju l;oven, tag 3l)i" ©cljn [cldfe (S^ven*
bejeuv^ungeu 1 empfaugen Ijat. 3)er 33e)"c Ijat ind)t§ ;^u l^cffen.
3d) l)atte iud}t'§ luit biofoni fd)led}tcn 9Jt\ni[d)eu 311 fd)a[fen (do),
liefer ^iiabe t)at i>ielc Sd)mev3cu 311 cvbultjcu^. '5^er §auvtmann
u>av i\\ niiibe, urn 3ie fo fpiit 511 bcfuc^eu. T»cr 9iid)tev Ijat ^t\\
©cfaugcucu lu^ (^'Vfaiiguix^ fiil^ven lafjiMi. ^w bift iud)t iinivbigs
genua, urn bieje 33c(ct)miiig ju empfangen. 9Jieiii •)iad)bav Ijattc
bic 5ibfic^t *, feiu ^au« 511 cerfaufen, urn felne (3d)ulbeu5 beja^len
ju fbnuen.
1) honours. 2) endure. 3) worthy. 4) intention. 5) debts.
Jlufflaae. 131.
We lost our time without knowing it. The boy is con-
tinually 1 playing"^ inntead of learning his lesson. We cannot
betray :< the truth without being (or rendering ourselves) guilty.
He did so (e^), in order to frighten* you. My children must
1) forttva^mib. 2j See p. 308, § 1. 3. tomatcu. 4) erfd^rcden.
Lesson 44. 327
learn to draw, in order to be able to draw landscapes 5, At
last I began to long 6 for my native country'^, that I might
[translate: in order to) (§ 10) repose 8 after my travels and
fatigues *->. The early death of the hero was much to be re-
gretted lo. If he were not ashamed 'i of confessing 12 the truth,
he would say that he did not begin to work before ten o'clock.
The stream 13 is too rapid 14 to be oiten frozen (. . Jil gefcieren).
She knew him to please (§ 12) everybody. I wish you to read
the history of England by (iJon) Macaulay. When you know
a poor man to be honest and industrious, you ought to esteem
him more highly (l)i3i)er), than a rich man [ace.) who violates i^
the duties 16 of a Christian 17.
5) ?anb[d^aften. 0) mld^ y\erfut)reni3 fonnten."
©0 fprad) ber S^alifc unb befall ben !Dienern, ba§ ®elb, bie
(Sbelfteine unb bie ©toffe in §ouain§ §au^ 5U tragen.
1) the executioner. 2, scourge. 3) his. (Seep. 301, 1.) 4) to
consider. 5) obstinacy, stubbornness. 6) shameful. 7) profession.
8) to stain. 9) See p. 319, § 11. — 10) conscientious, nonest. —
11) to prove, put to a proof. 12) token. 13) to corrupt, bribe.
328 Lesson 45.
Conversation.
2Bie lange blieb §onaui im (Siui^e 2Ronatc (lang).
5lt« SJiuteioehil x^n njiefcer nijcu ^liif ber einen ©cite einen Zi^d^
lieg, ttjaS jeigte er U;m? mit ®elt) uub 2)iamanten, auf
t)er auteru eiuen §eufer.
3[Ba« ^atte ber §enfer in tet ©r (^atte eiue^eigcl inter §vint).
§ant) ?
2i3a^ l)atte er unter bem 5lrm? (Sin (Sd)n?ert.
^a^ toerlangte mm bet ^alife §onain foUte njat)len jnjifd^en
t)on feinem ^Ir^te? 9Jeid)tum unb fcem Xote.
2Ba« antwortete §onain? !Die Sd}ante licj^e nidit in fcer
(Strafe, fcntern im SBcrbred)en.
SQ3a§ feorte the encouraging words.
Several Participles therefore, by being constantly used
in this manner, have quite lost the nature of a verb,
and are used as true adjectives, taking also the degrees
of comparison :
23c(e()rcnb instructive. briirfenb oppressive,
bctriibenb afflicting, ermiibcnt fatiguing,
bringenb pressing. fliefjenb fluent, flowing.
On the Participle present. 329
l^tnrei^enb overpowering. certet^enb offensive.
rei^ent) charming. unter^alteut) amusing etc.
Comp. evmiit)ent)er; Sup. ter, t)ie, ta^ evmut)enbfte k.; as:
Sine ermiibenbere W\\t a more fatiguing journey.
§ 2. The German Participle present is seldom used
as such. Neuter verbs, however, may be employed so,
when joined adverbially to another verb, in order to
express manner or state:
Sad)ent) fagte er ^u mit k. laughing he said to me etc.
©le 3111 v3eu fd)tDetgenb fort they went off in silence.
Note. Poets also occasionally use an active verb in the Par-
ticiple present, with its government before or after it. Ex.:
$atro!(u8, bcm UeBett f^reimbe ge'^orc^enb (obeying).
S^n umgiivtettb (girding) mit bem ^elbcnfc^tcert.
aTiit ben ^aixbeu fd^toingcnb (brandishingi bic @^eerc.
§ 3, When used in English as a substantive, either
as subject or as object, we render it by the Infinitive,
with or without the article b a !§ , such as: ba0 Semen learn-
ing, ba^ iBabeu bathing, ba^ ^^au^eu etc. (see p. 322, § 1)-
Readhig good books is necessary for young people.
®a§ Sefeu guter S3iid)er ift imicjeit Seuten notig.
Card-playing and smoking are expensive habits.
3)a§ ^artenfvtelen unb ^taiidjeu finb foftfplelige ©etuol^n'^eiten.
§ 4. If the participle replaces a relative pronoun,
the latter is to be expressed in German, connected with
the verb in the corresponding tense:
A man doing good to everybody.
(Sin 9J?ann, ber (teener) jebermann ©ntel tl)nt.
I see a woman selling cherries.
3d) felje eine %x^\x, n)e(d}e &fd)en t>er!anft.
§ 5. The English Participle present, when depend-
ing upon a noun and preceded by the preposition of, must
be translated with the Infinitive and jn: (See p. 324, top.)
The art of writing bic ^unft ^n fc^reiben.
The pleasure of seeing you ba^ 53ergnugen ©le j^U fel;en.
§ 5a. The same is the case when it depends on
another verb:
It began raining e§ fing an jn Tcgnen.
He ceased speaking er t}orte anf, ju f^red^en.
I risked losing my life.
3fd) Uef ®e[al)r, niein 2e6en jn t>evlteven.
§ 6. This is also the case when the Participle present
is immediately preceded by the prepositions on., upon., in.,
with., without., instead of and near (na^e bavau):
330 Lesson 45.
I have decided on doing it [to do it).
He insisted upon seeing me.
(Sv beftant) barauf, mid) ju fe^'n.
He left without paying ev giiig fort, o^ne ju bejvt^len.
The boy is playing instead of learning his lesson.
jDer ^nabe fpielt, anftatt feiue 5(ufi3abe ju levnen.
Reading Exercise. 132.
§en: 9J?uner tDar elu f orgenberi 33ater uut) ein Uebenter ©atte^.
®a§ SUd ftellt (represents) ein Iad}enbe^ 5lint) i?cr. ^Die fo(gent>e
^lufgabe tft ju iibevfe^eu. (iam^je^ „9?obin[on Srufoe" tft ein fe'^r
itutevf)altent)e3 unt) belel)reiil:e5 33ud). jDa8 S3vit)en ift gefunt).
jDa^ 3^i^)"^^^ Ut etne angene'^me S3c|"d)dftigung 3. 3)ag 2ad)en
mand)ev Seute ift unaugeue^m. fatten ®ie t^ie (Sf)ve, feiiie 33e*
!ainUfd)aft4 ju mad}eu'^ ^a'3 ©pa^ieveiu^e^cu ift fiir mid) fel>r
crmiit>ent). Sefen uut) (Sd)reibeu ift fiir aUe Scute uotig^. 2}?eiue
^rau licbt ba§ 9?aud)eu uid)t. -Sd) faub eiue ^;lafd)e, iretdje roten
^cin entl)tc(t6. Sic fing cbeu au, eincu 33vicf ju fd)ieiben. Sd^
iDar ual)e fcaran, uad) 5lnierifa au^juujaul^ern '. ©ie miiffeu fort*
fa^ren, Sui^Iifd; ju lerueu.
1) caring, careful. 2) husband. 3; occupation. 4) acquaintance.
5) necessary. 6) contain. 7) to emigrate.
iiitfgaec. 133.
I am going to Paris in a few days. I saw the dying
old man. You will find the word on (auf) the following page.
That was a very fatiguing journey. My friend lives in a
charming country ^ . Riding (§ 3) and dancing are good bodily 2
exercises. Is learning necessary for young people? The
burden 3 is oppressive. Clouds ^ are formed 5 from the vapours^
arising"' (§ 4) from the earth. I have seen a book containing 8
beautiful poems. Alexander asked his friends standing (§ 4)
about his death-bed •>, if (ob) they thought they could find a
king, like him. She was near dying. He told me trembling,
that he had lost all his money. ? Speaking ithus, (§ 2) she stab-
bed ^^ herself. Eliza, 2 weeping 1 bitterly n, threw herself into the
arms of her mother. The father stood niourning 12 by the tomb 13
of his son. The surgeon ^^ began dressing (ju t>erbinten) the
wound's. Xhe rising (§ 1) sun disperses '6 the fog '7.
1) ®cgcnb, f. 2) !i5rv^crlicfK iibiinjjcn. 3) bic ?a[t. 4) bic ©otfcn.
5) gebitbct. 0) 2)iinftc. 7) aufftcivjcn. 8) cnt^Itcn. 9 fcin 2:obbctt or
Xotcnbett. 10) crbolc^cu. 11) btttcrlit^. 12) trauernb. 13) an bcm @rab.
14) bev SSunbarjt. 1 )) 2Bunbc, f. 16) tocvtveiben. 17) 9?ebcl, m.
§ 7. But when in Enp^lish a, possessive adjective pre-
cedes the Participle, with or without a preposition, this
participial substantive must be expanded into a clause
On the Participle present. 331
in German, and translated with a conjunction correspond-
ing to the preposition; viz. with of and at corresponds
bag; with without o(;ue bag; with before el^c or bei^or;
^viih. agaitist bagegen bag; with ^y babur^ bag; with
on or upon batauf bag; with/rom babcu bag. The
possessive adjective is changed into a personal pronoun.
We noticed /^?'5 looking at her.
2Biv Bemevfteu, bag er fie aufa'^.
We heard of his becoming a soldier.
Wvc i)i3vten, bag er ©oibat getDcrben \oocc*).
I spoke of [my) going to Paris.
^&) f^rad) baijou, bag id) nac^ ^ari§ ge^en \DoUte.
I have nothing against your going there.
•3c^ l;aBe nic^t^ bagegen, bag ©ie bal)iu ge'^eu.
The landlord insisted on our taking horses.
®ev Wixi beftaub barauf, bag imr ^fevbe ne^men foUten.
§ 8. When a noun in the Genitive is joined to the
possessive adjective, it becomes in German the Nomi-
native or subject of the second clause:
I wrote without my fathers knowing it.
36 fd}riel), ol)ue bag mein ^ater e3 iDugte.
He wished to copy the letter before his uncle's seeing it.
(gr tuoEte ben 33riei abfd^veiBeu, e^e fein Dufel \^\\ fd$e.
§ 9. All other prepositions joined to a Participle
prese7it, must in any case be expressed by a correspond-
ing conjunction with the Indicative. Ex. :
Besides her being rich augevbem, bag fie teic^ ift.
He saved himself by jumping through the window.
(Sr vettete fid) babu'vd), bag er auS bem ^-enfter f^rang.
The prisoner was hanged for killing a man.
3)er ©efangeue luurbe gel)angt, i^eil (or bafiir bag) er eineu
9Jlann geti3tet l)atte.
You must have perceived it, ivhile speaking with him.
©ie miiffen e^ bemerft !^aben, njciljvenb ®te niit i!^m fpvad)en.
After having (I had) gone over the bridge, I had a splendid
view into the valley.
9^ ad) bem ic^ bie S3vitde paffiert t)atte, I;atte id) eine l^errUd)e
%\x^\6:,i in^ 2;i)al.
After having received my money, I paid my creditors.
9Jad)bem id) mein ®elb erl)atten l^atte, bejaijUe id^ meine
©laubiger.
*) Literally: that he had become.
352 Lesson 45
§ 10. When the Participle present is used hy itself,
i. e. without a preposition, to denote cause ^ reason or
time, as in Latin and French, it must always be replaced
by the corresponding conjunction with the finite verb.
When the Participle expresses cause or reason, the
corresponding conjunctions are: ba (as or since) and
toei( (because). — For time: a(^ (when), nac^bcm
(after) or iubem (as) must be used:
a) Participles expressing reason and cause:
This being the case.
2) a bie[e3 bcr i^atl ift (or njav).
Wishing to see him, I went to his house.
^a id) i^n jii fe(;eu tDiinfd^te, ging id) in fein ^Oi\x^.
Not having found him, I went there a second time.
^a id) i^u nid)t au^etroffeit I)atte, ging id) nod) einmal !^iu.
My mother being ill, she cannot go out.
255 el I (Da) meine 9}httter fran! ift, (fo) tann fie nid)t au^3el)en.
h) Participles expressing time:
Going to the castle, I was overtaken by the rain.
^1^ (inbeni) id) auf t)ai8 ®d)(o[j ging, tuurbe ic^ torn 9tegen
iiBevfallen.
Having spoken so long, he was tired.
9lad)t)em*) er fo tange gefpvod)cn I)attc, xoax er miibe.
The town being taken, the soldiers pillaged it.
9Jad)t)em bie fetafct evobevt ti^av, pliiubevten fie tie ©olbaten.
Reading Exercise. 134.
3d) lad bie 3^i^ui^fl' ol)ne bafe ev e^ bemevtte. 2©ir fprad)en
t>atJon, bat^ vovt nad) ifi>ieii gel)cn n^oUteii. ^ev 3d)ii(ev tmivte
geftvaft, \ot\i er tvcige geiuefeu ift. Sv iDarbofei iibev mid), bag
id) il)n getijedt l)atte. 3d) tuav gcftevn in 3l)vem §anfe, o^ne 3ie
ui fel)eu. 5)iird) bad 53eoI)ad)ton2 biej'er ^legeln fann man inele
§et)ier tjevmeiben. 3d) tuevbe fpajieven gel)en, uad)bem id) meine
®efd)afte becnbigt t)abe. 3d) fanb biej'ed '^\irfd)en biefen 2)?orgen,
aid (on) id) and bem $anfe ging. ^a id) fmbe, baij ed mir
unmoglid) fein \xi\xX) , mein ^evfpved)en jn fatten, fo nel)me3 ic^
mein 2Bovt juviicf^.
1) angry with. 2) to observe. 3) to retract.
^ufga6e. 135.
1. She noticed mg looking at her. She cannot endure i
his going away. I am sure (3d) IDeijj gewig) of his having
*) The subordinative conjunction: nat^bcttt, generally requires
the Vluperfect of the Indicative.
Lesson 45. 333
done it. I am rejoiced at hearinj^ of him. The overseer 2 re-
pented 3 having been so cruel with (gegen) the slaves and began
treating 4 them with more humanity 5. Hearing the noise 6 of
the cannon, we started ^ up. Having seen him, I went to his
brother. We form our minds [sine/.) 8 hy reading (§ 9) good
books. We have obtained peace by making great sacrifices 9.
You will learn to speak French by writing it. The setting lO
sun indicated n that it would be useless 12 pursuing 13 the fugi-
tives i^. Having*) taken leave i^^ he departed. Being poor, he
had been neglected 16. Having no money, I could not (cannot)
depart. Having told his ridiculously stories, 2 he iwent 4 off (fort)
3 laughing. Mary and her brother Henry, perceiving a pretty
butterfly 18, endeavoured ([ud}ten) to catch it. Conjecturing 19
(§ 10, a) that I was [Subj.) rich and finding that I was ignorant,
he thought it would be easy to deceive me. The old man
having spoken thus, the assembly 20 dispersed 21.
l)eitrageTt. 2) 2tuf)et;cr. 3) bereutc, ba^. 4) 6e^anbetn. 5) 2)Zeit[^U(^»
felt. 6) ber 2)ot!tter. 7) auffpnnscn. 8) bilben uttfent ®eift. 9) to make
sacrifices O^fer bringen. 10) untergcl^en. 11) att'jeigen. 12) uttttii^.
13) i5crfoIgett. 14) gliic^ttinge. 15) 2lbfd;tcb. 16) bernacblajfigt. 17i lacker*
U(^. 18) ber ©d^mctterUng. 19) bcrmuten. 20) tic ^er[ammlung.
21) to disperse auSeiuanber ge'^en.
Reading-lesson,
^tnblit^c fiiefic. Filial loye.
(Silt Berii^mter preugifdjev ©eueral' tear in feinev -Sugenb (Sbel*
fnabei an bem §Dfe ^^riet)rid)§ t5e» ©rof^en. ®r ftatte feinen iBater
mt\jX, unb feine S[Rutter nat)rte \W^ fitnunerU^s t'n i^rem SBitnjen*
ftanbe^. %\^ ein guter©oI)n n)iuifd)te er, fieunterftit^ens ju!onnen;
abet t)on feinem gevingen ©e'^alte^ !onnte er nid)tg entbel^ren?.
jDod) fanb er ein SDUttet, ettDa§ fitr [ie ju erli^erBen. Sebe 9^ac^t
mugte namttd) elner tjon ben (Sbelfnaben in bem ^^wwie^ ^or bem
©djIaffaBinet beg ^ontgS n}ad)en, urn i^m aufjntijarten 8, njenn er
ettua^ t^erlangte. S)a§ S3ad)en irar mand)en 5U Befd}n}erlid), unb
fie iibertrugens ba^er, ti^enn i'fjre ^Id^O^lam, tI)re2Bad)en anbeYen.
jDer arme (Sbellnabe fing an, biefe SBaci^en fiir anbere jn ilbcr*
ne^men;, er njnrbe bafiir be5al)It, fparte ba§ ®e(b jufammenii
unb fd)icfte eS bann feiner 9}iutter.
(Sinmal fonnte ber ^ontg nid)t fc^Iafen unb njoHte fid^ ettx)a§
tjorlefen Iaffeni2. (Sr !(tnge(tei3, er rtef, aber niemanb !am.
GnbUc^ ftanb er felbft auf unb ging in ba§ S^eben^tmrner , um
l\\ \t^t\\, ob fetn $age ba n^are. §ter fanb er ben guten Sitng*
ling, ber bie '^a^^it itbernommen liatte, am 2;i[d)e fi^enb. S3or
il;m lag ein angefangener S3rief an fetne 5D^utter; aber er icar iiber
1) a page. 2) support. 3) with difficulty. 4) widowhood.
5) succour. 6) small salary. 7) spare. 8) to wait upon. 9) handed
over, committed. 10) turn. 11) to collect, to save. 12) see p. 295,
§ 4. — 13) to ring the bell.
*) See the foot-note p. 332.
334 Lesson 45.
t)em ©(^reiben eingefAIafen. ^er ^onig fcl)lic() ^erbci (stole near)
unt) la^ t)eu ^lufaiiij te^ 33riefi\^, tDctd^cv fo lautete (ran) : „3J?eine
bcfte, geliebtc 2)iutter! 3)iefev^ ift fd)ou t)ie fcvitte 9h(i)t, tag ic^
fiiv ®elt) ii^ad^e. 53eina^e faun id) e§ nid)t nicl)r au^l^alteni^.
3nt)cf|eu freue id) mid), bag id) nun iDieber ^jet)!! X[)aler fiiv Sie
»ert)ient !•'> ^abe, tt3eld)e id) 3f^ncn l)ieTbei fd)icfe."
®cxiil)rt iiber t)a« gute §er5 t?c§ OiinglingS Idgt ber ^ontg
il^n fd)lafen, ge{)t in fein 3^"i"i*^^*' ^)o(t ^tvei 9?oIIen niit ^ufaten,
fterft il)m cine in jete Xafd)e unt) legt fid) tt>ietev fd)lQfen.
%[^ ber (Ebcltuafce evtDad)te unb baS 0c(b in feinen Xafc^en
fanb, fonntc er n)ot)l benfen, xocljcx e3 gefonimcn tvar. (Sr freute
fic^ jiDiU fel)i; bariibcr, Widi er nnn feine 9Jhitter nod) beffev untev*
ftU^en fonntc; abcr ev erfd)raf and) jugteid), n^eil bev H'cnig i^u
fd)lafcnb gcfunben i)atte. %m SJ^ovgen, fobalb er ^um ^bnig fani,
bat er bemiitigic unt 33ergebnng tDcgen feine^ Dienftjcl)(er§'i" unb
banfte it)m fiir "oa^ giitige @efd)enf. 3)er gute .^iJnig lobte feine
finblid)e Siebe, ernanntei^ it)n fogleid) ^nm I'J Cffi;^ier unb fAenfte
il)m nod) (besides) eine ©umnie ®clb, nm fid) alle§ anfd)affen2o
ju fijnncn, lua^ er fitr feine neue ©telle braud)te.
jDer trefflid)e ®obn ftieg ^ernad) immer ^c^ex'^^ unb blente
unter me^veren preugifd)en Sfonigen al3 eiu ta^^ferer ©eneral bi^
in fein t)ol)e^ filter.
14) to stand, to endure. 15) to earn. 16) humbly. 17) fault
in service. 18) to name, to appoint. 19) see p. 345, § 3. —
20) to procure, to buy. 21) higher and higher.
Conversation.
2Ba« ujar ein preu6ifd)er ®eneva( (£r tvar (Sbetfnabe an bem $)ofe
in feiner 3ugenb? B^victrid)^ be3 ©rogen.
§atte er bama(« feine (Slteru (£cin ^atcr (ebte nid)t me^r ; abev
uod)'^ , feine 9.1intter.
2Ba^ ii>ar.fie alfo (then)? e.
fonntc ber ®ol)n fie unter* ^son feineni ®cl)altc fonntc er e3
ftii^en? mcl)t tl)un.
.2BeId)ev^ Wittd fanb er, ettra^ (Sr n3ad)tc fiir ®clb in bem 33or*
fiir fie ju ertvevben (earn) ? ^immer i>or bem (Sd)laffabinct
bc3 Slonigt^.
5(n (in) ujeffen (BteUt n)ad)te er? ^In ber eteile anbrerSbetfnaben.
SS5arum n3ad)ten fic nid)t fclbft? (&^ \mx il)ncn ju bcfdnuerlic^.
SaiS mad)tc er mit bem ®elbe, (Sr fd)icfte e^ feiner 2)httter, urn
ba5 er auf biefeSBeifc enuarb? fie ju untevftiitHm.
9If« ber ,^onig einmaf nid)t (Sr flingcltc nub ricf.
fd)lafcn fonntc, U)a^ tl)at er?
?11a^^ tl)at cr? ^r flanb auf, um ju fel)en, ob
fein %\\(\e im i^or5immcv ircive.
aOad fa^ er I)icr? Xcx gute "^iiuvgling faj^ fcblafenb
am Xifd)e.
On the Participle Past. 335
2Ba§ l)atU ev t?or fid^ Uegen'^ (Sinen aiige[viiigeneu 33vict.
Hn tDenti3ai-btefer53vief gerlAtet? 2ln feiue ^Dhitter.
2Bie lautete bev ^Infang? ' „®ie[e§ ift fd}Du bie britte ^^ac^t,
t)ie t(^ fiir ©elb tt)ad)e."
2Slei3iet t)atte er frfion ettuorBen? 3^^^ Scaler ober bvel^ig 2)Zart
SBecfte ber ^omg t^n auf? 9iein, er Uep i[)u fd)Iafen.
2Ba§ t^at er iiberbie^ (besides) ? (gr tjolte ^ttjei DtoUen 4)u!aten uut)
ftedte i^m eine in jebe 3;^afd}e.
51I« ber Sbelfnabe erh^ac^te, tua^g SriDaranfaugSerfd^roden, freute
empfant) er? fid) aber bod) iiber t?a§ (^c(t).
2Barum tDar er erfc^roden? SBeil er einen 3)ieuftfe^(er he
gangen (committed) l)atte.
2Bag tl)at er am DJ^orgen? (Sr bat ben ^onig um 35ergebung
unbbanfte itjmfiir bag ®e[d)ent
S33te betDieg il^m ber Mmo, fein dx mad)te i^n jum Otfijier unb
3S5o't)lttJoUen (favour)? fd)entte il)m eine©umme®elb.
2Bag iDurbe f^ater (afterwards) Sr ftieg nad) unb nad) immer I)d*
au§ (of) iljm? ^er unb tcurbe ^ule^t ©eneral.
Forty-sixth Lesson.
ON THE PARTICIPLE PAST.
1) The Participle past is frequently used as an ad-
jective, is declined as such, and even admits the degrees
of comparison:
3)cr geliebte 3Sater the beloved father.
(Sin gefegnete^ Sanb a fertile (blessed) country.
(Sin gebriidtereg 5SdI! a people more oppressed.
^er geef)rtefte ^rofeffor the most honored professor.
2) Sometimes it becomes a real adjective and allows
the syllable UU to be prefixed, which renders it nega-
tive, as:
33e!annt known. unbefannt unknown,
bemittett wealthy. unbemittelt without means,
beriibnit renowned. unberiiljmt unrenowned.
gefd)idt skilful, clever. ungefd)idt awkward.
geti30^nt accustomed. ungeicoljut unaccustomed.
gelel;vt learned. ungeiel)Vt unlearned etc.
3) The Pai'ticiple past of some neuter verbs which
express motion, occurs together with the verbs fommeu
and g e ^ e n instead of the Participle present, as :
!Der ^nabe !am gelaufen, geritten. gefprungen, gefal;ren.
The boy came runnbig, riding etc.
336 Lusson 46.
Thus further gefloijcn, gcfc^mommen, ^efroc^en 2C. fcmmcn.
In the same way is formed the expression CctUrcn
gc^Cii to be (get) h)st. Ex.:
Glue S3vicftafd;e ift Devlcvcn gecjaugeii (has been lost).
4) It is sometimes used absolutely, replacing a short
sentence, as: gefctit or augeuommeii suppose; aui^^encmmen
excepted; abgeje()en t)OU or . . abgeredpet not reckoned; ju*
gegcben granted for: luenu man aiuiimmt, abfie^t, sugtebt).
5) It ist also employed in a few expressions only instead
of the Imperative mood. In English, the Participle present,
with a negation, is sometimes used in a similar manner:
Umgefel^rt! turn about! — autgeid)aut ! look out I
au^getvuufcu ! empty your glass!
nicl)t mel)V getreiut! no more crying now!
nid)t ge)jlautevt! no talking!
On the Future participle.
There is in German a Gerundwe or Future participle
of the Passive voice, answering to the Latin Participle
in -dus (laudandus, «, um), which is formed of the Par-
ticiple present ((ot>enb; by placing jit before it = ju
(obenb. It is used adjectively and therefore declined.
Its place is always between the article and the noun. Ex. :
^aS 5 U 1 b e U t) e ^Int) the child [that is) to be praised.
jDie ju !^offent)e (Sriitc the harvest [that is) to be hoped/or.
jDcv ju fiivd^teiibe UnfaU the acci^^nt [that is or was) to be
feared.
Reading Exercise. 136.
1. Wkint geliebte3;;Qnte iftgeftcvben. Unfev tevcl^rtev "iPvofeffor
ift frauf. $ctev tcv ©vogc wax tev gcbilDetftei 9)iaun in 9iut>Iant).
9Jevo \mx bev 0ctuvd)tetftc i-bmi[d)e 5laifer. SDcr l^eute gcfvidene
<5d)nee ift jtDci lyuf^ ticf. jDemoftl^enc^ toax tcr berul^mtefte
^•icd)ifd)e 9iet)nev2. 5)cr @rei^ giug gebiicft (stooping) on cincin
(^tabe nut) bcttclte. 5)ic 311 cvfiUIcuK' $flid)t ivav fdnver. Sd)ic!en
^ic mir ben 311 favbcut^cii^ ^piit. '^Ibgefeben •* ten tern (Svfclge5,
luuf^ man biefe Untovuebmung billigen". Die 511 gcbeuDc £)pcx
ift toou (by) 9ii>f[iui. (5v ift eiii tinvtlid) 311 cnivfebleuter 9)taim.
2. jDie 511 mi^avtciit^c 5lnfunft" uufrcv gclicbtcu illMiigin cvfilttt
otic ipcrjon mit t^YCut^e. 9iad)bav, gctnmfou! jDic laiig genab^-tc^
^'pcffiuiug ift cnt»Iid) cvfiillt ii^cvbcn. Siu ftavfc^ ©ciuittct mit
1) accomplished. 2) orator. 3) to dye. 4^ with no regard to.
6) result. 0) approve. 7j arrival. 8) to foster.
Lesson 46. 337
^a^d^ l)at bie ge'^offte (Snite toerntd)tetio. ^a§ cje^regte ^erj
g^ift fid) erleid)tert am teilne^ment'enii Sufeit eiue^ geliebteu
t^_reunt)e§. @erut)rt^2 tjon ben 2Borteu be§ alten 9}bnue§, i?rfnete er
bie X\}nxc uiib Ue^ U?n eintreten. ®er arme (Stubent, att felne^
@elbe§ beraubt, fe^te betriibtis fetneu 2Beg fort, bi^ er, in e'luem
SDovfe angefommeu, gan^ evmiibet fid) auf etue SSauH-i fe^te.
9) hail. 10) destroy. 11) sympathising. 12) touched, moved.
13) sadly. 14) bench.
ilttfOaac. 137.
1. Mr. A. is a renowned painter. If you study much, you
will become a learned man. He stood there quite puzzled i.
This man died unknown and unrenowned. The knight 2 re-
turned discouraged^ and dejected 4. The most honored man
is not always the best man. The most learned people write
often the worst hand^. Arrived at (in) the village, he proceeded
(ging ev) to (in) the innC where nobody recognised' him; he
was so changed 8 and sunburnt 9. The life of every man is a
continued i<) chain of incidents n. Beloved and esteemed by
every one, 2 the sold man idied at the (im) age of ninety years.
2. The problem 12 to be solved ^^ has been communicated
[to] all the students. It is a facti^ not to be denied^^, that
no man has any claim 16 to perfection i'^. My neighbour came
running to inform 1^ me that the queen had arrived. The prince
came driving in a coach with six horses. The danger to be
avoided^'-^ is not yet over (tooviibet). Do you understand the
sentence 20 to be learnt? Where is the boy [who is\ to be pun-
ished? Protected 21 by an almighty 22 God, awe imay go through
this life without fear , if we do not deviate 23 from the right
path. »Well begun, half done« [won), is a German proverb.
li P. p. tocrlcgcu, i)enuirrt. 2) ber Sftitter. 3) entmutigt. 4) uic=
fccrgcid)Iageu 5) §aubid;rift, /. G) @aftl;auS, n. 7) er!enneit. 8) tier-
cinbert. 9, fonu^^erbraunt. 10) fortgcfel^t. 11) »ou 58orfatleu. 12) ^luf^^abe
13) ju lofenb. 14) 2:£)atfod;e 15) ju leiigitenb. 16) Slniprud; auf. 17) 35otI=
fommcnbeit. 18) bcna(l)rid)tigen (ace). 19) toermeiben. 20) ber ^^ntevefje burd) ben biogenic
Xcn feinev (Stinune ; nie beflagte ev fid) iibev feinen 3uftanb i^ unb
liej niemaub nievfeni'-^, xocx eV fein !onnte.
{To be continued.)
8) overseer, governor. 9) masked. 10) removal. 11) respect.
12; to deny, to refuse. 13) linen. 14) lace. 15) to attend. —
IC) to excite, cause, raise. 17) mere. 18) condition, state. —
19] to guess, to perceive.
Questions.
NH. The pupil w now requested to seek the answers to the following
questions in the above Reading Exercise.
SBa« 1iit^c(b fid) balb nad) bem Sobe be^^ ^avbinalS 2)?a5avin?
SBev n.Hivbe auf ba« ©^(og bev ©t. 2}^argareteu*3nfcl gc«
fd)idt'^
2Bo Uegt biefe Onfel?
2BaS trug ber ©efangene be^cinbig?
SBie langc blieb ev auf ber 3nfcl"?
ffl5cl)in ful^vte it)n (Saint.3)?av«*^
S33ev l)atte il)n ter feinev ^^evfetning befud)t?
2Bie \)ciiiz ev fid) gegen il)n benommen (behaved)?
2Ba« evl)iclt bev Unbefanntc in bev 33aftiUe?
2ln \ra« fanb ev fein gvofetc^ ^evgnii^en?
3[Bev bel)anbeltc il)n in feinen i^vanfl^eiten ?
ia>a« fagte biefev HxxX oft?
ilBobuvc!^ ervegtc ev Sntevefjc?
339
Forty- seventh Lesson.
Remarks on the Adjectives.
1) The qualifying adjective which is placed before its
substantive, as in English, agrees with its substantive
in gender, number and case. In poetry however many
exceptions to this rule are found. Such are:
(Sin 9l0C^teill rot a little red rose.
T)ic Slicfe frei unt) feffeltoS (free and unrestrained).
^(eiu 9iolant) instead of t)er fleiue ^totanb k.
2) A number of adjectives admitting a government
{object) take it either in the accusatice, in the dative, or
in the genitive.
I. Adjectives which govern the Accusative.
1) Adjectives implying weight, measure, age, value,
generally with a numeral preceding, require the accu-
sative and are placed after their case. Such are:
(S(^\i3er heavy, weighing,
(ang long,
breit broad, wide,
alt old.
Ijcc^ high.
tief deep.
gto^ great, large, tall.
tuert worth etc.
Examples.
2)er ©tein xoax id)xi ^il'o*) fcl)ti?er.
The stone weighed ten kiloes.
!I)ie 9)^auev i[t sttjaujig 9}?eter*) Iviug.
The wall is twenty meters long.
5)ie ^rau xockx fed^jig ^oS)xt alt.
The woman was sixty years old.
2) When qualifying, together with their government
they precede the substantive and agree with it (see
p. 342, v.). Ex.:
§iet ift ein itl)\\ ^ito fd) merer (Stein.
Here is a stone weighing ten kiloes.
©ie Bauten erne l^unfcert SSRtitx langc SD^auer.
They built a wall a hundred meters long.
II. Adjectives which govern the Dative.
3l6geneigt disinclined,
dljntic^ like, resembling,
angeboren innate.
angcmeffen appropriate, suitable,
angeueljm agreeable.
aufti3J3ig offensive.
b
*) Not in the plural (see p. 54, § 15).
11*
340
Lesson 47.
befanut known,
begreiflid) conceivable,
bequem \ convenient,
be^aglid) j comfortable.
befd)n3erltd) troublesome,
banfbar grateful,
tiienlic^ serviceable.
etgentiimUd) | ^^^^ ^^^*
fremt) strange,
ge'^orfam obedient.
3^.^?9^'" 1 favourable.
geneigt inclined.
geh)ad)fen equal to, a match to
gleid) like, equal.
guafcig gracious, kind
^eilfam salutary.
Idftig troublesome, burdensome.
1'^'' jdear.
teuer j
moglid) possible.
wiiinbg(id) impossible.
nad)teiiig \ prejudicial, detri-
fd)dt)lid) j mental, hurtful.
Iial)e near-
ni3tig necessary.
nii^ltd) useful.
treu, getreii faithful.
iibeilcgeu superior.
t?er^a^t odious.
toevtcilljaft advantageous.
I tuiUfonimeu welcome.
I juti'dglid) conducive, beneficial.
These adjectives as well as their contraries formed
by prefixing un, as: midl)n(id;, iinbeqiiem, imtreii :c. require
the person or object in the dative which must precede*
Examples.
3)et (Soi^n t[t (or fiel}t) feineui S3ater dl^nlid).
The son is like (resembles) his father.
3)ie Siebe ju feer ^veil^cit ift t^em 9JUMifd)en angcboren.
The love of liberty is innate m man.
3)ie 5lvbeit tuar ben ©oIt)aten Uiftig (or befd)ttjerlid}) .
Working was troublesome to the soldiers.
^a§ 33at)en ift ber ®e[uut)^ett fe^r jutrdglid?.
Bathing is very conducive to health.
C5v5 Wax mir unmoglid) ^u fommcu.
It was impossible /or me to come.
Reading Exercise. 138.
Diefe ^ugel ift mc^v aU jel)!! 5li(o fd^trer. SSle lang ift
t)iefe ©tra^e? Oie ift ad)tl)uut)crt5ivaii5ig 9}ietcr lana. 1)16
i^ciube gruben eiucn jnjolf yjcetev bxciteu ©raben. Suf bcm
^la^ei ftel)t cine imgefdl)r2 incvjig SDJetev l)ol)e 33ilt)[dule^. ^Diefe
®efd)id)te ift alien ih'^inS'-^fen n)cl)l befannt. ^n »iel efjen ift ter
©efnnt>l)eit nad}teilig. 'i)cx ^cnig tvar bicfcm ^ofmann-* fe^r
getDogen. ©eib euevn 2Bcl;ltl)dterns immcv bonlbav. Die Kinge
y^eifc xoax bem altcn 9)?anne fel;v bcfd)n}cvlid} ; er !cnnte fie nidit
tucitcv fovt[e^en<^. 3)ie i^cinfee waxen nn§ an S^¥' ^^^it iibev*
logon; bcfto ftoljcv (the prouder) ivavcn wix auf unfeni (Siegs,
ii\il)vont) tjcv foinblidie ©onoval iibev foine^iiotcvlagc*-^ bcfdjdmt wax.
1) square. 2) about, 3) statue. 4) courtier. 5) benefactor.
0, continue. 7) number. 8) victory. 9] defeat.
On the Adjectives.
341
<^ttfGa6e. 139.
My room is ten meters long and fifteen wide. The boy
climbed.! over la sw^all^ 2five smeters 4high. In the room we
found la rman 2 about 4 sixty -3 five 5 years eold. London-
bridge 3 is nine hundred and twenty (English) feet long, fifty-
five high and fifty-six wide. The monument-* of London is
a round pillar, two hundred feet high ; it stands on a pedestal ^
twenty feet high. Travelling is conducive to health. Your
horse is much superior to mine. Smoking is not conducive
to health, at least for those who have feeble lungs 6.
1) flettcrn. 2) cine 9)laiier. 3, S)te i^onboner S3riicfe. 4) bag
2.'2)cnfmal. 5) gu^geftcll, n. 6) eitie frf;tr)ad^e Sunge {Sing.).
III. Adjectives which govern the Genitive.
S3et)uvftig \ in want of,
beuotigt j in need of.
be\DUJ3t conscious.
ein0et)cnf mindful,
fcil^ig capable, able.
getTjdvtig expectful of.
getDlj^, fid)cr certain, sure.
l)abl)aft getting possession of.
!uutiig acquainted with.
lo§ rid of.
mdd)tig master of.
miiDe, fatt tired of, weary.
fcl)ult)ig guilty,
teid^afti^ participant.
iibert)vulfig tired of, weary.
t>ert)dd)tig suspected,
toevluftig having forfeited,
tijiivbig, tuevt worthy, worth.
and those of the above adjectives which admit the prefix UU,
denoting the contrary, as: unbetDUJ^t, uueuiget)enf (unmindful),
unfd^ig, mihiui^ig, uufd)utfcii3, mmnii-Dig k.
NB. Observe that here, also, the object precedes the adjective.
Examples.
3)ie 5lvmen [mb be§ ©elbe^ bet)iirftig (benctigt).
The poor are in want of money.
®ev 33Dte \mx be^S 2Bege§ iud)t funt>lg (or unfunbig).
The messenger was unacquainted with the way.
3)cv ©L'ueval \-oax fee^ S3 errata t>evbdd}ti(j.
The general was suspected of treason.
^d) bin t)e§ 5hbeiteu§ miite I am tired of working.
IV.
^d)tfam auf [ace.) careful of.
bange toov {dat.) afraid of.
bcfd)dmt iiber (ace) ashamed of.
begievig wad) desirous of.
be[rcit »on \ rid of,
fret con j free from,
c^vgci^lg wad) ambitious of.
empfduglii^ fiiv susceptible of.
Adjectives with Prepositions.
empfinblid) iiber (ace.) sensible of.
eifevfiid}tig gcgen (sometimes
iibev)*) [ace] jealous of.
eitel auf {ace.) vain of.
evmiibct toon fatigued with.
fQl)ig 511 able, capable of.
fvct) iibcv {ace.) glad of.
fvud}tbav an productive of.
gcgeit with persons, ilOer with things.
342 Lesson 47.
unbcfannt mit unacquainted.
inmjifjcnt) in [dut.) ignorant of.
t^evfdiiDeuteiifcI) mit prodigal of.
5\i^eif el^af t ii b e r (occ.) dubious of.
jufrieteii m i t cpntented, pleased,
satisfied,
unjufvic^cn m i t discontented,
displeased with.
gieiig wcL&f covetous of.
cjlcid)(5i(ti(^ 9^9^" indifferent to.
gcfiil)UoiJ gegcu insensible of.
gvQufam 909611 cruel to.
Ijeflid) 969 en civil, polite to.
uad^ldjfig in [dat.) careless of.
reid) an [dat.) rich in.
ftolj auf [ace.) proud of.
iibevjcugtt) on convinced, sure of.
NB. With these, the adjective may precede or follow the object.
Examples.
Sgi^ptcu ift frud}tl)ar an S3aumiDctte.
Egypt is productive of cotton.
^ex Siiugling \Dar begierig nad) ^enntnifjen.
The youth was desirous of knowledge.
Y. Adjectives with a complement.
The complement, which in English follows an attri-
butive adjective, is, together with the latter, placed be-
fore the substantive, immediately after the article :
©in t)iel gelcfene^^ 33ud) a book much read.
(gin mit Sl^ein gcfiiUtc^ ®Ia8 a glass filled with wine.
3)er butd) 9ht^e geftavfte Sibrver.
The body strengthened by repose.
Sin nad) ^enntniffcn begievigcr Siingting.
1)ic bem 9)Jenfd}cn angebovne Siebe jur i^rel^eit.
Reading Exercise. 140.
3d) bin miv fcinev Sd)ult)i bciini^t. %\t 5lu§tDanbrer
blicbcn immcv i^ie^ iBateiianbeS eingebenf unt> tuaven
niemaK^ 9lL'id)9iUii3 (indifferent) gegcn t)aS (Sd)icffal te^felben.
3et)cv 9Jien|d) niu^ [tctv^ be^ %^\it^ gciuavtiq fcin, Denn t)er
2;Dt» i>cv[d)out2 nicmaiib. !l)ie ^anie cv[d)va! }o fcl)V, taj^ fie
t)er (2viad)e nid)t moljr mad) tig iivir. iD^m l)ielt i^n einer
fold) en !It)at3 iud)t fci^ig. Od) 'bin bc^ l\*bcn^ nnt) t)e3 :pcvv*
fdjenii^ miitc, fo fprad) tev giivft jn fcinen ®cl)nen. ^ev 3d)iHer
tvar gleid)ailtig gegcn aUe (ivnial)nnngcn-» feinc^ ?i'l)vcv3. Set if^
nid)t t)cv yJiiibc wert (worth the trouble!, "Dicjen 33vief nod) ein*
mal ab3n[d)veiben. 3)ie iVvvtnen follcn nid)t eifevfiidjtig fcin gegcn
il)vc 9)^aniicv5. (Sin mit feineni Sd)i(ffale6 3ufviet)cner 2}iVnfd) ifl
immcv gliicflid).
1) guilt. 2) to spare. 3) deed. 4) warnings. 5) husband.
OJ fate.
^\x^^9iU. 141.
We are always mindful of our dutyi. Thoy were not
quite sure of their advantage'-^. Oh tell us, how have you
Lesson 47. 343
become 4 master (mcid^tlg) lof zthe scastle? I am tired of
reading. The young man was not capable of 2 such la deed 3.
He who kills a man, is guilty of a great crime 4. I am not
pleased 5 with your behaviour. I am quite convinced of his
innocence 6. England is rich in coal'. The foreigner was
ignorant of the language of the country ; he was therefore
soon tired of his stay».
1) ^flic^t, f. 2) «Bovtcit, m. 3) Z^at, f. 4) SSertredjeit, n. 5) ^lu
friebcu. 6) Uttfc^ulb. 7) ^o^Ieit, pi. 8) Stufetit^tt, m.
142.
Young people should be civil to every body. I am
satisfied with my pupils. The boy is fatigued with running.
Human life is never free from troubles 1. Many men are dis-
satisfied with their condition 2, Those who commit suicide 3
must be very tired of their lives [sing.). Let us never do
anything in secret-*, of which (luoviiber) we should be ashamed,
if it became known. At last I feel myself rid of that tedious ^
disease. It is my duty to tell you, that you are totally 6
ignorant of (in) the most important ' facts 8 of history. I do
not like persons who are cruel to (gegeil) animals. The tailor
showed me a letter (p. 342, V.) written by his son. A man well
instructed (untevri^tet . .) in (the) history, judges » the events 10
with impartiality 11. He who is unmindful of his domestic 12
duties and not careful of his children, is an enemy to [Gen.)
his family 13 and his country ; he is guilty of great sins 1^ the
consequence 15 of which [pl.)^^ he cannot foresee ''.
I) SDRii^c, SSefc^iuerbe, f. 2) bte ?agc. 3) eincn ©elbftmcrb tegcl^en.
4) tm ©e^eimen. 5) langiDcHig 6) gaiij. 7) tr)id;tig. 8) Z'^at\ad}m.
9) to judge beurteileu. lOj bie Sreigniffc. 11) Uu))artcUi^feit.
12) ^iisli^. 13) f^amUie, f. 14) @uube, f. 15) bcren golgeix, pi.
16) see p. 303, § 1. — ]7) toorWe^cn.
Reading-lesson,
^cr Wann wit ber cifcrnett Wa§it. (®d)(uj3).
!Die[ev UnBelaunte ftavB im Qa^xe 1703 un'D njuvbe bet ^la6:)t
im ^ird)l)Dfi ber •pau(§*^fan-ei2 begraben. SSa^ t)a§ Srftamien
»evt)o^peU, tft, ba^ 5U t)ev 3eit, al§ man ir)n nad) t)er @t. 93?av* .
c^aveten * -Snfel fd}icfte, !ein anciefel)enev3 Wlaxm in (Suro^a t?er:=
fd)n)ant). Unt) t)od) xoax tjiefev ©efangene oI)ne S^^-'ci^t cin [o(d}er;
tjenn golgentje^ I)atte fid) in t)er erften 3eit, ai^ er anf t)er 3nfel
tijar, jngetvagen^: !Der £)bevauffel)er fteUte felbft bie ©d)iifjeln anf
ben 3:ifd), nnb nad^bem er t^n eingefd)loffen l)atte, ging er tueg.
(Sinft fd^rieb ber ©efangenc etn?a§ anf einen filbernen 2;eller
nnt) ^Darf ben teller jnm ^^cufter I}inau§, gegen ein (Sd^iff, \ueld)e§
am Ufer tag, faft am gn§c be^ SnrmeS. ®er gifd)er, bem biefe§
(2d)iff gel)brte, fanb ben 3:erier, l;ob it>n anf unb brac^te i^n bem
1) churchyard. 2) parish. 3) distinguished. 4) happened.
344 Lesson 48.
OBevauffefjer juviirf. (Srftaimt fraj^tc t^iefev ben i5^ifd)cv: ,.^aUn
(Sic n<^l<^f<^»' ^^^^ auf^tiefcm !Ie'Ucr gcfdniebeu ftel)t, imt? Ijat
jcniauD ii)n in -S^ren §Quten gefol^en?" — Xiefer 9T^ann n>iute
fcft(^cl)a(ten 5, bi§ tcv Suffc!^er [id) \col}l J3crfid>evt ^attc, fca^ er
nidit Icfcn fonnte, unt) ta^ ter !itfC(er i^on nienianb gcfc^en loot*
ten \DQV. „@c^en ©ic/' fagte ev, „8w finb fel^r gliicflid), bag
©ie nid}t lefen fonnen."
§evr t)Dn (iljaniiUavt trar ber Ic^tc SRiniftev, toeldjer biefc«
fcnbev6ave6 ©el^eimni^ tvnii3te. 3)er 9)?arfd}aU 2a t^euiUabe, fein
®d)knegevfol)n 7 , bat il)n bet feincm Xo'ce auf ben ^'nieen, i^m
an^ujeigcn, njer ber 9)?ann njcive, ben man nie anber^ fannte,
aU nnter bem DZamcn: ,,'Der 3JJann mit ber eifernen Tla^k."
(il;amitlart antnjovtete i^ni, bag eS ein (Staat^ge^eimniS fet, unb
bag ev einen Sib geleiftet^ l^ahe., e« nie ju entbcrfen.
5) arrested. 6) strange. 7) son-in-law. 8j taken an oath.
Questions.
SSann ftarb bie[er Un^efanntc?
2Bo tunvbe er bef^vaben?
2Sa« trng [id^ eiiift anf ber Onfel jn?
2Sa§ [a^te ber £)beranf[et)er ju bem Sifdjer?
SSa^ ge|d)al) bann biefem ?D(anne?
SBie lange tuuvbe er fcftgel;alten?
Wit weidmi SBcrtcn irnrbe er entlaffen (dismissed)?
2Ber luarbcr le^te, ber bicfe^ @el;eimni^ tini^te?
2Beld)e ^InnDovt gab (Sl^amiUavt bem 9)kr[d>aU 2a l^euiflabe?
Forty-eighth Lesson.
On the Governments of Verbs.
The usual way in which the object is connected
with active verbs is hy the accusative case, as: 3c(; liebe
ben ^i^atcv, unr lobcu btc (Srf;iUcr, (Ste (efen ta§43uci^.
13ut there are also some verbs, the government of which
is connected either by means of the 7w?}iinative, or the
(jenitice, or dative^ or by prepositions (see p. 351). As
they differ most from the English, they must be separ-
ately mentioned.
I. Verbs which in German govern the Nominative.
1) The nominative case is required by the following
verbs :
(2ein to be. fdunnen to appear, to seem.
k"*erben to become, to get.
bleiben to remain.
l^eigen to be called, to bear
name.
Verbs with the dative.
345
Examples.
5^apDleon tt)ar ein grcger gelbl^err (general).
!5)er junge 9JJenfd) ift (Solbat getDovbcu.
S)ag fd)eint elu gutev $lan (ju fein).
2) By the passive voice of the following verbs, which,
in the active, govern a double accusative:
9^ennen )
to call.
fd)elten ir. v. to scold, [names.
fd)lnipfen rey. v. to abuse, call
3) The verbs: to appoint emeutien; to elect ertDci^Ien;
to make ttiad^cn, governing in English two nominatives
in the passive voice, require in German the preposition
J It with the article in the dative. Ex.:
§erv 21. ift 5 urn §auptmann ernanut tDovben.
Mr. A. was appointed captain.
(5r ift jum Softer gemad}t iuorten.
He was made a doctor.
Note. The verbs erndren [to declare) and ^ a It en
consider, to think), require the preposition fuv. Ex.:
He was declared a thief cr hjurbc fiir ciucn 2)ieb erflcirt.
Palmer \ya.s found guilty palmer imtrbc fiir idjulbig erf .art.
I consider that day lost id) Italic btefen Sag fiir toeiloren.
(to
II. Yerlbs which in German goTern the Dative.
1 ) The following verbs, most of which govern in Eng-
lish the accusative J when, in German, they are followed
by one object, require the person in the dative:
Slbraten to dissuade,
antttjovten to answer.
ant)augeu to adhere.
aiiftc^en to suit.
l^efel)leu to command, order.
fbegegnen*) act. v. to meet,
occur, to encounter.
ie^ begcgnet impers. v. it hap-
pens.
Taii^n?eid)en**) to evade, avoid.
bel)Qgen to please.
fbcfcnmicn (tt}ol)l or gut) to
agree with a person's
health.
Ibetjovfteljen to impend.***)
beiftimmeu \ to agree with
beipf(id)tcn \ some one.
-[-beiftel^en to assist.***)
"Daufeii to thank.
bieneuf) to serve.
t)rcl)CU'l-) threaten,
-j-einfaflen to occur.
eiuleud}ten to be evident,
icntfliebeu ^ ^„
-engc^en ^ ^^^^^ ^'
icutteuimeii . '
t^'rr" bsrnd.
jentlaufen )
*) bcgcgnen is also used with the acc.\ then it takes baBcn.
**) Those marked with -|- are conjugated with fctu [to he).
***) also with ^abeit, see p. 151),
f) ficbieiiCTi, ficbro^cn and ficfDlgcn take the ace.
346
Lesson 48.
euif))red)en to answer the pur-
pose, to correspond with,
to accord.
crtauben to allow, permit.
feljlen, mangclu to be wanting.
ftud)en to curse.
ffolgen'^) to follow.
froneii to indulge (passions).
gebiiljreu to be due.
j]ef alien to please,
niii^fallen to displease.
ge'^ord}eu to obey.
(^etjbieu to belong.
-fCjelingcn to succeed [impers.].
genugeii to suffice.
gereicl)eu to redound, conduce.
gejtcmeu or jiemen to become,
to be seemly.
gleid)eu to be like, resemble.
glauben to believe.
pelfen to help.
I)Ult)igen to do homage.
leud)ten to light (down stairs).
iiii^tvauen to mistrust.
mitteileu to impart.
fid) nci^eni to approach.
niit5eii to be of use. •
paffeu to fit, suit,
raten to advise.
fd)aten to injure,
fd^eiueu to seem.
fdnueid)eln to flatter,
[teuevn to check, to remedy.
tvo|5en to bid defiance, to face.
tvaueu (tjertvaueu) to trust,
iuutevliegeu to succumb,
toevbieten to forbid,
fid) uiitciniYvfeu to submit.
7i?0Tangel)eu to precede,
tovbeugen to obviate, prevent.
toviDevfen to reproach.
n:el;e t^un to hurt, injure.
7tr>eid)en to give way, to yield.
-i-\int)evfvil)ven to happen,
f n)itevftel)en \ to withstand,
fid)tt)it)erfe^en/ to resist, oppose.
trit)evfpved)en to contradict.
iDiUfatjveu to comply, to indulge.
\DoI)ltVDllen to favour, wish well.
3ul)Lneu to listen to.
-j-jutommeu to fall to one's share,
to be due.
and many more of these verbs compounded with bet, eutgegcn,
imd), t>er, tuiber, ju.
Examples.
jDiefeS ^teib pa^t mir iud)t this dress does not suit me.
3d) biu i^m t)lefcii ^Jicvgcn begegnet (met).
3;d) ftimme bem 3iet?uev tjollfommeii bei.
I entirely agree with the speaker.
jDev ^vieg brol^t biefem Saube war threatens this country.
25>otleu ©ic mir l^clfen? will you help me?
Observations. — As these verbs are not transitive, they
cannot be used in the passive voice, except sometimes in the
third person (see p. 135, § 7) ; the passive sentence is there-
fore , in German , to be changed into a corresponding active
sentence. Examples :
He was readily obeyed man 3el)0vd)te il)m bcveittciflig.
We were displeased with their society.
3t)ve ®e[eUfd)aft migfiel un^.
♦) See the foot-note f) p. 845. AVhen fotgcn means to oheyj
it is alway/i conjugated with ^abcit, but it keeps the Dat. case.
Ex.: (£r folgt mir he obeys me.
Lesson 48. 347
2) The' following verbs which have Uvo governments,
a 'person and a tking^ require the person in the dative^
the thing in the accusative. The dative precedes the ace:
fageu to tell.
fd)en!eu to present with, give.
fd)itfen to send.
[d^ulten, [cl)u(i)i3 feln to owe
(be indebted),
fte^leu to steal from.
ceit)an!en to owe (have to
thank) .
tocrjei^en to pardon.
»erj'd)affen to procure,
toorlefen to read to a person.
tr>it)men to devote, dedicate.
§eigeu to show.
3U)c^reiben to ascribe, impute.
?l[6[d}Iageu to refuse.
aubieten to offer.
au^fe^en to expose.
briugen to bring.
em^fel)len to recommend.
Ieil)en to lend.
entveij^eii to snatch away.
evjciljlen to relate, to tell.
C5cn)dt;ren to grant.
gebeii to give.
erfparen to save (trouble).
Iciften to render, to loan.
liefern to furnish, provide.
net^meu to take from a person.
Examples.
®eben @te bent ^naben*) fca§ ^ud).
3;d) entvi^ (snatched away from) bem ©olbaten t)a§ ©enje'^r.
(Sageu ©ic mtv tie 2Ba'^vI)eit (truth).
(^v fd)enfte tern ^nabeu cine 9)lar!.
Reading Exercise. 143.
1. ?D^em ^ebieutev ift ein c^rlid^er 9J^aim. ©in 9^avr bteibt
imnier twx j)krr. S)ay fc^eiut ein glitdlic^ev ©ebaulei. 9J^ein
^Zeffe ift Dffijiev getrovben. %tx ^vembe iijuvbe fiiv eluen 33e=
triiger2 evflart. -Sc^ l)abe meiuem i^reunbe abgevaten, t)ie[e§
IBtxl ^eraib^.^ugebeu 3. ^a^ l;at man 3^nen geantwortet? 90^an
:^at mlr gar ntd)t3 geanttDortet. ®iefe 2Bot)nung ftel)t mlr md)t
an; fie ift ju !(ein fiir mid). 5l(§ toev i)^et)ner geenbigt l)atte,
ftimmte (^^ftid)tete) il)m bie gan^e iBerfammlung bei. 3jei" ^iirft
a'^nte-i ba'g Ungliid nid)t, \i^cld}e» ifjm beijorftanb. 2:vinfen ®te
gem 33iev? Od) tvin!e eg gern; ^^tx e3 befommt mir nid}t gut;
eg fd}abet meiner ®efunb()eit.
2. 5)ie 5!int)ev, tt3eld)e if)ren CEItern nid)t gel)ovd)en, migfaHen
@ott. ®iefer fammevbienev biente bem ©rafen »on ^. bvei_^ig
3fal)re lang mit bev gvogten 2;reue unb ^n^ngtl^feit^. 2)iefe
©teUe^ ift bem gelel^rten ^vofeffor entgangen, fonft tuiirbe er
getm^ elne lange 3lbl)anblung7 bariibet geffceben l^aben. 3)er
SDieb ift bem ©efdngnigrcdrtevs entlanfen. 3;d) begegncte ^eute
einem meiner atten ^-veunbe, luetdjer gefonnen ift, in einiger ^t\i
nad) 3ftalien ju reifen. -Sc^ riet il)m fel)r, feine 9teife nic^t lauge
ju toevfd)ieben9. (Sr ^eigte feinem i^veunbe*) bie 33ilbev.
1) idea. 2) a cheat. 3) from publishing. 4i to anticipate.
5) attachment 6) passage. 1] treatise, es^ay. 8) jailor. 9) to put off.
*) Observe that in German the dative precedes the accusative.
348 Lesson 48.
Jlufga6e. 144.
1. Henry is a little boy. John has become [a] soldier.
Aristides was called wthe Ju8t«. My neighbour was abused [as]
a cheat (33etviiger) . Is it true that your cousin has been
appointed a judge? I will make him my (ju Uieiuem) friend.
What has happened to you? What did you answer your
master? The captain threatened the soldiers. Nobody has
ordered the man to open the gate^ It was impossible /or
me to resist his requests 2, This circumstance 3 must displease
the merchant. We should always assist our neighbours when
they are in want of'* assistance. To whom does this hat
belong? It belongs to the hatter; he brought it to me that
I might buy it. Why do you not answer your master (teacher)
when he questions & you? He always bids defiance to his
enemies.
2. To (Urn . . JU) escape (the) death, he seized a plank 6.
Let us follow this example"^. I met him at the town gate 8.
Why did you not thank your teacher? I have not met him
these (I'eit) several weeks. The beggar approached me in a
suspicious manner (auf eiuc t>erDad}tic^c SBeife) . Children must
obey their parents. The slave hardly escaped his pursuers 'J.
How is your uncle pleased j-) with (in) Frankfort? He is very
well pleased y). If you will listen to me, I will read you a
chapter (cin il'apitel) of Macaulay's »History of England". Show
me your paintings ^o, and I will show you my drawings^^ Could
you lend me a dollar 12 or two? I will lend you them, if you
will give me them back to-morrow. Show the stranger the
way. Do not believe this liari3.
1) b a 8 Stbor. 2; bieS3itte. 3) Umftaub, m. 4) to be in want = t^rauc^m
[ace). 5; fraijcn [ace), (ij eiu 33rett, n. 7 sBcifpiel, n. 8j ba3 vitabttDor.
D) bcr SJcifolflcr. — 10) bic a}Jatcrci, bad (Scmalbc. 11) Bcid^muig.
12) about dollar and thaler, (Germ, dollar; see p. 1G5. 13) bcr i'ligner.
III. Verbs which in German govern the Genitive.
1) The following verbs take their ohject in the gen-
itive; some of them may also take a preposition:
^ebiivfen*) (id) lt\}Ci\\) to need,
to be in want,
evuuiugehi to be void. [of
gcbeuteu to remember, think
l)vivven ff ) to wait patiently for.
lad)en**) to laugh.
fd)cueu*) to spare.
1>ottcu**) to mock.
f) See p. 226, b, and p. 229, Conversation.
*) tcbiUfrit takes sometimes, and f^oitcn mostly, the accusative.
**) ?ad^cu, fvottcn and [irf> fd)amcn prefer the preposition iit^cr
with the accusative.
H) barren may take the prep, auf with the ace.
Verbs -with the genitive.
349
2) The following verbs require the person in the accu-
sative, and the object in the genitive, which follows:
5lnflagen \ to accuse of.
befd)UlDigen j to charge with,
berauben to rob, to bereave.
entbinl)en to release, absolve.
ent!(eit)en to deprive, divest,
eutt^eben to exempt from.
entfe^en to dismiss, remove.
iibevl^eben to disburden, spare,
to dispense,
iiberfu'^ten to convict.
»erfid)ertx to assure.
tDurbicjen to favour.
3) The following reflective verbs govern the object
in the genitive:
\\6) erlnnevn*) to remember,
fid) enttDo^nen to disaccustom
one's self,
fid) erbarmen to have mercy.
fid) txXot^XtW to ward oflf, keep
away.
fid) evfreuen to enjoy.
fid) tubmen to boast of.
fid) fd)dmen**) to be ashamed,
fid) cerfe'^en to await.
\\6) »erfi(^ein to make sure of,
to secure.
©id) annel)nien to interest
one's self for, take care of.
fid) bet)ienen to make use of.-j-)
fid) bcflei^igen or befleigen to
apply one's self.
fi(^ bemad)ttgen to seize, to
take possession of.
fid) enf^alten to abstain from,
to forbear,
fid^ entlet)igen to get rid of.
fid) entfd)(a(5en to part with,
fic^ entfinnen to recollect.
4) Observe also the following peculiar expressions
with the genitive :
hungers ftcrben to die of hunger,
(StneS :^Io^Ud)en jlobe§ fterbett to die a sudden death.
@eine3 2Bege§ gel^eit to go one's way.
®tc finb be§ S^obeS! you are a dead man!
©iiteS SPfJuteS fein to be of good cheer.
S)CT 9?u!^e ^flcgen to take one's ease, to rest.
S)er 9Heinimg (or 2tnfid)t) [ein to be of the opinion.
SSiIIeii§ fein to purpose, to intend, to be willing.
S)e8 ^XiUi toerfe$Ieii to miss one's aim.
%l 'f ff\ ^'l ^-^/vf^'L"^ ] it is not worth the trouble.
(S8 loerlD^nt \i6.} itid)t bur m\x\)z \
(Sinett beS 2a:ibe3 ternjeifen to exile some one.
©cincS 2tmte8 tDcrten to attend to one's ofiice or business.
Eeading Exercise. 145.
1. -Sfd) bebai-f 3^re§ Seiftaube^ ie^^t nic^t me'^r. 2Bir Gotten
fce« empfangenen 33i3fen iud)t gel?en!en. 2Btr fatten noc^ t)er (Snt*
fd)eit)ungi. 2©a§ fiir elne^ S^etbrec^enS ift biefer SD^aun ange!(agt?
?0^an !lagt il)n eineg 9)lort)e§ 2 an. SSil^etm ift eiuer Untratir^eit
iiberfii^rt tDort^en. -Sd) ging an i^r i^ovbei, unt) iDiirbigte fie feineS
1) decision. 2) murder.
f) *to make use of is often translated : gebraud^en with the ace.
*) @ic^ crinnern takes also an with the ace. — **; Seep. 349.
350 Lesson 48.
33(icfe3. ^ie t^vau ^at fid) be^ avmen .flint e5 augenommeu unt)
itjm cini(;e ^leitmic^'oftiicfe (clothes) gcfcl)cuft (aegeben). SBaiuni
bcDieut fid) biefer Mami einer ^liicfe^? 'iBeil er cinen Ial)meu
("yujl ^at. ®ie 9tauber bcuidd)ticjtcu fid) ineine^ iioffev^. iDieine
©roj^mutter erfveut fid) in i^rem ^o[)en ^2(lter nod) einer gnten
®e[unt?l)eit. (Sntl)altet cud) fceS 33vanntti3ein§'*, tenii er ^erftert
euve ©cfunbl^eit.
2. ^d) glanbe (Sie ju !ennen, mein §err; aber id) fann
mid) 3l)ver nid)t erinuern. (Sut|d)(agcn (2ie fid) tiefev tviibeu
@et)anfen; ©ie tvevben 3l)r Ungliid iiur terj^vof^evn. (5vbavmct
eud) ter ^2lrmen unt) Ungliicflidien. ®e()en Sie ru'^ig 3f|re^
23ege§. §arvet tcS §errn (or auf ten §evrn), er tuirb end) nid)t
Derlaffen^. (S^ i^er(ol)nt fid) ter 9JJiil)e, ticfe 9tcife ju iintevnel)men.
3d) bin uid)t ticj'er 5lufid)t; id) glaube ine(uiel)r, man foUte fid)
aUer t^eitcren (£d)ritte« entl)alten. •)^ad)teni id) niel)rore 9Jad)te
acti3ad)t l^atte, fonnte id) mid) te^ ®d)(afe3 uid)t mel)v ertt)el)ven.
vJlc'ni §au^t)err7 ift l)eute eincS plc^lid)cn Xoted geftcrbeu; i3cftern
luar er nod) ganj gefunt unt munters. 3)er 5?ranfe mu^ ter
^Jut)e vflegen, fenft (or) fann er nid)t genefen^.
3) crutch. 4) whisky. 5) forsake. 6) steps. 7) landlord.
8) lively. 9, recover.
^ufflaBf. 146.
1. I need a sharp knife to cut^ this meat. She derided
my threats 2. 2 Never miock the unfortunate. Are you still
in want of my assistance? The prisoner has been accused
of a murder. They accused me of a falsehood 3, because they
did not understand what I said. The trees are deprived of
their leaves. The soldiers were absolved from their oath-*.
The prince assured them of his favour. The captain released
him from his promise. Some authors say that Belisarius was
deprived of all his dignities'' and cast into prison. Why have
you abstained from smoking? Because itdidnotagree^ [M;jV/i] me.
2. The old man remembered the days of his youth.
Having no scissors at hand (bci ter §aut), I made use of
a knife. The Jews abstain from pork ', according to the law
of Moses. We did not await such an answer «. Did anybody
make sure of his pocket-book? This lady has disaccustomed
herself to coffee. Remember always your benefactors '\ The
king had mercy on the poor prisoner and set him free^o. Be
ashamed of your behaviour. Are you obliged to 77inke use of
spectacles (einer 23viUc, G. s/w^.)? I have made 11 use of them
from (since) my sixteenth year. Do you remember your ab-
sent friends? I » always » remember 2 them.
1) See p. 325, §10.-2) ©ro^iiUiV 3) bic U^t. 4) bcr Sib.
5) bie SBilrbc. (i) gut bcfommcn (see p. 345, III. — 7) baS ®^a>ciuc'
fleifd) 8) bie ?tntti>ort. 9) ber fflBoblt^atcr. 10) to set free = bic
^vei^cit |d)CMtcn. 11) JPres. (see p. 309, § 4).
Verbs with prepositions.
351
IV. Terbs governing certain prepositions.
1) The preposition an is required by the following verbs:
SlDveffiereu an ace. to direct to.
benfen
fid) getvD^nen
fid) luenteu
iibevtveffeu
ftevben
fid) aule^nen \
„ le^nen /
giauben
dat.
think of.
accustom,
apply to.
excel in.
die of.
lean
fd)reibeu an ace. to write to.
Sell nel)men dat. „ take part in.
jltjeifeln „ „ doubt of.
lU'rjti^eifetu „ „ despair of.
eviuuern ace. „ remind of.
fid) erinnevn\
getjeufeii j "
l)lnt)ern dat.
fid) rad)en
„ „ believe in
2) The preposition auf is required by:
5ld)t geben ace. pay attention,
fid) t)evlaffen „ to rely on.
anttDorten „ „ answer.
t>evtvaueu „ „ trust upon,
toaiteu „ „ wait for.
recollect,
hinder from,
revenge on.
fid) belaufeii ace. to amount to.
5al)len „ „ count upon.
bel)avten dat. \ . ...
beftd^en . | to insist.
S^tinfen to drink,
tuevten „ become of.
3) an§ is required by:
ubcvfel^en to translate from.
befte()en „ consist of.
4) hci is required by:
S3efdin)ijren to conjure,
too^uen „ live at.
5) fitr is required by
bet ©eite tegen to lay aside,
bteiben bet „ stay with.
S3iirgen \ to bail, answer for,
gut fte^eu j „ warrant,
baufeu „ thank for.
) org en
beftrafen
l)alten
to take care of.
„ punish for.
„ consider.
6) in is required by:
(Sid) uufd)en to meddle with. I einttjitligen to consent to.
befteljen „ consist in. |
7) mit is required by:
5lnfangen to begin with,
fid) abgeben „ attend to.
fid) befd)dftigen to be occupied w.
bet)e(!en
belaten
t)ereinigen
Slbreifen
e'^en
id) begeben
jielcn
to cover with,
load
join
8) nad) is required by:
f|3ved)en
wevg{eld)en
tocrfel^en
bee^ven
9}Utlelt) l)aben
be(ol)nen
to speak to.
„ compare with.
„ provide „
„ honour „
„ have pity on.
„ reward.
to set out for.
„ go to.
„ repair to.
., aim at.
ftreben to aspire to.
fvagen „ ask for.
fid) fel)ncn „ long „
fd)i(feu „ send „
352
Lesson 48.
9) iiftct with the
Urteileu to judge of.
flageii, fid} bctlvigen to complain
enoten to blush at. [of.
Uidjcn „ laugh „
fpotteu „ mock „
tjerfiigen „ dispose of.
fid) erfuiibigen enquire about.
^erfaUcu to pounce upon.
ace. is required by:
fid) n3Uiit)eni to wonder at.
fid) fvcueu „ rejoice „
)id) bctiiiueu / " ^''"^^'' ""•
fid)uuter^alteu„ converse.
l)evrf d)eu
fid) fd)dmen
fid) avgern
10) urn is required by
©pieleu to play for.
fic^ (be)fiimmeTn „ care „
bitten „ ask „
fid) ftveiteu
fid) beiuerben
reign over,
be ashamed of.
be vexed at.
to dispute.
„ apply for.
11) tion is required hy
8^3redjen to speak of.
l^erfoniuien „ come from,
lebeu „ live on.
12) tjor {dat.
®ic^ fUrc^tcn to be afraid of.
jitteru „ tremble.
13) 5u is required by:
®e^en to go to (a person). | niad)eu to make
befreien to Hberate.
abn.>eid)en „ deviate from,
fid) udl)ren „ feed on.
is required by:
Ific^ t)uteu to beware of.
iDariieu ,, caution.
Eeading-lesson.
ebclmiitigc 5Jreunbfd)aft bc^ bcutft^cn ^aifcrS, ^orl T.
SllS^arlV., iueld)er ]))dtcr bcutfd)cv ^^viifer irurte, nac^ bem
!j:obe feine^ ®ro^\)atev^ , De§ 5li)uig^ Sert)iuaut), naii} 'iDtoDxto
teifte, urn ten t)em ilijnic;veid) (Spauicii ^jfi^ ju uel)meu, l)atte
ev eiueu frvin5l3fifd)cu ©rafen, t)e 33Dfju, in feiueiu ©efolge. 3)ie
iin3ciucl)ulid)c ®vo^ei t)iefeiJ iuugcu 2)taune3, feiue torvevlid)c @c*
luanDtijeit (dexterity), iDeld)e il)ii ^uui tvenlid)cn i)^eiter mad)te,
feiue ^utjortommeutc^ 'DicuftbcfUfjeul)cit^ unt) feiue iibvicien (other)
licbcueiuiivt^igeu Crigenfd)vifteu l)attcu il)u tern ^aifev fo lieb gemad)t,
fcajj ev immcv bei ii)m blcibcu muf^te.
Giuft l)atte ^arl cine ^rojje Oacjtpartie^ toevanfjaltet^ nub
fe|jte« einem CSber (boar) tier in ten ^ivilD l)iueiu niit fcld)ev $)i^e
nad), t>a^ er t)eu 2Bci3 uevfe^lte (lost), nut) uicmaut> il)m 5U folgen
ujacjtc, al^7 be 43cf ju. 5lbev biefev Wlann \)citu ba^ Uu^liicf, fid)
an eiucm i>ercjifteten 3)cld)c ju veviiniubeu, trcld)eu er nad) ta»
nialiv'^er^ ®eiuol)U^eit t>ev fpanifd)eu 3djV'v bei fid) trucj. Cobalt)
^axi btt'S ^Mut benievfte, iiH*ld)ei? feiu iiebliucj^ i^evlor (lost), fiafltc
er it)u evfd)vccfcu, eb bcv Crbcv il)u vcviinuitct l)abe. '^cx ®vaf
cvjdl)(tc, n^aiS il)ni bci-^c^uet ii>dve, uutJ fiic^te bei, bap er nicmant)
ali<7 fid) felbft il>ovn)iiv[e 5U niad)eni'> l)v-ibc.
On Prepositions. 353
!!Der ^omc^ !amite \e^x ii^ol)! bie tbtWdje SSivfungii fceS
(5ifte^, foBalt) e« tiiS 33(ut iikrgegangen tuave. Urn feiueii SieB*
ling s" vetteii, fcacl)te er nic^t an t^ie eigene Seben§gefal)v; er
fprang com ^ferbe, befal}! aud) bcm ©vafen, aBjufteigeit 12 xmt)
fid) ganj feineiu ^^illen 5U initem^evfeu 1^^. ^ev Oraf uiad^te jtrav
(Simt)ent)ungen 14 ; a'ber ber iicuig be^arrte^s ^uf bem cbein (Snt*
fd^luffe, feineni ^Teuub ba'S Sebcn ju retten , ober mit {"Eim ju
fterben. Sv vife bie ^lelbung i?Dn ber 2Bunbc iceg, fog ba§ S3Iut
311 ti3iebevl)o(ten iD?aIeui6 aii9 uub fpie e» n^eg. i)ie[e eut[d)(cffene
imb '^Dd)l)ev3ige §anb(iing belcbute ben !i)utglid}en ^rcunb mit ber
f^veube, feiuem t^rreuube ba§ Sebeu gerettet ju fjaben, o^ite nacb^
teilige i^olgcit fiir ba^ feinige.
2Ser foUte md)t biefe ival)re, aufc^^fevnbei^ ^reunbfd)aft eine§
ter mdd}tig[ten §evvfd)cri8 ber (Srbe be\i>uubern? !
1) uncommon tallnes, size. 2) obliging. 3) readiness in serv-
ice. 4) a hunting party. 5) to arrange. 6) itad;)cl^en to pursue.
7) but. 8) in use at that time. 9) favourite. 10) to reproach,
to blame. 11) effect. 12) to dismount. 13) submit. 14) objec-
tions. 15] to insist. 16) repeatedly. 17] self-sacrificing. 18; ruler,
monarch.
Questions.
5I(§ ber tontg i^erblnanb pon ©pauten ftavb, trer erbte
(inherited) ba§ ^ciligreid)?
25>arum reifte ^axl wadj 9J?abrib?
2Ber tijar in bem ©cfclge .^arl§ be§ i^iiiiftcn?
2Be(d}e (5igenfd)aften r^eid^neteii beii ©vafeu be 23of|u au??
2Ba§ tjefd^al) eiinnal bei einer gvc|]en -Sagb?
2Bat^ fitr ein Hugliid. l)attc be '33offu?
?n§ ber .^s^cnig bag S3lut benierfte, icaS fragte er?
^i^ .^arl erfu^r, toa^ bem ©rafen begeguet voax, iDa§ be=
fd)lc|^ er 3U tl)un?
2Ba§ tijat er alSbami?
2Bag befat)l er bem ©rafen ju f^uu?
^^cate be ^o[ju eS bulbeit?
5Iuf tuag bebavrte (or beftanb) ber fonig?
%n\ ti3eld)e 3Beife rettete iTarl bem ©rafen ba§ Seben?
SBa3 mug man in biefem ?^aGe beir)uubern?
Forty-ninth Lesson.
REMARKS ON THE PREPOSITIONS.
The use of the prepositions is of too various a
nature to allow of its being determined by definite rules.
Their departure from the original signification can only
be shown by examples, and by observing certain cx-
OTTO, German Conv.-Grammar. 23
354 Lesson 49.
pressions. We accordingly add the following supple-
mentary examples to Lesson 37 and L, 48, IV.
I. On the use of some German prepositions.
2(tu
This preposition signifies commonly at. Ex.:
■3emant) {(o^ft an t)ie S^l^iive somebody knocks at the door.
2(n translated otherwise than by at:
(Sr ftarb an ter (5f)oIeva he died of the cholera.
Sid) aulel)ncn an [ace.) to lean against.
2iUr c^Iaubcn an @Ott we believe in God.
51 u jeniant) [ace.) t)enfen to think o/* some one.
^tvcifcln an idat.) to doubt (o/).
(Sid) vad)en an [dat.) to take revenge on.
(S^ ift an mil" ju f^iclen it is my turn to play.
(Sin ^-Brief an mid) (or fiiv mid)) a letter /or me.
51 n ten Ufevn te^3 vRt>ein§ on the banks of the Rhino.
3fd) l)abe an i'^n gc[d)vicBcu I have written to him.
^ranffnrt am (an tcm) 93^iin Frankfort on the Main.
Xcil an einer ^o.&)t nel)men to take part in something.
%\\-i 93ianc\e( an @e(t) for want of money.
9?eid) ciw i^erftant) rich in wit (sense).
51 n t)em '^(rm cvgveifen to seize by the arm.
51 n t)cv §out) t>enuunfcen to wound in the hand.
Stttf (generally on or upon), as:
!Da-3 ^ud) lii\3t anf tern Xifd) the book lies on (or upon)
^■3 fcmmt anf ®ie an it depends upon you. [the table.
3luf transl. otherw. than by on or upon:
5tnf baig 2ant> gel)en to go m/o the country.
51 nf t)ie -peft goI)cn to go to the post-office.
51 nj tcv Oai^t) [ciu to be out hunting.
51 uf meinc iloften at my expense or cost.
51 nf bev ©tvaj^C in the street. | 51 uf Dfeifcu abroad.
©id) anf ben ifiJcg mad)cn to set out.
5lnf cttuaS [ace.) ad)t qcben to pay attention to something.
5(nf aKc l^m 1 , „ , ,
5lnf movc^en for to morrow.
5lnf fnvjc ^di for a short time.
5lnf bem ?anbe in the country. -
5luf 33cfel)l bc8 ^onii^^ by the king's command.
5lnf bicfe ilunfc in this manner.
5lnf luie lango? /or how long?
5Uif immcr, anf ett)ig /or ever.
On Prepositions. 355
5luf bet 2BeIt in the world. %\\\ ^CX 9tci[c — travelling.
®a§ ^ei^t aitf ^Deutfd) . . . that is in German.
(5§ ift breitievtel a\\\ [ed)§ UI)V it is a quarter /o six.
2lw§ (generally oe/^ o/" or from)^ as :
'2lu^ bem 3^"^"^^^* o^* ojf the room.
5lu§ u i^ranfveid) m France. | 3n $an8 m Paris.
■Sm i^riil}liug in spring. 1 3n 1)a3 SBafjer into the water.
3n ^er^tDeiflunc^ feln to be in despair.
Other meanings:
3*11 eincm ^ton ivith a tone,
3n t)ev ®d)ule fciu to be at school.
•Sni Svnft seriously, in earnest,
©id) in ten i^inger fd^nciten to cut one's finger.
3lm 23e3viff fein or fte^en to be on the point.
3n tie t^Iud}t jagen or fd)tagen to put to flight.
9^a(^ (generally after).
9^ad) ilkvlanf uon ^mei 9J?enaten after two months.
Other meanings:
^en 33ergeu over the high mountains.
®a§ ®orf Uegt iiber fcem ^(ufje.
The village lies over {above or beyond) the river.
Other meanings:
U6er ben ^(ug fe^eu to cross the river.
iBerfiigen ^ie itber meiucu Scutcl dispose of my purse.
(S§ t[t liber ein balbe§ 3al)r it is above six months.
§eute itber ad)t Xa^t this day week.
4)en ©ommer iiber during the summer.
©id) itber ettua^ {tjer)tDunt?ern to be astonished at.
®tcb freuen itber to rejoice at.
Sac^en iiber to laugh at.
®ag gel^t iiber meine ^rafte that is above (beyond) my strength.
Itltt (generally round or about).
Um§ l^euer l^erum about the fire-place.
Other meanings:
3(^ ttjiH ibn urn 9?at fragen I will consult him.
-3(^ bitte ©ie urn S^erjeil^img I beg your pardon.
Ultl @ett) fpieleu to play for money.
Um tuietoiel Ul^r? at what o'clock?
Um ein WcfX at one o'clock.
^^ ift um tl)n gefd)el)en it is over with him.
Sefiimmern ©ie fid) ntc^t um mic^ don't care for me.
Sr ^cii \\&f fel)r um mid) tjerfcieut gemad)t.
He has had a great deal of trouble with me.
liefer 2Befli^ ift um ^n^ei Stunben (3}Jei(en) tiirjer.
This road is shorter by two leagues (miles).
Utttcr (generally under),
Unter JtDoIf 3far)ren under twelve years.
Other meanings:
Unter ber ^tegterung tarl§ be^ ©vogen.
In the reign of Charlemagne.
2Ba^ fiir ein Unterfd)ieb unter (jnjifdjcn) ...
What difference between . . .
Unter biefer 33ebingung on that condition.
Unter ©eget geben to set sail.
Unter biefen 9}?dnncrn among these men.
®ie befcmmen e§ nid)t unter ^c\}n ^arf.
You will not get it for less than ten marcs.
Unter bem Zi\d} I)eriJor from under the table.
358 Lesson 49.
23ou (generally q/*, from).
§evfonimen ton eiuem to come from some one.
Sou = ijcu Scitcu jcmanbc^ from.
33om DJ^crgen bi« jum Hbeiit).
From morning till evening.
25cn $avi§ bi^ Soii'Don from Paris to London.
Other meanings:
iBom erften ^cbvuav an beginning with the 1st of February.
33du ganjem ipcvjeii with all my heart,
^iefe^ ^ud) ift »ou ®i5tV' cjefd^vieben njovben.
This book has been written by Goethe.
$Bor (generally before).
53or jC^U Ut^t before ten o'clock.
Other meanings:
33Dr brei Sagen three days ago.
©id) fiivd^ten t^ov to be afraid of.
(Sd)Yitt Dov ^d)ritt step by step.
(3id) l>Dr etwa^ biiteu to beware of.
53ov t)er Statt irct^neu to live outside the town.
^or iV*veut)e ti^elneu to weep with joy.
33dv 2lnfev lichen to be at anchor,
3u (generally to).
■3d) bec^ab mid) 5U il)m I went to him.
3u Sctte geljen to go to bed (to sleep).
Other meanings:
3u jencr ^di at that time.
T)ie Sicbe 511111 ^ruljui the love of glory.
3iU' 3^it ^^^ 5(uguftu§ at the time of Augustus.
^u »^aufe feiu to be at home.
^U ii>a(iCU in a carriage. | ^W ''^\^x\) on horseback.
3u (VUJ5 on foot. I 3" i)leldH"V '^di at the same time.
^U (Sl)Veu t)ev ^bu ic^in m honour of the queen.
3u Vaut) unl^ 511 2l>a[icv by land and by water.
3uni C"*Miict fortunately. | 3"^" ^eifpiel for example.
^\\ tie)om Wcbvaud) (^ii^crf) for this purpose.
^iim OV'fani^oneu inad)eu to make prisoner.
^ai 9JcaJ3 311 eiiiem illeite iicbmeu to take one's measure.
Beading Exercise. 147.
3d) t)cu!e oft an ^ic. 3d) fonute nieiue 9icifc iiiAt fcrtfc^cn
^\\f> ?D?aus-\el an ©clb. ®ic (^duffc fint» bcvcitv^ auj i)obcr Sec.
^ic ^Uv^'l, ^veld)c uu§ im ,Npcvbftc innlafjcii, fcl)vcn im ^Tiiblii^
juviic!. (Si? trav im Scmmcv i>cn lb 10. Oft tcv 5^cvv ju vN^aufc"^
On Prepositions. 359
9Mn, er t(^ au^gegangen. St fpeift l^eute in tev ©tobt. Qdj Bin
aiif offener (Stva^e befcl)imvfti irorten. ^Die Heine (Sd)ar ma^te
fid) 33at)n2 buvd) tie ^einte. SL^eln ©d^tuagev njivb fpciteften^ in
fcvci Siagen anlommen. SBd'^vent) biefe^ g^iia^ni ^oiiat^ l}at e§
nid)t ein einsifx'^ dJtai geve^jnet. 3)er §unt) fprang unter fceni
3^ifd) l)ert)cr. '^om (Svftcn Ih'S jnm Sel^ten. ©eit n^ann ift S^nlie
eine SBaife? ©ie ift c6 feit i^rer ^intl^eit. Infang^ !^atten bie
9?i3mev feine ^eftungen^; fie fel^ten il)v ganje^S ^ertrauen an} itjre
§eeve4, n^eldje fie ldng§ ter i^liiffe (egten, tvo fie t>on (Sntfevnnng &
^u Sntferuung 2^iivme eiTidjteten 6, urn tie ©oltaten bavin unter=
jnbringen'.
1) to insult. 2; way. 3) fortress. 4) army. 5) distance.
6) to erect. 7] to shelter.
148.
STIejanber bet ®voge ftatb in bet 33(ute be3 2eBen§. Sfop
tjlul)tc 5ut ^dt (Sclent. S?dv btei 2;;agen l^aBen \mx einen SBoIf
evlegti. -Sd) iuevbe tct ac^t SEagen nid)t aui^gel)en; bet %x]t I;at
e^ niit toetboten. -Sd) tretbe ©ie nad) ben 9}?atft^n-ei[en be^at^Ien.
f^mn^ bet (Stfte n.^utbe in 3taUen gefangen unb nad) ©panien
abgeiiif)tt. ®egen SIbenb \al} man am §immel eine fentige
.^ugel2. 9)Jein ^atet ift um jroei U^t abgeteift. 33 ei fetnet
Slbrcife \i3at tie ganje ^amilie betfammelt^. (5v icirb in ^>atig
toon feinem Stubet mit offenen 3Itmen empfangen iuevben. <5inb
(Bk in Sanb I)ievt}et ge!ommen? -3a, icb bin mit bet (Sifenbai)n
gefommen. 9J?an muj3 nid)t au§ (£igennu|^4 x^^^ @ute i^mi.
Steifen ©ie ju ^fctb obet ju 2Bagen? .^eine^ toon beiben; i(^
reife jn ©d)iffe. 3d) banb ein !Xafd)entud^ um feinen 2(vm. 3)ag
£inb lueinte toot gteuben^. §eibelbetg liegt an ben Ufetn^ be^
9Je(fat«.
1) killed. 2) glove. 3) assembled. 4) selfishness. 5] joy.
6) banks.
II. How to express some English prepositions.
above.
A'jove, when it expresses time or number, so as to
signify more than or lo?iger than, is rendered in GermJin
by itber or nicl;r al§. Ex.:
The fight lasted above four hours.
jDa§ @efed)t bauette liBet (or me^t al§) toiet ©tnnben.
It is above [over) twenty miles from here.
(S§ ift ilbet (mei)t al^) jtvanjig 2}?eilen toon l;iet.
about.
About: 1) in the sense of round is to be rendered
by nin; 2) in the signification: concerning, it is iibex*
360 Lesson 49.
with the accus. ; 3) in speaking of thin^^s which peo])le
carry about them, it is translated bei with the dat. Ex.:
1) All thronged about the prince.
5lfle trciiujten fid) iini ben ^^-iirften.
2) I will speak to him about this affair.
3;d) tueitfe iibev titefe ^tugclegeubeit mit tf)m fpted^eit.
We shall consider about this matter.
SEiv lucvtieii i'lbcr biefe ®ad)c uad}t)enfcn.
3) I have no money about me.
3d) ()a6e feiu @e(t! bei mir.
at.
At: 1) is most commonly rendered by bet or an with-
out or with an article ; 2) after nouns or verbs denoting
derision^ anger, surprise, joy^ sorrow etc. at is rendered
by liber with the accusatice\ 3) at\% translated bet, when,
in English, it precedes the words houae etc., either ex-
pressed or understood. Ex :
1) We were at dinner.
SSir ttjQYen beim (or am) 9)littaijef|eit (bei %\\^).
2) She laughed at him fie lad)te iibev i()U.
I am surprised at what you say.
3fd) bill evftamit iiber t)a§, ica^ (Sie fagen.
3) We were at your aunt's iDir luaveu bei \S\)Xtx Xante.
by-
By. 1) denoting the agent or cause is translated toon:
Mr. Bell is respected by everybody.
§err 33eU iDiit i)ou jctcrmauu cjoad)tet.
Troy was destroyed by the Greeks.
Xroia iinute dou ten (^ried)eu ^evftcvt.
2) In oaths and asseverations by is translated bet:
He swears by his honour er fd^ivoit bei fciner (Sl)Ye.
6) By.^ after the verbs to sell., to buy., to work etc., pre-
ceding a noun of iveight or meabure^ a day., week^ month
or year is rendered in German by nad; (either after
or before its noun), or by adding U>cife to the noun,
such as: ^>fuubii>ci(e, tagcn^cijc, iDcd^cmucijc 2C. Ex.:
I sell the tea by the pound.
>)d) t^evfaufe beit 1l;ee itad) tern ^fuub or tern 'ipjuiite uac^
or pfuiitii>el[e.
We work by the hour or by the day.
ilBiv arbcUeu itad) t)cv ^tuiite otjcr nac^ tern !Ja(je.
On Prepositions. 361
4) When preceding a numeral immediately followed
by an adjective of dimension by is rendered in German
by uiib. Ex.:
. This room is five meters long by three wide.
^icfeS 3^»i"^^^ ^P f"^U 2)?^tev (atic^ uiiD feret bveit.
5) J5«/, meaning ^by means of\ e. g. after to kill, to
wound etc., is translated bitrd). Ex.:
The officer was wounded by a musket ball.
^er Dft'ijter iDurte burd) eiuen ^(tnteufd^ug t?ev\iniu'Det.
Achilles was killed at the siege of Troy by an arrow.
5ld)itle^ t\)urt)e bet bev 33elagevunc5 t)on ^Xvoja t)urd) eineii
$feU getctet.
from.
1) jFrom and to^ used in the same sentence, are rendered
by toon — 3 it. Ex.:
He went from street to street, from town to town etc.
(Sr ging »oii (Strafe 511 (Stragc, toou "Stcibt ju ©ta'Dt k.
2) When two names of towns or villages are mentioned,
from — to is rendered by toon — nad;. Ex.:
From Paris to Rouen toon ^QXi^ nad) (or big) 9teueu.
3) From is rendered by toon, and to by bt§, when
speaking of extent or ti7ne. Ex.:
From Easter to Christmas toon Dftern Bi§ 2Bei^nad)t.
4) So also when extent of spape is indicated. Ex. :
It rained violently from Strasburg to Berlin.
(S^ veguete l)e|ti3 toon (Straf^lnirg bi§ Berlin.
It would be too far from here to Paris,
(g^ njare 5U ii^eit toon ^ler bt^ 'i^ariiS.
5) F?'om under is nnter . . . ^ertoor. Ex.:
From under the bed UUteV fceui ^ett l)CVtooir.
in.
1) To have a pain in is translated with a compound
word, such as: ^'o^pue:^, .^at^loel), ,3^^^^^^^ ^^^^ii '*^- Ex.:
I have constantly a pain in my head.
■Sd) )i:i^ht immev ^opfiDcl;.
2) hi after words denoting hurting, wounding etc. and
preceding a possessive adjective with any part of the
body, is to be rendered by an with the definite article.
362 * Lesson 49.
The child fell down and was hurt (injured) m his shoulder.*)
!Da3 ^iut) fiel unD toeiwuutete fi^ an ber (2d}u(ter.
3) In adverbial expressions of day-time, in is expressed
in German either by am or by the Genitive case with or
without the article. Ex. :
In the morning am 9[Rori3eii, morgen^ or t)e« ^?orgeui8.
In the evening am Slbent) or abeuD^ or te^ 5lbeut)i^.
on or upon.
1) 071 or upon is most generally aitf. Ex.:
He climbed upon {up) the tree ev fletterte auf ten S3aum.
2) Oti or upon after the verb to live is rendered toon:
The prisoner lives 07i bread and water.
"Der (Sefaiigeue lebt tjou Srot imt) Staffer.
3) After to play, on is not translated at all. Ex.:
You play on the violin, and I play on the piano.
©ie fpielen 33ioUuc imt) id} f^>iele Plainer.
4) The preposition on before the days of the week
and with dates is translated am. Ex.:
Come on Sunday fommeii ®ie am ©onutag.
On the twelfth of May am (or t)cu) jiDcIfteii 9J?ai.
over.
This preposition is commonly rendered in German by
iiber, but it must be .expressed by tooruber or toorbet
(seldom au^), when it denotes an action ended. Ex.:
As soon as the rain will be over.
©obalt) (ali^) t)ev ^)^\3eu t?DV iiber feiu luivt).
Is dinner over? ift t)a§ 9)tittagefjeu l^cviibev?
Church is over (out) t)ie 5!ivc^e ift aud.
with.
1) With or from are rendered by toot after the verbs
to atai've^ to die, to jjo^h etc. Ex.:
He died witA (from) cold er ftavb tJor ^alte.
Note. To die of is translated ftevbeil an. Ex.:
He died of his wounds cr ftavb an fcincn Sffiuubcn.
*) It would be indeed Rimi)lcr and better in English to say:
and hurt his shoulder; but you will often liear also: he was
hurt (injured, wounded) in his shoulder, arm, hand etc.
On Prepositions. 363
2) With must not be translated after the following
verbs: to meet with begegueu [Ace); to trust with ani)er*
traueu; to reproach with toormerfeu ; to agree with roo'^t ober
gut befommen. These German verbs govern the person
in the dative, and the object in the accusative without a
preposition. Ex. :
He trusted me with his son.
©r toevtvaute mir feluen ©ofjn an.
I reproached him with his ingratitude.
^6) luarf il)m fetne Unt)anf6arfeit t)or.
11 e m a r k.
l^repositions are placed in German before the interrogative
and relative pronouns which they govern; in English they
are sometimes placed after:
Whom do you speak ^o? mit Vijem fpved^eu ®ie?
What's that for? ^u iua^ ift t)a§?
The man whom you are interested for,
®er 9)iann, fiir Den \(i. 9) gegcniijartijj.
JO; %\u^xi\\, m.
304 Lesson 49.
150.
1 . My father was not above twenty-two years old, when
he was married'. My uncle's country-house 2 is very hand-
some, but it cost him above eighty thousand marcs. It is
above a year since my friend set off for 3 America. Rome
was built by Romulus. The poor man was driven ^ out of
his house by his creditors 5. I will get up to-morrow at six
o'clock. Were you at Mrs. D.'s ball last night? I will pay
you at the end of this month. I rejoice greatly at your good
luck 6. She always smiles'^ at everything which is said.
Where was your sister this morning? She was at her aunt's.
My box 8 is one foot and a half deep [hj\ two wide and four
long. Harold was wounded by an arrow y.
2. William the Second was killed by an arrow in the New-
forest. Charles was wounded in his arm and not in his leg.
I have very often [a] tooth -ache. [Upon'\ what instrument
does your sister play? She plays on the piano. Men (man)
do not live only on bread and meat , but on the grace ^^ of
God. That happened on the 12th [of] March. I am in the
habit 11 of taking a cup of coffee, as soon as (the) dinner is
over. When you meet with a poor man, anever i reproach shim
[with] his poverty 12. France extends i^ from the Vosgesi* to
(bi3 Jit) the Atlantic Ocean. What does he complain i^ of'}
1) to be married = fid; t>ev^eirateii. 2) ?anbbau8. 3) itat^.
4) treifecn. 5) ©laubigcr. 6) (Slitd. 7) Icic^eht. 8) bie ^Hfte. W, bcr
^l^fctl. 10) bie ©uabe. 11) to be in the habit gen)0^iit feiii or ppfflf"
12) SIrmut. 13) fid) erftreden. 14) ben !i8ogejcn. 15) flagcn iibev
[Ace.) or fid^ behagen.
Eeading- lesson.
Stt!a§ SIranorf),
^\\\^^ ^vanad^ teat rtid)t uuv tev t^vij^te 2Ra(ev feiner ^i\\r
fonbern aud) ein ^JJauu toon cfclem ^^t\\t\\ nnt) gvo^em 33erftant.
Sd)on in feiner Sucjent) ttoent)cte ev feine 3'-'it V^)'^ i^wt an , unt>
t)al)er fam e«, baf^ er toiel fiiil)er ein nii^Ud)ev 4jienfd) njnrf e al*
ant)re. 3fm neunjet^nten Oal)ve foined :Jl(tev^3 levntei il;n t?ev
.'^'nrfiivft (Elector) toon ©ad)fcn, 3ot)ann j^vietrid), al§ einen cjc*
fdncften2 Oiinglinc^ fenneni unb nal)ni il)n anf feiner 9ieife \\\^
®e(obte Sanb^^ mit fid). ''^X(x^) feiner 9iiicffcl)r in^^ ^aterlant> be»
rief er it)n an feinen §of nac^ ^Bittenbercj nnt) niad)te il)n tafelbft
jum 23iiri]ernieifter-».
(Sin ein^^ii^er '^\X(x, (trait) feiner fd}onen Seete ift l)inreid)ent)'\
feinen C£l)aratter ui 'fd)i(tevn". %{^ fein §err, ter nni^liicflid)e
.•i^nrfUrft 3ol)ann i^-rietrid), bei 3)iiU)lberc^ in Sad)fen in tie @c*
fangenfd)aft7 i^aifer ^arli< V. (t)Cv5 i^iinften) cjeraten n>ar, erinnerte
1) feniten tcrncu to become acquainted with, to know. 2) clever.
3) Holy Land. 4) mayor (see p. 345, 3). 5) sufticient 0) to
describe, paint. 7) to full into captivity.
Lesson 49. 365
fid) t)er f aifer, bag ^vanad) U)n al« (when a) ^nalje gemalt I;atte,
unt) UeJ3 biefen et)leii 9}caler in feiu Sagev !ommen.
„2Bie alt w^ax id) tama(§ (then), aU bu mid) malteft?" fragte
bet ^ai[ct;. — „(Suve 2Jtajeftat," antttjortete ^vauad), „\vcix adjl
^ai}xc alt. (S§ gclctug nitt uid)t c'^er^, (Sure 9Jiajeftat ftillfil^en 5U
ma^eit, al§ bi^s 3i^v ijofmeifter^ toerfd)iebene SBaffeu an tie ^anD
I)dngen Ueg. 2Bdl)vent) ©le biefe hiegerifc^en S^nftrumente niit un=
t)evti)anbtcn. (fixed, starring) 5lugen betrad)teten, l)atte id) 3eit, Qi}X
23ilt) 5U cnttueifenio." — „^itte (ask) iiv eine ©uabe con niir
aug, SJtalev!" fagte ber Slaifer.
^emiitig fiet i^m £'vanac^ ju i^iigen unt) Bat, nut ^^^vcinen
in ben 3Iugen, nid)t um etne ©umme ®etb obcr um einen Sitel,
fonbetn um bie gveiljeit feine^ ^urfiivften. ®ev SDionard) !am in
bie gviJBte ^evlegen^elt ; f ein §er5 wax buvd) biefen gered)ten SBunfd)
eine^ treuen Untevt^anen n fel)r getroffen; unb bod) glaubte er,
ben red)tfd)affenen ^vanad) fur^ er[tei2 abtDcifeni^ ju miiffen. n'Du
bift eiu bvaber SJfann," fagte er ^u it)m; „aber e§ njare uiir lieber
(preferred) getDefen, tuenn bu um etiua^ anbre^ gebeten ^atteft."
i\i^ nad) einiger ^dt ber ^urfiirft [eine ^rei^eit erlangte, lie^ er
biefen f einen treuen Wiener nie i?on feiner©eite; er muf^te in fei=
nem ©d)Iofje njol)nen unb felbft bei el)renboUen i^ ©elegen^eiten
neben i^m im SBagen fil^en.
8) itic^t el)er aU big = not before. 9) the governor, tutor.
10) to sketch, draw, llj subject. 12) for the present. 13) to
refuse. 14) ceremonial.
Questions.
2Bag iijar ?u!a§ ^ranad)?
2Bie fam e^, bai3 er friil)er at§ anbre ein nu^Ud)er ?!}?enfd)
2Bann lernte i^n ber ^urfiirft toon (2ad)fen fennen? [wurbe"^
2Bie ^ieB ber turfurft?
2Bo'f)in naljm er i'^n mit fic^?
2Sa§ t^at er nad) feiner 9tiid!el)r?
2BeId)er fd)one (S^aralterjua tijirb toon il)m erja^It?
SSelc^e i^rage rid)tete ber H'aifer an ben 9)?aler?
2Bag antttoortete il)m ^ranad)? '
2Beld)e ®nabe bat fid) ber 9JJaIer toon bem ^aifer aix^"^
©ettodtirte ibm ber ^aifer feine 33ltte?
2Ba^ fagte er ju i^m?
2Sie el)rte ber ilurfiirft ben 9JiaIer, nac^bem er feine ^rei^cit
itoieber eriangt l)atte?
3G0
Fiftieth Lesson.
On Construction (SBortfoIgc)*
German construction differs very much from English,
and requires great attention. Every trifling deviation
cannot he explained, but the principal rules must be
stated here.
I. On the principal or simple sentence.
A. The common construction.
As in other languages, the essential components of
a principal sentence are the subject and predicate or terb :
®ag tint) fd^laft. | 3)a§ tiuD ift fvan!.
Further there are the objects or governments, and the ad-
verbial e7ilargements. The object is twofold, viz. the direct
one i. e. the Accusative, Dative or Genitive, and the in-
direct (with prepositions). The adverbial enlargement is of
different kinds, viz.: of time, of place, of manner etc, Ex.:
2)a^ tint) ift fran! getucj'en. ] ®er tiiabe fd)ld9t ten §unt.
^er S3ote bvad)te meinem 3Sater eineu 33riet.
jDer ?^vemfce tt?Dl)ut in einem ©aff^of (hotel).
^ev ^vembe veifte geftern iiad) -PavU^.
^ev ©dvtncr [(^icftc mir ^eute bie erften 53(umen au^ meinem
%\\\ 9tant)e tje^'33ad)e^ ftel;t ein fleine^ §au«. [®arten.
Rules.
\) In the regular order, the subject, which may be a
substantive or a pronoun, begins a sentence and there-
fore stands in the^Vs^ place, then the -verb (predicate)
or its substitute (the auxiliary) follows in the second,
and the object in the third place. Ex.-
12 • :t
3)ev tnatjc fnd)te [einen ^ling.
2) The adverbial of place comes last of all. If the
sentence contains also an adverbial of time, this must
precede the accusative (object). Ex.:
!Der ^nabe fud)te geftern feinen Skiing iibevaU.
3) With compound tenses the complement of the aux-
iliary, be it a Participle or an lnjinilii:e, comes after the
predicate, object and adverb, generally in the last place
of the sentence. Ex. :
3d) bin lange fvauf gcttjefen.
Ou Oonstrliction. 3G7
T)cx ^naU ^at ben §unb auf ben ^opf c;efd)lagen.
IDer 35ater mrt) in etuigeu 2:agen con $avi§ ^uriirff ommen.
4) When there are hco ohjecfs in a sentence, generally
that of the person precedes the thing. Ex. :
3)er ^e^ter^t bem ©d)ulev [Dat.) ein 33ud) [Ace.) gelie^en.
The master has lent the pupil a book.
©ie ^beu ben armen ?0?ann [Ace.) feinem ©d}tc!fa(e (Z)a/^.)
They have left the poor man to his fate. [ubevlafjeu.
5) When the two cases are hoth pe7^sons, the accusa-
tive generally precedes the dative. Ex.:
3c^ ^abe 3t)ren ©o'^n bem giirften empfo!)Ieu.
I have recommended your son to the prince.
6) When one of the two objects is expressed by a
personal pronoun, it must precede the noun. Ex. :
§ert ^eter 'i^at nttr ein ®efd)enf gemad)t.
Mr. Peter has made me a present.
Sr ^at bit (3fl;nen, Itjm, i^v k.) eineu guten 9tat gecjeBen.
He has given you (him, her etc.) good advice.
§aben ©te eg Oljrem ^veunbe ev5d()(t?
Have you told (it) your friend?
3)er 33rief6ote I)at un^ (3^nen, il^nen) etnen33rtef geBradjt.
The postman brought us (you, them) a letter.
7) When both objects are personal pronouns, the smal-
lest comes first; when both of them are monosyllabic,
the accusative comes first:
(Sr l^at fie (or e«) i^nen (enc^, 3fl)nen) gejeigt.
He has shown it to them (to you).
■3d} !ann mtc^-Janev (t^ver^^ nid)t evtnncrn.
I cannot remember KirrTXGer) .
■3d) Ijahc fie it)m (not i^m fie) gc^eigt.
I have shown them to him.
Sr fjat fid) [Ace] mir toorgefteUt. (See 5.)
He has introduced himself to me.
Note. 9Rir and bit, however, may occur indifferently be-
fore or after the accusatives eS, i^n, fie.
Robert '^at e^ miv (or mir e§ or mir it)u) gelie'^en.
Robert has lent it to me.
8) The adverbial expressions of time, viz.: true ad-
verbs as well as substantives with prepositions denoting
a time, generally precede the object (ufiless it is a pro-
noun without a preposition, see 9), and take the third
place, immediately after the predicate or auxiliary:
368 Lesson 50.
3d) ^at^e gcftevu eincii 33vicf an i^n (see 14) gefdniebcu.
SDU'in 53vutev tarn t)icfcu ^Diorc^en 'ocn §ambuYc\ luxiid.
iev ©tmcval unit) cili(^ft ciiicii ^vicf an ten ^iivfteu fenlJeii.
3d) l)aU n en I id) nieinen ^-reunb 51. 3efcl)en.
2Biv iDcvt^en in t>rci 2:agen nad) §ambuvg reifen.
5)err SD^iiUev n^i^•t) in eiiler (5tunt?e t)a§ ^^acEet crl^alten.
9) Adverbs of time cannot precede personal pronouns
without a prepo8itio7i. These always come first. Ex.:
3d) l^abc il)n (or fie) ^ente nid)t c^e[c[)en.
(5r h)irb un^ (end), ®ie) m org en be|ud)en.
10) Adverbs of manner follow the direct object (ace):
a^ §au8 auf aUcn (Seiten umflcllt.
The enemies have surrounded the house on all sides.
1 2) But when the verb is in the Present or Imperfect,
such adverbs must come last:
jDcr 9)?ann fnd)te fein ^\\\\> iibevall.
SSir evfiillten unfve ■pflid)t mit ^ vent? en.
jDie '{^-cintJe umftetlteu t)a^ §au^ auf alien ®eiten.
Note. Adverbs never precede the verb standing in the
Present or Imperfect, as: I ahvays say id) [age tmmev.
13) Adverbs oi place and manyier (not time] are there-
fore generally placed after the negation nid;t. Ex.:
3)ev ^onig ift nid)t l)iev gciv>e|cn.
S)ev .^enig ift l)cute nid)t l)icv getrcfen.
jDev 23etc l)v'it nid)t lang genng gcivavtct.
^a<8 ®d)iff ift nid)t fd)nell gcfvibven (or gefegelt).
3t)v 33vict ift nid)t fd)on gcfd)vicben.
14) Pronouns with a preposition ybZ/oer the advi rb and
the object:
3d) \^^\>t geftevn biefe^ 33nd) bci 3l)ncn gcfel)en.
15) Of two adverbial exi)ressions of lime the true adverb
precedes the other formed with a substantive:
3d) iverbe nievgen nm 5el)n Ul)v abveifcn.
^ovv 51. gcl)t immcv tsevj '^Ibent^v^ fva^ievcn.
On Construction. 369
16) The negation ntd;t always /b//ow5 the direct object
(Accus.). Ex.:
■3d) fiut)e meiii j^ebermeffer ntd)t.
^d) tamx mein ^ei^evmefjer iiid)t ftut?en.
•3c^ :^abe mein §et)evme|jer utd)t gctmitjen.
i^vieDnd) lernte feiue ^^iluf^abe nid)t gut.
jDer iDZinifter'l^at t)te 3Dej.nitation nod) iud)t empfaugen.
The minister has not yet received the deputation.
Note, In questions however iii d) t sometiines precedes the
object. We say:
§abeit @tc ba3 ^iid^ itic^t gelefcn? but
|)aBc td) nid)t ba§ 9?ec^t, fo ju ^aiibcln?
17) But when the object is preceded by a preposition,
which is called indirect object, the negation itic^t goes
before it. Ex. :
2Bir fpred)en nic^t con t)iefem 33uc^.
' ©^iele ntc^t mit l^em 9}ieffer. | ®e^en ©te nid)t tirbaS §aib3.
2Ran ^at feen 3)ieb nt^t im SI'ellev gcfuuieu.
Reading-lesson,
^cr cble Offtgtcr*
3^n bem lel^teu ^riege, ben lyranfreid) gegen ©panien fii^rte,
l^atten t)te;t)eutfd)en §lIfotvuppen ein ®tdt)tci)en an ben Ufern be5
fpanifd)en ^luffe^ Stajo befe^t, aber nur ehie fd)iuad)e ^efci^nng
(garrison) toon 22 9J?ann bavin gclaffen. 5)ie[e iDUvben auf 3^=
rebeni f^anifd)er ©olbaten i)on ben (SintDol)nern evniDrbet. 9^ur
einer entfam2 unb brad)te bie 9'^ad)rid)t tjon ber blutigen Xt^at in
ba^ ftan5ofif4)e Sager. §ier Jorbevte man , be^ S3ei[^ie(3 ivegen,
Mutige Sftad)e3. ©oglcid) er^ielt ber babifd)e §au^tmann §. \it\\
^efel)l, mit einer 5l6tei(ung-i feiner SlJvn^^en bie ©tabt jn urn*
tingen, nieberjnbrennen unb in einen ©tein^ufen ju ijermanbeln^;
bie Seti3oI)nev foUten einge[d)Ic[fen (shut in) blelbmi unb in un-
t^tigev ^er5tt)eifhing6 i^re §abe7 con ben ^(ammcn Der5ef)ren
fet)en. 53on biefer SJJaferegel evtuarteteber fran5i)[ifd)e ©eneral ben
beften (Srfolg. ®enn 2)eutfd)e iuaten au^gefc^'idt, ben fd)mal)lid)ften
%ti^ i^rer 6riiber ju rad)en, unb il)v lufitt)x-er u^at im gan^^en
|)eer al§ einer ber tapferften, entfd)Io[fenften8 unb mutigftcn £)f=
lijiere befannt.
^Iber cr tear noc^ mefir al^ ba§. ©ein ebleS, menfd)enfreurib*
Iid)e!g §er5 icurbe mit ©raufen^ erfiittt, alg er ben 3Iuftragio tjcr^
iTaI)m. ®D^ fonnte unb njoUte er it)n ntd)t abkl)nenii. ^a^
nat)e fd)red(id)e (Sd)id[al fo t)teler ungtiic!(id)er 9)lenfd)cn, bie an
bem SD^orbe grc^tenteits un[d)urDig ii^aren, ergreift feine eble ©eclc'.
(Bd)on fiet)t er im ©eifte bie ©tabt aufIoberni2, f)i3rt ba§ tlage^
gefd)ret beu ^rauen, bag 3ammergefd)reli3 ber tinber unb ©reife,
1) persuasion. 2) to escape. 3) vengeance. 4j company. —
6) to turn. 6) despair. 7) goods. 8) resolute. 9) horror. 10) order.
11) to decline, to refuse. 12) to blaze up. 13) lamentation.
OTTO, German Conv.-Grammar. 24
370 Lesson 50.
tag dioijcin^* fcer (Sterbcnten; uub entworfeni-^ ift fc^on fcin
^ian, feft fern Gntf d)(ug. ^od)^^ in fpater 9?ac{)t gicBt ex fcinen
^euten ben S3efcI)I jum ^lufbvu^i^. x>er SBeg fii^rtei^ an cinem
^(ofter tooriiber, bag untt>eit tev befcrcljten (Stabt lag. 3)a« tinge
unt? menfc^enfreunbltd;e 33ene^men fceS ^orftc^erSJ-' unb aUer 23c*
tt)o^ner befjelben gegen i^rennb nnb i^cinb ifatte il^nen ben (S(^u|j
unb bie Siebe belber S^eile evtuorben nnb biefe^ tv>al)re ©ottess^au^
jnt ilfretftatte2o fur jeben i^Iuc^tigen gemac^t. ®ev §anptmann §.
»ertangt Sinlag nnb eine Untevrebnng^i mit bent *i]Briov. 33eibe3
njnrbe i!)m gen)at)rt (granted). ®er iBertrautefte 22 feiner ?ente
beglettete if)n. {To be continued.)
14) the groans of the dying. 15) projected. 16) in the very
night. 17) to set out. 18) tooriiberfu^rcn to pass. 19j prior. —
20) asylum. 21) interview. 22j trusty, confident.
duestions.
2Ber ^tte tm Ic^tcn fpani[d)cn triege ein @tabt(^en befetjt?
SBag ereigncte fid) bamal^?
2luf njeffen 3"^'^^^" S^f^)^^ ^ic blutige X^at?
SS^urben ^lUe getotet?
2Bie erfnl)r man bie ^a^tid)t im fvan3b[ifd)en Sager?
2Ba§ tjerlangte man I)ier?
^e(d)en 33efel)t evl)telt bev babi[d)e §an^tmann §.?
25?arnm terfpvad) [id) bev fran3e[ifd)e®enevatbenbefien(SvfoIg?
S3a§ fiir ein 3)iann n)av jencr §au^Hmann?
2Ba^ fat) er fd)on tm ©elfte?
2Ba§ i)ortc er im ©eifte'^
3Bot)in fiil)Yte it)n fein 2Beg?
3Bie fatten fid) bie S3ovfte^er nnb bie ^ewoljner jeneS 5llcflcr«
tmmcr benommen ?
2Ba8 beget)vte bafelbft ber ^auptmann?
2Bcr begleitete it)n'^
B. On the Inversion.
The foregoing rules refer to the regular and com-
mon construction. This regular arrangement of words,
however, may be frequently i?ive7'ted, by removing one
of the parts of speech from its usual place to the be-
ginning of the sentence.
1) The inversion of the subject and predicate [verb) ap-
pears as in English:
a) In interrogative and exclamatory sentences:
©lanben ®ie biefem 3LRanne? do you believe'this man?
§at bcr 'ipoUseibicner ben T^ieb gcfangen?
Has the constable caught the thief?
On Construction. 371
(SoIIte fcer SQ?aitn e§ gel^ort t)aBeu?
Should the man have heard it?
SSarum ^at t)a8 tob gen^eint? why did the child cry?
b) In imperative sentences, where however in the singular
the pronoun- subject is seldom expressed:
i^ange (bu) an 511 Icfen begin (thou) to read.
^efen ®te btefe ®eite gan^ laut read this page quite loud.
c) In conditional sentences, when the conjunction tijenn {{/)
is omitted, as in English:
^atte t{^ eg geftetn 3et^3Ut^t (instead of h)enn t(^ eg k.).
Had I known it yesterday.
SBcive i(^ se'^n ■3at)ve alter were I ten years older.
d) After all adverbs and adverbial cor>j\mctions (see p. 246):
©eftern tuav id) im 2;^eater yesterday I was at the theatre,
.^aum [)atte id) fca§ 3)Jeffev in bie §ant) gcnommcn.
Scarcely had I taken the knife in my hand.
■Snbeffen njar ber SBinter ^erangefommcu.
Meanwhile winter had drawn near.
2) The inversion of the object takes place, when more
stress is laid upon it. One consequence of this change is,
that the subject assumes its place after the verb. The
regular sentence: 3rf) iie^me btefeu 33orfrf)(ag gcnie an, ap-
pears inverted in the following shape:
©tefen 35orf(^tag ne^mc id) gerne an.
This proposal I accept willingly.
®en SBcutel ^t er gefnnben, aBer ntd)t baS ®elb.
The purse he has found, but not the money.
!3)iefeg SO^anneS fann id) nnc^ butd)au§ nii^t erinnern.
This man I cannot remember at all.
^l\6)i ^^eic^tum, nnr 3"^^ebenl)eit n)itn[(^e t(^ -G^^nen.
Not riches, only contentment I wish you.
3) Personal pronouns, especially monosyllables, often
precede the subject, when the latter is of two or more
syllables or accompanied by an adjective :
^a i^n (eg) niemanb gcfef)en ^tte (for ntenianb i^n or eg).
, Senn 3fl^nen etn fd)Ied)ter 9^at gegeben tcivb. —
4) The inversion of the adverbial expressions. Ad-
verbial expressions of all kinds, especially those of time,
very frequently begin the sentence, when much stress
is to be laid on them. Here, too, the verb goes before
the subject. Ex.:
24*
372 Lesson 50.
jDiefen SJiorgen ghig §)eir ©riiii an mcinem §aufe Corbet.
This morning Mr. Green passed my house.
^reujiblid) triicfte fie mir tie §ant>.
In a friendly manner, she shook my hand.
lib era n fintet man t)ie ©puren ber SSet^^eit ®otte^.
Everywhere man finds the traces of the wisdom of God.
Unter bem gro^en ©tetne lag eine (Sd)tange.
Under the large stone, [there] lay a snake.
5) According to the stress laid upon the words, the
following and similar sentences may be expressed in
various ways :
W\x fbnnen biefe^ 33ud) in Sonbon nid)t befcmmen.
®iefe^ 33 ud) Bnnen xo\x in Sonbon nidjt befommen.
■3n Sonbon fbnnen tuir bicfeig 33ud} nidjt befommen.
9J?ein ^reunb l^at geftern nad) langem §avven ben evfel^ntca
23vief ton feinem 53ater er^alten.
After waiting long, my friend received yesterday the
v/ished for letter from his father.
@eftetn ^at mein ^reunb nad) langem §arvcn ben evfe^ntcn
^rief t)on feinem Skater erl)alten.
5^ad) langem §arren f)at gcftevn mein ^rennb ben erfe^nten
33nef con feinem ^ater ev()alten.
jDen evfel)nten Srief ton feinem 3>vtter ^at mein ^eunb
geftern nac^ langem §airen evl^alten.
II. Accessory sentences.
1) An accessory sentence is a completing addition to one
member of the principal sentence in form of a clause,*)
and always begins either with a relative pronoun or a
relative adverb. The order of the subject, object and
adverbial undergoes no change in accessory sentences;
only the verb (predicate) leaves its usual place for the end
of the sentence. When compound, the participle or in-
finitive precedes the auxiliary. Ex. :
!Dev 2Bein, tDe(d)cn id) ton 31)nen faufte, ift nici^t gut.
The wine which I bought of you, is not good.
^ai8 23ud), ba8 id) tevloven l)atte, ift njieber gefunben.
The book I had lost, has been found again.
*) For instance, in the sentence: I found a bottle containing
poisoti, the two latter words containing poison are a completing:
addition to bottle. If you give them tlie form of a clause = trhich
contained poison ircl^c ($ijt fiit^iclt, you have an accessory sentence.
On Construction. 373
Tier (Stocf, tDomit id) U)n fc^Iug, ift 5evbroc{)en.
The stick with which I struck him, is broken.
^d) fragte t^n, tDarum ev fo ernft ttjdre.
I asked him why he was so serious.
2) When there are two Infinitives (one Infinitive for
the Participle), the auxiliary i^abeu precedes the two:
©a^ S^afdjeutud), ti^eldje^ id) !^abe nja[d)en lafjcn.
^er Sad), in k>eld)em (tuo) ic^ i^u f>atte bat>en fet)en.
9^Jad)t5eiu tc^ il)n l^atte rufen l^oren.
^uf^a^e. 151.
London is a very large town. I have bought a beautiful
garden for my children. We have had clear days but dark
nights. We cannot see all the numberless (5at)llo[en) stars.
Henry was to-day more industrious than yesterday; he will
be the most industrious to-morrow. They went away from
here at four o'clock. He often visited us formerly. They
entered! (in) the wood and 2 soon 1 perceived the habitations 2
of men. I do not know the man whom you are speaking of.
The first battle (which) they fought 3 was with the Saracens'*.
I did not know who it was. To be sure (OetDl^), I have told
it (to) him. I am infinitely obliged ^ [to] you. I was wander-
ings through the street with a heavy heart. Finally ((SntUd))
we discovered' the truth. I have not been anywhere (no-
where) . — Prosperity ^ gains friends, and adversity tries (V^'uf t)
them. Without a friend the world is but (nui) a wilderness *«>. —
What does this man teach your children? He teaches them
[to] read and write. The tempest 10 increased n, and the ships
lost sight of each other (tcvloreii . . . au3 bcm ©efic^t).
1) to enter eintretcn. 2) SSo^uuiig. 3) Ueferit. 4) ®arajetten.
5) itnenbUc^ cerSimbcti. 6) tijattDern. 7) etttbedeti. 8) bas ®lild.
9] SBilbniS, f. 10) ber ®turm. 11) to increase ju'nc^mcit.
Eeading- lesson,
^cr cbic Offtstcr* (gortfctjung.)
?Zacb einer ^aibcn ©tuntje fel)rte et ju t)cn ©einigen juviirf,
aber allein; — feiu 33eg{eiteri ift unbemevft unb toermummt^ Durc^
eiue anbre Xf)iire ^inau^^ge[d)lii^ft3 unt) ^at bait) auf einem ita^even
UBege Die jum S^cvberbeu beftimmte^ ©tabt etreic^t, iwelc^er {Dat.)
er niit einem Svlefe be^ '^riov^ at« ein §immeI«botc erfd)eint.
^ie aSeiber unb jlinber, hanfe 9J?anner uiib ©reife fmb eingelaben,
fid) unb i^ie !^abc auf bem ndd)ften SSege nac^ bem ^lofter 511
fliid)teii. i)cr 3^3^ bcgiiuit, burd) ben SJJonbfc^ein begiinftigt,
^Utiittet, i^re (Sduglinge^ an ber 23iuft ober auf bem 9tiicfen, ct*
offnen Den 3^9 ; baufbare ®Dl)ne tragen bie STiitttcr. ©0 gelangen
1) companion. 2) disguised. 3) slipped out. 4) destined, see
p. 342, V. 5; procession, march. 6) baby.
374 Lesson 51).
(reach) fie an Da^ ^(cfter, tuo t)er ^rior fie mit feinen SJ^iJncfcen
gaftfieunt?licl)7 aufuimmt. 2Bal)icut)tefieu ^at t)er iDacfcre §au^t»
maun feinc t'eute auf elncm auteiu ^>ev]e c^ev^en tie (£tat»t gefiif)rt.
(Sr Idfjt^ fie umriugen, 'Dod) fo, bap jenev Seg jum i^iofter offen
blieb; er befiel^It t)eu juiucfgebliebeueu ^Didnnevn , au^ev[)alb ter
(3tai?t Stvol) unt) §0(5 auf^utiii-meu^. (£^ gefd^iel^t ^t)^ unt) balt>
loljeru auf allcu ©eiteu IjeUe, l)ot)c ^^-lanimeu in ter iD^orgenvote
auf; aber Ijiuter tern ^-euer rul^ten ficl)er bie terfdjontcn (spared)
§dufev uub $utten uuD — an ^^liiuDevunc] t\)ivi? uicbt 3et»ad)t.
^Jiad) 5tDetftiint)igem 33iaut)e njivb eiu Silboteii an Den (General
gefd)idt, urn ^Jiad)laJ3i2 ju eibitten. 3)iefer fef)rte uiit fcem 33efel)le
juriirf, ta[? Die ^tai^t bi^ SOrittag brenneu uiiifjeis. (go^leid) trirD
Der iibvige 2>ovvati^ jjou §el5 uub ©tro^ jur Uutevl)alf uuv] i^
De^ ^euev^ l^erbcic^efdjafft uuD X)a>$ ©ebdlfeie eiuiger i3ffentlid>en
§dufer, Die man, um Dod) ettca^ 5U jevftcren, nieDevgerifjeui^
batte, U}iiD ju gleid)em 3^^'cfi'' ^evbvaud)t. (SuDlid) fdjidgt Die
jtDiJlfte ^tunDe uuD giebt DaS B^ifi)^'!^ jum ^b^ugei^^^, Der eiuem
wa^veu ^viumpl^suge gleid)t; Deun uutev Den XaufenDen ift nidjt
Stuer, Der uld)t j^'veuDeutl^rdneu u?eint. 33eg(eitet i?on Den mdnn-
lid)cn 53etDDl)ueru Der (StaDt, n>eld)e Den ScIDateu Die ®etrel)re
UUD ^evuifteriy tragen, fie mit il}reu ^auffaguu^en unD (Secjen3=
ti>iiufd)eu2o uberfd)iitteu2i, cjelaiigt Der bunte^^ ipaufe 5um Sllcjter.
3)ie ueu Dem forueu ^^euer evfdu'edteu ©reife, ^eibcr unD ^inDer
eileu Deu il^cmnieuDeu mit dugftlid)eu ^vageu eutc^egen. 5Iber balD
UjirD Dov furd)tevlid}e 3^^«^it*-'l^^ 51^^* fret)lid)eu2-i ©eiuipeit, al§ fie
evfui)reu2o, 'Daj^ Der eDle ^^auptmauu uid)t nur i^r !i?eben, fouDern
and) ibre §du[er uuD ©liter gerettet hahc. Gie fallen tcr il)m
uieoev, fie fiifjeu it)m Die §duDe; er faun fid) Der leb^afteften
5i[nBevuugeu26 X)i^ •DaufeiS faum erti3el)ren27.
7) hospitably. 8; causes, see p. 2*J5, 5. — 9; to heap or pile
up. lU) they do so. 11; courier. 12 pardon. 13) see p. 315,
1} 3 and p. 317, § 7. — 14' store. 15) to support. 16) timber.
17) pull down, demolish. IS) departure. 19) knapsack. 20) bless-
in«j;s 21) load. 22) the mingled troop. 23) doubt. 24) joyful.
25j learn. 26j manifestations. 27) to keep off.
Questions.
SSBann fel^rte Der §auvtmauu ^uriicf?
^a$ ttjurDe au^ f eiuem i^egleiter?
2l^eld)e (SiuIaDung eutljielt Dai^ Sdjreiben De8 ^rion^?
^ie toax Der 3"^ tier ^^liid)tliuge befd)affeu?
ii>ie lieO ^'^^ ^auptmauu Die beDrcljte ^taDt uuirlugcn?
i^ou ujad Id^t cv eiu ^-euer aumad^eu?
iOrauuteu Die 4>dufer'^
%i\ xoai tvirD uid)t gcDad>t?
aiHiv^ gefd)iel;t wad) jiiH'iftiiuDi^em S3ranDe?
^Bc(d)e ^2lut\uort brad^te Der (Silbote?
'fi3av5 i3efd}iel;t uuu jeruer"^
Compound sentences. 375
3ll§ t)ie ®o(t)aten abjogen, tr)a§ f^aten t)ie SJicinner?
2Ba§ tfiaten t)te @reife uut) grauen, al^ man Beim £{ofter an*
2Ba« l^atte it;nen ber eble §au))tmaun getettet? [langte?
{To be continued.)
Fifty-first Lesson.
On the compound sentence.
After having explained the simple sentence with its
components and enlargements, we proceed to a short
exposition of the compound sentence.
The compound sentence is formed:
I. hy co-ordination,
II. by subordination.
I. Co-ordinate compound sentences.
(@a^i>erbiTtbimgen.)
There are three ways of co-ordinating sentences:
a) They can be placed simply beside each other without
any connection. Ex.:
^ie 9?o[fe tuie^erten, eS fi^mettevten jtrom^eten;
5)ie ^al)nen [latterten, bie ^"^-a^rt tt)art) angetreten.
5>d) erja^lte i^m a(Ie^3; er iDuf^te nod) ntd}t3 ballon.
@ei)en ©ie rec^t^, id) n^erbe lin!^ gel)en.
h) They are connected by a demonstrative pronoun :
^arl ber ©roge unb ^^apoleon n^aren ^tuei mdd)tige H'rieger;
jener tjerBanb (joined) bte gro^te ^ei^l)ett mit bev
gtogten ^Japferfeit; btefer etoBerte fa]t ganj ^uropa.
!l)a« ©liid unb bte 2^ugenb finb nid)t tnmter »erbunben; bieS
njirb burc^ bie ®e|d)i(^te alter ^txXva beftatigt.
Note. Sentences joined by a relative pronoun are not con-
sidered as compound, but as accessory sentences (see p. 372).
3(^ I)aBe bag i8ud) gelefen, iDclc^eS ®ie mir gdie'^en IjaBen.
c) By means of the co- or dinative conjunctions fsee p. 245):
unb, ober, aber, alletn, fcnbern, benn, fc\i)o^l — ell's. Ex.:
jDer SSintct i^evging, unb ber B'^^ii^ting !am.
Winter passed and spring came.
3;d) cerlaffe ©ie je^t, aber id) luerbe balb juviicffe^ren.
I leave you now, but I shall soon return,
^arl iDurbe ©clbat ; benn er ivat: ber 93?ip()anb(ung iibevbriiffig.
Charles turned soldier; for he was tired of ill treatment.
376 Lesson 51.
3c() ttJoQte naif (Snglant) reifcn ; obex x6} Ifattc ttic^t ®elb genitij.
(Sr !onnte ntd)t fommen, 'remt er xoax ftanf.
^ergniigungen [hit) fur ten 5Q?enfci)en nottuenbig; alleiu fie
biirfen iud}t niit Unmdf^igfcit genoffen trerbcn.
^ie armen ^eifeuben fatten iucl)t nur fein (Selb met)r, foH*
bent, iDaS iioc^ fdjUmmer toax, bie Seben^mittel warcn
i^uen and) aU'S^gegangcn.
c?) By means of the adverbial conjunctions (see p. 246):
3d) ertratte einen ©aft; beSft)egen mug id)5u§aufe6IeiScn.
•JDiefe ^ebcr ift ^u ^art ; be^^alb taugt fie nid)t juni (Sd)veiben.
(5r ^at mid) ^trav fd)h)er Seleibigt; befjeu ungead}tct toill ^
it)m t?er5eil)en.
S^erguuguugeu [tub fiir beu 3)^en[d)eu uotmcubig; jeboc^
biirfeu fie nid)t mit Uumdj^i^feit geuefjeu trevben. ^
!l)cr 2JJeufd) muf^ fid) felSft bel^evr|d)en fonnen, foufl toirb
er be^errfd)t.
11. Compound sentences with subordinate clauses.
(©at^gcfUge.)
1) These consist of two essential parts, the piincipal
sentence and subordinate sentences. Their connection is
effected by the subordinative conjunctions see p. 248 — 256).
All the subordinate clauses are characterised by the fol-
lowing particulars:
a) The verb is removed to the end :
S^ hjar 'Dbd)t, aU id) iu Soubon an! am.
h) In compound tenses the auxiliary follows the participle:
Sr tinirbe fvcigelafjcu , uad)bcm er feiuen "ipag t^orgc*
jcigt batte.
c) In separa^ verbs the particle is not separated:
Sr erful)r e^ i\i6:ft, xodi er uid)t au^glng.
d) All the depending cases are placed between the subject
and the verb:
jDu njiirbeft i'^m siivueu, iih'uu ev jc^'.t biefeu 53ricf ^arl3
beiuem 33ater jeigte.
2) The subordinate sentence may be the first member
as well as the second; if it is the first, the subject of
the second, which is tlie principal one, is removed after
the verb. This chaufjje is often indicated by the little
word fo, which must not be translated:
(Sr c^ab ben ^^Ivmeu uid)t^, lucil cr gcijig \r*ar.
or: 2Bcil ev gcijig iuar, ga( cr beu ^(rmcu uid)t^.
Because he was avaricious, /le gave nothing to the poor.
Compound sentences. 377
£)t)[c^on bet 5lngef(agte feme Unfd)utt) Beteuevte, (fo) njurfce
er t»o6 3um Sote i^erurtcitt.
Although the accused man asserted his innocence, yet he
was condemned to death.
5][(§ man t^n fragte, ivofeurc^ CDurd) \va^ relat.) tleg ge=
\i)d)t\\ fct, autiDDvtete ev md)ty.
^Vhen they asked him, how this had happened, he an-
swered nothing.
Wtva Dt)eim tft au§ 5tmevifa gefommeu, urn feine l^aniilie
ju 1)0 ten.
My uncle has come from A. in order to fetch his family.
f 3d) faun feine Siid}er !anfen, ba id) fein ®ett) '^aht, or
t^a id) fein ©elti ^lo.'^t, fann id) feine S3iid)ev faufen.
3)aburd), bag tr)iv ba'3 Safter l^affen (by hating vice),
beftarfen (strengthen) tt) it un^3 in ber Siebe ^uv ^tugenb.
3) When the pronoun of the subordinate sentence re-
presents a person or inanimate object, or abstract idea
of the principal sentence, it is carried to the principal
and the substantive to the subordinate:
DBfd}Dn ber 9JJann fel)r arm ift, ift er bod) red)t f^liidlid).
Seitbem 3l)v 33 ruber bei mir tuar, l)abeid) il)n nid)t me-
ber gcfel)en.
In the latter two sentences the words „ber QJtann" and
„^^X 33ruber" should, properly speaking, have their place in
the principal sentences, and „ev" in the subordinate, as:
3)ei- S!J?ann tft bod) red)t gtitdlid;, obfd)on er fc'^r arm ift.
3^ ^be 3^ven S3rubcr ni^t irtcber gcfc^en, feitbem er bet mirtwar.
4) The subordinate sentence may also be inserted
between the words of the principal sentence, without
affecting the order of the latter. Ex.:
0(^ erfut)r focjteid), aU id) in 9)liind)en anfam, ba§ Un*
gliid meute^3 ^reunbe§.
5) The two conjunctions tDenu and bag may be omitted;
in this case the verb is not removed to the end:
.f)dtte id) eg gefet)en, fo iDiirbe icb e^ t)erboten ^aben.
& fagte, er '^abe ^'o^^fn^el) (instead bag er f opftue^ l)abe).i
6) Very often two or more subordinate and accessory
clauses appear in a compound sentence ; hut this makes
no other change in the arrangement of words than if only
one were there. Each of them takes its proper place. We
subjoin here some enlarged compound sentences,, the words
forming the principal sentence being indicated by italics.
378 Lesson 51.
Examples.
I.
1. 3c()be^aupte. ba^ tiefer ^^elbtjeiv, iDcId)en atle betrun*
tern, fein SSatevlaut) I)atte vetten fcnnen, idcuu mdjt t)ie ^Otenge (the
numbers) bev ^einbe jebeii ^itjerftvint) luinicijlicl) geuiad)t ^dite. —
2. §einrid) bev i^oiue tDUitie in tic :Jlcl)t evf Idrt (declared in
outlawery), tueil ev felnen ilaifev toevlafjen I^attc, qI^> biefev mit ten
Sombart)if(^en (Stdtten tdmpfte, \vcid)c fid) ber fal[evlid)eii Cbev^crr*
fdjaft 5U entjiel^en (withdraw) ftvebteii. — 3. (5iue 9)tailaiit5ifd)e
(5^efaut)tfd)aft toon fed)3e!^n abeligen SDJdnnei'n, an beren
©^i^e (head) tie ilonfuInt)ev©tat)tftant)en, bec^ab fid) nad) SoDi,
uui mit bem X^aifer iiber bie Untemerfung '3U untevbanbeln. —
4. SSa-g mir ^uiDiffen fvommt (profits;; iDovan id) ol^ne &c]al)x
meiner ©eele iud)t jiueifeln barf; bag ift mit I eferl id) er (legible)
©d)rtft in mein @eir>iffen cingegraben. — 5. 2)ie
^luft (cleft) jtuifd^en ®ott unb bem 9}tenfd)en ift fo
^ve^, ba^ bcr 9)?enfd) jt^eifeln miij^te, je jn bem 5ln[d)auen be^
^ed)ften ju gelangen, iuenn il^m ©ott ni(^t felbft cntgegen !dme.
II.
1. ©ieienigen, njelcbe fid) urn ein 5lmt benjavben (solicited),
!aunte $I)iliv^ bev 3^^eitc, aud) el)e fie fid) toovfteUen liefuui,
fo gut toie t>0H "^evfon. — 2. Sv^ giebt ©egenben bev
@rbe, foiuie ^'-'^ten in ber ®efd)id)te beg ein,^elueu
(private) 2)2 e n f d) e n u n b g a n 5 e r il> c I f e V , in benen bie Biiile ber
Sebengfrdfte gleid)fam (as it were) iibev il)ve i)dmmc getreten ift, unb
too mit jeber Xl)at bag 33ermcgen jam Xljun, mit bem ©enujj bag
(Sel)nen (desire) fi(^ fteigert. — 3. ""^lato evjablt, X)a^ 3ohateg
auf einem '^elbjuge, ben er mit 3llcibiabe«:^ gemeinfd)aftlid) mad)te,
t>Dn bem att)enienfifd)en §eere gefel)en luovben fei, luie ex einft einen
ganjen 'l:ag unb eine ^ad)t lang big an ben anbved)enben 9Jicvgen
unbcttocglid) anf einer ©telle ftanb, mit einem !i^lirfe (countenance),
u^eld)er anjeigte, ba§ ev fe^v angeftvengt iibev einen C^egenftanb
uad)bad)te. — 4. 2Benn and) (thought einige lieve an ©eftalt bem
tl)icnfd)en at)nUd) finb; ivenn anbve il)n au ilcvpevfvaft, an 3d)dvfe
cin^elnev (Sinnc iibevtveffen (excel) ; ujenn nod) anbve mevtiuiivbige
53cn)eife ton ^(ugbcit geben: [fo] bleibt bod) poifd)eu it)nen
unb bem ?!)?enfd)eu cine uniibevfteiglid)e .'^luft, iibev
\oe(d)e bie Xieve fid) anf feine iiBeife anjnndbevn toevmi5gen, treil
i^nen bie 3>evnunft, unb beven (its) 5lugbvuct, bie Spvacbe, fel)lt.
ilttfga0e. 153.
This being resolved 1 , my wife undertook to manage^
the business herself. The horse was unfit^ for the road, as
wanting an eye. Leaving my cloak behind me, I set out*
to view'> the town a little. As I was going across 6 one of
1) bcfc^Ioffeu. 2) aus'fil^rcii. 3! untauglic^. 4) ma(^tc ic^ mi(^
ouf bcu Scg, urn. 5) betvac^tcn, bcfcl^cn. G] ilbcr.
Lesson 51. 379
the principal squares'^, I was followed by 8 a little boy, wlio
insisted on cleaning 9 my boots. He was provided lo with a
footstool 1^ and with brushes; and I do not doubt [but] that
he would have polished 12 my boots admirably. However I
had neither time nor inclination 13^ and as (Oa) this was the case,
I declined i"* the honour. The boy followed me through several
streets, and I never stopped 15 but (o^ne fcag) he put down
(nieber fteHtc) his stool and wanted (tDoUte) to begin. When
he had exhausted ^^ his powers of persuasion i' and found me
deaf IS to entreaty IS ihe zdeparted in search ofi^ a less ob-
stinate 20 subject 21.
7) §au^t=^4^ta^e. 8) transl : sa ••little sboy i followed ^me . . .
See p. 34(3, Obs. — 9) ^Jidjen, h)tc^[en. lOj tocrfel^cn. 11) x^n^'
®(^emel, m. 12) h}id)]eti. 13)„ito^ 8uft. 14) able^nen. 15) fte'^en
Bleiben. 16) er|d;i5^^ft. 17) feine il6errebimg§!uiift. 18) taub gegen alle
53itten. 19) urn ... ju jiK^cn. 20) cigenfinnig. 21) eltten . . ^m\d}m.
Reading - lesson.
®cr cblc Offeiev* (®c()lu6.)
®ann trttti t)cr $rior, ein e^rtDiirt)i9ei: ®reig in (Silber*
l^aaren, mit S^rdiien in ben 5lngen t^m entgegeni, unb alle
n3eid}en e^x-futd^t^tooU ^nxixd^. „(Sbler ^iingling," fvrtd)t ex, inbem
er ijjn mtt jitternben Srmen an fein §en briirft, „fiit beine Z^at
tft jeber So^n ^n flein; nur in beiner 33ruft finbeft bu ben iuiir*
btgen. 5luc^ finb wix arm unb befi^en nid^t^ , xoa^ mx bit an*
bieten fonnten. M) felBft Ijabe nur biefe^ ^reu^^ mit (Sbe(*
fteinen, ba§ ic^ aU S^^'^}^^ meiner SBiirbe^ trage; nimm e^S, laj^
mid) e§ bir um^ngen, nid)t at§ ein ®efd)en!, fonbern aU ein
5Inbenfen an bie toergangene 9iad)t. ^xoax jieren fd)on jnjet anbre
CE^ren5eid}en5 beine 33ru[t ; boc^ fel bag britte, baS bie feenfc^^elt
bir n)eii)t6, bir nid)t minber (less) icert! SSe^e^ bem S^apfern,
ber nid)t menfd)Ud) ift; aber (Segen iiber jeben frieger, ber fo fort*
fd^rt, SJlenfd) ju fein. ®arum fegnen bid) bie ©eretteten, barum
fegne td^ bic^, barum fegne^ t)id) ®ott! — "
SDer §auptmann rig fic^ tief erfc^iittert^ Io§ unb fe^rte niit
feiner brazen ©c^ario in ba§ Sager §uriid. 5lber tcie iuarb t^m
5u aJJuteii, al8 er am anbern ?D^orgen oon einem feiner ^reunbe
erful)r, bag ber fran3i3ftfd)e ©eneral t)on bem S5orfalii2 unterrid)tet
fei! 2lUe Dffijiere tDaren tjon biefem ^ur 2:afe( eingelaben; ber
§auptmann burfte nid)l fe^Ien. Ttit mdnnli^er i^affungi^ unb
geftdrit t)on bem Setcugtf ein i4 feiner ^o(^{)ersigen Z^at, ging er
einer toieUeic^t eutetjrenben is ©trafe entgegen, n^eit er ben S3efe^l
feineg ^Sorgefe^ten le nid)t befolgt ^atte. 3)er* ©eneral cm^^fing
1) came to met. 2j make room for him respectfully. 3) cross.
4) dignity. 5) decoration, badge of an order. 6) to dedicate, to devote.
7) Woe! 8i see p. 319, § 11. 9) moved. 10) troop. 11) how did
he feel? 12) event. — 13) countenance, resignation. 14j conscious-
ness. 15) dishonouring, infamous. 16) superior.
380 Lesson 51.
tl)n mit ^D^em (Srnfte unb ttniifte^^ iijm in ein ^^eben^inimev. Wit
tlopfeut)em ^erjen folc^t tcv §auptmann. oie ]h\t) allein. 3eljt
crgreift bcr ©eneval feine ipctiit), blicft il)ii mit fcud)temi'^ 5luge
cine SBeile an, reij^t i^n airfid), umavmt i^u mit ^efti^feit'^ uut>
fpvid}t: „®ie »erftel;cu mid}!" 2)ann fel}vte er mit i^m jur ®e*
fcUfc^aft juviicf.
2Bev mod)te2o nid)t fo gefef^lt, hjer modUe nidu fo geflraft
^bcn! ^et §auptmaun fd)icfte tia^ ^veuj feiiien ^^ertuanDten^i
mit) fd)rieb babci: „T)a^ ift tie ein^ige 33eute'-^2, t)ie id} in ©pa*
nien gemad}t l)abe unt) mad}eu iuerte. Unc^eru treuue ic^ mid}
t)ai?on. 3)evfv-iu|t e§ uiib hqa^t t)a»Dn meine (2d}ult)en, t)ie id>
Ijinterlaficu ijaht." — ®ic ^ernjaul)teu fatten aber fd}on langft
bie (Sd}ult>cn bejaf}!! unb be\Dal}ren ba^ ^reu^ nun al^ einen
t^amilieufd)a^23.
17) to beckon. 18) moist. 19) violence. 2)) would not like.
21) relations. 22) booty, spoil 23) heir-loom.
Questions.
2Bev trat tern §auptmann cntijevjen?
2Bie retete ber ""^vior ten §auptmann an (address) ?
5lBetc^e§ Hnben!en (token) gab er il}m?
^a^ ge[d}a^ am autein 3}iovgcn im Sagcr?
2i$ie ging ber ^auptmanu ju [einem ©eneral?
2Ba^ I)atte er ju fiird}ten?
Sie empfing il)n ter ®enerat?
SBelc^eS tuaren [cine 2i>orte?
2Ba§ l(^rieb tcr ^anptmann an feine 3Sertr»ant)ten, ak^ er ta*
^eu5 nad} §aufe fd\i(fte?
3Sa'3 batten tie ^ernjantten fd}on t^or^er gett^an?
2Ba8 ift aii^ tern ^reuje genjorten'^
Promiscuous Exercises for Translation and
Conversation.
(Continuation from page 375.)
18.
Are you acquainted with the French captain M.? Yes,
Sir, I made his acquaintance last year at Baden. — Has the
servant cleaned my spurs i? He is still cleaning them. — ^
Has the butcher bought fat 2 oxen? He has bought fat oxen
and cows, but no calves, nor 3 sheep. — Is this the coach-
office'*? Yes, Madam, here it is. — When does the stage-
coach & start <*? There is one in the morning at seven o'clock,
and one in the evening at six. — How many places Ijave you
left (iibrig) in the evening coach '? There are only two left. —
1) ®por(it^cH. 2) fctt. 3) unb fciiic. 4 bic ^abrpofl. 5) bcr ©il*
toagcu or ^^Joftlcagwi. 5j abgc^eu. 7) b€r '^bcublDagcn.
Promiscuous Exercises. 381
I want three, can I have them for to-morrow? Yes, you
can have them. — How much do you charge ^ for a place?
Three marcs and a half. — Do (the) children pay full'' price?
No, children pay only the half price. — When must I send
the luggage 10? An hour before the coach starts 6. — At what
o'clock shall we arrive atB.? In the afternoon between three
and four. — Shall we passim through S.? No, you leave the
town to your left.
8) tocrtangeit. 9] ben ganjcH or lootlen ^rei3. 10) fca<3 ©e^cicf.
11) fommeit, ^ofjiere^.
19.
What is his manner of life i ? He lives very retired 2. —
What services does he render 3 his fellow-citizens 4? None,
that (foi^iel) I know [of]. — Is he resolved to sell his estate 5?
He will sell it, if he finds a purchaser^. — How much does
he ask for it? He asks 5000 pounds. — How long have you
been in Germany? I have been here these three months. —
How much do you pay a month ^ for your lodgings s? I pay
a hundred marcs a month. — How many rooms have you?
I have five rooms, viz.: a parlour (33c|ud)3tmmcr), a dining-
Toom, and three bed -rooms. — What curtains^ have you?
I have white and red curtains. — Have you your own furni-
ture (?D^obeI, jo/.)? No, I have hired it [pi.]. — How much do
you pay for it? A hundred and twenty marcs for six months. —
How many English miles lo make one German mile? Six
English miles are equal n to one German mile. — How far
is it from Heidelberg to Frankfort? It is ten German miles
or sixty English miles. — Were your parents in Switzerland
last year? They were not there last year, but they intend
going there this year.
1) bie Men3tx>eife. ^) juriicfgesogen. 3) leifteit. 4) ber SJiitlJUrger.
5] ba§ ©lit or ^attbgut. 6) tauter. 7) monatUc^. 8) SSo^nuttg, sing.
9} SSoi-^ng, m. 10) bic 2JteUe. 11) gki^ [Bat.^.
20.
To whom have you presented i your flowers? To the
lady who came to see my sister. — What wine is that?
Good old Rhine wine 2. — Where can I buy good ink? The
stationer-^ in William- Street sells very good ink. — Which
do you prefer, veal or mutton? I like both, but I prefer
ham. — What have you bought in this -shop 4? I bought
steel -pens and pencils. — Where have you seen the finest
horses? In England. — Is there an English physician in
this town? Yes, there are two English physicians and a
French one here. — Is [there] good wine to be had ^ here?
1) iifcerretdjeti or [d;enfen. 2) ^^^etittochx.- 3^ ber ^^apier^aitbter or
a§). — Are you not allowed to play in this room? No,
we must play in the yard. — Did (^at) the lady allow the
children [dat.) to play in her room? Yes, she did, but only
[for] an hour. — What shall I say of such behaviour 5? You
must blame ^ it. — What am I to do ? You are to work instead
of playing. — Ought 7 I to have gone to Baden? Either to
Baden or to Ems. — Are these men really so selfish 8?
They (eS) are the most selfish men I ever have known. —
Is anybody knocking 'j? Yes, some one has knocked at (ail)
the door. — Who is there? It is I, your friend B. — How
do you do? I thank you, I am quite well.
1) an'fpannen. 2) bet ^btoofat'. 3) bcnirtcilcn. 4) cincn 9J2cnf(^cn.
5) ba« ©enel;inen or 33etragen. * 6] tabeln. 7) See p. 94, 5. —
8) cigcnnii^jig. 9) flo^'^fcn.
22.
(On verbs governing the dative: see p. 345.)
Why did you not thank your master? I have not seen
him since last week. — What is the matter with you (iraS
fel)It 3l)uen) ? I am not quite well. — The father would no
more believe his son, because he had told a falsehood. —
Do not wish him anything bad. — This cloak belongs not
to you, it belongs to the doctor. — What did the baron
present (fd)eilten) to his niece? He presented her [with] a
new bonnet. — I wish you [a] good morning. — To which
physician did you send your card? I sent it to Dr. Murray. —
Have you anything to tell me? Yes, I have a word to say
to you. — What is it? I must tell you alone. — Do you
understand what I say? I understand you well. — Why
don't you answer me {dat.)t I do not know what I am to
Promiscuous Exercises. 383'
answer you. — "What do you mean by that (t>amit)? Nothing
that (tuae) concerns ^ you. — What is your age (How old
are you)? I am fifteen 5'ears old. — How old is your brother?
He is near 2 eighteen. — I thought he tvas^ older.
1) ktreffen [ace). 2) fcetnalje. 3) hjcirc (see p. 317, § 7).
23.
(ON MEETING.) Good morning. Sir. — I have the
honour to wish you [a] good day. — How do you do^ to-
day? I hope you are in good health. — I am very well. —
How does your father do? He is not quite well. — How
do all the family do? [or How do they all do at home?) I
thank you, all are in good health, — How is Mrs. K., vour
aunt? She is a good deal (tolel) better. She is tolerably 2
well. — She is rather 2 unwell. She is very ill, — What
ails her (fe^lt it)t) ? (What is the matter with her?) She has
got a cold (fid) erfditet). I am very sorry to hear it. — How
long 3 kas^ she been (fd)on) ill (unwell)? I did not know
that she was ill. — What is her illness? She has a fever 5. —
Does she take anything for it? The doctor attends 6 her every
day. He says that it will not be of any consequence (Con
^eDeutung). So much the (3)efto) better. I am' very glad to
hear it.
Ij fic^ bcfittbcn. 2) jjiemUc^. 3) fcit hjann. 4) see p. 309, 4. --
5) bag gickr. 6; fcefuc^en. 7i @g freut niic^ [c^r.
24.
(NEWS.) Is there any news^ to-day? Do you know
anything new? What news can you tell us? I know nothing
new. There is no (ntc^t^) news. I have not heard of anything. —
Did you read the news -papers? What do the papers say?
I have read no paper to-day. Did you see that in a paper?
It is only mentioned 2 in a private (^ricat'*) letter. This
news 3 wants'* confirmation 4. I have that news^ from (aue)
a good authority 5, I have it from the first hand. — Has that
news been confirmed? That news has proved (fid) al§ . . gejeigt)
false 6. — Is war still spoken of (do people still talk of war) ?
No, people speak no longer of it. — Have you heard any-
thing of (toon) your brother? I have not? heard from him
theses two months. He has not written for (feit) three months.
I expect a letter from him every day.
1) etttjag 9Zeuc8. 2) crira^nt. 3) 9Jac^rt(^t, f. 4) Bcbarf ber ©c=
ftatigung. 5) Ouettc, f. 6j \ie (Sic
tDcHen). — Will you have it well done (tucid)) or underdone 4?
Rather well done, if you please. I do not like it underdone.
I hope this piece is to your liking 5. It is excellent. Now I
am going to send you a piece of (t)cn) this pie 6, I had
rather take a little piece of that pudding ', Try 8 both. —
Shall I send you a slice '^ of this leg of mutton (§ammelS«
feule)? Give me but very little of it. You eat nothing. I beg
your pardon, I am eating very heartily (niit gitteiU Sl^pCtit).
1) SJli^brotc. 2) gcroftetc 23roti"d;nitten. 3) toorlegen. 4) ittcnig
oricn. —
%) SScrjogentitg. G) S3aI)ubot, m. 7) Ui. 8) (2d)altcr, m. 9) >gc^icB»'
tcnftcr. 10) eit3, m. (or '^aiit, £.). 11) gev^olftcrt. 12) (Sc^ad, n. —
13) bic aBajjc, sing.
Anecdotes. 385
of (oben auf) the carriage in which I have taken my seat?
No, Sir, all [the] luggage is put into the luggage - van i^.
Now, farewell 1^1
14) ber ©e^cicfwagen. 15) ?e6en @tc n?ol^l!
Anecdotes for Translation into German.
1.
A sick man being asked i, why he did 2 not send for
{no.6}) a physician, answered 3: »It is, because I have no mind
(Suft), 2 to 3 die iyet« (fd)on).
1) %i2 citt . . . gcfragt ti?urbc, see p. 332. 2) verb last. 3) In
German, the pronoun cr (he) must be added, when a sentence
begins with a subordinative conjunction.
2.
Milton being asked by (»on) a friend, whether (ofc) he
would instruct 1 his daughters in the different 2 languages 3^
replied^: wNo, Sir, one tongue^ is sufficient^ for a woman. «
1) unterric^teti. 2) ^crfd^ieben. 3) pxad}m. 4) see 1, Note 3.
5) btc Butigc, bie .«
1) toare, see p. 146, Obs. 2. — 2) ju emerBen. 3) einen ^uteii
^lamtn, m. 4) see above 1, Note 3. — 5) fic^ Umn^m. 0, fd^emeii.
5.
An Alderman! of London 2 once 1 requested 2 an author 3
to write a speech ^ for him to speak ^ at Guildhall. »I must
first dine with you«, replied he, »and see, how you open your
miouth6, in order to know, what sort of words [will] fit it8.«
1} 9?at8^err. 2) Ibittett, irreg. v. see p. 164. — 3) (gc^riftftelter
4) eine 9lebe. 5) tiot\6}t er in ®. ^alteit tDoUte. 6) 9Jiunb, m. 7) toa-5
fiir ^Sorter, s. p. 73, 2. 8) fur i^ti ^affen.
OTTO, German Conv.-Grammar. 25
3S6 Anecdotes.
6.
An old philosopher^ observing a young man, who 2 had
2 to 3 great la « volubility ^ of tongue ■*, spoke thus to him:
»Take notice s, my friend, that nature^ has given us two
ears, and but (uui) one mouth, that^ we [may] alisten imuch,
and s speak i little. «
1) ^^itofo^^'. 2) relat. pron., see p. 149. — 3j Oetaufi^feit, f.
4) put the article. 5) S3ebenfcn ©Ic. 6j bic 9^atur. 7j bamit'.
7.
The celebrated Molifere, who ^ was at one time prohibited ^
from representing 2 Tartuffe, revenged^ himself (on the) next
day, by saying 4 to the spectators ^ after the play 6; »I am
very sorry, gentlemen. You should have had (betommen) to-
day the Tartuffe, but the first president will' not have him
to be played"''.
l; tDetc^em . . toerboten n^urte. 2) aufsufttljreu. 3) fic^ rad^eit, rag. v.
4) baburc^, ba^ (or inbem) er ju . . . 5] ^ui^aiie^- ^, ^c^aufpiel, n.
7) tritt nic^t ^abcn, ba^ man i^n [hiinself] fipiclc.
8.
A certain professor, lecturing i a young man on (tcegen)
his iiTegular2 conduct 3, added ^ with great pathos ^i j^The
report^ of j'^our vices'^ will bring your [Gen.) father's grey
hair [pi.) with sorrow 8 to (ill) the graved. « — »I beg^^ your
pardon, Sir/( replied the pupil, wmy father wears ^^ a wigi2.«
1) tabeln. 2) unorbentUd^. 3) sBetragen, n. 4' bci^filgen, reg.
5) ^at^oS, m., ©alining, f. 6) bie 9iac^rid)t tocn. 7) Rafter, n.
6) Summer. 9) ba8 ®iab. 10) 3c^ Httc urn 95erjei^ung. 11) tragcn,
ir. V. 12) ^criidc, f.
9.
A nobleman of N. standing at a window, and seeing [saw
how) an ass-driver i beat his ass unmercifully 2, cried to him 3;
»Have done-*, have done, rascal ^ else (fcilft) 2 1 1 shall have you
whipped fi.« The ass-driver answered: »Pardon, good Sir, I
did not know , that my ass had friends (relations) " at court
(bei §ofe).«
1) (Sjcttreifccr. 2) unbartnbcrsig. 3) ricf cr i^m ju. 4) ^iJrcn Ste
auf. 5) ©c^UngcI. 6) ^^eitfc^en laffcn (see p. 295, § 4. 7; iNcnranbtc.
10.
When (?l(§) Cortez returned 1 to Spain, a he \was coolly 2
received 3 by the emperor Charles V. One day^, he suddenly
presented '"^ himself to the monarch 6. ))Who are you?<( said
the emperor haughtily'. »The man,« said Cortez, as^ haught-
1) jurilcHe^ven. 2) !alt. 3) cnn>fangen. 4; GincS XagcS. 5 flettte
tx fic^ . . . toor. 6) bcr 9)ionard;', iionig. 7) ftolj. 8j cbenfo.
Anecdotes. 387
ily, »who has given you [Dat.) more provinces 9, than your
ancestors 10 leftn you cities. «
9) btc ^rototnj'. 10) SSorfa^rctt, pi. 11) . . ^interlaffctt \}aUn.
11.
A Persian! philosopher^ being asked by 3 what method he
had acquired so much knowledge ^^ answered: »! was never ^
ashamed to ask^ questions when I was ignorant«".
1) ^crfifc^. 2) ^^iloi'o^^', m. 3) auf tretc^e Setfc. 4) ^cmtlniffc, pi.
5) 3c^ fd^cimte mi(!^ nie. — 6) to ask questions = fragen, or gragen
jlellen. 7) unnjiffenb.
12.
A traveller came into the kitchen i of an inn 2 on (in) a
very cold night, and stood so close 3 to the fire, that he burnt*
his boots. A man who sat in the chimney-corner 5 , cried to
him, »Sir you'll burn your spurs 6 presently 7. « — »My boots,
2 you imean, I suppose (t)evmuttid)) ?« said the gentleman.
»No, Sir,« replied the other, »they CDiefe) are burnt already. «
1) bte M^t. 2) SirtS^auS. 3) m^t Ui {Dat). 4) an'bvenncn.
see p. 126, 6. 5) ^anun'=(£(fe, f. 6) @^or(ii)eii. 7) gkic^.
13.
A blacksmith i of a village murdered a man , and was
condemned to be^ hanged. The chief peasants 3 of the place
joined together 4 and begged the judge that the blacksmith
might not suffer 5, because he was 6 necessary to the place
which could not miss^ a blacksmith, to shoe 8 horses, mend^
wheels etc. lo But the judge said: ))How sthen ican 2! fulfil 11
justice ?« A labourer answered: wSir, there are two weavers 12
in the village, and for so small a place 2onei3 lis enough,
hang the other. «
1) ©c^micb. 2) See Nr. 3, Note 6. — 3) bic tooritc'^mftcn 93aucru.
4) trateti jufammen. 5) ben Xoh ntd^t teibcn moc^tc. 6) Subjunctive.
7) cntfce^ren {Ace). S) imi . . . ju Bef(^Iage«. 9) Staber augbcffcrit.
10) unb [0 tDciter. 11 ^ottftredfeu. 12) SSeber. .13) Nom. masc. see
p. 112, 1.
14.
A gentleman who had lent a guinea for two or three
days to a man whose 1 promises he had not much faith ini,
was very much suri)rised to find, that he very punctually
kept 2 his word [with] him. The same gentleman being some
time after 3 desirous * of borrowing ^ a larger sum 6, »4No,«
isaid 2 the 3 other, wyou have deceived' me once, and I am
resolved 8 that you shall not do it a second time (9J?at, n.).«
1) bcffcn SSerfprcd^ungen er nic^t trautc. 2) to keep = ^alttn.
3) adv. na^\)n'. 4) I Avas desirous of, idi) XoM\d)tt. 5) ju borgen.
6) ®umme, f. 7) getaufc^t. 8) cntfc^tofjeii.
25*
Anecdotes.
15.
A young fellow i, having been very extravagant 2, wrote
to his father for (um) more money, and used 3 all means; but
nothing would prevail (l^elfen) . At length he very ingeniously *
wrote to his father, that he was^ dead, and desired (bat) him
to send [up] money to (um . . 511) pay [for] his burial 6.
1) 93?enfd^ or 3)?ann. 2) tocrfci^tueiiberifc^. 3) gefcrauc^cn. 4) toitjig
or fmnrcid;. 5) SuhJ. 6) ©egrabniS, n.
16.
A very poor inhabitant of N. finding one night 1 thieves
in his house, said to them, without being concerned 2 at it:
»I do not know, what you look [for] in my house by night 3,
as* for me 4, I cannot find anything in it 5 in broad day-light 6.a
1) cinmal ua6)t9. 2) ol^itc bariitcr ju crfd^redcn. 3) bet 9iac^t.
4) t»a« nit(^ ktrifft. 5) See p. 142, 7. — 6) bci \)tUm Xagc.
17.
A rich farmer! in Devonshire made a will 2 in which 3
the following** article was found (ftant)) : »I bequeath ^ to John
Wilkes, late « member of Parliament for Aylesbury, five thou-
sand pound sterling, as (alS) a grateful return"^ for the cour-
age with which 3 he defended 8 the liberty of his country, and
opposed 9 the [Dat.) dangerous progress ^^ of arbitrary power i*. a
1) ^d(^ter. 2) Xcftamcnt, n. 3 see p. 150, 5 (Woritt). — 4) bcr
fotgcnbc ^Krtifel. 5) tjermad^cn. 6) toonnaUgem ^artauient8=2J?itgItcb. —
7) a>ergc(timg. 8) »erteibtgcn. 9j [ic^ . . . toibcrfc^te. 10) gortfc^ritt, m.
11) SS3iafur=^errfc^aft, f.
18.
The Emperors Theodosius, Arcadius and Honorius wrote
ito (an) 4Rufinus zthe 3 Praetor: »If anybody speaks ill (33i3fc^)
of ourselves or of our administration 1, 2 we iwill not have^
him punished. If he spoke through levity 3, he ought to be
despised 4. If it be^ through madness, he ought to he pitied «:
if it be (is) an injury 7, he ought to be pardoned ^ (tone
I should pardon him) {Dat.). a
1) 9?cgte'rung. 2) kffcn; see p. 295, 4. — 3) aui ^cic^tfinu. —
4) tocrac^tet n^crbcu. 5) ttjcnn c8 ou8 SaJobnfmn gcfc^icl^t. 0) bcboucvt
h)crben. 7) iBcteibigung. 8] see p. 135, § 7.
19.
A countryman, who was passing i over the Pont-au Change 2
at Paris, perceived no wares 3 in several [of the] shops*.
Prompted •'» by curiosity, she iwent near (311) a broker's^ shop.
»Sir,« asked he, with a silly' look^, wtell me what goods 3 you
sell.tt The merchant who wished, to amuse himself at the
1) ging. 2) bic C£^angc.58rilcfe. 3) SBarcu, pi. 4) Jabcit, pi.
?5ben. 5) 5lttgctrtcbcn ton 9iciigicv. 6) Wdlltx. 7) ciiifaltig. 8) ©lid, m.
Anecdotes. 389
man's expense 9, answered: »! sell asses' heads«io. — »Faith
(ti3a^vltc^)«, replied the countryman, »you must have a great
demand 11 for 12 them; for (tienn) I see but 13 one left (ubrig) in
your shop.K
9) auf Soften be3 3Jlanne8. 10) (Sfet8fi5^fe. 11) 9Za^fvage (/.].
12; barnad^. 13) itur.
20.
Some courtiers made reproaches 1 to the emperor Sigis-
mond, because2, instead of having'^ his vanquished enemies
put to death (toten), he 2 loaded 4 them with favours ^^ and
put them in a situation 6 to hurt ' him : y)Do I not destroy 8 my
enemies, V. said he, y>by making'^ them my friends^f.'^^?
1) 35ovtijihfe. 2) tcett er. 3) tqfen (see p. 295, 4. — 4) u6er=
^aufeit. 5) ©unftBe^eigungcn. 6) Sage, f. 7) fd;aben [Dat.]. — 8) 5er=
ftoren. 9) see p. 331, § 7 and 9. — 10) ju; see p. 345, 3.
21.
Malec, vizir (^Sejier) of the Caliph l Mostadi, had just
obtained'-^ a victory ^ over the Greeks [ace], and had taken 4
their emperor in a battle. Having ^ had this prince brought 5
into his tent [^di, n.) he asked him, what treatments he
expected from the conqueror. »If you make war"^ like (ttJte)
a king,« answered the emperor, ))send me back again: if you
wage 7 it like a merchant, sell me: if you make" it like a
butcher 8, slaughter ^ me.« The Turkish General sent him back
without a ransom 10.
1) ber taltfe (2nd decl.)- 2) errmgcit, gewinnen. 3) @ieg, m.
4) gejangen geuommeit. 5) 9Zac^bcm er . . . ^attt briugen laffen (see
p. 373, 2. — 0) eiiie 53e^anbtung. 7) trieg fu^ren. B) ber 9KeJ^gev.
9) f^(ad,tcn. 10) cin Soi'cgelb, n.
22.
Some Frenchmen, who had landed on the coasti of Guinea,
found a negro 2 - prince seated ^ under a tree, on a block 1 of
wood for^ his throne; three or four negroes 2, armed 6 with
wooden pikes' served forS his body-guard^. His sable 10 majesty
2 anxiously 11 i inquired 12; »Do theyi^ talk much of me in
France ?«
1) ^ufte, f. 2) 9Jegev. 3) fi^enb. 4) ^ol^Uod. 5) [tatt fehteg
^^roneii. 6) BettJaffttet. 7; ^t!e, Sanje, f. 8) aU. 9) 2eibWfld?c.
10) ft^trarj. 11) tteugicrig. 12) fragte. 13) man.
23.
The Duke of Ossona, Viceroy 1 of Naples, had gone on
board 2 the gallies of the King of Spain, on (an) a great holi-
day, to indulge 3 himself in a right which he had to set a
slave at (in) liberty. He questioned several of them, who
1) 35i5efi3ntg ton 9^ea^cl. 2) auf bie ®a(eeren. 3) urn ehx 9?e(!^t
anS'SU'Ukn, n3eld;e'8.
390 Anecdotes.
all endeavoured to excuse themselves, and convince him of
(t)ou) their innocence. One alone ^ingenuously* i confessed^
his crimes'*, and said that he was deserving' [of] a still greater
punishment. »Turn^ this wicked fellow awaya said the Duke,
r>lest he (tJamit er nic^t) [should] pervert^ these honest people. a
4) freimiitig. 5) geftct^eu, ir. v. 6, SBcrkec^cn, n. 7) terbicnen.
8) 3agcu ^ie . . . fort. 9; tocrberbe.
24.
An apothecary! having refused 2, to resign 3 his seat at
the theatre to an officer's lady, the officer felt himself insulted
and sent him a challenge*. The apothecary was punctual at
(bei) the meeting (3ufaunuenfunft, /.); but he observed that he
was not accustomed to fire 5, and that he had to propose 6 a
way'^ of settlings the dispute. He 2 then idrew from (au§)
his pocket a pill-box 9, took from it two pills, and 4 thus 1 ad-
dressed i^ 2 his 3 antagonist 11 : »As [ai^) a man of honour, Sir,
2 you 3 certainly 1 would not wish to fight me 12 but on (niit)
equal terms (^affeu) ; here are two pills, one composed of
(au^) the most deadly poison 1^, the other perfectly harmless i-* :
we are therefore on equal ground i^, if we each swallow 1<*
one. You shall take your choice (t)ie 2Ba^l l^abeil), and I
promise faithfully, to take that (/.) which you leave !'.« —
It is needless to say, that the aft"air { the mistake '. wMy God, « remarked
Smollet to a friend, who was with (bei) him, ))what a wretched**
lodging has honesty 'J taken [up with]l« Thus saying i" and
adding 11 another to it, he returned ^2 the guinea to the over-
jojed (iibevgliirfUd)eu) and grateful beggar.
1) S3cttlcv. 2) bitten. 3) an8 i^crfe^c^. 4) ©nincc', f. 5 b"iltc
i^m \ia6). 6) ertlarte. 7) ben 3rrtnm. 8) clcnb. 9; bic (Sbriidjtcit.
10) 3nbcm cr k. 11) nnb ncd; cine bajn filgte. 12 juriicf'gcben.
26.
A little girl, five years old, was equally* fond of* her
mother and grandmother. On (5(u) the birth-day of the latter,
1) licbtc gleid; je^r.
Anecdotes. 39}
2 her 2 mother isaid to her: ))My dear, you must pray 2 to God
to bless 3 your grandmamma , and that she may live ^ to be
very old.« The child looked ^ with surprise at her mother,
who perceiving it, said: »Well6! will you not pray to God to
bless your graridmamma, and that she may become very old?«
»Ah, mamma !« said the child, »she is very old already, I
will rather 7 pray that she may become young. «
2) to pray to God = either ®ott bitten or ju ®ott bctcti.
3) ba^ cr . . . fegtte {SuhJ.). 4) [cl^r att tx»erbc. 5) to look at = an*
fe^cn, sep. V. 6) (Si! 7) UeBcr.
27.
The latei General Schott, so celebrated for his success 2
in gaming 2, was one evemn^ playing very high with the Count
d'Artois and the Duke de Chartres, at Paris, when a petition 3
was brought up^ from the widow 5 of a French officer, stating 6
her various 7 misfortunes 8, and praying relief 9. A plate was
handed i<^ round, and each put in {f)iueln) one, two, or three
louisd'or; but when it was held^ to the general, who was
going 12 to throw for a stake (®a^, m.) of five hundred louis-
d'or, he said: »Stopi3 a moment, if you please. Sir, here
goes 14 for the widow !« The throw 15 was successful 16; and
he 2instantlyi7 i swept (fd}cb) the whole into the plate, and
sent it down [to] her.
1} tocrftorben. 2) tDegen feineS ®{M% im @:pieL 3) cine SSittfc^rift.
4) l^crauf. 5) 22?ittt)e. 6) to state bartegen (see p. 329, § 4). —
7) nianntgfa^. 8) UngtiidSfatte. 9) urn Unterftuljung. 10) '^ernm-
geretd;t. 11) toorget>aUen. 12) tm ^egriff tear (see p. 294, 5). —
13) fatten @ie..! 14) bte[e3 gttt. 15) ber SSurf. 16) glUcflid^, er=
folgreic^. 17) fogtci(^.
28.
Dr. Radcliffe 2 once 1 refused 1 to take a fee 2 for 3 attending
a friend during a dangerous illness. Upon (nad)) his recovery,
however, the patient presented the proper ^ amount in a purse,
saying: »Sir, in this purse I have put every day's fee 5, and
your goodness must not gets the better of my gratitude. «
The doctor eyed'^ the purse, counted the number^ of days,
and holding out^ his hand, replied: »Well, I can hold out 10 no
longer; singly n I could have refused them for 12 a twelve-
month 12, but altogether they are irresistible«i3,
1) to refuse = fid^ tijeigern. 2) ein §onorar'. 3) bafiir . . ba^ er.
4) cntfprcci^enb. 5) baS §onorar fiir jeben Sag. 6) to get the better
of = iiberftetgcn [ace], or grcf^eu fein at8. 7) betrad^tetc. 8) 3a'^l, f.
9) angftrecfen. 10) [tanb^aft bleibcn. 11) einjetn. 12) ein ganjeS 3a^r
tang. 13) unh)iberfte^Uc^.
29.
Sir Isaac Newton's temper i is said (foil) to have been so
equal 2 and mild, that no accident could disturb 3 it ; a remark-
able instance "1 of which (bat)Dn) is related as (tr>ie) follows:
1) ba0 ©emiit 2) gteic^milttg. 3) fti)ren. 4) 53eif^tct, n.
392 Anecdotes.
Sir Isaac had a favourite •■> little dog, which he called Diamond.
Being one evening called out of his study ^ into the next
room, Diamond remained behind (6(ieb 3). juviicf j . When Sir
Isaac returned, having "^ been absent but a few minutes, zhe
ihad the mortification^ to find that Diamond h^d overturned^
a lighted 10 candle among some papers, which were the nearly
finished 11 labour of many years. The papers soon were
iftaut)Cll) in flames, and (were) almost consumed 12 to ashes.
This lossi^, 2 from 14 Newton's advanced age, iwas irrepar-
able i^; but, without punishing the dog, she i exclaimed: »0,
Diamond! you CDll) don't know what mischief 16 you have done la
5) fin SieblingS-^iinbAen. 6 ^tiibicr'jtnmicr, n. 7, iiad;bem cr nur.
8) ben i^erbvufj. 9) uingen.^crjcii. 10; brcnnenb. 11) tiotteiibct. 12) ju
2li(^c toerbramit. 13) bcr l^crluft. 14) tregen ''Jt.'Q ^ob/Cn 2llter8. —
15) iuierfe^3lic^. 16) bag Uu^cil.
30.
The prince of Conti being i highly pleased withi the in-
trepid behaviour of a grenadier at the siege of Philipsburgh,
in 1734, threw him a purse, excusing 2 the smallness of the
sum 2 it contained^, as'* [being] 2 too spoor la < reward for
such courage. Next morning, the grenadier went to the prince
with two diamond rings and other jewels '"^ of considerable 6
value. »Sir,« said he, wthe gold I found in your purse I
suppose' you intended ' for me; but these 2I 1 bring back to
you, havingS no claim to them {5lnfpvitd) tarauf).« — wYou
have doubly deserved them by your bravery, and by your
honesty, « said the prince, therefore you may keep them.«
1 ) n>e(d)cm ba3 uncrfc^rocfcnc 33cncl;ineu . . . fc^r geficl. 2i inbeni
cr fid^ trcgcu bcr gcviiu^eu ©limine cntid;nlbtjite. 3) bic er cntbtett.
4; al§ cine. 5) 3uii)e'Ien. G) betrad^ttid;, kbeutcnb. 7) teftimmtcn ©ic
IHTinntlid;. 8; see p. 332, § 10, a.
31.
Casimir II, King of Poland l, received a blow from a
Polish2 gentleman, named •< Konarsky, who had lost all his
money while playing 4 with the prince. Scarcely was ther
blow given, when^, sensible ^ of the enormity of his crime,
he betook*' himself to flight; but he was soon apprehended'
by the king's guards, and condemned to lose his head. Ca-
simir, who waited for (auf, Ace.) him in silence [silently] amid
his courtiers, as soon as he saw him appear, said: »I am not
surprised at (iibcti the conduct^ of this gentleman. Not being
able-» to revenge himself on (an tern) fortune, it is not to be
wondered 10 [at], that he has ill-treated n his friend. I am
1) ^olcn. 2) vchiifd;. 3) 9?amen8. 4) see p. 331, §9, 3rd Ex.
5) al« cr, im S^eivnfjtfcin bcr ®vl>&c . . . (5) fid) anf bic ^tnc^t begab.
7) crjjriffcn. 81 bae ©drajicn. 9, Ta cr fid? nid;t . . . fcnntc. 10) see
p. 324, § 8, Note. 11) miO^nbcIn, insep. v.
Anecdotes. 393
the only one (fcev eiujtge) to blame in this affair 12^ fori ought
not, by my example, to encourage i^ a pernicious practice i^,
which may be the ruin of my nobility«i^. Then turning 16 to
the criminal 17^ he said: »I perceive^ you are is sorry for your
fault 18 — that is sufficient [enough] ; take your money again,
and let us renounce gaming 19 for ever.«
12) @ad;c. 13) ermutigcH. 14) ehtc toerbcrBltc^e ®cn)o(;itl^eit. —
15* 5(bet, m. 16) tubcm cr fid; . . . ti^aubte. 17) 35crh-e(^ev. 18) 3^i'
%d)\tx tft 3I;neu leib. 19) auf ba§ ®^iel toerjid^ten.
32.
On 1 the morning of the day on i which Moliere died, his
wife and his friends , seeing how weak he was , tried to pre-
vent his 2 going down to play that night — but in vain. »A
nian,« he said, »suffers long ere (e^e) he dies: I feel that,
with me 3, the end is at hand 3; but there are fifty poor work-
men, who have only their day's wages'* to live on^, — and
Avho is to give them bread to-night, if I play not?« So he
went down, and played the Malade Imaginaire^\ then home
to bed, and died.
1) 2tu. 2) see p. 330, §7.-3) ba^ e§ nut mir ju (gnbe ge(;t.
4) 2;ageIo^n, m. 5) tuotooit fie leBeu niiiffen. 6) ben cingebtlbeten Iranfcn.
33.
It happened at Athens, during the public representation i
of a play exhibited 2 in honour of the commonwealth 2, that
an old gentleman came too late, to get 3 a place suitable*
to his age and quality 5. Many of the young gentlemen who
observed the difficulty and confusion'* he was in, made signs
to him that they would accommodate ' him, if he came (t)a()in
fame) where they sat. The good man bustled ^ ^through the
crowd I accordingly (bal}ev) ; but when he came to the seats •>
to (ju) which he was invited, they sat close i'^ and exposed
him, as he stood out of countenance n, to the whole audience 12.
The frolic 1^' went round (blivd)) all the Athenian benches.
But on (bei) those occasions [there] were also particular places
assigned 14 for foreigners: when the good man skulked i^ to-
wards the seats appointed i'* for the Lacedeemoniansis, these
honest people rose all up, and with the greatest respect re-
ceived him among them. The Athenians {%{))t\\tx) being
suddenly touched i" with a sense of the Spartan virtue and
their own degeneracy is gave a thundering applause I'J; and the
1) ?tnfjiil)rung. 2) wM^t?, ^n @f)ven bcr 9^e^ubttf or be§ greiftaatc^
gegcten tDnrbe. 3) see p. 325, § 10. — 4) ^affenb. 5) @tanb. (i) 5$er=
Icgcn^eit, toorin. 7) it;m ^(alj madden 8) brangte fid;. 5)) jn ben SBcin--
lett. 10) gebrangt. 11) airper gaffnng. 12) bent @clad)ter beg gan^eu
^uMifumS. 13 bcr @^)o§, (s:d;ei3. 14j kftimmt. 15) fd;Ud;, fid; brangte.
16) Jacebamonier. IT) ergviffen toon. 18, (Sntartnng. IH) iBctfatt, m.
394 Dialogue.
old man cried out: »The Athenians understand what is good,
but the Laced.Tmonians practise 20 it.«
20) iiben c8 au8.
DIONYSIUS, PYTHIAS and DAMON *)
(a dialogue.)
Dionysius. Amazing i'. what do I see? Pythias is arrived
— it is indeed Pythias. I did not think 2 it possible. He is
come to 3 die, and to redeem (erlbfen) his friend!
Pythias. Yes, it is Pythias. I had left the place (£)rt,
m.) of my confinement ^ with no other views ^ than to pay
to Heaven the vows I had made; to settle 6 my family G con-
cerns according (iiad)) to the rules of justice; and to bid
adieu" to my children, that (bamit) I might die tranquil and
satisfied.
Dionysius. But why dost thou return? Hast thou no fear
of (toor t)em) death? is it 2not smad ithen, to seek it?
Pythias. I return to suffer'^, though I do not deserve
death. Honour forbids me to let my friend die for me.
Dionysius. Dost thou, then, love him better -♦ than
thyself?
Pythias. No, I love him as^^ myself; but I know I ought
to suffer death rather than my friend, since CDa) zit 2 was il
whom thou hadst decreed to die (jum %^X)i. »enivteilt). It
were not just that Damon should suffer, toll free me from
that death which was not for him, but for me only.
Dionysius. But thou sayest that it is as unjust to inflict 12
death [upon] thy friend.
Pythias. Very true, we are both innocent, and it is
equally'^ unjust to make (laffcu) either of us suffer^.
Dionysius. Why dost thou, then, say that it were wrong
to put'i him to death instead of thee?
Pythias. It is equally unjust to inflict death either on
Damon or on myself; but I shoidd be highly culpable to let
Damon suffer that death which the tyrant had prepared for me.
Dionysius. Dost thou return hither to-day with no other
view than to save the life of thy friend, by losing thy own?
1^ ©ottiam! 2) id) baltc c8 nid^t fiir nun^Itd;. :i] see p. .*i25, § 10.
4) ®cjaiuicnid)ajt. 5) ?lb|id)t. H) gain i lien ''^iiu^dcjiciibcitcu ju crbncu.
7) ?cbciu.l)l 511 fagcn 8 to suffer = ten Xob crlcibcii. U; nicbr. —
10) wic. 11 see p. :J25, § 10. — 12) bcin f^v. bcu Xob auf^itcrle.qcn
or bcu %x. . . . l^iuijuridjtcn. 13) cbeufo. 14i to put somebody to
death = (Sincn Ace) l)i\m6)U\i \a\\tn.
This piece may be translated more freely.
Dialogue. 395
Pythias. I return, in regard to 1 thee, to suffer a death
which it is common 2 for tyrants to inflict; and with respect
to Damon, to perform my duty by freeing him from the danger
which he incurred 3 by his kindness to (gegett) me.
Dionysius. And now, Damon let me speak to thee. Didst
thou really not fear that Pythias would never return, and that
thou wouldst be put to death for him?
Damon. I was but (nut) too well assured, that Pythias
would return : and that he would be more anxious ^ to keep
(Jjaltcn) his promise than to save his life. Would to Heaven
(iDcUte ®ott) that his relations and friends had detained him
by force. 5 He would then have lived for the comfort and
l)enefit6 of good men; and I should then have had the satis-
faction '^ of dying for him.
Continuation.
Dionysius. What? art thou not fond of (Uebft bu — nlcfct'i
life?
Damon. No; I am not, when I see and feel the power
of a tyrant.
Dionysius. It is well! Thou shalt see him no more: I
will order thee to be puts to death (f)invid}ten laffeu).
Pythias. Pardon the feelings of Damon, of a man Avho
feels for his dying friend; but remember that 2 it 3 was il,
who was devoted (ge\Det^t) by thee to (bent) death. I come
to submit to it (mid) xl}m p unteriBerfen), that I may (um — ju)
redeem my friend. Do not refuse me this comfort in my
last hour.
Dionysius. I cannot endure (leiben) men who despise
death and defy^ my power.
Damon. Thou canst not endure virtue.
Dionysius. No , I cannot endure that proud , disdainful
ftod}mutige) virtue, which contemns life, which dreads not
pain, and which feels not the charms 1^ of riches ^ and pleasure.
Damon. Thou seest, however, that it is a virtue which
feels the dictates (@ebote) of honour, justice, and friendship.
Dionysius. Guards, take (fii'f)Vet) Pythias to execution ^2.
We shall see whether Damon will still despise my authority.
Damon. Pythias, by returning to submit 13 himself to thy
pleasure 14 has merited his life, and [deserved] thy favour,
but I have excitedly thy indignation 16, by placing myself in
1) 3tt SSeju^ auf . . . 2) turn.- tvhich tyrants commonly inflict
getcgen hjcirc. 5; mtt ©ciratt. 6) ^um SEroftc uitb gum SSol^tc. 7) 33e=
fricbtciung. 8) see p. 326, § 12. — 9) trot^eix [Dat.]. 10) 9ieisc. —
11) Sfletc^tum, m. sing. 12) jum 2:obc. 13) [ic^ imterhjerten [re/l. v: .
14) matux, f., Stttcn, m. 15) crreg'ett. 10) UniDitten, m.
396 Dialogue.
thy power, in order to save him. Be 2 satisfied, ithen (cil[o),
with this sacrifice', and put me to death.
Pythian. Hold, Dionysius; remember, it was I alone that
offended thee ; Damon could not.
Dionysius. Alas, what do I see and hear? — Where
am I? How miserable, and how worthy to be so (e^) !
I have hitherto known nothing of (toil) true virtue. I have
spent my life in darkness and error 2. Not all my power
and honours are sufficient to produce love. I cannot boast 3
of having^ gained a single friend in the course ^ of a reign
of thirty years, and yet these two persons 6, in private life?,
love one another tenderly, zfully iconfide^ in (auf) each
other, are mutually happy, and ready to die for each other.
Pythias. How couldst thou, who^^ hast never loved
any person, expect to have friends? If thou hadst loved
and respected men, thou wouldst have secured"* their love
and respect. Thou hast feared and oppressed 11 mankind ("Die
9)?eufd)en), and they [both] fear and detest 12 thee.
Dionysius. Damon, Pythias, condescends^ to admit me
as a third friend in a 3 connection 1^ iso zperfect^^. I give
(fc^enfe) you your lives [Sing.), and I will load 16 you with
riches.
Damon. We have no desire to be enriched 17 by thee:
and as to i^ thy friendship, we cannot accept or enjoy it, till
thou become good and just. Without these qualities, zthou
I canst be connected with none but (mit incmaut) a(iS mit)
trembling slaves and base flatterers''-*. To be loved and
esteemed by men 20 of free and generous minds 20^ thou must
be virtuous, kind, just; and know 21 [how] to live on a sort
of equality (auf gleid)cni §uJ3e) with those who share 22 and
deserve thy friendship.
1) Dpfer, n. 2) 3rrtum, m. 3) to boast = fid) riifjmcu rcf. v.).
4) see p. 329, § 5. — 5; Jauf. 6) ^^crioiteit. '■ iin ^iNvioat'lcbcu. —
8) tocrtraiicn. 9) bit, bcr bu, see p. 300, I. — 10; rict;eiUct) cnuorBen.
II initcrbrilcft. 12; tocratfd^cucn. 13) |eib fo gut or gcvabrt mir bic
39ittc. 14) ^^^iiub, m. 15) i)oUfcmnien. 16) iiberbaiifen. 17 bcrcirt)ern.
18; as to tva« . . . bctufft 19) ©djmctrf^Icr. 20; ton jvcifinntw|cii iiiib
ebclmiitigen ^JJiaiutern. 21) \)cifte^cn. 22) tctlcn.
More such pieces will be found in the little vol-
unio: Materials for translating Fnglish into Ger-
man by Dr. Emil Otto, (5th Edit.) which is to
be considered as a continuation of this grammar.
Materials for conversation.
39:
Materials for German conrersation.
S3?a8 ^aBett @te ba^
2Ba8 troflen @ic faiifen?
§aben @ie etiDa§ gefaujt?
mt\>id (Wa§; foftet ba§ Mto?
S)aS tito Joftet gwei 3)larf.
Sd) finbe ba§ fe^r teuer.
S)a§ ift fe^r tDot)lfeil (or ttttig).
^abeit @te 3t;r ^^fevb toerfaiiff^
3c^ t)abe c3 noc^ nicl;t ^ertauft.
5fi$oUcn @ie e8 tiia)t ^erfaufeu!*
3a, i(^ tDiU c8 tocrfaufeix.
ai^arum troUen @ie e§ loerfaujeu?
3d;i fcraud}c @elb.
Sringen @ie mir 33rot unb 53uttcr.
3ci; l;abe geniig gey3e[fen (bin [att .
^aben @ie cin (BlasScin getrunfen'^
|)ier ift frifc^eS SSaffer.
Srageii @ie biefen ^rief anf bic ^oft
Sffia^ fagcn ®te^
3d; fage nid;t§ (gar iiid;t§).
a)iit luern [predion @ie^^
25er|'tet)eix @ie, tr>a3 id^ [age^
3c^ toerfte^e*nic^t oUeS.
What have you there?
"What do you wish to buy?
Did you buy anything?
How much a kilo?
Two marcs a kilo.
I find this very dear.
This is very cheap.
Have you sold your horse?
I have not yet sold it.
"Will you not sell it?
Yes, I will sell it.
Why will you sell it?
I want some money.
Bring me some bread and butter.
I have eaten enough.
Did you drink a glass of wine?
Here is some fresh water.
Take this letter to the post-office.
What do you say?
I say nothing (at all .
To whom do you speak?
Do you understand what I say?
I do not understand all.
Sa§ ^crlangen @ie1
SSa8 tDiinjc^etr ®te?
3c^ ^•erlangc ttid;t§.
§aben @ic bie ©iitc.
^ie triirbeti nitc^ ](i}x toerbinbeti.
(gie finb fe^r giitig.
SBa§ fud;en @ie ba'^
3d; fudje nieinc U^r.
SSa§ tuoHeu @ie tl;un?
SBag mac^en or tl)iiit @ie ba?
3d; krne meine Stufgabe.
3c() tt)erbe e3 mit ii>ergniigen tf)iiu.
SBii'feit @ie, ob er fommen tcirb'^
3c^ tod^ cS nid;t.
3c^ t»ei^ nid)t8 batoou.
^'eunen @ic biefen 9)?ann?
3c^ !ennc i^n fe^r gut.
3c^ feune tW won (Sefid^t.
3c^ fenne i^n nid;t.
What do you ask for?
What do you wish for?
I (require; ask for nothing.
Have the goodness. Be so kind.
You would oblige me very much.
You are very kind.
What are you looking for?
I am looking for my watch.
What are you about to do?
What are you doing there?
I am learning my lesson.
I shall do it with pleasure.
Do you know, if he will come?
I do not know — (it).
I know nothing about it.
Do you know this man?
I know him very well.
I know him by sight.
I do not know him.
398
Materials for conversation.
®fau6en ®ic bag?
©laubcn ®ic ba3 (boc^) mc^t.
3d; glaiibe e« nic^t.
5J)a3 ift n3al;r. ®a3 ift SBal^r^ett.
3d^ H« 3I)rer 9Jleiuung (3Iu[i^t).
^Sie f|3afKn, ®ic fc^erjcu.
@inb ®ie mlt iljm jufrtebeu?
^tnb @ie bcfriebigt'^
Siu finb bamit jufricbcu.
^6) Hn 3^r 3)iener.
S)a8 ift oUcrliebft.
Sffietc^eS SJergniigcu:
SSetd^c grcube!
Do you believe this (so)?
Do not believe that.
I do not believe it.
That is true. That is truth.
I am of your opinion.
You joke.
Are you contented with him?
Are you satisfied?
We are contented (with it).
I am your servant.
That is charming.
What pleasure !
What joy!
4.
SBcv ift ba?
e« ift niein S3rubcr tart.
SSol^in' get)en @ie?
SBir gel)en iu5 jT^eater.
SSo^in' gc^t bie tiic^in?
©tc gcl}t auf belt ^Jlaxtt.
SSo'^er' tommcu i^ie'? or
2Bo fominen ®ie I^ev'?
3cf) fomme au8 ber @d)ule.
9Bir tommcn an^ bent ^onjert'.
@ie tonimt tooit bcm 33att.
®cl)cn @ie je^jt na6) §oufe?
©c^en @ic itidjt fo fd^nctt.
9hit;ett @ic ein treiti^ aug.
^ommeit @ic balb n?iebcr.
©el^ett @te t)inaut — l^ittunter.
®e^c foit! ©e^eu ©ie fort!
AVho is there?
It is ray brother Charles.
Where are you going?
We are going to the theatre.
AVhere does the cook go?
She goes (is going) to the market.
Whence do you come?
Where do you come from?
I come from school.
AVe come from the concert.
She- comes from the ball.
Are you going home now?
Do not go so fast.
Rest a little.
Come back soon.
Go up (stairs), go down (stairs).
Go away! Be off! (leave).
®utcn aJJorgen [Zqq), nteiti §evr.
©uteii Stbcnb, ineiit ^crr.
©elicit @te fidb.
^el^meit ®ie ^Ua^.
Sic bcfiubett (Sic fid^?
bittc ®ic or bittc, fagcit ®le niir.
©cbcii ^\t inir. V!eit;cu ®ic i^m.
3Jiacbcit ®ic niir ba« aJcrgnilgcn.
3d; bitte in cin ©ngldnber.
S)icfe S)ame ift eiue (Sngtanberin.
Is Mr. N. at home?
Yes, Sir, he is at home.
Are you a German?
I am an Englishman.
This lady is an Englishwoman.
mfoid U^r tft c8?
©8 tft f^at, eg tft neiitt U^r.
SSann tijcrbeit ®ie auSge^cn?
3(^ twerbe urn 10 Ut}r augge^ett.
Urn ^atb aefit U^r.
Um breitoiertet auf fiebeti or cin \
SBiertel to or fiebett. /
Um cin incrtel auf fcd^§ or \
Um cin 35iertel nad; fiittf.
^imft 7 U^r.
Um 2«ittag. Um jtcolf U^r.
Um 2Jiitternad?t.
©eftern movgen.
©eftern abenb.
^orgcftern.
§eute. — 3Jlorgen.
yjlorgcn frii^.
Ubcrmorgen.
3>or ac^t, tiictjel^n 2^agen.
3n H8 9Borf)en.
3n cinigen 2:agen.
Son cinem Sag jum anbcrn.
What o'clock is it?
It is late, it is nine o'clock.
At what o'clock do you go out?
I shall go out at ten o'clock.
At half past seven.
At a quarter to seven.
> At a quarter past five.
At seven precisely.
At noon, at twelve.
At midnight.
Yesterday morning.
Yesterday evening, last night.
The day before yesterday.
To-day. — To-morrow.
To-morrow morning.
The day after to-morrow.
A week ago, a fortnight ago.
In six weeks.
In a few days.
From one day to another.
SffiaS fUr SSetter ift ^cute?
(S8 ift [d)i)nc8 (fd|k(^tes) SSetter.
SSagfur ^eiTli^c§ Setter!
@8 ift fc^r ^eiB {toaxm) — (fait).
@8 regnet.
(Sg ift nur ein @(^aucr.
eg ift fe^r n3inbig.
|)aben ^k (or 3ft 3^nen) tt)arm?
§riercn ®ic (or Ijaben ®ie fait)?
Sir h)erbcn ein ©cwitter bcfommen.
(gg bonnert. — Sg blil^t.
^aben (Sie ben Conner ge^orf?
^ctd) ciit fd;6ner 9?egenbogcn.
(Sg gc^t cin falter SSinb.
S)cr Sinter fommt ^cran.
(gg gefriert.
©g bat bicfc 9?a(^t gcjrorcn.
@g ift glatt ju ge^cn.
@g fd;neit (eg fctttt ©c^ncc).
S)ic @onne fd^cint.
3in @onnenfdbetn
2)ic @oiine gcl^t unter.
3m aJJonbfc^'ein.
How is the weather to-day?
It is fine (bad) weather.
What beautiful weather!
It is very hot (warm) — (cold).
It rains, it is raining.
It is but a shower.
It is very windy.
Are you warm?
Are you cold?
We shall have a thunder-storm.
It thunders. It lightens.
Did you hear the thunder?
What a beautiful rainbow!
It is a cold wind
Winter draws near.
It freezes.
It has frozen last night.
It is very slippery.
It snows.
The sun shines.
In sunshine.
The sun sets.
In the moonlight.
400
Materials for conversation.
3)tc ©onttc ge^t ^raci^tig aiif.
(S« tft bnnfel mat^t .
(58 ift ^cUer, Iid;ter ZaQ.
The sun rises beautifully.
It is dark (night).
It is bright day-light.
Idiomatical Expressions.
SSer ^at eS 3^«cn gcfagt?
SSa3 [oU ba3 l^ciOeu'^
S®ic neitnt man {wh l^cifjt) biefe^'^
2Ba8 ift 511 t()un?
SBaS batten ®ic batoon?
3)a8 frcut mid; fcl^r.
(S8 tt)ut mtr fcl^u leib.
3c^ l^al)c Sangenjeile.
3c^ bin es. SBir fmb cS.
S(i gct)c mcincm ^^A'cu"^ entgcgcn.'
®cl)cn ®ie 3^8 SegcS.
3)a3 ge^t ®ie nic^ts an.
2Ba8 fc^tt 3^nen? |
3^ i}aU ^o\>\r)ot\}.
3c^ I;abc einen tofen S*i"3cr.
(S8 ffl;lt mir nid;t3.
^aten @ic ©elb bei fic^?
@ic fe^cn gut au8.
SSottcn @ie mir ©efellfc^ajt Iciftcn?
68 ift Beit jum (Sffcn.
3ft bcr Z\\6) gebecft?
S)a8 (Sffcn ift aufgctrag.n.
jlragcn (bedenj (£ic ab.
Who (has) told you?
What is the meaning of that?
AVhat do you call this?
What is to be done?
What do you think about it?
I am very glad of it).
I am very sorry.
I am weary.
It is I. It is we (us).
I go to meet my friend.
Go your way.
That does not concern you.
AVhat ails you?
What is the matter with you?
I have a head-ache.
I have a sore finger.
Nothing is the matter with me.
Have you anv money about you ?
You look well.
Will you keep me company?
It is time for dinner.
Is the cloth laid?
Dinner is served up.
Take away the things.
3m 2Infang.
Safjen (2ie mid^ geBen.
?affen ®ie meinc 5>3iirf;cv Itcgen.
2)ic[c SOhiftcr finb nid;t iibcl.
SDiir ift al(o8 cinerlci.
@inb ®ic fcrtig'^
3c^ bin mit mcincr 2Iufgabc fcrtig.
Xai wirb 3^ncn tvcf)l befommen.
'^ai 33tcr bffLMiimt mir nic^t gut,
3d; Ijabc mir ba8 Jilkin gcbrocjicn.
3d) bin (nnirc) bcinabc gcfallht.
@r tocrbicnt fein ©rot.
SKie gcfatlt c8 3I;nfn I;icr'^
Sic gcjaUt 3bncn bicfc @tabt?
®8 gejattt mir fc^r tvo^I ^ier.
8B0 jlnb ttir fle^cn gcblicbcn?
2.
At the beginning.
Let me alone.
Let my books alone.
These patterns are not amiss.
It's all the same to me.
Have you done (are you ready)?
I I have done my exercise.
\ I am through with my task.
That will agree with you.
Beer does not agree with me.
I have broken my leg.
I had nearly fallen.
He gets his living.
> How are you pleased here?
J I am very much pleased with
I this town.
I like this town very much.
Where did we stop?
Materials for conversation.
401
a3 @ie n^otten
IJtuf jebcn ^att.
SSa8 ben S3riet 3^re§ @o^neg 6c= \
trifft - i
2)em [ei, xok xi)m tDotte.
(Sr macfet fid^ ©cbattfen barilfecr.
2)a8 ift feine tunft.
D^ie^men ®te fic^ iit ad^t.
3c3^ tx)itt eg borauf atttommeit toffett.
^r ift ber bcut)ci;en ®pxa6)t m'd^tiQ.
^6) fait It t^nt bie @tirn bictett.
S4 h?etbe @tc ita^ §aufe fU^rcit.
Somebody asks for you.
Who has asked for me?
Who is waiting for me ?
Wait a moment for me.
Who has drunk out of this glass?
Have you changed your opinion?
Have you any more to say?
Do anything {or as) you please.
At any rate, at all events.
As to the letter of your son —
Be that as it may.
He troubles his head about it
Any one can do it.
Look about you. Take care.
I will take my chance of that.
He is master of the German lan-
guage.
I can face him.
I shall see you home.
4.
^^ Unn mic6 itid^t tion t^m toS«
mad^eit.
S3(et6ett @ic rtic^t ju lattge au8.
3 (men atleitt tantt eg geliugett.
^uf ineiner Ut)r ift e§ tiler U'^r.
@r nal)m eg mit ©ematt.
(Sr ift toon ©eBurt ein grattjofe.
@ie ift biel ^iibfc^er alg i^rc
@d;n)eftcr.
@ie niogeit atteiti ge^en.
dx get)t itd^fteg ^a^x auf Sfleifeit.
3c^ xoax im S3egriff, weg^uge^ett.
33or attcit 2)ittgeii tocrgeffeit @tc
bag ntc^t.
@ie ift liber stransig.
^egen ©ittbru^ ber 9kc^t.
SSir hjotteit einett ©attg utit bie
@tabt mad^eit.
lrb rec^t or gut felit.
OTTO, German Conv.-Grammar.
I cannot get away from him.
Do not stay beyond your time.
None but you can succeed.
It is four o'clock by my watch.
He took it by force.
He is a Frenchman by birth.
She is prettier by far than her
sister.
You may go by yourself.
He goes abroad next year.
I was about to go away.
Above all,. don't forget this.
She is above twenty.
About the close of the evening.
Let us take a turn about the
town.
Shall I send him word about it?
I could not forbear laughing.
It would be no advantage to me.
That will do.
26
402
Materials for conversation.
5.
^df hin ntd;t rcic^ geniig, um etnc
jolc^e StuSgabe ju mad;cn.
2Ba3 i)aUn @ic am 5(uge^
(g8 te^It tt)t immcr ettras.
?o[fen @ic fic^ toon mir ratcn.
'Bit milrbeu nic^t ilbcl baran t^un,
bal^in ju ge^cn.
I)te[c3 ift fc^trer ;|u crtangen.
m\t tci^ter a)Mit^e.
9?arf? ttelcr aJiiil^e.
(5r ircip fic^ in afle3 ju fittben.
@otoieI tc^ njeifj.
©otoici i(^ mid; erinnrc
34> tt^erbe fo frei [ein, @ie ju Bc=
fiic^cn.
^eute U&cr cin 3at;r.
Saun trcrben @ie toiebcr juriid*
fommcn'^
@8 ift mir um fo Itcfccr.
3c^ tann i^« nid^t auSftebcn.
ii^eun i^ il^m je bcgegnen fctttc.
^aS Ucgt mir baran '^
®(au6en @ie, [o leid^t batoon ju
fommen'il
I cannot afford to spend so much.
What ails your eye?
She is ever ailing.
Be advised by me.
It would not be amiss for you to
go there (you had better go).
That is hard to come at.
With no great ado.
After much ado [or trouble).
Nothing comes amiss to him.
As far as I know.
To the best of my remembrance.
I shall take the liberty to call
on you.
By this time twelve months.
How long will it be before you
come back?
I like it all the better.
I can't abide (bear) him.
If I ever chance to meet him.
What care I?
Do you think to come off so?
6.
@ic miiffcn c8 t^nn, ®ic mijgen
ttjotten ober nid;t.
3d) bin baju gencigt.
3cb frage nic^ts barua^.
^e^ren @te fid^ uid;t baran.
igott id; i^n ^olcn la[jen'^
3ft bag 3^r (Srnft'^
SBcnn c8 3l?nen gcfatit, fo nel^mcn
@ic e8.
9inn, iraS fott bicfcS atteS bebcutcn?
3d^ mod^tc tt)t|fcn, tuaS bag ift.
2)a ftccft ctwaS ba^intcr.
3d; ^alte (ncbmc) @ic bcim SBort.
^(i) tann nic^ts bajUr.
'SRan tann nic^t bal^inttr fommcn.
3d; ncbmc c8 nid;t fo genan mit il;m.
'iBa^ tt>oUte ic^ ho6) fagcn'^
3d; l;abe nic^ts baran au«jufctjen.
Sir miiffcn nnS bc^elfen.
X'u *Sad;e b«t nid;t toicl auf fic^.
5>a« gcl;t nid;t mit rcd;ten3)ingcn ju.
2)a8 bat nicbtg jn fagen.
3)a8 tbut nid;t«.
(SS gcfd;ic^t ibm rcc^t.
^ai tonn mir nicmanb locrbcnfen.
Willing or unwilling, you must
do it.
I am inclined that way.
I do not care.
Never mind that.
Shall I send for him?
Are you serious?
If you like it, take it.
Well and what of all this?
I wonder what this is.
There is some mystery about it.
I take you at your word.
jThat is not my fault.
)I cannot help it.
You cannot get at it.
I am not so strict with him.
What was I going to say?
I find no fault with it.
We must make shift.
It is of no great consequence.
It is not at all right about it.
(That does not signify.
\No matter for that.
It serves him right.
No one can blame me for that.
Materials for conversation.
403
®ic^ ben ^o^f jcrBrec^en.
®ie tDcrbeii ausgekd^t ttjerbeit.
(Sr l^at fic^ au8 bent @tauBc gemac^^t.
To split one's head with thinking.
You will be laughed at.
He has taken himself off.
Some German proverbs.
1.
2)er 9}?en[(^ bcn!t'8, ®ott len!t'8.
2)urc^ @(^aben tt)irb man Hug.
(S^rltc^ twabrt am langften.
^tteS ^at feine Beit-
(Site mtt SSeile.
^ufgefdjoBen ift nid^t aufgel^ofccn.
aUU&tggang ift otter Rafter Stnfang.
SStele §anb' mad;en fcatb ein (Snb'.
S)a§ Serf UU ben 2)Zetfter.
§rif(^ getuagt ift l^atb getl^an. \
§rtf^ begonnen, l^alB getDonnen. |
^rmut ift feine ©c^anbc.
SSte getDonnen, fo jerronnen.
SBic bie 5Ir6elt, fo ber So^n.
SGSie ber §err, fo ber 2)iener.
Si^ot fennt fetn ®e6ot.
@ine ©c^iT^alBe mac^t feinen @om«
mer.
(Sin Ungtiicf fommt nic attein.
^ttjutoiel ift ungefunb.
Man proposes, and God disposes.
Experience makes a man wise.
Honesty is the best policy.
All in good time.
The more haste, the worse speed.
Delaying is not breaking on.
Idleness is the root of all evil.
Many hands make quick work.
The work recommends the master.
Well begun is half done.
Poverty is no disgrace.
Lightly come, lightly gone.
As the labour, so the reward.
Like master, like man.
Necessity has no law.
One swallow makes no summer.
Misfortunes never come singly.
Too much of one thing is good
for nothing.
@in gcBranntcS ^inb fc^eut bag A burnt child dreads the fire,
i^cuer.
2.
3eber n^et^ am beften, too ber @(!^u^ None knows so well, where the
i^n briidt. shoe pinches, as he that wears it.
®Uid) unb gleic^ gefellt \i6} gern. Birds of a feather flock together.
SSotoon bvig §er3 t>olI ift, ge^t ber What tlie heart thinks, the mouth
2«nnb iiBer.
(3)er) §nnger ift ber befte ^o6).
2)te 3cit biingt Slofcn
SSer liigt, ber ftie^lt.
SSer juerft fommt, ma^tt juerft.
S)en (Sele^rten ift gut ^rcbigen.
Seber ift fi(^ felBft ber m6)\k.
SBefjer tttoai, at§ nid^ts.
^(cine Xop^t taufen batb iifcer.
Sfta6) 9legen folgt €onnenfd;ein.
SD'iorgcnftunb l^at (Solb im 9)iunb.
p ift nic^t atteS ®otb, toaQ gtdnjt.
fibnng mac^t ben 3}?eifter.
SBie man'g treibt, fo ge^t'6.
A good stomach is the best sauce.
Time and straw make medlars
ripe.
Show me a liar, and I'll show
thee a thief.
First come, first served.
A word to the wise.
Charity begins at home.
Better aught, than nought.
A little pot is soon hot.
After the storm comes a calm.
Early to bed and early to rise
makes a man healthy, wealthy
and wise.
All is not gold that glitters.
Practice makes perfect.
Do well and have well.
26*
404 Materials for conversation.
Unred^t @ut gebeiijt ntd^t. Ill gotten wealth never prospers.
Untraut toerbirtt uic^t. Ill weeds grow apace.
9ieiie S3efen febreu gut. A new broom sweeps clean.
Cube gut, attcS gut. All's well that ends well.
Easy conversations.
1.
SScr fto^jft an bic %\)M'i Who knocks at the door?
28er tfl ba"? "Who is there?
3Jiad;en @ie auf Open the door.
3)cr ©d^Iiiffet ftecft. The key is in the door.
@inb @ie nod^ tm S3ett? Are you in bed still?
@te^en @te auf. Get up (rise).
(S8 ift ^dt aufjuftel^en. It is time to get up.
a^ ift Ijeller ZaQ. 'Tis broad day.
Sarum fte^en @ie [o fipat auf? Why do you rise so late?
3c^ Un ijorige 9^ac^t tauge aujgc I sat up late last night.
MieBen.
3^ Bin fe'^r f^at tnS 33ett gegangctt I went to bed very late , and I
uub ^abe fc^lec^t gefd^Iafeu. slept ill to-night.
SBann fte^cu @ic getuc^nltc^ auji What time do you generally get
Urn fieben U^r. At seven o'clock. [^P?
Unb urn twictoiel U\)x fmb @ie And you, at what o'clock did you
^cute aufgeftanben'^ rise to-day?
3c^ [taub mit (Souuenaufgang auf. I got up with sun-rise.
^6) fd;Iafe uic^t gerit laugc. I don't like to sleep long.
2.
$!er«en @ie 2)eutfc^? Do you learn German?
3a, meiu §err, id; lerne e§. Yes, Sir, I learn it (I do).
2Jian fagt, @tc fpred|cn [e^r gut It is said that you speak very
2)eutfci;. well German.
3c^ tcrftc^e eS bcffcu, aU x6) c8 I understand better, than I can
f^rct!^en !auu. speak.
SBctfte^eu ®ie, waQ @ie tefen'^ Do you understand what you read?
3a, mein §err, ic^ tocr[tet>c atlc Yes, Sir; I understand all German
bcut[d;cn sBild^cr. books,
©agcn @ic mir einmat, tcic ncnncn Tell me , what do you call that
c cvlangt. There is nothing to be got with-
out pains.
Materials for conversation.
405
Winn §ei% fittb @ie ein (Sngtanber?
Sa, mein §err, S^nen ju bienen.
3(^ f^rec^c c§ ein n^cnig.
SBic lange [tub @ic [^oit itt
2)eutf(i)lanb?
3cf)n aJJonate.
®te f))red^en gtentttj^ gut 3)cittf(^
fiir biefc furjc 3eit
3t^ ^alJc fettle ^ertigfeit im@^redjen.
2)ie[c tr»irb tnit ber j^dt fommeix.
@agt 3^tteii 3t)r ?el)rer nid;t, baO
@{e immer 2)eutfd; [^red;cn
miiffett?
3a, tnein ^crr; er fagt c3 mir [ef)r
oft, a6er td^ wage e5 iud;t.
®Iau6en @te mtr, feictt @te fiitjn
unb f^rcc^en @ie, o^ne ju be=
[orgen, oh @te eiuige gel^tcr
madden ober ttid;t.
SBenn tc^ fo f^rec^c, fo irlrb mid;
jeberniann au8tad;en
2)icfe8 bat nic^ts ju [ageit ; aber i(^
giaubc eg iiidyt.
^iffen (Ste nid;t, ba^, um gut
fpred^eu ju lernen, man anfangt,
\6.}k6)t ju [^Tcd)cn?
Sir, are you an Englishman?
Yes, Sir, at your service.
Do you speak German?
I speak a little.
How long have you been in Ger-
many ?
Ten months.
You speak German pretty well
for this short time.
I have not the facility of speaking
That will come in time.
Does not your master tell you,
that you must ahvays speak
German ?
Yes, Sir, he tells me so very
often, but I dare not.
Believe me , be confident , and
speak without minding whether
you make some mistakes or
not.
If I speak so, every body will
laugh at me.
No matter for that, but I think
not.
Do you not know, that to learn
to speak well, one begins by
speaking badly?
APPENDIX.
A FEW SPECIMENS OF GERMAN POETICAL LITEKATCKE.
1. §a6e(n unb ^rja^ungen.
1. Pa0 ^Uljttdjen imb ber Ptamant.
(Sin ber'^ungert §ul)nd^cu fanb
6inen feinen ^iamant'
Unb l3erf(i)arrt ^ \i)n in ben (ganb.
„^0(^te bo^, mirf) jjn erfreu'n/'
@prac^ c§, „bieier jd^one ©tein
9?ur ein SBeijenfornd^cu fein!"
^x. «. .^pagcbovn (died 1794).
2. Pa0 Padjleitt.
%n 33a(^Iein, filber^efl unb flor,
^u eilft boriiber immcrbar,
^m Ufer fle^ ic^, )inn'^ unb finn';
2Bo fommft bu t)cr'? 2Bo gefjft bu ^in'?
„S(^ fomm' au^ hnntkx gell'en ©d^oo^;
^luf meinem Spiegel* jci^mebt fo milb
^e§ blouen §immel§ freunblic^ 58ilb.
^'rum f}ah^ id^ frol^en ^inber[inn ;
®§ trcibt mic^ fort, meiji nid^t wto^'in.
®er^ mi(^ gerufen au§ bem ©tein,
®er, bcnf id^, n^irb mein gii^irer fein."
®ot^e. t 1832.
3. Per ®d|fe unb ber Clfel.
Od)§ unb Sfel janftcn fid^^
Seim Spajiergong urn bic SBettc:
aBer am meiften 2Bci§^eit ^dtte;
Reiner fiegte, Reiner mdj. —
Snblidb tarn man uberein^:
®a^ ber 2ott)e, menu er njoQte,
®iefen ©treit ent|d[)eiben foflte, —
Unb ttjag fonnte fUiger )ein?
93eibe treten, tiefgebiidtt,
S3or be§ 3:icrbe^errj'd)cr§ 5:^rone,
^er mit einem eblen §o^ne^
^luf ha^ $aar ^ernieber blicft.
1) to hide. 2) think. 3) course, way. 4) mirror. 5) he who.
6) quarrelled. 7) came to the agreement, agreed. 8) scorn.
410 A few specimens of German poetical literature.
^nblid^ [priest bic ^Dkjcftdt
3u bcm ©I'd unb bem garrcu^:
,,31'^r fcib qIIc beibe 9^arren." —
3cbcr gafft \\)n an^ unb gcljit.
^feffel. i 1809.
4. Per Bnabe unb bic Jattcln.
©in ^nabc afi, tote tJielc ^nabcn,
®ic ^atteln fiir fcin Scben gern^,
Unb urn be§ @utcn Did ju l^aben,
©0 ^flanjt er cinen ^attelfern
3n |eine§ 33atcr§ 33Iumengarten. —
2)er SSatcr fa^ il^m Idc^elnb _ju
Unb fragte: „<5)atteln pflanjeft bu?
D ^inb, ha mufet bu longc tt)arten;
®cnn n)iffe! biefer eble 53aum
S^rdgt oft nad^ S^anjig Sa'^rcn faum
^ie crften fcincr fiiHen ^^riic^te." —
^axl, bcr fid) beffcn nid)t Dcrfa^S
Stanb anfangg ganj bctroffen ha-,
%od) balb mit fro^Iid^em ©efid}te
9fiuft cr: „®a§ foil mid^ nic^t Derbrie^cn; —
S3eIo^nt bie S^ii mix'" meinen S^ei^,
8o fann id^ ja bereinft al§ ©rei»,
23)a§ jcjt ber ^nabe pflanjt, genie^cn." ^feff«i.
5. Per Jifdjer.
8a6 ein 5ifd)cr an bem 53ad), tooUtc t^^ijd^Icin fangen;
®od) c§ blicb ben ganjcn Xag leer bie ^Ingel l^angen.
(Jnblid) jMdt^ c§, unb er fa^ gifc^Iein joppelnb' f^mebcu.
©olbenvotlid^ I)ing e§ bo, flc^t' if)n urn fein Sebcn.
„fiieber i^ifd)er, Iq^ mid) Io§/' fprad)'§ mit glatten Shorten,
,;2afi mid) in ber 2BcIIcn ©d)o^, bi^ id) grofj gemorbcn."
„i}fifd)Ieiu, bag fnnn nid^t gefd)e^'n, t)ier ^ilft fein S9ef(agcn.
Sie^' id^ jejt bid) mieber ge^'n, mod^t' ju oiel ic^ magcn."
„®cnfc bod^, mie flcin id^ bin; l^aft ja faum brci 93iffen^
fiafj mid) in bie Q^Iut ba^in; mirft mid^ nic^t ocrmiffcn."
„2BeiI bu gar ju nicblid) bift unb fo jung am Seben,
©ei bir cine f(einc grift ^ nod^ Don mir gegeben.
2Birft bu aber grower fein, benf an bcine 2Borte.
StcIIe bid) jum gauge ein l^ier an biefem. Orte."
grb^lid^ fprong ba§ gifc^Iein bi" i" bie ^IBcflcnfii^Ie ^^
Xricb mit ^eiter'm, fro^cm 8inn feine luft'gen 6|)icle.
1) ox. 2) to gaze at. 3) liked very much, was fond of. —
4) to expect. 5) instead of Jncnn nur, provided. 6) to bob. —
7) wavering, trembling. 8) bite. 9) delay. 10) the cool waves.
A few specimens of German poetical literature. 411
?ll§ cin ^Ql^r Doriibcr tear, bad)t' e§ fcincr 3."55orte,
©tellte fic^ bem t^ild)er bar an bem alten Orte.
^0(^ ber jprad^: „2BeiI bu jo treu an bem SSort gcl^angen,
Safe i(^ bid^ auf immcr frei, mill bid^ niemal§ fangen."
Seffelbt.
6. Per tuet^e Jirfdj.
@§ Qingcn brei ^dger ido^I auf bie 33irfcf) \
©ic tt)oIItcn crjagen ben lucifeen §iric^.
©ie legten fid) untcr ben Xannenbaum,
®a l^atten bie ®rei einen feltfamen Xraum.
S)er @rfte.
5Jlir ^at gctrdumt^ \^ tiopy auf ben 53u)d)^,
^a raufd)te ber §irfd^ ^erau§, ^ufd), ^ufd^!
S)er 3 incite.
Unb al§ er fprang mit ber §unbe ©cflaff^
®a brannf id^^ i^m auf ha§ ^eG, ^iff, |)affl
2)er ©rittc.
Unb al§ id^ ben §irfd^ an ber Srbe fal^,
®a ftiefe^ id; luftig in§ §orn, trara!
©0 lagen fie ha unb f|)rad^en bie ®rei,
^a rannte ber roeije ^irfd) Dorbei.
Unh cl^' bie ^dger i^n red^t geW'n,
©0 mar er bauon (off) iiber Siefe unb §o{)'n.
§ufd), ^uW ^iff, paff! trara!
Si. Ut)taub. t 1862.
^iop ging einft nad^ einem ©tdbtd^en ^in.
^in 2Banb'rer fam unb grii^te \t)n —
Unb fragt': „3Bie lange, ^^reunb, f}ah^ id) ju ge^'n
®i§ ju bem i^lcden^ bort, ben mir t)on meitem fet)'n?" —
,,®e{)!" fprid^t Sfop. — Unb er: „^a§ meife id^ m^l,
^a^, menu id) meiter fommen foH,
^d) gef)en muJ3; aflein bu foUft mir fagen:
^n micDiel ©tunben?" — „^un, fo get)'!" — ,,^c^ fe^e mo^I/'
iBrummt ^ier ber i^rembe, „biefer ^erl^ ift toll;
Sd) merbe ni^t§ Don il^m erfragen;",,
Unb brel^t fid^ meg unb gc^t. — „^t/' ruft Sfop, „ein SBort!
3mei ©tunben bringen bid) an ben beftimmten Ort."
1) hunting. ' 2) I dreamt. 3) to beat the bush. 4) barking.
5) I fired at him. 6) 1 blew. 7} town. 8) this fellow.
412 A few specimens of German poetical literature.
®cr 2Bnnb'rer bleibt betroffen ftcfien.
„(&i/' ruft cr, „iinb,^ti)ie tpelBt bu'§ nun?"
„Unb tt)ic/' Derl'cljt tjo^, „fonnt' id) t)n\ 9(u§fpruci) t^un^
S3eDor ic^ beinen ©ang^ gc|ef)en?" —
<)iicolai. t 1811.
8. Per ^linbe unb ber i^aljine.
SSon ungefdl^r mu§ cinen 33Iinben
(Jin 8a{)mer auf ber StrnBc finbcn,
Unb jeber :^offt fd^on frciibcnbofl,
®aB i^n ber anb're leiten fofl.
„'5)ir/' [priest ber Sa:^me, bcijuftefien? —
3>d) armer 5)lttnn fnnn felbft nid)t gei^en.
®oc^ f(!)einl'§, bafj bu ju einer £'n[t
(5in $aar gefunbc ^ i"it 2Bcib unb ^inb. —
„0 35IIncr! 3oK"fi^! entflcud) gefd^minb!" —
^§ br5]^nt' unb brol^ntc^^ bumpf T)cran;
fittut I)eulten 6turm' unb 2Bog' um3 .'pau^S.
®cr 3oflner fprang jum ^cid) {)umn
Unb blicft in ben iumult f)inau§. —
^QSarml^crjigcr ipimmcl! crbarme bid^!
S3erIorcn! ^^crloreu! 2Bcr rcttet mid)?"
1) redoubt. 2) the south wind. 3) the Mediterranean. 4) blew.
5) Italy. 6) to scare. 7) for barft, burst. 8) sounded, echoed.
9) mainstream. 10) bed. 11) to sound dully.
A few specimens of German poetical literature. 429
®ic ©d^oHen rollten ©to^ auf ©to^^
5(n beiben ©nbcn, t)kx unb bort;
3erborflen unb ^ertrummcrt fc^o^
@in ^feiler nac^ bent anbern fort.
®er bebenbe ^otlner mit SBeib unb ^inb,
@r i^culte no(^ lauter qI§ Sturm unb SBinb.
§o(^ Quf bem fernen Ufer ftanb
©in ©c^marm t)on @affern^_ gro^ unb flein,
Unb jeber fc^rie unb rang bie §Qnb;
®o(^ moc^tc niemanb Sftetter fein.
®er bebenbe ^oHner mit 2Beib unb ^inb,
©urd^^eultc nac^ 9tettung ben ©turm unb 2Sinb.
3iaf(^ gaIo|)^iert ein ©raf ^croor
5Iuf l^D^em 3io^, ein ebler ©raf.
2Ba§ l^ielt be§ ©rafen §)Qnb empor?
(Sin SBeutet mar e§, tiod unb ftraff.
,,3tt'ei^unbert ^iftolcn^ finb jugcfagt
®em, melc^er bie Dlettung ber Airmen magt!"
Unb immer p^er ]djxooU bie i^Iut,
Unb immer lauter fi^nob ber 2Binb;
Unb immer tiefer fan! ber 'iHlni. —
„0 9fietter! 9tetter! fomm' gefd)minb!"
©tet§ $feiler bel ^fciler jerborft unb hxa^-,
Saut frad^ten unb ftiirjten bie 33ogen nad).
„§aIIol^! ^aHo^! ^rifc^ auf, geraagt!"
§od£) {)ielt ber ©raf ben $rei§ empor.
Sin jeber t)bxV§, hod) jeber jagt;
^u§ taufenben tritt feiner Dor.
5Sergeben§ burd)^euUe mit 2Beib unb ^inb
2)er 3oflner nac| 9lettung ben Sturm unb SBinb.
©iel^', fc^lid)t^ unb red)t ein 33Quer§mann
51m SBanberftabe fd^ritt bat)er,
DDZit grobem ^ittel anget!^an^
%n mum unb 51ntli| ^oc^ unb ^e^r.
(£r l^orte ben ©rafen, Derna{)m fein 2Bort
Unb fd^aute ba§ na^e 5Serberben bort.
Unb fii^n, in @otte§ DIamen, fprang
@r in ben nd(%ften ^ifd)erfa!^n.
iroj SSirbel^ ©turm unb 2Bogenbrang
^am ber ©rretter gliidOc^ an.
1) one pushing another. 2) gaper. 3) guinea. 4) simply
and plainly. 5) dreesed. 6) whirlpool.
480 A- few specimens of German poetical literature.
®od) me^c! bcr D^ad^en tnor oflju f(ein,
Urn ^letter t)on oflcn sugleic^ ju jein.
Unb breimal jmang er fcinen ^a^n,
3:roJ SBirbel, Sturm unb SIBogenbrang;
Unb breimal tarn cr gliictlic^ an,
S3i§ i^m bic Siettung ganj gelang.
^aum iDoren bic Sejten in )id)crn $ort,
So roKte ba§ lejtc ©ctriimmer fort.
„^kx," rief ber ©raf, „mcin inocfrer ^reunb,
^m i[t bcr ^rci§! ^omm ^cr! 5Jimm f)in!"
(Sag an, tnar ha^ nid^t brao gcmeint? —
53ci ^ott! bcr ©raf trug ^o^en Sinn;
®ed) p^er unb l^immlijc^er, mal^rlicf)! filing
®a§ §cr5, ha^ ber ^auer im ^ittel trug.
„«mcin Seben ift fur ©olb nictit fell K
^rm bin id) jioar, bod) 1)cib^ id) fatt.
®em 3bflner merb' gu'r ©elb 5U teil,
2)er ^ab' unb @ut ocrloren ^at!"
So rief er mit ^erjli^em ^Bieberton
Unb ttianbtc ben 9luden unb ging babon.
SBurgcr. f 1794.
7. Pic iUrgfdinft. '
3u *5)iont)§, bem 2;i)ranncn, |d)Iid)
W6xo^, hzn ®oI(^ im (Skiuanbc;
3^t)n fd)Iugen bie §dfd)er^ in 53anbe.
,3a§ iDoateft bu mit bcm 2)old)c? jprid)!"
©ntgegnct i^m fin[tcr bcr 2Biltcrid). —
„^k Stabt Dom 2:t)ranncn befrcien!"
„*3)a§ foflft bu ^reuje bercuen."
„^^ bin/' fprid^t iencr, „^n [terben bercit
Unb bittc nid)t um mein Men;
®od^ miflft bu @nabe^ mir gcbcn,
S^ flet)c bid) um brci 3:agc ;Scit,
SBi'3 id) bie Sc^mefter bcm ®attcn gcfreit^
Sd) laffc ben grcunb bir al§ iBiirgcn,
St)n magft bu, cntrinn' id), crmiirgcn."
®a (deceit bcr ^5nig mit nrgcr 2ift^
Unb fprid)t nad) turjcm ^ebenfcn:
„^rei 2:agc mil \6) bir jd^cnfen.
1) venal. 2) the hostage, security. 3) the guards. 4) a fa-
vour, grace. 5) wedded, married. 6) maliciously.
A few specimens of German poetical litereture. 431
%o^ tDiffc: tDenn fie oerflric^en bie grift,
(5!)' bu juriicf mir gegeben bift,
@o mug er ftatt beiner erblaffen^
®0(^ bir ifl bie ©tvafe erloffen."
Unb er fommt jum greunbe: „^er ^oitig gebeut^
®aB \^ am ^reu^ mit bem Sebert
SBcja^Ie ha^ frebelnbe ©trebcn^;
SS)od) mid er mir gonnen brei Sage S^'it,
58i§ id) bie Sc^tceftcr bem ©atten gefreit:
©0 bleib' bu bem ^onig ^um ^fanbe,
^i§ id) fomme, ju lofen bie S3anbe."
Unb fd^tueigenb umormt i^n ber treue greuub
Unb liefert fic^ au§ bem it)rannen;
®er anberc jie^et Don bannen.
Unb el^e ba§ britte DJbrgenrot fd^cint,
§at er fd^nell mit bem ©atten bie ©d^mefter Dereint;
4ilt f)eim mit forgenber 6eele,
©omit er bie grift* nid)t derfe^^e.
®a giegt unenblidier Stegen l^erab;
QSon ben 33ergen ftiir^en bie Dueflen,
Unb bie 33dd)e, bie ©trome fd)n)enen,
Unb er fommt an§ Ufcr mit iDanbcrnbem Stab —
®a reijet bie ^riicfe ber ©trubel {)inab,
Unb bonnernb f|)rengen bie 2Cogen
S)e§ ®en)5lbe§ Irac^enben 58ogen.
Unb troftIo§ irrt er an Ufer§ 3fJanb;
SSie tt)eit er and) fpd^et unb blidet
Unb bie Stimme, bie rufenbe, fdjidet,
2)a ftoget fein 5^a(^en Dom fic^ern ©tranb,
®er i^n fe|e an ba§ gemiinfc^te Sanb;
^ein ©d^iffer lenfet bie gdt)re^,
Unb ber milbe Strom mirb ^um 9JJeere^.
®a finft er an§ Ufer unb meint unb fte^t,
®ie §dnbe jum 3<^u§' erl^oben:
„€) b^tttme be§ StromeS Sloben!
@§ eilcn bie Stunben, im ^ittag fte^t
^ie Sonne, unb menu fie niebergefit,
Unb id) fann bie Stabt nid^t errei(^en.
So mug ber greunb mir erbleic^en^."
1) die. 2) orders. 3) attempt. 4) the appointed term or
day. 5) the ferry-boat. 6) like a sea. 7) Jupiter. 8) perish
for me.
432 A few specimens of German poetical literature.
®0(^ it)ad)fenb crneiit fid) be§ ©tromcS 2But,
Unb SBelle auf SBcflc jcrrinnet,
Unb ©tunbe an ©timbe entrinnet.
S)a trcibt i^n bie 5tng[t, ha [aflt er fid^ Wut
Unb tt)irft fid) I)incin in bic broufcnbe glut ^
Unb teilt mit gemaltigcn 5{rmen
S)en (Strom, unb ein @ott ^at Srbarmen.
Unb gcminnt bn§ Ufer unb cilet fort
Unb banfet bem rettenben ©ottc;
®a ftiirjet bie rnubenbe Stotte^
^ert)or au§ be§ 9BaIbe§ ndd)tlid)cm Ort,
§)cn ^fob i^m ft)errcnb, unb fd)naubenb Tloxh
Unb l^emmet be§ 26nnbcrer§ @ile^
W\t bro^enb gcfc^tnungener ^eule.
,3[Ba§ n^ollt i^r?" ruft er t)or ©d)reden bleid^,
„^^ ^aht nid^t§ qI§ mein Seben,
Sba§ mu^ ic^ bem l^onige geben."
Unb entreif^t bie 5?eule bem"^ ndd)ften gleid^:
„Um be§ greunbe§ toiflen, erbnrmet eud^!"
Unb brei, mit gemaltigen 6trcid)en,
©riegt er^, bie anbern entn)eid)en ^.
Unb bie ©onne Derfenbet glii^enben 53ranb,
Unb t)on bcr unenblid)en &u^e
©rmattet, finfen bie ^niee:
„0 ^a\i bu mic^ gndbig nu§ 9iduber§ §anb,
^)lu§ bem ©trom mid^ gerettct nn§ I)eilige Snnb
Unb fon l^ier tjerfd)mad)tcnb Derberben,
Unb bcr greunb mir, ber licbenbe, fterbcn!"
Unb I)ord)! ha fprubelt^ e§ filber^cn
©nnj na{)e, luie riefcInbeS ^iaufd)en,
Unb ftiflc l)dU er, ju Inuid)cn';
Unb fic^', au^ bem gclfen, ge)d)mdljtg, fd)nefl,
©pringt murmelnb bcrDor ein lebenbiger Ouett,
Unb frcubig biicft er fid) nieber
Unb erfrifd)et bie brennenbcn C^licber®.
Unb bie (Sonne blidt'' biivd) ber 3^Dci9C ©riin
Unb matt auf ben gidnjenben 93^itten
®er 53dume giganti|d)e Sd)attcn;
S^m'i 2Banbercr fiet)t er bie Strafje 5icl)'n,
2Sifl cilcnbcn £aufe§ Doriibcr flie^'n,
1) the roaring stream. 2) a band of robbers. 3) speed. 4) he
fells. 5) run away. C) it bubbles. 7) to listen. 8) limbs. 9) peeps.
A few specimens of German poetical literature. 433
^a T^ort er bie SBorte fagen:
„Se^t tt)irb cr an§ Ptxni^ gcfc^lagen^"
Unb bie ^Ingft bepgelt^ ben eilcnben gu^,
^{)n jagen ber ©orge Oualcn:
®a fc^immern^ in ^benbrot§ ©tra'^Icn
iSon feme bie 3^""^"* ^on 8i;rQ!u§,
Unb entgegen fommt il)m $:^iloftratu§,
®e§ §aufe§ reblic^cr filter,
®er er!ennet entfe^t ben ©ebieter:
„3uT^iicfl bu retteft^ ben greunb nid^t me^r,
©0 rette ha§ eigene Seben:
^en Sob erieibct er eben.
SSon ©tunbe ju @tunbe genjartet' er
Wit l^offenber (geele ber SBieberfel^r,
S^m fonnte ben mutigen ©lauben
^er §)o:^n be§ Sltjrannen nid)t rauben." —
,,Unb ift e§ ju fpat, unb !ann id) i^m nid)t
€in 9tetter toinfommcn erfd^einen,
©0 foil mid^ ber Sob i^m dereinen.
®eff' riil^me ber blut'ge S^rann fic^ nid^t,
%a^ ber greunb bem greunbe gebrod^en bie $flid^t^.
@r fd^taij^te^ ber Opfcr ^meie
Unb glaube an Siebe unb Sreue."
Unb bie ©onne ge^t unter — ba fte^t er om %^ot —
Unb fie^t ha§ touj fd^on er^o^et^
®a§ bie 9)Zenge gaffenb^ umfte^ct;
tHn bem 8eile fd^on jie^t man ben greunb empor;
S)a jertrennt er gemnltig ben bid^ten Sl^or^^:
„^i^, §enfer!" ruft er, ermiirget!
^a bin id^, fiir hm er gebiirget^M"
Unb ©rftaunen ergreift ba^ 33oIf uml^er,
Sn ben airmen liegen fid^ beibe
Unb meinen oor ©d^mcrjen unb greube.
®a fiel^t man !ein ^iluge tl^rdnenleer,
Unb gum ^iinige bringt man bie SBunbermdr'^^;
®er fiil^lt ein menf(^(id}e§ 9f{iif)ren,
8d6t fd^neU bor hm Sl^ron fie fiil^ren.
1) nailed. 2) to lend wings. 3) glitter. 4) roofs. 5) rescue.
6) word, promise. 7) let him slaughter. 8) raised up. 9) gazing.
10) crowd. 11) bailed. 12) the wonderful news.
OTTO, German Conv.-Grammar. 28
434 A few specimens of German poetical literature.
Unb blicfet fie langc uertDunbert an,
®'rauf fprid)t cr: „(S§ ift cucf) gclungcn^,
S^r f)Qbt ba§ §erj mir bejroungeu;
Unb bie ^reue, fie ift bod) fein lecrcr 2Ba!^n ^
©0 ne^mct and) mid^ jum ©cnoffen^ an:
Sd) fei, gcmd^rt mir bie 33ittc,
Sn eu'rem S3unbc ber ^rittc."
8. Per jling bes ^olijkrttteo. *)
6r ftanb auf feinc§ '^ad:)^^ S^nmn,
Unb fdjaute mit Dergniigten ©innen
51uf ha^ bef|errfd)tc Bamo§ !^in.
,,*2)ie§ aUcS ift, mir untcrttjdnig/'
^cgann er ju ^Ig^ptcn^ ^onig,
„®efte^c, ba6 xd) gliicflid) bin."
„®u ]^aft ber ©otter @unft erfa^ren;
S)ie* t)DrmaI§ beine§glcid)cn waren,
©ie jmingt je^t bcine§ S^pk^^ 5)b(^t.
®od) einer lebt nod), fie ju rdc^en;
®id) fann mein 5J2unb nid)t gliidlic^ fprcd^en,
6o lang' be§ gfcinbc§ ^iigc wac^t."
Unb e^' ber ^onig nod) geenbet,
S)a fteOt fic^, tjon 9JZiIet gcfcnbet
(Sin ^ote bem 3:i)rannen bar:
„2a^, §err, bc§ Opfer§ ^iifte^ fteigen,
Unb mit bc§ 2orbeer§ muntern S^ocigcn
^Scfrdnje bir bcin fiirftlid) §aar.
(SJctroffen fan! ber gcinb dom ©peerc.
^Ii6) fenbet mit ber frot)cn 5JJdre^
®cin treuer i^elbl^err $oU)bor;"
Unb nimmt au^ cinem fd)iDar5en 93ecfen,
dlod) blutig jn ber bciben ©d)recfen,
(Jin mo^lbcfannteS ^aupt l^crbor.
®er ,(?onig tritt juriid mit ©rauen:
„^o(i} marn' id) bid), bem ©liid ju trauen,"
53crfc^t cr mit beforgtem 33Iid;
1) you have succeeded. 2) idle dream. 3) into your fellow-
ship. 4) those who. 5) incense. 6) message.
*) See the translation in the Key.
A few specimens of German poetical literature. 435
„^ebenf, auf ungetreucn SBellen
— 3Bie leic^t tann fie ber ©turm ^erfd^ellen, —
6d)raimmt beinec ^lotte jtDcifelnb ©liirf."
Unb e^' er nocf) ba§ 2Bort gcf|)rod}en,
^at t!^n ber Subcl ^ unterbrod)en,
€)er t)on ber Oi^ebe^ jaudjjenb fc^aflt.
93Ht fremben ©d)d|en reid) bekben,
^e^rt 5u ben ^eimifd^en ©cftaben
®er (5d)iffe maftenreid)er SBalb.
®er fonig{id)e ©aft erftounet:
„®ein ©liid ift fieute gut gelaunet,
i)oc^ t«rd)te fetnen Unbeftanb.
"Sier Ureter ^ nie befiegte ©d^aren
53ebrduen^ bic^ mit ^ricg§gefaf)rcn,
©d^on na^c finb fie biefem ©tranb."
Unb e^' i^m no(^ ba§ SBort cntfaden,
<3)a fie(}t man'§ t)on ben ©c^iffen mallen,
Unb tQufenb 8timmen rufen: ,,©ieg!
58on geinbe§ D^iot finb mi befreiet,
®ie c^reter ^at ber ©turm jcrftreuet:.
3^orbei, geenbet ift ber ^rieg."
®Q§ prt ber ©aftfreunb mit ^ntfe|en:
„^^iirn3at)r, \d) mug bid) gliidlid) fdjdjcn;
^0(^/' fprid^t er, „5ittr' id) fiir bein §eil.
9DUr grauet^ Dor ber ©otter 5^kibe
^e§ 2eben§ ungemifd^te greube
2Barb fcinem ^rbifc^en^ ju teil'.
„^tuc^ mir ift aU^^ n)o^I geraten:
iBei aften meinen §errfd)ert^aten
Segleitet mid^ be§ §immel§ ^ulb;
^od) '^att' id) einen teuern Srbcn,
®en nat)m mir ©ott, id^ fa!) i^n fterben,
1)em ©liid beja^It' id) mcine (Sd)ulb.
'3)'rum miflft bu bic^_ Dor 8eib hma^xtn,
©0 flej^e 5U ben Unfic^tbaren,
®ag fie jum ©liid ben ©d)mer5 Derlei^'n.
9Jod) feinen fa'^ id) fro^Iid) enben,
^uf hm mit immer DoIIen §dnben
^ie ©otter if)re ©aben ftreu'n.
1) the shouts. 2) road, roadstead. 3) the Cretans. 4) old form
for bebrol^en threaten. 5) I am afraid of, I fear. 6) mortal. 7) ju
teil toerben to fall to one's lot.
28*
436 A few specimens of German poetical literature.
Unb menn'g bie ©fitter nic^t gcrod^ren,
So a(i)V Quf beincS greunbc§ 2e]^ren
Unb rufc felbft ta^ Ungliitf l^cr;
Unb \va^ Don alien beinen ©c^djen
^ein ^erj am {)5c^[ten mag ergo^en,
®a§ nimm unb mirf'S in biefe§ §J?eer/'
Unb jencr fpridjt, Don ^^urd^t bemeget:
„53on aHem, tt)a§ bie ^nfel ^eget,
^ft bicjer ailing mein f)od)[te§ @ut.
S^n miH i^ ben ©rrinmjen^ n^eil^cn,
Ob fie mein ©liirf mir bann uerjeil^en/' —
Unb mivft ba§ ^leinob in bie ^lut.
Unb bei be§ ndd^ften 5D^Drgen§ Sid^te,
2)a tritt mit frb^Iic^em ©efic^te
Sin gifd^er t)or ben i^iirften !^in:
„§err, biefen gijc^ ^^b' id^ gefangen,
2Bie feiner nod^ in§ D^ieJ gcgangen,
®ir sum ®e[c^enfe bring' id} i!^n."
Unb al§ ber ^od^ ben g^ifd^ jerteilet^
^ommt er beftiirjt l^erbeigeeilet
Unb ruft mit l^oc^erftauntem Wid:
„^kf), §err, ben Siting, ben hn getragcn;
Sd) fanb il^n in be§ t^ifdjeS DJIagen^
O! o^nc ©renjen* ift bein ©liidf."
§ier menbet fid^ ber ©aft mit ©raufen^:
,,©0 fann id) l^ier nid)t Idnger !^aufen;
5)^ein ^reunb fannft bu ntdjt toeitcr fein;
®ie ©otter moflen beiu 33erberbcn:
§ort eil' id), nid^t mit bir ju fterben."
Unb fprad^'§ unb fd)iffte fd)nefl fid^ ein.
9. B0lumbu0»
„2Ba§ toillft bu, x^ernanbo, fo triib unb bleid)?
®u bringft mir traurige 9DMr!" —
„%d}, ebler Q^elbl^err, bereitet md);
5}?id)t Idnger be5dl)m' id) ba§ ^cer!
SBenn je^t nid^t bie ^iifte fid) ^eigen mill,
8o fcib il^r ein Opfer ber ^ut;
(Bit forbern laut mie ©turmgebriifl^
SDe3 g^elb^errn ^eiligcS igiut/'
1) the Avenging Goddesses, Eumenides. 2) dressed. 3) maw.
4) boundless. 5) terror. G) like a howling storm.
A few specimens of German poetical literature. 437
Unb el)' no(^ bcm fitter ha^ 2Bort entflol^'n,
^a brdngte bie 9}lenge fid) nod^;
®a prmten^ bie ^riegcr, bie iriitenben, fc^on
©leid) SSogen in§ ftiHe ©emac^,
33er5tt)eif(ung im milben, Der(ofd)enben ^ 33Iid,
^luf bleicfen ©efic^tern ben Xob:
„^erratcr! mo ift nun bein gleiBenbeS^ ©liicf?
3ejt rett' un§ t)om ©ipfel ber $«ot!
^'S^u gtebft un§ nic^t ©:|3eife, fo gieB un§ bein 33(ut!
nniV riefen bie ©rf)rec!n(^en, „m\itV'
©Quft fteUte ber ©ro^e ben i^eljenmut
Sntgcgen ber ftiirmenben ^lut:
„53cfriebigt mein 33Iut end), fo ne'^mt e§ unb lebt!
^od^ bi§ nod) ein ein^ige^ tnal
^ie ©onne bem traurigen Often entfc^mebt,
3Sergonnt mir hm fcgnenben ©tra^I.
„33eleud^tet ber ^O^orgen fein rettenb ©eftab'^
©0 biet' id) bem Xobe mid) gern.
53i5 bal^in Derfolgt nod) h^n mutigen ^fob
Unb trauet ber §ilfe bc§ §errn!"
®ie SBiirbe be§ §elben, fein ru^iger ^M,
^efiegte nod^ einmal bie 2But.
Sie n)i(^en bom §aupte be§ ^elben juriid
Unb fd)onten fein !f)eilige§ Slut.
„5Bo:^Ian benn: c§ fei noc^! ^od) ^ebt fid^ ber ^itaf)l
Unb jeigt un§ fein rettenbeS Sanb,
eo fiel^ft bu bie (Sonne ^um le^tenmal!
80 jitt're ber ftrafenben §Qnb!"
©efc^Ioffen mar alfo ber eifcrne ^unb;
®ic 8d^redlid)en fe()rten juriicf.
©.§ i^ut^ ber Icud)tenbe ^JJJorgen un§ funb^
®e§ {)errlid^en '2)ulber§ ®e)d)id!
^ie ©onne fanf, ber ©d)immer^ mid),
®e§ $)elben Sruft marb fd)mer;
^er l^iel burd^raufdjte fd)auerli(^
2)a§ meitc, miifte 53^eer.
®ie (Sterne jogen ftill l^ermif,
®od) a^\ fein $)offnung§ftern !
Unb t»on be§ ©d^iffe§ obem Sauf
53Iieb Canb unb 3fiettung fern.
1) to rush in 2) dying, hopeless. 3) dissembling. 4) coast.
5) Let the . . . morning inform, tell us. 6) daylight.
438 A. few specimens of German poetical literature.
Seiu treuc§ gcrnro'^r in ber §nnb,
•2)10 33ru[t t)o(I ©ram, burd)roai'{)t,
%\d) 2Beftcn blidcnb unDenuanbt ^
®cr §elb bie biift'rc 9(ad}t.
„^Iqc^ 2Be[ten, o nad) 5Bc[tcn f)iit
53cfliiglc bic^, mein ^icl!
®ic^ grii^t nod) ftcrbenb ^crj unb Sinn,
®u, mciner ©e^nfud^t 3i«l'.
„®Dcf) milb, ®ott, t)on §immcI§^ot)'n
33Ii(!' auf mein 53ol! f)era6,
2q^ fie nid)t troftIo§ unterge^'n
Sm milbcn glutengrab!"
So ipxad) bcr §)elb, Don 5J?itIeib mcid^^.
®a, !^or(^! tpeld)' eiliger jtritt!
„'^oii) einmtti, i^^ernanbo, |o triib unb bleie^?
2Ba§ bringt bein bebenber ©c^ritt?"
„^ld^, ebler ^^elb^err, e§ i]"t ge)d^el)'n!
Sc|t ^cbt fid) ber oft(id)e ©tra()I!" -
„Sci ru^ig, mein Sieber, auf ^immlifdien §o^'n
Sntf|)ringt bcr belebenbe ©tra^I;
e§ mdtet^ bie ^Iflmad)! Don $oI ju ^ol.
Wit Ien!t fie jum Xobe bie ^-Babn." —
,;8eb' iDO^I benn, mein (^elbl)err! 2eb' eroig tt)O^I!
3^d^ pre bie ©d)re(flid)en na{)'n!"
Unb e^' nod) bem 9iitter ha^ 2Bort entflo^'n,
®a brdngte bie DJicnge fid) nacb;
®a ftromten bie ^rieger, bie loiitcnbcn, fc^on
©ieic^ SSogen in§ ftifle ©emnd).
,,3cb liJciJ, tDa§ \t)x forbcrt, id) bin bereit:
3>a, iDcrft mid) in§ fd)dumcnbe ^Jh^er!
*2)Dd) Joiffet, ha^ rettenbe 3'^^ if^ "ii"t)^ ^ocit.
®ott fd)u^e bid), irrenbe^^ ^^eer!"
^umpf'^ flirrten bie ©d)merter; ein miifteS ©cfd^rci
©rfiillte mit ©rnucn'* bie Suft;
^tx (5b(c bereitetc ftifl fid) unb frei
3um 2®ege ber flutcnben ©ruft.
©eloft*^ mar nun jebc§ gebeiligtc '^anb;
©d)on fab fid) jum id)iDinbclnbcn 'Jianb
®er trcfflid)e giibrer gcriffen — unb: 2anb!
Sanb! rief e§, unb bonncrt' e§: 2anb!
1) staringly, steadfastly gazing. 2) moved. 3) to rule. —
4) dully. 5) frigiit. 6) loosened, broken.
A few specimens of German poetical literature. 439
^in glan^enber Streifen, mit $urpur gemolt,
©rfd^icn bem bepgclten Wid-,
55om ©olbe ber fleigenben ©onnc beftra^It
gr^ob fid) ba§ trinfenbe^ @liic!:
2Bo§ !aum no^ gea^net^ ber jagenbc ©inn,
2Bn§ mutDoU ber ©rofee geba^t, —
@ie ftiirjen ju ^iifeen bem §errlic^en f)'m,
Unb pm]cn bie gottlid^e fi^ad^t.
Suifc SBrad^mann. f 1822.
1) beckoning. 2) to foresee, anticipate.
4. fie^r::®ebtc^te.
1. Pie lloffnung.
@§ reben unb trdumen^ bie 5JJenfrf)en biel
53on befjern fiinft'gen Sagen;
5^Q(^ einem gliirflic^en, golbenen !^kP
8ie'^t man fie rennen unb jagen.
®te 2GSeIt mirb alt unb toirb raieber jung,
^od) ber OJlenfc^ ^offt immer 33erbefferung.
®ie §offnung fii^rt i^n tn§ Seben ein,
©le umfiattert^ ben fro^Ucf)en ^noben,
^en ^iingling begeiftert i'^r 3•^ll^^^f<^^i^l^
granfreid;^ 9Ql)nen!
®oc^ meine ga^ne fe{)' id) nid;t. — 2Bo ift fie?
9?id)t o^ne meine ^^a^ne barf id) fommen;
53on meinem 5D^eifter marb fie mir Dcrtraut;
S3or feinem Stl^ron muj^ \d) fie nieberlegen;
^d) barf fie jeigen, benn id) trug fie treu.
^ 5 n i g (mit abfleroanWem ®e|\(^t).
©ebt i^r bic gatinc!
CDlan xt'\si)\ jie i^r. ©ie ftff)t gnnj frei aufgcrirfrtet, bie ^aifttc in brr 0cmb; btr ^timmet
ift Bon finem rofigm ©d^ciii bcleu^ttt.)
Printed by Jnlins 6roo« »t HeldelbMg.
A LIST
EDUCATIONAL W0EK8
for the Study of Foreign Languages
by Dr. EMIL OTTO and on the Plan of his Conversation-System.
FIRST GERMAN BOOK
containing
Introductory Lessons to the Study of the German Language ;
with Reading-lessons, a Vocabulary, and Select Phrases
for German Conversation
by
Dr. Emil Otto,
Professor of Modern Languages; Lecturer at tlie "University of Heidelberg.
8. Boards. New Ed. Price: 1 Mk. 60 Pf.
An Elementary Grammar
of the
(jennan Language
combined with
Exercises, Readings and Conversations
by
Dr. Emil Otto.
8. Boards. New Ed. Price: 2 Mk.
German Conversation-Grammar.
A New and Practical Method of Learning the German Language,
by
Dr. Emil Otto.
8. Cloth. New Ed. Price: 5 Mk.
Key to Dr. E. Otto's
German Conversation-Grammar.
8. Boards. New Ed. Price: 1 Mk. 60 Pf.
Supplementary Exercises
to the
Oerman Conversation-Grammar
by
Dr. Emil Otto.
8. Boards. Price: 1 Mk. 60 Pf
German-Eng'lish Conversations
(Deutsche Conversatioiis-Scliiile).
A new methodical Guide
for
learning to speak German
by
Dr. Emil Otto.
8. Boards. New Ed. Price: 1 Mk. 60 Pf.
The German Reader.
First Part.
Anecdotes, Fables, Descriptions, Stories and Tales,
with Explanatory Notes and a Vocabulary
by
Dr. Emil Otto.
8. Boards. New Ed. Price: 2 Mk. 40 Pf.
The German Reader.
Second Part.
Select Readings in German Literature
with Notes and a Vocabulary
by
Dr. Emil Otto.
8. Boards. New Ed. Price: 2 Mk. 40 Pf.
The German Reader.
Third Part.
Select German Comedies
with Explanatory Notes and a Vocabulary
by
Dr. Ernil Otto.
8. Boards. New Ed. Price: 2 Mk. 40 Pf.
Materials for translating English into German
with Grammatical Notes and a Vocabulary,
by
Dr. Emil Otto.
First Part.
8. Boards. New Ed. Price : 2 Mk. 40 Pf.
KEY to these ^Materials",
8. Boards. New. Ed. Price: 1 Mk. 60 Pf.
Materials for translating English into German
with Words and Explanatory Notes.
Second Part.
containing
a Series of English Conversations on various Subjects,
adapted for Translation into German.
by
Dr. Emil Otto.
8. Boards. New. Ed. Price: 2 Mk. 40 Pf.
French Conversation-Grammar
a
New and Practical Method of Learni ng the French Lang aage
by
Dr. Emil Otto.
8. Cloth. New Ed. Price: 5 Mk.
Key to Dr. E. otto's
French Conversation-Grammar.
8. Boards. New Ed. Price: 1 Mk. 60 Pf.
Materials for Translating Eng'lish into French
with Grammatical Notes and a Vocabulary
by
Dr. Emil Otto.
8. Boards, New Ed. Price: 2 Mk. 40 Pf.
Italian Conversation-Grammar.
A New and Practical Method of Leaniing the Italian Language,
by
C. M. Sauer.
8. Cloth. New Ed. Price: 5 Mk.
Key to Prof. C. M. Sauer's
Italian Conversation- Grammar.
8. Boards. New Ed. Price: 1 Mk. 60 Pf.
Spanish Conversation -Grammar
by
C. M. Sauer.
8. Cloth. New E«i. Price: 5 Mk,
Key to Prof. C. M. Saiier»g
Spanish Conversation- Grammar.
8. Boards. New Ed. Price: 1 Mk. 60 Pf.
OUTRAGES
pour
renseignement des langues etrangeres
par JEmUe Otto et d'apres sa methode.
Nouvelle Grammaire allemande.
Contenant
outre les principales regies de la langue allemande, des
Themes, des Lectures et des Conversations, d'apres
une methode a la fois theorique et pratique
par Emile Otto,
Docteur en phil. et Professeur de langues a I'universite d'Heidelberg.
8. reliee. Nouvelle edit, Prix: 4 Mk.
Corrige des Themes
de la
Grammaire allemande
par Emile Otto.
8. cartonne. Nouvelle edit. Prix: 1 Mk. 60 Pf.
Petite Grammaire allemande abregee,
a I'usage des commen^ants
par Emile Otto.
8. cartonne. Nouvelle edit. Prix: 2 Mk.
Lectures allemandes.
1. partie.
Petit Eecneil de versions allemandes
contenant
anecdotes, descriptions, fables, traits de caractere,
paranoics, historiettes, contes moraux et poesies,
accompagnees de notes expiioatives et d'un Vocabulaire,
par Emile Otto.
8. carton. Nouvelle edit. Prix: 2 Mk. 40 Pf.
Lectures allemandes.
2, partie.
Second Recueil
de
Versions allemandes,
accompagn^es de notes explicatives et d*uii Vocabulaire,
par Emile Otto.
8. carton. Nouvelle edit. Prix: 2 Mk. 40 Pf.
Lectures allemaudes.
3. partie.
Choix de Comedies allemandes
accompagnees de notes explicatives et d'un Vocabulaire
par Emile Otto.
8. carton. Prix: 2 Mk. 40 Pf.
Conyersations allemaudes.
Nouveau guide methodique
pour apprendrc
«t parler allemaii:«.-*
.--»-Ij*t-3jt^%
'^4Ki